[Electrical Communication Systems Equipment]
[From the U.S. Government Publishing Office, www.gpo.gov]
NON-CIRCULATING
ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
WAR DEPARTMENT • 2 OCTOBER 1944
WuaSI /I-
Document '— r-* A t~ 't' C [~ AA '—1 J
ReSerVS Vj n // J I
J lMJ [] U []
WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
W A R
DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
T M
11-487
ELECTRICAL
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
WAR DEPARTMENT
2 OCTOBER
19 4 4
United States Government Printing Office
Washington : 1946
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 2 OCTOBER 1944.
IM 11-487, Electrical Communication Systems Equipment, is published for the information and guidance of all concerned.
[A. G. 300.7 (12 Sep 44).]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
OFFICIAL:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutarit General.
DISTRIBUTION:
IBn 1, 11 (3); IC 5, 11, 55 (6).
(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21—6.)
TABLE OP CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 1 - PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Purpose 101 1
Scope 102 1
References to Other Manuals 103 1
Ordering of War Department Publications 104 1
CHAPTER 2 - ILLUSTRATIVE. PROBLEMS
Section I General
Introduction 201 3
Section II Problems Illustrating Systems Planning General 202 3
Problem 1 - Spiral-four System 203 3
Diagram of Communication System Snploying Spiral-four Cable,Carrier Telephone, Telegraph and Associated Equipment 204 5
Summary of Equipment for Telephone and Telegraph Systems Illustrated in Paragraph 204 205 6
Problem 2 - Four-channel Radio Relay Carrier Communication System 206 7
Diagram of Four—channel Radio Relay Carrier Communication System 207 8
Summary of Equipment for Four-channel Radio System Illustrated in Paragraph 207 208 9
Problem 3 - Tactical Open Wire Carrier Telephone and Telegraph System 209 10
Diagram of Open Wire Carrier Telephone and Telegraph System 210 11
Summary of Equipment for Open Wire Carrier Telephone and Telegraph System Illustrated in Paragraph 210 211 12
Problem 4 - Fixed Plant Open Wire Communication System 212 14
Diagram of Fixed Plant Open Wire Communinat1on System 213 15
Summary of Packaged Equipment for Fixed Plant Open-Wire Communication System Illustrated in Paragraph 213 214 17
Problem 5 - Interconnection of D-C Telegraph Circuits at Junction of Fixed Plant and Tactical Carrier Systems 215 18
Diagram of Interconnection of D-C Telegraph Circuits at Junction of Fixed Plant and Tactical Carrier System 216 19
Summary of Telegraph Equipment for Problem Illustrated in Paragraph 216 (See paragraphs 1011, 1028 and 1315) 217 20
Problem 6 - Fixed Plant Multiple Switchboard 218 20
Plan for Fixed Plant Common Battery, Multiple Switchboard 219 21
Sample Switchboard Order 220 21
Estimate of Weights and Volumes of Central Office Equipment 221 22
Section III Telephone System Comparisons General 222 22
Comparison of Means of Obtaining Four, or Sixteen, Telephone Circuits 223 22
Comparison of Means of Obtaining Four Telephone Circuits - 100 Miles 224 23
Comparison of Means of Obtaining 16 Telephone Circuits - 100 Miles 225 24
Equipment for 100-Mile Four-channel Radio System Assumed in Paragraph 224 226 24
III
Paragraph Page
Wire Systems Summary of Material Requirements for 100- 227 25
Mile Tactical Carrier Systems Using Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 228 26
Summary of Material Requirements for 300-
Mile Systems Using Fixed Plant Open Wire
Lines and Equipment 229 27
CHAPTER 3 - TELEPHONE STATION EQUIPMENT
Section I General
Scope 301 29
Section II Microphones and Receivers 29
General Microphones (Telephone Transmitters) Microphones - Description and Stock Numbers Microphone Response Frequency Characteristics Telephone Receivers Receivers - Description and Stock Numbers Telephone Receiver Response Frequency 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
29 30 35 36 36 37
Characteristics
Section III Telephone Sets 309 37
General
Headsets - Description and Stock Numbers Head and Chest Sets - Description and 310 38 44
Stock Numbers 311
Chest Sets - Description and Stock Numbers 312 45
Handsets - Description and Stock Numbers 313 46
Section IV Telephones 314
General 47
Telephones - Description and Stock Numbers 315 47
Section V Loudspeakers 316 49
General
Loudspeakers - Description and Stock Numbers 317 49
CHAPTER 4 - TELEPHONE CENTRALS
Section I General Description 401
General 51
Telephone Switchboard Fundamental Features 402 51
Switchboard Working Limits 403 51
Testboards and Test Cabinets 404 51
Monitoring, Observing and Recording Facilities 405 51
Section II Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central J
Office Sets 406 52
Adapter Plug U-4/GT
Magneto Switchboards 407 52
Combined Magneto and Common Battery Switchboards Lengths of Station Line Wire and Cable for 408 52
Various Switchboard Transmission and Working Limits 409 53
Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central Office Sets - Equipment Data Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central ' 410 54 62
Office Sets - Description 411
Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central Office Sets - Working Limits in Ohms Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central 412 65
Office Sets - Transmission Losses in DB at 1000 Cycles 413 66
Tactical Telephone Switchboard and Central
Office Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data ; 414 66
IV
Paragraph Page
Section III Fixed Plant Telephone Switchboards
General Single Position Switchboards 415 416 67 67
Multiple Switchboards Fixed Plant Single Position Telephone 417 67
Switchboards - Equipment Data Fixed Plant Single Position Telephone 418 69
Switchboards - Description Fixed Plant, Single Position Telephone 419 74
Switchboards - Working Limits in Ohms Fixed Plant, Single Position Telephone 420 77
Switchboards - Transmission Losses in DB at 1000 Cycles 421 78
Fixed Plant, Single Position Telephone
Switchboards and Associated Equipment -Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 422 78
Fixed Plant Multiple Telephone Switchboards -
Equipment Data Fixed Plant Multiple Telephone Switchboards - 423 79
Description Fixed Plant Multiple Telephone Switchboards - 424 89
Working Limits in Ohms Fixed Plant Multiple Telephone Switchboards - 425 91
Transmission Losses in DB at 1000 Cycles Fixed Plant Multiple Telephone Switchboards 426 91
Section IV and Associated Equipment - Logistical Data 427 92
Test Cabinets and Testboards
General 428 92
Test Cabinets and Testboards - Description Test Cabinets, and Testboards - 429 93
Section V Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 430 96
Monitoring, Observing and Recording Facilities
General 431 97
Monitoring, Observing, and Recording Facilities
Description 432 98
Monitoring, Observing, and Recording Facilities
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 433 102
CHAPTER 5 - PORTABLE AWS INFORMATION CENTERS
General 501 103
Types of Equipment AWS Information Centers — Description AWS Information Centers - stock Numbers and 502 503 103 103
Logistical Data 504 108
CHAPTER 6 - WIRE AND CABLE AND
CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION
Section I General
Introduction 601 109
Section II Open Wire Lines
General Storm Loading Bare Wires and Wire Messenger - Physical 602 603 109 109
Data and Stock Numbers 604 110
Transmission Data on Open Wire Lines Materials for Construction of Tactical 605 111
Open Wire Lines with 4x4 Lumber Supports 150-foot Spans, Light Storm Loading Areas 606 112
Materials for Construction of Tactical Open
Wire Lines with Round Poles, 150-foot Spans Heavy Storm Loading Areas 607 113
V
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Co nt • d. )
Paragraph Page
Materials for Construction of Tactical
Open Wire Lines with Round Poles, 200-foot Spans, Medium Storm Loading Areas 608 114
Materials for Construction of Open Wire
Lines for Fixed Plant, 150-root Spans, All Storm Loading Areas 609 115
Open Wire Lines - Shipping Data 610 116
Section III Field Wires and Field Cables
General 611 117
Spiral Four with Messenger Support 612 117
Long Range Tactical Wire W-143 Field Wires and Cables - Physical Data and 613 614 117
Stock Numbers Transmission Data on Rubber-insulated Wire 118
and Cables Materials for Construction of Spiral-four 615 121 122
Cable Lines 616
Spiral-four Cable Lines - Shipping Data 617 123
Section IV Lead-covered Cables and Loading 123
General Lead-covered Cables - Physical Data and Stock 618
123
Numbers Voice Frequency Lead-covered Cable Loading 619
125
Equipment - Description Loading Equipment for Voice-Frequency Cable 620
127
Circuits - Stock Numbersand Logistical Data 621
Mounting Hardware for Loading Coil Cases 622 127
Transmission Data on Lead-covered Cables Materials for Construction of Aerial Cable 623 127
Lines - 150-foot Spans - All Storm Loading Areas 624 128
Lead Sleeves for Straight Splices 625 130
Lead Sleeves for Bridge Splices 626 131
Materials for Splicing Lead-covered Cables 627 132
Section V Construction Time and Information on Poles
General 628 133
Estimated Time Required for Work Operations 629 133
Rates of Field Wire Construction 630 134
Dimensions of Round Poles (American Standard) 631 135
Weights of Round Poles (American Standard) Dimensions and Weights of 2 x 4 and 4x4 632 136
Lumber Supports (American Standard) 633 136
Section VI Construction Equipment, Vehicles and Tools
General Wire and Cable Placing and Recovering 634 136
Equipment - Description and Stock Numbers Special Purpose Trucks and Trailers for Line 635 137
Construction and Maintenance 636 141
Line Construction Tool Equipment 637 144
Lead-covered Cable Splicer’s Tool Equipment Vulcanizing Equipment for Rubber-covered 638 145
Cables 639 145
Line Survey Tools and Materials 640 145
Section VII Submarine Cable
Submarine Cable for Tactical Use 641 145
Submarine Cable for Fixed Plant Submarine Cables - Physical Data and Stock 642 146
Numbers 643 146
VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Co nt»d. )
CHAPTER 7 - EUROPEAN AND UNITED STATES CABLES AND LOADING SYSTEMS Paragraph Page
Section I Coil Loaded Lead-covered Cables
Introduction 701 147
European Cable Loading Systems - Scope 702 147
European Cable Loading Systems - Data Typical European Loaded Cables - Approximate 703 147
1000-cycle Loss per Mile (1608 Meters) vs Nominal Impedance 704 148
Type of Coil Loaded Cable Circuits in
International Telephone Facilities 705 149
C.C.I.F. Standard Loading Systems Loading Systems for Repeater Sections in 706 155
International Telephone Circuits 707 155
United States Loading Systems Loading Systems Commonly used in the United 708 156
States of America Lead-covered Entrance and Intermediate Cables 709 157
in Open Wire Lines Commonly Used in the United States of America 710 158
Section II Existing Submarine (Undersea) Cables
General 711 159
Paper-insulated Telephone Cables Paper-insulated Quadded Submarine Cables - 712 159
British Isles Loaded Paper-insulated Spiral-four Submarine 713 159
Cables - German-made 714 160
Gutta-Percha, Balata, Paragutta and Rubber-insulated Telephone Cables Loaded Multicore Gutta-Percha Submarine 715 161
Cables 716 163
Telegraph Cables 717 163
European Cable Map 718 163
CHAPTER 8 - ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
General 801 165
Protector Blocks - Description and Stock Numbers Fuses for Telephone Lines - Description and 802 165
Stock Numbers 803 166
Heat Coils - Description and Stock Numbers Telephone Protectors for One Pair of Wire - 804 167
Description and Stock Numbers Terminals for Protecting Small Switchboards and 805 167
Telephones Served by Lead-covered Cables -Description 806 170
Terminals for Protecting Small Switchboards and
Telephones Served by Lead-covered Cables -Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 807 171
Cable Protectors - Description and Stock Numbers Cable Terminals with Protection - Pole Mounted - 808 172
Description Cable Terminals with Protection - Pole Mounted - 809 173
Stock Numbersand Logistical Data Main Frame Protection for Larger Switchboards - 810 174
Description Main Frame Protection for Larger Switchboards - 811 175
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 812 176
Vll
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Co nt * d.)
CHAPTER 9 - TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT Paragraph Page
Section I General
Scope and Use 901 177
Section II Tactical Equipment
General 902 177
Descriptive Information 903 177
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 904 177
Summary of Equipment Requirements Voice Frequency Repeaters and Misc. 905 177 178
Equipment - Tactical - Description Voice Frequency Ringing Equipment - 906
181
Tactical - Description Carrier Telephone Equipment - Tactical - 907
183
Description Telephone Line Transmission Sets - Tactical - 908
188
Component Parts 909
Telephone Line Transmission Equipment - Tactical - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data Summary of Equipment Required for 4-Wire 910 189
Carrier Operation over Spiral-four Cable or Open Wire 911 190
Summary of Equipment Required for 2-Wire
Carrier Operation over Open Wire Using Converter CF-4-( ) 912 190
Summary of Equipment Required for 2-Wire
Carrier Operation over Open Wire Using Carrier Hybrid CF-7 913 190
Section III Fixed Plant Equipment
General 914 191
Descriptive Information Stock Numbers and Logistical Data Voice Frequency Telephone Equipment - Fixed 915 916 917 191 191 192
Plant - Description Voice Frequency Ringing Equipment - Fixed
918 195
Plant - Description Carrier Telephone Equipment - Fixed Plant -
919 197
Description
Apparatus Cabinets for Telephone Line Transmission Equipment - Fixed Plant - Description Telephone Line Transmission Equipment - Fixed 920 202
921 203
Plant - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data
Selection of Equipment Selection of Packaged Telephone Transmission 922 204
Equipment - Fixed Plant - Equipment Required per Circuit 923 205
Selection of Telephone Line Transmission
Equipment - Fixed Plant - Common Equipment Required per Office 924 207
Examples of Use of Packaged Equipment H Carrier Packaged Equipment on a Single Open Wire Pair C Carrier Packaged Equipment on a Single Open Wire Pair C and H Carrier Packaged Equipment on Two 925 926 209 210
927 211
928 212
Open Wire Pairs
CHAPTER 10 - TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT
Section I General
Introduction 1001 215
Section II Telegraph and Teletypewriter Tactical Equipment
General 1002 215
Descriptive Information 1003 215
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1004 215
Illustrations 1005 215
D-c Wire Telegraph Equipment - Tactical -
Description 1006 216
VIII
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Co n t * d. )
Section III
Section IV
Paragraph Page
Carrier Telegraph Equipment - Tactical -Description 1007 220
Teletypewriter Equipment - Tactical -Description 1008 222
Teletypewriter Sets - Tactical - Component Parts 1009 224
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Equipment -Tactical - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data \ 1010 227
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Sets - Tactical -Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1011 228
Point-to-Point Teletypewriter Circuit (Neutra*l Line Transmission)-Tactical Equipment 1012 230
Diagram of a Point-to-Point Tactical Teletypewriter Circuit (Neutral Line Transmission) 1013 230
Point-to-Point Teletypewriter Circuit (Polarential and Two-Path Polar Line Transmission) - Tactical Equipment 1014 230
Diagram of a Point-to-Point Tactical Teletypewriter Circuit (Polarential and Two-Path Polar Line Transmission) - Tactical Equipment 1015 231
Teletypewriter Switching Network - Tactical Equipment 1016 231
Diagram of a Teletypewriter Switching Network -Tactical Equipment 1017 232
D-c Loop Connections for Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B (Carrier) - Tactical Equipment 1018 232
Diagram of Connections for D-c Loops of Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B (Carrier) -Tactical Equipment 1019 233
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Fixed Plant Equipment General 1020 233
Descriptive Information 1021 233
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1022 233
Illustrations 1023 233
D-c Wire Telegraph Equipment - Fixed Plant -Description 1024 234
Carrier Telegraph Equipment - Fixed Plant -Description 1025 236
Teletypewriter and Automatic Morse Code Equipment - Fixed Plant - Description 1026 238
Radioteletype Terminal and Associated Signal Center Teletypewriter Equipment - Fixed Plant - Description 1027 242
Telegraph, Teletypewriter and Automatic Morse Code Equipment - Fixed Plant -Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1028 245
Packaged Telegraph Equipment on Open Wire Lines - Fixed Plant 1029 246
Diagram of Packaged Telegraph Equipment on Open Wire Lines 1030 247
Radioteletype Terminal and Signal Center 1031 248
Diagram of a Radioteletype Terminal and Signal Center 1032 248
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Testing Equipment, Tool Equipment and Teletypewriter Supplies General 1033 248
Teletypewriter Supplies - Tactical and Fixed Plant - Description and Stock Numbers 1034 248
IX
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Coat’d.)
Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 11 - FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT
General 1101 251
Tape Facsimile Equipment RC-58-B 1102 251
Facsimile Equipment RC-120 1103 251
Facsimile Set AN/TXC-1 1104 251
Facsimile Equipment - Description Facsimile Equipment - Stock Numbers and 1105 252
Logistical Data 1106 257
Expendable Supplies 1107 257
CHAPTER 12 - POWER EQUIPMENT
Section I General
Scope and Use 1201 259
Section II Engine Driven Generator Sets
General Description of Tactical Engine Generator 1202 259
Sets 1203 259
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data for Tactical Engine Generator Sets Description of Fixed Plant Engine 1204 259
Generator Sets Stock Numbers and Logistical Data for 1205 259
Fixed Plant Engine Generator Sets 1206 259
Engine Generator Sets - Tactical -Description Engine Generator Sets - Tactical - 1207 260
Arranged by Capacities Engine Generator Sets - Tactical - Stock 1208 264
Numbers and Logistical Data Engine Generator Sets - Fixed Plant - 1209 265
Description Engine Generator Sets - Fixed Plant - 1210 266
Arranged by Capacities Engine Generator Sets - Fixed Plant - Stock 1211 273
Numbers and Logistical Data 1212 273
Section III Rectifiers
General 1213 274
Rectifiers - Description Rectifiers - Stock Numbers and Logistical 1214 275
Data 1215 281
Section IV Power Ringing Units
General 1216 284
Ringing Equipment - Description Ringing Equipment - Stock Numbers and 1217 284
Logistical Data 1218 287
Section V Batteries
Lead Storage Batteries 1219 287
Dry Batteries 1220 287
Lead Storage Batteries - Description Lead Storage Batteries - Stock Numbers 1221 289
and Logistical Data 1222 294
Electrolyte (Sulphuric Acid) 1223 294
Battery Terminal Adapter 1224 294
Dry Batteries - Description - Single Unit Types Dry Batteries - Description - Multiple Unit 1225 295
Types Dry Batteries - Stock Numbers and Commercial 1226 297
Equivalents 1227 300
X
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Coat’d.)
Paragraph
Page
Section VI Commercial Power Services General Distribution Power Distribution Data - Foreign Countries and Cities Power Distribution Data for Canada - Breakdown by Provinces (McGraw Central Station Directory - 1938) Power Distribution Data for Alaska -Breakdown by Cities CHAPTER 13 - MAINTENANCE SUPPLIES 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232
Section I General Scope 1301
Section II Maintenance System of Maintenance Maintenance Parts - Supply Plan Signal Supply Catalogs Relationship of Signal Supply Catalog to Supply Plan 1302 1303 1304 1305
Section III Maintenance Equipments General Description and Stock Numbers Maintenance Equipments - Description Maintenance Equipments - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1306 1307 1308 1309
Section IV Tool Equipments General Tool Equipments and Tool Sets - Description Tool Equipments - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1310 1311 1312
Section V Test Equipments General Test Equipments and Test Packages - Description Test Equipments - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1313 1314 1315
Section VI Test Sets General Test Sets and Test Instruments - Description Test Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1316 1317 1318
Section VII Cross Reference Data General Cross Reference Table of Maintenance, Tool and Test Equipments, and Test Sets CHAPTER 14 - RADIO EQUIPMENT 1319 1320
Section I General Introduction Photographs 1401 1402
Section II Tactical Radio Sets for Ground. Use General Radio Sets - Description Frequency Range Chart Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data Remote Control Equipment Radio Sets for Ground Use - Tactical -Descriptive and Technical Data Frequency Coverage of Tactical Radio Sets for Ground Use Ground, Transportable Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data - Tactical Vehicular Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data - Tactical Pack Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data - Tactical 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412
304
304
304
311
311
313
313
315
315
316
318
318
319
329
330
331
337
337
338
341
341
342
361
362
362
369
369
369
369
370
370
370
372
428
430
430
431
XI
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont’d.)
Section III
Section IV
Paragraph
Air Transportable Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data - Tactical 1413 431
Ground, Mobile Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data - Tactical 1414 431
Remote Control Equipment for Radio Sets -Tactical - Description 1415 432
Remote Control Equipment - Tactical - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1416 440
Fixed plant Radio Equipment General 1417 440
Command Radio Sets - Description 1418 440
Command Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1419 441
Airways Section Radio Sets - Description 1420 441
Airways Section Radio Sets - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1421 441
Transmitting Equipment Commonly Used by Command Radio - Army Communication Service - Description 1422 442
Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Command Radio - Array Communication Service -Description 1423 450
Transmitting Equipment Commonly Used by Command Radio-Army Communications Service - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1424 452
Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Command Radio-Army Communications Service - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1425 452
Transmitting Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Army Communications Service -Description 1426 453
Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Army Communications Service -Description 1427 470
Combined Transmitting and Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Army Communications Service - Description 1428 476
Transmitting Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Aimy Communications Service - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1429 486
Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Army Communications Service - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1430 488
Combined Transmitting and Receiving Equipment Commonly Used by Airways Section - Army Communications Service - Stock Numbers and Logistical Data 1431 489
Antennas and Associated Equipment General 1432 489
Antenna Kits - Tactical 1433 490
Wire Used for Antenna Equipment - Tactical 1434 491
Coaxial Cables for Radio Frequency Transmission Lines 1435 492
Mast Assemblies for Supporting Antennas - Tactical 1436 494
Mast Sections for Antenna Supports 1437 494
Metallic Mast Sections for Vertical Radiators for Ground Use 1438 494
Metallic Mast Sections for Vehicular Radiators 1439 495
Accessories Used in Constructing Tactical Antennas 1440 495
Antenna Kits - Fixed Plant 1441 496
Antenna Coupling Unit 1442 497
Base Insulated Towers Used as Vertical Radiators -Fixed Plant 1443 497
Towers for Supporting Antennas - Fixed Plant 1444 498
Ground System for Radio Towers - Fixed Plant 1445 499
Tower Lighting Equipment - Fixed Plant 1446 500
501
Index
XII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
Page
Handset TS-9-( )
Microphone T-17
Microphone T- 30-( )
Microphone T-34-A
Microphone T-44-( )
Microphone T-45
Microphone T-50-( )
Microphone ANB-M-C1
Handset TS-10
Headset P-11
Headset P-16
Headset HS-20
Headset HS-23-( )
Headset HS-24 Headset HS-30-( )
Headset HS-30-( Headset HS-33-( Headset HS-38 ). Cording Arrangements )
Head and Chest Set HS-17-A
Head and Chest Chest Set TD-1 Chest Set TD-3 Chest Set TD-4 Set HS-19
Telephone EE-8-( )
Telephone Box EE-91
Telephone TP-6
Loudspeaker LS-3
Loudspeaker LS-7
Adapter Plug U-4/GT
Switchboard BD-9
Switchboard BD-11
Switchboard BD-14
Switchboard BD-71
Switchboard BD-72
Switchboard SB-5( )/PT
Two Telephone Central Office Sets TC-2 (Assembled)
Telephone Central Office Set TC-4
Telephone Central Office Set TC-12
Telephone Central Office Set TC-1 (Assembled)
Telephone Central Office Set TC-10 (Assembled)
Telephone Central Office Set TC-20
No. 506B Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
No. 550SC Switchboard (Modified) (Western Electric Co.)
No. 551B (Special per X-66070) Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
No. 551B Switchboard (Modified) (Western Electric Co.)
G1 Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
No. 45JR Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.)
K100 Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.)
No. 150E Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.)
Magneto Switchboard (Stromberg-Carlson Co.)
No. 106 Switchboard (Stromberg-Carlson Co.)
No. 1000 Switchboard - Floor Plan (North Electric Manufacturing Co.)
No. 6-800 Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.)
No. 119 Switchboard - Floor Plan (Automatic Electric Co.)
No. 12 Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
* No. 12 Switchboard - Floor Plan (Western Electric Co.)
No. 605A Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
No. 605A Switchboard - Floor Plan (Western
Electric Co.)
No. 15 Switchboard (Stromberg-Carlson Co.)
No. 1600 Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard &
Supply Co.)
30
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
45
48
48
48
49
49
52
55
55
55
55
55
56
56
57
58
59
60
6x
70
70
70
71
71
71
72
72
73
73
81
81
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
XIII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Coat’d.)
Figure
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
501
502
503
504
505
506
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
701
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
Page
No. 12-1600 Switchboard (Kellogg Switchboard &
Supply Co.)
No. 18 Switchboard (Stromberg-Carlson Co.)
No. 2800 Switchboard - Floor Plan (Kellogg Switchboard
& Supply Co.)
No. 11 Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
No. 11 Switchboard - Floor Plan (Western Electric Co.)
Cabinet BE-70-( )
Mobile Test Unit X-63699A
Test and Control Board per X-66034A or X-66034B
Toll Line Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100
Toll Line Patching Cabinet ADW-BM-100
Multiline Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100
Five-Line Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100
Recorder (Amertype Recordgraph Co. "Commando"
Model A)
Information Center System SCS-5
Information Center System SCS-5-( ). (Typical Frames)
Operations Center AN/TTQ-1
Operations Center AN/TTQ-1. Equipment Packed in
Truck
Operations Center AN/TTQ-1. Equipment Mounted in
Trucks as Mobile Tactical Control Center
Control Set SCR-572-A
Cable Assembly CC-345 on Reel DR-7
Cable Assembly CC-358 (Spiral-four Aerial
Construction)
Coil C-114-A (Loading Coil)
Loading Coil Case 204CG (Western Electric Co.)
Loading Coil Case 208A (Western Electric Co.)
Loading Coil Case 124C (Western Electric Co.)
Loading Coil Case 125A (Western Electric Co.)
Reel Equipment CE-11
Reel Cart RL-35 with 3 Reels DR-4
Reel DR-5
Ro61 DR—15
Reel Cart RL-16 with 2 Reels DR-4
Reel Unit RL-17
Reel Unit RL-26-A with Reels DR-5
Reel Unit RL-31-B
Plow LG-61
Trailer K-36
Trailer K-37
Trailer K-38 with Cable Splicer’s Tool Equipment
TE-56
Truck K-43
Truck K-44-B
European Cable Map
Telephone Protector Blocks (Cook)
Telephone Protector Blocks (Reliable)
Telephone Protector Blocks (Western Electric Co. 26 and27)
Fuses (Cook A-9 and A-12)
Fuses (Reliable 55 and 106)
Fuses (Western Electric Co. 11C, 7A, and 7T)
Fuses (Western Electric Co. 60D or 60E)
Heat Coil (Western Electric Co. 76A)
Telephone Protector (Cook B-13)
Telephone Protector (Cook 0-9)
Telephone Protector (Reliable 955)
Telephone Protector (Reliable 1000)
Telephone Protector (Western Electric Co. 984)
Telephone Protector (Western Electric Co. 1C 93A)
Terminals for Protecting Small Switchboards
(Western Electric Co. LC-26)
Terminal for Protecting Small Switchboards (Western Electric Co. LA-26)
86
86
87
88
88
95
95
95
100
100
101
101
101
105
106
106
107
107
107
120
120
120
126
126
126
126
138
138
138
138
139
139
139
140
140
141
141
142
143
143
164
165
165
165
166
166
166
166
167
167
168
168
168
168
169
171
171
XIV
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont’d.)
Figure
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1101
1102
1103
1104
Cable Protector (Cook 7)
Cable Protector (Reliable 222)
Cable Protector (Western Electric Co. 83A)
Cable Terminal with Protection (Western
Electric Co. EA26)
Cable Terminal with Protection (Western Electric Co. B Type)
Protected Main Distributing Frame (Wall Mounted) (Western Electric Co.)
Protected Main Distributing Frame (Floor Mounted) (Western Electric Co.)
Telephone Repeater EE-89-A
Telephone Repeater EE-99-A
Telephone TP-9
Repeating Coil C-161
Ringing Equipment EE-100- ( ) Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) Telephone Terminal CF-l-A Repeater CF-3-A
Converter CF-4-( )
Repeater CF-5-( )
Carrier Hybrid CF-7
Telephone Unit EE-105
Panel: Line Terminating and Simplex; Telephone X-61823H
Panel; Line Terminating and Composite; Telephone X-61823C
Repeater Package; Telephone; V.F. (Single) X-61821J Repeater Package; Telephone; V.F. (Triple) X-61821K Ringer Package; Voice Frequency; 4 Circuit X-61820A Ringer Package; Telephone; Voice Frequency TA-3/FT Terminal Package; Telephone; H Carrier X-66217A Repeater Package; Telephone;H Carrier X-66217B Panel: Line Filter and Balancing; Telephone X-66217C Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier X-61819P or R Repeater Package: Telephone; C Carrier X-61819S Line Unit BE-77-A or BE-77-B Repeater TG-30 (Terminal)
Repeater TG-31 (Intermediate) Switchboard BD-100
Telegraph Set TG-5-B
Telegraph Terminal CF-2-A
Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B
Telegraph Terminal CF-6-A Teletypewriter TG-7A Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-( ) Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3 Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A
Repeater Package: Telegraph; D.C. X-61824A
Repeater Package: Telegraph; Regenerative X-66031A Telegraph Switchboard SB-6-( )/GG
Telegraph Carrier Package: X-61822A or B
Telegraph Terminal TH-l/TCC-l
Teletypewriter Set Model 15 Teletypewriter Set Model 19 Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 Boehme Automatic Keying and Recording Equipment Radioteletype Terminal Equipment AN/FGC-1 Teletypewriter Subscriber Set 132A2 Transmitter-Distributor XD91 Oscillator Exciter 0-5/FR ' (Press Wireless FS12A Keyer)
Tape Facsimile Equipment RC-58-B
Facsimile Equipment RC-120
Facsimile Transceiver FX-l-B
Converter CV-2/TX
Page
172
172
172
173
174
176
176
179
179
180
180
182
182
185
185
186
186
187
187
193
193
194
194
196
196
199
200
200
201
201
217
218
218
219
219
221
221
221
223
223
226
226
235
235
235
237
237
240
240
240
241
243
243
243
244
255
256
256
256
XV
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont’ d. )
Figure Page
1201 Power Unit PE-75-D 262
1202 Power Unit PE-77-B 262
1203 Power Unit PE-95-( ) Part of Trailer K-52 262
1204 Power Unit PE-99-E 263
1205 Power Unit PE-108-A 263
1206 Power Unit PE-197 263
1207 Power Unit PE-201-B 263
1208 Power Unit PE-214-A 264
1209 Power Unit PE-214-B 264
1210 Power Unit PE-78-F 268
1211 Power Unit PE-79-F 268
1212 Power Unit PE-81-E 268
1213 Power Unit PE-85-F 268
1214 Power Unit PE-85-L 268
1215 Power Unit PE-85-M 268
1216 Power Unit PE-95-F 269
1217 Power Unit PE-142-C 269
1218 Power Unit PE-14 2-D 269
1219 Power Unit PE-142-E 269
1220 Power Unit PE-148-A 269
1221 Power Unit PE-167-A 269
1222 Power Unit PE-205-A or PE-207-A 27 0
1223 Power Unit PE-205-B 27 0
1224 Power Unit PE-215-A 27 0
1225 Power Unit PE-220-A or B 271
1226 Power Unit PE-235-A 271
1227 Power Unit PE-236-A 27 2
1228 Power Unit PU-19/FRC 272
1229 Engine Generator (Onan WSM-13) 27 2
1230 Engine Generator (Kohler 1M21A) 27 2
1231 Tungar Rectifier (G.E.Co. 3049455) 277
1232 Tungar Rectifier (G.E.Co. 6RB4B7) 277
1233 Tungar Rectifier (G.E.Co. 6RB33B2) 277
1234 Tungar Rectifier (G.E.Co. 6RB6B17) 278
1235 Tungar Rectifier (G.E.Co. 9X649) 278
1236 Rectifier RA-36-( ) 278
1237 1238 Grid Controlled Rectifier RA-43-( ) Copper Oxide Rectifier (Raytheon Mfg. Co. W-3155, W-1067, and W-2168A) 279 279
1239 Rectifier RA-37 280
1240 Rectifier RA-87 280
1241 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 280
1242 Interrupter (Western Electric Co. Types 84F or G) 285
1243 Telering (Telkor Model H) 285
1244 Converter M-222 286
1245 Subcycle Static Frequency Converter 286
1246 Battery BB-54 291
1247 Battery BB-29 291
1248 Battery BB-51 291
1249 Battery BB-55 292
1250 Battery BB-46 292
1251 Battery BB-50 293
1252 Battery BB-53 293
1253 Battery Terminal Adapter 294
1254 Dry Battery Terminal Arrangements 299
1301 1302 Echelons of Signal Repair - Theatre of Operations Flow of Supplies - Thru Depot Supply Channels and Thru Maintenance Repair 313 314
1303 Test Set 1-49 350
1304 Test Set 1-51 350
1305 Test Set I-61-A 351
1306 Volt ohmmeter 1-166 351
1307 Tube Tester 1-177 351
1308 Test Set 1-181 352
XVI
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont»d.)
Figure Page
1309 1310 Test Set I-193-A Test Set EE-65-C, D, or E 352
1311 Test Set TS-2/TG 33 3
1312 Test Set TS-26/TSM 353
1313 Test Set TS-27/TSM 354
1314 Attenuator (Western Electric Co. 5A) 354 355 355 356 357 357 358
1313 Transmission Measuring Set (Western Electric Co. 13A)
1316 Cable Fault Locating Equipment (Part of Tool Equipment TE-56-A)
1317 1318 Oscillator (Western Electric Co. 19C) Transmission Measuring Set (Western Electric Co. 32A)
1319 Oscillator (Western Electric Co. 51A)
1320 Test Set (Western Electric Co. 1017E)
1321 Volt-ohm-milliammeter (Western Electric Co. D-166852) CJO 359 359 360 398
1322 Volt-ohm-milliammeter (Western Electric Co. D-169370)
1323 1401 1402 Test Set (Teletype Corp. No. DXD-l) Radio Set SCR-131 or SCR-161 Radio Set SCR-171
1403 Radio Set SGR-177-A 398
1404 Radio Set SCR-177-B 399 399
1405 Radio Set SCR-178 or SCR-179 400
1406 Radio Set SCR-188 400
1407 Radio Set SCR-188-A 401
1408 Rajiio Set SGR-193-( ) 401
1409 Radio Set SCR-194 402
1410 Radio Set SCR-195 402
1411 Radio Set SCR-197 402
1412 Radio Set SCR-203 403
1413 Radio Set SCR-209 403
1414 Radio Set SCR-210 403
1415 Radio Set SCR-245 404
1416 Radio Set SCR-284 404
1417 Radio Set SCR-288 405
1418 Radio Set SCR-293 405
1419 Radio Set SCR-294 405
1420 Radio Set SCR-298-C 406
1421 Radio Set SCR-299 406
1422 Radio Set SCR-300 407
1423 Radio Set SCR-399 407
1424 Radio Set SCR-499 408
1425 Radio Set SCR-506 408
1426 Radio Set SCR-508 408
1427 Radio Set SCR-509 409
1428 Radio Set SCR-510 409
1429 Radio Set SCR-511 410
1430 Radio Set SCR-528 410
1431 Radio Set SCR-536 410
1432 Radio Set SCR-538 410
1433 Radio Set SCR-543 411
1434 Radio Set SCR-593 411
1435 Radio Set SCR-608 411
1436 Radio Set SCR-609 412
1437 Radio Set SCR-610 412
1438 Radio Set SCR-619 413
1439 Radio Set SCR-624 413
1440 Radio Set SGR-628 413
1441 Radio Set SCR-694-AW (Receiver Removed from case) 414
1442 Radio Set SCR-694-C 414
1443 Radio Set SGR-808 414
1444 Radio Set SCR-828 414
1445 Receiving Equipment RC-256 415
1446 Radio Transmitter RC-257 415
1447 Radio Set AN/CRC-3 415
1448 Amplifier Equipment AN/TRA-1 416
1449 Radio Set AN/TRC-1 416
1450 Radio Set AN/TRC-2 417
1451 Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-3 417
1452 Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4 418
700898 O—4G
XVII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (C o nt ’ d.)
Figure Page
1453 Radio Set AN/TRC-7 418
1454 Radio Set AN/TRC-8 419
1455 Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-11 420
1456 Radio Set AN/TRC-12 420
1457 Radio Set AN/VRC-1 421
1458 Inverted L Antenna 421
1459 Crowfoot Antenna 422
1460 Whip Antenna and Counterpoise 423
1461 Whip Antennas 423
1462 Short Whip Antenna 423
1463 Center-fed Horizontal Dipole Antenna 424
1464 Single Wire-fed Half-wave Antenna 424
1465 Half-Wave J Antenna 424
1466 Sloping Wire Antenna 425
1467 Balanced Half Wave Dipole Antenna 425
1468 Adjustable Coaxial Antenna 425
1469 Vertical Half Rhombic Antenna 425
1470 Three Element Directional Array 426
1471 Vertical Conical Dipole Antenna 426
1472 Ground Plane Antenna 426
1473 Half-wave Corner Reflector Antenna 427
1474 Remote Control Equipment AN/TRA-2 436
1475 Remote Control Equipment RC-47-( ) 436
1476 Remote Control Equipment RC-261 with Radio Set SCR-619 437
1477 Remote Control Unit RM-39-( ) 437
1478 Remote Control Unit RM-7-( ) with Radio Transmitter BC-325—( ) 1479 Remote Control Unit RM-14 438 439
1480 Remote Control Unit RM-21 439
1481 Remote Control Unit RM-29-( ) 439
1482 Radio Transmitter BC-339-( ) 444
1483 Radio Transmitter BC-365-( ) 444
1484 Radio Transmitter BC-447-( ) and Remote Control Unit RM-7 1485 Radio Set SCR-281 444 444
1486 10KW Transmitting Equipment 445
1487 Radio Amplifying Equipment (Bunnell 6 KW) 446
1488 Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-15-( )) 447
1489 Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-40-( )) 448
1490 Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless 981-( )) 449
1491 Single Side Band Transmitter (Western Electric Co. D-156000) 1492 Diversity Receiver AN/FRR-3 449 451
1493 Radio Receiver BC-779-( ) (Hammarlund Super Pro) 451
1494 Diversity (Schuttig) Mixing Unit 451
1495 Single Side Band Receiver (Western Electric Co. D-99945) 451
1496 Radio Transmitter BC-315 458
1497 Radio Transmitter BC-325-( ) 458
1498 Power Amplifier BC-340-( ) 459
1499 Radio Transmitter BC-401 459
1500 Radio Transmitter BC-460 459
1501 Radio Transmitter BC-610 460
1502 Radio Transmitter BC-642 460
1503 Radio Transmitter BC-1100-( ) 461
1504 Radio Transmitting Equipment RC-52-( ) 461
1505 Radio Transmitter T-4/FRC & T-5/FRC Installation 462
1506 Radio Transmitter (Aircraft Accessories Corp. 500B) 463
1507 Radio Transmitter (Collins 32RA) 463
1508 Radio Transmitter (Federal FT-300) 464
1509 Radio Transmitter (Pan American Airways 12ACX-2) 464
1510 Radio Transmitter (Pan American Airways) 465
1511 Power Amplifier (Pan American Airways RFA-50) 466
1512 Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-10LF) 466
1513 Radio Transmitter (Temco 250-GSC) 467
1514 Radio Transmitter (Temco 1000-AG-CW) 467
1515 Radio Transmitter (Western Electric Co. D-151249 or Pan 467
American Airways 4WTFA)
XVIII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Coat’d.)
Figure
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
Page
Radio Transmitter (Wilcox 96-A) 468
Four Radio Transmitters (Wilcox 96C) (With
Modulator 50A and Rectifier 36A) 468
Radio Transmitter (Wilcox 96-200-( ) ) 459
Radio Receiver (Federal 128AY) 473 >
Radio Receiver (Hallicrafters S-22-R) 473
Radio Receiver (Hallicrafters S-27) 473
Radio Receiver AN/GRR-3 (Hallierafters SX-28) 473
Radio Receiver (Hallie rafters S-29) 474
Radio Receiver (Hallicrafters S-36) 474
Radio Receiver AN/GRR-2 (National NC-100-ASC) 474
Radio Receiver (National HRO) 475
Radio Receiver (Wilcox CW3) 475
Radio Receiver (Wilcox CW3-D) 475
Radio Receiver (Wilcox F3) 475
Radio Receiver and Transmitter (Collins 18-Q) (Navy TCS) 477
Radio Receiver and Transmitter (Jefferson 350A) 478
Radio Receiver and Transmitter (Link 50UFS) 478
Radio Set Type 1498 (Link) 479
Radio Set Type 1505 (Link) 479
Radio Receiver and Transmitter (Motorola FMTR-25VM and FMTR-50BW) 480
Transmitting Horizontal Rhombic Antenna 480
Transmitting Doublet Antenna 481
Intermediate Frequency Flat Top Antenna 482
Receiving Horizontal Rhombic Antenna 483
Double Doublet Receiving Antenna 483
Double Cage Antenna 484
Insulated Tower Antenna 485
T Cage Antenna 485
Wave Ant enna 485
XIX
Par. 101-104
CHAPTER 1
PURPOSE AND SCOPE
101. PURPOSE. This manual provides descriptive matter and data on the electrical and physical characteristics of communication systems equipment, together with Signal Corps stock numbers and logistical data, which will be of value in planning complete communication systems. The material contained herein is intended for use primarily by staff signal officers and communication organizations under their technical control.
102. SCOPE.
a. The manual is divided into 14 chapters as follows:
1. Purpose and Scope
2. Illustrative Problems
3. Telephone Station Equipment
4. Telephone Centrals
5. Portable AWS Information Centers
6. Wire and Cable and Construction Information
7. European and United States Cables and Loading Systems
8. Electrical Protective Equipment
9. Telephone Line Transmission Equipment
10. Telegraph Equipment
11. Facsimile Equipment
12. Power Equipment
13. Maintenance Supplies
14. Radio Equipment
_b. (1) In general the data in each chapter have been arranged in tabular form, each table being listed as a paragraph. Most of the chapters are divided into sections, wherein are grouped the same general classes of equipment.
(2) For each class of equipment tables are given which contain descriptive matter, references to photographs which follow the tables, field of use, maintenance equipment, physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, references to Technical Manuals, and other pertinent information.
(3) Other tables contain the stock numbers of the equipment and the logistical data. The logistical data include the weight of the heaviest package, the total weight, the total cubical content and the total ship tons of the equipment packed for export. Data are also given for the weight and cubical content of the equipment removed from its export packing case. These data may be of value in determining depot storage requirements and transport needed to move the equipment.
(4) In some chapters additional tables and illustrative drawings are given. These are provided as a guide to assure that the proper equipment and an adequate amount will be requisitioned for the particular communication system which it is planned to establish.
c_. In general the equipment has been classified either as tactical equipment
or as fixed plant equipment. This has been done for convenience and is not intended to give a sharp line of demarcation between tactical and fixed plant since some equipment may serve well in both forward and rear areas. In the case of the more complicated communication systems, it may be necessary to obtain engineering advice and assistance from the Army Communications Service of the Office of the Chief Signal Officer.
d. Typical problems are given which outline a method for determining the equipment required for complete systems. In addition, representative radio and wire telephone transmission systems are compared from the standpoint of the quantities of material required.
£. Some information is also given concerning commercial cable facilities which may be found in the United states and in European countries, since a general knowledge of the characteristics of these cable systems may be found useful in case plans are made to utilize them.
f. This manual provides information onTy on electrical communication equipment used for ground communication systems. It does not give information on equipment such as direction finders and radar, except for the ground communication equipment associated with them.
103. REFERENCES TO OTHER MANUALS.
a. The use of this manual for planning presupposes a knowledge of systems engineering and of the general types and quantities of communication equipment required for a particular job. Information concerning these matters may be found in the following Army publications:
(1) TM 11-486, Electrical Communication Systems Engineering
(2) TM 11-2022, Application of Fixed Plant Telephone and Telegraph Packaged Equipment to Open Wire Lines
(3) M409, Logistical Planning and Reference Data
(4) FM 101-10, Staff Officers Field Manual - Organization, Technical and Logistical Data
(5) FM 11-5, Mission, Functions, and Signal Communications in General
(6) FM 11-20, Organizations and Operations in the Corps, Army, Theater of Operations, and GHQ (7) FM 24-5 Signal Communication (8) FM 24-18 Radio Communication
b. Reference is also made in the various chapters to other technical manuals and instruction books which apply to specific systems or equipments.
104. ORDERING OF WAR DEPARTMENT PUBLICATIONS. Technical Manuals and other War Department publications may be requisitioned from the various headquarters which are listed as distributing agencies. This information is covered in FM 21-6, "List of Publications for Training".
1
Par. 201-203
CHAPTER 2
ILLUSTRATIVE PROBLEMS
Section I General
201. INTRODUCTION.
a. This chapter provides illustrations of the use of the material given in this manual in planning ground communication systems.
b. Problems illustrating the use of the data in ordering equipment for wire and radio ground communication systems are given in section II. In these problems it is assumed that the officer doing the planning has completed the engineering work and has reached certain conclusions as to the general type of communication equipment required.
c, . Comparative illustrations of logistical factors involved in representative radio and wire telephone transmission systems are given in section III. Other comparisons may be made by employing the material given in subsequent chapters of the manual.
Section II
Problems Illustrating Systems Planning
202. GENERAL.
a. In the following paragraphs problems are given which illustrate some of the uses of the material given in the manual. In all of these examples it is assumed that the circuits have been engineered and that the problem to be solved is one of ordering the proper equipment and estimating the shipping space requirements.
b. Problems are included which employ the following facilities.
(1) Spiral four cable with carrier telephone and telegraph terminals.
(2) Four channel radio with carrier telephone aid telegraph terminals.
(3) Open wire with tactical carrier telephone and telegraph terminals.
(4) Open wire with packaged telephone and telegraph equipment.
(5) Interconnection of d-c telegraph circuits at junction of tactical and fixed plant carrier systems.
(6) Telephone switchboards.
203. PROBLEM 1 - SPIRAL-FOUR SYSTEM.
a. Telephone and telegraph facilities are required between the two main offices A and B and certain outlying points. From engineering considerations it has been determined that these will be provided as shown in paragraph 204. This figure shows a spiral-four carrier telephone system between Offices A and B with repeaters at Offices 0, D and E. A voice frequency carrier telegraph system is operated over one channel of the carrier
telephone system with terminals at Offices A and B. At these offices certain of the telegraph channels are extended to outlying points over the simplex circuit of existing telephone facilities. It is assumed that the spiral-four cable between Offices A and B, a distance of 100 miles, is to be buried with an average of one aerial road crossing per mile strung on a messenger.
b. The circuits provided by the layout shown in paragraph 204 are as follows.
Cir-Cir- cult cult Termi-
No. nals
Telephone 1 A-B
2 A-B
3 A-B
Telegraph 1 A-B
2 A-F
3 A-G
4 B-I
5 A-C
6 B-H
Facilities Used
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telegraph Channel
Carrier Telegraph Channel A-B, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-F
Carrier Telegraph Channel A-B, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-G
Carrier Telegraph Channel B-A, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit A-I
Spiral-Four Simplex
Spiral-Four Simplex B-E, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit E-H
c. The equipment required to obtain these facilities, with the exception of that required for the outside plant, is itemized in paragraph 204. The equipment is listed for each office under the headings of Telephone Equipment and Telegraph Equipment. Certain spare equipment as assumed for this particular layout is also listed. In addition to the equipment shown, Cable Assemblies CC-358, and other outside plant for 100 miles of line are required. The material required includes poles, messenger wire, etc. for one aerial road crossing per mile.
d. Data on the carrier telephone and telegraph equipments including spares
3
Par. 203
are obtained from chapters 9 and 10. Monitoring teletypewriters are not included because it is assumed that these are available with existing telegraph equipment. In addition to the carrier equipment, repeating coils for simplex-ing the existing telephone circuits are required (chapter 9). The power equipment, included under the list of spare equipment, is covered in chapter 12 and the outside plant equipment in chapter 6 e. Paragraph 205 summarizes the equipment required for the entire project. This summary gives the stock numbers of the various items for ordering purposes
together with essential logistical information. The equipment, weights, volumes, etc. shown in paragraph 205 should not be confused with similar data contained in TM 11-2001, which covers the equipment and cable for a 100-mile spiral-four system, including depot spares (100$ spare cable). The problem discussed in this paragraph covers a communication system involving circuits to outlying offices and telegraph facilities as well as a 100-mile spiral-four system; 25% spare cable is assumed to be ordered for the installation and no depot spares are included.
4
204 • DIAGRAM OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EMPLOYING SPIRAL-FOUR GABLE, CARRIER TELEPHONE, TELEGRAPH AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Par. 204
5
.________OFFICE A_______ OFHCEC OFFICE D OFFICE E OFFICES
”1 r 1 I ] I-------1 r-------------------------------1
CARRIER CARRIER 1 .CARRIER I I CARRIER I | CARRIER I i CARRIER CARRIER
I TELEGRAPH TELEPHONE! [TELEPHONE TELEPHONE, [TELEPHONE, 1 TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
TERMINAL TERMINAL I REPEATER, REPEATER I j REPEATER! | TERMINAL TERMINAL
‘XfXLF I r ---- I I I I I r~ ! ; ____ 1_______________ OFFICE F OFFICE G
I sx.coilI II II' ---1 -----------1 I i------------1 i------------1
I C-lbl h5MlJ I -------- r— |-25MlU -25MI-I ^25MI- f-25Ml' _______ I I I 5X.COIL
PYTstSa r”-
Iffi I I WIRE I C-I6I • r r ' I I I -1 ->* SXCOIL, IELD I FIELD ' I
□ 1 1 Ll y । । W; 1TT । ' U v i 1 i ",,E; X
ie7-£I[ 1 | rn sx bi id bi idk । - r-------------J Isx.co.lI I EX
j I ,t[W®;l O3! L__J j"lyl pbi IJx
1 - । “ i-j. w I i i ii-I L------------■ XVbIXi I X7-b I’ □ a ee-97-a
I II TTXSET I I-----------1 I____________I
I I 1 COn- I I I EE-98-A
EXISTING EXISTING I I । EXISTING EXISTING
TEL^0NE ! I TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
SWfeD TTY. SETS SWBD j SWBO SWBD,TTY. SETS I
OR REP. SETS I OR REP. SETS
L--------------------------1 ( |_______________________________|
I 1 1
OFFICE H
I -15 Ml_^Yx.COIL C -161
LEGEND: L —J.«,
FIELD ' P [6]
O---O EXISTING TELEPHONE CIRCUIT. WIRE | I I-------1 I----1 ' J
® INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEPHONE CKT. I ' T-'«
E) INDICATES TERMINAL OFADDED TELEGRAPH CKT. ' | | | | |
TERMINAL TTY SET I
TELEGRAPH TG-7-B
REPEATER
I---------------------1
OFFICEI OFFICE A OFFICE C OFFICE D OFFICE E OFFICE H OFFICE B OFFICE F OFFICE G
TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT . TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT „I,C’'61 I.TC-2I-O I.TC-23-O I.TC-23-O l,TC-23-() I)C-I6I ’ HTC-2I- ( ) 77^7----- ---7777------
TELEGRAPH EQPT TELEGRAPH EQPT. TELEGRAPH EQPT. !, C-161 TELEGRAPH EQPT 2,TC-24-() TELEGRAPH EQP r TELEGRAPH EQPT
I, EE-97-A TELEGRAPH EOPT '.EE-98-A NONE TELEGRAPH EQPT. I.TC-18 2.C-I6I JEE-97-a -------Tc_l8-----
_ELEGRAPH EQPT SPARE EQPT, SPARE EQPT I, TC-19 I.TG-7-B TELEGRAPH EQPT. > l’ TG-7-B
IEE-98-A l,PE-2l4-() I.CF-3-A T&,aVB4 l,TC-22-()
TS-2/TG 2.PE-2I4-O I, 1-193-A I.TC-18
SPARE EQPT SPARE EQPT I.TC-7-B
SPARE EQPT. 2, PE-2I4-C) l,EE-98-A
I.CF-I-A |} TS-2/TG
I, CF-2-B |, I - 193 A
I, EE-IOI - A SPARE EQ PT
I, EE-98-A ~-
I. PE-75-0 'pE-75-O
I, RA-83-( ) I, PE. Zb I. >
OUTSIDE PLANT EQPT, EQUIPMENT FORIOOMI.OF BURIED
SP'RAL-4 CABLE
Par. 205
205. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT FOR TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 204.
Quantity Description Stock No. Weight - lbs. Volume - Cu.Ft. Ship Tons
Export Net Export Net
a. Line Transmission Equipment
(1) Telephone Equipment (See paragraph 910)
2 Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 4B8360-21( ) 2940 2380 124 80 3.0
3 Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 4B3223( ) 3450 2055 126 84 3.3
4 Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 4F2124 1760 1360 56 40 1.6
8 Repeating Coil C-161 3C161 40 24 - - -
(2) Telegraph Equipment (See paragraphs 1010 , 1011, 1013 and 1318)
2 Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( ) 4A2822B 3080 2260 170 90 4.4
3 Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 585 438 20 10 0.6
1 Repeater Set TC-19 4A2119 185 136 7 3 0.2
2 Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A 4TEE97A 1400 910 76 34 2.0
3 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 1641 939 96 36 2.2
4 Teletypewriter TG-7-B 4T2.28A-1 1600 900 108 35 2.8
2 Test Set TS-2/TG 4TED67GG 320 140 24 5 0.6
2 Test Set I-193-A 3F4193 190 130 9 4 0.3
(3) Spare Equipment (See chapters 9, 10 and 12)
1 Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 4B8361 735 475 44 20 1.1
1 Repeater CF-3-A 4B3203 340 225 18 8 0.5
1 Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 4F2101 140 95 4 2 0.1
1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B 4A2892B 760 575 42 20 1.0
2 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 1094 626 64 24 1.6
2 Power Unit PE-75-( ) 3H4575( ) 890 660 28 22 0.7
(No Case) (No Case)
6 Power Unit PE-214-( ) 3H4600-214 480 522 21 25 0.5
1 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 3H4699-83 • 64 50 2 1 ••
Total Equipment 21,694 14,900 1039 543 26.7
b. 500 Outside Plant - Buried Spiral-Four Cable 100 Miles Long; 1 Road Crossing Per Mile with Messenger Wire 25
(See Paragraphs 616 and 633) Lumber, Treated 4" x4" xl8* 5A2718 32,500 32,500 1000 1000
500 50 Cable Assembly CC-358, 1/4 mi. per Reel DR-15 Cable Assembly CC-368 IB 1458 IB 1468 88,400 88,400 2440 2440 61
15 Cable Stub CC-356 500 Bolt, Machine 5/8" x10" GI 1100 Clamp, deadend - Kearny Lay-Cit. or equal 250 Hook PF-81, drive 25 lbs Marlin RP-2 6 lbs Nail, common wire, 12-d 300 Sleeve, GS, for 109 Guy Wire (S-109-2) 100 lbs Talc, 200 mesh, Grade A, white Wishnick-Tumpeer, Inc., New York, N.Y. or equal 1000 Washer, square, GI, 2-1/4" with 11/16" hole 2000 ft. “Wire W-110-B 1000 lbs Wire W-145, 109GS 30,000ft. Wire, Messenger, 2.2 M Utilities Grade, 3/16" dia. (w.E.Co. Spec. AT-7035) 1000 Clamp, PF-61, two bolt IB 1456 5B1510-10 5B3094 5B5081 6Z6981 6L1412 6N5709.2 5B2029-11 1B110BK 1A145 1A503 5B3061 2,200 2,900 2,200 2,900 35 150 35 150 1 3.8
3500 300 Hanger, cable for CC-358 per SCL Spec. 694 Clamp, deadend; for CC-358 Kearny Ley-Cit. or equal Total Outside Plant Total Entire Project 5B3459 5B3094 126,000 147,750 126,000 147,900 3625 4668 3625 4168 91 118
“Required in connection with spiral-four installation. The field wire shown in paragraph 204 to outlying offices is not included in this table, as it is assumed already in place.
6
Par. 206
206. PROBLEM 2 - FOUR CHANNEL RADIO RELAY CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM. ---
a. This problem illustrates the use of a radio link in setting up a communication system. Telephone and telegraph facilities are required between the two main Offices A and B and certain outlying points. From engineering considerations it has been determined that these will be provided as shown in paragraph 207. This figure shows a 4-channel system using spiral-four carrier telephone equipment, AN/TRC-3 radio terminal equipment and AN/TRC-4 radio relay equipment operating over a distance of approximately 100 miles between Office A and Office B. Radio terminals are located close to Offices A and B, and connected to the offices by Cable Assemblies CC-358. Radio relay sets are indicated at 3 points along the route between the radio terminal sets, that is at intervals of about 25 miles. (As discussed in TM 11-486 the distance over which AN/TRC-3 and 4 equipment will operate satisfactorily depends primarily upon the character of the terrain between the radio transmitters and receivers and the choice of antenna locations. A distance of 25 miles is used here merely as an example.) It is assumed that for one of the links (between 2 radio relay sets) the situation requires that amplifier equipment be used to increase the transmitted power. A voice-frequency carrier telegraph system is operated over one channel of the carrier telephone system with terminals at Offices A and B. At these offices certain of the telegraph channels are extended to outlying points over the simplex circuits of existing telephone facilities.
b. The circuits provided by the layout shown in paragraph 207 are as follows.
Cir-
Gir- cuit ouit Termi-No. nala Facilities Used
Telephone 1 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
2 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
3 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
Telegraph 1 A-B Carrier Telegraph Channel
2 A-C A-B, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-C
3 A-D Carrier Telegraph Channel A-B, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-D
4 B-E Carrier Telegraph Channel B-A, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit A-E
c. The equipment required to obtain these facilities, with the exception of that required for the outside plant from Offices A and B to outlying offices, is itemized in paragraph 207. The equipment is listed for each office under the headings of Telephone Equipment and Telegraph Equipment and for each radio link terminal or repeater. Certain spare equipment as assumed for this particular layout is also listed. This is in addition to the spare equipment furnished as components of AN/TRC-3 and AN/TRC-4.
d. The radio equipment information is obtained from chapter 14. Data on the carrier telephone and telegraph equipments. are obtained from chapters 9 and 10 respectively, which also give suggested spare equipment. In addition to the carrier equipment repeating coils for slmplexing the existing telephone circuits are required (chapter 9). The spare power equipment is covered in chapter 12.
e. . Paragraph 208 summarizes the equipment required for the entire project. This summary gives the stock ,lumbers of the various items for ordering purposes, together with essential logistical information. The spare equipment listed is in addition to the spare equipment furnished as components of AN/TRC-3 and AN/TRC—4. The data required in preparing this table are obtained from chapters 6 9 10, 12 and 14.
7
Par. 207
2M. DIAGRAM OF FOUR-CHANNEL RADIO RELAY CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM,
OFFICE A AN/TRC-3-*- ADIO --^AN/TRC-3 OFFICE B
।------------------1 I----1 TERMINALS ।-------। ।----------------------y
CARRIFR CARRIFR i I v-r-r-1-1 r---►m I CARRIER CARRIER
TELEGRAPH TELEPHONE, i V ] 1 J IV I TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
TERMINAL TERMINAL ' . I . I < V | —L I . TERMINAL TERMINAL |
OFFICE E ! I | H T I ’ I R 11 ! I ---- ------ 1 OFFICE C OFFICE D
I rrJ rz । 1 — —~i ; r—
h MP i fl MMi "* £ | TTY SET I I r-----J I ”C0 I 1
EE-97-A' I | 4----1 ।---A-0 j C-'*1 I [tERM.I
I-----1 I ' If f Ir-----O— t-O-l tel
RING.rU L [ X X I I! SX.COIL I^°e| T| I I
1 s t lEffimh;! ihi j
< < | TO-,. II I I | O n-’-’l
L______- 1 m RADIO RELAYS ~ Il O® । I eVVt-a I
I / I AN/TRC-4 AN/TRC-4 I k i | J TTY SET I I--------1 I--------1
/ I AN/TRC-4 AN/TRA-I AN/TRA-I X \ 1 II EE-98-A
. vlV I u p | 4V। j______________,
EXISTING EXISTING | । | | 1 | | | । | | | I EXISTING EXISTING
TELEGRAPH TELEPHONE | 11 ] F| iF] Uni I l~l TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
I SWBD.TTY. SETS SWBD. I R H T I R A | R H T I ' SWBD SWBD.TTY.SETS
OR REP. SETS II 1 । 1 I1—!—। L-.-1 11-1 1 1 I OR REP SETS
--------------------iL ±BLl h-------------------------------------------------
| T H R I T H R A R || O---C EXISTING TELEPHONE CIRCUIT.
I 1 I 1. II 1 I II II—j—। I—w—। ® INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEPHONE CIRCUIT.
I I I I I I Si INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEGRAPH CIRCUIT.
I >25 Ml. I I 25MI.ll T 1—1 । " T-RADIO TRANSMITTER.
• I I R-RADIO RECEIVER.
JAPPROX^ APPROX^ J A» AMPLIFIER FOR RADIO TRANSMITTER.
NOTES: a spare EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED AS COMPONENTS OF
AN/TRC-3 AND AN/TRC-4, AS NOTED IN PARAGRAPH 1408.
RADIO RELAY
RADIO WITH RADIO
OFFICE E OFFICE A TERMINAL AMPLIFIER TERMINAL OFFICE B OFFICE C OFFICE D
TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT. I,AN/TRC-3* I.AN/TRC-41 I, AN/TRC-3* TELEPHONE EQPT- TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT
I.C-I6I l,TC-2l-(J I0.CC-35B I.AN/TRA- I IO.CC-358 l,TC-2l-( ) I.C-I6I I.C-I6I
TELEGRAPH EQPT. 2,TC-24-() 2.CC-356 SPARE EQPT 2.CC-356 2.TC-24-( ) TELEGRAPH EQPT. TELEGRAPH EQPT.
I.EE-97-A Tr.'rroYoL phot SPARE EQPT. I, AN/TRA-I SPARE EQPT. 2, C-161 l,EE-97-A I.TC-18
E.QpT I0.CC-358 ' IO.CC-358 TELEGRAPH. EQPT I.TG-7-B
IjS-^G I. CC-356 I. CC-356 I'.Ie-^-'a’
E?PT RADIO RADIO RELAY i.’ts-2/tg
i.cf-i-a spare eqpt
I.CF-2-B RELAY WITH y ^e-98-a—
!'pe’-°75-( ) I, AN/TRC-4* AMPLIFIER r, PE-75-C )
l’ RA-B3«( ) I. AN/TRC-41
I, AN/TRA - I SPARE EQPT I, AN/TRA-I
8
Par. 101-104
CHAPTER 1
PURPOSE AND SCOPE
101. PURPOSE. This manual provides descriptive matter and data on the electrical and physical characteristics of communication systems equipment, together with Signal Corps stock numbers and logistical data, which will be of value in planning complete communication systems. The material contained herein is intended for use primarily by staff signal officers and communication organizations under their technical control.
102. SCOPE.
a. The manual is divided into 14 chapters as follows:
1. Purpose and Scope
2. Illustrative Problems
3. Telephone Station Equipment
4. Telephone Centrals
5. Portable AWS Information Centers
6. Wire and Cable and Construction Information
7. European and United States Cables and Loading Systems
8. Electrical Protective Equipment
9. Telephone Line Transmission Equipment
10. Telegraph Equipment
11. Facsimile Equipment
12. Power Equipment
13. Maintenance Supplies
14. Radio Equipment
_b. (1) In general the data in each chapter have been arranged in tabular form, each table being listed as a paragraph. Most of the chapters are divided into sections, wherein are grouped the same general classes of equipment.
(2) For each class of equipment tables are given which contain descriptive matter, references to photographs which follow the tables, field of use, maintenance equipment, physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, references to Technical Manuals, and other pertinent information.
(3) Other tables contain the stock numbers of the equipment and the logistical data. The logistical data include the weight of the heaviest package, the total weight, the total cubical content and the total ship tons of the equipment packed for export. Data are also given for the weight and cubical content of the equipment removed from its export packing case. These data may be of value in determining depot storage requirements and transport needed to move the equipment.
(4) In some chapters additional tables and illustrative drawings are given. These are provided as a guide to assure that the proper equipment and an adequate amount will be requisitioned for the particular communication system which it is planned to establish.
£, In general the equipment has been classified either as tactical equipment
or as fixed plant equipment. This has been done for convenience and is not intended to give a sharp line of demarcation between tactical and fixed plant since some equipment may serve well in both forward and rear areas. In the case of the more complicated communication systems, it may be necessary to obtain engineering advice and assistance from the Army Communications Service of the Office of the Chief Signal Officer,
d. Typical problems are given which outline a method for determining the equipment required for complete systems. In addition, representative radio and wire telephone transmission systems are compared from the standpoint of the quantities of material required,
£. Some information is also given concerning commercial cable facilities which may be found in the United States and in European countries, since a general knowledge of the characteristics of these cable systems may be found useful in case plans are made to utilize them.
f. This manual provides information onTy on electrical communication equipment used for ground communication systems. It does not give information on equipment such as direction finders and radar, except for the ground communication equipment associated with them.
103. REFERENCES TO OTHER MANUALS.
a. The use of this manual forplanning presupposes a knowledge of systems engineering and of the general types and quantities of communication equipment required for a particular job. Information concerning these matters may be found in the following Army publications:
(1) TM 11-486, Electrical Communication Systems Engineering
(2) TM 11-2022, Application of Fixed Plant Telephone and Telegraph Packaged Equipment to Open Wire Lines
(3) M409, Logistical Planning and Reference Data
(4) FM 101-10, Staff Officers Field Manual - Organization, Technical and Logistical Data
(5) FM 11-5, Mission, Functions, and Signal Communications in General
(6) FM 11-20, Organizations and Operations in the Corps, Army, Theater of Operations, and GHQ
(7) FM 24-5 Signal Communication (8) FM 24-18 Radio Communication b. Reference is also made in the various chapters to other technical manuals and instruction.books which apply to specific systems or equipments.
104. ORDERING OF WAR DEPARTMENT PUBLICATIONS. Technical Manuals and other War Department publications may be requisitioned from the various headquarters which are listed as distributing agencies. This information is covered in FM 21-6, "List of Publications for Training".
1
Par. 201-203
CHAPTER 2 ILLUSTRATIVE PROBLEMS
Section I General
201. INTRODUCTION.
a. I*his chapter provides illustrations of the use of the material given in this manual in planning ground communication systems.
b. Problems illustrating the use of the data in ordering equipment for wire and radio ground communication systems are given in section II. In these problems it is assumed that the officer doing the planning has completed the engineering work and has reached certain conclusions as to the general type of communication equipment required.
c, . Comparative illustrations of logistical factors involved in representative radio and wire telephone transmission systems are given in section III. Other comparisons may be made by employing the material given in subsequent chapters of the manual.
Section II
Problems Illustrating Systems Planning
202. GENERAL.
a. In the following paragraphs problems are given which illustrate some of the uses of the material given in the manual. In all of these examples it is assumed that the circuits have been engineered and that the problem to be solved is one of ordering the proper equipment and estimating the shipping space requirements.
b. Problems are included which employ the following facilities.
(1) Spiral four cable with carrier telephone and telegraph terminals.
(2) Four channel radio with carrier telephone aid telegraph terminals.
(3) Open wire with tactical carrier telephone and telegraph terminals.
(4) Open wire with packaged telephone and telegraph equipment.
(5) Interconnection of d-c telegraph circuits at Junction of tactical and fixed plant carrier systems.
(6) Telephone switchboards.
203. PROBLEM 1 - SPIRAL-FOUR SYSTEM.
a. Telephone and telegraph facilities are required between the two main offices A and B and certain outlying points. From engineering considerations it has been determined that these will be provided as shown in paragraph 204. This figure shows a spiral-four carrier telephone system between Offices A and B with repeaters at Offices 0, D and E. A voice frequency carrier telegraph system is operated over one channel of the carrier
telephone system with terminals at Offices A and B. At these offices certain of the telegraph channels are extended to outlying points over the simplex circuit of existing telephone facilities. It is assumed that the spiral-four cable between Offices A and B, a distance of 100 miles, is to be buried with an average of one aerial road crossing per mile strung on a messenger.
b. The circuits provided by the layout shown in paragraph 204 are as follows.
Cir-Cir- cult cult Termi- •
No. nals
Telephone 1 A-B
2 A-B
3 A-B
Telegraph 1 A-B
2 A-F
3 A-G
4 B-I
5 A-C
6 B-H
Facilities Used
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telephone Channel
Carrier Telegraph Channel
Carrier Telegraph Channel A-B, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-F
Carrier Telegraph Channel A-B, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-G
Carrier Telegraph Channel B-A, and Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit A-I
Spiral-Four Simplex
Spiral-Four Simplex B-E, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit E-H
£. The equipment required to obtain these facilities, with the exception of that required for the outside plant, is itemized in paragraph 204. The equipment is listed for each office under the headings of Telephone Equipment and Telegraph Equipment. Certain spare equipment as assumed for this particular layout is also listed. In addition to the equipment shown, Cable Assemblies CC-358, and other outside plant for 100 miles of line are required. The material required includes poles, messenger wire, etc. for one aerial road crossing per mile.
d. Data on the carrier telephone and telegraph equipments including spares
3
Par. 203
are obtained from chapters 9 and 10. Monitoring teletypewriters are not included because it is assumed that these are available with existing telegraph equipment. In addition to the carrier equipment, repeating coils for simplex-ing the existing telephone circuits are required (chapter 9). The power equipment, included under the list of spare equipment, is covered in chapter 12 and the outside plant equipment in chapter 6 e. Paragraph 205 summarizes the equipment required for the entire project. This summary gives the stock numbers of the various items for ordering purposes
together with essential logistical information. The equipment, weights, volumes, etc. shown in paragraph 205 should not be confused with similar data contained in TM 11-2001, which covers the equipment and cable for a 100-mile spiral-four system, including depot spares (100% spare cable). The problem discussed in this paragraph covers a communication system involving circuits to outlying offices and telegraph facilities as well as a 100-mile spiral-four system; 25$ spare cable is assumed to be ordered for the installation and no depot spares are included.
4
^04. diagram of communication system employing spiral-four gable, carrier telephone, telegraph and associated equipment
Par. 204
5
______OFFICE A OFFICE C OFFICE D OFFICE E OFFICES ■ i r i i ; i-----1 r 1
CARRIER CARRIER 1 . CARRIER I I CARRIER I I CARRIER I j CARRIER CARRIER .
I TELEGRAPH TELEPHONE, [TELEPHONE TELEPHONE, TELEPHONE, TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
TERMINAL TERMINAL1 REPEATER] REPEATER I jREPEATERl | TERMINAL TERMINAL |
OfL’SEI | ------------ -------- ! | I । । | j I ~ ~ ~ 1 ________ OFFICE F OFFICE G
Fsx.coiH II i ■ I ' I-~| r-’ । | i-----------1 r —--------1
| C-lbl H5MI ' | ---- -------- f25MlJ -25MI-| ^.aSMI.J f-ZSMI- -- ------------ I I I SX.COIL
rrK'“™"FT™ r~“TTt'” F-T- — ro-“—riF—rA-O-i |ffl I I W|RE I C-16! } H_ r[| |___ | I | □ L | SX.CO.L ^I | |
sr-f! |sTt' isJTTri isJp-{ T* ,------------------------------------J ! sx.co.lI Ieei '
I IQ I ! Tp '""7 I Ql l««FY I -H
|U » >□ 1 I ± I Qi ITO"- I
I L-----------• ItS-V/i I 4% I; □a. «-“T.
J i i-Y I i: sx: -i 1-------------1
j .jQllL -’qIr. I £~'~P . alV'!,.m
' TEXl'eJraGPH TELEPHONE ! ! I EXISTING EXISTINg"
, TEL^!T?NE ! I TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
I $Y9*3D. TTY. SETS SWBD | I SWBD SWBD,TTY. SETS I
OR REP. SETS | OR REP. SETS
I-----------------------1 | |____________________________|
I I I
OFFICE H
■-I5MI.--pXCOIL C-lfcl “
LEGEND: *"-----1-L H
FIELD I I®] I
0—0 EXISTING TELEPHONE CIRCUIT. WIRE | I I I I--------1
® INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEPHONE CAT. I I Itc-iaL,
1X1 INDICATES TERMINAL OFADDED TELEGRAPH CKT. ‘ | | | | ]
TERMINAL TTY SET I
TELEGRAPH TG-7-B REPEATER
I___________________I
.OFFtCEI OFF|CE A OFFICE C OFFICE D OFFICE E OFFICE H OFFICE B OFFICE F OFFICE G TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT . TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT Tril’G„ '6' _ I.TC-2I-O l,TC-23-( ) I, TC-23-( ) l,TC-23-() I.C-I6I l,TC-2l-() I.C-I6I I , C-I6I
-- QPT TELEGRAPH EQPT. TELEGRAPH EQPT. I.C-I6I TELEGRAPH EQPT 2,TC-24-() TELEGRAPH EQPF TELEGRAPH EOPT I.EE-’T-A tel'^rh EQPT '.EE-98-A NONE TELEGRAPH EQPT. |)TC.|8 2.C-I6I LEE-97-A J, TC-18----
-LL-LGKAPH L.QPT. SPARE EQPT. SPARE EQPT. I, TC-19 I.TG-7-B TELEGRAPH EQPT. ’ / Tg-7“b
LEE-I^A I.PE-2I4-C) I.CF-3-A ' '• TG-7-B I.TC-22-O
ITS-2/TG 2, PE“ 214 - ( ) I, TC I 8
SPARE EQPT SPARE EQPT. I.TG-7-B
SHARE EQPT. 2, PE-2I4-C ) I, EE-98-A
I.CF-I-A . I, TS-2/TG
I, CF-2-B I, I - 193 A
I, EE-IOI-A SPARE EQ PT
'•EE'98’A 7' EE-9B-A-
!,PE-75-O
OUTSIDE PLANT EQPT.
EQUIPMENT FORIOOMI.OF BURIED
SP'RAL-4 CABLE
Par. 205
205. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT FOR TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 204.
Quant Stock No. Weight - lbs. Volume - Cu.Ft. Ship Tons
;ity Description Export Net Export Net
a.
Line Transmission Equipment
(1) 2 Telephone Equipment (See paragraph 910) Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 4B8360-21( ) 2940 2380 124 80 3.0
3 Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 4B3223( ) 3450 2055 126 84 3.3
4 Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 4F2124 1760 1360 56 40 1.6
8 Repeating Coil C-161 3C161 40 24 - - -
(2) 2 Telegraph Equipment (See paragraphs 1010, 1011, 1013 and 1318) Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( ) 4A2822B 3080 2260 170 90 4.4
3 Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 585 438 20 10 0.6
1 Repeater Set TC-19 4A2119 185 136 7 3 0.2
2 Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A 4TEE97A 1400 910 76 34 2.0
3 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 1641 939 96 36 2.2
4 Teletypewriter TG-7-B 4T2.28A-1 1600 900 108 35 2.8
2 Test Set TS-2/TG 4TED57GG 320 140 24 5 0.6
2 Test Set I-193-A 3F4193 190 130 9 4 0.3
(3) 1 Spare Equipment (See chapters 9, 10 and 12) Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 4B8361 735 475 44 20 1.1
1 Repeater CF-3-A 4B3203 340 225 13 8 0.5
1 Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 4F2101 140 95 4 2 0.1
1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-43 4A2892B 760 575 42 20 1.0
2 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 1094 626 64 24 1.6
2 Power Unit PE-75-( ) 3H4575( ) 890 660 28 22 0.7
6 Power Unit PE-214-( ) 3H4600-214 480 (No Case) 522 21 (No Case) 25 0.5
1 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 3H4699-83 64 50 2 1 •
b. Total Equipment Outside Plant - Buried Spiral-Four Cable 100 Miles Long; 21,694 14,900 1 Road Crossing Per Mile 1039 543 with Messenger Wire 26.7
500 (See Paragraphs 616 and 633) Lumber, Treated 4" x4" xl8* 5A2718 32,500 32,500 1000 1000 25
500 50 Cable Assembly CC-358, 1/4 mi. per Reel DR-15 Cable Assembly CC-368 IB 1458 IB 1468 88,400 88,400 2440 2440 61
15 500 1100 250 25 6 300 Cable Stub CC-356 Bolt, Machine 5/8" x10" GI Clamp, deadend - Kearny Lay-Cit. or equal Hook PF-81, drive lbs Marlin RP-2 lbs Nail, common wire, 12-d Sleeve, OS, for 109 Guy Wire (S-109-2) IB 145 6 5B1510-10 5B3094 5B5081 6Z6981 6L1412 6N5709.2 2,200 2,200 35 1 35 1
100 lbs Talc, 200 mesh, Grade A, white Wishnick-Tumpeer, Inc., New York, N.Y. or equal 1000 Washer, square, GI, 2-1/4" with 11/16" hole 2000 ft. aWire W-110-B 1000 lbs Wire W-145, 109GS 30,000ft. wire, Messenger, 2.2 M Utilities Grade, 3/16" dia. (w.E.Co. Spec. AT-7035) 1000 Clamp, PF-61, two bolt 5B2029-11 1B110BK LA145 1A503 5B3061 2,900 2,900 150 150 3.8
3500 300 Hanger, cable for CC-358 per SCL Spec. 694 Clamp, deadend; for CC-358 Kearny ley-Cit. or equal Total Outside Plant Total Entire Project 5B3459 5B3094 126,000 147,750 126,000 147,900 3625 4668 3625 4168 91 118
aRequired in connection with spiral-four installation. The field wire shown in paragraph 204 to outlying offices is not included in this table, as it is assumed already in place.
6
Par. 206
206. PROBLEM 2 - FOUR CHANNEL RADIO ftfiLAY CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM. ■
a. This problem illustrates the use of a radio link in setting up a communication system. Telephone and telegraph facilities are required between the two main Offices A and B and certain outlying points. From engineering considerations it has been determined that these will be provided as shown in paragraph 207. This figure shows a 4-channel system using spiral-four carrier telephone equipment, AN/TRC-3 radio terminal equipment and AN/TRC-4 radio relay equipment operating over a distance of approximately 100 miles between Office A and Office B. Radio terminals are located close to Offices A and B, and connected to the offices by Cable Assemblies CC-358. Radio relay sets are indicated at 3 points along the route between the radio terminal sets, that is at intervals of about 25 miles. (As discussed in TM 11-486 the distance over which AN/TRC-3 and 4 equipment will operate satisfactorily depends primarily upon the character of the terrain between the radio transmitters and receivers and the choice of antenna locations. A distance of 25 miles is used here merely as an example.) It is assumed that for one of the links (between 2 radio relay sets) the situation requires that amplifier equipment be used to increase the transmitted power. A voice-frequency carrier telegraph system is operated over one channel of the carrier telephone system with terminals at Offices A and B. At these offices certain of the telegraph channels are extended to outlying points over the simplex circuits of existing telephone facilities.
b. The circuits provided by the layout shown in paragraph 207 are as follows.
Cir-
Cir- cuit ouit Termi-No. nala Facilities Used
Telephone 1 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
2 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
3 A-B Carrier Telephone Channel
Telegraph 1 A-B Carrier Telegraph Channel
2 A-G A-B, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-C
3 A-D Carrier Telegraph Channel
A-B, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit B-D
4 B-E Carrier Telegraph Channel
B-A, Simplex on Existing Telephone Circuit A-E
£• The equipment required to obtain these facilities, with the exception of that required for the outside plant from Offices A and B to outlying offices, is itemized in paragraph 207. The equipment is listed for each office under the headings of Telephone Equipment and Telegraph Equipment and for each radio link terminal or repeater. Certain spare equipment as assumed for this particular layout is also listed. This is in addition to the spare equipment furnished as components of AN/TRC-3 and AN/TRC-4.
d. The radio equipment information is obtained from chapter 14. Data on the carrier telephone and telegraph equipments are obtained from chapters 9 and 10 respectively, which also give suggested spare equipment. In addition to the carrier equipment repeating coils for simplexing the existing telephone circuits are required (chapter 9). The spare power equipment is covered in chapter 12.
e. Paragraph 208 summarizes the equipment required for the entire project. This summary gives the stock .numbers of the various items for ordering purposes, together with essential logistical information. The spare equipment listed is in addition to the spare equipment furnished as components of AN/TRC-3 and AN/TRC—4. The data required in preparing this table are obtained from chapters 6,9, 10, 12 and 14.
7
Par. 207
207. DIAGRAM OF FOUR-CHANNEL RADIO RELAY CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM.
OFFICE A AN/TRC-3-.-- RADIO -»AN/TRC-3 OFFICE B
।--------------------1 I-------1 TERMINALS ।--------1 ' ।-----------------------1
CARRIER CARRIER I I m-1-1 I---—VT7 I I CARRIER CARRIER
TELEGRAPH TELEPHONE. I V ] jif I TELEPHONE TELEGRAPH
TERMINAL TERMINAL1 I J V I r . I , TERMINAL TERMINAL |
OFFICE E j ________ _______ I I ip T 1 [ ’ I | R h | I ------- ----L—1 OFFICE C OFFICE D
1 I 222 !22j i!i । 1 i 22~1 I I i" 1 r?x-coiL“]
■ . 1 5MI.-J L TC-22 TC-21 ...I.-.-,.. T I ... .. TC-21 TC-22| 1 J -5V * LlOMI.-M C'fr' |
Ion I “■(■’■“"“““’I’ I r"1 “ " —■ | CC-358 I VT7*— / t \T7 I CC-358 । ’ - — — r“r'i}-4 ——— — — — — -f» ——— — i — 4ko
qh=i p prw qrn q q i i i xi l--aJ I „ I f 1 '-H.I j>l
; ssmm | « s i ?.??,"■ qq V [ । J-, J
I i s i ?i;s mh la W®
- : :: J I □! iTS-’-i
L------- j « RADIO RELAYS ~ •' O® । I e7-97-II
I I I AN/TRC-4 AN/TRC-4 Ik, | J TTY SET I------1 I-----1
/ 1 AN/TRC-4 AN/TRA-I AN/TRA-I X \ II EE-98-A
, ' EXISTING TELEPHONE CIRCUIT.
I 1 I 1| I 1 I II II—l—I I—I—I ® INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEPHONE CIRCUIT.
| I I I Si INDICATES TERMINAL OF ADDED TELEGRAPH CIRCUIT.
I '25 Ml. I I 25MI.ll T l—l I T-RADIO TRANSMITTER.
f«- -*l I R* RADIO RECEIVER.
JAPPROX|_ JAPPROX|_ J A" AMPLIFIER FOR RADIO TRANSMITTER.
NOTES, ‘spare EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED AS COMPONENTS OF AN/TRC-3 AND AN/TRC-4, AS NOTED IN PARAGRAPH 1408.
RADIO RELAY
RADIO WITH RADIO
OFFICE E OFFICE A TERMINAL AMPLIFIER TERMINAL OFFICE B OFFICE C OFFICE D
TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT. I.AN/TRC-3*- I,AN/TRC-4* I.AN/TRC-3* TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT. TELEPHONE EQPT
I.C-I6I l,TC-2l-O 10,CC-358 I.AN/TRA- I 10,CC-358 l,TC-2l-( ) I.C-I6I I.C-I6I
TELEGRAPH EQPT. 2,TC-24-() 2, CC-356 SPARE EQPT 2.CC- 356 2,TC-24-() TELEGRAPH EQPT. TELEGRAPH EQPT
I.EE-97-A SPARE EQPT. I, AN/TRA-I SPARE EQPT. 2, C-I6I l,EE-9T-A I.TC-18
\ TC RR 10,CC-358 10,CC-358 TELEGRAPH EQPT._ I.TG-7-B
!js-1/TG I.CC-356 I.CC-356 ^E-M-A0
frrR^ E.qPT RADIO RADIO RELAY Lts-2/tg
>;cf-2-b RELAY WITH , Vg-aa-aPT
S I, AN/TRC-41 AMPLIFIER l’, PE-75-0
l’,RA-83-( ) I. AN/TRC-4*
I, AN/TRA - I
SPARE EQPT.
I, AN/TRA-I
8
Par. 208
208. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT FOR FOUR-CHANNEL RADIO SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 207Z ----
Quan- Weight - lbs Volume - Cu.ft. Ship
tity Description Stock No. Export Net Export Net Tons
a. Telephone Equipment (See paragraph 910)
2 Telephone Terminal Set
TC-21-( ) 4B8360-21 2940 2380 124 80 3.0
4 Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 4F2124 1760 1080 56 40 1.6
6 Repeating Coil C-161 3C161 30 18 - - -
b. Telegraph Equipment (See paragraphs 1010, 1011 and 1318)
2 Telegraph Terminal Set
TC-22-( ) 4A2822B 3080 2260 170 90 4.4
1 Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 195 150 7 4 0.2
2 Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A 4TEE97A 1400 910 76 34 2.0
1 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 547 313 32 12 0.8
1 Teletypewriter TO-7-B 4T2.28A-1 400 225 27 9 0.7
2 Test Sets TS-2/TC 4TED57GG 320 140 24 5 0.6
c. Radio Equipment (See paragraph 1410)
2 Radio Terminal Set AU/TRC-3 2S5002-3 6300 5120 264 176 6.6
3 Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4 2S5002-4 13500 10500 561 366 14.
2 Amplifier Equipment AN/TRA-1 2S5006-1 1094 804 64 28 1.4
d. Cable (See paragraph 614)
20 Cable Assembly CC-358 1B1458 3500 3500 96 96 2.4
(On reel DR-15 1/4 mile per reel)
4 Cable Assembly CC-356 1B1456 - - - - -
e. Spare Equipment8 (See chapters 6, 9, 10, 12 and 14)
1 Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 4B8361 735 475 44 20 1.1
1 Ringing Equipment EE-101-A 4F2101 140 95 4 2 0.1
1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B 4A2892B 760 575 42 20 1.1
1 Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A 547 313 32 12 0.8
2 Power Unit PE-75-( ) 3H457511 990 660 28 22 0.7
(No Case) (No Case)
1 Rectifier Unit RA-83-( ) 3H4699-83 64 50 2 1 -
2 Amplifier Equipment AN/TRA-1 2S5006-1 1094 804 64 28 1.4
20 Cable Assembly CC-358 1B1458 3500 3500 96 96 2.4
(On reel DR-15 1/4 mile
per reel)
2 Cable Assembly CC-356 1B1456 - - - - -
Total 42,896 33,872 1813 1141 45.3
aRadio Terminal Set AN/TRC-3 and Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4, listed under c. include spare equipment components.
9
Par. 209
209. PROBLEM 3 - TACTICAL OPEN WIRE CARRIER TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
a. This problem involves carrier telephone and telegraph systems operated on open wire using CF-l-A terminals with CF-4-( ) converters and CF-5-( ) repeaters. It has been assumed that engineering considerations require construction of a 150 mile, 080 copper steel (40$) line with 8-pin crossarms, class 9 round poles and 200-foot pole spacing. Two pairs of wire are to be strung initially, in this particular case. The line is to be built between Office A and Office C and will be equipped with carrier and d-c telegraph equipment as shown in the figure of paragraph 210. The figure shows carrier terminals on pair one at Office A and Office C with a carrier repeater at Office B which is 90 miles from Office A. Pair two is equipped with two carrier systems, one with terminals at Office A and Office B and the other with terminals at Office B and Office 0. Each pair is composited for
DC telegraph. One composite circuit of each pair is used for d-c signaling in connection with supervision of the carrier telephone systems. The other composite circuit on each pair provides teletypewriter circuits between Office A and Office B and between Office B and Office C, respectively. Teletypewriters are connected directly to the repeaters at the ends of these circuits.
b. The equipment required for each office, including suggested spare equipment, is also indicated in paragraph 210. In addition, wire, poles, crossarms, hardware, etc., as outlined in chapter 6 will be needed for the open wire line. The telephone equipment required is selected from chapter 9, the telegraph equipment from chapter 10 and the spare power equipment from chapter 12.
c. Paragraph 211 gives a summary of the equipment required for the entire project and includes stock numbers and logistical data. The information for this table is drawn from appropriate tabular data in the above chapters.
10
210. DIAGRAM OF OPEN WIRE CARRIER TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH SYSTEM.
11
Par. 210
OFFICE A OFFICE B OFFICE C
। ; ’ I -----------------------------1 । !--------1
CARRIER TELEPHONE EQPT. ! I CARRIER TELEPHONE EQPT. I CARRIER TELEPHONE EQPT
r____ _____ । । r I r~n- . ____
TELEGRAPH I 1 TELEGRAPH,
SWBD. TTY. TERM. [*"' ' TERM CONVR 1 1 REP. I CONVR__TERM.""~~~| TERM. ' SWBD. TTY.
[SETS OR 1 _____ TC-22- — -.TC-2I TC-33 [080--CS I TC-37 l080-CS| TC-33 TC-2I — — — TC-22-'' SETS OR I
I REP SETS __ 'I | 1 REP SETS |
i L_J Fl_____________________ L_ 1 i I_____J । 1 LI ________n __________
। CARRIER rv I I , „ rv I rx CARRIER
TELEG. CX | CX CX CX TELEG I
EQ PT. <—JL_1 I 1 , ,_L_, I 1 EQ PT
TERM. | । TERM-I TERM- I TERM
I TC-18 TELEG. , I TC-18 TELEG. TELEG. TC-18 i I TELEG. TC-18 I
REP, |*-90MI.—REP. REP- |<-60MI-»l REP
< □ TG-7-bItTY.I ! ' TG-7-b|tTY.I I TTY.lTG-7-B ! ! I TTY I TG-7-B [ZZZZ] x,
I ----------tzj—1 I I 1—> I—J I—t—j------
[TELEPHONE | h" .1 II l~ TELEPHONE,
। SWBD. ---- — । I CARRIER TELEPHONE EQPT. । [CARRIER TELEPHONE EOPT. CARRIER TELEPHONE EQPT I |CARRIER TELEPHONE EQTr —— SWBD.
I 0THER ' —-----I—_____ | ______ I | ___r~ l____ - OTHER .
EQPT. ---- I 1 ---- EQPT. I
~ '"I P" TERM. CONVR. ,080-CS, CONVR. TERM f TERM. CONVR. |08Q-CS| CONVR. TERM. H
________---------TC-21- TC-33-... TC-33 ~ TC-21 __ __TC-21 “ TC-33 —TC-33 “* TC-21 _________________ ________--------- 1---------------------r---------------------------I I--------------__________________— _ ________---------I |--------------------I.-------------------------------------------______________________ ) V.F. RING.----------- ------- | , --------- ----- ------------------ ----- 1 1 ----- ----- V.F. RING.______|
EQPTS c I | rxllcx EQPTS I
TC-24 |l LX | LX TC-24
TERM. | . [“TERM. [ | | I I | I II I II V. F. TERM.' I I TERM.
I TC-18 TELEG. I | TELEG. TC-18 RING. TELEG. , I TELEG. TC-18 I
- i ! L«=P UJLI HJl±tag Y - -G"-
TG-7-B[TTY?] I I RTY.I \ I I II II 11/ |TT Y.| | I ITT Y,|TG-7-B
। TC’7-B TEL. SWBD. OR TG'7-B
OTHER EQPT.
I_____________________________________I L___________________________________________I I_________________________________________I
OFFICE A EQPT. OFFICE B EQPT. OFFICE C EQPT.
TELEPHONE SPARE TELEPHONE SPARE TELEPHONE SPARE
2,TC-2l-( ) I.CF-I-A 2,TC-2l-( ) I.CF-I-A 2,TC-2l-( ) I.CF-I-A
2.TC-33-C ) l,CF-4-( ) 2,TC-33-( } l,CF-4-( ) 2,TC - 33 - ( ) l,CF-4-f )
4,TC-24-( ) I.EE-IOI-C ) 4.TC - 24-< ") I.CF-5-C ) 4,TC-24-( ) l,EE-IOI-( )
TELEGRAPH I.CF-2-B l,TC-37-( ) l,EE-IOI-() TELEGRAPH I, TC -1 8
l,TC-22-( ) l,TC—I 8 TELEGRAPH I, TC-18 l,TC-22-( ) l[ TG - 7-B
2.TC-I8 I.TG-7-B 4, TC-18 I.TG-7-B 2,TC-18 2PE-75-C )
^■■TS-2/TG 2,PE-75-( ) ‘‘•7G-7"B 2, PE-75-( ) f*TS~2/TG l,’RA-83-( )
!;?-V3-a i,ra-83-( ) I;Is-19Tag f;::I-.9Y-ag
OUTSIDE PLANT
EQUIPMENT FOR 150 MILE 080 CS LINE, 2 PAIRS
Par. 211
211. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT FOR OPEN WIRE CARRIER TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 210.
Quantity Description Stock No. Weight - lbs Volume - Cu.Ft. Ship Tons
Export Net Export Net
a. Line Transmission Equipment (1) Telephone Equipment (See paragraph 910) 6 Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 4B8360-21( ) 8820 7140 372 240 9.3
6 Converter Set TC-33-( ) 4980 3420 264 132 6.6
1 Repeater Set TC-37-( ) 4B3237 1180 860 53 34 1.3
12 Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 4F2124 5280 4080 168 121 4.3
(2) 3 Telegraph Equipment (See paragraph 1010, 1011 Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( ) 4A2822B and 1318) 3080 2260 170 90 4.4
8 Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 1560 1168 52 27 1.6
8 Teletypewriter TC-7-B 4T2.28A-1 3200 1800 216 70 5.6
3 Test Set TS-2/TO 4TED57GG 480 210 36 8 0.9
3 Test Set I-193-A 3F4193A 285 195 14 6 0.5
(3) 3 Spare Equipment (See chapters Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 9, 10 and 12) 4B8361 2205 1425 131 61 3.3
3 Converter CF-4-( ) 4B4484 1590 840 105 35 2.7
1 Repeater CF-5-( ) 4B3205 690 380 40 18 1.0
3 Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 4F2101 420 285 11 6 0.3
1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B 4A2892B 760 575 42 20 1.0
3 Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 585 438 20 10 0.6
3 Teletypewriter TC-7-B 4T2.28A-1 1200 675 81 26 2.1
6 Power Unit PE-75-( ) 3H4575( ) 2670 1980 96 65 2.4
2 Power Unit PE-214-( ) 3H4600-214 160 (No Case) 174 7 (No Case) 8 0.2
3 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 3H4699-83 192 150 5 3 0.1
Total - Equipment 39,337 28,055 1,883 980 48.1
12
Par. 211
Quantity Description Stock No. Weight - lbs Volume - Cu.Ft. Ship Tons
Export Net Export Net
b. Outside Plant (See paragraph 608)
3000 Pole, treated, Class 9,20* 5A3220-4
1200 Pole, treated, Class 9,22’ 5A3222-1
300 Pole, treated, Claes 9,25* 5A3225-5
150 Pole, treated, Class 9,30* 5A3234 1,096,650 1,096,650 28,605 28,605 715
36 Pole, treated, Class 7,35* 5A3235-1
36 Pole, treated, Class 6,40* 5A3240-1
4650 Crossarm, PF-92-A, 8-pin
7*4" 5A1592
18,000 Pin, PF-59, Locust 8" 5A3069
18,000 Insulator IN-15, Toll,
Glass, 8GSP 3G615 29,400 29,400 825 825 21
1200 Insulator IN-128, Trans-
position, Glass 3GL815-53
60,000 lbs Wire W-153,080, c-s, 40% 1A153 60,000 60,000 960 960 24
1980 Anchor Rod AH-4 5/8"x6*GI 5B704
4800 Bolt, carriage 3/8"x4"GI 5B1106-4
4800 Bolt, machine 3/8"-8"GI 5B1510-8
1650 Bolt, machine 3/8"xlO"GI 5B1510-10
900 Bolt, machine 5/8"xl2"GI 5B1510-12
4800 Brace PF-4, Crossarm 5B2104
1260 Clamp, PF-61 or Hubbard
No. 7402, guy, 2-bolt 5B3061
2520 Clamp, FT-56, guy, 3-bolt 5B3450
240 Connector, bridging No. 3A 3Z1403
120 lbs Nail, common wire 6-d 6L1406
1980 Nut, angle bolt, thimbleye
for 5/8" bolt 5C1635-1 61,950 61,950 1,050 1,050 26
270 Ring PF-74, bridle, C-type
1-1/4" eye, GS 5B9320
4800 Screw, lag, 3/8"x3-l/2"GI 5B10006-3.5
3750 Sleeve, CU for 080 c-s
(C-080-C) 6N5614.1
14250 Washer, square, GI, 2-1/4"
with 11/16" hole 5B20209-11
15,000 ft Wire W-110B 1B110BX
48,000 ft Wire W-115B, Messenger
6M, 5/16" 1A115
25,200 ft Wire Messenger, 2.2M
Utilities grade 3/16" 1A503
600 lbs Wire W-154, tie 080 CU,
annealed, 19" 1A154
Total Outside Plant 1,248,000 1,248,000 31,440 31,440 786
Total Entire Project 1,287,421 1,276,055 33,329 32,420 834
700898 0—46-----3
13
Par. 212
212. PROBLEM 4 - FIXED PLANT OPEN WIRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
a. Fixed plant equipment will be used under a wide variety of conditions and no particular layout or association of equipment may be considered as typical. The following problem has been chosen to bring out the application of as many different types of packaged equipment as possible.
b. It is assumed that the route involves three offices, A, B, and C, and that the circuits required are five telephone and 14 telegraph between A and C, two telegraph between A and B, and one telegraph between B and C. Two pairs on an existing open wire line are assumed to be available for use. The circuit requirements can be met by providing the following facilities.
Facility
1 - Type C Carrier and
1 - 12-channel VF Telegraph System 1 - Type H Carrier System 2 - Repeatered Voice Frequency Circuits 5 - D-c Telegraph Circuits
Circuits Provided
2 telephone and 12 telegraph, A to C
1 telephone, A to C 2 telephone, A to C
2 telegraph A to B, 1 telegraph B to C, and 2 telegraph A to C with one circuit extended beyond C.
The layout of these facilities is shown in schematic form in paragraph 213a.
c_. Paragraph 213b shows the items of packaged equipment required to provide the desired layout. The items of telephone equipment are determined from chapter 9. The telegraph equipment is determined from chapter 10. Test and tool equipment is determined from chapter 13. Offices A and C are treated in different manners for the same equipment requirements. This is to illustrate the various possible solutions of a given problem. It will be noted that the equipment ordered will provide some spares which could be used later for other circuits. Also, if the installation happened to be in an existing office which already had packaged equipment, certain of the testing equipment would be available and might not need to be ordered.
d. A summary of the equipment by stock numbers and type, and estimates of the shipping requirements as determined from chapters 9, 10, 12 and 13 are given in paragraph 214.
14
DIAGRAM OF FIXED PLANT OPEN WIRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Circuit Arrangement
Par. 213
CQlflJl
15
OFFICE A OFFICE B OFFICE C
TO DC T?;Ccr To LOCAL
l?xctal “ T^°------------------------------- rQzzJ EXTENS,ON
to DC. DC. DC- DC. TE0LEC DC. t0
LOCAL - TELEC------ TELEC - TELEC- TELEC. - REGEN - TELEC. —ANOTHER
EXT. REP REP. REP. REP RER REP LINt
Ir—SPARE CX
,„EZ J_________L ------
_______ VF TEL. RER-------------------------------------- V.F TEL. REP_SPARE CX__________________V.F.TEL.REP --------- -------1 VF L WITH ----------- , WITH ________________________________ _________________________ WITH —| V.F. TO SWBO---IRINGER I COMPOSITE -.-COMPOSITE________________________________COMPOSITE —|RINCER |—SWBD
SETS [“ SETS ~1 I- SETS
T„ ___________1-- TYPE H----------------------------------1 TYPE H -------------------------------TYPE H ---- ~ --- TO
s;°bdZZ|r,nVger|Z2 PA'R2 1—|CrAeRp |---------------—---------------L—I tUrRm 1"'^r|_SWBO
SWBdZ| RINGER [ZZ tYl. I PAIR. I ~ tel I . PAIR I TEL ZZ| R,NGEr|Z sJbD
- - D C ____________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ICHI2 D C. TO
_ . TELEC- --LHj2 —— TELEC -ANOTHER
r REGEN CH 11 -------, ,------- ----------- ------------------------------------- I-----—---1 TO «EP LINE
CHK> L cTaYrPrErCep J ^p.^erPTw°bo ------
777 ------- TcY^rC ----— comToV.te —---------- LtcW TO
L NE LOCAL - VF WEST I SETS I ____ EAST ____________________ VF. CH 7 -LOCAL
EXT. —— CARR. --------------------TERM ---------- L_ VlTH CHZ teVeg CH 6 EXT
CM 6 -- With 'I -----~| --1--- ------------------------ WITH -------------------- TELEG -----
_______________ g TER“ — “I T^C.-^-T^C Si --------------------------------------------- ANl%eEW~ TBC flat siSo—|r,ncer|El R" ' _______£hl|rIngFer|ZswObD £11 -ANl°|TneER
--------------- O.C. D.C -------- I I--------------— TELEC.—I I TELEC.— To
TO ______ __________ PEP RER ------ LOCAL
LOCAL _____I I L———— — — EXT
EXT TO D.C. DC II ___ D-c _____
ANOTHER— TELEC.------ TELEC.---- TO LOCAL EXTENSIONS rep
LINE REP. REP
LOTC°AL - TEDLEC. -- -------------------------------------------------------------------- TELEC. —TO LOCAL EXT
EXTENSION RER R£P.
Packaged Equipment
Par. 213
^1
16
OFFICE C
OFFICE A OFFICES app. cabinet
APP. CABINET APP- CABINET —X-6I823E
X~6'823D Oc TELEC. I X-6I823D (SPARE)
REP. PACKAGE H CARR RINGER Z PACKAGE X-6I82OB
X-6I824A REP PAN ~ ~1
I----n X-66.2.1.7 Bj r- - RINGER । - A,-----------1
___ H CARR | rl_REP. 2 I H CARR L.J FTT?app TERM PAH ’“I I-------- LINE PAN_________ | TFRm Pan -
L.RJP-2J | l***att; Tx-6M62l7Ari
/ H CARR J- —J -------- L H CARR. r——। J
----- ' Tl.DC TELEG. F~ ’ X-862I7C --LINEMAN--. ---- ■ 1 REP PACKAGE r-U. 66217° X-662I7C
X-61824 A *1
TO TO 1 I V.F.TEL.REP. V-F TEL REP VF RlNC.FR
SWBD- VpFacRk^1R Vp*ckNaCgEpR Vp*TcEkageEP local--I F-] package package" Vp*?k*CgEeR
X^.bIoa X-6?8K25a JX^K EXT X\6lg2_'K ,.X-6I62IK| X-6I820A
ir—j hr id ir] ir—->
\ IRINGER4] IR1NGER4I lREP.3' -------- L—1-----f. —J [_ J- — - - -J I--"iRINCERaF--- -To
l(SPARE>, J l ______| ~ ">-------PAIR 2 ———3 1---- PAIR 2 SPARE CX---4 £___[ J------1 SWBD
'R1NGER3I 'RJNC.ER.3j- "{REP. 2 £ =j 1RFP_24:.-SPARE CX Ft-----! I-----------IriNCER 3 f-
; _
|RJNGe_R_2j' 'LRJNCE.R.aT i_REP-2.r i_lE_°J.J -----iRJNCERa'
i (SPARE) । ---- ' ।---{”bOx" OF i ffiOX OF"1. |rBOX~OF^l _____I 1____
LINGER J J (RINGER Ij • SPARE I I SPARE i ’SPARE1 'RINGER if
-------- —[.PARTS.;-----------------------l!ARL?.J L-PARTSJ V.F. TELEG TERM PACKAGES i-p-------------- C CARR REP. „ ’“I V.F. TELEG TERM. PACKAGES
/---------------------\ PACKAGE C CARR. EAST TERM. ------------U___________
X-6I822B X-6I822A C CARR. WEST TERM X-6I8I9S PACKAGE X-6I8I9P X-6I822A X-6I822B
r-_-1 r —|~-2" PACKAGE X-6I8I9R f—1___q ____| ,__ II -~~
ICHJOllCHT! |CH4jiCHlj ----, FwEST'U-I PA.R, 1 REP I DA1D< “T ?E R J A ST ? —-ICHljjcHAj [CH 71 JcH lo'l
rr IF” "1 !---IF 1_____________CH2 J WE ST I TFo A U___PAIR 1____________JLINEII______________PAIR 1_____________TERM! CH2 f--------------1 I--1 I----1 I---1
lST.-'JtA”’; LS-?_FLE-?J r iterm.ULine l!________ j power L ____I power ' ' bay i chi Ichz rj chs , 'chs Hchii i
•chip! Icho I ■ I cha I I rm I -£tLL ' B*Y , IPOWER' D-C. TELEC. I BAY______. D C TELEG. ---L ®AY_J [. T I [" "I , '1 1
L~T?JLSR?J IS?.*; lS”*J _____jL.BAY.r-l REP PACKAGE I--L . —j -qREF(PACKAGE _J _------- L913J LSi?*J L9j’J L91I2J
[BOX Of”! Fbox’ofI FbOXOfI |XrL-'--aA| |~2—| I^PArV^ I Fb8?’o>1 pTCX~6?1 1
I SPARE . I SPARE I SPARE । F ? RFP | I----T PARTS ' I SPARE I SPARE *
[PA-RTS J LpartsJ LparI?J —i?EP.a r------ L..t_.J • REP.2J-— L-P-A-H-T?-J L-PARTS.J L.partsJ
------ hn-------------------------Il--------- ri?e.p_ii rifAiijn ____ I .. I
[ L_PARTSJ -----------
D.C. REGEN. D-C. REGEN._______________I ’* nr Dcrcxi
DC. TELEG. TELEG. REP. DC TELEG D C. TELEG. D.C. TELEG. TELEG REP. ______________ DC TELEG DC TFl Fr TFl Fr rfp dctfifc
REP. PACKAGE PACKAGE REP. PACKAGE REP. PACKAGE REP-PACKAGE PACKAGE EXTENSION TELEG. DC TELEC. TELEG REP D_CTELEC^
X-*'*24A X-**03IA X-*'*34A X26I824A X-6I824A X-66031 A "x-6^ 2^*°E Tb.SzAA^ X-660I?* "x-ei^t06
r n r—il r—;l _ r—i r—;| |r—-j |r——j ^...„_n p;'."..
L5EA2.r LRLp_2J r?-E.RA[ I" LR-ER-2 ( >ERc?j Irep.bJ-] 1 rep. z I Lrep.2 j H i rep. a I “I
l.RSf.'J l.R_E.pLJ r L5E5J.J LRJ.PJ.j LR.'Lp.lJ Lrep.iJ !rep.> jl rlREP.iJ-] 'rep. 1 rep, M
L* TO ANOTHER TO ANOTHER TO LOCAL TO ANOTHER-*-1 EXTENSIONS*-1 LINE LINE *----
LINE LINE EXTENSIONS LINE
OTHER PACKAGES REQUIRED TO SET UP & MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT OTHER PACKAGES REQUIRED TO SET UP I MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT OTHER PACKAES REQUIRED TO SET UP 4 MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT
I I ‘ 1 l > '. -- ‘ < 1 -------------------s.
ADEQUATE BAT. FOR C CARR. TOOL SET FOR VF. REP. C CARR. TESTING D.C• REGEN. REP. V.F REP C CARR TESTING VF TELEC TEST
POWER SUPPLY 2BA-8. IOBA-27 SMALL OFFICES TEST PACKAGE EQPT PACKAGE TEST PACKAGE TEST PACKAGE EQPT PACKAGE PACKAGE
EQUIPMENT 6 BA-34 X-66O86 X-6I82IL X-6I8I9T X-6603IB X-6I82IL X-6I8I9T X-6I822C
MONITORING DC. RECEN REP V.F. TEL EG- TEST T--T „T TOOLSET FOR BAT FOR DC REGEN. REP. , TOOL SET FOR
teletypewriter TEST packace packace t T,3a small off,ces c carb test packace TF™ HF. smaLl offices
TELETYPEWRITER j X-66O3IB X-6I822C 1 l,3A X-66086 6-BA-34 X-6603IB TELETYPEWRITER X-66 086
C-OARR pTESJJ!4° tcat Irin MONITORING ADEQUATE I BAT. FOR C CARR I ADEQUATE
EQPT. PACKAGE TEST PACKACE TEl ETYPFWRITFR POWERSUPPLY 2B A - 8 . IOBA-2 7, POWERSUPPLY
X-6I8IBT X-6IB2IL TELETYPEWRITER EQUIPMENT 6BA-34 EQUIPMENT
Par. 214
214. SUMMARY OF PACKAGED EQUIPMENT FOR FIXED PLANT OPEN WIRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 215 a. Equipment Requirements d ------2££1S®_A__------- -------Office B--------- --------Office C ___________
- -a—*==----* 1 1 1 Total Total Total
Export Total Total Export Total Total Export Total Total
„ , x Signal Corps Quan- Weight Cu.Ft. Ship Quan- Weight Cu.Ft. Ship Quan- Weight Cu.Ft. Ship
------------omencla__uTe------------------ Stock Number tity Pounds Export Tons tlty Pounds Export Tons tity Pounds Export Tons C Carrier East Terminal Package X-61819P-4B8363C-1.1 x 1 680 75.0 1 9
C Carrier West Terminal Package X-61819R 4B8363C-2.1 1 1,680 75.0 1.9 ’
C Carrier Repeater Package X-61819S 4B3202C-1 1 1 570 75,0 1.9
Voice Frequency Telephone Repeater Package 4B3199.1 1 940 35.5 0.9 1 *940 35*5 0*9 1 940 35 5 no
(Triple) X-61821K
Voice Frequency Ringer Package X-61820A 4F2060 2 652 22.0 0.6 1 326 11.0 0.3
Voice Frequency Ringer Package X-61820B 4F2060B 5‘3 q’^
Apparatus Cabinet 7’0" High 4C1806-6 ! 420 30’0 0 8
" " 3’6" High 4C1806-5 1 265 9.2 0.4
" " 2’4" High 4C1806-7 1 175 11.0 0.3
type H Carrier Terminal Panel X-66217A 4B3202A. 1 125 6.0 0.2 1 125 6.0 0.2
Type H Carrier Repeater Panel X-66217B 4B3202H 1 70 4.5 o.l
Type H Carrier Line Panel X-66217C 4B3202HB 1 40 2.9 0.1 2 80 5.8 0*2 1 40 2.9 0 1
Voice Frequency Carrier Telegraph Terminal X-61822A 4A2794 1 1,500 75.0 1.9 1 1 500 75*0 1*9
” " ' " ” ” X-61822B 4A2794.1 1 1,500 75.0 1.9 1 1’500 75*0 1*9
DC Telegraph Repeater Package X-61824A 4A2798 2 990 46.0 1.2 3 1,485 69.0 1.8 3 1*485 69^0 1*8
DC Regenerative Telegraph Repeater Package X-66031A c 1 450 23.0 0.6 1 450 23.0 0.6 1 *450 23*0 0*6
Voice Frequency Telephone Repeater Testing 4F3964.1 1 192 15.0 0.4 1 192 15.0 0.4 1 192 15*0 0*4
Package X-61821L ’
C Carrier Testing Equipment Package X-61819T 4F3963.1 1 142 7.5 0.2 1 142 7.5 0.2 1 142 7 5 0 2
Tool Set for Small Offices X-66086 6R38190 1 188 7.2 0.2 1 188 7.2 0.2 1 188 7*2 0*2
Voice Frequency Telegraph Test Package X-61822C 4A2796 1 107 6.0 0.2 1 107 6 0 0*2
Test Set 1-193 3F4193 1 95 4.5 0.1
DC Regenerative Telegraph Repeater Test Package c 1 100 5.0 0.1 1 100 5.0 0.1 1 100 5 0 0 1
X-66031B
Model 15 Teletypewriter Setb 4T2.18A-1 1 450 35.0 0.9 1 450 35.0 0.9 1 450 35.0 0 9
Battery BA-8 3A8 29 0.1 - 2 9 0 1 -
Battery BA-27 3A27 10 10 0.1 - 10 10 0^1
Battery BA-34 3A34 6 4 - - 6 4 - - 6 4 _ _
Total 9,254 447.3 11.6 6,031 296.2 7.8 9^13 483.6 1275
b_. Summary of Total Weight and Space Required.
Total
Weight Total Total
Export Cu.Ft. Ship
Office Pounds Export Tons
A 9,250 447 11.6
B 6,030 296 7.8
0 9,810 484 12,5
Total 25,090 1,227 31.9 a stock numbers and logistical data from paragraphs 921, 1028, 1235, 1315 and 1318.
b Monitoring teletypewriter. Other types can be used if desired.
® No Signal Corps stock number assigned.
d This table does not include parer generating equipment and power wiring.
17
Par. 215
215. PROBLEM 5. INTERCONNECTION OF £>—C ‘TELEGRAi’H CIRCUITS AT JUNCTION OF FIXED PLANT ANt) TACTICAL CAR-RlER SYSTEMS
a. I'his problem illustrates the interconnection of the d-c local extension circuits of fixed plant and tactical wire telegraph equipment. The fixed plant equipment is assumed to be operating on an open wire line and the tactical equipment on spiral-four cable as indicated in the diagram in paragraph 216. The telephone equipment and outside plant is indicated by dotted lines, for information only, and hence are not included in the equipment summary given in paragraph 217.
b. The fixed plant telegraph equipment is the packaged carrier telegraph
terminal equipment, packaged d-c telegraph and d-c regenerative telegraph repeater equipment and Model 15 teletypewriter sets. The tactical equipment is spiral-four carrier telegraph terminal equipment. The composite sets and simplex sets are located in the telephone terminal equipment. The teletypewriters are assumed to be within the office or on the same premises. Power supply equipment is not included in this problem. It is assumed that monitoring teletypewriters are available for office use and for supervising service. Monitoring teletypewriter may be commercial equipment, Model 15 Teletypewriters or Teletypewriter TG-7-I ).
£. The data given in paragraph 217 were obtained from chapters 10 and 13.
18
Par. 216
216» diagram of interconnection of d-c telegraph circuits at junction of fixed plant and tactical carrier systems.
DC
DC regenerative
TELEGRAPH TELEGRAPH
REPEATER REPEATER
PACKAGE PACKAGE
X- 6I824A X-66O3IA
_| ---- l( SPARE)! OFFICE A
REPJ_ LOCAL REP._I_
____ _ ___________DX-^6I824 aR°M FIXED PLANT --I---►TACTICAL
REP 2 REP-2 ----DC TELEGRAPH
REPEATER PACKAGE-----------------------------------------------------------
CARRIER CARRIER
TELEGRAPH TELEGRAPH
TERMINAL TERMINAL MODEL 15
MODEL 15 TELE-1 PACKAGE PACKAGE TELETYPEWRITER
TYPEWRITER X-6I822.A X-6I822B SE"
SET L—J r f" " f——
CH I CH 4 CH 7 CH IO
l-----------|CH I ____
r —' CARRIER - DC Dc
TEL. TERM. H~5--- CH 2 CH 5 - CH 8 CHII EXT LOOPS
SPARE । ,—[X-6I8I9P OR R]Sh.JL _____________________._______ ——
__ a. I | CH3 CH6 CH9 CH'2 cV-S^R)
__________I _______। . I. . J 1 ■ . ■1 . . I -------------- sx PAIR. HC_X r I LT0 TELEPHONE || |2 |3 |4 |5 l6 TIb 9 IO TR v u I ru ■ T---------------------1
NO_I_^___| SET I_____i_r EQUIPMENT I I I I I I |i-------------------------------------L£H_I _C_HJ ' ---------
~’ r" 1 I I I I I I ' ’ ”2 _Ch_2_| I '■'-----
-------------------------------CH.2________CH si Tr-T-E.R“ I
X1. ' । । 1/ If -----------■L—] ____3 CH4J (CARB) ,------------
I----1 h cdarc- DC CH 3 -----1 I “
PAIR I CX I "I TO TELEPHONE TELEGRAPh^ I 4 ’-----1----’
Naa.11_____I SET I______f EQUIPMENT REPEATER f---------CH4 SX CA B>E AASEM
L.-pl ' PWMt ------ , CC-358
X-6603IA ----------- I (SPIRAL-FOUR
OPEN WIRE A^ESS°RY | CABLE>
LINES DC MONITORING L _J EQP’T- 8c
telpeORAPH TELETYPEWRITER -RfLl. ME-75 LISTS I
REPEATER -----------DC SIG CKT.
SPARE PACKAGE ----------------------- -------------------------H__
X-6I824A __________ REP 2 " '
CARR. TELEG. | I t TELEGRAPH TERMINAL
DlrD . "T TEST PKG. TC-22 (CARRIER)
REPJ I X-6I822C DC POWER FROM _______ I
ZcpAoin 1 L—X-6I824A |
(SPARE) । DC TELEGRAPH --------- I
—E...2 DC REGEN. TELEG. RpACKAGE
REP. TEST PKG. PACKAGE
X-6603IB
| LOCAL EXT. TO
I A TELETYPEWRITER
LOCAL EXT. TO STATION
A TELETYPEWRITER
STATION COMPOSITE SETS ARE FURNISHED AS PART
OF THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT-
t» DC EXTENSIONS OUTSIDE THE OFFICE TO
TELETYPEWRITER STATIONS USING A
TELETYPEWRITER (LINE RELAY) OR X-6I824A
DC TELEGRAPH REPEATER OR REPEATER TG-30
OR LINE UNIT BE-77, BE-77-A OR BE-77-B.
19
Par. 217-218
217. SUMMARY OF TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT FOR PROBLEM ILLUSTRATED IN PARAGRAPH 216. (SEE PARAGRAPHS 1011, 1028 AND 1315)
Quantity Nomenclature Stock No. Weight (pounds) Export Net Volume (Cu. Export Ft. ) Net Ship Tons
1 Telegraph Carrier Package: Voice Frequency; 6 Channel. X-61822A 4A2794 1520 1175 66 36 1.7
1 Telegraph Carrier Package: Voice Frequency; 6 Channel. X-61822B 4A2794.1 1520 1175 66 36 1.7
2 Repeater Package: Telegraph: D-C X-61824A 4A2798 500 365 23 9 0.6
2 Repeater Package: Telegraph; Regenerative. X-66031A None assigned 450 315 23 9 0.6
1 Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( ) (Carrier) 4A2822B 840 640 43 25 1.1
2 Teletypewriter Set Model 15a 4T2.18A-1 450 215 35 0.9
1 Testing Package: Telegraph; V.F. Carrier. X-61822C 4A2796 114 5 0.1
1 Test Package: Telegraph; Regenerative Repeater X-66031B None 180 14 0.4
TOTAL 5574 275 7.1
aTeletypewriter Sets other than Model 15 might be used.
218. PROBLEM 6 - FIXED PLANT MULTIPLE SWITCHBOARD
£. 'the policy of supplying communications to the larger headquarters by use of commercial switchboards rather than Army portable type switchboards has proved its value. These headquarters usually have remained at one location for a sufficient length of time to Justify the commercial installations. The commercial switchboards can be of greater capacity than the specialized tactical types, permitting all military requirements in a large area to be served from one switchboard. Trunk and long distance circuits are more economical and efficient when working between a few large units and with the civil system than when many small switchboards are used with a complicated network of trunks direct from each switchboard to every other one. Small satellite commercial PBX type switchboards can be used at outlying headquarters. They are specifically designed to work with a large central switchboard. The operating advantages of this system lead to better and faster service, less over-all maintenance, and less maintenance and
operating personnel. An important factor is the freeing of tactical switchboards, such as switchboard TC-1, to serve Air Force and Army headquarters where speed of Installation and mobility are primary requirements.
b. A problem illustrating the use of the material given in this manual in selecting a fixed plant, multiple switchboard is worked out in paragraphs 219, 220 and 221. It is assumed in this problem that the traffic requirements have been determined and that the problem is to order the proper equipment and estimate the shipping space. Sufficient information should be supplied with the request so that a complete detail switchboard engineering job can be done without the need of further correspondence. The problem here will demonstrate the type of information necessary to accomplish this result as well as to determine shipping space requirements.
£. A typical plan for a fixed plant, common battery, multiple switchboard, serving as a telephone switching center, is used as the basis for this problem and is illustrated in paragraph 219.
20
Par. 219-220
219. PLAN FOR FIXED PLANT, COMMON BATTERY, MULTIPLE SWITCHBOARD.
SERVING APPROXIMATELY 275 COMMON BATTERY LOCAL LINES |
4 I
••--- RINGDOWN COMMERCIAL
/ I <3 ~ ~ DIAL I
f UIAL OFFICE
TO TACTICAL MULTIPLE 2-WAY RINGDOWN -----------------
COMMON “ — ^18J
BATTERY SWBD. COMMERCIAL
IN COMMUNITY B \ I * uANUAl I
O •*------ RINGDOWN MANUAL
(45>-------------------COMMON BATTERY
COMMON _.COMMON BATTERY OFFICE
i7 BATTERY
pi amt uuinpi F 2-WAY RINGDOWN MULTIPLE -----------------
PLANT MULTIPLE- ... f..,. 23)sWITCHBOARD
COMMON COMBINED ----------------- '
BATTERY SWBD. LOCAL AND TACTICAL
IN COMMUNITY Cx LONG 2-WAY RINGDOWN MAGNETO
DISTANCE NONMULTIPLE
( . SWBD.
TO FIXED
PLANT MULTIPLE, 2~WAY RINGDOWN -----------------
COMMON ' -----------------
BATTERY SWBD. I --------------------------------------------------------- TACTICAL
IN COMMUNITY D TEST 2-WAY RINGDOWN COMMON BATTERY
AND ___ 3) NONMULTIPLE
C°"TROL “ SWBD.
BOARD -2-WAY RINGDOWN
COMMUNITY A
I________________________________________________________________________I
220. SAMPLE SWITCHBOARD ORDER.
a. General. A complete common battery, manually operated, multiple switchboard and all associated equipment should be furnished. This should be a 10 position combined local and long distance switchboard having 280 subscriber common battery lines, 75 magneto lines and 75 two-way trunks.
b. Engineering. Data. Any one of the following commercial types of multiple switchboards, made up of single position sections, will meet these requirements :
Kellogg Switchboard No. 1600 Switch-and Supply Co. board
Stromberg-Carlson Co. No. 18 Switchboard
Western Electric Co. No. 11 Switchboard
(This is determined by referring to the information contained in paragraphs 423 and 424.)
The switchboard should be in one line. The direction of growth should be left to right.
The terminal and operating room should be on one floor and the area available is 26’ by 29’. The ceiling height should be 9’ or more. (This information should be provided when available).
21
Par. 220-223
c. Summary of Equipment Required.
Combined local and long distance positions8 10
Common battery subscribers line equipments 280
Common battery subscribers line multiple 280
Magneto line equipments for long distance lines to operate line and busy lamps 75
Magneto line multiple for long distance lines . 80
Two-way trunk equipments, local0 75
Two-way trunk multiple, local 80
Interposition trunk equipments 10
Interposition trunk, answering jacks 10
Office and miscellaneous trunk
multiple 20
Ticket boxes 5
Vacant line signal plug 500
Lamp caps for No. 1600 board 2310
Lamp caps for No. 18 board 2370
Lamp caps for No. 11 board 2535
Emergency talking battery and cord 1
Full universal cord circuits, with locked-in rering supervision and ringing on calling cord, per position0 17
Supervisors' circuits 2
Switchboard test circuit 1
Stile strip number plates with hundreds designation
Night alarm circuit 1
Wire chief’s test cabinet 1
"A" type of MDF, where outside lines terminate on terminal strips, with capacity for 1010 outside pairs’* 1
Relay racks as required
Power plant as required
Cable rack as required
Operators' telephone sets 25
Operators’ chairs 12
A complete set of spare parts for estimated one year's operation
A complete set of installing tools and miscellaneous equipment
A complete set of maintenance tools 6 complete sets of installing and maintenance instructions
aThe positions should be arranged for dialing.
^Thirty of the two-way trunks should be arranged to terminate on subscribers’ line circuits in the commercial dial office; these trunks should take into account the type of cord circuits provided. The remaining 45 two-way trunks should be arranged to terminate on subscribers* line circuits in the commercial manual common battery office; these trunks should take into account the type of cord circuits provided. °Ringing on both cords is desirable, if available.
dif «a," type MDF's are not available, "B" type should be provided.
221. ESTIMATE CF WEIGHTS AND VOLUMES OF CENTRAL OFFICE EQUIPMENT
Switchboard Weight - lbs. Packed for Exporta Volume Export Cu.Ft. Ship Tons
Kellogg Switchboard and Supply Co. No. 1600 Switchboard and associated equipment 15,900 970 24.3
Stromberg-Carlson Tele phene and Manufacturing Co. No. 18 Switchboard and associated equipment 15,900 970 i 24.3
Western Electric Co. No. 11 Switchboard and associated equipment 11,800 650 16.3
heights and volumes from paragraph 427.
Section III
Telephone System Comparisons
222. GENERAL. This section gives certain general logistic comparisons between a radio relay system and various types of wire plant. It also gives comparative data on various types of wire telephone systems.
223. COMPARISON OF MEANS OF OBTAINING FOUR, OR SIXTEEN, TELEPHONE CIRCUITS. --------------
a. Paragraphs 224 and 225 show comparisons of installation times, volumes and weights of material, and other factors for the radio system employing Radio Terminal Sets AN/TRC-3, Radio Relay Sets AN/TRC-4 and Telephone Terminal Sets TC-21-( ), and for various wire line systems. They apply to 100-mile circuit lengths; paragraph 224 covering the case of four telephone channels, and paragraph 225, sixteen telephone channels. In paragraph 224 the lightest available types of wire construction are assumed. Some figures are given also for wiresystem equipment alone, to apply to the case where the outside plant is assumed to be already available. Voice frequency telegraph may be used with any of the above systems, but is not included in the figures. The equipment assumed in the radio system is given in paragraph 226, and additional information on the wire systems is given in paragraphs 227, 228 and 229.
b. It will be seen that the outside plant forms the bulk of the required weight, volume and construction time for wire plant, so that for other circuit lengths than 100 miles (within the transmission capabilities of the
22
Par. 223-224
respective systems) the figures for the wire systems including outside plant can be approximately estimated by scaling the figures up or down from the 100-mile values. Interpolation can also be used in some cases to obtain approximate estimates for other numbers of telephone channels obtained in stated ways; care is needed here, however, since for example it takes essentially as much plant to obtain two telephone channels from a four-channel radio or wire system as it does to obtain four channels.
£. The data on weight and shipping space are based on what appear to be reasonable assumptions as to repeater spacings, working spares, etc. However, it should be noted that the systems differ in their features and capabilities, so that the assumptions used in the comparison may not hold in many cases. For example, the equipment for the radio systems is based on repeater spacings of 25 miles, which is estimated
224. COMPARISON OF MEANS OF OBTAINING FOUR
to be what would be needed to take care of moderately unfavorable situations. However, where sites with suitable elevations can be obtained for the radio sets so that paths which are substantially line-of-sight can be obtained for longer distances, repeater spacings up to 50 miles or even more in some cases could be used. This would reduce the amount of equipment required by a considerable percentage. Similarly, wire systems may encounter terrain necessitating the use of routes much longer than the air line distance, in which case the equipment needed between two given points will be increased.
d. In an over-all comparison, the transmission aspects and terrain requirements of the particular systems, and the general features of radio vs. wire circuits, as discussed in TM 11-486, should also be considered, as well as the relative dependability of the various types of plant.
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS ~ 100 MILES
System Radio Relay AN/TRG-3, AN/IRC-4, TC-21-( ) Carrier on Spiral-four New Light Open-Wire®
1 Pair with Carrier TC-23-( ) TC-21-( ) 4 pairs with packaged voice frequency terminal repeaters Existing Open-Wire Suited for 30-KC Carrier Operation^
Carrier TC-33—( TC—21—( ) J. Packaged type C Carrier and Voice
TC-21-( ) Buried8 । Jc TC-23-( ) Sus- . pended
Estimated man-days for installation^^ 6e 285f f 440 1130f 1490f 2e 5e
Ship tonsj for plant
including working spares 26 75 75 320 400 9 11
Carrying weight tonsh,k Carrying weight of larg- 10 50 50 220 290 3 5
est package, pounds 475 475 475 475 835 475 810
Repeater spacing, miles Power consumption, watts: 25 25 25 •• •• • —
per terminal 500 130 130 160 320 160 525
per intermediate repeater 700 30 30 — — — —
aDoes not include aerial road crossings; see Paragraph 228, note b.
^Suspended on existing pole line, without messenger wire or lance poles. With messenger wire, figures would be approximately as follows: 700 estimated man-days for installation; 95 ship tons; 60 tons carrying weight. With lance-poles half-way between successive regular poles, figures would be approximately as follows: 550 estimated man-days for installation; 135 ship tons; 85 tons carrying weight.
cUsing 4x4 timber supports.
^Open-wire not included in the figures.
eIncludes set-up time only, with men and material at sites.
fIncludes surveying and staking the route, delivering material from dumps along the route, placing cable and burying connectors or erecting open wire line, d.c. testing and cleaning up. The figure for merely placing buried cable would be 60 man-days.
®Based on commercial crews and conditions or on Signal Corps estimates from field trials in the U.S. Jungle or other difficult terrain not covered.
hFor wire circuits, man days, ship tons and carrying weight for inside plant are negligible compared to those for outside plant, and total carrying weight is practically as large as shipping weight. Carrying weight is less export packing except in case of packaged equipment, for which no other packing is provided.
^One ship ton is figured at 40 cubic feet. Export packing included.
kDoea not include all the material for "complete 100-mile systems", which include depot spares, etc.
23
Par. 225-226
225♦ COMPARISON OF MEANS OF OBTAINING 16 TELEPHONE CIRCUITS - 100 MILES
Carrier on
Fixed Plant
System Radio Relay AN/TRC-3, AN/TRC-4 TC-21-( ) Carrier on Spiral 4 TC-21-( j on four buried spiral-4 cables® Carrier on Tactical Open Wire Carrier (TC-21 & TC-33) on 4 pair 080 C-S wire Open Wire Packaged Type C Carrier and Voice on 4 pair 104 C-S wire Class 7, 30’ Poles Spaced 150*
4" x 4" Timbers Class 9 20’ Poles, Spaced 200*
Estimated man-days for installationd 24b 840 c 1470° 1460° 21500
Ship tons for plant including working spares® 104 300 425 590 1280
Carrying weight, tons® 40 200 300 460 1020
aDoes not include aerial road crossings
see paragraph 228, note b.
^Includes set-up time only, with men and material at sites.
°Includes surveying and staking the route, delivering material from dumps along the route, placing cable and burying connectors or erecting open wire line, d.c. testing and cleaning up.
^Based on commercial crews and conditions or on Signal Corps estimates.
eShip tons and carrying weight for wire circuits are controlled primarily by outside plant. 'Does not include all the material for "complete 100-mile systems", which include depot spares, etc. One ship ton is figured at 40 cu. ft.
226. EQUIPMENT FOR 100-MILE FOUR-CHANNEL RADIO SYSTEM ASSUMED IN PARAGRAPH 224.
Weight-lbs. Voiume-cu.ft.
Shipping Carrying Shipping Net Radio Equipment (includes spares)a
2 Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-3 3 Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4 Telephone Terminal Equipment® 6300 13500 5120 10500 264 561 176 366
2 Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 2940 2380 124 80
4 Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 1760 1080 56 40
1 Telephone Terminal CF-l-A
(Spare) 735 475 44 20
1 Ringing Equipment EE-101-A
(Spare) 140 95 4 2
Totals 25375 19650 1053 684
aIt is assumed that no Amplifier AN/TRA-1 or associated equipment is used, and that each telephone terminal is at the same location as its associated radio terminal.
24
Par. 227
227. WIRE SYSTEMS.
a. General figures on shipping requirements for several types of wire telephone systems are given in paragraphs 228 and 229. These data may be used where it is necessary to make rough estimates without considering details of specific layouts.
b. Paragraph 228 applies to 100-mile carrier systems set up by means of tactical equipment on spiral-four cable or open-wire. Paragraph 229 covers Type C carrier and repeatered voice-frequencjr systems set up by packaged equipment on open wire. The summary figures do not include telegraph equipment.
c. The shipping requirements and construction times are for average conditions as defined by notes associated with the tables. If it is known that the conditions will be different from those assumed, the data will not apply without correction. Such other conditions might be jungle construction, difficult terrain, heavy storm loading areas, availability of different sizes of wire or poles, etc. An over-all comparison of the various systems should include, in addition to the information given here, the relative merits of each system from a transmission standpoint (as discussed in TM 11-486), the military conditions and other circumstances affecting specific situations.
d. A comparison of the Type C carrier and repeatered voice-frequency figures in paragraph 229 will show that there is a very large saving in material and construction effort per circuit when carrier is used. While the figures are
given for 300-mile systems, the comparison remains favorable to the use of carrier for extremely short circuits also. In general Type H carrier will be used on offshoot routes to provide an extra circuit or two; it is not covered in the table because the development of a route will seldom be based on Type H alone. However, anticipation of the requirements for Type H systems is desirable in planning.
e. Voice-frequency carrier telegraph circuits may be operated over any of the wire or radio telephone circuits. However, only the carrier telegraph systems which use different frequencies for opposite directional transmission, such as those employing Carrier Telegraph Terminals CF-2-( ), should be applied to repeatered voice circuits, or carrier systems operated on a balanced two-wire basis. Carrier telegraph systems which use the same telegraph frequencies for each direction of transmission can be applied to circuits operated on a four-wire or an equivalent four-wire basis. Additional d-c channels can be obtained over the wire system as follows: two simplex circuits (one of them being restricted in length if used for telegraph) per spiral-four cable, two simplex circuits per two pairs of open wire used for four-wire carrier and two composited telegraph circuits per pair of open wire used for the balanced two-wire and equivalent four-wire systems. These d-c channels may be used for d-c telegraph and signaling circuits.
25
Par. 228
t 4-wire rter Sets (J M1 ■'$* O <0 to o 3 3 164 304 CO to 3g 250 428 o o co 3
© o 5U co in <0 250 318 480 1130 of poles, messengei time, man-days.
TERMINAL SETS TC-2J Open wire* „ 2-Wire With Carrier Hybrids CF-7 and Rep. Sets TC-23 CO CO O M CQ to CO o H -t tO ■* 8 £ and accessory hardware, 380 lb., volume J rire the corresponding figures are 350 lb., >r 1 and 2 pair lines. tuipment as discussed in chapters 6 and 9. :om Signal Corps field trials in the U.S. t s conditions.
UAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 100 MILE TACTK w 5 £ ® o s 1 Aerial Aerial on on New Polesa Existing ] 1 Quad 1 Quad 1 1 iter Points 3 3 3 4 4 io S3 38 5. 161 211 2 * Sb 1 I 33 N tO • 440 440 1030 ®Poles assumed to be 4" x 4" timbers bIf highways or roads are crossed a« wire is to be used: weight of polec 0.75 man days. With no messenger i cShort four-pin crossarms assumed fc dIncludes telephone equipment only. eIncludes spare cable or wire and ec fIncludes miscellaneous material. ^Figures rounded to the nearest ton. ^Construction times are estimated fi tions. They do not apply to jungl<
g a stems te Repet Circuit! i ®Vi m O - © ors, etc I 00 © o * © ors, etc
o § i co CM No. of Pairs No. of Carrier Sy No. of Intermedia No. of Telephone h ® rH 0*0 _ o n. ® © 4> f s § 2 B. © H S3 & Poles, Guys, Anch Total with Poles © i 1 Cable or Wire, Cr Hardware, etc.® Total Without Pol Poles, Guys, Anch Total with Poles Without Poles With Poles
26
Par. 229
I co fl © a) © Pi xj< cMltO
© tn|in
rH «
o”
Pi
fl
g © KA
w QU a 01 rd H ns 2 285 287
Ai £> 0
O H
t
■fl
***4
A El ©
M ©
rS ©
( CD 1 *>
Al Pl Pl fl in CM|t>-
© -H O H H CM
7 5 P n n M
H tn 5fl M
P> © o
« ©
23 ©
ss r*S
m o fl
E fl O
co ©
SY &s CM CO co oloo
© -H to ko
M fl Pl tO|CO
a £ S
© O
a O •H O
o O
tO > £ in tn Io ao a>
W 50 Ai cm|cm
g fl Eh
n
h P
a
I t3
H
M 0
1 •
0
& 1
©
«
«,©
tn © m
3 43 fl ©
3 CD fl 5 0
Pl O tJ Ai
•H Pi fl
< fl -H fl p
s A< O M fl
O
Al © ® ~x|
o fl fl to P
RY §3 fl
<5 a ®
s ® r*H ■0 tn aj
s P ® POP
P fl fl 0
tn © O Eh
S
0 0 P •
• •H ®
o» • • fl fl
M 0 0 O(-H
CM p p M &
2540 3056 7 470 477 3340 3817 O O 0 n O> sjt CM tO
0 to TCg 9fS c 0 0 0
tk in 90 to o» to
CM CM fl cQ |w cm n
0
fl 01
5 4 285 289 >1 fl
40 CM • O a> CM Q 0 0 CM O
25 8 ft 33 tO s O> sH
s
fl
0 •
0 ©
e
Eh
w fl fl
0 Eh CO /—\ lev) CM O r->
>—t tO P V-/ IWX4 n t> p ■4 CM tO
tn FA
1 VJ fl
0 r>
I X_J
O O0 r”\ £ 5^12 0 to O O
T in a> W|tQ ’'T to 'J CM 7
CM CM co to cm in
O O 0 n In 0 tn 0 0
M* to <—1 cop to to ~H 0»
in CO cm|cm to «o
CM CM • to ko h tn
•0 0 TJ
0 CD 0
0
a 4-5 POP a 40 Ai ©
0 0 fl fl 0 e 0 f—1
Eh ® O eh Eh p 0
CQ Si - fl Ai z-'l
RECEIVER
1 I 1 \ /j fZ^X. /^**\>*< CAP
^^^^^^^MICROPHQNE / *SS®Z *
FIGURE 309. Handset TS-10
34
Par. 305
305. MICROPHONE RESPONSE FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS
+ I 0 --------------------1—----------------
H ~~ X
2 +5_________________________/
I
I — >y \ / uv
ct *»*,- ^.—— ——*ui \ / \
w - I 0 --/------------------------______\_____
cr / \
s -i» -y----------------------/=\--------\—
£ — / \
- < 3m / \
2 -20---------------------\ ------
z 7 1/1
< -25 —xy-----------------1---------
< o / 1
□ / \
< n - 3 o /___________________I_________
(E f----------------1---------
> y xllL_, / I
jo - 3 5-----------------------------1_________
\ ✓'—-21 \ /A
- - 4 o -------\ r V______________________
o \ V
Z -45------------------------ -Vy-----------L
U VT ‘ y \ \
t -so--------------------------------\______2_
U V7
- 55 ---------------------------------------
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000
FREQUENCY IN CYCLES PER SECOND
I T-17 (Carbon)
II Unit of TS-9-(),also T-26, T-28-( ), T-35, T-36-( ), T-38-( ) (Carbon) III T-45 (Carbon, lip)
IV ANB-M-C1 (Carbon, oxygen mask)
V T-34-A and T-44-( ) (Magnetic, oxygen mask)
VI T-50 (Moving Coil)
VII Unit of TS-10 (Sound Powered)
35
Per. 306-307
306. TELEPHONE RECEIVERS.
a. The telephone receivers described in this chapter may be divided into three categories namely, the resonant magnetic type in which the diaphragm is undamped and clamped at the edge; the compensated magnetic type in which the diaphragm is damped and free to move at the edge; and the crystal type.
b. Resonant magnetic receivers are most suTtable for the reception of tone telegraph signals where the resonant peak of the receiver matches the frequency of the tone. In the resonant magnetic receiver (’’sound powered”) where an armature drives the diaphragm, the peak in the response characteristic is much less severe than in the conventional type where there is no mechanical connection between the diaphragm and the pole pieces. With this type of receiver greater efficiency is obtained without introducing an excessive amount of frequency distortion. All sound powered units, headsets and microphones are designed to withstand the high pressures to which they are exposed during gun fire.
c_. Compensated magnetic receivers are most suitable for the reception of speech
as they reproduce equally well the more important frequencies in the speech transmission band.
d. Crystal receivers while compact, light in weight, and have a wide frequency response, have limited use in military installations because the type of crystals used in them are easily damaged by high temperatures. Only one headset employing crystal receivers is available. One headset employing a crystal receiver is listed in paragraph 310.
e. The curves in paragraph 308 show the reTative response frequency characteristics of the telephone receivers listed in paragraph 307. They indicate for the different receivers the variation of sound power output with frequency. They do not necessarily represent the relative overall efficiencies of the various receivers particularly in those cases where one curve is shown as representative of two or more receivers. The efficiencies are shown in db relative to a reference condition which is arbitrarily located in the general neighborhood of the curve for the receiver in Handset TS-9-( ).
307. RECEIVERS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Type No. Stock No. Shown in Fig»a Impedance Ohms Approx. Efficiency DB vs Handset TS-9 Resp. Freq. Char-act. Par.308 Remarks
Unit of Handset TS-9 4B1109( )/l 301 256 0 II Compensated magnetic (controlled damped diaphragm) type unit. Used in Handset TS-9,
R-2 2B2002 310 12000 +5 I Resonant magnetic (undamped clamped diaphragm) type, part of Headset P-11. Most suitable for reception of tone telegraph.
R-2-A 2B2002A 311 12000 +5 I Similar to R-2 except for details of earpiece. Part of Headsets P-12, P-16, P-18, P-20 and P-21.
R-3 4A1903 312 470 +5 I Similar electrically to R-2-A except lower impedance. Part of Headset HS-20 furnished with Telegraph Set TG-5-A or TG-5-B type.
R-13 4B2513 - 256 0 I Similar electrically to R-2-A except lower impedance. Part of Headset P-13.
R-14 2B2014 313 4000 -5 I Similar electrically to R-2-A except lower impedance. Used with Cushion MC-162. Part of Headsets P-23, HS-18, HS-22-( ) and HS-23-( ).
R-15 2B2015 - 12000 -3 I Similar to R-2-A except <\ap made for use with Cushion MC-114 furnished separately. Part of Headsets P-14, and P-19.
R-21 4B2521 319 128 0 II Compensated magnet (controlled damped diaphragm) type unit in metal or plastic case equipped with Cushion MC-114. Part of Head and Chest Set HS-17-A. Most suitable for reception of speech.
R-22 4B2522 320 256 0 II Similar to R-21 except for impedance and not equipped with cushion. Part of Head and Chest Set HS-19-A.
36
Par. 307-309
Type No. Stock No. Shewn in Fig.a Impedance Ohms Approx. Efficiency DB vs Handset TS-9 Reap. Freq. Char-act. Ftex.308 Remarks
R-30-( ) 2B2030( ) 315 128 +4 III Compensated magnetic (controlled damped diaphragm) hearing aid size plastic cased receiver with ear Insert M-300. Part of Headset HS-30-( ).
ANB-H-1 2B2051 318 300 -7 IV Compensated magnetic (controlled damped diaphragm) type unit in plastic case. Usually used with Cushion MC-162. Efficiency poorer than Hard set TS-9 but reproduces a 1000 cycle broader frequency band. Part of Headsets HS-33-( ) and HS-38.
Unit of Handset TS-10 4B1110( )A 309 700 to 1200 +10 V Resonant magnetic, armature driven clairped diaphragm type. Receiver unit of sound powered Handset TS-10. Efficiency about 10 db better than that of Handset TS-9 but poorer speech fidelity.
Unit of Handset TS-11 2B611( )/l • 3500 0 II Similar to unit of Handset TS-9 except for impedance.
aAll receivers are pictures of these part of headsets, head-chest receivers are shown as parts sets or handsets and of the sets.
308. TELEPHONE RECEIVER RESPONSE FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS.
z —--------------------
O A ZB
2 R /I/ I /\ /\
< 5 +15---------------------IA /\_/\---------
3z A\ \
2 8 +io--------------——U—I------------1---------
>8 1 * * * / \ \
$ 5 + 5----------------------------------\------
tr HI _______________ / \ \
Z U---------’ / \ --------------------
U. o ---' --------y----X-^---)_________
>- id H -------/ \\
o cc Jr----\ \ 1
2 i \ \ 4
uj >- -5 —------------■+=-'-----\________\ J a__
2 ------------------- \ XT I
U- cr H ■■—■ — _ \ ---\ V I
u. ।—io-------------------— -------------\L--IZ
hl — \ LZ
00 \ / \~V
ft \ Z \ I
< -is---------—————U________________\ \
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000
FREQUENCY IN CYCLES PER SECOND
I R-13, also R-2, R-2-A, R-3, R-14 and R-15 (resonant magnetic)
II Unit of TS-9, also R-21, and R-22 (compensated magnetic)
III R-30-( ) (compensated magnetic)
IV ANB-H-1 (compensated magnetic)
V Unit of TS-lo (sound powered)
Section III Telephone Sets
309. GENERAL. This section gives information on headsets, head and chest
sets, chest sets, and handsets. These sets employ the microphones and receivers
described in section II, and are used with radio sets, telephones, test equipment and as operator sets at telephone switchboards. Descriptive matter and stock numbers for these headsets, head and chest sets, chest sets, and handsets are given in paragraphs 310, 311, 312 and 313, respectively.
37
Par. 310
310. HEADSETS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS. Shown Receiver Imp. _______________________________Cord______ Plug Harness
Type Stock in Type of Set Length No. Con- Type Band Strap
No. No. Fig, No, 1000 cps Ft. ductcrs No. No. No. _________________________Remarks____________________________
P-11 2B911 310 R-2 24000 7 2 PL-5 HB-1 ST-20 Double receiver headset. Furnished as part at several
radio sets.
P-12 2B912 - R-2-A 24000 4-1/2 2 PL-5 HB-4 ST-20 Double receiver headset for radio use. Headset P-16 may
be used as replacement.
P-13 4B1313 - R-13 512 10 2 PL-51 HB-5 ST-20 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-114.
P-14 2B914 - R-15 24000 7 2 PL-5 HB-4 ST-20 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-114. Part of
Radio Sets SCR-189, SCR-190 and SCR-199.
P-16 2B916 311 R-2-A 24000 7 2 PL-5 HB-4 ST-20 Double receiver headset. Similar to P-12 except equipped
with longer and waterproof cord. Part of Radio Set
SCR-163. •
P-18 2B918 - R-2-A 24000 7 2 PL-55 HB-4 ST-20 Similar to Headset P-16 except corded for Plug PL-55.
P-19 2B919 - R-15 24000 7 2 PL-55 HB-4 ST-20 Similar to Headset P-14 except corded for Plug PL-55.
Similar to headset P-18 except equipped with Cushions
MC-114.
P-20 2B920 - R-2-A 24000 7 2 PL-55 HB-1 Similar to Headset P-11 except corded for Plug PL-55,
P-21 - R-2-A 24000 5-1/2 4 PL-55 HB-1 4 receivers on two headbands one unit of each headset
connected in series to Plug PL-55, For two persons to listen simultaneously on two different circuits.
P-23 2B923 - R-14 8000 5 2 PL-55 HB-7 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-162. Used with
radio sets.
HS-16-A 4A916A - - 520 4-1/2 2 HB-1 Double receiver headset. Used with code practice equip-
ment,
HS-18 2B818 - R-14 8000 1/2 2 PL-54 None. Fits Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-162, Used
in Air Corps with radio and interphone in aircraft and ground
or Tank vehicles. Replaced by HS-30-( ) and Cord CD-604 (which
Crash Helmets includes a transformer) for ground use and by BS-38 for aircraft.
HS-20 4A920 312 R-3 470 3-1/2 2 PL-55 Web strap Single receiver headset, part of Telegraph Sets TG-5-A
part of rec. and TG-5-B.
36
Par. 310
Shown Receiver Imp. Cord______Plug Harness
Type Stock in Type of Set Length No. Con- Type Band Strap _.. Z.1-E* No» 1000 cps Ft. ductors No, No. No. Remarks
HS-22-( ) 2B822( ) - R-14 8000 2-1/2 2 PL-55 None. Worn Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-114. Part of
in helmet Radio Set SCR-194,
HS-23-( ) 2B823( ) 313 R-14 8000 1 2 PL-54 HB-7 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-162. Used with
radio and interphone in ground vehicles and aircraft.
Similar to P-23 except uses Cord CD-307 for bailout connection. Replaced by HS-30-( ) and Cord CD-604 (which includes transfoimer) for ground use and by HS-33-( ) for aircraft. Cord CD-307 is ordered separately.
HS-24 4B1304 314 Sound 512 10 2 PL-58 HB-6 Double receiver headset with Cushlcns MC-114.
Type
n3 ” R-30-( ) 256 PL-55 HB-30 4 receivers on two headbands with four-conductor cord
terminated in two plugs. One unit of each headset connects the telephone and other connects to finder. Used in direction finding installations.
HS-30-( ) 2B830( ) 315 H-30-( ) 256 2 2 None HB-30 Double, Insert type receiver headset .1th eer Inserte
M-300. When used with Cords CD-604 or CD-605 which include Coil C-410 impedance is 8000 ohms. These and other cording arrangements of Headset HS-30-( ) are shown in figure 316.
HS 33 ( ) 2B833( ) 317 ANB-H-1 600 1-1/2 2 PL-354 HB-7 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-162. Used
with aircraft radio and interphone sets.
HS-38 2B838 318 ANB-H-1 600 1-1/2 2 PL-354 None Double receiver headset for use in Air Corps helmets.
Used with aircraft radio and interphone sets,
2B945 " !L™ShRT 40000 ' " ' Double crystal type receiver headset. Part of radio
Test Equipment IE-9.
39
Par. 310
FIGURE 310. Headset P-11 FIGURE 311. Headset P-16 FIGURE 312. Headset HS-20
40
Par. 310
FIGURE 313. Headset HS-23-( ) FIGURE 314. HEADSET HS-24 FIGURE 315. Headset HS-30-( )
41
Par. 310
HS-30 — // HS-30— z?' HS-30Z'' HS-30 - zZ
— /k I- /\ *— A /-junction L_ y\
I I r ..T...Y ----- BOX pl---
mw-_TRANS. mw |
FORMER* CORD- CORD—
mnn CD-604 nSW CD-933 1
r6 INCHES [W 6 INCHES
LONG H LONG
CORD- r Fl r Fl CORD-
CD-605 U U CD-874
CORD- CORD -
CD-307-A CD-3O7-A
8 J B B HIGH IMPEDANCE HIGH IMPEDANCE LOW IMPEDANCE LOW IMPEDANCE
SINGLE CORD WITH BAIL-OUT WITH BAIL-OUT SINGLE CORD
FIGURE 316. Headset HS-30-( ). Cording Arrangements
42
Par. 310
FIGURE 317. Headset HS-33-( ) FIGURE 318. Headset HS-38
43
Par. 311
44
FIGURE 319. Head and Chest Set HS-17-A FIGURE 320. Head and Chest Set HS-19
311. HEAD AND CHEST SETS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
________Chest Unit___________
Shown Receiver _____Cord_______ Microphone
Type Stock in Type Headset Type Length Plug Type Res.
No. No. Fig. No. Imp. No. Ft. No. No. Ohms __________________________Remarks___________________________________
HS-17-A 4B1277A 319 R-21 256 T-26 10 PL-58 Similar 75 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-114 connected to chest unit.
to unit Press to talk switch on chest plate. Used with Telephones such as
of TS-9 EE-8-( ). Replaced by TD-2 and HS-30-( ).
HS-19 4B1279A 320 R-22 256 T-26 6 PL-58 Similar 75 Single receiver headset connected to Chest Unit. Switchboard oper-
to unit ators telephone, also used with Telephone EE-8-( ). Replaced by
of TS-9 TD-1 and HS-30-( ).
HS-25-( ) 4B1285( ) - Sound 700 6 FL-58 Sound 700 Single "sound powered" type receiver headset connected in parallel
Powered to Powered to with sound powered microphone mounted on chest plate.
1200 1200 a
HS-27-( ) 4B1287( ) - R-21 256 T-46 6 PL-58 T-30—( ) 120 Double receiver headset with Cushions MC-114 connected to Chest Unit
equipped with cord to accommodate Plug PL-291 of Microphone T-30-( }
furnished separately. Replaced by Chest Set TD-3 with Headset HS-30-( ).
Magnetic microphone has inductance as well as resistance.
Par. 312
312. CHEST SETS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Cheat Unit
Type No. Stock No. Shown in Fig. Cord Type Length Plug Microphone
Type No. Res. Ohms Remarks
No. Ft. No.
TD-1 4B417 321 T-26 6 PL-58 Similar to unit of TS-9 • 75 Used with double receiver Headset HS-30~( ) with ear Inserts M-300. Press-to-talk switch on chest plate. Headset HS-30-( ) ordered separately. TD-1 plus HS-30-( ) replaces HS-19-A. Replaced by TD-l-A.
ID-1-A - — T-26-A 6 PL-58 Similar to unit of TS-9 75 Similar to TD-1 except microphone is connected to switch block by a cord and plug to permit substitution of Microphone T-45. Replaces TD-1.
TD-2 4B417-2 •• T-26 10 PL-58 Similar to unit of TS-9 75 Similar to TD-1 except equipped with longer cord. TD-2 plus Headset HS-30-( ) which is ordered separately replaces HS-17-A. Replaced by TD-2-A.
TD-2-A - * T-26-A 10 PL-58 Similar to unit of TS-9 75 Similar to TD-l-A except longer cord. Replaces TD-2.
TD-3 4B417-3 322 T-46 10 PL-58 T-45 60 For use with gas mask. Lip Microphone T-45 or throat Microphone T-30-( ) and Headset HS-30-( ) ordered separately. Press-to-talk switch on chest plate. TD-3 plus HS-30-( ) replaces HS-27-( ).
TD-4 — 323 T-51 — PL-68-A T-45 PL-55-A 60 Chest Unit equipped with press-to-talk switch and jacks for microphone and headset. Line cord terminates in separate plugs for microphone and receiver. Headset and microphone ordered separately.
TD-5 - - T-52 - PL-68-A T-45 60 Similar to set TD-4 except equipped with
PL-55-A transformer to raise impedance of headset con-
nection to 8000 ohms. Used with vehicular and aircraft radio. Headset and microphone ordered separately.
TO HEADSET—^.
/ii
// PRESS TO (1 // TALK (
<—v // LOCK-SWITCH I I
MICROPHONE -y' CHEST UNIT—/ |T
0= CORD --x C \ I
Ok- x-------*-- /-LIP MICROPHONE
LQJ lf\ I H
PRESS TO Y V. CHEST 1/ \\ A
TALK UNIT II \\ || PRESS Y, CHEST
LOCK-SWITCH // l\ \\ TT TO TALK /7 UNIT
// \V '7-7 LOCK" //
// \V\ SWITCH //
// \\\—LIP // ____11
// M,CROPHONE // / \
HEADSET ^"T-HEA^ET 1 li
FIGURE 321. Chest Set TD-1
FIGURE 322. Chest Set TD-3
FIGURE 323. Chest Set TD-4
700898 O—46-----5
45
Par. 313
313. HANDSETS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Type® ’ No. Stock No. Shown in Fig. Press-to-talk Swit ch Cord Plug Type No. Remarks
Length Ft. No. Conductor
TS-9-( ) 4B1109( ) 301 Yes 9 3 Spade Term. Handset for telephone use, molded handle in which are mounted switch, receiver unit, and transmitter unit. Interchangeable as assembly. Parts not all interchangeable with various makes. Part of Telephone EE-8-( )•
TS-10-( ) 4B1110( ) 309 No 6 2 Clips TL-37 Two sound powered units connected in parallel mounted in handle. Impedance of set 350 to 600 ohms. Part of Telephone TP-3 and Reel Equipment CE-11.
TS-ll-( ) 2B611( ) Yes 6 4 PL-106 Handset for radio use, molded handle in which are mounted press-to-talk switch, transmitter and receiver units. Interchangeable as assembly, parts not interchangeable with various makes. Card equipped with built in RF coll. Part of Radio Sets SCR-195 and SGR-543.
TS-12-( ) 4B1112( ) - Yes 9 3 Spade Term. Similar to TS-9-( ) equipped with hanger to engage switchhook. Used with but not part of Telephone Box EE-91.
TS-13-( ) 2B613( ) Yes 5 4 & PL-55 PL-68 Similar to but not interchangeable with Handset TS-ll-( ), has 750 ohm 1/2 W resistor assembled in handle. Part of Radio Sets SCR-509, SGR-510, SGR-609( ) and SCR-610( ).
TS-14-( ) 2B614( ) • No 5 4 PL-204 Similar to TS-9-( ) except without switch and cord to have receiver and transmitter circuits independent. Part of Radio Set SCR-561.
TS-15-( ) 4B1115( ) • Yes 5 4 St PL-55 PL-68 Similar to but not interchangeable with TS-13-( ), uses .different switch and resistor is omitted. Part of Radio Set SCR-300.
Type L Navy Code - Yes 4-1/2 2 Similar to TS-10-( ) except impedance 350 ohms and switch in handle connects both units to line cord.
aFor electrical characteristics of microphone and receiver units of these handsets see paragraphs 304 and 307.
46
Par. 314-315
Section. IV Telephones 314. GENERAL. a. This section gives information concerning the various types of telephones namely, local battery, common battery, and sound powered. b. The impedance characteristics of the sets have also been included as an aid in determining the transmission losses which are incurred when the telephones are bridged on working lines. c. The transmission characteristics of TeTephone EE-8-( ) also apply to the operators telephone in many tactical switchboards as essentially the same telephone circuit is employed. d. Where conditions make it desirable to use sound powered telephones because of failure of batteries either Telephone TP-3 may be used or Handset TS-10-( ) may be connected to terminals R and LI of Telephone EE-8-( ). Under emergency conditions of dry battery failure Telephone TP-3 or Handset TS-10-( ) may be used by magneto switchboard operators. On Switchboards BD-71 and BD-72 Handset TS-10-( ) should be connected to the A and B multiple binding posts in the rear of the board.
♦
315. TELEPHONES - ] DESCRIPTION AND , STOCK NUMBERS.
Type No. c Stock No. Shown in Fig* Efficiency VS-EE-8-( ) Trans. Rec. Impedance at 1000 cpsa Ref. Manual Number Remarks
EE-8-( ) 4B5008( ) 324 0 0 900 /62° 650 /35° IM 11-457 IM 11-333 Field telephone; weighs 9.5 lbs; local battery; leather or canvas carrying case, ringer; hand generator, ringing range 3000-ohm line with leakage resistance of 1000 ohms, 2000 ohms on lines equipped with two repeating Coils C-161; holding bridge provides signaling to common battery switchboards; antisidetone circuit; Handset TS-9-( ); transmitter current supplied by two Batteries BA-30 (not included) on connections to either magneto or common battery boards.
EE-91 4B8191 325 0 0 Wall mounted telephone box; common battery; ringer; hand generator for signaling magneto lines; antisidetone circuit; Handset TS-12-( ) used with but not part of EE-91; transmitter current obtained from central office battery.
EE-92 - - 0 0 - Telephone Box EE-91 mounted in wooden box for outdoor use. Box ordered separately.
EE-93 - - 0 0 - Telephone Box EE-91 mounted in metal case for outdoor use. Box ordered separately.
TP-3 -25 +10 600 /10° IM 11-2043 Field telephone; weighs 8 lbs; leather or canvas carrying case; sound powered handset TS-10-( ); ringer; generator for signaling magneto switchboards. Used where conditions make batteryless operation necessary.
TP-6 4B5500-6 326 0 0 550 /30° IM 11-458 Combined hand telephone set; weighs 6 lbs; common battery; ringer; dial (optional); antisidetone circuit. See TM 11-486 for transmission loss on lines of appreciable resistance.
TP-9 - Includes amplifiers in transmitting and receiving paths. See paragraph 906.
aImpedance into line terminals of telephone. Where taro values are given the first represents the condition where the press-to-talk switch is not operated, that is, the microphone circuit is open.
47
Par. 315
FIGURE 324. Telephone EE-8-( )
FIGURE 325. Telephone Box EE-91
FIGURE 326. Telephone TP-6
48
BATTERY COMPARTMENT
INTERIOR "
SWITCHHOOK -|
OUTLET----1
FOR HAND I SET CORD
Par. 316-317
Section V Loudspeakers
316. GENERAL.
a. The loudspeakers listed in paragraph 317 may be found useful in one way local communication circuits to individuals or to small groups of people.
_b. When operated from microphones or telephones all of these loudspeakers will require speech amplifiers for satisfactory operation. Any amplifier with a reasonably good response frequency characteristic and capable of delivering 10 to 15 db above 1 milliwatt should be satisfactory.
317. LOUDSPEAKERS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Type No. Stock No. Shown in Fig- Input Impedance Ohms Description
LS-1 6C35 4” electro-dynamic permanent magnet type speaker unit. Part of Radio Receiver BC-603.
LS-2 2Z6302 - 6 6” electro-dynamic permanent magnet type speaker unit in walnut cabinet. Weighs 4.5 lbs. Part of Radio Equipment RC-13.
LS-3 2Z6303.1 327 8000 6~” electro-dynamic permanent magnet type speaker unit inclosed in a steel box, over-all dimensions 8-1/4’’ x 8-1/4’’ x 5-1/4”, weighs 9 lbs, with an impedance matching transformer. Uses but does not include 4-foot Cord CD-267 with Radio Receiver BC-312 or 2-foot Cord CD-371 with Radio Receiver BC-189. Part of Radio Sets SCR-299-A and SCR-299-B.
LS-6 6C46C - 4” electro-dynamic, permanent magnet type speaker unit mounted with baffle and horn, part of Public Address System PA-4.
LS-7 2Z6310-7 328 4000 4” electro-dynamic, permanent magnet type speaker unit with input transformer mounted in rectangular steel case. 3-foot cord with Plug PL-55. Used with but not part of Radio Set SCR-284-( ).
LS-9 6049 - 250 Similar to LS-3 except lower impedance input transformer .
LS-11 6051 - 250 Similar to LS-7 except lower impedance input transformer.
FIGURE 327. Loudspeaker LS-3
FIGURE 328. Loudspeaker LS-7
49
Par. 401-405
CHAPTER 4
TELEPHONE CENTRALS
Section 1
General Description
401. GENERAL. This chapter includes pertinent data on telephone switchboards and the associated equipment that makes up telephone centrals; test cabinets and testboards for telephone central applications; and fixed plant monitoring observing and recording facilities.
402. TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARD FUNDAMENTAL FEATURES.
a. The telephone switchboards listed are divided into two types, which are tactical and fixed plant switchboards. Both types include single position and multiple switchboards. Certain ones are for magneto lines only, others are for common battery lines only and some are for common battery lines primarily but can serve a limited number of magneto lines. No strictly long distance switchboards are included. Floor plan drawings are included for some switchboards.
403. SWITCHBOARD WORKING LIMITS.
a. The switchboard working limits shown are the maximum conductor loop resistances permissible for signaling (ringing and supervision) in the station lines and trunks connecting the telephones and the switchboards. They are approximate in some cases. These limits are based on American type telephones (such as Telephone TP-6) and central offices, assuming the resistance of each telephone to be about 100 ohms and the resistance of the central office battery supply circuits to be about 50 ohms with 24 volts and 400 ohms with 48 volts. These limits may be different for foreign types of telephones or central offices having
higher resistances in the transmitters and central office circuits, as discussed in TM 11-486 ’’Electrical Communication Systems, Engineering.” The transmission losses due to central office equipment in a connection are listed. The working limits and transmission losses are taken from information furnished by the manufacturers. These may be used in connection with engineering studies and are for average conditions. Variations in the electrical characteristics of different pieces of apparatus such as occur in commercial production may occasionally produce losses somewhat different from those listed.
b. Paragraph 409 shows for various swTtchboard working limits, in ohms, the corresponding limits in allowable lengths of various types of wire and cable. Data are also given which indicate the lengths of various types of wire and cable which provide transmission losses of 2, 4, 6 and 15 db. The length of line permissible for telephones connected to a switchboard is limited by either resistance or transmission loss. The data of paragraph 409 will indicate, in any individual case, whether resistance or transmission is the limiting factor.
404. TESTBOARDS AND TEST CABINETS. Ap-propriate testing equipment is required in order to maintain central office equipment. Available types with their electrical and physical characteristics are listed in this chapter.
405. MONITORING, OBSERVING AND RECORDING FACILITIES. Information on moni-toring observing and recording equipments is included. The issue of recording equipment is restricted and requests for it should be coordinated through ASF, OCSigO, SPSLP, indicating the use and necessity.
51
Par. 406-408
Section. II Tactical Telephone Switchboards and Central Office sets
406. ADAPTER PLUG U-4/GT. This is a newly developed individual combined plug, jack and neon glow lamp, shown in figure 401, for attachment to a magneto telephone line. It indicates ringing signals by silent visual signal. It has plugs and sockets arranged so that two or more lines can be connected by inserting the plugs of one unit into the jacks of another. The functions of a switchboard BD-9, BD-11 or SB-5( )/PT including conference connections, can be performed with equipment of very much less weight by attaching the units to five or six lines that center at one point and using a Telephone EE-8-( ) for talking and ringing other stations. See TB SIG 61.
407. MAGNETO SWITCHBOARDS. The magneto switchboards listed in paragraph 410 include nonmultiple monocord type with a jack, a shutter type signal and a cord attached to each line circuit; and cord circuit type magneto switchboards. A second switchboard of the same type can be added to increase the capacity. They are either provideu with carrying cases or are self-enclosing for quick packing. All lines and trunks are provided with electrical protectors. Switchboards BD-9 and BD-11 are absolete but are included because some are still in use. Some of
these switchboards have simplex coils included in them for providing simplex telegraph circuits over magneto telephone station lines, and for phantom circuit use as described in Basic Field Manual FM 24-5.
408. COMBINED MAGNETO AND COMMON BATTERY SWITCHBOARDS.
a. combined magneto and common battery switchboards are components of Telephone Central Office Sets. The common battery lines in these have lamps in series with the line, without line relays. The lamp jacks are in the multiple associated with the line multiple jacks. Ordinarily only one line lamp per line is used. Connections between components of a set are made with rubber insulated cables which have plug and jack terminals that permit connecting the units of a set without the use of soldering irons. The power required to operate these sets is about 1.75 kva at 115V a-c, 50 or 60 cycles.
b. These Telephone Central Office Sets can be installed in less than six hours by a crew of twelve men. The layout of Telephone central office Sets TC-1 and TC-10 should be as shown in figures 410 and 412 respectively; otherwise the cable racks will not fit and temporary racks will be required.
£. Switchboards BD-80-A, BD-89, BD-110 and some BD-120 have non-lockedin ring off and rering lamp signal supervision for magneto lines and two-way ringdown trunks which frequently results in short rering signals being overlooked.
FIGURE 401. Adapter Plug U-4/GT
52
Par. 409
409. LENGTHS OF STATION LINE WIRE AND CABLE FOR VARIOUS SWITCHBOARD TRANSMISSION AND WORKING LIMITS.
Thousand Feet
Nonloaded Wires (wet.) Nonloaded Cables
Field Paper Insulated
Switchboard 083 109 080 104 (Wet. )
Working Limits Galv. Galv. 40% 40$ W -130-A CC-345
Ohms St’l. St’l. OS OS WD-3/TT W-110-B W-143 CO-355—A 16 ga. 19 ga. 22 ga.
50 2.0 3,5 6.2 10.0 0.4 1.4 7.4 2.9 6.3 3.1 1.5
75 3.2 5.2 9.7 15.6 0.7 2.1 11.3 4.4 10.0 4.6 2.3
100 4,1 7.0 12.3 20.8 0,9 2,8 15.3 5.9 13.3 6.1 3.1
125 5,1 10.5 15.4 26.0 1.1 3.5 18.9 7.3 |_ 16.7 7.7 3.8
150 6.1 10.5 18.5 31.2 1.3 4.2 22.7 8.8 20.4 | 9.2 4.6
175 . 7.1 12.3 21.6 36.4 1.6 5.0 26.5 10.3 23.3 10.7 5.3
200 8.1 14. 24.7 41.6 1.8 5.7 30.3 11.8 26.7 12.3 6.2 2db
225 9.1 15.8 27.7 46.8 2.0 6.4 34.1 13.2 [ 30.0 13.8 6.9 limit
250 10.2 17.6 30.9 52.0 2.2 7.1 37.9 14.7 33.4 15.3 7.7 "
275 11.2 19.4 34.0 54.2 2.4 7,8 41.7 16.2 36.7 16.9 8.5
300 12.2 21.1 37.2 62.5 2.7 8.5 45.5 17.6 40.1 18.4 9.2
325 13.2 22.9 40.2 67.7 2.9 9.2 49.3 19.1 43.4 19.9 10.0
350 14.2 24.6 43.2 72.8 3.1 9.9 53.1 20.6 [ 46.7 21.5 10.8
375 15.3 26.4 46.4 78.1 3.3 10.6 56.9 22.1 50.1 123.0 11.6 4db
400 16.3 28.2 49.4 83.2 3.6 11.3 60.7 23.5 53.4 24.5 12.4 limit
450 18.3 31.7 55.6 93.6 4.0 12.8 68.2 26.5 60.1 27.6 13.9^
500 20.3 35.2 61.7 104.1 4.5 14.2 29.4 66.7 30.7 15.5 _
550 22.4 38.7 67.8 114.4 4.9 15.6 32.4 73.4 33.7 | 17.0[6db
600 24.4 42.2 74.1 125.8 5.3 17.0 35.3 80.1 36.8 18.5[limit
650 26.4 45,8 80.2 135.3 5.8 18.4 38.3 86.7 39.8 20.1
700 2db" 27.4 49.3 86.4 145.7 6.2 19.9 41.2 93.5 42.8 21.7
750 limit 30.5 52.8 92.6 156.2 6.7 21.3 44.1 100.0 45.9 23.6
800 32.5 56.3 98.7 166.4 7.1 22.7 47.1 106.6 49.1 24.7
850 34.5 59.8 104.9 176.9 7.6 24.1 113.4 52.2 26.3
900 36.6 63.3 111.1 187.5 8.0 25.5 55.2 27.8
950 38.6 66.8 117.3 197.5 8.5 26.9 58,2 29.4
1000 40.6 70.4 123.5 208.0 8.9 27.4 61.3 30.9
1100 44.7 77.5 135.9 239.0 9.8 67.6 34.0
1200 48.8 84.5 148.4 249.5 10.7 37.1
1300 52.8 91.5 160.6 270.6 11.6 40.2
1400 4db''| 56.8 98.6 173.0 291.4 43.3 15db
1500 limit 60.9 105.0 185.4 312.5 Mmit
2000 81.3 141.0 247.0 416.5
2500 6db "| 102.0 176.0 309.0
3000 limit 122.0 211.0 371.0
15db T
Nonloaded Cables
> Nonloaded Wires (wet.) Field
083 109 080 104 (Wet)
Data Used in Galv. Galv. 40$ 40$ W- 130-A CC-345 Paper Insulated
Above Table St’l. St’l. OS CS WD -3/TT W-110-B W-143 CC-355-A 16 ga. 19 ga. 22 ga.
Ohms/mile 130, 75. 43.8 25. 590. 186. 35. 90. 42. 86. 171.
Ohms/M ft 24.6 14.2 8.1 4.7 111.0 35.0 6.6 17.0 8.0 16.2 32.3
db/mile (wet) 0.37 0.31 0.25 0.18 6.50 2.80 1.20 1.70
db/M ft (wet) .07 .06 .05 .03 1.23 0.53 0.32 0,32
db/mile 0.73 1.08 1.79
db/M ft 0.14 0.19 0.34
53
Par. 410
410. TACTICAL TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS AND CENTRAL OFFICE SETS - EQUIPMENT DATA. ________________________________________Switchboards Central Office Sets___________________________________________ ~_______________________________________~ ~ ~ ______Single Position__ _____________Multiple Position________
Single Position --------** c
* TC-2_________________________________TC-4____TQ-12 TC-1________Tg-5 TC-10____TC-2QI Switchboard Type Number BD-9 BD-11 BD-14 BD-71 BD-72 SB-5( )/PT BD-89_____BD-96____BD-91 BD-80____BD-110_____________BD-120
Technical Manual TM 11-331 TM 11-330 TM 11-330 TM 11-2016 TM 11-340 TM 11-332 TM 11-336 TM 11-335 TM 11-338
Shown in Fig. No. 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 *410 411 - 412 413
Classification Obsolete Obsolete L't'd.St'd. Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard L't'd.St'd. L't'd.St'd. Subst.St'd. Standard
Type Magneto Magneto Magneto Magneto Magneto Magneto Comm.Batt. Magneto Magneto Conm.Batt. Comm.Batt. Conn.Batt. Comm. Batt.
Mag. L. per Pos.a 4 12 40 6 12 6 20 40 20 30 - 30 30
Mag. Mult, per Pos. 80 60 60
CB. L. per Pos. 37b — — 60 — 60 30
CB. Mult, per Pos. — — — 120 — 120 60
Man. Trks. per Pos.c 2 — — 3 — — —
Dial Trks. per Pos.c 1 — — 3 — — —
Univ. Trks. per Pos.c,“ — 4 4 — — 4 8
Cord Ckts. per Pos. Monocord Monocord 8 Monocord Monocord Monocord 13 12 8 15 — 15 15
Dial Cord per Pos. 1 1 1 1 — 11
Jks. in Conf. Ckt. 5 6 4 10 — 10 10
Test Cabinet BE—70—B — — BE-70-F — BE-70
Grouping Key Yes Yes Yes Yes — Yes Yes
Oper. Ckts. per Pos. 1 212 2 2
Si mpl mt C-o-j 1 a — 24 1284 — — — —
Dry Cells Req'd. 266 — 68 — — — —
Power Panel BD—98 — — BD—90 BD—90 BD—90 BD—132
A.C. Power Distr. Cabinet — — — BE-75 BE-75 BE-75 —
D.C. Power & Test Cabinet BE-72 BE-72 BE-72
Rectifier RA-36-( ) — — RA-36-B RA-36 RA-36-B RA-91-( )
Mai nt. Eqpt. XE-6 ME-11 ME-30 ME-4 ME-4 ME-63-( )
Tool Eqpt. TE-44-A — - TE-44 TE-44-A TE-44 TE-44
Cells, Storage Batt. 12 — — 24 24 24 24
Battery VoltZge 22-30 - - 40-56 40-56 40-56 40-56
Pinging Eq. AC Telering Telering Telering Telering — Telering Telering
Ringing Eq. DC Interrupter Converter® Converter Converter — . Converter AuUElect.Co.
Selective Ringing 2 Party — 2 Party
MDF Prot. Type Fuses Fuses Fuses Spark Gap Spark Gap Spark Gap Heat Coils Fuses Fuses HeatCoils — HeatCoils Heat Coils
MDF Prot. Type Spark Gap Stark Gap Carbons — — — Carbons Carbons Carbons Carbons — Carbons Carbons
MDF No. Prot. Prs. 4 12 40 6 12 6 80 44 24 100 — 100 75
Prot. Panel Integral Integral Integral Integral Integral Integral BE-79 BD-97 Integral FU-19 FM-19 FM-64
Carrying Weight,packed 20 lb. 30 lb. 185 lb. 48 lb. 72 lb. 11.5 lb.
®Magneto line circuits can be used to terminate two-way ringdown trunks ^"Universal" trunks can be used to connect to either manual or dial common
in any of the above switchboards. battery central offices,
blncludes 2 "Through" jack circuits and 3 "Line" jack circuits, additional. eConverter can be used - not supplied as part of shipment (Converter M-222).
cThe manual, dial and universal trunks are designed for connection to sub-
scriber's line circuits at the distant manual or dial common battery cen- ^Not in production.
tral office, and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing.
54
Par. 410
FIGURE 404. Switchboard BD-14 FIGURE 405. Switchboard FIGURE 406. Switchboard BD-72
BD-71
55
FIGURE 402. Switchboard BD-9 FIGURE 403. Switchboard BD-11
Par. 410
-80-A but the trunks are different and cannot be bridged and the Switchboards BD-110 must be on a raised platform 10 in. high to bring Key shelves to same level as Switchboard BD-80-A. Includes one cross connecting Frame FM-19 for each switchboard position installed (each of which terminates 100 lines with a carbon block arrester and a heat coil for each line wire and binding posts for terminating field lines, with line binding posts connected to another set of binding posts to which cross connections can be attached to run to a third set of binding posts where the connecting cables to the switchboard position attach); cable racks; four Batteries BB-46 for 48V;
Power Unit PE-75-( ); power Panel BD-90; Rectifier RA-36; 3 operator’s chairs; 6 operator’s head and chest sets; connecting cords (cables); wire chief’s test set, Cabinet BE-7O-( ); Maintenance Equipment ME-4 (misc. items but no spare parts); and Tool Equipment TE-44-( ). Rep’l. by TC-20.
(7) CENTRAL OFFICE SET TC-20. Army or other headquarters complete transportable multiple type magneto and common battery central office set in which the three Switchboards BD-120 like Switchboard BD-110, are trunk type with handles and which require no packing cases. Trunk type carrying oases for the majority of the other components. Two panel positions to which a fourth Switchboard BD-120 can be added in one line-up. The three position complete set is designed so that each component weighs less than 750 pounds, exclusive of the power plant. Multiple jacks are series cut-off type which obviates cutoff relays on common battery lines. Lamps are used in series with the line and without the use of "line" relays on common battery lines. Drops are used on trunks and magneto lines. Magneto liqes can be used in terminating two-way ringdown trunks. Cord circuits are "Universal" (i.e. can connect magneto lines to common battery lines). Separate lamps on front and back cords provide supervision on common battery lines. Some have a third lamp for nonlockin ring-off and rering for magneto line and ringdown trunk supervision, and others have a drop. Rings cn front cord
64
Par. 411-412
only. Trunks to manual and dial common battery central offices are two-way, designed to terminate on subscriber’s line circuits at the distant office and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing, operating the cord supervisory lamp when operator at distant office answers or releases. Hand generator on each position tor emergency ringing power. A splitting key divides the cord circuits into two groups and permits two operators to work one position. A heating unit is in base of each position. A grouping Key on each position transfers the cord circuits to an adjacent position operator’s circuit; one dial cord and one 1U jack conference circuit per position. Rubber covered flexible cables with spade terminals connect component parts. These switchboards cannot be used in multiple with Switchboards BD-80-A of Telephone
Central Office Set TC-1 or Switchboards BD-11O of Telephone Central Office Set TC-10. Includes one cross connecting Frame FM-64-( ) for each switchboard position installed (each of which terminates 75 lines with a carbon block arrester and a heat coil for each line wire and binding posts for terminating field lines; the line binding posts are connected to another set of binding posts to which cross connections can be attached to run to a third set of binding posts where the connecting cords to the switchboard position attaches): Cable racKs; four Batteries BE-46 for 48V; power Panel BD-132-( ); power Unit PE-75-( ); Rectifier RA-91-( ); connecting cables, 3 operator’s chairs, 6 operator’s head and chest sets; Maintenance Equipment ME-63-( ); and Tool Equipment TE-44-( ). Replaces TC-1 and TC-10.
412. TACTICAL TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS AND CENTRAL OFFICE SETS -WORDING LIMITS IN OHMS.
Nomenclature To Magneto Telephone EE-8-( ) (in L.B. position) Max. Cond. Loop To Common Batteiy Telephone TP-6 Trunks to Dial Office Trunks To Manual Office
No Repeal Coils With ; Repeat Coilsa Min. Ins. Rea. Max. Cond. Loop Min. Ins. Res. Max. Cond. Loop Min. Ins. Res. Max. Cond. Loop Min. Ins. Res.
Name Type No.
Switchboards BD-9, HD-11, BD-14, BD-71, BD-72 SB-5 ( )/PT 3000 2000 1000
Telephone Central Office Sets TC-2 3000 2000 1000 200 5,000 500 “less than limit of distant office15 15,000 500 less than limit of distant office15 10,000
Telephone Central Office Sets TC-4, TC-12 3000 2000 1000 300 less than limit of distant office13 300 less than limit of distant office13
Telephone Central Office Sets TC-1 3000 2000 1000 500 10,000 Limit of distant office13 30,000 Limit of di stant office13 10,000
Telephone Central Office Sets TC-10 3000 2000 1000 500 10,000 Limit of distant office15 Limit of distant office13
Tel ep hone Central Office
a One repeating coil provided at each end of loop for simplex telegraph or phantom circuit use.
b The limits referred to are the working limits in terms of maximum conductor loop resistance to common battery telephones, of the distant office to which the tactical switchboard is to be connected.
65
Par. 413-414
413. TACTICAL TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS AND CENTRAL OFFICE SETS ---- TKWShflssIOK LOsSEs fl? db'a'T'TO(TO CTCTgs; ———
Average Losses Caused by Equipment in a Switchboard Connection Added Losses Due to Operator Bridge
Nomenclature Mag.Line Mag.Line Mag.Line 1 to to to Added Push ?cr Each CB Line CB Line to Talk Repeat to to Key Push to Talk Key Monitoring Key
Name Type No. Mag.Line CB Line Trunk Coila CB Line Trunk Normal Operated Operated
Switchboards BD-9 BD-11, BD-14, BD-71, BD-72, SB-6 ( VfcT 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Telephone Central Office Set TC-2 0.3 0.3 1.0 0.7 0.3 1.0 1.5 3.0 0.2
Telephone TC-4, Central TC-12 Office Sets 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Telephone Central Office Set TC-l 0.2 0.4 1.1 0.7 0.5 1.2 1.0 2.5 0.2
Telephone Central Office Set TC-1O 0.2 0.4 1.6 0.7 0.5 1.7 1.0 2.5 0.2
Telephone Central Office Set TC-20
aRepeat coils provided in magneto loops foa ? simplex telegraph or phantom circuit use.
414. TACTICAL TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS AND CENTRAL OFFICE SETS - STOCK I LUMBERS
AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Wei ght of Largest Pkg. Total Weight Total
Pack ed In Packed In cu.ft.
Nomenclature Stock for Export Carrying Cases for Export Carrying Cases Packed for Ship Tonsa
Name Type No. Number . lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. Export 2 3
Switchboard Switchboard BD-9 BD-11 4C9909 4C9911 35 56 20 30 35 56 20 30 0.1 0.1
Switchboard BD-14 4C9914 185 185 9 0.2
Switchboard Switchboard BD-71 BD-72 4C9971 4C9 972 84 105 48 72 84 105 48 72 3 4 0.1 0.1
Switchboard SB-5 ( )/PT - 11-1/2 - 11-1/2 - — —
Telephone Central Office Set TC-2 4C27002 400 3412 2900 146 3.6
Telephone Central Office Set TC-4 4C 27 004 240 200 650 590 21 0.5
Telephone Central Office Set TC-12 4C 27012 225 380 325 12 0.3
Telephone Central Office Set TC-l 4C 27001 887 740 10596 7900 543 13.6
Telephone Central Office Set TC-5 40 27005 2531 149 3.7
Telephone Central Office Set TC-1O 4G 27010 887 740 10596 7900 543 13.6
Telephone Central Office Set TC-20 aBased 4C27020 on 40 cu.i ’t. = 1 ship ton.
66
Par. 415-417
Section III
Fixed Plant Telephone Switchboards
415. GENERAL.
a. As stated in Chapter 2, the use of commercial switchboards rather than Army portable switchboards has proven satisfactory. Headquarters have remained at one location long enough and are large enough to justify commercial installations. PBX type switchboards can be used at the smaller outlying headquarters and connected to the larger switchboards which operate as tandem and long distance switchboards for them. Trunk circuit usage thereby is more economical and efficient. The operating advantages are faster services, less maintenance and personnel. Tactical switchboards are thus freed for use where speed of Installation and mobility are required.
b. Fixed plant telephone switchboards are commercial types. They are less capable of rough handling in shipment than the tactical switchboards. Carrying cases are not provided. They are furnished through the Army Communications Service on specific order. Both single position and multiple switchboards are included in the list that can be furnished. The particular manufacture furnished will depend upon availability. The single position switchboards listed include some that will serve magneto telephone lines only; some that will serve common battery lines only; some that will serve both kinds of lines; and some that have lines that can be readily converted from magneto to common battery. The multiple switchboards primarily are for common battery lines but can provide for a small number of magneto line terminations. Equipment for dial service is also listed. Spare parts for one year’s service are included with each switchboard.
416. SINGLE POSITION SWITCHBOARDS.
a. The single position commercial type switchboards are suitable for small central offices. They should be ordered by their stock number followed by the phrase "and associated equipment" because the stock number shown in the logistical data is for the switchboard position only. In general, these switchboards include or have space on the frame inside them for all the equipment they require, including trunks and tie lines. However, batteries and charging equipment are located elsewhere .
b. The associated equipment which will be furnished with the magneto single position switchboards consists of the following items: main distributing frame, wall type, with five terminal strips -25 pair, and five protector groups - 20 pair, on fanning strips; 35 feet No. 22 gauge, 101 pair lead covered switchboard cable; and an operator’s chair, 17-21 inch; and a wire chief’s test cabinet
when specified. Installation equipment and tool equipment will not be furnished
• with the magneto switchboards. It is assumed that the installer will have available the necessary small tools required for installations of this type. Dry cell batteries for the operator’s telephone, the night alarm circuit and the wire chief’s test cabinet should be obtained locally.
£. The associated equipment which will be furnished with the common battery single position switchboards consists of the following items: power panel including 20-cycle ringing motor-generator, static converter or vibrator; main distributing frame; 24V. storage battery; electrolyte; operator’s chair, 17 to 21 inches; operator’s head and chest sets, 1000 feet No. 20 gauge cross-connecting wire; 200 feet No. 14 gauge rubber covered ground wire, two pipe ground rods; 50 feet No. 22 gauge 101 pair lead covered switchboard cable; 50 feet No. 22 gauge 26 pair lead covered switchboard cable; and a Cabinet BE-70-( ) (wire chief’s test set) if required. Installation equipment consisting of nails, screws, nuts, bolts, wire, cable, tape twine, etc. will not be furnished except for isolated installations where in the judgment of the Army Communications Service the Installation forces will not have them. This also applies to tool equipment for the installation work on one position switchboards.
417. MULTIPLE SWITCHBOARDS.
a. The commercial type multiple switchboards and associated equipment (batteries, frames, power units, test cabinets, etc.) are of the type which require considerable installation effort for placing them, and for placing and terminating the necessary wires and cables, Both manual and dial equipments are listed. The use and installation of these switchboards is engineered by the Army Communications Service. They are for service in areas comprising several hundred common battery or dial telephones and they also can serve a small number of magneto telephones. The magneto lines have drops in some switchboards and lamp signals in others. Common battery lines in the manual switchboards are the newer types with line lamps associated with the line jacks in the multiple and have no answering jacks. Common battery lines that do not have line relays to control the line lamps, have the line lamps in series with the line. In this case the current flow through the local telephone lights the line lamps when the receiver is taken off the hook and as the lamps on a line are in parallel, the use of several lamps reduces the permissible length of line. Line lamps can be placed or removed in the several appearances in the switchboard, as required to properly distribute the traffic. The switchboards have trunk circuit equipment available to meet most of the conditions
67
Par. 417
required in the switching center networks. These include ringdown and common battery-trunks that terminate on subscriber’s # lines at the distant office. Suggested floor plans for some of these switching centers are shown, but these may be varied to meet the situations encountered in available space, for operating and terminal rooms. Detailed installing instructions are furnished with each job. They are listed approximately in the order of their capacity in number of lines b. Associated equipment consisting of main distributing frames, relay racks, cable racks, and power plant will be furnished unless otherwise ordered. All the multiple switchboards except the Automatic Electric Co. No. 119 type require 115V, single phase, 50-60 cycle power to operate charging and ringing equipment. The 119 type requires 220V, three phase, 50-60 cycle power.
£. The associated equipment that will be furnished consists of the following (which is for a typical 200 line, three position multiple switchboard and is in addition to the switchboard positions): rectifier; face equipment consisting of jacks; lamps; caps; designation strips; short multiple cable; cable separators for the first and second appearance of 200 lines; 500 feet 22 gauge 20 pair switchboard cable; 500 feet 22 gauge 40 pair switchboard cable; power panel equipped with pole changer and associated transformer; trunk relay rack wired and equipped for 20 common battery or dial trunks and 20 magneto trunks, 10 information trunks; cord test; fuse alarm and fuse pilot; line relay rack wired and equipped for 200 common battery lines; common equipment consisting
of a cable turning section and two end sections; 60 feet of cable rack; one lot of installation equipment (nails, screws bolts, nuts, clamps, wire, cable, tape, twine, varnish, solder, beeswax, etc.); one tool equipment (consisting of brace and bits, drills, saws, files, punches, hammers, level, plumb bob, plane, square, chisel, wrenches, scissors, knife, screwdrivers, pliers, torch, furnace, soldering coppers, paraffin, pot, dipper, thermometer, stencil kit, brush,electric soldering iron, etc.); main distributing frame, consisting of three verticals with 606 arrestor pairs and terminals for 420 pairs; 6000 feet jumper wire; three pipe ground rods; storage battery; electrolyte; wire chief’s test cabinet; operator’s chairs, 24-28 inch; spare parts for one year’s operation, together with drawings and specifications covering the installation.
£. When ordering additions to existing multiple switchboards, reference should be given in the order to the requisition number of the basic installation.
e. Estimates of time required to install multiple switchboards are as follows:
No . of Positions Approximate Total Hours of Work Approximate Shortest Installation Interval - Days
3 500 4
4 750 5
5 1200 6
10 2500 9
15 4000 11
20 6000 13
25 8000 15
68
par. 418
L
418, FIXED PLANT SINGLE POSITION TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS- EQUIPMENT DATA
_______________________________ Manufacturer Western KLectric Co®, Inc©____________________________ Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co®_______ Stromberg^arlson Co© Switchboard Code Number 5O6B(PBX) 550SC(PHX) 551B(PHX) 551B(PBX) G1______45JR KLOO(PBX) 15OE Universal Magneto Uhiversaf 106(PBX)
(Cordless) (Modified) (X-66070) Modified)
Shown in Figure Number 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 - 422 - 423
Type of Local Lines Served CB CB CB & Mag. CB CB & Mag. CB & Mag. CB Mag. CB & Mag. Mag. CB & Mag. CB
Suitable for Use as PBX PBX PBX PBX Small Small PBX Small Small Small Small PHX
Central Central Central Central Central Central
Office Office Office Office Office Office
No. Magneto Iz>cal Lines - - 20 drop - - 20 lamp - 100 drop - 100 drop
signal® signal® signal® signal®
No. Common Battery Local 12 with 80 with 20 with 100 with - 40 100 with - - - - 100 with
Lines with lamp signals magnetic line line re- line line Hne
■18"“ ”1,,‘
line relays
No. Convertible Lines, CB - - _ - 100® 40a - - 100a - 100a
to Mag.,with lamp signals Line re- with line Line re- Line relays on relays lays on lays on
all lines all lines all lines
Total Capacity, Lines 12 80 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
No. Trunks Common Battery 5 drop 15 3 15 10 10 10-10 - 10 10
Manual or Dial, with lamp signal
signals, terminating on
subscriber's line circuits at distant central office^ ' Trunks of other types Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way ----- _ - Two-way
available ringdownc ringdownd ringdownd ringdownd ringdownd
Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way
automatic® automatic*1 automatic*1 automatic*1 automatic11
No. Cord Circuits with 5 One- 15e 10® 15e 15f 15f 15e 16® Two- 15f 15®Two- 15f 15®
Imp supervisory signals magnetic thru bat- thru bat- thru bat- repeating repeating thru bat- drop repeating magnetic repeating subscriber's
in both front and back signal tery feed tery feed tery feed coil bat- coil bat— tery feed signal non- coil bat- signal,non- coil bat- bridged
cords, except as noted thru batt y on trunk on trunk on trunk tery feed tery feed on trunk ring thru tery feed ring thru, tery feed impedance
feed on conn. conn. conn. (Universal) (Universal) conn. magneto (Universal) magneto (Universal) series
trk.conn. condenser
Style Operators Set Desk stand Head and Head and Head and Head and Head and Head rec. Head rec. Head and Head rec. Head and Head rec.
or hand chest set chest set chest set chest set chest set bracket bracket chest set bracket chest set bracket 3et trans. trans. trans. trans.
Main Battery^Voltage 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 - 24 - 24 24
Master Ringing Key for - - - - Yes - - - Yes - Yes
Party Lines
Dial Arrangement In operator's In operator’s In operator's In operator's Dial In operator's In operator's Not used Dial cord Not used Dial cord In operatort
Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Cord Circuit Circuit Circuit
Weight of Switchboard 135 500 500 500 487 550 500 550 550 315 525 500
Position Pounds “ a
fiU8tUS tW0-WaK fln«down.tlunks' Not furnished except if ordered as additional equipment.
F Ko..runk betl*'®®“ two common battery switchboards such as those listed here, a common Ringing on both front and back cords. . srxirs b,tt,ry ““ •« “a "M,; l°*,a *• ”rins ”s”“ un“ “°-”y
Wired for one two-way, ringdown trunk which if used necessitates circuit changes in
switchboard.
69
FIGURE 414. No. 506B Switchboard (Western Electric Co.)
Par. 418
SWITCHBOARD —i r POWER _ PROTECTOR ~
EQUIPMENT FRAME ||
IB J |j ■ U H an ■ m
III IIII II I
FIGURE 416. No. 551B (Special Per X-66070) Switchboard
(Western Electric Co.)
70
FIGURE 415. No. 550SC Switchboard (Modified) (Western Electric Co.)
Par. 418
FIGURE 417. No. 551B Switchboard FIGURE 418. G1 Switchboard FIGURE 419. No. 45JR Switchboard
(Modified) (Western Electric Co.) (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.)
(Western Electric Co.)
71
FIGURE 420. K100 Switchboard FIGURE 421. No. 150E Switchboard
(Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.) (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.
72
Par. 418
Par. 418
73
FIGURE 422. Magneto Switchboard FIGURE 423. No. 106 Switchboard
(Stromberg Carlson Co.) (Stromberg Carlson Co.)
Par. 419
419. FIXED PLANT SINGLE POSITION TELEPHONE Switchboards - description.
a. . Switchboard 506B. This is a single position common battery turret of the cordless type. All connections are set up by key operation. Five calus simultaneously are maximum possible. The circuits are arranged for common battery local manual service. The trunks are for termination on subscriber’s lines in manual or dial common battery central offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. One two-way ringdown trunk can be provided. It is not designed to connect one trunk to another trunk for thru switching purposes. More than one line can be connected to a trunk for a conference connection. When the PBX is unattended a thru connection to the central office (manual or dial) may be left set up for any of the station lines. Magnetic signals are used on lines and trunks. Four conductor deskstand with head or hand receiver or handset used by operator must be ordered separately. Talking battery comes from central office to stations when connected to trunks. This limits the length of local telephone lines because the trunk conductor resistance is part of the station loop on trunk connections. One signal supervision is given on trunk connections. Local to local calls get battery through coils in the switchboard. Either the operator or the local telephone user may dial over the trunk when connected thereto. No distributing frames provided. Lines and trunks terminate on screw terminal connecting blocks in switchboard. Hand generator is included for emergency ringing power. Furnished in light oak or mahogany walnut finishes. All parts are readily accessible due to hinged cover and removable front.
b. Switchboard 550SC (Modified). The modification from the standard 550SC (PBX) switchboard is that line relays are provided on all lines instead of only twenty of them. It is a two panel single position manual common battery switchboard with single retard coil battery feed cord circuits which provide talking battery on local to local connections. Ringing is provided on both front and back cords. Lines and trunks have lamp signals. The dial is connected to the operator’s circuit which avoids need of separate dial cord and dial jacks.
Either the operator or the local telephone user may dial over the trunk when connected thereto. The trunks to manual and dial common battery central offices are for termination there on subscriber’s lines. One lamp supervision is given on connections between a local telephone line and a trunk, on the lamp associated with the cord which is connected to the local line. Talking battery for the local telephone line when connected to a trunk is supplied over the trunk from the distant office. This limits the permissible length of local telephone lines
because the trunk conductor resistance is part of the station loop on trunk connections. It is not designed to permit connecting one trunk to another trunk for switching purposes. The trunks to manual or dial common battery central offices are ringdown incoming and automatic out-goirg . The framework is designed with a compact hinged gate upon which the equipment for the position circuits is mounted, in the rear of the switchboard. If two-way ringdown or two-way automatic trunks are ordered as extra equipment their apparatus must be mounted externally. When the switchboard is unattended a thru connection to the central office may be left up for any of the station lines. Made in mahogany-walnut or light oak finish. Two switchboards can be used side by side if mounted on a platform and fitted with six foot cords, and a grouping key is Installed in one of the switchboards. Includes a hand generator for emergency ringing supply.
c. Switchboard 551B (X-66070A). This is^the 551B (PBX) switchboard, •in which special circuits for magneto lines and for central office trunks have been provided . It is a two panel single position manual common battery switchboard. Single retard coil battery feed cord circuits provide battery on local to local calls and on magneto office to local calls. Ringing is provided on both front and back cords. The common battery lines have lamp signals. Half have line relays. Magneto lines terminate on a circuit such that the line drop operates to give locked in ringoff and rering signals. Ringing on magneto lines is by key on each line in face of switchboard. Magneto lines are used as two-way ringdown trunk terminations. Includes a hand generator ringing supply. Dial is in operator’s circuit. Either the operator or the local telephone user may dial over a trunk when connected thereto. On local to trunk connections talking battery to the station is supplied locally by the specially arranged trunk equipment. This increases the length of local telephone line over what is permissible if local telephone line talking battery comes from the distant office over the trunk. It is not designed to connect one trunk to another trunk for thru switching purposes. The trunks are for termination on subscribers lines in manual or dial common battery central offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. Supervision on connections between a local telephone line and a trunk is limited to one lamp which is the one controlled by the cord in the local line. All of the equipment for the circuits of the switchboard is contained within the switchboard. If two-way ringdown or two-way automatic trunks are ordered as extra equipment their apparatus must be mounted externally. The finish is mahogany-walnut. X-66070D is same as X-66070A except it has platform and long cords for operating
74
Par. 419
two switchboards side by side; and has 5 interposition automatic trunks. Includes separate protector frames, charging equipment, battery and 20-cycle ringing for each switchboard. Connections between switchboard and distributing frame made with flexible rubber covered cable. A heater is provided in rear of the switchboard, consisting of 60 watt resistances and power supply cables. Carrying cases provided. Covered in TM 11-2002.
d. Switchboard 551B (Modified). This is the 551B (PBX) switchboard modified by providing line relays on all lines instead of only twenty of them. It is a two panel single position manual common battery switchboard. The operating features are the same as stated for the 550SC switchboard in paragraph _b. The difference is in appearance and capacity. They use the same cords, plugs and jacks. The circuits are similar but the 551B uses relays of different types than the 550SC in general, which results in the working limits not being the same in both. If required, one of each can be used side by side on a platform if provided with six foot cords. A grouping key to connect the two operators circuits can be added.
e. Switchboard Gl. This is a two-panel single position common battery manual switchboard suitable for use as a small central office. The framework is made of plywood, reinforced to withstand rough handling, its cord circuits are ’’Universal’* type (i.e. can connect magneto lines to common battery lines). The front and back cord lamps act as locked in ringoff or rering signals when connected to magneto lines or two-way ringdown trunks. The cord circuits provide talking battery to the local telephone lines on all calls. Ringing is provided on both front and back cords, with a master key for party line ringing. Dial is on separate cord. A local telephone user cannot dial over a trunk when connected thereto. A grouping key is provided which will permit two switchboards to be used side by side if placed on a platform and provided with six foot cords. The cord circuits are such that thru switching connections can be set up between two two-way ringdown trunks. Trunks are provided for termination on subscribers lines in manual or dial common battery central offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. Two lamp supervision is given on: local to local calls; local to magneto trunk; and magneto trunk to magneto trunk. One lamp supervision on local to manual or dial common battery office trunks. Local telephone line circuits are such that by a simple wiring change any line may be (converted from magneto to common battery or vice versa. All lines have lamp signals. Magneto lines can be used for
two-way ringdown trunk terminations. A hand generator is provided for emergency ringing supply.
f• Switchboard 45JR. This is a two panel single position common battery manual switchboard suitable as a small central office. Its cord circuits are repeating coil battery feed ’’Universal” type (i.e. can connect magneto lines to common battery lines). The cord circuits provide talking battery to the local telephone lines on all calls. Ringing is provided on both front and back cords. The dial is in the operator’s circuit. A local telephone user cannot dial over a trunk when connected thereto. Trunks are provided for termination on subscribers’ lines in manual or dial common battery central offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. Magneto lines can be used as two-way ringdown trunk terminations. Calls can be switched for thru connections from a two-way ringdown trunk to another of the same kind. A hand generator is provided for emergency ringing supply.
£. Switchboard K1Q0. This is a two panel single position common battery PBX type switchboard. Its cord circuits are bridged impedance, series condenser battery feed type which provide talking battery on local to local calls. Talking battery comes from the common battery central office to the local telephone line when the latter is connected to a central office trunk. This permits thru supervision to the main exchange and makes the trunk available at central office for other calls as soon as the local telephone line user hangs up. When connected to a dial central office either the operator or the local telephone user may dial over the trunk. The trunks are for termination on subscribers* lines in manual or dial common battery central offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. The addition of two relays and a dial is required with dial office trunks. It is not designed for connecting one trunk to another trunk for thru switching purposes. The station lines and trunks terminate on a connecting strip in the rear of the swit chboard and both operate lamp signals. A hand generator is provided for emergency ringing supply.
h• Switchboard 150E. Th is is a two panel single position magneto switchboard. Lines use drop signals. The cord circuits are non-ring thru repeating coil type with a ringoff or rering drop in both front and back cords, with ringing on both front and back cords. Grounded and metallic lines can be interconnected. Calls can be switched for thru connections from a two-way ringdown trunk to another of the same kind. Magneto lines are used as two-way ringdown trunk terminations. A distributing frame is not provided as the line equipments terminate in a 12 foot cable. A hand generator is provided for emergency ringing supply. Power for the operator’s
75
Par. 419
telephone and night alarm is supplied by dry cells.
i_. Switchboard - Kellogg "Universal". This is a two-panel single position com-mon battery switchboard suitable as a small central office. In general design and operating features it is the same as switchboard G1 described in paragraph e, except that it has a steel framework.
j_. Switchboard - Stromberg-garlson Magneto. This is a three-panel single position magneto switchboard. Magneto lines use drop signals. The cord circuits are non-ring thru repeating coil type with a ringoff or rering magnetic signal in both front and back cords. Calls can be switched for thru connections from a two-way ringdown trunk to another of the same kind. Magneto lines are used as two-way ringdown trunk terminations. A distributing frame and power equipment are provided unless otherwise ordered. A hand generator is included for emergency ringing supply. Power for the operator's telephone and night alarm is supplied by dry cells.
k. Switchboard - Stromberg-Carlson "Universal". This is a two-panel sing1e position common battery switchboard suitable as a small central office. In general design and operating features it is the same as switchboard G1 described in paragraph e.
1. Switchboard 106. This is a two-panel single position common battery PBX type switchboard. It is not designed
to connect one trunk to another for thru switching purposes. Lines and trunks have lamp signals. Cord circuits are single retard coil battery supply feed which’ provide talking battery on local to local connections. Ringing is provided on both front and back cords. The dial is connected to the operator’s circuit which avoids need of separate dial cord and dial jacks. Either the operator or the local telephone user may dial over the trunk when connected thereto. The trunks to manual or dial common battery central offices are for termination there on subscribers line circuits. These are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. One lamp supervision is given on connections between a local telephone line and a trunk, on the lamp associated with the cord which is connected to the local line. Talking battery for the local telephone line when connected to a trunk is supplied over the trunk from the distant office. This limits the permissible length of local telephone lines because the trunk conductor resistance is part of the station loop on trunk connections. When the switchboard is unattended a thru connection to the central office may be left up for any of the station lines. Two switchboards may be operated side by side if mounted on a platform and provided with six-foot cords and a grouping key is installed in one of them. Includes a hand generator for emergency ringing supply.
76
Par. 420
420. FIXED PLANT SINGLE POSITION TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS - WORKING LIMITS IN OHMS
Nomenclative Manufacturer Type No. To Magneto Telephone EE-8-( ) (In L.B. position) To Common Battery Telephone TP-6 Trunks to Common Battery Office
Max. Cond. Loop Max. Cond. Loopb
No Repeat Colls With Repeat Coilsa Mln. Ins. Resls. Without Line Relay With Line Relay Min. Ins. Resis. Max. Cond. Loop Min. Ins. Resis.
W.E.Co. 506B Cordless PBX 500 20000 20000° d 20000
W.E.Co. 550SC PBX (Modified) 155 20000 17500° d 20000
W.E.Co. 551B (X-66070) 3000 2000 1000 300 385 7 500 (man.) 30000 (dial) 17500° Limit of distant office Limit of distant office
W.E.Co. 551B PBX (Modified) 155 20000 17500° d 20000
W.E.Co. G1 3000 2000 1000 1400 5000 70 less than limit of distant office Limit of distant office
Kellogg 45Inc.
Switchboard Code No. 1000 No. 6-800 No. 119 No. 12 No. 605A No. 15 No. 1600 No. 12-1600 No. 119 No. 18 No. 2800 No. 11
Cable Turning Section No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Head and Foot Sections No No No No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes No
(End Sections) No. Lamps per Line (max.) -5 -1455 5 - 5 5 5
Sockets associated with
Line Multiple Jacks®
No. of Cord Circuits 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 17 17
per pos.
Type of Cord Circuits Subscriber's Subscriber’s Universal PBX Type, Subscriber's Subscriber's Subscriber's Subscriber’s Subscriber's Subscriber's Subscriber's
Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged Bridged
impedance, impedance, impedance, impedance impedance, impedance, impedance, impedange, impedance, impedance, impedance, impedance,
series con- series con- series con- series series series con- series con- series con- series con- series con- series con- series
denser denser denser condenser condenser denser denser denser denser denser denser condenser
Cord Circuit Locked-in Non locked-in Locked-in Non Non locked- Non locked- Non locked- Non locked- Locked-in Non locked- Non locked- Non locked-
rering sisals when locked—in in in in in in in in
connected to magneto on third
lines or two-way lamp
ringdown trunks
Dial Arrangement Dial in Dial Cord Dial in Dial Cord Dial in Dial Cord Dial Cord Dial Cord Dial in Dial Cord Dial Cord Dial in
operator's operator’s operator's operator’s operator’s
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
Emergency Hand None None None In each In each In In head None None In In head None
Generator position position Position 1 section Position 1 section
only onlyf only^ only
Ringing on Both Both Front Both Both Both Both Front Front Both Both Front Front
Cords or Front
Cords only
Generator Reversing Key No No No In each No No No No No No No No
for Party Lines position
Main Battery Voltage 48 24 46—52 48 48 22—30 24 24 46—52 20—28 24 24
(24 cells) (11 cells) (23 cells (23 cells) (23 cells) (12 cells) (11 cells) (11 cells) (23 cells (11 cells) (11 cells) (11 cells)
plus 3 plus 3 end
end cells) cells)
Type Distrib. Frame Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor or Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor
and Relay Racks enclosed
aIWo-v/ay ringdown trunks can be used for magneto line terminations. Reduces capacity to 1200 lines,
common battery trunks are for termination on subscriber’s On lines with line relays these control the line lamps. The other
lines at the distant manual or dial common battery office and are lines have the lamps in series with the lines. Lamps can be placed
ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. AU trunks have lamp or removed at the appearances to adjust loads on positions,
signals for incoming calls. f Has reversing key to permit ringing bells on lines with ground con-
CReduces capacity to 600 lines. dition on ring side of line.
81
Par. 423
FIGURE 424. No. 1000 Switchboard - Floor Plan FIGURE 425. No. 6-800 Switchboard
(North Electric Manufacturing Co.) (Kellogg switchboard & Supply Co.)
BATTERY CONDUITS - , -/ 5 ; 1___________8a”ery__________ t )
/ h-h ! L________________________J ---------------------------------- T
L_______ n^-1—rt------------------------- ,, -] I
n .* r\ "io
N \. t- t- * 2«>
■i. _____5? § gN TH
\ ____ 9“ “-1 ■— 9 i jij \
\ Y H I | I ul - — *’ - J — 4 = = —j- o o w \
\ V I I I t-« 2w H-J ._2 I Z“ g o o \
\ ~ i +■* ?> 9 •» S « ' zg « 2 o
\ I-L---I < o Zo 2-1 — W ® o? ♦ o
ui-p-g z I > ' «• 1
----- S “ — ----
o !o^2 j /
3 IH ? T
\ _J_______r -I JO o o O I /
, X T W UJN o o o /
z s -H "> ' ^17
2 I o N z -ih id id !n I
u a. 1 5
J ' z ~ rf>(® f
— i ° 1 . 1
..N.-ONJ,,
U X----------------
-— 44I-4- 2514— 36 — 12 |— 24-^1 12 |—24-n 12 H-24—|l2 1—24-*] 12
“•-4 ■ 3"-*■
Par. 423
[-EQUIP. TO BE LAID OUT ,---7-PIERS TO EXTEND 1-6
FROM THESE TWO WALLS / / ABOVE FLOOR LINE
R3 f » §■[*—4~* T2b~^l^ &T SO I BATTERY RACK
1 r IIIIIH “p i d-------------------
t t_ DESK chg. SUPY. GEN. GEN I
Z1 Mn - POWERBOARD ----- -- -—14-
0_____f ____l_L L-tLa.b JT
fks . 8. f S n^T’T^__________1
<* N JiQ-u; < I I 2 I 3 I 4 J_9__________________ \
1- P H,A 5 ? FRONT RELAY RACKS] f-I \ z-i 3i Si - s'0 *- 15-"------------*1 1
(J ” T 5 LINE FINDER FRAMES _ FRONT_SELECTOR FRAMES________j
. = 1 *- _ ____________LF-I_____________102____TERM, ASSEM. _101___ 2
fl I J , k2-0. ' B-Ql ■ ^.2-6^-—8-IQ1 4. 4-6 S-.Q1---|~g
|_]__[ 1 I I LF-2 201 TERM. ASSEM. 202 9
rA • I I Il ! o FR0NT ~f
\JI ' ' 1 II ; 1 X
J I J 1 l|| FRONT REPT. FRAME CONNECTOR FRAME _I
dri i 1 tk । , ____l «- ..
|Trr » i
MJ
4^|495
■«-[2-«]-• L»-3->^ >|« 2-11^—I
■ J —1-8-
1. Dimensions shown in brackets [ ] are
approximate. All others are fixed.
2. For minimum clearances refer to floor plan data sheet for particular
equipment.
Par. 425
L-----[,-,2]-------
v RR , ■ T
1 [I JIpowfp Ann I
\ ----- "1------ PLANT BAT r I
v FRONT 1 ---t-J H r , 11----—* L
4n •2-o«’||*i - Hb] 'front
4 —4-0 I —JL—2-9-X-2-9 -J
t^hh-p
I N bVERTS j 5!
-« Xl_3_2z-
i Y crs] । i 1 "j
= i ___________________________________(._i ।_____i
। 8 8 TRK . I. j|Z4 fvW U ss^^w
• r-ZSSSZ I' ■ j] E.wi ? i'i»B h
^^||F L_____________________________________________________________________
FIGURE No. 11 Switchboard FIGURE No. 11 Switchboard - Floor Plan
(Western Electric Go.) (Western Electric Co.)
Par. 424
424. FIXED PLANT MULTIPLE TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS - DESC CT PTION.
a. Switchboard No. 1000. (North Electric Manufacturing Co.) This is an all relay dial switchboard with the equipment mounted on 7 ft. frames. An attendant's position is provided for each 200 lines installed. A wire chief's test cabinet is also provided. The equipment of the switchboard consists of a basic unit of 200 lines to which one or two 100 line additions can be added, which makes 400 lines the maximum line capacity. The attendant's cabinet has a jack*on each dial line, for establishing connections. It is not recommended for use outside of the Zone of the Interior.
b. Switchboard No. 6-800. (Kellogg Switchboard & Supply Co.) This is a manual switchboard with subscriber's common battery cord circuits. These cord circuits give one lamp supervision on calls from local lines to two-way ringdown trunks. Switching of thru calls from one two-way ringdown trunk to another is not possible; the trunks do not give the necessary rering feature. These switchboards are no longer being procured.
c. switchboard No. 119-600 'Line. (Automatic Electric Co.) This is a step-by-step dial switchboard with the equipment mounted on 7 ft., 6 in. frames. One or two 400 line units can be added which makes 1400 lines the maximum line capacity. The attendant's cabinet has a jack on each dial line for establishing connections. Each 600 line basic unit is complete with two 50 arap, diverterpole generators and two 30 watt dynamotors for 20 cycle ringing; three position attendant’s cabinet and wire chief's test desk. It is not recommended for use outside of the Zone of the Interior.
d. Switchboard No. 12. (Western Electric Co., Inc."7 THis is a manual switchboard with ’’Universal” cord circuits. It is designed for growth of positions from left to right only. The magneto trunk circuits may be used interchangeably for magneto local lines or two-way ringdown trunks. Fifteen cord circuits per position is normal but an additional one on each end may be added making a total of 17. Two lever type keys are located in the middle of each position key shelf. These are for night alarm release, grouping, monitoring and master ringing. By means of the master ringing key, party line service can be given. Line relays if used mount in the rear of the switchboard sections in units of 14 which require form wiring to the last jack appearance of the lines. The number that can be installed is limited to six units (84 relays) per position. The '’Universal” cord circuits provide nonlocked-in ringoff and rering signals for magneto lines and two-way ringdown trunks. This signal is on a third lamp in each cord circuit which is mounted in the face of the switchboard in front of
the cord pair to which it is associated. Switching of thru calls from one two-way ringdown trunk to another is possible with the Universal cord circuits.
e. Switchboard No. 605A. (Western Electric Co ., Inc'.') tEi's is a manual switchboard with PBX type cord circuits. These are retardation coil and condenser type which furnish talking battery to each telephone line separately on local to local connections or on tie trunk calls and with which the talking battery comes from the distant common battery central office to the local line when connected to central office trunks. This limits the length of the local lines which are to be allowed central office connection because the conductor resistance of the trunk is part of the local line loop between the telephone and its battery supply on such trunk connections. The trunks are for termination on subscribers lines in manual or dial common battery offices and are ringdown incoming and automatic outgoing. Switching of thru calls from one trunk to another is not possible with these £BX type cord circuits. Therefore, ttfe service is limited to local, out and in traffic. Lines and trunks have lamp signals. Line relays if used are mounted in the rear of the sections and are cabled to the end section for connection to the last jack appearance of the lines. Only one jack panel is equipped in the head and foot sections. The trunk and tie line relays mount in the sections. The distributing frames are enclosed in casings at the head of the switchboard which line up with the switchboard. Floor type self supporting distributing frames are available but if used require a cable turning section at the head of the switchboard line up.
f. Switchboard No. 15. (Stromberg-Carlson Co.) This Is a manual switchboard with subscribers common battery cord circuits which give one lamp supervision on calls to ringdown trunks. Switching of thru calls from one two-way trunk to another is not possible; trunks do not give the necessary rering feature.
Switchboard No. 1600. (Kellogg Switchboard and Supply Co.) This is a manual switchboard with subscribers common battery cord circuits, which give one lamp supervision on connections to ringdown trunks. Switching of thru calls from one two-way trunk to another is not possible; the trunks do not give the necessary rering feature.
h. Switchboard 12-1600. (Ke 11ogg Switchboard and Supply Co.) The description of the No. 1600 switchboard in the preceding paragraph also covers this switchboard.
_i. Switchboard No. 119-1200 Line. (Automatic Electric Co.) This switchboard is the same as the one described in paragraph c, except that it is larger in local line capacity and has additional types of outdial trunks and has a six
89
Par. 424
position attendant’s cabinet. Each 1200 line basic unit is complete with two 100 ampere diverter-pole generators and two 30 watt dynamotors for 20 cycle ringing, and wire chief’s test cabinet. It is not recommended for use outside of the Zone of the Interior.
j. switchboard No. 18. (^trombsrg-Carlson Co.) This is a manual switchboard with subscriber’s common battery type cord circuits which give one lamp supervision on connections to ringdown trunks, switching of thru calls from one two-way ringdown trunk to another is not possible because the trunks do not give the necessary rering feature.
k. Switchboard No. 2800. (Kellogg Switchboard and Supply Co.) This is a
manual switchboard with subscriber’s common battery cord circuits which give one 1 amp supervision on connections to ringdown trunks. Switching of thru calls from one ringdown trunk to another is not possible because the trunks do not give the necessary rering feature.
1. switchboard No. 11. (Western
Electric Co., Inc.J THis is a manual switchboard with subscriber’s common ' battery type cord circuits which require two-way ringdown trunk equipment, designed to provide rering signals. Switching of thru calls from one two-way ringdown trunk to another is possible because the trunks give the necessary rering feature.
90
Par. 425-426
425 • FIXED PLANT MULTIPLE TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS - WORKING LIMITS IN OHMS.
Nomencla tu re To Magneto Telephone EE-8-( (in L.B. position) I To Common Battery Telephone TP-6 Trunks to Common Battery Office
Max. Cond. Loop Min.
No Repeat Repeat Max. Min. Max. Min.
Manufacturer Type No. Coils Coilsa Ins.Res. Cond.Loop Ins.Res. Cond.Loop Ins.Res.
North Elec. 1000(Dial) Kellogg 6-800 Auto. Elec. 119 (Dial) Western Elec. 12 Western Elec. 605A (PBX) Stromberg- 15 Carlson Kellogg 1600 Kellogg 12-1600 Stromberg- 18 Carlson Kellogg 2800 Western Elec. 11 2,500 3,000 2,000 1,000 1,000 1,050 5,000 750 10,000 1,000 15,000 500b 10,000 d 20,000 750 750 10,000 750 10,000 750 750 10,000 835 10,000 1,050 750 1,000 Dial 2,000 Man. 48V CO 1,500 Man. 24V CO 500c e 900 on 36V CO 325 on 20V CO 750 750 900 on 36V CO 325 on 20V CO 750 800c 5,000 10,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
One repeating coil provided at each end of loop for simplex telegraph or phantom circuit use.
•
For lines without line relays and with only two lamps per line.
'This figure is the minimum and may be exceeded depending on type of trunk.
1
Local telephone lines that are not to be connected to a distant central office trunk may be operated with maximum conductor resistances, as follows:
Lines with line relays 1535 ohms
Lines without line relays, two 2C lanps 400 ohms " " n » three 20 * 215 ohms
* * * * four 20 " 125 ohms
Local telephone lines which are to be connected to central office trunks may be operated on the above loops unless limited by the distant central office permissible maximum conductor loop resistance. The maximum conductor loop resistance through the No. 605A switchboard cord circuit to the distant central office should not exceed the permissible maximum conductor loop resistance for a Telephone TP-6 connected directly to that central office.
aThe trunk maximum conductor loop resistance should not exceed the permissible maximum conductor loop resistance for a Telephone TP-6 connected directly to that central office, less 250 ohms.
426» FIXED PLANT MULTIPLE TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS - TRANSMISSION LOSSES INDB AT 1000 CYCLES.
Average Losses Caused by Equipment in a Switchboard Connection Added Losses
Mag.Line Mag.Line Mag.Line CB Line CB Line CB Line Due to
Nomenclature to to to to to to Operator Bridge
Manufacturer Type No. Mag.Line CB Line Trunk CB Line CB Trunk 1 Tie Trunk Talking 3.0 Monitoring 2.7b
North Elec. 1000(Dial) 2.9a 1.6a 2.3a 0.3 1.0
Kellogg 6-800 1.2 1.8 2.3 0.2
Auto. Elec. 119(Dial) 0.8 0.8 1.6 0.7 0.8 1.5 0.5
Western Elec. 12 0.2 0.4 1.1 0.5 1.1 2.5 0.2
Western Elec. 605A (PBX) Stromberg- 15 0.7 0.5 0.9 1.5
Carlson Kellogg 1600 Kellogg 12-1600 Stromberg- 18 1.2 1.8 2.3 0.2
Carlson Kellogg 2800 1.2 1.8 2.3 0.2
Western Elec. 11 .4 .7 2.5
®With repeat coils in magneto lines, (one coil provided at each end of loop for simplex telegraph or phantom circuit use).
^Without monitoring coil.
91
Par. 427-428
427, FIXED PLANT MULTIPLE TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT -LOGISTICAL DATA.
Nomenclature Packed for Export Ship Tonsa
No. of Packages Total Weight lbs. TotaJ L Cu. Ft.
Manufacturer Type No.
North Elec. 1000 (Dial) 22141 for 100L 1235 for 100L 30.9
add add
5651 for 100L 324 for 100L 8.1
Kellogg 6-800 7 500 for 3 Pos.d 480 for 3 Pos? 12.0
Auto.Elec, 119b(Dial) 143 39200 for 600L 2346 for 600L 58.6
add add
35 11956 for 400L 718 for 400L 17.9
Western. Elec. 12 7 500 for 3 Pos? 480 for 3 Pos.d 12.0
Western Elec. 605A (PBX) 8700 for 4 Pos. 550 for 4 Pos. 13.7
Stromberg 15 7500 for 3 Pos. 480 for 3 Pos. 12.0
Carlson
Kellogg 1600 7500 for 3 Pos. 480 for 3 Pos.d 12.0
Kellogg 12-1600 7 500 for 3 Pos. 480 for 3 Pos.^ 12.0
Auto.Elec. 119c 180 60000 for 1200L 4000 for 1200L 100.0
add add
35 11956 for 400L 718 for 400L 17.9
Stromberg 18 7 500 for 3 Pos.d 480 for 3 Pos? 17.0
Carlson
Kellogg 2800 7 500 for 3 Pos? 480 for 3 Pos<>d 12.0
Western Elec. 11 7800 for 5 Pos. 430 for 5 Pos. 11.0
aA ship ton equals 40 cu. ft.
^Signal Corps Contract W-287-SC-4894, DP-42-T-548 and Automatic Electric Company Sales Orders 7307-A to H, J to M, Q to V.
cSignal Corps Contract W-287-SC-4894, DP-42-T-548 and Automatic Electric Company Sales Orders 7307-N and P, plus Q to Y.
^Weight and cubic contents of 3 position switchboards and associated equipment are estimated. Add 1200 lbs and 70 cu. ft. for each added position and associated equipment.
Section IV
Test Cabinets and Testboards
428. GENERAL.
a. Test cabinets and testboards are devices for use in telephone switching centers or in the field by testboard attendants, wire chiefs, line repairmen, and maintenance forces. These men should be provided with test equipment and telephones to enable them to test and analyze the circuits for grounds, shorts, crosses, and opens, and thereby clear
troubles on lines and in equipment units. A Wheatstone bridge is desirable to locate troubles. In the majority of cases where conditions permit, the testman will first make a talking and ringing test when a trouble is reported, to sectiqnalize the location of the fault. This will enable him to turn the faulty circuit over to the proper maintenance man for analyzing, locating and clearing the trouble.
b. Description of these test cabinets and testboards are given in paragraph 429 and stock numbers, shipping weights and dimensions are covered in paragraph 430 4
92
par. 429
429. TEST CABINETS AND TESTBOARDS - DESCRIPTION. „ . . Shown Carrying tm or
---rr-Nomencla^re ----- in Talking and Signaling Weight Instruction ---Name---- Type No. _Fig^ Testing Features Features_______________ Pounds® Sizeb Book _____________________________Remarks ______________ Cabinet BE-7O-( .)-----438 100,000-ohm voltmeter To talk to all switch- 32 12" x 9" IM 11-345 Fixed plant wire chief’s voltmeter
d!coUAht0 ?°V’ ♦T13 t0 a11 x 18" testing e ! , II®1
& VOLTMETER -CL';.~-S—-L_.-.:__- I ■'" XL W 1 z 1HBM
testkeys • .."r.-—Ex.—crrrxj / A w 1 £.-
-i I t t ■ 1 IW
test CORD—>3 ’*sXZ ^grr— I'11^^
"' z f ^asB8^_ -dr
BINDING POSTS FOR | f i t^T
WHEATSTONE BRIDGE f
HAND GENERATOR FIGURE 438 Cabinet FIGURE 439. Mobile Test Unit FIGURE 440. Test and Control Board
BE-70-( J X-63699A X-66034A or X-66034B
95
450. TEST CABINETS, AND TESTBOARDS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
______Nomenclature____ Additional equipment required ____Weight - pounds___ Displacement - Cu,Ft, Packed for_______________________________________________________________________________Packed for
Name___ Type No, Stock No, _____________Equipment Code___ export In carrying case export In carrying case
Cabinet BE-70-( ) 3F2405 20 Batteries BA-17 with 119 68 4.9 3.1
suitable box (Connect to Not portable
24V. central office bat-
tery for telephone cir-
cuit) .
1 Handset TS-8, or
1 Headset HS-30
1 Cord CD-605 and
1 Chest Set TD-1, or
1 Telephone EE-8-( ) , or
equivalent with 2
Batteries BA-30 for
local battery operation
Mobile Test Western - 3 Batteries BA-36 340 210 18.8 13.3
Unit Electric Co. 10 Batteries BA-34, or Not portable
X-63699A 6 Batteries BA-34 but equipped
6 Batteries BA-27 with wheels
Test and Western - 5 Batteries BA-23 725 for 525 for X-66034A 31.6 23.5
Control Board Electric Co. 6 Batteries BA-34 X-66034A 700 for X-66034B
X-66034A or 3 Batteries BA-36 900 for
X-66034B 2 Batteries BA-31 X-66034B
(X-66034B is
similar to
BD-101-T2)
1
96
Par. 430
par. 431
Section V
Monitoring, observing and Recording Facilities
431. GENERAL. The equipment described in paragraph 432 has been provided for monitoring on commercial or Army telephone circuits. The essential features of this equipment are monitoring arrangements which introduce only a negligible transmission loss on the circuit, an ar
rangement whereby the observer may interrupt conversation and talk to either of the users individually without interfering with the circuit signaling or supervision, and means for making a record of conversation over the circuit. The equipment is designed for use in telephone buildings which have commercial telephone central offices or fixed plant Army switchboards. Stock numbers, weights and volumes of these equipments are given in paragraph 433.
97
Par. 432
432 .__________________________________________________________
Shown in Weight Power Instruction
Item Nomene lature Fig. Use (Lbs.) Size Requirements Book ___________Remarks_________________
(A) Toll Line Ob- 441 At Telephone 78 17-1/4* 115 Volts W.E.CO. For observing on originating long disserving Cabinet Central Office x 15-3/8" a-c, 50-60 X-66208 tance calls. Long distance toll line
ADW-BM-100 for monitoring, x 14-3/8* cycles, 60 may be connected either through the
talking, split- watts patching cabinet, Item (B), or directly,
ting and record- 'Die long distance line loops through the
ing (external cabinet in such a way that no call can
recorder) - on be completed unless cleared by the ob-
single toll server. Splitting does not interrupt
line the circuit for direct current. A re-
corder, Item (E), may be used with this cabinet. Cabinet contains a power pack. A General Electric Con?)any, Type M, 1 KVA transformer is packaged with each cabinet for use where the available power is other than 115 volts. Instruction books, connecting cords, transformer and spare parts (sufficient for one year) are boxed with the cabinet for export shipment. The cabinet is made of wood and is suitable for use in tropical areas.
(B) Toll Line 442 At Telephone 38 18-1/8" Power from W.E.Co. For connecting long distance lines to
Patching Central Office x 11-1/4" power pack X-66208 observing cabinets, Item (A). Contains
Cabinet for connecting x 12" in toll talking and signaling facilities between
ADW-BM-100 toll observing line ob- the attendant and either toll switchcabinets to toll serving board operators or observers. Instruc-
lines - 10 toll cabinet, tion books, connecting cards, spare
lines capacity Item (A) parts (sufficient for one year) are boxed
with the cabinet for export shipment. The cabinet is made of wood and is suitable for use in tropical areas.
(C) Multiline 443 At Telephone 50 19-1/2" 11? Volts W.E.Co. For monitoring or recording, with the aid
Observing Central Office x U-3/4* a-c, 50-60 X-66209 of Item (E), on any one of 30 local com-
Cabinet for monitoring 1 10-1/4" cycles and mon battery or magneto subscriber lines
ADW-BM-100 and recording d-c P°" or trunks- A General Electric Co., Type
(external re- tentials M, 1 KVA transformer is packaged with
corder) - 30 from cen- each cabinet for use where the available
’ ’ tral of- commercial power is other than 115 volts,
local line or Instruction books, connecting block,
trunk capacity cords, cables, spare parts (sufficient
ao wnttq for one y®ar)» transformer are boxed
a ’ with the cabinet for export shipment.
’ The cabinet is made of steel and is
watts suitable for use in tropical areas.
MONITORING, OBSERVING, AND RECORDING FACILITIES - DESCRIPTION
90
Par. 432
99
Shown in Weight Power Instruction
Item Nomenclature Fig. Use______ (Lbs.) Size Requirements Book ___________Remarks ________________
(D) Five-line Ob- 444 On Government 50 17-1/4" 20-26 Volt W.E.Co. For observing on a maximum of five com-
serving Cabinet premises at x 15-3/8" battery, X-66329 mon battery type of lines or trunks -
ADW-BM-100 enfcarkation x 14-3/8" 8 watts lamp signal indicates established call,
centers within Arrangements are included for connecting
the continental an external recorder, Item (E). Cabi-
United States, nets may be grouped for light load op-
for monitoring, eration. Instruction books are in-
talking, split- eluded with set. Where 20-26 volt batting, flashing tery is not available, the Western
an operator at Electric Company rectifier KS-15006 may
the central of- be specified. This rectifier operates
flee, grouping, on 60 cycles, requires 60 watts and
and recording nay be used to supply battery for three
(external re- five-line observing cabinets. The
corder) - five- cabinet is made of wood. This equip-
line or trunk ment is not moistureproofed.
capacity (E) Amertype 445 At Telephone 46 18-5/8" 115 Volts Amertype Record- Film type (embossing on cellulose
Recordgraph Central Office x 9-1/2" a-c, 50-60 graph Company’s acetate tape), crystal or carbon micro-
Company’s and government x 13-1/2" cycles, Operating In- phone, start-stop either manual or
Coimando" premises in 115 watts struction for voice control, automatic volume control,
A conjunction "Comnando" 115 sound tracks provide approximately
Recordgraph with monitoring Model A Record- 2-1/2 hrs. recording time for one loop
and observing graph of film. Playback on either a headset
cabinets. or loudspeaker. Capable of recording
Items (A), (C) speech volumes at levels as low as ap-
831(1 (0) proximately -30 vu measured on the line
side of the input of the monitoring amplifier. The spare parts and operating instructions are also boxed with the recordgraph for export shipment.
Suitable for use in tropical areas.
Par. 432
FIGURE 441. Toll Line Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100 FIGURE 442. Toll Line Patching
Cabinet ADW-BM-100
100
Par. 432
101
FIGURE 443. Multiline Observing FIGURE 444. Five-Line Observing FIGURE 445. Recorder (Amertype
Cabinet ADW-BM-100 Cabinet ADW-BM-100 Recordgraph Co. "Commando’’
Model A)
Par. 433
433. MONITORING, OBSERVING AND RECORDING FACILITIES - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
----- Approximate
Item Nomenclature Stock Number Approximate Weight (Lbs.) Displacement (Cubic Feet)
Packed For Export In Carrying Case
Packed For Export In Carrying Case
(A) Toll Line Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100 4C1806 220 - 8.9 -
(B) Toll Line Patching Cabinet ADW-BM-100 4C1806-1 305 - 18 •
(C) Multiline Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100 4C1806-2 345 - 18.2 -
(D) Five-line Observing Cabinet ADW-BM-100 4C1806-8 a - / -
(E) Amertype Recordgraph Company’s •’Commando" Model A Recordgraph 6C263 115 46 7.1 1.38
aFor use in continental United States; not moistureproof.
102
Par. 501-503
I
LL
336
CHAPTER 5
PORTABLE AWS INFORMATION CENTERS
501. GENERAL. Portable and mobile information center facilities provide telephone equipment, furniture and certain auxiliaries for filter, operation and fighter control area operations room use in air warning network. This equipment is used for receiving intelligence concerning activities iu an area; for displaying it for quick analysis; and for operational communications. Although these facilities are primarily intended for the use described above, this equipment can be adapted to meet other tactical requirements.
502. TYPES OF EQUIPMENT.
a. ’there are four types of these equipments, namely: Information Center System SCS-5, Portable Filter Center TC-15, Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 and Control Set SCR-572-A.
In the first three types, the components are arranged in cases for ease of transportation by trucks or planes and are moistureproofed for use in tropical areas. Sufficient tools and
spare parts for one year are provided with the equipments. All connections between equipment items in these types are made by flexible rubber covered cables, plugs and sockets. All outside wire connections are made by means of binding posts.
£. The installation time for setting up an Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 with an experienced crew of six men, assuming no change in the cross connections, is in the order of 3 to 5 hours This does not include the time required to paint the map on tne plotting board.
d. Control Set SCR-572-A is a mobile fighter control area operations room equipment for use as the central controlling point for Control Net System SCS-3. It is trailer mounted and includes a power unit, mounted in a separate trailer. The equipment is moistureproofed for use in tropical areas. Spare parts and tool equipment are included for one year’s operation. All outside wire connections are made by means of binding posts.
503. AWS INFORMATION CENTERS - DESCRIPTION. Remarks
Nomenclature Shown in Fig. Nos. Operating Floor Area Required Power T.M. or Instr*n Book
Name Type No.
Informa- SCS-5 501 Operation Commercial 105-125V, W.E.Co. Includes: 1 Oper. center, 2 Filt.
tion Center System 502 Center with 3 Intercept Boards. 40’ x 25’ Above arrangement with Filt. Center. 69’ x 25’ Filt. Center with 1 or 2 Intcpt. Bds. 20’ x 25* Individual Intcpt.Bd. 10’ x 10’ 60 cycles a-c, or from 2 engine-alternators (5 KVA) provided, one for telephone facilities and for lighting, a second for emergency power. If Filter centers and Intercept Boards are remote from Operations Cent er, c ommerci al or other power sources must be used. Rectifiers for 24V and 120V d-c supplies operate on 50 or 60 cycles. Static ringing generator operates X-61652 centers, 6 Intercept Boards and 6 radio terminals. One Filter center may be located with or one or both may be located remotely from the Oper. center. Of the 6 Intercept Boards a maximum of 4 may be located at the Oper. center, 3 at outlying Filt. center and 3 remotely. Telephone equipment for intercommunicating and connection to land lines and radio sets. Signaling on land lines is magneto. Position units designed with predetermined line capacity which can not be readily changed. A-c power control frame provides
on 55 to 65 cycles. power switching, circuit breaker
protection, land synchronizing equipment for operating both engine-alternators in parallel.
One section of W.E.Co. Special 551 PBX (80 CB lines; 10 CB trunks; and 20 magneto lines) provided for use as an administration switchboard.
Table continued on next page.
103
Par. 503
AWS INFORMATION CENTERS - DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Nomenclature Shown in Fig. Nos. Operating Floor Area T.M. or Instr’n Book
Name Type No.
Required Power
Portable Filter Center TC-15 — Operations Center with 3 Intcpt. Bds. 40’ x 25’ Individual Intcpt.Bd. 10’ x 10’ Same as SCS-5 except only one eng.-alt. is provided W.E.Co. X61684
Remarks
Components are same as those used with SCS-5 equipment except switchboard. Equipment included for one Oper. center, 3 Intcpt. Bds. and 3 radio terms. All of the 3 Intcpt. Bds. may be associated directly with or one nay be located remotely £rcm the Oper. center.
Telephone equip, works with the same types of external circuits as SCS-5 equip. The AC pwr. control frame same as SCS-5.
One section of W.E.Co. Special cordless 506B PBX (3 magneto and 2 common battery trks., 12 lines) provided as administration switchboard.
Operations Center
AN/TTQ-1 503
505
Wing Filter Rooma
Wing Operations Room
Fighter Control Area operations Roomb
Combined Filter-Fighter Control Area Operations Roomb
Each require 25’ x 30’
Ceiling
Height 9’
Mobile
Tactical
Control
Center
Two 2-1/2 ton 6x6 trucks and two 1-ton cargo trailers
Commercial TM 11-438 105-125V TM 11-932 50-60 cy- (eng.-alL) cles a-c or from 2 eng.-alt.
(3 KVA) provided.
Arranged for universal operation as a wing filter center, wing operations center, fighter-control area operations center or a combined filterfighter control area operations center. Equipment includes telephone facilities, furniture, plotting and lighting equipment, power cabinet, storage batteries and two engine alternators. Packing cases used as platforms and benches.
A mobile tactical control center employs two standard 2-1/2 ton (6x6) trucks for mounting and transporting platforms and cabinets, and two standard 1-ton cargo trailers for transporting the two eng.-alt. Details for mounting cabinets and platforms in trucks provided as part of equipment.
Telephone equipment arranged for intercommunication and for connection to land lines and radio sets. Position units of two types; one a telephone unit and the other a five-line unit; permit ready transfer of lines to or from a position. Equipment included for remotely controlling sixteen of the commonly used Signal Corps radio sets.
Except for common battery switchboard trunks circuits mentioned below signaling on land lines is magneto.
Two Switchboards BD-72, 12 lines each, are provided for use as administration switchboard. Two common battery trunk units for connection to central offices each containing 2 circuits, are provided as supplementary equipment .
Ground observer board may be placed in separate 9’x 9’ room and remainder will require room 21* x25*.
bAir Ground monitor board may be placed in separate 9’ x9* room and remainder will require room 25’ x 25*.
104
Par. 503
Nomenclature Type Name No. Shown in Fig. Nos. Operat ing Floor Area T.M. or Instr’n Book
Required Power
Control SCR-572-A Set 506 K-55 trailer -Over-all dimensions 21-1/6’ long 10’ high 8’ wide Cargo trailer -Over-all dimensions 12’ long 6* high 6’ wide Power for battery charger, station heaters and station lighting equipment from Power Unit PE-99A (included) or from 115V a-c 50-60 cycles commercial pwr. line capable of supplying at least 5.5 KVA AN-08-40 SCR-572-2
Remarks
Mobile arrangement of central controlling point for Control Net System SCS-3. Control Set mounted in Trailer K-55 is divided into control room containing intercept plotting board with associated control positions and status board and operator’s cabin containing radio operator’s control equipment, D/F plotting board and 3, BD-72 Swbds. All lines are connected to switchboards so that any line may be connected to any other line or circuit.
Includes following radio control units:
3 - RM-25—A
2 - RM-26-A 1 - RM-28-A 1 - RC-113-A and 20 Telephone Repeaters EE-99-( ).
Power unit PE-99-A is mounted in a one-ton cargo trailer.
PLATFORM POSITIONS
FIGURE 501. Information Center System SCS-5
105
_ INTERCEPT BOARDS “
FILTER "BOARDS —
Par. 503
FIGURE 502.
Information Center System SCS-5-( ). (Typical Frames)
....|
\ •* - TiMINtO lamp
I .-PLATFORM , U- INDICATOR 9HMM
:NTERCE*?T BOARD -XaMMtadta* POS;TiONS
___ T‘„ f.i I' ' pa<. 5*a'4.js
SWITCHBOARD F? ■BbB|||UBX | ||: BOARDS- ~ 'W
4 j Jjfl CyyW 4
Sg3| ? W
’ > ' - '*s >'"•& ~.Jf/ ®
i "' '\\ 1 - ^^ssMhfe.. IF ^t'
-B ' CPK^.ATIONS BOARD '8
- '9^^^
FIGURE 503. Operations Center AN/TTQ-1
106
Par. 503
r— PACKING CASES
- . / ——'
*• >7^^ * "X “ * - ‘
' - ’’LX- ar \
— ■ fl "‘ L—.■.'..•■wrw- *'
/ W w***f^rf*’^ J
/ ----------—'
Ijf^9 **■** ••’*• *• >• *
' I rfoimoN^ rseating r power and POSITIONS BENCH RELAY CABINETS
£ ? y •'? . ?C 1 W- ,:
1-I \ ;| it*' ~X- ~.
I hhK wMlwl ' t ._ H Ei
1 { S'" vBhSnwkL/ XSdtef- -FTB‘J^lWa
h flHL * WW st&s&I
«iill $ w^sraWW' rx - O& • ■ o i-AMI?
J * II
9 g L> I W ’^SS
| ... I ,„;....r K- -iJiife ~"
' ' v
*■ H ——~...... - c— r"X£*~-—-■"“ *-) I
BWWWl U - - ^5-T :•.... - > 7 ’ ’“’ ■ '
-S' -.=' ' •■ ' ' a ’ J
|ww ■.......: i.lWIOB**’’ ! ;
I ^^nrwg-^r^ -.a ’-A
— POWER UNITS — ’ ■rSE aA- .- §
AN/TTQ-1.
Mobile
FIGURE 505. Operations Center Equipment Mounted in Truck as Tactical Control Center
FIGURE 504. Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 Equipment Packed in Truck
|— PATCHING UNIT STATUS BOARD r—PLOTTING TABLE
^^MaafeiA.^;- Tagfe, ^-xIBMMMEMMaaaw^v
:ai#f!• i^ifi^feySwk
CONTROL UNIT —>
FIGURE 506. Control Set SCR-572-A
107
//////
rfoimONS USEATING p POWER AND
POSITIONS BENCH RELAY CABINET*
»* ’ i'4’i-,«‘i- •‘•W&'X-'-
Par. 504
504. AWS INFORMATION CENTERS • STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Signal Corps Type Number Signal No. of Weight of Largest Package (Pounds) Total Weight (Pounds) Total Cu Ft
Corps Stock Number Additional Equipment Required Packages per System Packed for Export Net Packed for Export Net Packed for Export Net Ship Tons
Information Center Sys-ten SCS-5 None Necessary lighting equipment, batteries, clocks and paint. 91 1,330 28,330 1,530
Portable Filter Center TC-15 6Z6231 Necessary lighting equipment, clocks and paint. 41 1,420 1,330 16,163 12,758 1,044 702 26.1
Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 4C5990-1 None 24 810 650 7,660 6,500 382 260 9.6
Control Set SCR-572-A 2S572A None 2 12,100 20,000 16,900 4,000 100
40 cu ft ■ 1 ship ton
108
Par. 601-60:
CHAPTER 6
WIRE AND CABLE AND CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION
Section I General
601. INTRODUCTION.
a. This chapter provides information on outside plant wire and cable, and the construction of wire and cable lines in the tactical and fixed plants.
b. Data on the physical and electrical characteristics of common barewire, field wire, field cables and lead-covered cables together with stock numbers and logistical data as applied to this material are given in sections II, III and IV. To aid in planning, typical tables of material requirements for building 100 mile units of various types of lines are provided. Shipping data are included to permit the provision of the required communication channels, employing the minimum shipping facilities. These tables are intended as guides only. Because of the widely varying conditions of terrain which will be encountered, individual material lists should be prepared to meet individual cases.
c_. As a further aid in planning, section V provides the average time required for various types of worK operations involved in line construction.
d. Section VI describes reels, reel equipment, tools and special trucks required in the handling and placing of the various types of plant.
e. Information concerning submarine cables is given in section VII.
will be found advisable to make a list of requirements to meet each situation. In some theatres wire sizes other than those included in paragraphs 604 and 605 may be available. In those cases, approximate data may be obtained by interpolation from the tables for the stocks of wire covered in these paragraphs.
Section II Open Wire Lines
602. GENERAL. In addition to the electrical- and physical properties of bare wires and other pertinent information this section gives examples of the material requirements necessary to make up 100-mile units of various types of open wire lines. Examples are given for both tactical and fixed plant. These examples should be used as guides only. The examples cover types of construction suitable for use under weather conditions experienced in various geographical areas. Because of the widely varying conditions to be met in the several theatres of operation, and conditions of supply, it
605. STORM LOADING.
a,. In the United States communication lines are designed to withstand three types of storm loading (see sleet storm map in TM 11-568), namely,
(1) Normal wind pressures of 12 pounds per square foot (about 70 mph) on the projected area of wires, at a minimum temperature of 50°F. This is termed, ’’light loading”.
(2) Normal wind pressures of 8 pounds per square foot (about 60 mph) on the projected area of wires covered with. 1/4” radial thickness of ice at a minimum temperature of 15°F. This is termed, ’’medium loading".
(5) Normal wind pressures of 8 pounds per square foot on the projected area of wires covered with 1/2” radial thickness of ice at a minimum temperature of 0°F. This is termed "heavy loading”.
jb. European and Asiatic countries have somewhat different storm loading require-ments. In some foreign countries lines are designed to withstand three classes of loading and in others, two. In general the heavy loading requirements result in about the same strength of line whether in Europe, Asia or in the United States.
£• In selecting the type of line for a given area where ice and temperature conditions are not known, an attempt should be made to obtain this information from local communication or electric light people. Where this cannot be done a general rule to follow is to use heavy loading construction in latitudes higher than 40°, medium loading between latitudes 30 and 40°, and light loading in latitudes under 30°. Of course, there are exceptions to this rule. For instance, even in latitudes under 30° there are locations having elevations where ice and temperature conditions would indicate the advisability of using heavy loading area construction.
700898 O—46-----9
109
Par. 604
604. BARE WIRES AND WIRE MESSENGERS - PHYSICAL DATA AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Net
V/eight Length15
Name or a Material Type No. Stock Number Nominal Diam. Inches Breaking Load Pounds per Mile Pounds per Package Feet Cu. Ft per Wire Mi le15 Remarks
080 C-S W-153 LAI 53 .080 770 94 5,650 1.5" Have 40% of the conduc-
104 C-S 1A809.104 0.104 1,170 159 6,650 1.8 tivity of copper wire
128 C-S 1A808.5 0.128 1,650 240 4,400 3.3j
104 C-S 0.104 1,275 159 6,650 1.8" 30% of conductivity of
128 C-S 1A808.1 0.128 1,800 240 4,400 3.3J copper wire
080 CU .080 330 102 4,400 1.3"!
104 CU W-74 1A74 0.104 550 173 5,650 1.8 Hard Drawn
128 CU 1AB08 0.128 820 262 4,000 3.3
165 CU 1A808.2 0.165 1,325 435 2,250 7.3J
109 G.S. W-145 1A145 0.109 790 170 2,640 3.0 High Strength
083 G.I. W-76 1A76 .083 250 99 2,660 2.0
109 G.I.C 1A812 0.109 425 170 2,640 3.0
134 G.I.C 1A810.1 0.134 645 258 2,660 4.0
148 G.I.C W-75 1A75 0.148 785 315 2,550 5.7
165 G.I.C 1A75A 0.165 975 390 2,640 8.0
203 G.I.C 0.203 1,475 590 1,740 12.0
238 G.I.C 0.238 2,028 810 1,270 18.0
Wire W-503 1A503 3/16 2,400 410 2,500 17.0 2.2Md, G.S., 7-.065 in.
Messenger strands
Wire W-115 1A115 5/16 6,000 1,190 1,000 42.0 6M, G.S., 7-.109 in.
Messenger strands
Wire W-90 1A90 3/8 11,500 1,425 1,000 42.0 10M, G.S., 7-.120 in.
Messenger strands
Wire W-116 1A116 7/16 18,000 2,060 1,000 42.0 16M, G.S., 7-.144 in.
Messenger strands
C-S = Copper Steel, CU “ Copper, G.I. ■ Galvanized Iron, G.S. » Galvanized Steel bBare wire is furnished in coils (19" eye) wrapped with paper or fiber covering, and net weight and packed weight are approximately the same. Wire messenger may be obtained in lengths of 250, 500, 1000, 2500 and 5000 feet. Lengths of 250 and 500 feet (also 1000 feet for W-503 only) are furnished in coils.
Lengths of 1000 feet (2500 feet for W-503) and greater are furnished on wooden reels weighing 40, 50, 90 and 130 pounds, (requiring shipping space of 8, 11, 16 and 28 cu. ft., respectively depending upon the quantity ordered. The shipping data given are based on the use of a 40-pound reel.
°Used primarily for construction purposes.
^Commonly used designation for nominal breaking strength.
110
Par. 605
605. TRANSMISSION DATA ON OPEN WIRE LINES.
Type - No» 5b D.C.Res. 1000-Cycle Ohms per Impedance Loop Mile Ohma Approximate Attenuation® - db Per Mile Nonrepeatered Talking Range Miles for Net Loss of
a. Bare Wire 1 Kc 8 Kc 11 Kc 20 Kc 30 Kc 6 db 18 db 30 db
080 40% C-S W-153 42.8 791-j481 Dry Wet - 0.23 - 0.25 0.31 0.34 0.32 0.35 0.33 0.36 0.33 0.37 24 72 120
104 40% C-S 23.5 686-J335 Dry Wet - 0.16 - 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.20 0.23 0.21 0.24 0.21 0.24 33 100 165
128 40% C-S 16.7 613-j227 Dry Wet - 0.12 - 0.13 0.14 0.16 0.14 0.16 0.14 0.17 0.15 0.18 46 140 230
104 30% C-S 33.8 740-j418 Dry Wet - 0.21 - 0.22 0.28 0.30 0.28 0.31 0.29 0.32 0.29 0.33 27 82 136
128 30% C-S 22.3 649-j291 Dry Wet - 0.15 - 0.17 0.19 0.22 0.20 0.22 0.20 0.23 0.20 0.24 35 106 176 *
080 CU 17.5 680-J235 Dry Wet - 0.11 - 0.13 0.13 0.15 0.14 0.17 0.16 0.20 0.19 0.24 46 140 230
104 CU W-74 10.3 614-J145 Dry Wet - .074 - .083 .089 0.11 .099 0.12 0.13 0.16 0.15 0.19 72 215 360
128 CU 6.8 580-j97 Dry Wet - .052 - .061 .071 .088 .080 0.100 0.11 0.14 0.13 0.16 100 300 500
165 CU 4.1 545-J60 Dry Wet - .034 - .042 .056 .072 .064 .083 .084 0.11 0.10 0.13 145 435 725
109 G.S. W-145 75 1230-j630 Dry Wet - 0.30 - 0.31 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.7 1.7 2.0 2.0 19 57 95
083 Galv. Iren W-76 130 1380-j830 Dry Wet - 0.36 - 0.37 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.1 2.5 2.5 16 48 80 W l\ J)
b. Twin Pairs iC 7
W-110-B "O.W." 93 Dry Wet - 0.43 - 0.46 0.66 0.68 0.68 0.71 0.70 0.75 0.73 0.79 13 39 65
W-110-B "Tree" 93 Dry • Wet - 0.44 - 1.1 0.68 1.6 0.70 1.7 0.75 2.1 0.80 2.6 5 16 27
W-143 "O.W.” 17.5 Dry - 0.13 Wet - 0.14 0.14 0.16 0.14 0.17 0.16 0.20 0.17 0.23 43 130 215
aAttenuations are for side circuits at 70°F and assume use of insulators IN-15 and IN-128 in good condition, that trees, brush, etc. do not touch wires and that recommended construction practices are followed. Pole spacing is assumed 200 feet except for 080 H.D, copper and twin pairs for which 150 feet is assumed. Pin spacing in all cases is assumed to be 8 inches.
bC-S denotes copper-steel. Percentage is conductivity relative to copper.
o
Two wires of one pair used in parallel form one side of the circuit and two wires of another pair form the other side. The "O.W." (open wire) twin pair is assumed to be strung like open wire on insulators and poles with 8" spacing. The "tree" twin pair is made of two W-110-B pairs tied to trees and spaced 8" to 24" apart. Attenuations apply when there are few contacts with foliage, etc.
Par. 606
606. MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF TACTICAL OPEN WIRE LINES WITH 4x4 LUMBER SUPPORTS, 150-F00T SPANS, LIGHT STORM LOADING AREAS.
Quantities for 100 Miles of Linea
Description Stock Number 1-Pair Lineb 2-Pair Lineb 4-Pair Line To Install 1 Additional Pair on Existing Line
Lumber, treated, 2" x 4’’ x 20* 5A2705 800 800 800 -
Lumber, treated, 21* x 4" x 24’ 5A2724 600 600 600 -
Lumber, treated, 4" x 4" x 20’ 5A2720 3,600 3,600 3,600 —
Pole0, treated, Class 7, 35* 5A3235-1 16 16 16 ••
Crossarm0 PF-92-A, 8-pin, 7’-4" 5A1592 2,300 2,300 4,000 -
Pin PF-59, locust, 8" 5A3059 7,400 14,800 29,600 7,400
Insulator IN-15, Toll, glass, SGSP 3G515 7,400 14,800 29,600 7,400
Insulator IN-128, Transposition, glass 3G1815-53 400 800 1,560 400
Wire W-153, 080 C-S, 40% conductivity 1A153 20,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs. 80,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs.
Bolt, carriage; 3/8" x 4", G.I. 5B1106-4 640 640 640 -
Bolt, carriage; 1/2" x 4-1/2", G.I. 5B1108-4.5 800 800 800 -
Bolt, machine; 1/2" x 6", G.I. 5B1508-6 4,500 4,500 4,500 —
Bolt, machine; 5/8" x 10", G.I. 5B1510-10 200 200 200 —
Brace PF-4, crossarm 5B2104 640 640 640 -
Cable lengths0 (105’) with connectors,
made from Cable Assemblies CC-358 16 32 64 16
Clamp PF-61, or Hubbard No. 7402,
guy, 2~bolt 5B3061 640 640 640 —
Connector, bridging, No. 3A 3Z1403 90 160 300 90
Nail, common wire, 6-d 6L1406 50 lbs. 100 lbs. 200 lbs. 50 lbs.
Nail, common wire, 12-d 6L1412 400 lbs. 400 lbs. 400 lbs. —
Nail, common wire, 20-d 6L1420 100 lbs. 100 lbs. 100 lbs. -
Protector, telephone line, 5-pair 5C2200 16 16 16 •
Ring PF-74, bridle, C-type, 1-1/4"
eye, G.S. 5B9320 100 180 300 100
Screw, lag, 3/8" x 3-1/2", G.I. 5B10006-3.5 640 640 640 •
Sleeve, CU, for 080 C-S (C-080-C) 6N5614.1 1,250 2,500 5,000 1,250
Sleeve, G.S., for 109 guy wire,
(S-109-Q) 6N5709.2 1,200 1,200 1,200 —
Washer, square, G.I., 2-1/4" with
11/16" hole 5B20209-11 10,000 10,000 10,000 —
Wire W-110-B 1B110BX 5,000 ft. 10,000 ft. 10,000 ft. 5,000 ft.
Wire W-143 1B143 400 ft. 600 ft. 800 ft. 200 ft.
Wire W-145, 109 G.S. 1A145 1,500 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1,500 lbs. •»
Wire, messenger, 2.2M, Utilities
grade, 3/16" 1A503 10,000 ft. 10,000 ft. 10,000 ft. •
Wire W-154, tie, 080 CU, annealed, 19" LAI 54 250 lbs. 500 lbs. 1,000 lbs. 250 lbs.
Estimates for 100-mile unit:
Weight, short tons 215 231 288 16
Shipping space, cubic feet 12,350 13,040 15,620 660
Ship tonsd 309 326 390 16
Construction time, based upon average
terrain and weather conditions,
man-days 1,130 1,250 1,460 390
aThis list includes a limited amount of spare material and is to be used as a guide only; requirements for the particular situation must be determined. Commercial experience indicates that about 20% spare material is required. Construction of tactical open wire lines is covered in TM 11-368.
bQn one pair and two pair lines, crossarms are cut in half except at H-fixtures and X-frames.
CCable lengths (105’) with connectors, made from Cable Assemblies CC-358, are used for underground railroad crossings. Open wire crossings with poles, treated, Class 7, 35*, are preferable. However, if long poles are not available, underground crossings should be used.
dShip ton assumed equal to 40 cu. ft.
112
Par. 607
1 al
.ne
- 3 3 C 5 L-o o • CD
CD cP
cr < e z Cl 3 § e co s t co z <: P. co o o fH 1 o ID to O 0. Quantities for 100 Miles of Linea To Install a Complete To Inst „ . Additional 1 Additi 2-pair 4-pair 8-pair Crossarmb Pair £ & tr f- « Pl "t c ® a •P ® Cl £ ® a । । । । । । । । o 1 1 1 1 I 1 0> to o o o o O'ON w wo iflWH CO 1 • to C- oooov OObNMN O to o N 1 a> N NH tO o o o o o o o o o O O tO o "tin O> CO rH N N O O O oow OC0H co co <-h N N o o o o o o co co co o o o C\2 CD O O o o co cd o o o to CD O O O CO CD o o o o CD o o O> ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a o o o o o o o O O O to o o o I O O O 1 1 CO N "4* r4 "4< m oooooooooo coooowotoooo tOOOCOWOOH®'# PQCOMPCOHM to oooooooooo COOOOtOOtOOOO •nOO'tC-OOHIPM r-T"^ "S’ <"4 4-4<-4<-4 OT o o o o O ID O to 1 r4 1 O O O O O O O O O O O O 1 to O O O O 1 IO "S' ID N O -H • • • CO OOOOOOOOO oooooooooo <000000000 r4 COOM'OOHN HNM "S*N • • • <0 4h 1h o o ID C\2 B o C\2 ID l and is to be used as a guide only; requirements imercial experience indicates that about 20% spare wire lines is covered in IM 11-368. ig line, the poles must be of sufficient height
607. MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF TACTICAL OPEN WIRE LINES WITH ROUND Stock 1-Pair Descript ion Number Line Pole, treated, Class 9, 20’ 5A3220-4 2,600 Pole, treated, Class 9, 22* 5A3222-1 1,000 Pole, treated, Glass 9, 25’ 5A3225-5 *260 Pole, treated, Class 9, 30’ 5A3234 120 Pole, treated, Class 7, 35’ 5A3235-1 24 Pole, treated, Class 6, 40’ 5A3240-1 24 Crossarm PF-92-A, 8-pin, 7’-4" 5A1592 3,900 o o o o o o "f - in ID ID 1-4 onto to ID H < o e iD tO to w m 3 no P. 8 a co o of -P 01 -P 3 ® i-4 O no ft m t ^“3 -Eh 01 -CO 3 ID N O <-4 <-4 O 1 1 O> q q ID O O Ch 3 3 P4 r-l --4 3 3 a oi oi •P 3 3 Ph m 1-4 Wire W-153, 080 C-S, 40% conductivity 1A153 20,000 It -4 3 "-I V" 3 ooooooooooooooooooo COOOOtOOtOOa»iD-4 tfHWlOOH -4 "S' N ID ON to rd "4< CO 3 3 3 1 r4 1 Illi 1 HHr4HNtOtOr4HrHO>HlOWr4r-linH mfflmpqccmmcqto>-4cqcQffi2;rara'd; • O \ 1 O -Cl to N «» t •* •> > -P >> 3 3 a> 3 r4 ® \ 3 3 O Q r4 H Pt no - - "S' O 3 • n t^i-3ra>® 1-4 • • • O CO 3 • o +» to © 3 • 3 .33 "S' 1 H CD -4 3 -P 3 O • 1-4 • • t> OH«o£ 3^P ® e> • o e o i id -4 3 - C5 . q - oc 3 3 - - - o to O® -M* —P 3 to e -w e 2 4h Q,s g P "S' r O N P • >»N -<-4 <0 3- X 00 <-4 <-4 3HO --P ^C0 1 X Ci 0 33 O 1 H 1 N - -O t H X X 3 XI 1 r-t O 1 O _ f-S CDS g£>|-tonpCO • ® N O \costspxirttit) q - oh no«co ID \(D co CO al 3 3 -d®KC0 • 3NO tOWXoiK ——H® <-4 OC5 ® - in io io « >>noE" “•o s co - - "S' - OL33-<4-P-H00H - (0 q ® i ® - - -q o no-H s h qxo ® ® ® -n K no ® ® ® o q o -a to >|r4 PP ® H o e g SMMhP « --। isi Ih Or4CL,-®qss3:S o - -- -OftCM® --0 S>® pp-pppoggsr-H gno®®-3®®®® oB: Estimates for 100-mile unit: o ID CD O O XI CD W) (D O r-4 O CO "f o to S 3 3 , >3 ci 1 O 3 a< 3 ■p 3 g ® ® -3 - ^H ® CO co 3 3 3 O 3 «-P o ® 3 S 3 - -P o ® P 3 O q 3 q CM O knHa
Major Weight per Weight
Dimension Mile of per Mile ru Ft
Homenolatura “secU^’ Wl",or Length or Sio
Name ’Type No ' Stock No Cable Type of per or Cable of Wire
---------- Type No’ ~^?ok No‘ _Inches__ founds .Pounds package Package Pounds or cable _______________________________Remark8 b ____________ Assembly 00-355-?* 1B14Qb 1000 0,7 750 1200 Reel DR-7 1000 ft.d 1410 41.7 10-pair, consists of Cable WC-535 with
1B1455A-1000 Plug on each end; .036 in. copper, solid,
each rubber covered; rubber overall non-
_o. . „ = stabilized, qw 11-371 and TM 11-366.
Cable iatub CC-356 1B1456 0.42 500 ip
Spiral-four, consists of 12-ft. length of cable WC-548, one end only equipped with connector containing 6 millihenry load coil; 2 pairs, each conductor consists of 7-.015 in. copper strands; each conductor rubber covered; stabilized; steel braid and rubber or substitute overall.
„Ka , ™ H-369 and TM 11-2001.
Assembly Shanin 500 540 Reel DR-15 1/4 mile 700 19.2 Spiral-four, consists of 1/4-mile length
F1Scno°‘ Of Gat)le WC-548, each end equipped with
602 connector containing 6 millihenry load
coil; 2 pairs, each conductor consists of 7-.015 in. copper strands; each conductor rubber covered; stabilized; steel braid and rubber or substitute overall.
Cable CC-368 1B1468 0.42 500 lnn ™ 11-369 ™ 11-2001’
Assembly * 100 ft. Spiral-four, consists of-100-ft. length
of Cable WC-548, each end equioped with connector, but no load coil; 2^pairs each conductor consists of 7-.015 in.’ copper strands; each conductor rubber covered; stabilized; steel braid and rubber or substitute overall
Coil C-114-A0 3C114A ™ 11-369 and ™ 11-2001*
»?0Wn»Tin An 88 ^Hihenry loading coil, with d-c
Fig. No. resistance of 8.4 ohms, weighing ap-
603 proximately 3 lbs, having a water-
proof phenol plastic case, about 3-1/8" x 4-1/2" x 2-3/4". Binding post terminals. FM 24-5 and TB Sig 3.
’ °the1:!>i:.eeMraiiy "■•ppea wi“ pa^r •*> p*°™
0 “ 1‘"Ue int<,”el8 011 wlr’ ana at 5/B-nll. Intartals on Wire w-143 to „t»d
dAvailable in other lengths; consult Signal Corps Catalog.
119
Par. 614
120
601. Cable Assembly FIGURE 602. Cable Assembly CC-358 FIGURE 603. Coil
345 on Reel DR-7 (Spiral-four Aerial Construction) C-114-A (Loading
Coil)
TERMINATING |- DEPOT r— INTERMEDIATE p-FIELD REPAIR SPLICE CLAMP ------ SPIRAL SUPPORT r TERMINATING GRIP
SPLICE OF FIELD WIRE
T
L SECTION THROUGH CONNECTOR SHOWING MOLDED-IN LOADING COIL
Par. 615
121
615. TRANSMISSION DATA ON RUBBER INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES.
D.C.
Resistance0 Ohms lOOO-Cycle Approximate Attenuation13 Talkin^Range*1-
ICXnC9
™ -- z It °:£ \-°5 f;°5 «• xa. 30.
" net Nonloaded 180 °’24 253-J238 3.2 7.9 8.9 10.9 12.3 1.9 5 6 9 5
W-108 - Dry Nonloaded 180 0.13 337-J319 2.3 5.7 6.3 7.2 7.6 *6 9‘5
" n®* Nonloaded 230 °*24 285-J268 3.6 9.3 10.5 13.1 15.0 1.7 5. 8 5
W 108-A - Dry Nonloaded 230 0.13 380-J364 2.7 6.7 7.5 8.8 9.5
W-110-B - Wet Nonloaded 186 0.18 300-J270 2.8 64 72 8911? ? a n
W-11O-B - Dry Nonloaded 186 .07 485-J440 1.7 3(7 4(0 te S.’z
W-110-B - Wet 5280-88 195 0.18 775-J105 1.6 - - - - 3 7 ii io
W-11O-B - Dry 5280-88 195 .07 1175-J180 0.8 I 3,7 111 19>
' n-? u°n|°a^ °-19 505-J475 5.0 12.5 13.5 16.0 18.5 1.2 3.6 6.0
W-130 - Dry Nonloaded 590 .07 890-J850 3.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.5
SOn|°a^ °-28 432-J372 6.5 14.5 16.5 19.0 22.0 0.9 3. 4.5
W-130-A - Dry Nonloaded 590 .09 775-J697 3.5 8.0 9.0 10.5 12.5
W-130-C Characteristics approximately the same as W-130-A
WD-3/TT Nonloaded 590 Characteristics approximately the same as W-130
N±aL6d ?! °*21 130-J105 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.5 2.9 5. 15. 25.
W“143 3300-88 48 0.21 870-J20 0.30 20. 60. 100.
Nonloaded 71 0.12 235-J200 1.3 2.5 2.7 3.0 3.4 4.6 14 23
!!"?!!"Side 1320-6 77 0.12 475-J105 0.75 0.85 0.95 - - 8 & 24. 40
CC-358-Phantom Nonloaded 39 0.27 130-J85 1.3 2.5 2.7 3.5 4.4 4.6 14. 23.*
Nonloaded 90 0.14 240-J220 1.7 3.7 4.0 4.6 5.0 3.5 11. 18
CC-355-A Nonloaded 90 0.14 240-J220 1.7 3.7 4.0 4.6 5.0 3.5 11. 18.
The type of loading is shown by a number representing the wire distance between loading coils expressed in feet, followed by a number representing the inductance of the loading coil, expressed in millihenries. ^The data on this table apply to a temperature of about 70 F. 0 For loaded circuits, the 1000 cycle impedance is for the mid-section point of a loading section.
616. MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SPIRAL-FOUR CABLE LINES. o
----------------------------------------------------
Quantities for 100 Miles of Linea _
-----------------Install------ m Aerial Line,0-1 cable Ground Buried---°*
4x4 Lumber on Existing Surface Buried Line,0
Supports, Aerial Line Line,0 Line,0 2 cables
Stock 150-foot Spans, or on Trees, Single Single placed
________________Description_______________ Number Single Cable 150-foot Spans cable gable Concurrently Lumber, treated, 2"x4"x20*________________5A2705 800 - - -
Lumber, treated, 2" x4" x24’ 5A2724 600 - - -
Lumber, treated, 4"x4"xl8* 5A2718 - - 1,000 1,000 1,000
Lumber, treated, 4"x4"x20* 5A2720 3,600 - - -
Cable Assembly3 CC-358, 1/4 mile per Reel DR-15 1B1458 500 500 500 500 1,000
Cable Assembly CC-368 1B1468 50 50 50 50 100
Cable Stub CC-356 1B1456 15 15 15 15 30
Bolt, carriage, 1/2" x 4-1/2" G.I. 5B1108-4.5 1,200 - - -
Bolt, machine, 5/8" x 6", G.I. 5B1510-6 1,000 - - -
Bolt, machine, 5/8" x 10", G.I. 5B1510-10 1,000 - 1,000 1,000 1,000
Cable Hanger, per SCL Spec. No. 694 5B3459 4,400 4,400 -
Clamp, dead end, Kearney Lay-Cit, or equal 5B3094 2,400 2,400 2,200 2,200 4,400
Connector, bridging, W.E.Co. 2A 3Z1402 150 150 - -
Hook PF-81, drive 5B5081 4,400 4,400 500 500 700
Marline RP-2 6Z6981 50 lbs. 50 lbs. 50 lbs. 50 lbs. 100 lbs.
Nail, common wire, 12-d 6L1412 1,600 lbs. - 12 lbs. 12 lbs. 12 lbs.
Nail, common wire, 20-d 6L1420 300 lbs. - -
Sleeve, G.S, for 109 guy wire, (S-109-Q) 6N5709.2 2,500 - 600 600 600
Staked GP-2, rod, 3/4" x 16" x 1-1/8" head 2A3302 800 - - -
Talc, 200 mesh, Grade A, white (wishnick -
Tumpeer, Inc., New York, N.Y., or equal) - - - 200 lbs. 250 lbs.
Washer®, square, G.I., 2-1/4" with 11/16" hole 5B20209-11 2,500 - 2,000 2,000 2,000
Wire W-110-B 1B110BX 4,000 ft. 4,000 ft. 4,000 ft. 4,000 ft. 6,000 ft.
Wire W-145, 109 GS 1A145 2,500 lbs. - 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs.
Estimates for 100-mile unit
Weight, short tons 206 45 79 79 123
Shipning space, cubic feet 12,300 2,530 4,510 4,510 6,950
Ship tonsf 308 63 113 113 174
Construction time, based on average terrain c e
and weather conditions, man-days 1,030 440 315 415 550
'‘includes 25% spare Cable Assembly CC-358 and a limited amount of other spare material. Figures for aerial construction are based on cable without messenger support. Construction information covered in IM 11-369. bThis list includes sufficient material for 10% of structures to be of A-frame type as shown in TM 11-369. °Allows for 2 overhead crossings per mile without messenger support (TM 11-369) and construction time Includes 130 man-days for crossings. With messenger support (paragraph 612) the following additional material is required per 200 foot crossing: 300 ft. Wire, Messenger W-503, Stock No. 1A503; 1.0 Clamps PF-61 (2 bolt), Stock No. 5B3061, 3 Clamps (dead end) for CC-358, stock No. 5B3094. Increase in construction time is about .7 man-days per crossing.
Srooden stakes, 2" x 4" x 30", may be substituted for Stakes GP-2.
eWashers, round, 5B20111, may be substituted for square washers.
^Ship ton assumed equal to 40 ou. ft.
122
Par. 617-619
617. SPIRAL-FOUR CABLE LINES - SHIPPING DATA.
Quantities i for 100 Miles of Line (One Cable)
Aerial Line with 4x4 Lumber Supports Aerial Installation on Existing Line Ground Surface Line0 Buried Line 0
Weight Lbs. Shipping Space Cu. Ft. Weight Lbs. Shipping Space Cu. Ft. Weight Lbs. Shipping Space Cu. Ft. Weight Lbs. Shipping Space Cu. Ft.
4x4 Lumber Supports Spiral-Four Cable* Accessory Material 314,600 88,400 8,700 9,680 2,440 180 88,400 _1,900 2,440 90 88,400 2,440 88,400 2,440
Total Ship tons15 411,700 12,300 308 90,300 2,530 63 88,400 2,440 61 88,400 2,440 61
aThese figures include 25% spare Cable Assemblies CC-358.
^Ship ton assumed equal to 40 cu. ft.
cAllow following for each overhead crossing (TM 11-369).
Poles and accessories; 350 lbs, 10.5 cu. ft.
Section IV Lead-covered cables and Loading
618. GENERAL. This section gives information concerning lead-covered cables and loading coils. It also includes placement data for aerial cable construction, examples of the materials required for 100 mile aerial cable lines and data on lead sleeves. Information concerning methods of constructing cable lines is given in TM 11-363 and in Bell System Practices. The loading coils and cases listed in this section are Western Electric Company items stocked by the Signal Corps. The mounting hardware required for installing them is included,
also. If these items do not meet the requirements for a particular job, other types may be procured. The transmission characteristics of H-88-50 and H-88-N circuits using these loading units and coils are given in chapter 7. The 204CG loading coil case and SM11 loading units have been discontinued by the manufacturer. They are replaced by the 208 type case and the MF11 loading unit, which is electrically equivalent to the SM11 unit. The case containing 12 MF11 units is the 208A, which is smaller and lighter than the 204CG case due to a more compact assembly of the loading units. When existing stocks of 204CG cases are depleted, the 208A case will be substituted.
619. LEAD-COVERED GABLES - PHYSICAL DATA AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Amer. Wire Gauge Size We* Stock No. Aver. Reel Lgth. Feet Weight Reel -Pounds Weight of Cable Pounds Total Weight Reel & Cable -Pounds Shipping Space Cu.Ft. Floor Space Sq. Ft.
a. wires Insulated with Paper
17 1 pr T.A. ID1017 1500 10 197 207 4 2
19 2 pr T.A. 1D253 3000 210 2625 2835 54 12
22 2 pr T.A. 1D1022 3000 210 2400 2610 54 12
19 10 pr L.C. 1C4O1,.1 3000 304 2400 2704 51 11
JT. 1D364.3 3000 304 2880 3184 51 11
f T.A. 1D364,.1,.2 3000 490 4500 4990 93 16
22 10 pr L.C. 1C411,.1 3500 304 1855 2159 51 11
JT. 1D369.2 3500 304 2205 2509 51 11
T.A. 1D369,.1,.4 4500 418 4050 4468 73 14
19 7 qd L.C. 1C819.6 3000 385 3000 3385 64 13
JT. 1D719 4000 304 4800 5104 51 11
T.A. 1D719.1 4000 522 6800 7322 104 16
The first three cables (one-pair and two-pair) are insulated with rubber or substitute; all other cables are insulated with paper or paper pulp. T.A. ■ single tape armored (Subterranean), L.C. » lead sheath covered (aerial or subterranean with no armoring or other protection), JT. » jute protected (subterranean).
Lead covered fusing cable consisting of 24 or 26 AWG conductors in the majority of sizes indicated in the above tabulation is available in short lengths as required for protection of outside plant cable as described in Section G10.340 of Bell System Practices. Table continued on next page
123
Par. 619
LEAD-COVERED GABLES - PHYSICAL DATA. AND STOCK NUMBERS. (Continued) Total
Amer. Wire Gauge Size Typea Stock No. Aver. Reel Lgth. Feet Weight Reel -Pounds Weight of Cable Pounds Weight Reel & Cable-Pounds Shipping Space Cu.Ft. Floor Space Sq.Ft
22 15 pr L. C. 1C412,.1 3500 264 2205 2469 40 10
JT. 1D365.3 4000 304 3024 3328 51 11
T.A. 1D365,.1,.2 4000 418 4280 4698 73 14
19 25 pr L.C. 1C404,.1 3000 304 3600 3904 51 11
JT. 1D366.4 2000 304 2880 3184 51 11
T.A. 1D366,.2,.3 2000 490 4080 4570 93 16
22 25 pr L.C. 1C414,.2 4200 304 3150 3454 51 11
JT. 1D371.3 3000 304 2700 3004 51 11
T.A. 1D371,.2,.4 3000 522 3810 4332 104 16
19 13 qd L.C. 10819.12,-1,.11 3000 510 3600 4110 83 15
JT. 1D366.6 3000 490 4320 4810 93 16
T.A. 1D366,.1, .5 3000 490 6000 6490 93 16
19 50 pr L.C. 1C407,.1 2500 ' 385 5000 5385 64 13
JT. 1D367.4 2000 522 4800 5322 104 16
T.A. 1D367, .3 2000 1112 6800 7912 187 26
22 50 pr L.C. 1C417,.2 3000 385 3300 3685 64 13
JT. 1D355.3 2000 418 2640 3058 73 14
T.A. 1D355,.2,.4 2000 490 6800 7290 93 16
19 27 qd L.C. 1C819.26-1 3000 585 3000 3585 116 17
JT. 1D367.6 2500 490 7000 7490 93 16
T.A. 1D367.1,.5 2500 732 8500 9232 140 20
19 37 qd L.C. 1C819.36 2000 330 5000 5330 90 15
19 100 pr L.C. 1C409,.1 1600 418 6080 6498 73 14
JT. 1D368.7 1000 445 4560 5005 83 15
T.A. 1D368,.6 1000 490 5000 5490 93 16
22 100 pr L.C. 1C419,.2 3000 445 5400 5845 83 15
JT. 1DS57,.2 3000 625 6480 7105 128 18
T.A. 1D357,.1,.4 3000 1112 9180 10292 187 26
19 52 qd L.C. 1C819.51-1 1500 522 5700 6222 104 16
JT. 1D368.9 1000 304 4560 4864 51 11
T.A. 1D368.4,.8 1500 675 7500 8775 134 19
19 200 pr L.C. 1C452,.1 1200 418 8700 9118 73 14
JT. 1D375.4 750 522 6525 7047 104 16
T.A. 1D375,.3 750 585 8187 8772 116 17
22 200 pr L.C. 1C421,.2 1600 445 4640 5085 83 15
JT. 1D376.2 2000 732 6960 7692 140 20
T.A. 1D376,.1,.3 2000 490 9860 10350 93 16
22 300 pr L.C. 1C423 1400 585 4550 5135 116 17
22 400 pr L.C. 10425 1200 522 5100 5622 104 16
22 600 pr L.C. 1C429 900 522 5625 6147 104 16
22 900 pr L.C. 1C429-900 650 625 5499 6124 128 18
b. Wires Insulated with Textile
22 10 pr L.C. 1C822.10-2 3500 120 1120 1240 22 6
22 J5 pr L.C. 1C822.25-1 3500 304 1785 2089 51 11
22 50 pr L.C. 1C822.50-2 2500 304 2350 2654 51 11
22 100 pr L.C. 1C822.100-2.1 2500 418 3560 39 78 73 14
22 150 pr L.C. 1C822.150 1600 418 2976 3394 73 14
22 200 pr L.C. 1C822.200-4 1500 445 4395 4840 83 15
aThe first three cables (one-pair and two-pair) are insulated with rubber or substitute; all other cables are insulated with paper or paper pulp. T.A. » single tape armored (Subterranean), L.C. ■ lead sheath covered (aerial or subterranean with no armoring or other protection), JT. = jute protected (subterranean).
Lead covered fusing cable consisting of 24 or 26 AWG conductors in the majority of sizes indicated in the above tabulation is available in short lengths as required for protection of outside plant cable as described in Section GIO.340 of Bell System Practices.
124
Par. 620
620. VOICE FREQUENCY LEAD-COVERED CABLE LOADING EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION.
Loading Number of
CoiJ Case No. (Western Shown Loading Uhita or Installa-
Electric in Loading Weight Dimensions - tion
Co.Coda) FLg.No Coils* Lbs. Inchesb Practices Remarks®
204CG 604 12Uhits 370 9-1/2x12x 29 high A.T. &T.d Co.Specification 4860 Supplement E Welded steel case for underground use. Installed on manhole floor. Complete with 10 ft. cable stub. Equipped with No. SM11 loading units for H-88-50 phantom group loading on quadded cables. Replaced by 208A. Loading Unit Data Inductance Resistance - Ohms Millihenries D.C. 1000 Cycles Side Ckt. 88. 7.9 9.1 Phantom Ckt. 50. 4.0 4.5 Resistance incl ikies coil plus 7-1/2 ft. of cable stub.
208A 605 12 Units 95 8-5/8 diam. x 12-1/4 Welded steel case for underground use. Installed on manhole floor or wall. Complete with 10 ft. cable stub. Equipped with No. MF11 loading units, electrically equivalent to SM11 loading units. Replaces 204CG.
124A 15 Coils 15 3-7/8 diam. x 6-7/8 A.T. IT. Co.Specific at ion 4860 Supplement E Lead sleeve case for aerial or underground use. Installed on cable messenger wire, on poles, or in manholes. Complete with 10 ft. cable stub. Equipped with No. 632 loading coils for H-88 loading on nonphantomed cable pairs: Loading Coil Data: Inductance 88 mh; D.C. resistance 9.0 ohms; 1000-cycle resistance 10.4 ohms. Resistance includes coil plus 7-1/2 ft. of cable stub.
124B 26 Coils 25 3-7/8 diam. x 10-3/8 A.T. &T. Co.Specification 4860 Supplement E Same as 124A except larger size.
124C 606 51 Coils 40 3-7/8 diam. x17-3/4 A.T.& T. Co.Specification 4860 Supplement E Same as 124A except larger size.
125A 607 101 Coils 85 5-3/8 diam. x 16-1/4 Bell System Welded steel case for aerial use. In-
Practice stalled on poles. Complete with 10 ft
Section cable stub. Coils same as for 124A.
G52.160
“Units are assemblies of 3 ooils for loading a phantom and its two side circuits. Coils are nonphantom type. Only the loading coil cases containing complements in dicated are stocked. The same cases may be procured with a fewer number of colls than those indicated. Individual coils or units are not stocked.
Dimensions of loading pot, not including cCoil codes are Western Electric Co. code ^The 204CG case is not shown specifically illustrate installation.
stub cable.
numbers.
but similar cases are shown which will
700898 0—46------10
125
Par. 620
FIGURE 604. Loading Coil Case 204CG (Western Electric Co.)
FIGURE 605. Loading Coil Case 208A (Western Electric Co.)
FIGURE 606. Loading Coil Case 124C r (Western Electric Co.)
FIGURE 607. Loading Coil Case 125A (Western Electric Co.)
126
Par. 621-623
621. LOADING EQUIPMENT FOR VO ICE-FREQUENCY CABLE CIRCUITS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. ----------“-----------------------------
Loading Coil Case No. Western Electric Co. Code Weight -Pounds Stock Packed for Volume -Cubic Feet Packed for Export Loading Coil Case No. Western Electric Co. Code Stock Number Weight -Pounds Packed for Export Volume -Cubic Feet Packed for Export
Number Export
204CG 4B330 450 15 124B None 85 10
208A — 180 15 124C None 100 10
124A None 75 10 125A None 175 15
622. MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR LOADING COIL CASES.
Loading Coil Case No. Western Electric Co. Code
__________________________Mounting Hardware6______________________
Underground Installations Aerial Installations
204CG
208A
124A
124B
124C
Place on manhole floor: None
When placed on floor: Two 1/2" x 2-1/2" expansion bolts.
When attached to manhole walls: Four 1/2" x 2-1/2" expansion bolts
For attachment to manhole walls: 2 No. 56 cable straps. Four 1/4" x 1" hammer drive anchors
125A
For attachment to cable messenger:
2 Aerial cable supports.
For attachment to poles: 2 No. 56 cable straps. Four 3/16" x 2" strap nails.
For attachment to poles: Four 1/2" x 4-1/2" drive screws.
All codes referred to are Western Electric Co. codes.
623. TRANSMISSION DATA ON LEAD-COVERED CABLES.
Amer. Wire Gauge Type of Ckt. a Loading D.C.b Resistance Ohms per Loop Mile Capacitance mf/mi 1000-Cycleb,c Impedance Ohms Approximate Attenuation db/mi Nonrepeatered Talking Range - Miles fbr Net Loss of
1 Kc 8 Kc 30 Kc 6 db 18 db 30 db
16 aide NL 42 .062 255-j214 0.73 1.36 1.87 8 25 41
16 side 6000-88 50 .062 1165-J50 0.19 * * 32 95 155
19 side NL 86 .062 345-j317 1.08 2.37 3.07 5.5 16.5 28
19 side 6000-88 94 .062 1160-jll0 0.36 - — 17.0 50 85
19 pair NL 86 .066 333-J308 1.11 * 5.4 16.0 27
19 pair NL 86 .084 295-J273 1.26 • 4.8 14.5 24
22 pair NL 171 .082 416-J399 1.79 • — 3.4 10.2 17
24 pair NL 274 .072 558-J542 2.14 * * 2.8 8.5 14
24 pair NL 274 .084 517-j503 2.31 • • 2.6 7.9 13
a NL indicates nonloaded. The type of loading is shown by a number representing the wire distance between loading coils expressed in feet followed by a number representing the inductance of the loading coll expressed in millihenries.
b
The data in this table apply at a temperature of 70*F.
c For loaded circuits, the 1000-cycle impedance is for the midsection point of a loading section.
127
Par. 624
624. MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF AERIAL CABLE LINES -150-FOOT SPANS - Quant itieef1 for 100-Miles of Line
ALL STORM LOADING AREAS. Quantities3 for Stock Number
Description Stock Number
100-Miles of Line Description
a. Diameters of Cable up to 1-3/16 inches.
Wire W—71 1A71 50 lbs. Brace PF-4 5B2104 50
Wire W-90 1A90 20,000 ft. Brace PF-7 5B2107 80
Wire W-115 1A115 574,400 ft. Clamp, cable; 5/16" 5B3105 1,000
Wire W-116 1A116 2,500 ft. Clamp, cable 7/16" 5B3107 1,000
Wire #12 BWG, G.I. 1A812 58,080 ft. Clamp, cable 1/2" 5B3108 500
Wire, #6 weatherproof Clamp, cable 11/16" 5B3111 500
triple braid, solid h.d. 1B806.1 1,000 ft. Clamp, cable 3/4" 5B3112 500
Insulator, porcelain; Clamp, cable 1-1/4" 5B3120 500
Thomas #502 3G1875-502 100 Clamp, cable 1-1/2" 5B3124 100
Insulator, porcelain; Clamp, cable 1-3/4" 5B3128 100
Thomas #504 3G1875-504 100 Clamp, cable, grade
Block, protector, carbon; type B adjustable 5B3190 600
W.E.Co. #26 4E926 200 Clamp, cable corner
Block, protector, W.E.Co. suspension #8902 5B3202 300
#30 4E930 200 Clamp, cable suspension
Step, pole; wood, 1-3/4 x 1 per term. 3-bolt 5B3203 3,800
2-3/4 x 7” 5A3710 as req Clamp, ground; strand,
Anchor AH-2 5B102 350 Hubbard #8956 or equal 5B3349 400
Anchor AH-9 5B109 400 Clamp FT-56, 3-bolt
Anchor AH-10 5B110 50 guy clamp 5B3450 2,500
Anchor Rod AH-6-A 5B706A 425 Connector, strand 5B4210 270
Anchor Rod AH-7-A 5B707A 375 Eye-nut, thimbleye G.I.
Anchor Rod AH-8-A 5B708A 60 for 5/8" bolt 5B4305 300
Anchor bolt, Rock guy Eye-nut, thimbleye G.I.
Hubbard 7547-T 5B816-15 50 for 3/4" bolt 5B4306 150
Anchor bolt, Rock guy Type D NSN 50 Eye-nut, thimbleye G.I.
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 5B1210-10 100 for 1" bolt 5B4308 50
x 10" G.I. Ground Rod GP-26 5B4426 30
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 Hook, guy, "J", 4" 5B5284 150
x 12" G.I. 5B1210-12 100 Link, reinforcing,
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 8-3/8" long 5B5808.8 100
x 14” G.I. 5B1210-14 25 Link, reinforcing, short NSI 100
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 Nut, square, G.I. for
x 16" G.I. 5B1210-16 25 5/8" Standard Machine
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 bolt 5B6510 4,000
x 18" G.I. 5B1210-18 25 Plate, strain; G.I. 4"
Bolt, double arming, 5/8 x 8" 5B8504-8 200
x 20" G.I. 5B1210-20 25 Protector, guy wire 8* 5B8608 100
Bolt, eye; 3/8 x 6", G.I. 5B1306-6 75 Ring PF-63 5B9435 345,000
Bolt, eye; 5/8 x 12", G.I. 5B1310-12 150 4 per
Bolt, eye; 5/8 x 14", G.I. 5B1310-14 50 Screw, lag G.I. 1/4 x 3-J/2" 5B10004-2.5 Term.
Bolt, eye; 3/4 x 10", G.I. 5B1312-10 50 Screw, lag G.I. 1/2x4-1/2" 5B10008-4.5 1,300
Bolt, eye; 3/4 x 12", G.I. 5B1312-12 50 Screw, wood, #14, 2" RH G.I. 5B14014-16 24 doz.
Bolt, eye; 1 x 12", G.I. 5B1316-12 10 Servisleeve for 5/16"
Bolt, bent eye; 5/8 x 10" strand 5B15500 2,500
G.I. 5B1410-x0 275 Staple, G.I. 1-1/2" 5B17001.5 1,500
Bolt, bent eye; 5/8x12"GJ. 5B1410-12 75 12 pei
Bolt, bent eye; 3/4 x 10" Step PF-37 5B17137 Term.
G.I. 5B1412-10 150 Strap, reinforcing,
Bolt, bent eye; 3/4 x 14" Hubbard #8905 or equal 5B17505 100
G.I. 5B1412-14 50 Strap, storm guy,
Bolt, bent eye; 1x12" G.I. 5B1416-12 50 Graybar #6006 5B17508 50
Bolt, machine; 1/2 x 4-1/2" Strap, storm guy,
G.I. 5B1508-4.5 75 Hubbard #6005 5B17508-1 50
Bolt, machine; 1/2x6" G.I. 5B1508-6 50 Strap, guy, flat G.I. 5B17591 250
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 6" G.I. 5B1510-6 125 Strap, wall, guy eye G.I. 5B17595 20
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 8" G.I. 5B1510-8 550 Support, Aerial cable
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 10"G.I. 5B1510-10 3300 #1, 10" 5B17841 12,000
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 12"G.I. 5B1510-12 550 Support, Aerial cable
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 14"G.I. 5B1510-14 125 #2, 16" 5B17842 2,000
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 16"G.I. 5B1510-16 125 Support, Aerial cable
Bolt, machine 5/8 x 18"G.I. 5B1510-18 75 #3, 22" 5B17843 2,000
* Poles not included. Data on round poles is given in paragraphs 631 and 632.
128
Par. 624
Description Stock Number Quantities* for 100-Miles of Line Description Stock Number Quantities* for 100-Miles of Line
Thimble PF-42 Thimble PF-43 Thimble PF-44 Washer PF-77 Washer PF-78 Washer PF-79 Washer, round, G.I. Washer, square, G.I. Hubbard #7817 or equal Washer, curved, G.I., for 5/8" bent eye bolt Washer, round, G.I. Washer, curved, G.I., for 3/4" bent eye bolt Washer, curved, G.I., for 1" bent eye bolt Protector, telephone, line 5-pair Terminal Cable (W.E.Co. BD-102) Terminal Cable F26 Terminal box JB-1O Terminal box JB-11 5B18042 5B18043 5B18044 5B20077 5B20078 5B20079 5B20109 5B20212- 5B20310 5B20311 5B20312 5B20316 5C2200 5C2502 5C2526 5C2710 5C2711 50 50 50 50 50 9,000 200 13 60 750 100 700 50 10 As required As required As required As required Terminal box JB-13 Terminal Box F10 Nail, common wire 6-d Nail, common wire 30-d Nail, common wire 60-d Nail, roofing, #3 Ribbon, bonding, copper, 3/8" wide, #16 B&S Tape, TL-83 Tape, friction; 2" wide, 36 yard roll Tape, lead serving National Lead Co. or equal Anchor, Hammer drive G.I. 1/4 x 1" Anchor, Hammer drive G.I. 1/4 x 1-1/4" Anchor, screw, iron, 3/8 ’x 2" Marline, 3 ply; 5 pound balls 5C2713 5C3510F 6L1406 6L1430 6L1460 6L2003 6N4903 6N8583 6N8832-36 6N8835 6Z284-4 6Z284-5 6Z306-8 6Z6985 As required As required 100 lbs. 100 lbs. 100 lbs. 100 lbs. 1,000 ft. 100 rolls 100 rolls 700 500 500 100 60 lbs.
b. Diameters of Cable from 1-1/4" to 1-15/16".
Wire W-71 Wire W-90 1A71 1A90 * 50 lbs. 74,000 ft. Bolt, eye; 3/4 x 12" G.I. Bolt, eye; 3/4 x 14" G.I. 5B1312-12 5B1312-14 10 10
Wire W-115 1A115 2,500 ft. Bolt, eye; 1 x 12" G.I. 5B1316-12 150
Wire W-116 1A116 25,000 ft. Bolt, eye; 1 x 14" G.I. 5B1316-14 50
Wire W-145 1A145 52,800 ft. Bolt, bent eye; 5/8 x 10"
Wire, #12 BWG, G.I. 1A812 5,280 ft. G.I. 5B1410-10 50
Wire, #6, weatherproof, Bolt, bent eye; 5/8 x 12"
triple braid, solid h.d. 1B806.1 1,000 ft. G.I. 5B1410-12 25
Insulator, porcelain; Bolt, bent eye; 3/4 x 10"
Thomas #502 3G1875-502 100 G.I. 5B1412-10 275
Insulator, porcelain; Bolt, bent eye; 3/4 x 14"
Thomas #504 3G1875-504 100 G.I. 5B1412-14 75
Block, protector, carbon; Bolt, bent eye; 1 x 10" G.I. 5B1416-10 25
W.E.Co. #26 4E926 200 Bolt, bent eye; 1x12" G.I. 5B1416-12 150
Block, protector, WJJjCo. #30 4E930 200 Bolt, bent eye; 1x14" G.I. 5B1416-14 75
Step, pole; wood, 1 per term. Bolt, machine; l/2x4-l/2"
1-3/4 x 2-3/4 x 7" 5A3710 as req. G.I. 5B1508-4.5 75
Anchor AH-2 5B102 50 Bolt, machine; 1/2 x 6" G.I. 5B1508-6 50
Anchor AH-9 5B109 350 Bolt, machine; 5/8x6" G.I. 5B1510-6 125
Anchor AH-10 5B110 400 Bolt, machine; 5/8x8" G.I. 5B1510-8 550
Anchor Rod AH-6-A 5B706A 60 Bolt, machine; 5/8x10" G.I. 5B1510-10 3,300
Anchor Rod AH-7-A 5B707A 360 Bolt, machine; 5/8x12" G.I. 5B15L0-12 550
Anchor Rod AH-8-A 5B708A 420 Bolt, machine; 5/8x14" G.I. 5B1510-14 125
Anchor bolt, Rock guy Bolt, machine; 5/8x16" G.I. 5B1510-16 125
Hubbard 7547-T 5B816-15 50 Bolt, machine; 5/8x18" G.I. 5B1510-18 75
Anchor bolt, Rock guy Brace PF-4 5B2104 50
Type D NSN 50 Brace PF-7 5B2107 80
Bolt, double arming, • Clamp, cable; 5/16" 5B3105 1,000
5/8 x 10" G.I. 5B1210-10 100 Clamp, cable; 7/16" 5B3107 1,000
Bolt, double arming, Clamp, cable; 1/2" 5B3108 500
5/8 x 12" G.I. 5B1210-12 100 Clamp, cable; 11/16" 5B3111 500
Bolt, double arming, Clamp, cable; 3/4" 5B3112 500
5/8 x 14" G.I. 5B1210-14 25 Clamp, cable; 1-1/4" 5B3120 500
Bolt, double arming, Clamp, cable; 1-1/2" 5B3124 100
5/8 x 16" G.I. 5B1210-16 25 Clamp, cable; 1-3/4" 5B3128 100
Bolt, double arming, Clamp, cable grade,
5/8 x 18" G.I. 5B1210-18 25 Hubbard #8986 5B3186 400
Bolt, double arming, Clamp, cable grade,
5/8 x 20" G.I. 5B1210-20 25 Hubbard #8987 5B3187 200
Bolt, eye; 3/8 x 6" G.I. 5B1306-6 75 Clamp, cable, corner
Bolt, eye; 3/4 x 10" G.I. 5B1312-10 20 suspension #8902 5B3202 300
a Poles not included. Data on round poles is given in paragraphs 631 and 632.
Ihble continued on next page
129
Par. 624-625
MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF AERIAL CABLE LINES - 150-FOOT SPANS -ALL STORM LOADING AREAS. (Continued) “
- -. ■" ■■ ■—■■■■ _ . . . . a
Description Stock Number Quantities8 for 100-Miles of Line Description Stock Number Quantities for 100-Miles of Line
Clamp, cable suspension, Thimble PF-43 5B18043 50
3-bolt 5B3203 3,800 Thimble PF-44 5B18044 50
Clamp, ground; strand, Washer PF-77 5B20077 50
Hubbard #8956 or equal 5B3349 400 Washer PF-78 5B20078 50
Clamp FT-56, 3-bolt guy 5B3450 3,500 Washer PF-79 5B20079 9,000
Connector, strand 5B4210 270 Washer, round, G.I. 5B20109 200
Eye-nut, thimbleye G.I. for 3/4" bolt Eye-nut, thimbleye G.I. for 1" bolt 5B4306 50 Washer, square, G.I., Hubbard #7817 or equal 5B20212-13 60
5B4308 300 Washer, curved, G.I., 5B20310 150
Ground Rod GP-26 5B4426 30 for 5/8" bent eye bolt
Hook, guy, "J", 4" 5B5284 150 Washer, round, G.I. 5B20311 100
Link, reinforcing, Washer, curved, G.I.,
8-3/8" long 5B5808.8 100 for 3/4" bent eye bolt 5B20312 400
Link, reinforcing, short NSN 100 Washer, curved, G.I.
Nut, square, G.I. for for 1" bent eye bolt 5B20316 650
5/8" standard machine Protector, telephone,
bolt 5B6510 4,000 line 5-pair 5C2200 10
Plate, strain; G.I. Terminal BD-102 5C2502 As required
4x8" 5B8504-8 200 Terminal F-26 5C2526 As required
Protector, guy wire 5B8608 100 Terminal box JB-10 5G2710 As required
8 foot Terminal box JB-11 5C2711 As required
Ring PF-69 5B9456 345,000 Terminal box JB-13 5C2713 As required
Screw, lag G.I. Terminal F-10 5C3510F As required
1/4 x 2-1/2" 5B10004-2.5 4 per Term. Nail, common wire 6-d 6L1406 100 lbs.
Screw, lag G.I. Nail, common wire 30-d 6L1430 100 lbs.
1/2 x 4-1/2" 5B10008-4.5 1,300 Nail, common wire 60-d 6L1460 100 lbs.
Screw, wood, #14, Nail, roofing, #3 6L2003 100 lbs.
2" RH G.I. 5B14014-16 24 doz. Ribbon, bonding, copper,
Staple, G.I. 1-1/2" 5B17001.5 1,500 3/8" wide, #16 B&S 6N4903 1,000 ft.
Step PF-37 5B17137 12 per Term. Tape, TL-83 6N8583 100 rolls
Strap, reinforcing, Tape, friction; 2" wide
Hubbard #8905 or equal 5B17505 4,000 36 yard roll 6N8832-36 100 rolls
Strap, storm guy, Anchor, Hammer drive
Graybar #6006 5B17508 50 G.I.’ 1/4 x 1" 6Z284-4 500
Strap, storm guy, Anchor, Hammer drive
Hubbard #6005 5B17508-1 50 G.I. 1/4 x 1-1/4" 6Z284-5 500
Strap, guy, flat G.I. 5B17591 550 Anchor, screw, iron,
Support, Aerial cable #3, 3/8" x 2" 6Z306-8 100
22" 5B17843 16,000 Marline, 3 ply; 5 pound
Thimble PF-42 5B18042 50 balls 6Z6985 60 lbs.
a Poles not included. Data on round poles is given in paragraphs 631 and 632.
625. LEAD SLEEVES FOR STRAIGHT SPLICES.
No. of Pairs in Cable Size of Sleeve* - Inches No. of Pairs in Cable Size of Sleeve* - Inches
19 Gauge Cable 22 Gauge Cable 19 Gauge Cable 22 Gauge Cable
16 3/4 x 15 3/4 x 15 202 2-3/4 x 20 2-1/4 x 17
26 1 x 15 1 x 15 303 3-1/2 x 20 2-3/4 x 20
51 1-1/2 x 15 1-1/4 x 15 404 4 x 20 3 x 20
76 1-3/4 X 17 1-1/2 x 15 450 3 x 20
101 2 x 17 1-1/2 x 15 606 3-1/2 x 20
152 2-1/4 x 20 2 x 17 909 4 x 20
aStock numbers of standard sizes of lead sleeves and sleeving are given in paragraph 627.
130
Par. 626
626. LEAD SLEEVES FOR BRIDGE SPLICES.
No. of
,,Pa 1 ra ---—---------------—___________________Number of Pairs in Branch Cable
Cable --------28-------—____-_76_________101__ _252_ ___202__ __404__ _606_ _909_ _£212_
a- —lze of Sleevea (Inches) for 22 Gauge Main Cable - 22 or 24 Gauge Branch Gables.
26 1-1/4x15 1-1/2x15
51 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15 1-3/4x17
76 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15 1-3/4x17 2x 17
101 - 1-3/4 x17 1-3/4 x17 2x17 2x17 2x17
152 2 x17 2 x17 2-1/4x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/2 x20
202 2-1/4x17 2-1/4X17 2-1/2x20 2-1/2 x20 2-1/2x20 2-3/4x20 3x 20
303 2-3/4x20 2-3/4x20 2-3/4x 20 3 x20 3x20 3x20 3-1/2 x20 3-1/2x20
404 3x20- 3 x 20b 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20
808 3-1/2 x20fc 3-1/2 x 20b 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 5 x 22
909 4x20 4 x20 4x 20 4-1/2x22 4-1/2x22 4-1/2x22 4-1/2x 22 5x22 5x22 5x22 5-1/2x 22
b- Size of Sleevea (Inches) for 19 Gauge Main Cable - 19 or 22 Gauge Branch Cables.
26 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15
51 1-1/2 x10C 1-3/4 x 17® 1-3/4 x17®
76 1-3/4x17° 1-3/4x17® 2x17 2x17°
101 2 x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/2 x 20 2-1/2 x 20
152 2-1/2 x 20 2-1/2 x 20 2-1/2 x 20 2-3/4 x 20 2-3/4 x 20® 3 x 20
202 2-3/4 x 20“ 2-3/4 x 2Qb 2-3/4 x 20b 3 x 20 3 x 20® 3-1/2 x20 3-1/2 x 20
303 3-1/2x 20° 3-1/2 x 20b 3-1/2x 20 3-1/2x20 3-1/2x20® 4x20 4x 20 4x20®
404 4 x 20 4 x 20b 4 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20® 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 X 22 4-1/2 x 22c
c. Size of Sleevea (Inches) for 24 Gauge Cables - Main and Branch.
26 1-1/4 x15 1-1/4 x15
51 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15
76 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15 1-1/2x15 1-3/4x17
101 1-1/2x15 1-3/4x17 1-3/4x17 1-3/4x17 2x17
152 1-3/4x17 1-3/4 x17 2 x17 2x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/2 x20
202 2 x17 2 x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/4x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/2 x20 2-3/4 x20
303 2-1/4 x17 2-1/4 x17 2-1/2 x 20 2-1/2 x 20 2-3/4 x 20 2-3/4 x 20 3 x 20 3-1/2 x 20
404 ,3 x 20b 3x20b ,3x20 3 x20 3 x20 3-1/2 x20 3-1/2 x20 3-1/2 x20 3-1/2 x20
606 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 3—1/2 x 20 3-1/2 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20 4 x 20 4-1/2 x 22
909 4 x20 4 x20 4 x20b 4 x 20 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 4-1/2 x 22 5 x 22 5-1/2 x 22
12 4-1/2 x 22 5 x 22 5 x 22 5-1/2 x 22 5-1/2 x 22 6 x 22
aStock numbers of standard sizes of lead sleeves and sleeving are given in paragraph 627.
bSleeve should be decreased to next smaller size when main cable is not to be cut.
cSleeve should be increased to next larger size when branch cable is 19 gauge.
131
Par. 627
627. MATERIALS FOR SPLICING LEAD COVERED CABLES.
Description Stock Number Unit Description Stock Number Unit
Wire W-107 (lashing wire) 1A107 Spool Sleeve, splicing, cotton,
Wire, #12 AWG, tie, copper 3/32 x 3-1/4", waxed punched
080, 17" long 1A812.6 Each and cut (900) 6N6006 Carton
Wire, lead lashing, diameter Sleeve FT-96 (1/8") 6N6008 Carton
.063-.073" 1A890 Foot Sleeve FT-97 (400 5/32 SW) 6N6010 Carton
Clamp, cable 7/16" 5B3107 Each Sleeve, splicing cotton,
Clamp, cable 1/2" double wall, 5/32 x 3-1/4"
(16 pr-22, 26 pr-26) 5B3108 Each no tracer waxed punched
Clamp, cable 5/8" and cut (300) 6N6010.1 Carton
(26 pr-22, 26 pr-24, 51 pr-26) 5B3110 Each Sleeve, splicing cotton,
Clamp, cable 11/16" (26 pr-22, double wall, 5/32 x 3-1/4",
51 pr-24, 51&76 pr-26) 5B3111 Each black tracer waxed,
Clamp, cable, 3/4" (26-22, punched and cut (300) 6N6010.2 Carton
51-24, 51 & 76-26) 5B3112 Each Sleeve FT-98 (1/4 x 3-1/4"
Clamp, cable, 1-1/4” 225) 6N6016 Carton
(101 3c 152-22, 152 & 202-24, 5B3120 Each Sleeve, splicing, cotton,
202 & 303-26) double wall, 1/4 x 3-1/4"
Clamp, cable, 1-1/2" (202-22, 303-24, 404-26) 5B3124 Each no tracer waxed punched 6N6016.1
damn, cable, 1-3/4" (303-22, and cut (150) Carton
404-455-24, 606-26) 5B3128 Each Sleeve, splicing, cotton,
Clamp, ground strand, double wall, 1/4 x 3-1/4",
Hubbard #8956 or equal 5B3349 Each black tracer waxed,
Desiccant for drying cable punched and cut (150) 6N6016.2 Carton
Splices 6G250 Can Sleeve, lead; 3/4 x 15" 6N6475-15 Each
Desiccant, air-tighc can Sleeve, lead; 3 x 18" 6N6503-18 Each
silica gel. 6G250-2 Can Sleeve, lead; 4-1/2 x 22" 6N6504.5-22 Each
Oil, splicing, cold stripping Sleeve, lead; 5x24" 6N6505-24 Each
(1 gallon) 6G1389 Gallon Sleeving, lead; 1/2" 6N7000-5 Foot
Paint, asphaltum, black 6G1410 Sleeving, lead; 1-3/4" 6N7001-7 Foot
(1 gallon) Can Sleeving, lead; 2-1/2" 6N7002-5 Foot
Bandage TL-97 (3x10 yards) 6N597 Roll Sleeving, lead; 3" 6N7003 Foot
Bandage, Muslin, unbleached, Solder M-30 (50-50) 6N7530 Pound
4" wide, 10 yards long 6N604-10 Roll Solder M-31 (resin core)
Bandage, rubber, insulating, (1 lb.) 6N7531 Pound
4" wide, 14 foot roll 6N634-14 Roll Solder M-33 (40-60) 6N7533 Pound
Cloth, cable wrapping; cotton Solder, wire, half and half
waterproof approx. 24 x 18" 6N1620 Each #10 6N7600 Pound
Cloth, cable wrapping; cotton Each Stearine compound IC-3
waterproof approx. 25 x 40" 6N1621 (1/4 lb. st.) 6N8003 Pound
Cloth, cotton, unbleached, Yard Tape TL-83 (3/4F) 6N8583 Roll
36" wide, 6.6 ounce pervsq.yd. 6N1636 Tape TL-94 (3/4" R) 6N8594 Roll
Paraffin Wax IC-4 6N4004 Pound Tape TL-109 (1" cot) 6N8609 Roll
Paste, soldering, 2 ounce cans 6N4102 Can Tape, friction; 2" wide,
Paster MC-73-A 6N4273A Roll 36 yard roll 6N8832-36 Roll
Ribbon, bonding copper 3/8" Anchor, Hammer drive G.I.
wide #16 B&S gauge 6N4903 Foot 1/4" x 1" 6Z284-4 Each
Sleeve FT-75 (1") 6N5575 Each Anchor, Hammer drive G.I.
Sleeve FT-76 (1-1/4") 6N5576 Each 1/4" x 1-1/4" 6Z284-5 Each
Sleeve FT-77 (1-1/2") 6N5577 Each Marline, 3-ply, 5 pound
Sleeve FT-78 (1-3/4") 6N5578 Each balls 6N6985 Pound
Sleeve FT-79 (2") 6N5579 Each Wedge, lead cable, for
Sleeve FT-80 (2-1/4") Sleeve FT-81 (2-1/2") 6N5580 6N5581 Each Each Y joints, W.E.Co. #1 Wedge, lead cable, for 6Z9430 Each
Sleeve FT-82 (2-3/4") Sleeve FT-83 (3") 6N5582 6N5583 Each Each Y joints, W.E.Co. #2 NSN Each
Sleeve FT-84 (3-1/2") 6N5584 Each Wedge, lead cable, for
Sleeve FT-85 (4") 6N5585 Each Y joints, W.E.Co. #3 NSN Each
Sleeve, splicing tinned, Wedge, lead cable, for
single tube copper #13 AWG, Y joints, W.E.Co. #4 FTNP-SL9430-4 Each
1-1/2" long, slotted Wedge, lead cable, for
6N5613-1.5 Each Y joints, W.E.Co. #5 FTNP-6ZS430-5 Each
Sleeve, splicing, tinned, Wedge, lead cable, for
single tube, copper #16 AWG, Y joints, W.E.Co. #6 FTNP-6Z9430-6 Each
1-1/2" long slotted Wedge, lead cable, for
through 1 wall 6N5616-1.5 Each Y joints, W.E.Co. #7 FTNP-6Z9430-7 Each
132
Par. 627-629
Description Stock Number Unit
Wedge, lead cable, for Y joints, W.E.Co. #8 FUJP-6Z9430-8 Each
Wedge, lead cable, for Y joints, W.E.Co. #9 FONP-6Z9430-9 Each
Cap, pipe, for 2" pipe NSN Each
Stock
Description Number Unit
Cap, pipe, for 3" pipe NSN Each
Compound, #2 P8cB NSN Can
Strip, leather, 24 X 2 x 1/8” NSN Each
Tags, cable, octagonal NSN Each
Tags, cable, round NSN Each
Section V Construction Time and Information on Poles
628. GENERAL. Paragraph 629 gives the estimated time required to perform various tactical line construction operations.under non-combat conditions. These figures are based upon the experience obtained during Signal Corps field trials.
Similar data for the fixed plant given in the same paragraph are based upon average commercial practice, paragraph 630 provides information on the rates of placing field wire circuits using various types of wire-laying equipment. Paragraphs 631 to 633 inclusive, give the American standard dimensions and weights of round poles commonly used in the United States and similar data on rectangular lumber supports.
629. ESTIMATED TIME REQUIRED FOR WORK OPERATIONS.
Man-Hoursa
Tactical Plant -Placing Fixed Plant Placing Removing
Laying Out and Staking Line Open Wire 150’ Span 6.5 10.
200 * Span 6.0
Insulated Wire -150* Span 5.0
Material Distribution 4x4 Lumber - per pole 0.17
Round Poles - per pole 0.28 0.5 —
Wire and Accessory Materials 150’ Span - 4 pairs 4.4 6.
200’ ipan - 4 pairs 3.7 •
Insulated Wire and Accessory materials - 150* span 1.5 2.
Lead Cable and Accessory materials - per reel 1.8
Holes - Pole Dug by hand 0.5 2.
Dug by machine 0.4 0.5 —
Dug by blasting - hand drilling 3.5 5.
Holes - Anchor Dug by hand -4x4 log - each 1.5
Dug by machine - log or plant - each 1.5 1.7 —
Dug by machine - patent - each — 0.8
Dug by hand - 5/8” rock - each 1.0
Assembling Supporting Structure Open Wire - 8 Pin Crossarm 4x4 Lumber Support - each 0.3 0.1
Round Pole - each 0.4 0.5 0.2
Setting Poles (erecting, back-filling and tamping) 4x4 Lumber - each 0.5 0.1
20’ round - each 0.8 0.4
30* round - each 1.2 1.5 0.8
Guying Placing anchor and back-filling 4x4 log - each 0.7
Round pole log or plank - each 2.3 2.7 •
Patent - each * 1.2 —
Placing and tensioning W-145, 109 G.S. or similar 0.3 .05
Wire messenger, 2.2m 0.8 * 0.1
Wire messenger, 6M or 10M 1.2 1.5 0.1
aAll figures are on a per mile basis except where otherwise indicated. Table continued on next page
133
Par. 629-630
ESTIMA. TED TIME REQUIRED FOR WORK OPERATIONS. (Continued) Man-Hours8
Tactical Plant - Placing
Fixed Plant Placing Removing
Installing Line Wire (Placing, sagging and tying-in)
One pair 20. 25. 5.
Four pair 42. 52. 15.
Installing Messenger Wire
6 and 10M Messenger — 36. 30.
16M Messenger — 50 40.
Placing Cable Rings on Messenger — 30. 17.
Placing Lead Covered Cable
On 10M Messenger or Smaller — 37. 40.
Placing Insulated Wire on existing
pole line 35. MB 7.
Ground Surface Construction*3
Spiral four 2.6 — 3.
Wire W-143 or similar 3.8 — 4.
Buried Cons truction (Using Cable Plow LC-61)c Spiral four
One cable 4.8 — —
Two-cables, same trench 6.4 —
Wire W-143
One pair 6.4 — —
Two pairs, same trench 8.0 — —
Constructing over-head crossing for insulated wire - each 5.2 — —
aAll figures are on a per mile basis except where otherwise indicated.
Xor surveying, staking line, testing sections and policing, add 12 man-hours per mile for spiral four cable and 6 man-hours per mile for Wire W-143.
Q
For surveying, staking line, testing sections and policing, add 18 man-hours per mile for one cable and 25 man-hours per mile for two cables.
630. RATES OF FIELD WIRE CONSTRUCTION.
Miles per Hour
Wire Laying Equipment Const. Party (men) Cne Circuit Two Circuits, Concurrently Cross
Roads Cross Country
Roads Country
Day Night Day Night Day Night Day Night
Axle, RL-27-( ) 2 1-1/2 1 1 1/2 - -
Carrier, RL- 24- ( ) 3 2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1 - -
Reel, RL-17-( ) 3 1-1/2 1 1 1/2 - -
Reel Cart, RL-16-( ) 2 1-1/2 1 1 1/2 1-1/2 1 1 1/2
Reel Equipment, CE-ll-( ) 1 2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1 — — — —
Reel Unit, RL-26-( ) (mtd. in truck) 6 3-5 2-4 3-5 2-4 3-5 2-4 3-5 2-4
134
Par. 631
631. DIMENSIONS OF ROUND POLES (AMERICAN STANDARD).
Class* Minimum top circumference (inches) Transverse breaking loads (pounds) 1 27 4500 2 25 3700 3 23 3000 4 21 2400 5 19 1900 6 17 1500 7 15 1200
Length
Feet Spe c i e s b Minimum circumference at 6 feet from butt
20 Northern cedar 39.5 37.0 34.0 31.5 29.0 27.0 25.0
Western cedar 34.5 32.0 30.0 28.0 25.5 23.5 22.0
Lodgepole pine 32.5 30.5 28.5 26.5 24.5 22.5 21.0
Southern pine 31.5 29.5 27.5 25.5 23.5 22.0 20.0
Douglas fir 31.5 29.5 27.5 25.5 23.5 22.0 20.0
22 Northern cedar 41.0 38.5 36.0 33.0 30.5 28.0 26.0
Western cedar 36.0 33.5 31.5 29.0 27.0 25.0 23.0
Lodgepole pine 34.0 32.0 30.0 27.5 25.5 23.5 22.0
Southern pine 33.0 31.0 29.0 26.5 24.5 23.0 21.0
Douglas fir 33.0 31.0 29.0 26.5 24.5 23.0 21.0
25 Northern cedar 43.5 41.0 38.0 35.5 32.5 30.0 28.0
Western cedar 38.0 35.5 33.0 30.5 28.5 26.0 24.5
Lodgepole pine 36.0 33.5 31.0 29.0 27.0 25.0 23.0
Southern pine 34.5 32.5 30.0 28.0 26.0 24.0 22.0
Douglas fir 34.5 32.5 30.0 28.0 26.0 24.0 22.0
30 Northern cedar 47.5 44.5 41.5 38.5 35.5 33.0 30.5
Western cedar 41.0 38.5 35.5 33.0 30.5 28.5 26.5
Lodgepole pine 39.0 36.5 34.0 31.5 29.0 27.0 25.0
Southern pine 37.5 35.0 32.5 30.0 28.0 26.0 24.0
Douglas fir 37.5 35.0 32.5 30.0 28.0 26.0 24.0
35 Northern cedar 50.5 47.5 44.0 41.0 38.0 35.0 32.5
Western cedar 43.5 41.0 38.0 35.5 32.5 30.5 28.0
Lodgepole pine 41.5 38.5 36.0 33.5 31.0 28.5 26.5
Southern pine 40.0 37.5 35.0 32.0 30.0 27.5 25.5
Douglas fir 40.0 37.5 35.0 32.0 30.0 27.5 25.5
Class 8 - Top circumference 18 inches, estimated transverse
breaking load 1100 pounds;
Class 9 - Top circumference 15 inches, estimated transverse
breaking load 900 pounds;
Class 10 - Top circumference 12 inches, estimated transverse
breaking load 600 pounds.
No butt dimensions are specified for these classes.
'Northern and Western cedars are furnished butt treated; other species are treated full length.
135
Par. 632-634
632. WEIGHTS OF ROUND POLES (AMERICAN STANDARD).
Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
Length Feet Species Weights6 (Pounds)
20 Northern cedar 510 440 380 320 260 210 160 140 120
Western cedar 430 380 310 280 230 190 170 150 110
Lodgepole pine 410 340 295 255 220 185 155 135 105
Southern pine 640 510 420 350 300 250 210 180 140
Douglas fir 520 410 340 280 240 200 170 140 120
22 Northern cedar 570 500 430 370 300 240 190 160 140
Western cedar 510 450 380 330 270 240 200 170 130
Lodgepole pine 480 400 350 300 255 215 185 150 115
Southern pine 740 600 500 410 360 300 250 210 170
Douglas fir 600 490 400 340 290 240 200 170 140
25 Northern cedar 680 600 520 440 360 290 240 200 170
Western cedar 600 550 450 390 330 290 250 210 150
Lodgepole pine 605 495 420 360 315 265 225 195 145
Southern pine 890 730 610 510 440 380 310 260 210
Douglas fir 720 590 490 420 360 300 250 210 170
30 Northern cedar 930 800 700 580 480 390 320 290 —
Western cedar 820 720 620 520 450 380 330 270 *
Lodgepole pine 810 670 580 490 415 350 295 260 —
Southern pine 1140 9 70 820 700 590 490 410 330 —
Douglas fir 930 780 6 70 570 480 400 330 270 -
35 Northern cedar 1170 1010 880 730 600 500 400 * —
Western cedar 1060 910 800 6 70 550 470 420 <— •*
Lodgepole pine 1035 865 715 615 520 435 365 — -
Southern pine 1410 1200 1040 900 770 670 580 — —
Douglas fir aAn estimate 1140 of the 980 shipping 840 space 730 620 540 470 required for poles may — —
be obtained by the following formula;
Weight (pounds) x constant = approx, ship space (Cu. Ft.)
The values of the constant are; Cedars = .052
Lodgepole pine = .041
Pine - .026
Douglas fir ■ .032
633. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OF 2 x 4 AND 4x4 LUMBER SUPPORTS (AMERICAN STANDARD) .
Weight8- per Linear Nominal Dressed Foot - Pounds
Size Size Treated13
Inches Inches Untreated (Creosote)
2x4 1-5/813-5/8 1.4 1.7
4 x 4 3-5/8 X3-5/8 2.9 3.6
aThese weights apply to Southern pine; weights of Douglas Fir would be 5 to 10% less.
bSalt treatment increases the untreated weight only slightly, in the case of 2 x4 dried material about 1 pound per 100 linear feet and in the case of 4x4 material about 2-1/4 pounds per 100 linear feet.
Section VI Construction Equipment, Vehicles and Tools
634. GENERAL. Descriptions and stock numbers of wire and cable placing and recovering equipment and of special purpose trucks and trailers used in line construction and maintenance are given in paragraphs 635 and 636. The tools and equipment which are required by lineman, groundmen and splicers in the construction and maintenance of communication lines are given in paragraphs 637 to 640, inclusive. Individual tool equipment which should be provided, as well as other equipment which should be carried on each truck, or should be available at central points, is included.
136
137
Par. 635
635. WIRE AND CABLE -PLACING AND RECOVERING EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Signal Weight -Pounds
Nomenclature Corps Packed
Type Fig. Stock for
Name Number No. Number Net Export Cu. Ft. _________________________________________Remrks_____________
Reel CE-11 608 6H6111 10 15 3 Consists of Reel Unit RL-39, Handset TS-10-( ), Straps ST-33, ST-34 and ST-35; used for
Equipment laying and recovering 1/4-mile of assault wire, TM 11-2250 and FM 24-5.
Reel DR-4 609 6H2504 22 30 2 Steel, 22" O.D. and 7" wide; used for field and assault wire; mounts on Axle RL-27-A,
Reel Unit RL-31 and Reel Cart RL-35.
Reel DR-5 610 6H2505 34 40 4 Steel, 19-1/2" O.D. and 18" wide; used for field and long range tactical wire; mounts on
Reel Unit RL-26, Reel Unit RL-31 and Reel Cart RL-35.
Resl DR-7 601 6H2507 40 8 Steel, 27-1/2" O.D. and 18" wide; used for 5- and 10-pair rubber-covered cable; mounts
on Reel Unit RL-31.
Reel ER-8 6H7108 2 0.4 Steel, 9" O.D. and 8" wide; used for assault wire; separate item and also component of
RL-39.
Reel DR-15 611 6H2515 40 4.8 Steel, same as DR-5 except with an adapter (FT-315) on the inside of one flange to hold
cable connectors; used for rubber-covered cables; mounts on Reel Unit RL-26, Reel Unit RL-31 and Reel Cart RL-35. TM 11-369.
Reel Cart RL-16 612 6H6016 205 240 25 2-wheel, hand-drawn; will carry two Reels DR-4 or one Reel DR-5; furnished with empty
Reels DR-4 unless otherwise specified. FM 24-5.
Reel Unit RL-17 613 6H3017 80 93 3.7 Payout, mounted on a barrow to be carried by two men; used for paying out wire. TM 11-368.
Reel Unit RL-26 6H6226 350 500 50 Portable, gasoline engine driven, with two shafts; accommodates, but does not include,
Reels DR-5. TM 11-360, TB 11-360-1 and FM 24-5.
Reel Unit RL-26-A 614 6H6226A 350 500 50 Same as RL-26 except includes Cover BG-68. TM 11-360, TB 11-360-1 and FM 24-5.
Reel Unit RL-26-B 6H6226B Same as RL-26-A except frame strengthened and brakes improved.
Reel Unit RL-26-C 6H6226C 450 Same as RL-26-B except tool box added.
Axle RL-27-A 609 6H227A 5 6 .05 Steel, with two knurled handles; used for carrying by hand, but does not include,
Reel DR-4. FM 24-5.
Axle RL-27-B 6H227B 7 10 0.3 Steel, same as RL-27-A except equipped with hand crank for recovering wire.
Reel Unit RL-31-B 615 6H6231 35 40 0.33 Collapsible frame of steel tubing, a braking unit (GC-10), a crank (GC-4-A), two hanger
and four toe plates; used with cargo trucks in wire and cable laying. TM 11-362 and TB 11-362-2.
Support FT-245 6H7245 12 0.4 Drawing SC-A-6362, for bracing Reel Unit RL-31 to inside of a cargo truck.
Reel Cart RL-35 609 6H6235 105 Single axle, hand-drawn, with hand crank for recovering wire; has capacity of 3 Reels
DR-4, 1 Reel DR-5 or 1 Reel DR-15.
Reel RL-39 6H3039 2.6 Consists of a frame, Reel DR-8, two handles and a crank; part of CE-11. TM 11-2250.
Reel Unit RL-45 6H6245 35 40 0.33 Similar to RL-31, with clamps to permit use in 1/4-ton truck.
Carrier RL-24-A 6H524A 26 33 2 H-shaped iron frame, used with a Phillips Pack Saddle; uses, but, does not include, Reel
DR-4. Part of CE-1, CE-2 and CE-5.
Plow ID-61 616 6H2061 1525 1815 50 Designed to be pulled by a 2-1/2 ton truck, tractor or winch line; the feeding passage
is 1-1/8" wide; for burying insulated wire or small cables to a depth of from 6" to 18". Burying can be done either directly from reels mounted on plow or truck or after the facilities are on the ground in service. TM 11-369 and TM 11-370.
Axle ID-31 6Q1531 58 65 0.5 Steel, cable reel; 2" diameter by 6’ long; for use with two Jacks ID-13.
Par. 635
138
1
' •*- AXLE RL-27-A
W’Wj yl
’"*3**!o 1
/
r„ ^T&m-handset TS-IO FIGURE 609. Reel Cart RL-35 and 3 Reels DR-4
VA X t feur
L T’^P* f~REEL DR-8
^~:JB'?" ^rwrZ ‘
jHKawJIW
TFT/ \ ADAPTER
■ / 1 FT-315 ►
Wz B X-^ wwmL ,'^i,
I '"W fisK
i ,s^S
Jr®
FIGURE 612. Reel Cart RL-16
With 2 Reels DR-4 *
FIGURE 614. Reel Unit RL-26-A With Reels DR-5
FIGURE 615. Reel Unit RL-31-B FIGURE 616. Plow LC-61
Par. 635
140
Par. 636
636. SPECIAL PURPOSE TRUCKS AND TRAILERS FOR LINE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE.
Nomenclature Shown in Fig.No. Stock Number Net Weight Pounds Carrying Capacity Pounds Shipping Dimensions
Name Type Number
Cu.Ft. Sq.Ft. Remarks
Trailer K-36 617 6J1036 1,815 5,000 54 2-ton, body 72" x 48" x 5-1/2"; used for pole and bulk material hauling. TM 11-368 and TM 9-2800.
Trailer K-37 618 6J1037 2,900 10,000 472 82 5-ton, used for cable reel and pole hauling. TM 9-2800.
Trailer K-38 619 • 6J1038 410 500 68 21 1/4-ton, body 42" x 36" x 24"; used for storage and transportation of cable slicer’s Tool Equipment TE-56-( ). TM 9-2800.
Truck K-43 620 6J9043 10,215 1,035 3,070 140 1-1/2 ton, 4x4, equipped with winch, pole derrick and power take-off; used for general line construction and maintenance. TM 10-1202, TM 10-1203, TM 10-1414 and TM 9-2800.
Truck K-44-B 621 6J9044B 7,200 3,000 1,438 164 1-1/2 ton, 4x4, equipped with earth-borer and pole-setter; used for general line construction and maintenance. TM 11-364, TM 10-1202, TM 10-1203, TM 10-1414 and TM 9-2800.
FIGURE 617. Trailer K-36
FIGURE 618. Trailer K-37
700898 0—46-----11
141
Par. 636
p TELEPHONE AND TEST CORDS
jT*...r B0DY belt and safety strap
FURNACE r ... hriL—Hli ______ , I ,
SHIEL0-sJT------—
DESICCANT P * - ■ r
INCAN ---1\ ' JF .'
| A / -
iir „ _—.... — jf.- .,/>•
HANDBOOK—— X. ——• w---------------
/
1 L- FURNACE, LADLE
LTEst equipment &ppSe&DERING
FIGURE 619. Trailer K-38 With Gable Splicer’s Tool Equipment TE-56
142
LANTERN GUARD ----
Par. 636
FIGURE 620
BODY SUPPORT JACKS-1
. Truck K-43
- POWER TAKE-OFF WITH REEL IN PLACE
FIGURE 621. Truck K-44-B
143
Par. 637
637. LINE CONSTRUCTION TOOL EQUIPMENT.
Stock No, Stock No.
a. Lineman’s Equipment TE-21 6Q63521 2 Knife, draw, 10" blade 6Q60510
(Not stocked as a unit) 1 Mallet, 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" 6R335-55
1 Ax I£-l 6 Q.1001 1 Oilstone, 8" x 2" x 1" 1 Rule, folding 4 ft. 6R2182 6R9604
1 Belta LC-23-B, (Lineman’s 1 Tape, linen, 50 ft. 6R36053
safety with safety strap) 6Q4523B 2 Wrench, monkey, 12" 6R56512
1 Clampb LC-24 6Q27024 4 Scabbard, bit, 11/16" 6Q6O11-1Q/1
1 pr. Climbers0 LC-5 6Q28205 1 Scabbard, bit, 3/8" 6Q5906-1E/1
1 Pliers TL-107 (8" side cutting) 6R4607 1 Tool Roll BG-47 6R38347
1 Screwdriver TL-106 6R16810 Packed - 43 lbs; 1-1/2 cu. ft.
1 Wrench LC-25-A Packed - 23 lbs; 0.7 cu. ft. 6R56013A Additional small tools which should be available
Additional items which should be available to lineman are: are: Bits, auger, 1/4" 6Q5704
Gloves LC-29 (Rubber) 6Z4829 Chisels, cold, 1/2" x 5" Gloves^ LC-29, rubber 6Q19808 6Z4829
Gloves LC-10 (Leather) 6Z4810 Saw TL-104 (hand, 26") 6R1092 6-8
Gage TL-144 (Lineman’s climber) 6Q45144 Flashlight^ TL-122-( ) 6Z4002A.1
b. Groundman’s Equipment TE-23 6Q48523 Stop watch, 1 min. dial Drills, rock, star point, 5/8" x 8" 6Q35210—8
1 Beltd IC-30 (Lineman’s without 6Q4530 Brushes, paint, 5/32" dia. Pull Finder LC-45 6Z1597 6R7245
Safety strap), or Belte LC-23-A less safety strap 1 pr. Gloves DC-10 (Leather) 6Z4810 d. Miscellaneous Tools (Not a part of tool equipments)
1 Pliers TL-107 (8" side cutting) Packed - 8 lbs; 0.23 cu. ft. 6R4607 Ax LC-36 (with 36" handle) 6Q1236
Additional items which should be available to Bars LC-20 (Wrecking) Bars DC-2 (7*, digging) 6Q3020 6Q3002
groundman are: Bars LC-3 (S’, tamping) 6Q3003
Ax DC-1 6Q1001 Block Equipment TE-92 Block set LC-4 6Q8792 6Q8504
Wrench IO-25-A 6R56013A (One tackle, 4"-2 sheave block with
Hammer HM-1 (2 lbs.) 6Q49001 1/2" rope, one tackle, 7"-2 sheave
Co Tool Equipment TE-27A 6R38027A block with 3/4" rope, one snatch block, 8", for manila rope).
(Small tools) Block, 8", triple sheave, steel and 6Q8908-3
1 Bag BG-44 or 6Q2044 Block, 8", triple sheave, steel, reeve with 6Q8908-3.2
1 Bag PG-28 6Q.2028 Rope, 3/4" manila x 350 ft. 6Z7909
2 Bits, auger, 3/8” 6Q5706 Block, G.I., single sheave, reeve 6Q8802-1
2 Bits, auger, 1/2" 6Q5708 with
1 Bit, auger, 1-1/4" 6Q5720 Rope RP-1 (5/16" x 60 ft.) 6Z7904
4 Bits, car (or ship's auger) Grip LC-23 (Wire and 2.2M Messenger) 6Q46528
11/16" x 18" 6Q6011-18 Crip, messenger and guy strand 6Q47133
1 Bit, Bell hanger, 3/8" x 18" 6Q5906-18 Knife, LC-14-B (Brush cutting) 6Q60114B
1 Frame, hacksaw, adjustable 6Q41000 Hook, cant, 4-1/2 ft. handle 6Q52845
24 Blades, hacksaw, 18 point 6Q8110-18 Hook DC-48 (pole carrying) 6Q52948
1 Brace, ratchet, 12" sweep 6Q13012 Hamner, sledge, 16 lbs. 6Q.50 200-16
3 Chisels, wood, 2" 6Q21232 Augers, pole hole, 8" 6Q708
2 Files, flat bastard, 10" 6Q38030-10 Chair, lineman's safety, Chance #27 6Q18312
2 Hammers TL-39 (claw, 1 lb.) 6Q49139 Ladder LC-15 (Extension, two l&-ft.
1 Handle TL-14 (file) 6Q51014 • sections) 6Q62015
aFurnished in sizes 18(36), 20(38), 22(40), 24(42), 26(44), 28(46), 30(48):
( ) indicates waist measurements.
^Sleeve Rolling Tool, TL-143 (Stock No. 6R22743A) or Compressing Tool, TL-217 (Stock No. 6R22817) should be ordered in place of Clamp, LC-24.
cFumished in lengths from 14" to 20" in 1/2" steps. Orders should be worded to include straps and pads when required.
^Furnished in sizes 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46 and 48, (waist measurement).
eConsult Signal Corps Catalog for stock number, which varies according to length of belt.
^Furnished in sizes 9-1/2, 10, 10-1/2, 11, 11-1/2, and 12.
&Uses 2 Batteries BA-30, vhich must be ordered separately.
144
Par. 637-641
Stock No,
Jack LC-54 (Pole pulling, 15-ton) Pick, railroad type, with handle Pole PO-5 (Pike, 10 ft.) Pole PO-7 (Pike, 14 ft. )
Pole Support LC-16 (7 ft., deadman)
Wire Raising Hook LC-65
Square, steel, 24” x 16"
Scale LC-64
6Q55054
6R3000
6R5605
6R5607
5A3416
6R25724-16
Saw TL-129 (Cross cut) 6R10860-3
Trimmer LC-22 (Tree) 6R44322
Reel RL-17-( ), payout
Shovel LC-17 (Round point. 8 ft. handle) 6R22017
Shovel LG-19 (Round point, short
D-handle) SR22019
Shovel LC-18,(Spoon, 8 ft. handle) 6R22018 Jack LC-13 (Cable reel) 6Q.55013
Bar, (Handle) for Jack LC-13 6Q55013/1
Axle LC-31 (Cable reel) 6Q1531
Grip LC-38 (Cable pulling, woven
wire, split, 1” x 18") 6Q47116-18
Grip, cable pulling, woven wire, size 1-1/2" x 24" 6Q47024-24
Grip, cable pulling, woven wire, size 2" x 24" 6 Q4 7032-24
Grip, cable pulling, woven wire, size 2-1/2"
Guide, aerial cable
6Q48542-1
638. LEAD-COVERED CABLE SPLICER’S TOOL
Equipment.---------------------------—
Tool Set TE-56-A oomprises tools and materials required to splice and wipe sleeves on lead-covered cable. It consists of an assortment of tools, expendable supplies, amplifier, lineman's handset and test sets, etc.; includes such items as lineman’s belt, hack saw, cloth, soldering coppers, drift pins, files, insulating compound, electrician’s knives, oil, pliers, tape, etc. These tools and materials are housed in Trailer K-38. Additional equipment required for splicing work on aerial cables is as follows:
Stock No, 6R38056A
Tent LG-37 (Cable splicer’s) 6R36537 This assembly includes cotton duck tent, metal collapsible frame and wooden platform 38" x 54-1/2’’. Packed 52 lbs., 0.3 cu. ft.
Ladder LC-15 (extension, two 15-ft. sections) 6Q62015
639. VULCANIZING EQUIPMENT FOR RUBBER-COVERED CABLES. ’ ---------------------
Vulcanizing Equipment TE-55-A 6R47255A Vulcanizing equipment for repairing cable WC-535 (part of cable assembly CC-355-A) and cable WC-534 (part of cable Assembly CC-345 and cable stub CG-344); consists of Chest CH-75-C containing mold equipment, vulcanizer, rubber
cement, gloves, skinning knife, pliers and miscellaneous tools and supplies. Addition of molds for cable WC-548 (part of Cable Assemblies CC-358 and CC-368 and Cable Stub CC-356) is under consideration.
640. LINE SURVEY TOOLS AND MATERIALS.
Tools and materials which are useful in line layout work are given below. The selection of the particular articles required depends upon the type of line to be constructed and the terrain.
_________Article_____________
Note book and pencil Stakes, wooden, preferable 1”x 3” with orange tops Tags, linen or equivalent Tape, steel, 100-foot measuring (Part of TE-11) Ax LC-1, or Ax LC-36 Compass 1-1 or equivalent Poles, ranging Crayons, lumber, or Chalk Knife TL-29 Shovel LC-19 Pliers TL-13 or similar Belt LC-23-B Climbersa LC-5, Lineman’s or similar
Flashlight TL-122-( ) Gloves LG-10 (Leather) Rope RP-1, 5/16” diam.,
60-foot length 6Z7904
Nails, roofing #12 or equivalent6L2001 Cloth, strips of
Field wire, measured lengths
Rule, folding 6-foot 6R9606
Binoculars
Bar, digging; 5-foot 6Q3505
Hook LC-21 (Brush or bush) 6Q52621
Stock No,
6Z8604
6R36026
6Q1001
6Q1236
7A486 6Q60229.1 6R22019
6R4513
6Q4523B
6Q28205 6Z4002
6Z4810
aFurnished in lengths from 14" to 20" in 1/2’’ steps. Orders should be worded to
include straps and pads when required ,
Section VII Submarine Cable
SUBMARINE CABLE FOR TACTICAL USE. Cable Assembly CC-358 (spTFal-f our) s WC-534 (5 pair), and Cable WC-535
641. ;
a. i
Cable .zw,. ) , cum uaum wu-ooo
(10 pair) are suitable for use as tactical submarine cables in depths of water at least up to one-half mile, and will probably be satisfactory for much greater depths. Life expectancies of the order of one year are considered reasonable. The transmission properties of such cables, when properly laid, will be about the same as those obtained when the cables are employed normally.
b. Underwater splices should be avoided whenever feasible in short submarine cables. Except in the case of spiral-four cable connectors, standard (vulcanized) splices should be used whenever possible. The insulation of spiral-four cable connectors should be improved by means of rubber cement, DR or rubber rape, and friction tape. If it becomes necessary to utilize expedient splices, their insulation should be improved with rubber cement; and if the conductor
friction tape.
145
Par. 641-643
splices proper are made without the use of copper splicing sleeves, then they should be strengthened by means of tension bridges, (TM 11-369 and TB Sig 67).
£. Tactical submarine cables may be laid from suitable boats or amphibious vehicles by means of reels, or by paying out cable stowed in figure-eight form. It is advantageous to use a method which permits, Insofar as possible, the making of all splices and preliminary tests before the actual laying starts. One of the most satisfactory methods of laying is to employ Truck, Amphibian, 2-1/2-ton 6x6 (Duck). Four to five miles of prespliced tactical cable can be stowed in this truck. The cable should be formed on the floor of the cockpit so that the crosspoint or the figure-eight is at the center, with one loop extending forward and the other aft. The cable should be paid out over the stern. A suitable device for guiding the cable over the stern is an empty reel mounted in Reel Unit RL-31, erected on the after deck.
d. The addition in the field, of armor or additional outer covers to tactical cables for submarine use is not considered to be feasible or desirable. The outer covers of the tactical cables are tough and will resist serious abrasion, as well as sheath breaks due to repeated flexure, for long intervals if motion is kept to a minimum. Therefore, cables should be laid on the bottom and additional weight should be applied as necessary in order to hold the cables in po
sition. The best method for increasing the weight of tactical cable in the field is to leash it to Wire W-115 (6M-Messen-ger) at approximate three-foot intervals by means of a clove hitch or square knot ties made with short lengths of Wire W-11O-B. Cables so reinforced with messenger should be used all the way across short channels with fast current (faster than about 2 or 3 miles per hour). Reinforcement with messenger is not required at all in calm water or at sheltered approaches, but is required at approaches that are exposed to breaking waves. Under the latter conditions the reinforcement should extend from a log anchor well up on shore to a rock anchor well out in deep water. Cable laid in calm water or in deep water between rock anchors needs no special reinforcement, but is simply laid with sufficient slack to permit it to conform to the contours of the bottom.
642. SUBMARINE CABLE FOR FIXED PLANT.
In fixed plant areas lead-covered armored submarine cables are usually employed and these cables require special engineering, special equipment for installing and trained crews to do the work. If such cable installations are required the matter should be discussed with the Army Communication Service. However, data on stocked sizes of these submarine cables are given in paragraph 643.
643. SUBMARINE CABLES - PHYSICAL DATA AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Type No.e Stock Number No. of Pairs Armoring Diameter - In. Weight-Lbs. per Foot Feet per Reel Shipping Data per Reel of Cable
Lead Sheath Overall
Weight Cu.Ft.
a. Paired Cable. WC-321 1D321 10 Single Wire (203 mil) 0.74 1.60 4.2 3,000 13,566 190
WC-325 1D325 25 Single Wire (203 mil) 1.05 1.90 5.25 2,000 11,466 190
WC-327 1D327 50 Single Wire (203 mil) 1.32 2.17 6.67 2,000 14,306 190
WC-328 1D328 75 Single Wire (203 mil) 1.63 2.5 8.5 1,500 13,716 190
WC-329 1D329 100 Single Wire (203 mil) 1.71 2.58 10.75 1,500 17,275 233
WC-333 1D333 10 Double Wire (203/203) 0.8 2.52 9.0 3,000 31,636 651
WC-335 1D335 25 Double Wire (203/203) 1.05 2.75 10.25 2,000 ■ 23,000 496
WC-337 1D337 50 Double Wire (203/238) 1.32 3.09 11.5 1,500 18,450 258
WC-338 1D338 75 Double Wire (203/238) 1.63 3.44 13.5 1,000 14,670 245
WC-339 1D339 100 Double Wire (203/238) 1.71 3.52 15.75 1,000 16,920 245
b. Single Conductor Cableb 16 #14 BWG Galv.Steel Wires — 1.16 0.639 c 3,885d 62d
1D1020.1 10 #4 BWG Galv.Steel Wires — 1.47 1.99 c 12,099'; 151d
- - - 10 #2 BWG Galv.Steel Wires - 1.56 2.84 c 17,267d 202d
aAll paired cables have No. 19 AWG conductors. All single conductor cables consist of 7 strands of No. 20 AWG wire; 130 lbs. per nautical mile.
b Cable consists of one conductor surrounded by rubber insulation, Anhydrex AA-60 rubber compound, cloth tape, two layers of jute, then armor and one layer of jute overall.
cShipped in lengths of 20 to 50 nautical miles coiled on gondola cars.
d Figures are per nautical mile.
146
Par. 701-703
GHA.P TER 7
EUROPEAN AND UNITED STATES CABLES AND LOADING SYSTEMS
Section I
Coil Loaded Lead-Covered Cables
701. INTRODUCTION. This section gives information regarding the types of coil loaded cable used in Europe and in the United States, and also includes information regarding loading standards approved by the C.C.I.F. (International Consulting Committee, Telephony) for voice-frequency telephone circuits.
Coil spacing in meters
Coil inductance in millihenries.
Theoretical loading cut-off frequency in cycles
Conductor diameters in millimeters
702. EUROPEAN CABLE LOADING SYSTEMS -SCOPE.
a. This section summarizes all the information on loaded cable circuits given in the February 1939 edition of "Nomenclature Des Circuits Telephoniques International" published by the "Bureau De L’Union Internationale Des Telecommunications", Berne, Switzerland.
b. The data are organized in groups for individual nations. Each such group consists of the types of loaded cable circuits located wholly within the specified national boundaries, which are used as portions of international circuits, except that a small number of international submarine cables are included. It is probable that other types of loading not listed in the tables are used on cables located wholly within the boundaries of the individual countries.
c_. Most of the data are for coil loaded circuits, nearly all in underground cables. Aerial cables are very seldom used in the countries listed. Occasionally, coil loaded or continuously loaded submarine cables are involved. Information regarding the most important of these submarine cables is given in section II of this chapter.
The theoretical nominal impedances of the loaded circuits are computed from the listed values of coil inductance and loading cut-off, and are "rounded off" to the nearest 50 ohms. The notes to each table include a list of the A.W.G. sizes (Brown & Sharpe gauge) which are closest to the actual wire sizes. Usually the loaded phantoms are phantoms of twisted-pair quads which also have their side circuits loaded. In such instances the associated side circuit and phantom circuit loading data are tabulated side by side, these groupings being based on the loading practices recommended by the C.C.I.F. In some countries, notably Holland and to some extent Germany and Sweden, spiral-four type cable quads are used. In such cables, it is not customary to load the phantoms, and the data given for loaded pairs apply to the side circuits. In other instances the loaded pair data may apply to nonquadded cables.
b. Impedance Data, in computing the Impedance data the effects of the conductor resistance and the relatively small distributed inductance of the cable circuits are ignored. They were derived by combining the formulas
Z = and fc = —7=
/ C 0 it yLC
to obtain Z =
fc
703. EUROPEAN CABLE LOADING SYSTEMS -DATA.
a. General. Coil loaded cable data are tabulated in paragraph 705 for the following countries: Belgium, Danzig, Denmark, England, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Luxemburg, Norway, Poland, Roumania, Sweden, and Switzerland.
The following items given in the tables are taken from the International Union publication:
where Z is the impedance,! is the loading coil inductance in henrys, c is the loading section capacitance in farads, and fc is the loading cut-off frequency. (L and fc were obtained from the lists in the International Union publication mentioned in paragraph 702.) The impedance data are useful in estimating the attenuation losses of the loaded circuits and the reflection losses, when various types of Army telephones and repeaters are connected to the circuits.
£. Attenuation Loss Data. Attenuation loss values for the individual loaded cable circuits may be estimated by
147
Par. 703-704
first determining the impedance and the wire size from the tables and then referring to the curves in paragraph 704, which show for various wire sizes, the 1000-cycle attenuation loss versus nominal impedance. Separate sets of curves are given for nonphantomed pairs and side circuits of phantom groups and for phantom circuits. Attenuation values for wire sizes not plotted can be determined by interpolation. The probable error of the curves is of the order of ± 10 per cent, or less. The degree of approximation is greatest for low impedance circuits using small -size conductors.
d. Uses of the Loaded Circuits. Most types of coil loaded circuits used as components of international circuits are operated on a physical four-wire basis. Some are also used on a two-wire basis.
Some of the low impedance, high cut-off circuits are employed for "two-band" telephony, in which a voice-frequency channel (300 to 2600 or 2700 cycles) is used for one direction of transmission, and a carrier channel for the opposite direction. Loaded pairs and loaded phantoms are used for this purpose, particularly in central Europe. The types of loading used for two-band telephony include the 5580-12, 5580-30 and 6000-20 systems on side circuits and the 6560-20 system on phantoms. (In these loading system designations, the first number is the coil spacing in feet, and the second number is the coil inductance in mh.) Low impedance types of coil loaded cable circuits used for entrance and intermediate cables in non-loaded open-wire lines are included in the tables.
704. TYPICAL EUROPEAN LOADED CABLES - APPROXIMATE 1000-CYCLE LOSS PER MILE (1608 meters) vs nominal impeda~nce.
1.3 -------
1.2 -----------------------------------------------------
11 \ WIRE SIZE GAUGE DIAMETER 1.1 ----------------------------------
\ (millimeters') (a.w.g) (millimeters)
2 1.0 \-------Xr----------------------19 .912 ---- -0 I___________
v \ X 16 1291 1-0 \---------------------------------
\ X I? x-x \ GAUGE diameter
g 9 ______\ \_______________________ ________________________ 2 \ (a.w.g) (MILLIMETERS)
X \ X° NOMINAL IMPEDANCE-^ * ® \ WIRE SIZE [1 .
a ________\ \_________________ _____________________g VmILLIMETERS) 13 1.828
ui ■8 XT xT X~ 19 s \\—-----------
- \ X. 80 X. \ \ NOMINAL IMPEDANCE=\/l
2 7 ____X________X--------X.--------------------------------- , \ \7O C
££ * ' N. ^X ' ' id .7 —V---V-----------------------------
Ld \ \ d l \ \
" .6 \________X _______\\--------------------------------------3 6 \ \ \
.5 -------------x^-------x^..--------------------------- 6 \ \\-----------------X— ——-----------------
H \ \ x 90X.
d 4_______—------------------------------------_------— g \ X /x ^x^ ______
5 • ______ _______________ g ‘ \
g 3 ------------- O .3 \
O --------- ------------ J 'x x
____ T—J5Ok~'~X__ ----------------------I -
2 .--------------- —--------~~~ - _----------------- — - O o X- ------------—TX? 7" —
__I i.aor——I___ — ----------- 2 ____iso^--~~.- --------——----- ' ~~—~ ""—■ - Jd’o-XX —XXX2
.1--------------------------------------------------------- ,i ------------_—— -------—-----------------
o --------------------------------------------------------- o -------------------------------------------
400 600 SOO 1000 1200 1400 1600 400 600 800 1000
NOMINAL IMPEDANCE -OHMS NOMINAL IMPEDANCE-OHMS
(a)SIDE CIRCUITS (b)PHANTOMS
148
Par. 705
705. TYPES OF COIL LOADED CABLE CIRCUITS IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE FACILITIES.
Spacing of Loaded pairs® Loaded Phantoms
Loading Coils Lc f Ze L° fod ) (mh) (cycles) Ze Wire Sizef
a> a> co (feet) (mh) (cycle s) (ohms (ohms) (diameter inmm)
BELGIUM
1830 6000) 44a 5800 800 25a 6400 500 1.23;1.30;1.80
to to ) 110 3600 1250 44 4500 600 0.90
1840 6040) 177a 2900 1600 63a 3600 700 (0.90;1.23;1.50
177 2800 1550 (1.00;1.30;1.80
DANZIG •
1660 1700 5450 5580 200 20 b 2800 8850 1750 550 10b 9740 300 0.80 - 1.40
2000 6560 50a 5430 850 20a 6830 450 0.90
2000 6560 190a 2690 1600 70a 3465 750 1.40
DENMARK
1696 5550) 30 7600 700 1.15
) 30 7500 700 1.05
to to ) 140a 3600 1600 56a 4450 800 0.90;1.00
) 140a 3500 1550 56a 4250 750 1.05;1.40
1710 5600) 140a 3400 1500 1.05;1.40
2000 6560 190a 2740 1630 70a 3465 750 1.40
2120 6950 177 2800 1550 0.90
2208 7240 47 4900 750 (u.g. and submarine 1.00
2464 to Germany)
8080 18 7650 450 (u.g. and submarine 1.00
to Sweden)
3295 10800 14.5 7000 350 (u.g. and submarine 1.00
3880 12700 to Germany)
60 3550 650 (u.g. and submarine 1.40
to Sweden)
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.F. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
^Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in ’im.
^Incidental cables in open wire lines.
c L = coil inductance, millihenries.
a fc= theoretical loading cut-off frequency, cycles.
e Z = nominal impedance, y L/C , estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where C is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.80 20 (0.812)
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.00 18 (1.024)
1.23 16 (1.29)
1.30 16 (1.29)
1.40 15 (1.45)
1.50 15 (1.45)
1.80 13 (1.83)
®Underg round indi cated.
cables unless otherwise
Table continued on next page.
149
Par. 705
TYPES OF COIL LOADED CABLE CIRCUITS IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE FACILITIES. (Continued) ~
Spacing of Loading Coils Loaded pairs® Loaded phantoms Wire Sizef (diameter in mm)
Lc (mb) fcd (cycles) ze (ohms) Lc (mh) 1 fcd [cycles) ze (ohms)
(meters) (feet)
ENGLAND
1810 5940 177a 2770 1550 10 7a 3040 1000 0.90;1.00;1.27
1830 6000 44a 5570 800 25a 6300 500 0.90
1830 6000 88a 3920 1100 0.90
3700 12120 136 2240 950 1.27
ESTONIA
2120 6950 72 2440 550 36 2440 300 2.38
(Submarine
to Finland)
FINLAND
1610 5280 27 8500 700 0.90
2200 7220 36 5600 650 (u.g. and submarine 1.0;1.27
to Sweden)
2200 7220 129 3000 1200 (u.g. and submarine 1.30
to Sweden)
3550 11640 11 8500 300 (u.g. and submarine 1.00
to Sweden)
FRANCE
1830 6000 22b 8060 550 9b 10000 300 0.80;0.90
1830 6000 18b 7000 400 0.90;1.10;1.20;
1.30
1830 6000 44a 5800 800 25b 6000 500 0.90;1.10;1.20;
1.30
1830 6000 44 4500 600 0.90;1.20
1830 6000 88a 4100 1150 . 36 5000 550 0.90;1.20
1830 6000 110 3600 1250 63 3600 700 0.90;1.10;1.30;
1.40
1830 6000 17 7a 2900 1600 63a 3750 750 0.90;1.20;1.30
1830 6000 177a 2800 1550 10 7& 2900 1000 0.90;1.10;1.20;
1.30
1830 6000 110 3600 1250 0.90
2000 6560 50a 5430 850 20a 6830 450 0.90
2000 6560 190a 2690 1600 70a 3465 750 1.40
2000 6560 200a 2710 1700 70a 36 70 800 0.90
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.F. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
f
Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm.
^Standard carrier, 1 channel.
c L ■ coil inductance,millihenries.
d fc « theoretical loading cut-off fre quency, cycles.
e Z » nominal impedance, -/t/C, estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where 0 is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.80 20 (0.812)
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.10 18 (1.024)
1.20 17 (1.15)
1.27 16 (1.29)
1.30 16
1.40 15 (1.45)
^Underground cables unless otherwise indicated.
150
Par. 705
Spacing of Loading Coils Loaded Pairs^ Loaded Phantoms Wire Size® (diameter in mm)
Lb (mh) fcc I cycles) Zd (ohms) Lb (mh) fcc (cycles) Zd (ohms)
(meters) (feet)
GERMANY
1000 3280 105 5300 1750 (submarine to Switzerland) 2.05
1550 5090 23a 8130 600 lla 9400 350 2.00
1650 5410 37 7130 850 1.03
1650 5410 155 3270 1600 1.03
1650 5410 155 3200 1550 1.20
1700 5580 30d 7470 700 12d 9300 350 0.90;1.00;1.15;
1700 5580 140a 3500 1550 56a 4400 800 1.40 0.90;1.05;1.40
1700 5580 140a 3400 1500 56a 4270 750 1.40*
1700 5580 170 3220 1700 68 4120 900 0.90;1.05;1.40
1700 5580 68 3880 850 1.40*
1830 6000 18a 7000 400 0.90;1.40
1830 6000 18 9300 550 0.90;1.40
1830 6000 44a 5900 800 25a 6000 500 0.90;1.30
1830 6000 50 5780 900 20 7000 450 1.50*
1800 5910 85 4570 1250 35 5550 600 1.40
1830 6000 177a 2900 1600 63a 3600 700 0.90;1.30;1.40;
1860 6100 54 4800 800 (u. g. and submarine 1.50 1.00;1.05
to Germany)
1880 6170 50 5510 850 35 5550 600 1.40
1900 6240 30 6500 600 (u. g. and submarine 1.20
to Sweden)
2000 6560 44 5800 800 0.90*1.00
2000 6560 50a 5430 850 20a 6830 450 0.90;1.00
2000 6560 190a 2710 1600 70a 3660 800 1.40; 1.50
2000 6560 200a 2710 1700 70a 3660 800 0.90*
2200 7220 36 5400 600 (u. g. and submarine 1.50
to Sweden)
2208 7250 47 4900 700 (u. g. and submarine 1.00
to Denmark)
3295 10500 14.5 7000 300 (u., g. and submarine 1.00
to Denmark)
4680 15400 46.8 3200 450 (u.i g. and submarine 1.50
to Germany)
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.F. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm.
b L ■ coil inductance,millihenries.
c fc= theoretical loading cut-off frequency, cycles.
Z * nominal impedance, J L/C, estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where C is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.00 18
1.03 18 (1.024)
1.05 18
1.15 17 (1.15)
1.30 16 (1.29)
1.40 15 (1.45)
1.50 15 (1.45)
f
Underground cables unless otherwise indicated.
Table continued on next page.
151
par. 705
TYPES OF COIL LOADED CABLE CIRCUITS IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE FACILITIES. Continued)
Spacing of Loading Coils Loaded pairs** Loaded Phantoms Wire size® (diameter in mm)
Lb (mh) fc° (cycles) zd (ohms) Lb (mh) fcc (cycles) Zd (ohms)
(meters) (feet)
HOLLAND
1634 5350 30 7800 750 0.80;1.24;1.59
1630 5350 50 5500 850 1.20;1.29
1630 5350 60 5200 1000 0.87
1630 5350 75 5000 1200 1.12
1630 5350 155 3200 1550 1.29; 1.59; 1.60
1630 5350 160 3200 1600 0.87;1.11;1.60
1630 5350 200 2900 1800 1.12;1.24;1.60; 1.69
1647 5350 32 7130 750 1.03
1650 5350 155 3200 1550 1.03;1.20;1.60
1700 5580 30a 7470 700 12a 9300 350 0.90
1700 5580 140a 3410 1500 56a 4300 750 0.90;1.40
1700 5580 140a 3500 1550 56 a 4400 800 0.90;1.40
1700 5580 170 3120 1650 0.90;1.40
1700 5580 177a 3220 1800 0.90;1.40
1700 5580 190 2740 1650 70a 3880 850 0.90;1.40
1757 5760 44 5900 800 25 6100 500 1.23
1757 5760 177 3000 1700 63 4000 800 1.23;1.80
1757 5760 177 3000 1700 107 2900 1000 1.80
1840 6040 44a 5500 760 25a 6000 500 1.20;1.23
1840 6040 177a 2800 1550 63a 3600 700 1.23;1.80
1840 6040 177a 2800 1550 10 7a 3000 1000 1.20;1.23;1.80
2788 9150 80 3600 900 0.80
3268 10720 55 3500 600 0.70
3268 10720 65 3500 700 0.80
3268 10720 85 3200 850 0.80
3680 12080 65 3400 700 0.80
4500 14700 55 3400 600 0.70
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.J. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
b L« coil inductance, millihenries.
0 fc« theoretical loading cut-off frequency, cycles.
d Z • nominal impedance, J L/C, estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where C is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.70 21 (0.723)
0.80 20 (0.812)
0.87 19
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.03 18 (1.024)
1.12 17 (1.15)
1.20 17
1.24 16 (1.29)
1.40 15 (1.45)
1.60 14 (1.63)
1.69 14
f Underground cables unless otherwise indicated.
152
Par. 705
Spacing of Loading Coils Loaded pairs® Loaded Phantoms Wire Sizef (diameter in mm)
Lc ImhL fcd (cycles) Ze (ohms) Lc (nh) f d rc (cycles) Ze (ohms)
(meters) (feet)
HUNGARY
1830 6000 44a 5800 800 25a 6000 500 0.90;1.30
1830 6000 17?a 2900 1600 63a 3600 700 0.90;1.30
3000 9850 90 3000 850 2.0
ITALY
1830 6000 44a 5800 800 18a 7000 400 0.90;1.10
1830 6000 44a 5800 800 25a 6000 500 0.90;1.10
1830 6000 17 7a 2900 1600 63a 3600 700 0.90;1.30
1830 6000 177a 2900 1600 10 7a 2900 1000 0.90
LUXEMBURG
1830 6000 177 2900 1600 63 3750 750 1.30
NORWAY
1600 5230 27b 7800 650 llb 9600 350 0.90;1.00
1600 5230 132 3500 1450 1.40
2800 9150 100 3000 950 1.00
POLAND
1000 1830 3280 6000 13 44a 15000 5800 600 800 25a 6000 500 1.30 0.90
1830 6000 17?a 2900 1600 63a 3600 700 0.90;1.30
2000 6560 50a 5430 850 20a 6840 450 0.90
2000 6560 170 2710 1450 0.90
2000 6560 190a 2740 1650 70a 3670 800 0.90;1.40
2000 6560 200a 2750 1750 70a 3520 800 0.90-1.40
ROUMANIA
1830 6000 120 3500 1300 0.90
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.F. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
^Incidental cables in open wire lines.
Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm,
c L ■ coil inductance,millihenries.
d f'c =* theoretical loading cut-off frequency cycles.
e Z ■ nominal impedance, J "L/C, estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where C is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.00 18 (1.024)
1.10 17 (1.15)
1.30 16 (1.29)
1.40 15 (1.45)
2.00 12 (2.05)
^Underground cables unless otherwise indicated.
Table continued on next page.
153
Par. 705
TYPES OF COIL LOADED CABLE CIRCUITS IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE FACILITIES.
(Continued) SDacinu of Loaded pairs^ Loaded Phantoms
Loading Coils Lc fcd Ze Lc f 1 c Ze Wire Sizes^
(meters) (feet) (mh) (c sycles) (ohms) (mh) (cycles) (ohms) (diameter in mm)
SWEDEN
1585 5200 132 3500 1450 0.90;1.20
1590-1610 5250 27b 7800 650 llb 9600 350 0.90;1.00;1.10; 1.20
1810-1820 5950 24 7800 600 10 9600 300 0.90
1810-1820 5950 44* 5800 800 18* 7000 400 0.90
1810-1820 5950 44a 5800 800 25* 6000 500 0.80;0.90;1.10; 1.30
1810-1820 5950 177* 2900 1600 0.80
1900 6230 30 6500 600 (u.g. and submarine 1.20
to Germany)
2200 7220 36 5600 650 (u.g. and submarine 1.00 and 1.50
to Germany)
2200 7220 36 5400 600 1.50
2200 7220 129 3000 1200 1.30
2400) (7880 18 7650 450 1.00
to > ( to 36 5400 600 (Aerial) 1.30
uO j 90 3400 950 1.30
2464) (8090 115 3200 1150 (u.g. and submarine 1.15
to Denmark)
2500 8210 36 5400 600 1.30
2600 8530 18 7650 450 0.70;1.00
3550 11650 11 8500 300 1.00
3880 12700 60 3550 650 1.40
SWITZERLAND
1830 6000 44a 20 7000 450 0.90
1830 6000 5800 800 18a 7000 400 0.90
1830 6000 44a 5900 800 25a 6000 500 0.90
1830 6000 88* 4100 1150 0.90
1830 6000 177* 2900 1600 63* 3750 750 0.80;0.90;1.30; 1.40;1.50
1830 6000 6560 177* 50a 2900 1600 107* 2900 1000 0.80;0.90;1.30; 1.40;1.50
2000 5430 850 20* 6830 450 0.90
2000 6560 177 2950 1600 1.00
2000 6560 190a 2690 1600 70* 3465 750 1.40
2000 6560 200a 2710 1700 70* 3600 800 0.90
2000 6560 107 2950 1000 1.00
aLoading standards approved by C.C.I.F. which are likely to be more widely used than nonstandard systems.
^Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the b&S gauge diameters in mm.
bIneidental cables in open wire lines.
c L ■ coil inductance,millihenries.
d fc » theoretical loading cut-off frequency, cycles.
e Z » nominal impedance, J L/C, estimated from coil inductance and loading cut-off frequency, where C is the capacitance in farads per loading section.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.80 20 (0.812)
0.90 19 (0.912)
1.00 18 (1.024)
1.10 17 (1.15)
1.20 17 (1.15)
1.30 16 (1.29)
1.40 15 (1.45)
1.50 15 (1.45)
^Underground cables unless otherwise indicated.
154
par. 706-707
706. C.C.I.F. STANDARD LOADING SYSTEMS.
a. Data regarding the loading standards for voice-frequency telephone circuits, recommended by the international consultative committee on telephony (C.C.I.F.) for use on repeater sections in international telephone circuits are given in paragraph 707. Paragraph 707a
applies to systems which were standards in 1934. The older standards which were recommended for new facilities in 1924-1934 are listed in paragraph 707b.
Special facilities such as program circuits and carrier circuits which require wider frequency bands than those indicated are not included.
707. LOADING SYSTEMS FOR REPEATER SECTIONS IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS.
a. 1934-1939 Standard Systems, Recommended for New Facilities.
Loading Systems Designation8 Circuit Cable Data Nominal Cut-off Frequency (cycles) Nominal Impedance (ohms) Nominal Velocity (mi/sec) Max-Avgc Attenuation at 800 Cycles (db/mi)
Diameter13 Wire (ng) Capacitance (mf/mi)
6000-44-25 Side 0.9 .062 5800 790 20400 0.55
Phantom 0.9 0.101 6000 470 20400 0.46
Side 1.3 .062 5800 790 20400 0.28
Phantom 1.3 0.101 6000 470 20400 0.23
6000-44-18 Side 0.9 .062 5800 790 20400 0.55
Phantom 0.9 0.101 7000 400 24900 0.54
6562-50-20 Side 0.9 .054 5340 855 20850 0.43
Phantom 0.9 .087 6840 440 26750 0.49
5577-30-12 Side 0.9 .054 7700 730 25500 0.55
Phantom 0.9 .087 9300 370 31100 0.54
Side 1.4 .057 7250 710 24250 0.23
Phantom 1.4 .092 9000 360 29800 0.23
6000-88-50 Side 0.9 .062 4100 1120 14400 0.39
Phantom 0.9 0.101 4200 670 14400 0.33
6000-88-36 Side 0.9 .062 4100 1120 14400 0.38
Phantom 0.9 0.101 5000 560 19800 0.38
3000-88-50 Side 0.9 .062 5800 1590 10250 0.32
Phantom 0.9 0.101 6000 940 10250 0.27
3000-88-36 Side 0.9 .062 5800 1590 12560 0.31
Phantom 0.9 0.101 7000 800 10260 0.31
aLoading Designations: The first num-ber applies to the nominal standard coil spacing in feet, and the second number to the side circuit coil (or nonphantomed coil) inductance in mh. The third number, when present is the phantom coil inductance in mh.
Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.8 20 (0.812)
0.9 19 (0.912)
1.3 16 (1.29)
1.4 15 (1.45)
cThese figures are C.C.I.F. limits on the average attenuation constant for all circuits of one type, per repeater section, when the loading spacing conforms to C.C.I.F. rules.
Table continued an next page.
155
Par. 707-708
LOADING SYSTEMS FOR REPEATER SECTION'S IN INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS. (Continued) b. Old Standard Systems, in Use 1959, but not Recommended for New Facilities.
Loading Systems Designation® Circuit Cable Data Nominal Cut-off Frequency (cycles) Nominal Impedance (ohms) Nominal Velocity (mi/sec) Max-Avg0 Attenuation at 800 Cycles (db/mi )
Diameter^1 Wire (mm) Capacitance (mf/mi)
5577-140-56 Side 0.9 .054 3500 1570 11810 0.27
Phantom 0.9 .087 4400 780 14920 0.27
Side 1.4 .057 3400 1520 11180 0.13
Phantom 1.4 .092 4300 760 14300 0.13
6000-177-63 Side 0.9 .062 2900 1590 10250 0.30
Phantom 0.9 0.101 3600 740 13370 0.32
Side 1.3 .062 2900 1590 10250 0.17
Phantom 1.3 0.101 3600 740 13370 0.18
6000-177-107 Side 0.9 .062 2900 1590 10250 0.30
Phantom 0.9 0.101 2900 970 10250 0.25
Side 1.3 .062 2900 1590 10250 0.17
Phantom 1.3 0.101 2900 970 10250 0.14
6562-200-70 Side 0.9 .054 2750 1730 10750 0.28
Phantom 0.9 .087 3670 805 14300 0.29
6562-190-70 Side 1.4 .057 2740 1630 10690 0.14
Phantom 1.4 .092 3520 775 13800 0.14
6000-120 Side 0.9 .062 3340 1260 12000 0.37
Side 1.3 .062 3340 1260 12000 0.20
10730-65 Side 0.8 .056 3500 800 22370 0.63
aLoading Designations; The first num-ber applies to the nominal standard coil spacing in feet, and the second number to the side circuit coil (or nonphantomed coil) inductance in mh. The third number, when present is the phantom coil inductance in mh.
^Approximate relations of wire diameters; figures in parentheses give the B&S gauge diameters in mm.
mm vs B&S Gauge
0.8 20 (0.812)
0.9 19 (0.912)
1.3 16 (1.29)
1.4 15 (1.45)
cThese figures are C.C.I.F. limits on the average attenuation constant for all circuits of one type, per repeater section, when the loading spacing conforms to C.C.I.F. rules.
708. UNITED STATES LOADING SYSTEMS. Data on loaded quadded cables, which are usually employed in long distance cir- % cuits; and nonquadded cables, which are usually employed in exchange area circuits; are given in paragraph 709.
All of these facilities are employed on voice-frequency circuits except B-22-N which is primarily for program circuits. Paragraph 710 gives data on incidental cables commonly used for open wire lines.
156
Par. 709
709. LOADING SYSTEMS COMMONLY USED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.
a. Quadded Cablesa
b. Nonquadded Cables
Loading^’0 Nominald Impedance (Chms) Cut-off Frequency (cycles) 1000-cycle Loss per Mile at 55°F. (decibels) 19 Ga, 16 Ga. Gauge® Cable Nominal^ Impedance (ohms) Cut-off Frequency (cycles) 1000-cycle Loss per Mile at 68 °F. (decibels)
B&S Loading®
B-88-50-S 1550 5600 0.28 0.16 26 nonloaded 1010 2.67
B-88-50-P 930 5900 0.23 0.14 H-88 1050 3800 1.68
H-174-106-S 1550 2900 0.28 0.16 24 nonloaded 780 — 2.14
H-174-106-P 650 2900 0.22 0.13 H-44 750 5300 1.46
H-88 1050 3700 1.13
H-172-63-S 1550 2900 0.27 0.16 B-88 1450 5300 0.86
H-172-63-P 750 3700 0.28 0.16
22 nonloaded 580 — 1.79
H-88-50-S 1100 4000 0.35 0.19 H-44 700 5000 1.04
H-88-50-P 650 4200 0.30 0.16 H-88 1000 3500 0.79
B-88 1400 5000 0.60
H-44-25-S 800 5600 0.47 0.25 B-135 1700 4000 0.48
H-44-25-P 500 5900 0.39 0.21
19 nonloaded 400 — 1.26
B-22-N 800 11000 0.45 0.24 H-44 700 5000 0.56
H-88 950 3500 0.42
H-44-N 800 5600 0.47 0.25 B-88 1350 4900 0.34
H-88-N 1100 4000 0.35 0.19 B-135 1700 3900 0.26
aGapacitance of quadded cables » 0.062 mf per mile (side): 0.102 mf per mile (phantom)
bThe first letter indicates the coil spacing (H = 6000 ft. and B = 3000 ft.); the first and second numbers indicate the inductances (millihenrys) of the side and phantom loading coils, respectively; and the last letter indicates whether it is a side circuit (S), a phantom circuit (P) or a non-phantomed pair (N).
cThe following Western Electric Co. loading units used in loading quadded cables.in the United States may be of potential interest for use in rehabilitating loaded quadded cables in invaded territory. These loading units have similar over-all potting dimensions, and are procurable on special order in three types of cases suitable for underground cable, for buried cable, and for aerial cable, in complements of 6, 12, 18, 24, and 30 units.
Code Number Inductance - mh Resistance - Ohms
Side Circuit Phantom
Side Circuits Phantom P.O. 1000 D.C. 1000
MF-1 172 63 13.8 16.4 6.9 7.6
MF-2 44 25 4.5 5.0 2.2 2.5
MF-4 31 18 3.1 3.4 1.5 lo7
MF-11 88 50 7.9 9.1 4.0 4.6
tor loaded cable Z «= / L. ; z C section capacitance. where L is loading coil inductance and C is loading
For nonloaded cable Z = / R ; where R and C are the resistance and capacitance v 2«fC
per unit length and f is the frequency (1000 cycles assumed).
transmission data apply to nonquadded cables having the following capacitance;
26 gauge « 0.069 mf per mile
24 gauge = 0.072 mf per mile
22 gauge = 0.082 mf per mile
19 gauge = 0.084 mf per mile
700898 0-46-----12
157
Par. 710
Z12* LEAD-COVERED ENTRANCE AND INTERMEDIATE CABLES IN OPEN WIRE LINES COMMONLY USED IN THE UNITED STATES
of AmericTT —---------------------------------------------------—--------------
a. Sides or Phantoms, Paper-Insulated, Twisted pair Quads.
Description Nominal Impedance (ohmsjb Cut-off Frequency (kc) Attenuation per Mlle at 55°F - db
B ft S Gauge Loading*1 1 kc 8 KC 30 kc
19 Nonloaded Side 140 1.06 2.31 3.02
16 Nonloaded side 130 0.71 1.32 1.87
13 Nonloaded Side 125 - 0.47 0.76 1.32
19 Nohloaded Phantom 195-J175 0.95
16 Nonloaded phantom 140-J115 0.63 — —
13 Nonloaded Phantom 115-J73 - 0.41 - -
19 H-31-18-Side 666 6.7 0.55
16 H-31-18-Side 666 6.7 0.28 —
13 H-31-18-Side 666 6.7 0.15 - -
19 H-31-18-Phantom 403 7.0 0.46
16 H-31-18-phuntom 403 7.0 0.24 —
13 H-31-18-Phantom 403 7.0 0.13 - •
19 BH-15-15-Side 640 13.5 0.63 0.74
16 BH-15-15-Side 640 13.5 0.36 0.47 -
19 BH-15-15-Phantom 387 7.3 0.53 L
16 BH-15-15-Phantom 387 7.3 0.30 - -
19 CE-4.8-12.8 Side0 640 41.5 0.68 0.76 1.34
16 CE-4.8-12.8 Side0 640 41.5 0.41 0.49 1.09
16 CE-4.1-12.8 Side0 600 45 0.43 0.50 1.01
13 CE-4.1-12.8 Side0 600 45 0.28 0.36 0.89
19 ^3-4.8-12.8 Phantom 373 8.5 0 .60
16 CE-4.8-12.8 Phantom 373 8.5 0 .36 — *
13 CE-4.1-12.8 Phantom 373 8.5 0 .23 - -
19 C-4.8 Modified 625 40.5 0.67 0.76 1.37
13 C-4.1 Modified 558 42.5 0 .28 0.37 0.96
Sides of Disc -Insulated (Low Capacitanc* Spiral-Four Quads.
16 Nonloaded 240 •• 0.44 0.81 1.11
16 J-0.72 542 208 0.41 0.5 0.64
16 J-0.85 575 190 0.41 0.5 0.64
16 J-0.94 600 181 0.41 0.5 0.64
aIn the loading designations, such as H-31-18, the letter designates the loading spacing, the first number is the inductance of the side circuit loading coil and the second, the inductance of the phantom loading coil, both expressed in millihenries. Where two letters are used, the first is the spacing of the side circuit loading coils and the second is the spacing of the phantom circuit coils. Where only-one letter and one number is in the designation, it Indicates the phantom is nonloaded. The theoretical loading spacings are as follows;
Letter spacing
Designation in Feet
H 6000
E 5575
• B 3000
C 930
J 640 Approx.
Loading coils are spaced at the theoretical spacing or at a shorter spacing, and the circuits built out to the equivalent of the theoretical spacing by means of building-out cable or capacitance units. On C- or J-spaced loading it is customary to shorten the spacing to allow for capacitance deviations in the cable pairs, and for unavoidable geograohical irregularities. Building-out capacitance is then applied to obtain the ideal loading section capacitance on all carrier loaded pairs. The attenuation data on this table apply to the following coil spacings;
Spa c ing
Designation (fe et)
H-31-18 Side and 6000 Phantom
BH-15-15 Side 3000
BH-15-15 Phantom 6000
CE-4.8-12.8 Side 800
CE-4.8-12.8 Phantom 4800
CE-4.1-12.8 Side Same
and Phantom
C—4.1 Modified 800
C-4.8 Modified 800
J-0.72 528
J-0.85 and J-0.94 528
Building- Out
None
None
None
Built out to equivalent of 930 feet
Built out to equivalent of 5575 feet
as CE-4.8-12.8 Side
and Phantom
Built out to get 558 ohm nominal Impedance
Built out to get 625 ohm nominal impedance
Built out to equivalent cf 633 feet
Built out to equivalent of 648 feet
°The impedance given for nonloaded side circuits is approximately the impedance at carrier frequencies; for the phantom, it is the 1000-cycle characteristic impedance.
cThe attenuations of standard C-4.1 and c-4.8 (non-phantomed) pairs are about .02 db less than for CE-4.1-12.8 and CE-4.8-12.8 (phantomed) pairs.
a.025 mf per mile.
158
Par. 711-713
Section II
Existing Submarine (Undersea) Cables
711♦ GENERAL. This section describes some existing undersea cables which may be of military value in future operations.
712. PAPER-INSULATED TELEPHONE CABLES a. The paper-insulated, lead-sheathed type of cable is usually found where the water is of moderate depth, large numbers of circuits are required, and the length of cable is not great, usually under 100 miles. Most of these cables have double-lead sheaths and in some instances a rubber jacket is used over the sheath.
t). Paragraph 713 describes some paper-insulated cables having one terminal in Great Britain, all of which are made up of spiral-four type quads. All except cables 5 and 7 were made in England. These two are German made cables.
£. Some cables, typified by item 1 paragraph 713, provided 16 voice-frequency and four carrier-frequency circuits on eight pairs of wires. Super-phantoms are worked at voice frequencies. The cable indicated by item 9 is a unique application of intermittent continuous loading. Each 1/8 nautical mile length of cable has 15 quads of nonloaded conductors separated by a transverse shield
of metallized paper from 15 quads of continuously loaded conductors, which have the same diameter over the loading as the nonloaded conductors. The (1/8 mi) lengths are systematically spliced together so that each through circuit consists of alternate sections of loaded and nonloaded conductors, with an average inductance of the order of .024 henry per nautical mile, and a theoretical cut-off frequency of about 30 kc. A voice and carrier channel are used on each pair, giving a total of 60 four-wire type circuits on the side circuits of the quads. Each quad of the nonloaded cable, item 6, is individually shielded with metallized paper and operated four-wire, with a carrier circuit in addition to the voice.
d. Paragraph 714 describes a number of German-made submarine cables installed in the Baltic Area, or North Sea. Although the phantoms of these cables may be used, loading is restricted to the side circuits where coil loading is employed. The cut-off frequencies of most of these cables are sufficiently high to permit two-band telephony. This allows equivalent four-wire operation, by means of voice-frequency channels for one direction of transmission and a carrier channel just above the voice for the opposite direction. Some of these cables are laid in water that is deeper than is considered safe for cables of ordinary structure, and a steel reinforcing band is used under the lead sheath.
713. PAPER-INSULATED QUADDED SUBMARINE CABLES - BRITISH ISLES
Loss
db per Nominal
Length Conductors Naut. Mile Impedance
Item Type of Naut. 2 (No.) Di am. at 800 Cycles (ohms)
No. Cable Year Loading (Miles (inches) Sides Phantoms Sides Phantoms
Anglo-Dutch
1 Aideburgh-Dornburg 1924 Continuous 82.3 16 .096 0.18 0.20 422 172
2 Aid eburgb-Dombu rg 1926 Continuous 86 16 .092 0.16 0.18 443 185
Anglo-French
3 Seabrook-Audrecelles 1926 Continuous 23.9 28 .081 0.24 0.28 375 155
4 Seabrook-Audrecelles 1927 Continuous 25.2 28 .081 0.2? 0.28 385 155
5 Seabrook-Le Portel 1930 Continuous 32 28 .071 0.23 470
6 St.Marga rets-Calai s 1933 Nonloaded 26 76 .064 0.75 250
Anglo-Belgian
7 Dumpton Gap-La Panne 1926 Continuous 49.5 28 .08 0.24 0.29 392 160
8 Dumpton Gap-La Panne 1930 Continuous 50.5 28 .08 0.23 0.29 370 150
9 Dover-La Panne 1932 Intermittent- 49.5 60 .052a 0.55 550
Continuous 60 .036b
10 Mainland-Isle of Man 1929 Continuous 58.6 16 .081 0.25 0.30 367 151
^onloaded
^Loaded
159
Par. 714
714. LOADED PAPER-INSULATED SPIRAL-FOUR SUBMARINE GABLES - GERMAN MADE
Length Telephone Conductors Nominal Loss
Item Type of Naut. Diam. Impedance db per Naut. Mile
No, _______Cable________ Year Loadingb (piles) (number^ (inches) (phms) 800 Cycles
1 Germany-Denmark 1902 Continuous 10.8 4 .052^ 220 0.14
2 Germany-Denmark 1907 Continuous 11.3 4 0.117 485 0.11
3 Germany-Denmark 1926 Coil 25 36 .039 750 0.42
4 Germany-Denmark 1931 Coil 25.1 88f .039 355 0.76
5 Festland-Borkum 1903 Continuous 17.2 4 .031c 470 0.20
6 Festland-Sylt 1925 Coil 9.4 28 0.105 570 .07
7 Festland-Sylt 1925 Coil 8.7 28 .093 615 .07
8 Cuxhaven-Helgoland 1903 Continuous 40.9 2d 0.164 310 0.10
9 Germany-Sweden 1919 Continuous 64.5 4 .082 380 0.20
10 (Zarrenzin-Kampinge) 1921 Continuous 64.5 12 .080 470 0.21
11 Germany-Sweden 1927 Coil 63 48 .059 600 0.25
12 Germany-Sweden 1930 Coil 64 168 .047 600 0.36
Pommem-East Prussia
13 (Leba-Tenkitten) 1920 Continuous 0.95 12 .086 470 0.20
14 (Leba-Pillau) 1922 Continuous 0.95 12 .075 470 0.20
15 Leba-Pillau 1930 Coil 100 88 .039 835 0.43
16 Leba-Danzig 1922 Continuous 80.2 16 .075 500 0,19
Sweden-Finland
17 (West)Norrtalje-Mariehamn 1928 Coil 34 32e .039 650 0.50
18 (East)Mariehamn-Abo 1928 Coil 75 32e .059 650 0.34
19 Sweden-Gotland 1930 Coil 85 28 .047 600 0.35
^ome cables have additional conductors for telegraph.
bFor continuously loaded cables the impedance of phantom is about 1/2 that of side and loss of phantom is about equal to loss of side. In the coil cables the phantoms are not loaded. The side circuit loading coils are spaced approximately 1 naut. mi. apart giving cut-off frequencies in the range 4800-7000 cycles.
C7 strands each having diameter indicated.
^Single pair - not spiral-four. e4 of the 32 conductors are coarser gauge than the other 28, for which size and loss data are given, f Cables have a coarse-gauge shielded pair at their center for special facilities.
Par. 715
7-L5- GUTTA-PERCHA, BALATA, PARAGUTTA AND RUBBER-INSULATED TELEPHONE CABLES'
a• Generali In most undersea cable projects, the paper-insulated lead-sheathed type of cable is not satisfactory because of the depth of the water or the presence of tidal currents. These factors have led to an extensive use of gutta-percha type cables, in European waters and elsewhere.
b," Multicore Cables. (1) In general, the multicore cables shown in paragraph 716 have four conductors, in spiral-four configuration. Three of the cables, items 15, 16,and 17, have only two continuously loaded conductors. Another exception is the cable indicated in item 14 which has four pairs of conductors arranged in a spiral-four configuration.
(2) In general, the cables that have four (or eight) conductors, are used for phantom working. The attenuation of the loaded phantoms is approximately equal to that in the loaded side circuits. In the coil loaded cables the loading coils are usually spaced at intervals of about 1 nautical mile, giving theoretical cutoff frequencies of the order of 2500 cycles.
(3) Some of the early multicore undersea cables, not listed in paragraph 716, were picked up to permit the installation along the same route of improved cable designs providing more facilities, particularly in the English Channel area. Since the available information on picked-up cables is incomplete, some of the cables listed in paragraph 716 may no longer exist.
(4) A rubber-insulated four-conductor (spiral-four) cable has been extensively used by the U. S. Coast Guard. The attenuation is about 0.35 db per nautical mile at 1000 cycles, and about 0.8 db at 10,000 cycles. This general type of cable is available with continuously loaded conductors. Although this loading reduces the lower frequency attenuation by about 40 per cent, the increased losses in the loading material, at high frequencies, more than offset the beneficial effect of the added inductance, so that the carrier-frequency attenuation of the loaded cable is greater than that of the nonloaded cable.
(5) Multicore cables are not suitable for use in water of depth greater than a few hundred fathoms.
c. Single Core Telephone Cables. (1) A cable containing a single conductor insulated with gutta-percha, paragutta, or rubber, can be employed for telephony. For a single relatively short circuit the armor and sea water can be used as a return conductor. The Coast Guard use a rubber-insulated core like that in their four-core cable. The single-core cable has an attenuation of about 0.5 db per nautical mile at 1,000 cycles per second.
(2) Between England and Guernsey (80 nautical miles) there was placed a length of the German Emden-Azores nonloaded single core telegraph cable captured in the
last war. The attenuation was 36 db at 1000 cycles and operation was by voice switching.
(3) Permalloy loaded telegraph cables are not satisfactory at telephone frequencies.
d. Concentric Return Type of Cable. (1T For good telephone and carrier fre-quency transmission, a low resistance conductor inside the armor wire is needed for the return current. This conductor consists usually of copper tapes or wires laid on the surface of the insulation so as to form a complete cylindrical sheath. With this type of cable a number of channels can be used over considerable distances. The sea shields against static so that very low levels of reception can be employed. Cables of this type have been laid in the following places;
Australia to New Zealand Tasmania, Cooks Strait Japan, Hokkaido - Sakhalin England to Holland, 2 cables (Aideburgh-Dornburg) 81 nautical miles Ireland to Scotland, 2 cables (Donaghadee-Port Patrick) 21 nautical miles
Ireland to Wales, 2 cables
(Howth, near Dublin, to Nevin) 62 nautical miles
England to the Channel Islands
(2) With a single cable, different frequency bands are used for operation in the two directions, the permissible top-channel attenuation being around 100 db, or greater if man-made noise can be eliminated. Where two cables are available between two points they may be used to provide a four-wire circuit, one cable being used for one direction of transmission and the other cable for the opposite direction. The limiting attenuation is about the same as in the previous case. The impedance of this type of cable is about 50 ohms.
(3) Another cable of this type is Coast Guard No. 114P cable. The attenuation constant is 0.64 db per nautical mile at 10 kc and 1.08 db at 30 kc. The impedance is about 50 ohms.
(4) There is a concentric return cable with gutta-percha insulation between Teneriffe and the Canary Islands (40 nautical miles). The attenuation is 48 db at 38 kc. A smaller cable of this type has been laid between Algeciras and Ceuta, Morocco (20 nautical miles).
(5) There are a few concentric return cables with continuous loading. Such a cable between Italy and Sardinia has a central conductor 0.144" in diameter, insulated with gutta-percha 0.46" diameter, and provided with a return conductor consisting of 52 wires, each .032" in diameter. It is 146 nautical miles in length and has an attenuation at 2,000 cycles of 30 db. It was operated with one two-wire voice channel and a carrier channel with voice-operated switching.
161
162
Par. 716
716. LOADED MULTICORE GUTTA-PERCHA SUBMARINE CABLES
Weights Loss
Length Pounds per Naut.Mile Nominal db per Naut. Mile
Item Type of Naut. No. Each Impedance-Ohms at 800 Cycles
No, _________Gable__________ Year Loading Miles Conductors Conductor Dielectric Sides Phantom Sides and Phantom
Anglo-French a
1 Abbots Cliffe-Cap Gris Nez 1910 Coil 20.2 4 160 300 860 °*14a
2 Abbots Cliffe-Cap Gris Nez 1912 Continuous 21 4 300 300 280 0.16
3 Dover—Sangatte 1917 Coil 21 4 310 <.00 710 34C 0.10
4 Dover-Dunkirk 1917 Coil 41.6 4 310 200 710 340 0.10
5 Dover—Sangatte 1918 Coil 20.5 4 160 150 775 395 0.13
6 Dungeness—A udrecelles 1918 Coil 27.6 4 160 150 775 395 0.13
7 Dungeness-Audrecelles 1918 Coil 26.4 4 310 200 710 340 0.10
8 Abbots Cliffe-Cap Gris Nez 1919 Coil 20 4 160 300 860 0.11
Anglo-Irish 9 (Temple Patrick-Port Mora) 1922 Continuous 22 4 170 195 370 180 0,21
10 (Nevin, Wales-Howth) 1913 Coil 64 4. 160 150 690 445 0.13
Anglo-Dutch
11 Aldeburgh-Domburg 1922 Coil 82.3 4 160 150 780 390 0.13
12 Denmark (Saelvig) 1904 Continuous 21.6 4 270 a
13 Denmark 1915 Coil 21.5 4 160 150 755 0.11
14 Denmark 1919 Coil 59.3 8 110 100 760 410 0.18
15 Norway 1919 Continuous 80.8 2 155 180 345 0.20
16 Norway 1919 Continuous 161.7 2 155 180 365 0.20
17 Norway 1927 Continuous 27 2 155 180 365 0.19
18 Sweden-Gotland 1919 Coil 72 4 350 210 650 370 . 09
19 British Government 1917 Coil 66 4 350 210 695 350 , 09
20 Nova Scotia 1928 Continuous 10 4 43 100 60 0 300 0.44
21 British Columbia (Georgia 1926 Continuous 26 4 165 195 310 , 150 0.23
Strait)
22 New Zealand 1925 Continuous 49 4 195 150 255 120 0.24
23 Japan (Tsugaru Channel) 1925 Continuous 45 4 160 195 375 185 0.20
24 Japan 1927 Continuous 71 4 170 200 375 185 0.20
a Nonphantomed
Par. 717
717. TELEGRAPH CABLES.
a_. A long telegraph cable consists mainly of a single-core deep-sea section, with steel-armor wires about .09" in diameter, each wire being covered with fabric tape in most cables. As shallow water is approached an intermediate armor of 0.2" diameter iron wires is employed and finally a heavy armor of 0.3" diameter wires. The shore section is usually a twin-core structure, the purpose of the second conductor being to obtain a ground for the receiving apparatus at a point well out from shore where there is less chance of picking up noise. On permalloy loaded telegraph cables this "sea earth" is extended to a depth of 100 fathoms and is terminated in a resistance which simulates the cable impedance so that any noise picked up is thereby reduced by about 20 db. In some cases a third core cable is used at the shore end, the third conductor being used as a ground for the sending battery in order to reduce the disturbing effect on other cables. The central conductor ranges from 107" to 0.21" in diameter and is usually composed of a central wire surrounded by a layer of five or six copper tapes flattened against the wire. The thickness of insulation ranges from .09" to 0.13".
b. No loading was used in telegraph caFles laid prior to 1924. The potential operating frequency of a nonloaded cable is about f = 700(d/L)2 where d is the diameter of the central conductor in mils and L is the length of the cable in nautical miles. The speed in letters per minute is equal to 32f for siphon recorders and cable code or 25f for printers.
£. Most long telegraph cables laid since 1924 have been continuously loaded with permalloy tape or wire. A cable of this type has a traffic capacity about five times that of the corresponding nonloaded cable of the same dimensions. Such cables include the Azores-Emden cable, which reaches Germany via the English Channel and North Sea, the Belgian-Portugal cable belonging to the Italians, and cables in the Pacific and Indian oceans. They are designed to operate at frequencies of the order of 50 to 100 cycles per second. Multiplex operation is employed, with vacuum-tube amplifiers. Such equipment has been installed at Penzance, England; Emden, Germany; and Horta, in the Azores. A few permalloy cables have been designed for duplex operation but most of them operate in only one direction at a time, the direction of operation being controlled by automatic means at both terminals.
d. The attenuation constant of a long telegraph cable varies considerably with frequency so that the received signals are badly distorted. For nonloaded cables the means for correcting this distortion can be rather simple - a capacitor in series with the cable at each terminal, and an inductance shunted across the receiving instrument.
718. EUROPEAN CABLE MAP. A map of European submarine and land wirecommunication circuits is shown in figure 701. This map was taken from a publication by Siemens and Halske "25 Jahre Fernkabel in Europa 1913-1938".
163
164
FIGURE 701. European Cable Map
THE EUROPEAN LONG DISTANCE TELEPHONE NETWORK 1937
Nonenelature
1 ————— Existing Long Diotance Cables — ---------------------------r_r-—;
m i Long Distance Cables Unaer r -~I—~r~~~r:-------------
Construction ..... „■ ■
--- — — Proposed Long Distance Cables = ' ------" = -FF —t-*—r-1 i * । *" i * Existing 'Hide-band Cables -~----------------------=
—= '.;ice-bana Cables Under ---------- . .
= ___ Construction ~~ ~~-= ■......... ■ =
:-- । ‘ । r-L- Proposed Hide-band Cables
= -------------------Existing Open-wire Lines 1 ■ _
= ------ —■ - ------Proposed Open-wire Line --------------
== 0 Repeater Stations —_lz=-_=-T
==■ <5 Proposed or Unaer Construction ;-------
• Central Office r Point on —■ -----
the Line - -----z__
—---------- -IL===r —znr--■■
Par. 718
Par. 801-802
CHAPTER 8
ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
801. GENERAL. The protective equipment listed in this chapter is available for use on electrical communications circuits to prevent damage from excessive voltages and currents which may be impressed on these circuits by lightning or accidental contact with or induction from power lines. The equipment herein listed is not intended to cover all protective equipment now manufactured; however, the various types which are listed are adequate for all ordinary requirements. Protector blocks, fuses,
and heat coils of one manufacturer are not necessarily suitable for use in protectors or protector mountings of another manufacturer and, in general, should be used only in protectors or protector mountings for which they are specifically recommended.. Dimensions and shipping weights for such items as protector blocks, fuses, heat coils, and protectors for five pairs or less are not given, as they are small. Engineering information relative to the use cf protective equipment on communication circuits may be found in TM 11-486,
802. PROTECTOR BLOCKS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS,
Manufacturer and Mfr.*s Code No. Shown in Figure No. Stock No. Where Used
Cook 41-190 801 None 41-190 and 41-3001 used in combination in
Cook 41-3001 801 None Cook B-13 and 0-9 Telephone Protectors and in Cook 7 Cable Protector.
Reliable P-495 802 4E695 or FTNP4E495 P-495 and P-197 used in combination in Reliable 955 and 1000 Telephone Pro-
Reliable P-197 802 4E690-19700 FTNP4E697 tectors.
Reliable P-663 802 — P-495 and P-663 used in combination in Reliable 222 Cable Protector.
Western Electric Co. 26 Western Electric 803 803 4E926 4E927 26 and 27 used in combination in W. E. Co. 98A and 1093A Telephone Protectors and 1268 and 1269 Type Switchboard Protectors,
Co. 27
Western Co. Electric 30 803 4E930 26 and 30 used in combination in W. E. Co, 83A Cable Protector and in W. E. Co. EA26 and EA51 Cable Terminals.
FIGURE 801. Telephone Protector Blocks (Cook)
r P-197 OR P-663
FIGURE 802. Telephone Protector Blocks FIGURE 803. Protector Blocks (Western (Reliable) Kleetrio Co. 26 & 27)
165
Par. 803
803. FUSES FOR TELEPHONE LINES - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Manufacturer Shown in Lgure No. Stock No. Ampere Rating Where Used
and Mfr.* s £
Code No. Fi
Cook A-9 804 3Z2433 5 Cook B-13 Telephone Protector,
Cook A-12 804 3Z1910 5 Cook 0-9 Telephone Protector.
Reliable 55 805 3Z2607.2 7 Reliable 955 and 1000 Telephone Protectors.
Reliable 106 805 3Z2495-1 7 Reliable 303-F Switchboard protector.
Western Electric Co. 11C 806 3Z2111C 7 W.E. Co. 98A and 1093A Telephone Protectors.
Western Electric Co. 7A 806 3Z2107A7 7 W.E. Co. LA and LC Type Cable Terminals.
Western Electric Co. 7T 806 3Z2107T 7 W.E. Co. B51 and B101 Cable Terminals.
Western Electric Co. 60D 807 3Z2160D 0.35 W.E. Co. LA and LC Type Cable Terminals where sneak current protection is required.
Western Electric Co. 60E 807 3Z2160E 1.25 W.E. Co. LA and LC Type Cable Terminals on pairs used for battery feeders.
FIGURE 804. Fuse (Cook A-9 and A-12)
FIGURE 806. Fuse (Western Electric Co. 11C, 7 A and 7T)
FIGURE 805. Fuse (Reliable 55 and 106)
FIGURE 807. Fuse (Western Electric Co, 60D or 60E)
166
Par. 804-805
804. HEAT COILS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Manufacturer
and Mfr.’s Shown in Ampere
Code No. Figure No. Stock No. Rating Where Used
Western Elec- 808 3C476A 0.35 W. E. Co. 1268 and 1269 Type Switch-
trio Co, 76A board Protectors.
FIGURE 808. Heat Coil (Western Electric Co. 76A)
805. TELEPHONE PROTECTORS FOR ONE PAIR OF WIRES - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Manufacturer and Mfr.’s Code No. Shown in Figure No, Stock No. Location Equipped with
Cook B-13 809 4E4413 Indoors 41-190 and 41-3001 Protector Blocks in combination and A-9 Fuses.
Cook 0-9 810 5C2209 Outdoors Same as Cook B-13 except A-12 Fuses.
Reliable 955 811 None Indoors P-495 and P-197 Protector Blocks in combination and 55 Fuses.
Reliable 1000 812 2Z2855 Outdoors Same as Reliable 955.
Western Electric 813 Co. 98A 4E5098A Indoors 26 and 27 Protector Blocks in combination and lie Fuses.
Western Electric 814 4E5193A Outdoors Same as W. E. Co. 98A.
Co. 1093A
FIGURE 809. Telephone Protector (Cook B-13)
167
-FUSES
MOUNTING
Par. 805
r PROTECTOR r-COVER BLOCK |
nrrl WvtmI
fuse - ' W
,^Tr ■E-'f- iM* jwi 0 ■ Ti i 1E
l‘;l w KW
Is 1 > - MFaHE la low K||f
MOUNTING -- 7
r PROTECTOR BLOCKS
FUSES
FIGURE 812. Telephone Protector (Reliable 1000)
FIGURE 810. Telephone Protector (Cook 0-9)
° fe&.
JH*—e-----"f—fuses
W IWmsMM —SflJ PROTECTOR
■I 'BH BLOCKS
K LINDER COVER
»I *> B
FIGURE 813. Telephone Protector (Western Electric Co. 98A)
FIGURE 811. Telephone Protector (Reliable 955)
168
Par. 805
FIGURE 814. Telephone Protector (Western Electric Co. 1093A)
169
FUSE-
COVER
PROTECTOR
CAP ------j
PROTECTOR
BLOCKS---j
Par. 806
806. TERMINALS FOR PROTECTING SMALL SWITCHBOARDS AND TELEPHONES SERVED BY LEAD-COVERED GABLES - DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer Remarksa
and Mfr.’s Shown in Code No. Figure No. Size - Inches
H W D
Western Electric Co. LC-11 815 19 14-3/8 8-9/16 Provides means for applying protection and cross connecting inside cable and wire to outside cable. 11 pairs. Not equipped with fuses or protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LC-16 815 22 14-3/8 8-9/16 Same as LC-11 except 16 pairs.
Western Electric Co. LC-26b 815 29-1/2 14-3/8 8-9/16 Same as LC-11 except 26 pairs.
Western Electric Co. LC-26b 815 29-1/2 14-3/8 8-9/16 Same as LC-11 except 26 pairs and equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LC-51 815 49-1/8 14-3/8 8-9/16 Same as LC-11 except 51 pairs and equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LA-26b 816 29-1/2 29-1/2 8-9/16 Provides means for applying protection at junction of Inside cable or wire and outside cable. Not arranged for cross connections. 26 pairs. Not equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LA-51b 816 49-1/8 29-1/2 8-9/16 Same as LA-26 except 51 pairs.
Western Electric Co. LA-16 816 22 26-1/2 8-9/16 Same as IA-26 except 16 pairs and equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LA-26b 816 29-1/2 29-1/2 8-9/16, Same as LA-26 except equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Western Electric Co. LA-51b 816 49-1/8 29-1/2 8-9/16 Same as LA-26 except 51 pairs and equipped with fuses and protector blocks.
Terminals listed are for wall-mounting indoors and use. W. E. Co. 26 and 27 protector blocks in combination and W. E. Co. 7A fuses. If sneak current protection is required on pairs not used as battery feeders, use W. E. Co. 60D sneak current fuses in addition to the W. E. Co. 7A fuses. If battery feeders are used, W. E. Co. 60E fuses are required for such pairs, in addition to the W. E. Co. 7A fuses.
b Terminals with the same number of pairs, which are equipped with fuses and protector blocks have same manufacturers code as those not equipped. Stock numbers are different, see paragraph 807.
170
Par. 806-807
FIGURE 815. Terminals For Protecting Small Switchboards (Western Electric Co. LC-26)
FIGURE 816. Terminals For Protecting Small Switchboards (Western Electric Co. LA-26)
807. TERMINALS FOR PROTECTING SMALL SWITCHBOARDS AND TELEPHONES SERVED BY LEAD-CqVERED CABLES - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Manufacturer and Mfr.*s Code No-. Stock No. Weight (Lbs.) Cubic Feet
Packed for Export Net Packed for Export Net
Western Electric Co. LC-11 4E7911 56 45 2.7 2
Western Electric Co. LC-16 4E7816 75 63 3 2.4
Western Electric Co. LC-26 4E7826 85 71 3.7 2.9
Western Electric Co. LC-26a 5C2426 85 71 3.7 2.9
Western Electric Co. LC-51a 4E7851 130 112 5.7 4.5
Western Electric Co. LA-26 4E7926 118 94 7.4 6
Western Electric Co. LA-51 4E7951 188 160 11.1 9.3
Western Electric Co. LA-16a 4E7916 90 68 5.2 4.3
a Western Electric Co. LA-26 4E7926.1 118 94 7.4 6
O Western Electric Co. LA-51 4E7951.2 188 160 11.1 9.3
a Equipped with fuses and protector blocks, others are not so equipped.
171
CABLE STUB-
/“CROSS CONNECTING TERMINALS
“SPRING CLIPS FOR PROTECTOR BLOCKS
/"FUSE CLIPS
CABLE STUB-
/“CROSS CONNECTING f TERMINALS
SPRING CLIP FOR PROTECTOR BLOCKS
FUSE CLIPS
Par. 808
808. CABLE PROTECTORS - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.
Manufacturer
and Mfr.* s Code No. Shown in Figure No. Stock No. Type of Protector Block Used Remarks
Cook 7 817 5C2200 41-190 & 41-3001 For mounting on pole. Provides protection
Reliable 222 818 5C2200 P-495 & P-663 for five pairs at junction of cable and
Western Electric Co. 83A 819 5C2200 26 & 30 Prot. Blocks open wire.
FIGURE 819. Cable Protector (Western Electric Co. 83A)
172
FIGURE *818. Cable Protector (Reliable 222)
' PROTECTOR BLOCK!
’ WIRE TERMINALS
FIGURE 817. Cable Protector (Cook 7)
par. 809
809. CABLE TERMINALS WITH PROTECTION - POLE MOUNTED - DESCRIPTION.
Manufacturer and Mfr.»s Code No. Shown in Figure No. Size - Inches Type of Prot. Block or Fuse Used Remarks
H W D
Western Electric Co. EA26 820 50-1/2 20-1/2 17-1/16 W.E. Co. 26-30 Protector Blocks Provides protection for 26 pairs at Junction of cable and open wire.
Western Electric Co. EA51 55-5/32 36-3/4 15-5/16 W.E. Co. 26-30 Protector Blocks Same as EA26 except 51 pairs.
Western Electric Co. B51 821 36-31/32 22-3/4 15-5/16 W.E. Co. 7T Fuses Provides fuse protection for 51 pairs at Junction of aerial and underground cable. (See TM 11-486 for use of 24 ga. cable in place of fused terminal.)
Western Elec- 821 trie Co. B101 54-15/32 22-3/4 15-5/16 W.E. Co. 7T Fuses Same as B51 except 101 pairs.
FIGURE 820.
Cable Terminals With Protection (Western Electric Co. EA26)
700898 0—46-----13
173
CABLE TERMINAL-! L OPEN WIRE TERMINALS
. PROTECTOR MOUNTINGS
Par. 809-810
FIGURE 821. Cable Terminal With Protection (Western Electric Co. B Type)
TO UNDERGROUND CABLE TO AERIAL CABLE
810. CABLE TERMINALS WITH PROTECTION - POLE MOUNTED - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL t)ATA.—————
Manufacturer and Mfr.’s Code No, Stock No. Weight Packed for Export (Lbs.) Net Cubic Feet
Packed for Export Net
Western Electric Co. EA26 None 170 140 11.9 10.1
Western Electric Co. EA51 5C3051-1 265 225 18.3 15.9
Western Electric Co. B51 4E7951.2 or FTN-10961 144 119 7.9 6.5
Western Electric Co. Bl 01 5C2501.2 210 180 11.5 9.9
174
Par. 811
811. MAIN FRAME PROTECTION FOR LARGER SWITCHBOARDS - DESCRIPTION.
Manufacturer Stock No. Shown in Figure No. Size Type of
Prot. Blocks Fuses and Heat Coils Frame Consists of Remarks
H W D
Western Electric Co. 4E2520B 822 6’-9-5/8" 1’-5-13/16 1»- " 2-1/4* W.E.Co. 26-27 Prot. Block W.E.Co. 76A Heat Coils W.E. Co. 1420B wall frame - "A" type; 5 - W.E. Co. 1435R Prot. Groups (25 pr. terminal strips mtd. on a fanning strip); 5 - W.E. Co. 1435W Prot. Groups (20 1269A Protectors mounted on a fanning strip) Wall-mounted main frame protection for 100 prs.
Western Electric Co. 4E2525C 823 8»- 4-3/4* a 2'-6" W.E.Co. 26-27 Prot. Block W.E. Co. 76A Heat Coils W.E. Co. 1425C Main Frame - *B" type equipped with 103X fanning strips. Each vertical will accommodate 4 - W.E. Co. 1268A Protectors, 20 prs. each and 1 - W.E. Co. 1268B Protector, 23 prs. Each vertical will also accommodate 8 horizontal rows of W.E. Co. 65 -(20 prs. each) terminal strips. Floor-mounted main frame protection -100 prs. per vertical. Protector groups and terminal strips should be ordered separately. Two verticals of frame required for initial installation.
Reliable and General Electric 4E2401 Reliable P-663 and P-495 Protector Blocks and Reliable 106 Fuses 12 Reliable 303F Protectors 1 - G. E. copper oxide rectifier Combination main frame and power panel Provides protection for 220 prs.
Spacing between verticals is 8*.
175
Par. 811-812
Protected
FIGURE 822
Main Distributing Frame (Wall Mounted) (Western Electric Co.)
FIGURE 823. Protected Main Distributing Frame (Floor Mounted) (Western Electric Co.)
812. MAIN FRAME PROTECTION FOR LARGER SWITCHBOARDS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. ————---------------------------
Weight (Lbs.) Cubic Feet
Packed ' Packed
for for
Manufacturer stock No. Export Net Export Net
Western Electric Co. 4E2520B
Western Electric Co. 4E2525C
Reliable and General 4E2401
Electric
176
--- PROTECTOR
BLOCKS AND HEAT COILS
FIRST UNIT -i r EACH ADDITIONAL
UNIT
- PROTECTOR BLOCKS AND HEAT COILS
Par. 901-905
CHAPTER 9
TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
Section I General
901. SCOPE AND USE.
a. This chapter gives information on telephone line transmission equipment, required to establish telephone circuits by voice frequency or carrier means. It does not include the switchboard equipment or telephones at the ends of the circuits and it does not include power plant or telegraph equipment. Reference should be made to other chapters in this manual for these items.
b. Composite sets and simplex coils for deriving telegraph legs for d-c telegraph circuits are considered part of the telephone line transmission equipment. The remainder of the telegraph equipment, including voice-frequency carrier telegraph terminals is treated in chapter 10.
&. The information is divided into two parts for convenience in use. Section II applies to the equipment normally in tactical communications systems. Section HI applies to "packaged" equipment designed primarily for fixed plant service. This division of the information is not intended to limit the field of use of either type of equipment. The tactical plant equipment may be used in fixed plant communication systems, or vice versa, when it will give the service desired.
Section II Tactical Equipment
902. .GENERAL. Tactical telephone line transmission equipment is intended for use with rubber-covered wires and cables, and open wire lines. Radio links may also form a part of the system. In general, the equipment Includes built-in testing means and has controls and adjustments which are simple and easy to operate.
903. DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION.
a. The principal items of tactical telephone equipment Include voice frequency repeaters, voice frequency ringers, and carrier equipment. The voice frequency repeaters include two-wire (21-type) and four-wire repeaters and are mainly for use with field wire. The ringing equipment consists of voice frequency ringers for
use when 20-cycle signaling cannot be used over the line. The carrier equipment consists of carrier telephone terminals and repeaters which may be used to provide four telephone channels over a line composed of spiral-four cable or two-open wire pairs, or a multichannel radio link. Supplementary equipment is also available which will permit the same carrier terminals to be operated in conjunction with a single open wire pair either on an equivalent four-wire or balanced two-wire basis. Descriptions of these items are given in paragraph 906 to 908 inclusive. The various groupings of these items to provide telephone line transmission sets is given in paragraph 909.
904. STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. Paragraph 910 gives stock numbers and logistical data for the tactical telephone equipment listed in paragraphs 906 to 910 inclusive.
905. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS.
a. Paragraphs 911, 912 and 913 summarize the equipment required for three tactical carrier telephone transmission systems. Information regarding outside plant and any associated telegraph equipment which are not included are given in Chapter 6 and 10, respectively. Paragraph 911 is for the four-wire spiral-four or open wire system. The transmission frequency band is 0 to 12 kc over each pair of wires. Paragraph 912 is for an equivalent four wire system, sometimes referred to as the "open wire converter system," operated over a single open wire pair. The transmission frequency band in one direction of transmission is 0 to 12 kc and in the other direction 20 to 32 kc. Paragraph 913 is for a balanced two-wire carrier hybrid system. The transmission frequency band is 0 to 12 kc in both directions of transmission. For each type of system given the equipment required at each terminal and repeater point is listed.
b. A list of spare equipment is included in paragraphs 911, 912 and 913. The amount of spare equipment to be provided will vary widely depending upon conditions and must be determined for each specific application. The number of spare units Indicated is suggested as applying in a typical case.
c. Reference should be made to chapter 13 for information on test sets required in maintenance of this equipment.
177
par. 906
g06. VOICE FREQUENCY REPEATERS AND MISO. EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION.
Wei^it Dimensions 12 Volt Dry
Nomenclature in in Storage Battery
Shown in Operation Operation Battery Operation
Name Type No. Fig. No. Pounds6 Inches0 Operation0 Life3 TM ______________----------------------------
Telephone EE-89-A 901 14 7x8 1/2x9 - 2 weeks TM 11-2006 Two-wire (21 type) voice-frequency intermediate
Repeater with repeater for use on lines with 20 or 1000-cycle
P Battery signaling. Provides thru simplex telegraph oper-
ation. Includes one spare tube. Uses one
Battery BA.-40.
Telephone EE-99-A 902 40 12x8x14 0.5 amp. 7 Days TM 11-348 Four-wire voice-frequency telephone repeater for
Repeater 12
BATTERY A
BA 40
TELEPHONE^
REPEATER
Par. 906
FIGURE 903. Telephone TP-9 FIGURE 904. Repeating
Coil 0-161
c 2 £ 5 £ (i ft
180
9U?• VOTCE FREQUENCY RINGING EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION
181
11OV
Weight Dimensions AC 12 Volt
-----Nomenclature____ in in Opera- Storage
Shown in Operation Operation tion Batteryd
---_______ S/l* No. Fig. No. Pounds* Inchest VAC Operation IM ____________________RemaA s ^Equipment EE“1°°"() 905 110 /! * 36 2-5 ^P3 ™ 11-342 Sam as EE-1O1( ) except only one 1000-20 qy cle
16-1/4 x 60 hours ringer. Replaced by EE-101-( ).
11-5/8 '
R1E?iitient EE"101-( } 906 95 21-1/4 x 36 3.2 amps IM 11-342 Two 1000-20 cycle ringers for use where 20 cycle
Part of ii4"?/ 45 h°UrS signaling cannot be used over line. Operates nor-
Hq..24_i ) 11-5/8 mally from 110V a-c supply. Has automatic transfer
from a-c supply to storage batteries. One
EE-101-( ) required at each end of two circuits.
Includes 100% spare tubes, fuses and vibratcr.
Ringing equipment in wooden carrying case.
tpirst two dimensions indicate floor space required.
Miy also be operated from 220 volt, 50-60 cycle source. To obtain power in watts multiply VA by 0.85.
Assumes use oi two Batteries BB-55, 150 ampere-hours fully charged condition and under normal weather conditions.
par. 907
FIGURE 905. Ringing Equipment EE-100-( ) FIGURE 906. Ringing Equipment EE-101-
Par. 907
182
rSPARE TUBES
FUSE EXTRACTOR POSTS -• t-CLAMP [ ^MpLIF|ER<
VIBRATOR «. 1 I .SWITCHES I pAMFLIFIERS
________ 1 I r""c,~
or O
< a
J h a
gasket -----
A-C POWEF—♦
CORO
—— INSTRUCTION BOOK »o« , I—
GASKET —-CASE —" BATTERY -----
CORD A-C POWER —t
CORD
F --TERM STRIP COVER pSPARE FUSES
906- CARRIER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION. Weight Dimensions * 12 Volt
Nomenclature in in 110V AC Storage TM or
Shown in Operation Operation Operation Battery Instruction Name Type No. Fig. No. Pounds8 Inches15 VAC Operation11 Book ___________________________________ Remarks
TeTeSl°Sl CF’1'A 907 475 28x19x66 72 7-5 mpe ™U-JU1 ^-bannel carrier telephone t.nnlnal. Part of
Part of 20 hours spiral-four carrier system using Cable Assemblies
ipQ_2j__/ \ CC-358. Provides one voice and three carrier channels
' using frequencies up to 12 kc. Provides one d-c sig-
naling circuit and one d-c telegraph circuit on the two simplexes. Signaling circuit used in system maintenance. One or more telephone channels may be used for voice-frequency telegraph CF-2-( ); channel 5 is first choice. Each telephone channel requires 1000-20 cycle signaling. Has built in transmission testing equipment and automatic transfer from a-c power source to storage battery. Includes 100% spare tubes, protectors, fuses, and vibrator.
Ee?Seof 908 28X14154 56 F-75W8 TM 11-541 Four-channel carrier intennedlate repeater used in
TC-23-( ) 40 hours spiral-four carrier system. Arranged for d-c signal-
' ing and d-c telegraph operation over the two sim-
plexes. Has built in transmission testing equipment, talking and monitoring arrangement for the voice channel, and automatic transfer from the a-c supply to storage batteries. Includes 100% spare tubes, protectors, fuses, and vibrator.
Carter CF-U- ( ) 909 280 24x17x1.9 56 15 W IM 11-2008 Carrier converter for use with Telephone Terminal
TC-35-( ) 5 hours CF-l-A or Repeater CF-5-A to provide 4 circuits over
a single open wire pair. Operation is on an equivalent four-wire basis, one direction of transmission being 0-12 kc and the other direction 20.8 to 52.2 kc. Provides two composited d-c telegraph paths. Includes amplifying, modulating, and demodulating equipment, composite set, built-in testing equipment, and automatic transfer from a-c supply to storage battery. Includes 100% spare tubes, fuses, protectors, and vibrator.
*In wooden case except Telephone Unit EE-105 which is in canvas case.
“First two dimensions indicate floor space required. °May also be operated from 220-volt, 50-60 cycle source. To obtain power in watts multiply VA by 0.85. Assumes use of two Batteries BB-55, 150 ampere hour, fully charged and under norma] weather conditions.
Batteries used for standby power.
Table continued on next page
183
hi «o o OD
par. 903
CARRIER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Weight Dimensions 110V 12 Volt
Nomenclature in in AC Storage TM or
Shown in Operation Operation Opera- Battery Instruction Kame Type No. Fig. No. Pounds® Inchesb tion Operation^ Book _______________ Remarks_______________________
Repeater CF-5-( ) 910 380 24x19x65 54 4.5 amps TM 11-2008 Carrier repeater for use at intermediate offices on
^art of 35 hours equivalent four-wire systems using Converter CF-4-( ).
TC-37-( ) Arranged for composited telegraph. Has built-in
transmission testing equipment , talking an! monitoring arrangements on Channel 1, and automatic transfer from the a-c supply to storage batteries. Includes 100$ spare tubes, protectors, fuses and vibrator.
Carrier CF-7 911 54 19x10x8 - - TM 11-2003 Four wire-2 wire equipment used with Telephone Termi-
Hvbrid nal CF-l-A and Repeater CF-3-A to provide 1 voice and
three carrier circuits over a single pair. Operation is on a balanced two-wire basis using frequencies up to 12 kc in each direction cf transmission. Used principally on open wire pairs. Provides two composited d-c telegraph paths. Includes a repeating coil hybrid, adjustable balancing network, and a composite set. Requires no power. Includes 100$ spare protectors.
Telephone EE-105 912 16 7-3/4 x - - TM 11-2014 Telephone for use primarily by lineman to connect to
Unit 5 x 9-7/8 voice frequency channel on lines used for carrier
operation. Contains EE-8-B telephone unit, also filter to prevent mutual interference between voice and carrier channels. May be used to provide an intermediate bridged station on voice or carrier lines.
Requires two Batteries BA-3Cy suitable for 48 hrs continuous use.
ain wooden case except Telephone Unit EE-105, which is in canvas case.
bFirst two dimensions indicate floor space required. cNay also be operated from 220-volt, 50-60 cycle source. To obtain power in watts multiply VA by 0.85. ^Assumes use of two Batteries BB-55, 150 ampere hour, fully charged and under normal weather conditions.
Batteries used for standby power.
184
A INSTRUCTION BOOK
arv^^HWBBFRI pocket ■ t ' —“S|a S P A R E P R O T E C T O R S
--S4- LINE coil panel and
12 VOLT BATTERY -IBL^^J- X aH BINDING POSTS
TERMINAL LUGS 8B ft [ [j W|H
"*—S’" MEASURING panel
■ i'
■I B*j|—--— gB- LINE AMPLIFIER panel
■I .'^-4 ■ —•-*>
■kfeSaiS A __ Jh • B * B I _ ____________________________ BATTERY CORD
BA * HO & S > jgjfc EQUALIZER PANEL linecoiland j- condensed
MEASURING PANEL INSTRUCTIONS
■W ilXF^ 91 . ... ._
■ is If; I I L. ]~BL CHANNEL I PANEL i 9N M I
■1'”... re it T M* J .
II r w I
■■ sl 7—f-----CHANNEL 2 panel IB ' Bf* ’..
£—n^"1" L / 4 ■ IB ' Tg i DF • ~ pBL— protectors
saaE jBbfc -TjiwiJ1 *,A fl j~{—■*-AmS «Q. , .Ls-Xt-g?
BBlBB W -‘Mlii I I t K 1 P . iSssato .....
^lS,Ae^ BATTERY -B iTBwBr? HK v M ll ?! « 11 Ll_JBlL—ab equalizer
CORDS IN POSITION W|H S-------- “IB1- CHANNEL 3 PANEL I i i S i Si f*NEL
FOR TRANSPORTATION ■ ■ I »•»; | ' gg | • 1^180 9 * ■
jSi- . '''■ i*|nigT I
■■ --—<--- K M | w . F'-*-T j MU- eine: amplifier
II i Jw- E [ p Ua
wp J • JK" W I r. —■tk CHANNEL 4 PANEL | gj
A-C POWER PLUG CAP 1V'’" JjEl SHOCK MOUNT.NG | ----
B® MB j i I I ■ I,
SIGNAL PANEL ’ F1P 9 ’ ," . I H’ conductor
■ ■I gff ""Wf-1 -m- —»r-Mgr—-| OUTLET FROM
.....-....--:- WB^mWS-mwMi*' “~w~ spai,c Tuec PANfi il W. -~~rr > a I *“ FROM CASE.MB , M: A R E*I talk and
Baa BB M v b zsL ?iy4 B signaling
•; wr-ff-i - - - ■ "W “X Ji ? R*NEL
BBB pw Sir BSgE St ^jg**1**-""y'' , ..... ^jHs®
•*—^g-L POWER SUPPLY A PANEL ~ . _ power panel
JBB etswe- m S| ■ > pn 'rfiWlEBl_ SHOCK
SEM '. _, _yg~a. X- /T.V-7 KJjjm MOUNTING
1'^ 0# IKaZK W7«
*>w -—gg- POWER SUPPLY B PANEL ■ \0E -^rB ■
Bfl| 'xU jBggX^ <\ -- r
MgrgMggg ..,.-4 .-—wlSrl) '' ® ®'"'1 w protectors
Bfcee 8*X^bBB®,
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS telephone handset
FIGURE 907. Telephone Terminal CF-l-A FIGURE 908. Repeater CF-3-A
Par. 908
185
Par. 908
POCKET PCR TECHNICAL-J j >
manual aB
LINE COIL AND -----Bm f ft ft ft ft g ** 0} 4* 'B
BINDING POST PANEL B| ,. -'
& HfwI ? ** * ft ft ’
® -Jefi * e * e i MEAS PANEL,—-------> *^\ S A i I ■ '■Il
TRANSMISSION |B § V B L 1™,™-! f
MEASURING CIRCUIT Bl g " •
SIG PANEL. SIGNALING-8S ,| f! OS F 11 I I II) I
C,BCU,T | I L B t w i (...,
AB EQL PANEL,--------B“*' J Bl ’iK.
HIGH GROUP EQUALIZER ||f g» I ZW
H '■■'■®^'“'WZW~1 t I
Bl ijUjA: < 111
r* • Mwr v-. ... I WzS IbI
AMP PANEL, HIGH Bfe**'*''1 ' ISM Mfe-J
GROUP AND LOW GROUP Bl U—-< W^L_____« “ *?»*-....-■> ffil
AMPLIFIERS Bf g | j * । j j |||
BA EQL PANEL,-----Hr* ! * fiJSfc Kl
LOW GROUP EQUALIZER B| - ▼ ^c~x ~ > |||
Sfi Zww-w*r~f| K|
Bg| P ' - I I f | Q A |g|
TALK & MON PANEL M|| ■> ffijfr .?"«?• ' M
I ' W [ JI | |p ______-------p
CXA PANEL, COMPOSITE -H «'§ I— —•* •— MMM MmmmI « I
SET LINE a n |r I 1 I | ■
gO IS
DIRECTIONAL FILTERS. —B“4S’? '» *$ ■ fc
LINE A, LOW PASS ON ■■ IT '■ gF? ■ F
FRONT HIGH PASS ON 5 «tw ■
REAR ■ ------r ----------gt
COVER OVER HPA------'^?T"
FILTER TERMINALS fig 1^ <.--------------------- S|
CXB PANEL. COMPOSITE —I1 1 '1 ■ 1 <11 mmmm mmmmJ
SET? LINE B \
H —L-JLJL.—g?
DIRECTIONAL FILTERS —m I
LINE B, LOW PASS ON B| |<^ :i. ■
FRONT, HIGH PASS ON B| IL ’< * LJ: B
REAR M !&•••*’-- ■
M ip -; **■ B
SPARE TUBE & SPARE W'W W t**S* L &■
PROTECTOR PANEL ® M
RECT PANEi , RECTIFIERS -^B-J^UJBl_ *B * 3® H
FOR SIGNALING CIRCUIT M ®3 , “ - , ‘L ®
bB"~ J Bl
PWR SUP PANEL - --
Tt .....................■ ■ I
ac convenience ---Bhrf—_ I A"1
outlet "ywjfrg
AC AND BATTERY POWER CORDS '"""-*
TIED FOR TRANSPORTION
5-( )
POCKET FOR ’---
TECHNICAL MANUALj || |i
COVER OVER COIL 'I-fl* • 3 - S '
TERMINALS □Bl ; Lmm I3 fib.
Wi ^B^eaeee ■ e® e® il V poset panelandbind,ng) WIPES - e e * e e F
ig ‘JOa e s e see SOL I
CONTROL PANEL ---BTli ift tfhiA . tttMKJH ill
L|:| 8QW“0ajj I
i Wx . __ f ■
i t. X> cbHn»k j | । T<' T H F F T B
SET II T I---------------------------U—I ' t 1
1 A J I । Lx/ w DIRECTIONAL FILTERS) - ’¥ ®?
LOW PASS ON FRONT i^l BC BL
HIGH PASS ON REAR ) |W
COVER PLATE OVER] - - J®
HIGH PASS FILTER ;K9
TERMINALS > , g £•
i gyjg SSI
SPARE TUBE AND SPARE]-- ~ »>>•*
PROTECTOR PANEL ) P --’‘*^4® W*^ TKRW^? BL
I qiCT » flk ss^ $
RECTIFIER PANEL,)- .J jLj ^B
rectifiers for Br
SIGNALING ClRCUITj Ig
3 s ■
PWR SUP PANEL ---- " B BR
9 Im| ____
41 g’^35’ m | B
AC CONVENIENCE'] ------B
OUTLET ) |j .
LAC AND BATTERY POWER CORDS TIED FOR' TRANSPORTATION
FIGURE 909. converter CF-4-( ) FIGURE 910. Repeater CF-
186
Par. 908
FIGURE 911. carrier Hybrid CF-7 FIGURE 912. Telephone Unit EE-1C5
187
188
par. 909
909. TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION SETS - TACTICAL - COMPONENT PARTS.
Dimensions3 Weight
________Nomenclature_____________ in Operation in Operation ________Name________Type No . ~ Quan. __________Principal Component Parts__ Inches________________lbs . Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( )_1 Telephone Terminal CF-l-A_______________28 x 19 x 66_______________475
1 Power Unit PE-75-( ) 36 x 19-1/2 x 26-1/2 330
2 Batteries BB-55 26 x 14 x 19 110
1 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 14 x 10 x 16 50
1 Test Equipment IE-53-( ) 7 x 6 x 5-1/2 8
1 Tool Equipment TE-123-( ) 7 x 16 x 7 20
1 Telephone EE-8-( ) 4 x 8 x 10 10
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 187
Total 1190'
Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 1 Repeater CF-3-A 28 x 14 x 34 225
1 Power Unit PE-214-( ) 14 x 18-1/2x10 40
♦ 2 Batteries BB-55 26 x 14 x 19 110
1 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 14 x 10 x 6 50
1 Test Equipment IE-53-( ) 7 x 6 x 5-1/2 8
1 Tool Equipment TE-123-( ) 7 x 16 x 7 20
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 132
Total 665
Ringer Setb TC-24-( ) 1 Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 21 x 15 x 11-1/2 95
2 Batteries BB-55 26 x 14 x 19 110
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 135
Total 540
Telephone Repeater Setc TC-29-A 1 Telephone Repeater EE-99-A 12 x 8 x 14 40
1 Power Supply PE-204 5-3/4 x 6-3/4 x 5-1/2 10
1 Telephone EE-8-( ) 4 x 8 x 10 10
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 20
Total “85
Converter Set TC-33-( ) 1 Converter CF-4-( ) 24 x 17 x 49 280
2 Batteries BB-55 26 x 14 x 19 110
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 180
Total W
Repeater Set TC-37-( ) 1 Repeater CF-5-( ) 24 x 19 x 65 380
1 Power Unit PE-214- ( ) 14 x 18-1/2x10 40
2 Batteries BB-55 26 x 14 x 19 110
1 Rectifier RA-83-( ) 14 x 10 x 6 50
1 Test Equipment IE-53 7 x 6 x 5-1/2 8
1 Tool Equipment TE-123 7 x 16 x 7 20
1 Telephone EE-8-( ) 4 x 8 x 10 10
Accessory Equipment and Spare Parts 87
Total 830’
aFirst two dimensions indicate floor space required. Three foot clearance front and rear is desirable for maintenance. bA source of a-c power is required if ringer is not associated with equipment having a source of a-c power. cTwo Batteries BA-30 and three Batteries BA-23 or four Batteries BA-36 or two Batteries BB-55 are required but not provided as part of the set.
00S9X O -46--- 14
Par. 910
212♦ TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Weight - lbs. Total Total
___________Nomenclature__________ Heaviest Package Weight - lbs.___ Volume - Cu.Ft.
Packed In Carrying Packed In Carrying Packed In Carrying Ship
-------Name________ Type No. Stock No, For Export Case For Export Case For Export Case Tons9
a VOICE FREQUENCY REPEATERS AND MISC. EQUIPMENT
Telephone Repeaterb EE-89-A 4B3289A 20 14 20 14 .4 .3
Telephone Repeater0 EE-99-A 4B3299A 47 40 47 40 2.5 0*8 .1
Telephone Repeater Setc TC-29-A 4B3229 47 40 277 80' 10 1.5 .3
Telephone TP-9 None Assigned - 24 - 24 - 0.5 -
Repeating Coil C-161 3C161 4.73 - 3 - 1
b VOICE FREQUENCY RINGING EQUIPMENT
Ringing Equipment EE-100-( ) 4F2100 150 110 150 100 3.9 2.3 ,1
Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 4F2101 140 95 140 95 3.6 2.1 .1
Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 4F2124 140 95 440 340 14 10.1 .4
c CARRIER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 4B8361 73 5 475 735 475 43.8 20.3 1.1
Repeater CF-3-A 4B3203 340 225 340 225 17.9 7.7 .5
Converter CF-4-( ) 4B4484 530 280 530 280 35.0 11.6 .9
Repeater CF-5-( ) 4B3205 690 380 690 3 80 40.0 17.7 1.0
Carrier Hybrid CF-7 4B1467 75 54 75 54 2.2 .8 .1
Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 4B8360-21 735 475 1470 1190 62.0 40 1.5
Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 4B3223 340 225 - 1150 685 42.0 28 1.1
Converter Set TC-33-( ) 4B449-33 530 280 330 570 44 22 1.1
Repeater Set TC-37-( ) 4B3237 690 380 1180 860 53 34 1.3
Telephone Unit EE-105 4B8405 - 16 - 16 - .4
a40 cu. ft. assumed equal to 1 ship ton.
^Requires in addition:
One Battery BA-40
c
Requires in addition:
For storage battery operation - two Batteries BB-55
For dry cell operation - three Batteries BA-23 or four Batteries BA-36 and two
Batteries BA-30 for Telephone EE-8-( ).
189
Par. 911-913
911. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR 4-WIRE CARRIER OPERATION OVER SPIRAL-FOUR CABLE OR OPEN WIRE.
Nomenclature
Name Type No. Number Required®
a PER TERMINAL
Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 1
Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 2
b PER REPEATER
Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 1
c SPARE EQUIPMENT**
Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 1 per system
Repeater CF-3-A 1 per 3 or less repeaters
Ringing Equipment EE-lOl-f ) 1 per system
Power Unit PE-75-( ) 2 per system
Power Unit PE-214-( ) 2 per repeater
Rectifier RA-83-( ) 1 per system
aFor stock numbers, weights, and volumes see paragraphs 910, 1207 and 1217. ^Amount of spare equipment will vary widely and must be estimated for each
specific application.. The number required is suggested as typical.
912. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR 2-WIRE CARRIER OPERATION OVER OPEN WIRE
USING CONVERTER CJ'-4-( ) .
Nomenclature
Name Type No. Number Required
a PER TERMINAL
Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 1
Converter Set TC-33-( ) 1
Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 2
b PER REPEATER
Repeater Set TC-37-( ) 1
c SPARE EQUIPMENT**
Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 1 per system
Converter CF-4-( ) 1 per system
Repeater CF-5-( ) 1 per 3 or less repeaters
Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 1 per system
Power Unit PE-75-( ) 2 per system
Power Unit PE-214-( ) 2 per repeater
Rectifier RA-83-( ) 1 per system
aFor stock numbers, weights, and volumes see paragraphs 910, 1207 and 1217. ^Amount of spare equipment will vary widely and must be estimated for each specific application. The number required is suggested as typical.
913. SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR 2-WIRE CARRIER OPERATION OVER OPEN WIRE USI^S CARP.tEfe HYBRID Cfr-7.
Nomenclature
Name Type No. Number Required9
a PER TERMINAL
Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ) 1
Carrier Hybrid CF-7 1
Ringer Set TC-24-( ) 2
b PER REPEATER
Repeater Set TC-23-( ) 1
Carrier Hvbrid CF-7 2
c SPARE EQUIPMENT**
Telephone Terminal CF-l-A 1 per system
Repeater CF-3-A 1 per 3 or less repeaters
Carrier Hybrid CF-7 1 per sys. + 1 per 3 or
less rep.
Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) 1 per system
Power Unit PE-75-( ) 2 per system
Power Unit PE-214-( ) 2 per repeater
Rectifier RA-83-( ) 1 per system
aFor stock numbers, weights, and volumes see paragraphs 910, 1207 and 1217. ^Amount of spare equipment will vary widely and must be estimated for each specific application. The number required is suggested as typical.
190
Par. 914-916
Section III Fixed Plant Equipment
914. GENERAL.
a. frixed plant telephone circuits will generally be set up by means of a group of equipment, known as "packaged” equipment, which has been designed especially for this purpose. Packaged equipment will furnish high grade telephone circuits comparable to that secured by use of conventional commercial equipment required for fixed plant service. It is so arranged that engineering, installation and maintenance is simplified. Some types of packaged equipment may be used in tactical telephone systems where conditions warrant.
b. Packaged equipment is not designed for outdoor use and should be located in a building where temperature variations over short periods of time may be held to a minimum. If the equipment is to be housed in a theatre type of building, it is recommended that the frigid (fully enclosed wooden) type of building be used.
£. In addition to the instruction books on the individual packages , TM 11-2022
"Application of Fixed Plant Telephone and Telegraph Peckaged Equipment to Open Wire Lines" may be referred to when detailed information on engineering of packaged equipment is required.
915. DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION. Packaged telephone equipment isevailable for establishing nonrepeatered voice circuits, repeatered voice circuits, three-channel type C carrier and single channel type H carrier open-wire systems. In addition other packaged units include voice-frequency ringers, testing equipment, apparatus cabinets for housing panel mounted equipment, and office tool sets. Test and tool equipment required for setting up and maintaining packaged offices is described in chapter 13. Packaged telegraph systems are described in chapter 10. Descriptive information for packaged telephone equipment is given in paragraphs 917 to 920 inclusive.
916. STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Paragraph 921 lists the stock num-bers and logistical data for packaged telephone equipment.
191
par. 917
192
917. VOICE FREQUENCY TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION.
115V TM or
‘'Nomenclature Shown in Weight Height 50-60"AC Instruction
Type Name Type NoT5 Fig. No. Ins tailed Installed VA b»e Booka __________________________________________Remarks ______________________
a Panel; Line X-61823H 913 10 3-1/2",c ™ 11-2020 For terminating noncomposited open wire and cable circuits.
” Terminating or X-6624? Can. be used with 20-cycle or 1000-cycle signaling. Provides
and Simplex; simplex telegraph leg. Furnished in one shipping case. InTelephone eludes protector drainage 1:1 ratio repeating coil, test jacks,
instruction books, drawings, spare protector blocks. Paired cross connecting wire not included.
b Panel; Line X-61823C 914 43 8-3/4",c TM 11-2031 For terminating composited open wire and cable circuits. Used
Terminating or X-66150 only on circuits with 1000-cycle signaling. Provides 2 com-
and Composite; posited d-c telegraph legs. Furnished in one shipping case.
Telephone Includes protector drainage, 1:1 ratio repeating coil, com-
posite set, test jacks, instruction book, drawings, spare protector blocks. Paired cross connecting wire not included.
c Repeater X-61821J 915 455 4* l",d 70 TM 11-2021 A single 22 type repeater used on physical, side or phantom,
~ Package; or X-6^641 cable or open wire circuits. Can also be used as a four-wire
Telephone; TM 11-2027 repeater. 1000-20 cycle ringers included. Ringer cross-
V.F.(single) or X-66231 connectable to any 2 telephone circuits. Bridging circuit for
TM 11-2028 bridged extension included. Provides 2 composited d-c tele-
or X-662^0 graph legs on each side of repeater. Furnished in one ship-
TM 11-2042 ping case. Includes protector drainage, d-c composite sets, or X-66260 line and composite balancing networks adjustable for almost TM 11-2046 any type of line, test jacks, telephone, a-c convenience outer X-61806 lets, cross-connecting wire, instruction books, drawings,
approx. 200$ spare vacuum tubes, spare protector blocks, voltohm milliammeter, test receiver, spare fuses, plugs, test cords, maintenance tools.
d Repeater X-61821K 916 665 7’ 0”,d 70 TM 11-202? Three 22-type repeaters used on physical, side or phantom,
Package; or X-662J1 cable or open wire circuits. Can also be used as four-wire
Telephone- TM 11-2028 repeaters. Provides two composited telegraph legs, on each
V F (triple) or X-66250 side eacb rePeater« Cross connectable bridging circuit for
* *' p use on bridged extensions included. Furnished in two shipping
cases. Includes protector drainage, d-c composite sets, line and composite balancing networks adjustable for almost any type of line, test jacks, telephone set. A-c convenience outlets, cross connecting wire, instruction books, drawings, approx. 200$ spare vacuum tubes, spare protector blocks, spare fuses, test cords, plugs, maintenance tools.
aWestern Electric Co. code.
b115 volts, 50-60 cycle VA figures. To obtain power in watts multiply VA figure by 0.85. cEquipment is on a 19" panel which must be mounted in apparatus cabinet, paragraph 920. ^Equipment is in a steel cabinet requiring floor space 1* 10-1/4" wide x 1’ 5" deep. Four feet clearance front and rear desirable for access to equipment. eAll equipment must have adequate power supply based on requirements of each office taken as a whole.
Par. 917
193
. RETARDATION COILS
REPEATING
CO’L___ CAPACITORS ________ RESISTORS____________
4 "^aJMWgnrnin.'T —.~i ■ ~ ~~ »~i r, jtuhijii HLWHim 1 a- * ‘' r~' '*" x
a Im 1 j® I p***®^*^ __________________________ |___________] . j .
■ CD ffi *• -3II I JLfc..
PROTECTORS JACKS REPEATING COIL CAPACITOR JE f
■ o MWKjH^^HMMgOBBIwEM ■*wm#y89"jii1"ML y o
mwsqm J - p*—*°
SmC^MPmiH . _ PROTECTORS »U0 l_ CAPACITORS
llt^'M?. SY ^'- DRAINAGE COIL JACKS
- "’”T——— RETARDATION COILS.
FIGURE 913. Panel; Line Terminating and FIGURE 914. panel; Line Terminating and
Simplex; Telephone X-61823H Composite; Telephone X-61823C
Par. 917
i j - .... ■■■■ ■'
LINE PROTECTORSAND J gHttfjl RMBy
DRAINAGE COILS -----------ggM, ' ‘
I ' l|l|| iPtL ^ ■ i| ■
ill *P >r
t *WlT & ‘ ft i ~vn liH t_ ■ k H
REPEATER PANELS-®- *1-Rj -ft . ’’ RW'' z
•J i *1 tin gb ■
I i ^"IPhCT > ■ j--- Ef - L— > i-->.l-J K A L aW^;"'
11 f iQ-fi" ■■■
BRIDGING AND TELEPHONE « ' IxAtJ <■ ....• •’H SET PANEL---—--। . ' T| | 8 J5W |gg=,
JACK FIELD —If
If rffiffifl f LINE & CX BALANCING 1 I ‘ TTT *1 •jT’qlm NETWORK PANELS--k—
I I q'nh’klTnWi/ ■
® Br । i i r i -i 5$®” ' ■ Sq-ri—fi—? .
w 'BlHiniijI *t°**'l'*Jit*q- -■
__________: ■ ■
COMPOSITE SET PANELS-# |-« • ' >,f?
flv
POWER SUPPLY PANELS -4 I
AC POWER DISTRIBUTION ——■ V ftfi
OUTLET BOX f 1 <
/ / / 1 FUSE (^5) VIBRATOR(VIa2)^ \ \ \
/ / H/IBRATORIVIB.I) vibrator clamp3 i \
/ FUSE(^2) KNURLED HEAD SCREW-1 \
USWITCH(S3) POWER SUPPLY UNIT3
I___________. : . . * X
■___ ‘ IIP
Hi ; UHi
■r’l ® ’ BH
L—.... --■■■-
Ji j -A
; ____„. SR 1
j » . MB jh I
, • ■ r- il ®
I I
; , W
-- STATIC RINGING
GENERATOR AND
POWER RECEPTACLES
FIGURE 917. Ringer Package; voice Frequency; FIGURE 918. Ringer Package; Telephone;
4 Circuit X-61820A Voice Frequency TA-3/FT
196
par. 919
197
919. CARRIER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION.
115V TM or
Nomenclature______ Shown in Weight Height 50-60~ AC Instruction
Item Name Type No. Fig. No. Installed Installed VA b»d Book __________________________________________Remarks _____________________
a Terminal X-66217A 919 55 ,12-1/4",c 60 TM 11-2025 Panel may be used as an East or West terminal. ProPackage: 11-2038 vides one additional equivalent four-wire circuit
Telephone; above voice range on open wire physical or side
H Carrier circuit. Frequency band 4 kc to 10 kc. Must be
used with one item c to form complete terminal. May be used for 12—channel voice frequency telegraph. Manual regulation. Two-wire or four-wire voice termination. Furnished in one shipping case.
Includes test jacks, drawings, approx, 200% spare vacuum tubes and instruction books b Repeater X-66217Ba 920 40 8-3/4", 40 TM 11-2025 Used to extend length of type H carrier systems.
Package: (est.) TM 11-2038 Must be used with 2 items £ to form complete reTelephone; peater. Manual regulation. Furnished in one
H Carrier shipping case.
Includes test jacks, drawings, approx. 200% spare vacuum tubes. Instruction books incluied with item c.
c_ Panel: Line X-66217C 92 1 20 3-1/2", - TM 11-2025 Used at type H terminals and repeaters items a and b,
Filter and (est.) TM 11-2038 to separate type H carrier and voice circuits. Must
Balancing; operate with par, 918 items a, b, c or d to provide
Telephone protector drainage. Two panels may be connected to
transfer H carrier to another line or to terminate a voice circuit when carrier continues. Furnished in one shipping case.
Includes H carrier line filter, carrier balancing equipment for balancing voice repeaters and phantom circuits, cross connecting wire, instruction books, drawings.
aWestern Electric Co. code numbers.
b115-volt, 5O-6O-cycle VA figures. To obtain power in watts multiply VA figure by 0,85. cEquipfiient is on a 19" panel which must be mounted in apparatus cabinet, paragraph 920. dAll equipment must have adequate power supply based on requirements of each office taken as a whole.
Table continued on next page
•I
198
Par. 919
CARRIER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION (Continued) 115V TM or
Nomenclature_____ Shown in Weight Height 50-60*“ AC Instruction
Item Name Type No. Fig. No. Installed Installed VA b»d Book __________________________________Remarks___________________
d Terminal X-61819Pa 922 1190 c 300 TM H-2025 Used at East end of C carrier system. Used with
Package: op x-66229a item e to form complete system. Provides three
Telephone; TM 11-2026 additional equivalent four-wire circuits above voice
C Carrier; or X-66228a range on open wire physical or side circuit and two
Ea8b composited telegraph legs. Frequency band 6.3 to
15.7 kc East to West and 17.7 to 28.4 kc West to East. Each channel may be used for 12-channel voice frequency telegraph. Automatic regulation. External grid batteries must be furnished as follows: two BA-8, ten BA-27, six BA-39. Furnished in three shipping cases.
Includes protector drainage; composite set; line filter; carrier balancing equipment for balancing voice repeaters and phantom circuits; equipped for CS and CU frequency allocation, wired for CS allocation; four-wire terminating sets to provide two-wire terminations. Volume limiters, pads for four-wire termination on any channel. Test jacks, telephone, a-c convenience outlets^ Also includes crossconnecting wire, instruction books, drawings, approx. 200% spare vacuum tubes, spare fuses, spare protector blocks, patch cords and plugs, 0, 3, 6, 9 db peds far four-wire terminating sets, e Terminal X-61819Ra 922 1190 c 300 TH 11-2025 Used at West end of C Carrier system. Used with
Package: or X-66229a item d to form complete system. Otherwise same as
Telephone; TM 11-2026 item d.
C Carrier; or X-66228a
West f Repeater X-61819Sa 923 1080 c 240 TM 11-2025 Used to extend length of type C Carrier systems.
Package; or X-66229a Provides 2 composited telegraph legs in each direc-
Telephone; TM 11-2026 tion. Automatic regulation. Following batteries
C Carrier or X-66228a must be furnished; six BA-34. Furnished in three
shipping cases.
Includes protector drainage, composite seta on each side of repeater, line filters, carrier balancing equipment for balancing voice repeaters and phantom circuits. Equipped for CS and CU frequency allocation. Wired for CS allocation. Test jacks, a-c convenience outlets. Also includes cross connecting wire, instruction books, drawings, approx. 200% spare vacuum tubes, spare fuses, spare ^Western Electric Co. code numbers, protector blocks, patch cords and plugs.
b115-volt, 50-60-cycle VA figures. To obtain power in watts multiply
VA figure by 0.85. cEquipment is furnished in two steel cabinets each 7’ high, each requiring floor space 1’ 10-1/4" wide by 1* 5" deep. Four foot clearance front and rear desirable for access to equipment. dAll equipment must have adequate power supply based on requirements of each office taken as a whole.
Par. 919
199
FIGURE 919. Terminal package; Telephone H Carrier X-66217A
115V TM or
Nomenclature____ Shown in Weight Height 50-60** AC Instruction
Name Type No. Fig. No. Installed Installed VA Book _______________________Remarks
& Transfer* X-61823Ba - 90 17-1/2"b - TM 11-2031& Used at non-C Carrier Repeater points to transfer C
C Carrier* or Carrier system to another line pair, or to terminate
_ , . ’ a voice circuit when C system continues. Must oper-
age ate with paragraph 917 items a, b, c, or d. Used
for CS or CU frequency allocations. Furnished in one shipping case.
Includes two C Carrier line filters, carrier balancing equipment for balancing voice repeaters and phantom circuits, instruction books, drawings. Cross connecting wire not included, h Telephone EE-105 - See paragraph 90S.
Unit
a Western Electric Co. code numbers.
b Equipment is on a 19" panel which must be mounted in apparatus
cabinet, paragraph 920.
Par. 919
FIGURE 920. Repeater Package; Telephone; FIGURE 921. panel; Line Filter and Balancing;
H Carrier X-66217B Telephone X-66217C
200
201
Par. 919
r~~---- j ~ ------
■I pf E_ raipS'f’^ < 1 wiy r~~ it* tri mfi—
I | f K 1 ffj—BASIC EQUALIZER AND figg_.4L_A»g-» ]L I HSt EXJ53 1WF
■SMI . A j_^Ahfe|SA I GRI° BATTERIES I ffiratBMEj--Jalf'
PROTECTORS_______| ---TRANSMITTING AMPLIFIER PROTECTORS----- I j
fai .,।|KiTrT,'7r*'* I 1 K fuse panel ----- —»1TJ |<> ?»* . pAD pANCL WEST LINE FILTER -- f—~~~ - r~’y-’T- t- PAD PANEL
CHI VOLUME LIMITER- ’ » TF»---- ’ ~ “ G ' r“--------------
’ 'I1 . 1 Wl I —NETWORK PANEL _________________I Nl III ---------------U NETWORK &
5 — r_____,----- LLL .,,■■■ \ ' I I I I I I I I I I —U I J LI EQUALIZER PANEL
( | > M* !||| COMPOSITE SET . J J.J LT it w-E IN
CH3 VOLUME LIMITER—^ ~ . J { % | , -P-CHANNEL B^ALANCE _ _| JL U f-^J_LJ O.RECT.ONAL
VOLUME LIMITER f « -L 317T1T i ! U ALARM RELAYS---* . ---------------
batteries-----------1 ■ - - -w- -r>. |A ry a i e-w out
■ > ' J I ’-L p—RECEIVING AMPLIFIER I f L DIRECTIONAL
....................................*1 i P L | jp EAST LINE FILTER- — । |' FILTERS uNenvTs.---------1..................I AC pasaoL'ji5?'>ANo „--------------7D-u1 ,i.i,ixu» W”®CStc ju. W.E
■ 1 J-—!- BASIC EQUALIZERS
corsets______________r JJU-HFr SC Jprj kUe'hets—---------------------------------------L—-J_ .
1 II tl I ■ * W ' r»4rw F'CH2 MOOULATOR AND ••••------ f 1 5.---l CR|D batteries
PLUG TYPE PADS ---2 ... J DEM°0ULATO'’ SPARE PARTS --- •.WJ.ZZ □ L.. E-W AMPLIFIER
4 WIRE TERMINATING SETS J . I'i F—I SM'IiII-i «fri i^TT > I !i| - mSSB?*-------
. L _ a® 111] I II L Z - A. Jli I 'I--CH3 MODULATOR AND BMMaMflttMMHn ■ E-W IN
TEST TELEPHONE CIRCUIT—- I ► 1 I F^ |UU | I BB0W ' DEMODULATOR BJ—L DIRECTIONAL
j J ,1—Bg JUi » 9Aa WlMWMBWWWmI M i filter
LINE FILTER BALANCE -J 1 f C J 1....... A! "■
NETS AND 17 DB PADS-- ! I jwi^Wim»l*»ll*1ll IIIIHI ■■
• M j ; . --MB -*
ALARM CIRCUIT RELAYS-- ill IBIIbIF4 .« —CH1 BAND FILTERS K ------- ■ W-E OUT
Z ■■ < .........-....■ ■ B S—L DIRECTIONAL
1KXZZXX™ K. I ■ ■ FILTER
S=ARE PARTS ------|-j---------------------------------------------- /J ।
JH—CH3 BAND FILTERS MI8». ~~~---- ----------- POWER OUTLETS
POWER OUTLETS---— .. - ££ * —”'^gp“Ty---POWER OUTLETS POWER OUTLETS--B-..- J
LINE AND POWER BAY TERMINAL BAY l|ne pow£R REPEATER BAY
FIGURE 922. Terminal Package; Telephone; FIGURE 923. Repeater Package; Telephone-
G Carrier X-61819P orR q Carrier X-61819S
Par. 920
920. APPARATUS CABINETS FOR TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION
----------Nomenclature--------- Estimated Height
Item ________Name________ Type No.a Weight Installed Installed** _______________________________Remarks_________________________
a Cabinet: Telephone; X-61823D 95 2’ 4" For mounting equipment furnished on 19" panels. Has built in relay
Apparatus; 2’ 4" high rack with 22-3/4" vertical mounting plate space. Cabinets may be
stacked. Furnished in one shipping case, A-c convenience outlets for supplying power to equipment and test sets. Includes drawing of power supply circuit.
t Cabinet: Telephone; X-61823E 140 3* 6" For mounting equipment furnished on 19" panels. Has built in relay
Apparatus; 3* 6" high rack with 35" vertical mounting plate space. Cabinets may be
stacked. Otherwise same as item a.
c Cabinet: Telephone; X-61823F 250 7* 0" For mounting equipment furnished on 19" panels. Has built in relay
Apparatus; 7’ 0" high rack with 77" vertical mounting plate space. Otherwise same as
item a.
aWestern Electric Co. code numbers.
bSteel cabinets require floor space 1’ 10-1/4" wide x 1* 5" deep. Four feet clearance front and rear desirable for access to equipment.
202
Par. 921
203
921* TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Weight - lbs. Total
Largest Package Weight - lbs. Total Cu. Ft.
___________________Nomenclature__________ Packed for Packed for Packed for ___________________Name__________________ Type No»a Stock No. Export___ Export Export Ship Tons
VOICE FREQUENCY TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
Panel; Line Terminating and Simplex; Telephone X-61823H 4C6110 30 30 1.8
Panel; Line Terminating and Composite; Telephone X-61823C 4C1806-3 75 75 3.5 .1
Repeater Package: Telephone; V.F. (single) X-61821J 4B3198.1 610 610 25.0 .6
Repeater Package: Telephone; V.F. (triple) X-61821K 4B3199.1 835 940 35.5 .9
VOICE FREQUENCY RINGERS
Ringer Package: Voice Frequency; 4-Circuit X-61820A 4F2060 325 325 11.0 .3
Ringer Package: Voice Frequency; 2-Circuit X-61820B 4F2060B 145 145 5.3 .1
Ringer TA-3/FT 4F2050-3 70 70 3.6 .1
CARRIER FREQUENCY TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
Terminal Package: Telephone; H Carrier X-66217A 4B3202A 125c 125° 6.0° ,2C
Repeater Package: Telephone; H Carrier X-66217B 4B3202H 70c 70 4.5C .lc
Panel; Line Filter and Balancing; Telephone X-66217C 4B3202HB 40c 40c 2.9C .1°
Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier; East X-61819P 4B8363C-1.1 810 1680 75.0 1.9
Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier; West X-61819R 4B8363C-2.1 810 1680 75.0 1.9
Repeater Package: Telephone; C Carrier X-61819S 4B3202C-1 725 1570 75.0 1.9
Panel; Transfer; C Carrier; Packaged X-61823B 4C1806-4 150 150 6.0 .2
Telephone Unit EE-105 See paragraph 910
APPARATUS CABINETS
Cabinet: Telephone; Apparatus; 2* 4" high X-61823D 4C1806-7 175c 175° 11.0 .3
Cabinet: Telephone; Apparatus; 3’ 6" high X-61823E 4C1806-5 265c 265c 15.7C .4°
Cabinet: Telephone; Apparatus; 7* high X-61823F 4C1806-6 420° 420c 30.0 .8
a Western Electric Co. code numbers except TA-3/FT and EE-105
b 40 cu. ft. assumed equal to 1 ship ton.
c Approximate values.
Par. 922
922. SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT.
£. Paragraphs 923 and 924 give a general method for selecting the equipment required to set up the various types of telephone circuits and systems. Detailed information will be found in TM 11-2U22. Paragraph 923 covers the equipment individual to each telephone circuit or system. Paragraph 924 covers the equipment common to an office. The last column of each table provides a cross-reference to descriptive information on the particular equipment.
b. In ordering equipment, the information in paragraph 923 should be applied to each circuit or system individually. The equipment required is itemized by packages. In the case of voice-frequency repeaters, two options are available, a single repeater package which also contains a two-circuit voice-frequency ringer and a three repeater package. Likewise, a two-circuit voice-frequency ringer package and a four-circuit voice-frequency ringer package are available. The type and number of voicefrequency repeater and ringer packages should be governed by the total number of repeaters and ringers required per office. Obviously, if repeaters and ringers were required for two circuits, two of the three repeater packages would not be ordered. The proper order would be for one three repeater package and one four-circuit ringer package. In general, greatest use should be made of the three repeater package X-61821K and the four-circuit voice-frequency ringer package X-61820A because of the economy of shipping weight and installation time.
£. Paragraph 924 serves as a guide in selecting equipment which is common to an office. When the equipment ordered is furnished on panels, the sum of the heights of all of'the panels should be
determined. After the total height of all panels is determined, an apparatus cabinet should be selected, which has sufficient vertical mounting space to house the panels. In addition, consideration should be given to future requirements for mounting space. The office tool set for each office should be selected to provide a sufficient number of tools for the estimated number of men required to operate that office. The summary of office tool sets given in chapter 13 may be used as a guide to determine which office tool set is required. Each office containing packaged carrier equipment should have available a Telephone Unit EE-105 for use by the linemen, so that they can talk over a voice-frequency circuit without disturbing operation of superposed carrier systems.
d. An adequate supply of regular and emergency power should be supplied at each office. The power requirements of an office may be determined by adding the sum of the power required for operation of the telephone equipment to the total power required by the telegraph equipment as determined from chapter 10. To this should be added 350 VA for operation of test sets, soldering irons, etc. and 350 VA for general lighting. Three engine generators are required, two to supply regular power and one for standby. The load should be divided equally between each of the two regular power supplies. The generators should be connected to the equipment through an Automatic Engine Transfer panel in order to maintain uninterrupted service. Information on generators and automatic transfer panels will be found in chapter 12. Power wiring should also be furnished to each cabinet. A good office ground is required together with adequate leads to the equipment cabinets.
204
TEXAS STATE COLLEGE FOR WOMLJ
LIBRARY par 923
923. SELECTION OF PACKAGED TELEPHONE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED PER CIRCUIT.
_______________Equipment Required at Each Office________ ________________________________________________________Nomenclature_ Reference
Item Type of Circuit Name Type No.s>b>7' Par. Item
a Non-repeatered Voice Circuit
Order for conditions (1), (2), (3), or (4) as required.
Cross connecting wire must be ordered separately
(1) Physical or side circuit arranged for simplex telegraph, 20-cycle signaling Panel; Line Teiminating and Simplex; Telephone- X-61823H 917 a
(2) Phy si c al or si de ci rcu it equipped with composite Panel; Line Terminating and Composite; Telephone. X-6182 30 917 b
sets, 1000-cycle signaling Ringer Package: Voice Frequency. X-61820A or B 918 a or b
(3) Phantom circuit, signaling 20-cycle Panel; Line Terminating and Simplex; Telephone. X-61823H 917 a
(4) Phan tom ci rcu it, signaling 1000-cycle Panel; Line Terminating and Simplex; Telephone. Ringer Package: Voice Frequency. X-61823H X-61820A or B 917 918 a a or b
b Repeatered Voice Circuit
(1) At each terminal without a terminal voice frequency repeater Panel; Line Terminating and Composite; Telephone. Ringer Package: Voice Frequency. X-61823C X-61820A or B 917 918 b a or b
(2) At each teiminal with a terminal repeater Repeater Package: Telephone; Voice Frequency. Ringer Package: Voice Frequency (required only with X-61821K). X-61821J or K X-61820A or B 917 918 c or d a or b
(3) (4) At each intermediate repeater point At each repeater point at which a bridged circuit is required Repeater Package: Telephone; Voice Frequency. Depends on type of extension see Instruction book X-66230. X-61821J or K 917 £ or d
aWestern Electric Co. code number.
bThe number of voice frequency ringer packages required for each office is determined by the total number of circuits requiring ringers at that office. The four circuit ringer package X-61820A should be used whenever possible in preference to the two circuit package X-61820B. The ringers in X-61821J may be used instead of X-61820A or B, when available.
cThe number of voice frequency telephone repeater packages required for each office is determined by the total number of circuits requiring voice repeaters at that office. The three repeater package X-61821K should be used whenever possible in preference to the single repeater package X-61821I.
Table continued on next page
700898 O—46-----15
205
Par. 923
SELECTION OF PACKAGED TELEPHONE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED PER CIRCUIT (Continued).
Equipment Required at Each Office
Item Type of Circuit Nomenclature Name Type No,a,b,c Reference Par. Item
c Type । C Carrier System
(1) At East Terminal In addition provide the following: 2 Batteries BA-8, 10 Batteries BA-27, 6 Batteries BA-34 Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier; East. Ringer Package* Voice Frequency. (One ringer per channel. No ringer required on channels equipped with V.F. Telegraph). X-61819P X-61820A 919 918 d a
(2) At West Terminal In addition provide the following: 2 Batteries BA-8, 10 Batteries BA-27, 6 Batteries BA-34 Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier; West. Ringer Package: Voice Frequency. (One ringer per channel. No ringer required on channels equipped with V.F. Telegraph). X-61819R X-61820A 919 918 e a
(3) At C Carrier Repeater Point In addition provide the following: 6 Batteries BA-34 Repeater Package: Telephone; C Carrier X-61819S 919 f
d Type. H Carrier System
(1) At each terminal Terminal Package: Telephone; H Carrier. Panel; Line Filter and Balancing; Telephone. Ringer Package: Voice Frequency. (Voice circuit equipment per items a or b must be furnished) X-66217A X-G6217C X-61820A or B 919 919 918 a £ a or b
(2) At each H Carrier Repeater Point Repeater Package: Telephone; H Carrier. Two Panels; Line Filter and Balancing; Telephone. (Voice circuit equipment per items a or b must be furnished on each side of H Repeater) X-66217B X-66217C 919 919 b c
e Carrier Transfer Sets
(1) At each C Carrier Transfer Point Panel; Transfer; C Carrier; Packaged. (Voice circuit equipment per items a or b must be furnished on each side of transfer panel) X-61823B 919 £
(2) At each H Carrier Transfer Point Two Panels; Line Filter and Balancing; Telephone. (Voice circuit equipment per items a or b must be furnished on line side of each line panel) X-66217C 919 c
eWestem Electric Co. code number.
**The number of voice frequency ringer packages required for each office is determined by the total number of circuits requiring ringers at that office. The four circuit ringer package X-61820A should be used whenever possible in preference to the two circuit package X-61820B. The ringers in X-61821J may be used instead of X-61820A or B, when available.
The number of voice frequency telephone repeater packages required for each office is deteimined by the total number of circuits requiring voice repeaters at that office. The three repeater package X-61821K should be used whenever possible in preference to the single repeater package X-61821J.
206
par. 924
924. SELECTION OF TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT COMMON EQUIPMENT REQUIRED PER OFFICE.
Item Equipment Required Equipment Required at Each Office
Nomenclature Name Type No.a Reference
Par. Item
a Apparatus Cabinets Equipment mounted on 19-inch wide panels, not furnished in cabinets, should be mounted in one of the following apparatus cabinets according to the space required. One cabinet may house several types of panels.
(1) 22-3/4 inches vertical mounting space Cab inet: Telephone; Apparatus; 2'-4" high X-61823D 920 a
(2) 35 inches vertical mounting space Cabinet: Telephone; Apparatus;. 3*-5" high X-61823E 920 b
(3) 77 inches vertical mounting space Cabinet: Telephone; Apparatus; 7’ high X-61823F 920 £
b
Office Tool Sets
Any office which contains packaged equipment should be equipped with one of the following office tool sets.
Tool Set graph; : tenanc e
Tool Set graph; tenanc e
Tool Set graph; : tenance
: Telephone and Tele- X-66086 1311
Installation and Main-; for Small Offices
: Telephone and Tele-Installation and Main-; for Medium Offices X-66087 1311
: Telephone and Tele-Installation and Main-1; for Large Offices X-56088 1311
c
Testing Equipment
Each office which contains any of the following telephone equipment should have available the testing equipment listed below. Only one test package of each type is normally required per office. At each office equipped with
(1) Line Terminating and Simplex None
Panels
(2) (3) (4) Line Terminating and Composite Pan els One Voice Frequency Repeater Two or more Voice Frequency None None Testing Package: Telephone; X-61821L 1314
(5) Repeaters Type H Carrier Voice Frequency Testing Package: Telephone; X-61821L 1314
(6) Type C Carrier Voice Frequency Testing Package: Telephone; X-61819T 1314
C Carrier Testing Package: Telephone; X-51821L 1314
Voice Frequency
Lineman's Telephone Set
d
Each office containing types C or H carrier equipment should have available a lineman's telephone set designed for use by lineman working on carrier equipped lines.
Telephone Unit
EE-105
919
h
aWestern Electric Co. code numbers except Telephone Unit EE-105-
Table continued on next page
207
Par. 924
SELECTION OF TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT COMMON EQUIPMENT REQUIRED PER OFFICE' (Continued^----------------------------
____________________________________________________________Equipment Required at Each Office_ _________________________________________________________________________________________Nomenclature_ Reference Item Equipment Required Name Type No.a Par. Item
£ Power Supply
An adequate supply of regular and emergency power to care for ultimate office requirements should be provided. In addition to power required by telephone and telegraph equipment provide the following: 35OVA for test sets, soldering irons, etc. 35OVA for general lighting. Refer to Chapter 10 for telegraph and teletypewriter power requirements. Power wiring to each cabinet must be ordered separately.
Regular and Emergency Power 3-115 Volt 60 Cycle a-c Engine
Alternators, Automatic Engine Power Transfer Modela
Panel.(Number of panels deter- A-100-A-GD6 mined by load, each panel has 2 busses, each with 50 amperes capacity)
f Grounds
A good ground is required. Ground wiring to each line of cabinets must be furnished separately.
aMade by Pacific Enterprises, San Francisco, Calif.
208
Par. 925
925. EXAMPLES OF USE OF PACKAGED EQUIPMENT.
a, . Three examples, paragraphs 926, 927, and 928 are given to show the application of the ordering methods outlined in paragraphs 923 and 924. The upper part of each figure shows in a general way the type of equipment and circuit arrangements to be set up. The lower part of each figure shows the equipment which should be ordered. The packages are indicated by boxes outlined by solid lines, and the equipment making up each package is enclosed by dash lines. In all cases spare parts are included. In the smaller packages these are included in the same box as the equipment and in the larger packages they are packed in separate boxes. The testing equipment and tools required at each office for setting up and maintaining, the equipment are shown in the boxes below the equipment associated with the telephone circuits.
b, . Paragraph 926 illustrates the condition where one pair of wires is equipped to provide a low net loss Type H carrier circuit and a high net loss voice-frequency circuit with an intermediate repeater. As such a pair would ordinarily be used for composited d-c telegraph circuits, line terminating and composite panels, and not line terminating and simplex panels, are used at the terminals of the voice-frequency circuit. It is assumed that there is little possibility of further expansion on this line, so the single repeater package is used at Office B. The two spare ringers provided in this package may be used on other circuits terminating there if desired. At Office A, Apparatus Cabinet X-61823E is required to mount the several types of voice and carrier equipment. At Office C it is anticipated that there may be requirements for further panel mounted equipment, so Apparatus Cabinet X-61823F has been indicated in preference to the smaller cabinet which would otherwise be adequate.
c_. Paragraph 927 illustrates the use of packaged equipment to provide one Type C system end one voice-frequency telephone circuit with intermediate repeaters on a single open-wire pair. Although the
requirements for voice-frequency ringers and repeaters are identical at Office A and Office C, ordering of different pack ages is indicated in order to illustrate the options which may be exercised in this connection. Office A is considered to be on the outer fringe of a communications network with little anticipated future growth. Hence, a single voicefrequency repeater package is used. The ringer requirements are met by providing only a two-circuit voice-frequency ringer, which together with the two-circuit ringer in the repeater package, meet the requirements. Office C, however, is assumed to be a larger office for which considerable growth is anticipated. In this case a three repeater package is provided although only one repeater is required for the layout shown. A four-circuit voice-frequency ringer package X-61820A is also used. The spare repeaters and ringers are available for use on other circuits.
d. Paragraph 928 shows the equipment layout for two open-wire pairs arranged to provide one Type 0 and one Type H carrier system and two voice-frequency circuits with terminal and intermediate repeaters. The three repeater voicefrequency repeater package X-61821K is used at each office instead of two single repeater packages. This provides one spare repeater at each location which may be used for a third voicefrequency circuit when required. At Office A two four-circuit voice-frequency ringer packages X-61820A are used, leaving three spare ringers for use on other circuits. At Office C only one four-circuit voice-frequency ringer package and one two-circuit package are used. The use of the two-circuit voice-frequency ringer package X-61820B in this case is a matter of judgment and is shown to indicate the possible variations in treatment. One spare ringer is available at Office C; therefore, one more voicefrequency circuit could be added between A and 0 without ordering additional equipment.
e. Illustrative problems in the ordering of complete communication systems are given in chapter 2.
09
Par. 926
926. H CARRIER PACKAGED EQUIPMENT ON A SINGLE OPEN WIRE PAIR, a. circuit Arrangement. OFFICE A OFFICE B OFFICE C
TO ------ 1000/20 ---- H CARR. -------- ---------------------------- I c „l-----.----- --------------------------- H CARR 1000/20 „
SWBD CYCLE *EST REP ------ EAST --------- CYCLE -------' T0
--------- RINGER ____ TERM __________ ________________________________ ------------ ------------------------------ TERM. -------- RINGER -------SWBD TO ------ 1000/20 ___JLINE TERM 8:1__________________________[________VT REP-------_________________________ IliNE TERM 8c I 1000/20
SWBD ------ CYCLE ------ COMPOSITE-------------------------------------COMPOSITE________________________________COMPOSITE CYCLE -1°
RINGER PAN. SETS PAN. ------ RINGER -------SWBD
TT srr ri; —j~r— --------
ex ex ex
TELEG. TELEG. TELEG.
LEGS LEGS LEGS
b. packaged Equipment.
APPARATUS CABINET APPARATUS CABINET APPARATUS CABINET
X-6I823F X-6I823D X-6I823F
(SPARE MTG (SPARE MTG (SPARE MTG
SPACE) SPACE) SPACE)
H CARR
-----------------------------------------------------------------REP PAN.------ .__________________1'|-------------------------------------------[X-662I7B------/|------------------------------------------------1 X
TO -----RINGER 2 fv.F.RINGER H CARR I ___ VF. RINGER^I -----
SWBD J«INGER_2_----PACKAGE LINE PAN.______ PACKAGE-----J5.'1G£5£_ ..1°
5WBD |^X-6I82OB X-662I7C------ X-6I820B J SWBD
RINGER I H CARR- RINGER I '
---- LINE PAN. _________
H CARR ---X-662I7C H CARR
TERM. PAN.-- ---—---- . -----TERM. PAN.
X-66217 A ------------ X-662I7A
H CARR VF -|-gL REP H CARR
□ LINE PAN.-- PACKAGE ----LINE PAN.---1
X-662I7C X-bl 8 21J X- 662I7C
LINE TERM.--- — -Jr— — — —I> ,--1 LIN E TERM.I-'
---| 8c CX PAN.----■ □______t= ft. cx PAN.-------- X-6I823C-----------1 I---1__fEP I I I-----X-6I823C
-----------1 I (SPARE) I । ' ____________ TO DC TO DC 1 OIIM, ro , 1 TO DC TO DC
TELEG TELEG I--------I TELEG TELEG.
REPS-. REPS. I (SPARE) 1 REPS. REPS.
I RlNG ER I_|
V F REP TEST TOOL SET FOR V.F.REP. TEST TOOL SET FOR V. F. REP TEST TOOL SET FOR
PACKAGE SMALL OFFICES PACKAGE SMALL OFFICES PACKAGE SMALL OFFICES
X-&I82IL X-66086 X-6I82IL X-66086 X-6I82IL X-66086
POWERSUPPLY TEL. UNIT POWERSUPPLY TEL. UNIT POWERSUPPLY TEL UNIT
EQUIP EE- 105 EQUIP [ EE-105 EQUIP EE-105
210
Par. 927
927. C CARRIER PACKAGED EQUIPMENT ON A SINGLE OPEN WIRE PAIR, a. circuit Arrangement. OFFICE A OFFICE C
--- 1000/20 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1000/20 -- Tn CYCLE ------CYCLE .JJin
SWBD' ___ RINGER CH 3________ CH 3______________________________________________________________________________________________ RINGER ___
CCARR C CARR
T-ur F_____ WEST _________ A EAST >
CARR TERM o TERM CARR
TELEG CH 2 WITH OFFICE B WITH TELEG
Verm composite composite ch 2 Ifrm
TERM < SETS sets J TERM.
1000/20 -------- REPCWTH ---------- 1000/20 --- _
SWBD- CYCLE COMPOSITE CYCLE SWBD
SWB° ____ RINGER CH I________ SETS CH I RINGER __5 8
j u II h II, ji, -----
CX TELEG LEGS CX TELEG. LEGS CX TELEG LEGS
TO 1000/20 —_____--------------------------------------------- 1000/20 ---
SWBD. CYCLE V.F. REP V.F RER V.F.REP CYCLE
____ RINGER ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ RINGER_____
b. packaged Equipment.
V.F. TEL REPEATER
V.F. TEL. REPEATER PACKAGE X-6I82IK
PACKAGE X-6I82IJ ---------
V.F. TEL. REPEATER | ' 1 rTpF 1
PACKAGE X-6I82IJ ------ I----------- I____1_|
________ |__R1P_ I F(SPARE') I _F 1 ______________ I (SPARE) I ' _RER2 '
'__REP.
/ । i । (spare) । i_£EZLJ
T0 I ------------------------1 RINGER 21 1 I ,______>
SWBD. ______________________ |-------1 __________ I BOX OF |
L APPARATUS CABINET -----] RINGER I I C CARR REP I p^RTS I V F RINGER
X-6I823D PACKAGE X-6I8I9 S L_"5J2.J PACKAGE X-61820A
(SPARE MTG ,------1
SPACE) C CARR WEST TERM U REP LINE' C CARR EAST TERM. J
PACKAGE X-6I8I9P I & POWER I PACKAGE X-6I8I9P-------- |--
/ ________ ________________________ CX 'bay I CX --------------- ; RINGER 4 I
(SPARE) | CH 3 j---, |----1____ | L--------------------------_l I ____| | ।----1 CH 3 I__To
Va^aSP - ^£EA? "£_! WEST I] TEErJ '____ | I j ______I TERM. L[ EAST L--EH2 I RINGER 3* SWS°'
PACKAGE -I TERM H LINE fc I cx TO DC „„ B.v | TO DC cx I LINE fc Fl TERM. I CHI F-----1
X-6I820B ----ELL_| bay I | POWER L_ F..1 TELEG. RER BAY TELEG. CX J POWER | | BAY ------- i___
[RINGER I l____] L_B.F_I I RER '_________J RER | I_____I [r!NGER_2I >
[box"6f1 to DC TBOX 0F 1 I [box’of] . (spare)”]
TO V.F. I SPARE I TELEG. I TO DC I SPARE | TO V.F, RINGER I
TO SWBD- ------ CARR I PARTS I REPS ^.PARTS^ TELEG. I PARTS | CARR- I----.J
TELEG. 1-----1 ------- REP 1-----1 TELEG. _______J
TERM. .. 1 ‘ ---------------- TERM.
V.F. RER TEST C CARR TESTING V.F. REP TEST C CARR TESTING V.F. REP TEST C CARR TESTING
PACKAGE EQUIP PACKAGE PACKAGE EQUIP. PACKAGE PACKAGE EQUIP. PACKAGE
X-6I82IL___ L X-6I8I9T_______ X-6I82IL___ X-6I8I9T__ |__ X-6I82IL X-6I8I9T
BAT 2 BA-8 TOOL SET FOR rattfpifs TOOL SET FOR BAT 2BA-6 TOOL SET FOR
10 BA-27 SMALL OFFICES X4 SMALL OFFICES 10 BA-27 SMALL OFFICES
6BA-34 X-660 86 _____ X-66086 6 B A - 34_ X-66086
POWER SUPPLY TEL. UNIT POWERSUPPLY TEL. UNIT POWERSUPPLY TEL. UNIT
EQUIP EE-105 EQUIP EE-105 EQUIP. EE -105
Par. 928
92 8. G AND H CARRIER PACKAGED EQUIPMENT ON T.YO OPEN WIRE PAIRS. a. Circuit Arrangement.
OFFICE A „ OFFICE B OFFICE C
/ _________ __________
1000/20 H CARR. ----- ------------ -------------------------- HCARR. ---- 1000/20 ---
CYCLE WEST H CARR' EAST CYCLE
RINGER TERM. ~| RER ~I i— TERM. ----- RINGER ---
• ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- 1000/20 --|VF; REPU--------------------------------------L|vr. RER U-----------------------------Llv.E REP ---|IOOO/2o|-- WITH---------------------------------------------------------WITH------------------------------------WITH---------iuuu/^u
CYCLE COMPOSITE COMPOSITE COMPOSITE CYCLE
--- RINGER --- SETS ------- ---------------------------- ----- SETS ------- ---------=---------- ----- SETS ------ RINGER ---
JTTT, ' T --------------
cx. ex. cx
TO _ TELEG. TELEG. TELEG. to
SWBD LEGS- LEGS. LEGS. -s™d
1000/20 '' ~ ----- ------------ —------------------- ----- ----------- 1000 /20--
CYCLE V.E REP V.E REP. V.F. REP. CYCLE
RINGER ------------------------------f- ---- RINGER ---
__________________ _______________________________________________ CX._______________C X
----------- p-LL TT _____________________________________________________ ---- 1000 /20-- LCCARR J L 1000 /20------- CYCLE CH3------composite______________________________________________CHi CYCLE
RINGER --- ----------------------------------------------- SETS ------- -------------------------- -----------RINGER ----
XTTTT/ -------
(___ CCARR_I CX. C CARR. \
WE5T TELEG. EAST -----
TO V.E TELEG. TERM-CH 2 '[ER^' LEGS. TERM CH2 - TO V.E. TELEG TERM
____ w 11 H _____ WITH \ COMPOSITE______COMPOSITE /
SETS SETS
T0 f---- 10 0 0 / 20- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 0 0 /20 -i
SWBD"] CYCLE CHI CH1 CYCLE - TO
I--- RINGER --- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RINGER____ SWBD
______ __________ /
12
Par. 929
21
OFFICE B OFFICE C
APPARATUS CABINET APPARATUS CABINET
OFFICE A X-6I823E X-6I823F
APPARATUS CABINET ---------- ----------------------------------------------
X-6I823D SPARE . SPARE
MOUNTING
----------- MOUNTING SPACE
S PAC E ---—---- X
S P A R E --------
MOUNTING H CARR. RINGER2 V.F. RINGER
SPACE RER PANEL —1 (SPARE)
X-662I7B ----' X—6I82.0B
---——--- RINGER SWBD.
HCARR -------- _______
-----TERM. H CARR.______H CARR. PANEL LINE________ TERM
X-662I7A PANEL------ ' PANEL
|X-662I7C| X-6 62I7A
H CARR. ________ I
----PANFl------- H CARR- H CARR. „---------------r LINE ---LINE---------
X-662I7C ----PANEL PANEL
_^_____| X-66217 C| X-662I7C|
V.E RINGER V.E TEL. REP V.ETEL.REP. V.F. TEL.REP.
PACKAGE X-6I820A PACKAGE X-6I82IK PAC K AGE X-61821 K PAC K AGE X-61821 K
/ ' ~I [TsPARE)~| FTsPARE) I F(SPARE)_|
<---1 I___ I I vorMHc; UHAKE) V.F. RINGER
!?IN_GER4_| I RER3__j REPS । I RER 3 1 PAC K AGE X-618 20 A
— j — __zz _ _ ----- — | | .
"RIIICEA ) L5SS?___H CK I I CM ~ -d___RER? !-----' '-1 V* ij RER?[ I
---------------L_________l L________________ | I----------------------1___________________________________L F--L TO । RINGER 2 |_________L. 3AU___।__________TO DC.---------------------RER 1 _J-----TO DC. “|_REP.I^ I F Tn
SWBD I---------- TELEG. REPS. -------------------------------------------------- TELEG. REPS. ,, --------1 IRINGER3J TO
i I I-------1 TO DC. I-------1 TO DC I---------. r- I SWBD
Printer I I BOX 0F TELEG.REP BOX OF TELEG REPS BOX OF ----- ------------
LRINGERjJ SPARE I I SPARE | TELEG. REPS ( SPARE I RINGER 2 I
---------- I PARTS I | PARTS | PARTS---L5.1 N?ER 2_| V.E RINGER-----------------' 1-------1 1 1 _
PACKAGE X-6I820A C CARR REP ----------- T [RINGER Ij '
- - . C CARR. WEST TERM. PACK AGE X-61819S C CARR. EAST TE RM. -----------
___| |_ PACKAGE X-6I8I9 R ---- PACKAGE X-6I8I9P k 1RINGER4I CH3I 1 I-----------1 IRES LINE |_ .-----=“ ,------1 Lu,
(SPAReTI--------1 I WEST I---------- I----------CX~ ~l & POWER I -----east I CH3]
CH2 , WEST I TERM__________________I I I BAY J--------, I TERM I | EAST I CH2
(RINGER 3 roTT1 H L1NE!k I P---------------------------------------LINE 8c 1“| TERM |-------- TO V.F. CARR.
I^eT BAY I POWER------- I Prep BAY i J POWER I 1 BAY ^CHI_J TELEG TERM
! I j | BAY | I TO DC. | REP BAY TO DC. I BAY I .
|_RINGER2] TO V.F. _____ TO DC. TELEG. TELEG. I —---------1-------1
| (SPARE) I CARR. H30X OF] TELEGA REPS ^80X^0^”' REPS' TO DC FboxUifI
TELEG. SPARE REPS. I SPARE । TELEG. ’ SPARE
I RINGER I | TERM. |_RARTSj |_PARTS | REP. j p^RTS I
V.F. REP TEST. CCARR. TEST. EQPT y p RER TEST. C CARR. TEST. EQPT. TOOL SET FOR q CARR TEST. EQPT.
PACKAGE X-6I82IL PACKAGE X-6I8I9T PACKAGE X-6I82IL PACKAGE X-6I8I9T SMA x-6>6086’S PACKAGE X-6I8I9T.
TOOL SET FOR BATTERIES 2 BA-8 I TOOL SET FOR POWER SUPPl V Tn HWIT POWFR FlIPP, y
SMALL OFFICES 10 BA-27 SMALL OFFICES POWER SUPPLY TEL.UNIT POWERSUPPLY
X-6 608 6 6 BA-34_____ X-66086 EQPT. EE-105 EQPT
POWER SUPPLY TEL. UNIT TEL.UNIT BATTERIES V.E RER TEST BATTERIES 2 BA-8
EQPT. EE-105 EE -105 6 BA-34 PA CK AGE X-61821 L 10 BA-27
_______________ ___________________ _______________________________ __________________ ________________________________ 6 BA- 34
b_. Packaged Equipment.
Par. 1001-1005
CHAPTER 10
TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT
Section I General
1001. INTRODUCTION.
a. The telegraph equipment referred to in this chapter includes tactical and fixed plant equipment for operation on wire circuits and on radio links in combination with other communication equipments. Telegraph equipment includes carrier terminal equipment, d-c equipment, teletypewriter equipment and radioteletype terminal equipment.
b. Composite sets and simplex coils for deriving d-c telegraph circuits are included in the telephone line transmission equipment covered in chapter 9.
c. Section II covers tactical equipment and section III covers fixed plant equipment. In addition to descriptive matter, stock numbers and logistical data these two sections also give illustrations of the use of the various tactical and fixed plant telegraph equipments. The same test sets, tool equipment and teletypewriter supplies are used with both tactical and fixed plant equipment. Test packages are furnished with fixed plant packaged equipments. These items are covered in section IV and in chapter 13.
d. Information on the engineering of systems employing telegraph equipment may be obtained from "Electrical Communi-cation Systems Engineering - General Information" TM 11-486. More detailed information regarding particular types of equipment can be obtained from "Application of Fixed Plant Telephone and Telegraph Packaged Equipment to Open Wire Lines" TM 11-2022 and to Technical Manuals, Instruction Books or Instruction Manuals covering the individual equipments. Technical Manuals are issued by the War Department. Instruction Bocks (X-numbers) are prepared by the Western Electric Co. Instruction Manuals are prepared by Teletype Corporation.
e. In many cases tactical and fixed plant equipment may be employed in the same system. A problem illustrating the interoperation of tactical and fixed plant wire telegraph equipment is given in chapter 2.
f. As a rule tactical teletypewriter equipments are not supplied with line relays whereas fixed plant teletypewriter equipment are supplied with line relays.
Section II
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Tactical Equipment
1002. GENERAL.
a. The outstanding feature of tacti-
cal telegraph and teletypewriter equipment is that connections are established in the field by use of cords, plugs, and binding posts without the need for soldered connections. Furthermore, controls for obtaining the required operating options and means for measuring voltage and currents are conveniently located on exterior panels.
b. The tactical carrier telegraph terminal equipment is designed to employ one of the channels made available by the carrier telephone tactical equipment.
c. Teletypewriter sets are issued in all cases with a line unit, rectifier and teletypewriter, and some sets are issued with a gasoline engine power unit in addition. Repeater set nomenclature applies to a terminal or an intermediate d-c telegraph repeater and the sets are issued without a teletypewriter or a power unit. Telegraph sets are manual Morse sets and are issued without ground rods, line or local batteries.
1003. DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION.
a• For convenience in presenting this information the tactical telegraph equipment has been divided into three categories namely, d-c wire equipment, carrier equipment, and teletypewriter equipment.
b. The d-c telegraph repeaters were designed especially for operation on long field wire circuits. They are, however, equally adaptable to composited open wire and cable lines. The terminal repeaters are suitable for interoperation with British terminal equipment.
c. Descriptions of the various items of equipment are given in paragraphs 1006, 1007 and 1008 and the component parts of sets are given in paragraph
1004. STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.——————-
Paragraphs 1010 and 1011 give stock numbers, weights and volumes of the various telegraph and teletypewriter equipments and sets.
1005. ILLUSTRATIONS. Paragraphs 1012 to 1015 inclusive give illustrations of the use of tactical telegraph equipment on point to point circuits employing neutral, polarential and two path polar methods of line transmission. Paragraphs 1016 and 1017 illustrate the use of these equipments in teletypewriter switching networks and paragraphs 1018 and 1019 illustrate their use with d-c loops to carrier telegraph terminals.
215
Par. 1006
216
IQUu. D-C WIRE TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION.
Approx.
, . Size in
_____nomenclature___ Fig. Carrying Case or Chest. Oper. Approx. Power Name________ Type No, No, Weight and Dimensions (In.)a Input Req. b Tech, Man,__________________________________Remarks____________________________
Switchboard BD-100 1004 225 lbs. incl. chest CH-70 16x 150 71. at 115V TM 11-358 Ten-line telegraph switchboard for interconnecting teletypewriter station
for running spares, tools 16x d-c lines and trunk circuits. Line transmission is neutral. Connections
and accessories. Swbd. 52 established by patching cords. Conference connections may be established,
transported in iron frame- Operator uses Teletypewriter TG-7-( ). Contains bias measuring circuit
work which forms a stand for use in adjusting the mechanically "biased'' neutral line relays. Three
when in service. Chest boards (lines not multipled) may be operated as a single installation and
CH-70 is 21-l/2"xl2-l/2" by improvised field arrangements more than three have been operated to-
x 7" and 40 lbs. packed. gether. D-c power for lines, trunks and local circuits obtained from
Swbd. in field use is 16" Rectifier RA-43-A. Part of Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3.
xl6"x26" and 180 lbs. x .
Line Unit BE-77 - 25 lbs. in Chest CH-53 6x8x6 .060 amp. at TM 11-359 To connect neutral circuit to a teletypewriter. Includes line relay,
with accessories, running 115 V. d-c 7 W. and line current rheostat and meter. Line relay is adjusted mechanically to
spares and titpwr.supplies. (tltpwr.magnet) TM 11-354 compensate for bias of incoming line signals. Bias Meter I-97-A used in
Chest CH-53 is 11-1/2" x making adjustment. Part of Teletypewriter Sets EE-97 and EE-98.
19" x 10-1/2".
nine Unit BE-77-A 1001 28 lbs. in Chest CH-53-A 6x8x6 .060 amp. at IM 11-359 Same as Line Unit BE-77 except that the bias measuring feature is in-
or with accessories, running 115 V. d-c 7 W. eluded in the unit and separate bias meter is not required. Part of
BE-77-B spares and tltpwr.supplies. (tltpwr.magnet) Teletypewriter Sets EE-97-A, EE-98-A, EE-102 and Reperforator Teletype-
Chest CH-53-A is 11-1/2" writer Sets TC-16 and TC-17. Line Unit BE-77-B same as BE-77-A except
x 19" x 10-1/2". for a minor apparatus difference.
Repeater TC-30 1002 130 lbs. in carrying case. 25x 100 V.A. at TM 11-2004 D-c telegraph terminal-type repeater used for making connections from
(Terminal) Cover opened for service 15x 115 V. or 230 V. two-path polar or polarential line circuits to neutral type local cir—
and repeater not removed 16 50/60 eye. a-c. cults such as used in teletypewriters, Switchboard BD-100, Line Unit
from case. Case is 25" 50 W. at 115 V. BE-77-A and to Telegraph Terminal CF-2-( ) when long polarential circuits
xl6"xl4-l/2". Running d-c. D-c power are employed. Contains built-in rectifier for operation on 115 or 230
spares supplied in case. source must be volts a-c and also contains a built-in manual telegraph set. Is supplied
non-grounded. with a 115 volt power receptacle for supplying teletypewriter motor. Test
Set I-193-A is used for testing and adjusting the polar relays. Part of
Repeater Set TC-18 (Terminal).
Repeater TG-31 1003 120 lbs. in carrying case. 25x 95 V.A. at TM 11-2005 D-c telegraph intermediate-type repeater for retransmitting signals from
(Intermediate) Cover opened for service 15x 115 V. or 230 V. one polarential line section to another polarential line section (differ-
and repeater not removed 16 50/60 eye. a-c. ential sending only.) Does not retime or reform signals. Will operate
from case. Case dimensions 25 W. on 115 V. unattended on dry cell or storage battery supply when a teletypewriter is
25" x 16" x 14-1/2". Runn- d-c. 3 new Bat. not required. Provides operation with a local teletypewriter when power
ing spares supplied in case. BA-26 (115 V.) supply is 115 or 230 volts a-c or 115 volts d-c gas engine power unit.
will last about Has built-in rectifier for a-c operation and also contains a built-in
4 days at normal manual telegraph set. Test Set I-193-A used for testing and adjusting
temp. On 12 V. the polar relays. Part of Repeater Set TC-19 (Intermediate).
stor. bat. (one
BB-46 or two
BB-55) drain is
2 amp.
Par. 1006
217
Approx.
Size in
----Nomenclature_____ Fig. Carrying Case or Chest. Oper. Approx. Power ----Name---- Type No, No^_ Weight and Dimensions (In.)a Input Req, b Tech. Man, ____________________________________Remark*____________________________ Telegraph Set TG-5-A - 7 lbs. with b^teries and 8x7x5 1 Bat. BA-2 TM 11-351 Manual telegraph set consisting of telegraph key, line relay, oscilla-
. Of 2 Bat’ 3/1-30 tor (howler) and telephone headset. Is equipped with a "call" bell.
ad3ustable When headset is connected, the oscillator provides a tone in the tele-
snoulder strap. phone receiver of about 1000 cycles which is under control of Tin* re-
lay. Line relay operates on about 1.5 mill1amperes and has air-gap and spring-tension adjustment. Ground rods and batteries are not furnished with set.
Telegraph Set TG-5-B 1005 8-3/4 lbs. with bat. and 8x7x5 1 Bat. BA-2 IM 11-351 Same as Telegraph Set TG-5-A except box is steel instead of aluminum
7? Oas® .7“°? r? and line relay is more sensitive (0.2 milliampere minimum operating
8-X6-X10" with adjustable current). Line relay has spring tension adjustment only,
shoulder strap. J
a Jhenf^ui™Zntd^ThSr°nS+reP^eSent Mnimunl.f loor requirements. b GaaoUne engine power rectifiers used with tactical
When equipment with front and rear covers is set up for service, it equipment will be found in Chapter 12.
should be placed three or four feet from a wall to permit removing the rear cover for maintenance.
LINE BINDING POST
VOLTS-MA-BIAS KEY F
TELETYPEWRITER SEND "I I p BINDING POST
AND REC JACKS 1 I 1 dinuinu POST
------ I T BLOWN FUSE
W INDICATOR
- Wfi
FUSEMETER
Hl' ’, . LINE
kk r a RHEOSTAT
[-POWER 'X.-'J
CORD
FIGURE lOOlv Line Unit BE-77-A or BE-77-B
Par. 1006
218
POCKET FOR
OPERATING TECHNICAL
INSTRUCTIONS -q POCKET FOR MANUALS •---
TECHNICAL OPERATING
MANUALS --1 INSTRUCTIONS--
'fe*'- 3 'fit
KPiL jHRwri spare lamps /.'/? sIHnE!
SPARE LAMPS «F// AND FUSES K
AND FUSES--Sp// ImWIw.# iff IJ MHI
£:/ SKSIO ' H'ff IWW-
Jwyf/ fl» • & ■
HANDLES <&fe/ < . REMOVING
^mcar^ng At '• ■ ^Ka gnn^r.A^ r ^BflF
CASE ----—---CARRYING CASE---------------------------------------------------< IT-
—POWER
v^rw- power ft/
CORD 'Wf/CF1'
'Ms
W Wf
PLYWOOD F PLYWOOD A ||F
CARRYING CASE —1 “Y CARRYING |gf
- CASE-----1 r
FIGURE 1002. Repeater TG-30 (Terminal) FIGURE 1003. Repeater TG-31 (Intermediate)
Par. 1006
1 INF RFi ayc;-. r CINE CURRENT, VOLTAGE AND
LINE RELAYS*] BIAS METER
LINE RHEOSTATS
--LINE OPEN KEYS
--ANSWER KEYS
patching jacks UNE LAMPS
JMMWMHi —METER KEY JilWr
NIGHT ALARM
key ——dB0 /
WMM3g.ggss^yrg U—line current keys line k
LOWER PATCHING gM BATTERY—~/x CIRCUIT
JACKS SbIIK^HMkE-------LOCAL BIAS JACKS RELAY—DIAGRAM
- HEADSET
MF JFffiF receptacle
MS---- LINE BATTERY BELL--
SWITCHES BINDING POSTS
---BLOWN FUSE INDICATORS .Mt.----------------------INTERRUPTER fuses key—Headset plug
patch I ^MMs j> S f »
CORDS ---||&> x •<
III A PK^wI lai Plf HEADSET f
|m H|ha If RECEIVER f
FIGURE 1005. Telegraph Set TG-5-B
^^^wj®^1****’*
FIGURE 1004. Switchboard BD-100
219
Par. 1007
1007. CARRIER TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION.
Technical Manual
Nomenclature_____ Shown in Carrying Case or Chest. Dimensions in Approximate Power Instruction Book
Name Type No, Figure No. Weight and Dimensions Operation (inches)3 Input Requirementsb Instruction Manual __________________________Remarks________________
Telegraph CF-2-A 1006 530 lbs. per bay. (Bay 1) 27-1/2x19x66 (Bay 1) 250 V.A. at 115/230 TM 11-355 Voice frequency carrier telegraph
Terminal in case gt6" x 27-1/2" x Bay 2 is the same volts 50/60 cycles terminal providing four 2-way tele-
19". Bay 2 has same di- size. (Bay 1). Same for graph circuits. Two bays (2 circuits
mensions and weight as Say 2. per bay) required for four circuits.
Bay 1. Furnished with Each bay contains rectifiers to supfront and rear covers. ply d—c for operation of the d-c
Front cover removed for loop circuits and local circuits in
service. Each bay sup- the bay. Each bay contains a relay
plied with running test circuit. Frequency range is
spares and polar relay S00 to 2050 cycles. The d—c loops
adjusting tools. provide for neutral (half & full
duplex) and polarential and polar circuits. For operation with Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ). Part of Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( ).
Telegraph CF—2-B 1007 575 lbs. in case 5’6" x 27-1/2x19x66 325 V.A. at 115/230 IM 11-355-B Voice frequency carrier telegraph
Terminal 27-1/2" x 19". Furnished volts 50/60 cycles terminal with four circuits in one
with front and rear covers. bay and essentially the electrical
Front cover is removed for equivalent of Telegraph Terminal
service. Case is supplied CF-2-A. Part of Telegraph Terminal
with running spares and polar TC-22-( ).
relay adjusting tools.
Telegraph CF-6-( ) 1008 400 lbs. in case 4’2" x 24x17x50 175 V.A. at 115/230 X-66616 Voice frequency carrier telegraph
Terminal 24" x 17". Supplied with volts 50/60 cycles terminal containing two circuits for
front and rear covers. use primarily in combination with
Front cover is removed for Telegraph Terminals CF-2-A or CF-2-B
service. Case is supplied to provide Channels 5 and 6. The
with running spares and polar d-c loop circuits are like those in
relay adjusting tools. Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B. When
used with CF-2-A or CF-2-B equipment, frequency range is 340 to 2400 cycles.
Case is supplied with rectifiers and relay test circuit.
Telegraph TH-l/TCC-1 - - - _ Known as S+DX. See paragraph 1025.
Terminal
a The first two dimensions represent minimum floor space requirements.
Additional space will be required. When equipment with front and rear covers is set up for service, it should be placed three or four feet from a wall to permit removing the rear cover for maintenance.
A-c power for operating rectifiers obtained from power unit supplied with Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( ).
220
Par. 1007
700898 O—4i
16
221
binding POSTS JI SPARE VACUUM
tubes K -SsKSwC * 8 ■ uets
POLAR RELAY TEST . BY *•*,’. „ 99 FILTER AND instbayt.al -f^SHBBBHMBBSMMBLMr’ «Xah relay
INSTRUCTIONS |WW «* ) II TEST PANEL instructor book j. test TOOLS
channfi SUMMARY OF M ‘ fi B • 1 MM fH
teSmi^al INSTRUCTIONS ■* ag WWwW IsS-hlttrano
CHANI0R3 SCREWDRIVER Si 8| polar belay tlm_ .M^^B .gig teg ,gg test panel
M g INSTRUCTIONS WB, . | gMB
Sj LOOP CONTROL
CHAN FREO S' I I | | W PANEL SUMMARY OF __ SSSS
OSCILLATOR Kj XsTRUCTlONS -- Sts
CHAN I OR 3 IK • ♦ • . V . INSTRUCTIONS
3g ■ , ,3j
test panel POLAR RELAY _ gg / / / / < =ST~~-----------ST— EM
TEST TOOLS igiL * * . ■* ’ « A “Bl
LINE COIL MM a _ ~ •”—I W 8 * » “ * EfiB
ANO FUSES gF^ • . • • * . RECEIVER PANEL I____J.-SLw- ■ ‘ <» e *f ^HK
I I ' OSCILLATOR PANEL \ ,J|
~ ** !: t BSS-
CHAN. FREQ. .syt > : I IlMB :^9,Z2A-T
OSCILLATOR |SI ' _____ » « K iMM RECTIFIER
CHAN 2 OR 4 IBS * _ SPARE FUSES £391
|SI I REGULATED TUBE ----— — RbMS
IM I -••■ --I RECTIFIER ‘130 V H i 'f ''SHMM' fuse wnel
fegulateo -jM ___2 r & a£ J :« : 2 L sj^Sel.
LIM 1 - T*'1 ■ * * Il ffiy ^Ln^NEL6
RECTIFIER *-"7*1 I J i •• * J J FUSF PANFl flH I KHK
♦ i3ov. |u hanll —।-----------------j i »■
. SPARE POLAR RELAYS ■■ fc»
SPARE POLAR "Emulated RELAYS ~ REGULATED TUBE H . 3 » lV
%^'?WS''i^ SEND CORD CARRYING 7 : SW
REC CORD CASE P W
^~*X ‘-''^^M - POWER CORD J COVER ' g jr
/jO'^ installation tape compartment .
SHBET ___J . '^WSB
[instruction
MANUAL
FIGURE 1009. Teletypewriter TG-7-A tptcttdt? i m n n m
FIGURE 1010. Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-( )
par. 1009
1009. TELETYPEWRITER SETS - TACTICAL - COMPONENT PARTS.
Weight in
______Nomenclature_______ Operation ______Name______ Type No, Quantity ____________________Major Components___________ Dimensions (inches)a (pounds)b Telegraph Central TC-3___1 Switchboard BD-100. (no chest required)________________16 x 16 x 26 180
Office Set Chest CH-70 (tools and running spares only) 21-1/2 x 12-1/2 x 7 45
1 Teletypewriter TG-7-Ac (in two chests)
Shown in Fig. 1011 Chest CH-50-A . , 20 x 25 x 19 138
Chest CH-62-A 18-1/2 x 20-1/2 x 16-1/2 87
Chest CH-53 (running spares and supplies) 11-1/2 x 19 x 10-1/2 34
1 Rectifier RA-43-B
Case CS-82-A 30 x 16 x 19 190
1 Power Unit PE-75-D (on skids) 36 x 19 x 26 325
2 Ground Rod GP-29^ 1-1/4 diam. x 36 long 16
Total 31 cu. ft. 1015
Reperforator TC-16 1 Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-( ) 25 x 33 x 19 225
Teletypewriter Set (complete in chest)
1 Rectifier RA-87
Chest CH-158 12-1/2 x 18-1/2 x 10-1/2 59
1 Line Unit BE-77-A
Chest CH-53-A (with running spares and supplies) 11-1/2 x 19 x 10-1/2 31
2 Ground Rod GP-29<1 1-1/4 diam. x 36 long _16
Total 12 cu. ft. 331
Reperforator TC-17 Same as Reperforator Teletypewriter Set TC-16
Teletypewriter Set except that Reperforator Transmitter TG-27-( )e
is substituted for Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-( ) Total 12 cu. ft. 331
Repeater Set TC-18 1 Repeater TG-30
(Terminal) (Complete in carrying case) 25 x 14-1/2 x 16 130
2 Ground Rod GP-29^ 1-1/4 diam. x 36 long 16
Total 3-1/2 cu. ft. 146
Repeater Set TC-19 1 Repeater TG-31
(Intermediate) (Complete in carrying case) 25 x 14-1/2 x 16 120
2 Ground Rod GP-29d 1-1/4 diam. x 36 long 16
Total 3-1/2 cu. ft. 136
The first two figures are minimum floor dimensions. When arrang- Teletypewriter TG-7-B in Chest CH-50-B or F and Chest CH-62-B or
ing a set for service provide adequate space (3 or 4 feet front F may be issued in place of Teletypewriter TG-7-A.
and rear) for operation and maintenance. d .
Ground Rod MX-148/G, 6 ft. long, 3/4 in. diam., weight 10 pounds
b Total "weight-in-operation" includes carrying case or chests, W be substituted.
running spares, accessories and equipment unit supplied therein. eReperforator Transmitter TG-26-( ) except typing reperforator
equipped with "weather" communications keyboard and type-bar symbols.
224
Par. 1009
Weight in
------ Nomenclature______ Operation ------N^m®_____ Type No. Quantity _____________________Major Components__________Dimensions (inches)a (pounds)b Telegraph Terminal TC-2S-( ) 1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-A______________________27-1/2 x 19 x 66 (Bay 1) 530
Set (Carrier) 27-1/2 x 19 x 66 (Bay 2) 550
or
1 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B 27-1/2 x 19 x 66 575
2 Ground Rod, Hubbard No. 9566 or equal 1/2 diam., 72 long 10
2 Ground Rod Clamp, Reliable No. S-58 or equal
2 Clamp TM-106
1 Maintenance Equipment ME-75C (3-1/2 cu. ft.) 50
Wire W-2 2
Wire W-69-A, 150 feet 5
„ . 45 cu. ft. (CF-2-A) 1127
25 cu. ft. (CF-2-B) 642
Teletypewriter Set EE-97 1 Teletypewriter TG-7-A (in two chests)
Chest CH-50-A 20 x 25 x 19 138
Chest CH-62-A 18-1/2 x 20-1/2 x 16-1/2 87
1 Rectifier RA-37
Chest CH-51 12-1/2 x 16-1/4 x 9-3/4 40
1 Line Unit BE-77
Chest CH-53 (with running spares, supplies and 11-1/2 x 19 x 10-1/2 32
Bias Meter I-97-A in CS-49-A)
2 Ground Rod GP-29d 1-1/4 diam. x 36 long 16
1 Power Unit PE-77- (A through E) 17 x 21-1/2 c 22 127
Total 16-1/2 cu. ft. 440
Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A 1 Teletypewriter TG-7-B (in two chests) 1
Chest CH-50-B or F 20 x 25 x 19 138
Shown in Fig. 1012 Chest CH-62-B or F 18-1/2 x 20-1/2 x 16-1/2 87
1 Rectifier RA-87
Chest CH-158 12-1/2 x 18-1/2 x 10-1/2 59
1 Line Unit BE-77-A
Chest CH-53-A (with running spares and supplies) 11-1/2 x 19 x 10-1/2 28
2 Ground Rod GP-29d 1-1/4 diam, x 36 long 16
1 Power Unit PE-77 (A through E) 17 x 21-1/2 x 22 127
Total 16-3/4 cu. ft. 455
a The first two figures are minimum floor dimensions. When arrang- c Spare parts in this list may be supplied through organiza-
ing a set for service provide adequate space (3 or 4 feet front tional maintenance.
and rear) for operation and maintenance.
b Total "weight-in-operation" includes carrying case or chests, Ground Rod MX-148/G, 6 ft. long, 3/4 in. diam., weight 10
running spares, accessories and equipment unit supplied therein, pounds may be substituted.
Table continued on next page
225
226
Par. 1009
TELETYPEWRITER SETS - TACTICAL - COMPONENT PARTS (Continued)
Weight in
_____Nomenclature----- Operation _____Name____ Type No. Quantity Major Components_____________________ Dimensions (inches)a (pounds)** Teletypewriter Set EE-98-Same as Teletypewriter Set EE-97 except pows:. unit
is omitted Total 12 cu. ft. 313
Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A Same as Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A except power Total 12-1/4 cu. ft. 328
unit is omitted
Teletypewriter Set EE-102 Same as Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A except Teletype-
writer TG-37-Bc is issued in place of TG-7-B and
power unit is omitted Total 12-1/4 cu. ft. 328
a b
The first two figures are minimum floor dimensions. When arrang- Total "weight-in-operation" includes carrying case or chests,
ing a set for service provide adequate space (3 or 4 feet front running spares, accessories and equipment unit supplied
and rear) for operation and maitenance. therein.
c Teletypewriter TG-7-B except equipped with "weather" can-munications keyboard and type-bar symbols.
CHEST CH-62-A
___ I RECTIFIER RA-87 a CHEST CH-158 - CHEST CH-70 CHEST CH-53-A BASE OF PRINTER TG-7-Ba CHEST CH-50-F
I ________ LINE UNIT BE-77-At CHEST CH-53-A-. ^GROUND RODS GP-29
SWITCHBOARD | PRINTER TG-7-B CHEST CH-62-F—
BD-100 1 POWER UNIT PE-77-D
I * I
L .I k k XX
.... _....1
Ws L......
J I* J-1"’ F’Jr V • A J. H ilwi ,
gawfl W1 jaW
Sk.|! - - HMho.ffW ।—• —’■..i g ■.
■ CHEST CH-50-A BIB
^wail jRSyj'lOl ground rods gp-29 'I =1 w 9
7^ . >^T v t k
case power unit -J w /
CS-82 -A PE-75-D „
FIGURE 1011, Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3 FIGURE 1012. Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A
Par. 1010
1010• TELEGRAPH AND TELETYPEWRITER EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL - STOCK NIPfflERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. .. , x Total Weight (pounds) Total Displacement (cu.ft.)
------------ —Nomenclature------------- Packed for In Chest or Packed for In Chest or ------------Name----------- Type No. _- Stock No._____ Export Carrying Case Export ■ Carrying Case Ship Tonsa Switchboard-BD-100-----------------4A2560_____________375 225 10 50 0 3b
Unit BE-77 4T103554 40 25 2.9 1*35 0*lc
Line Unit BE-77-A 4T103554A 40 28 2^9 1*35 0*ld
Repeater (Terminal) TG-30 4A2830.1 170 130 6.*5 3*4 0*2
Repeater (Intermediate) TG-31 4A2131 160 120 6*5 3*4 0'9
Telegraph Set TG-5-A 4A2805A 9-1/4 7e 0^36 0^18 - "
Telegraph Set TG-5-B 4A2805B 11-1/4 8-3/4e 0.36 0.18
Telegraph Terminal (Carrier) CF-2-A 4A2892A 1460 1060 84 40* 21
Telegraph Teminal (Carrier) CF-2-B 4A2892B 760 575 42 20 1J.
Telegraph Terminal (Carrier) CF-6-( ) None assigned 520 400 27 12 0*7
Teletypewriter TG-7-A 4T2.13A-1 400 225 27 87 0*7
Teletypewriter TG-7-B 4T2.28A-1 400 225 27 8.*7 0.*7
Teletypewriter TG-37-B 4T2.23A-1 400 225 27 8 7 0 7
Reperforator Transmitter TG-26-( ) 4T12.1A-1 370 225 22 9^2 0*5
Reperforator Transmitter TG-27-( ) 4T12.2A-1 370 225 22 9*2 0*5
Perforator Set TG-11 4T8.3A-1 200 - 17 - 0*4
Perforator Transmitter Set TC-23 4T6.6A-1 325 - 23 - 0*6
Reperforator Transmitter Set TG-25 4T7.2-1 355 - 25 - 0*6
Ground Rod GP-16 5B4416 16" long, weight 2 pounds. Used with Telegraph Sets TG-5-A and TG-5-B
uround Rod GP-29 3Z3329 3’ long, 1-1/4" diam., weight 8 pounds
Ground Rod EX-148/G 3Z3330-148 6' long, 3/4" diam., weight 10 pounds
Ground Rod Hubbard 3Z3332 6' long, 1/2” diam., weight 5 pounds
No. 9566
a A "ship ton" equals 40 cubic feet.
Includes Chest GH-70 with tools and rnnning spare parts, c
Includes Chest CH-53 with running spare parts and supplies.
Includes Chest CH-53-A with running spare parts and supplies.
Line Unit BE-77-B also supplied in Chest CH-53-A and weight
and displacement is the same as for Line Unit BE-77-A.
0 Includes one Battery BA-2 and two Batteries BA-30.
227
Par. 1011
228
1011. TELEGRAPH AND TELETYPEWRITER SETS - TACTICAL - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Weight (pounds) Total Weight Total
of Heaviest (pounds) Displacement
Package in Sgt ., of Set (cu.ft.) of Set
Packed Packed Packed
-----Nomenclature______ Additional Equipment for In Cases for In Cases for In Cases -----Name______ Type No. Stock No, ____Required5____ Export or Chests Export or Chests Export or Chests Ship Tonsb Telegraph Central TC-3 4A2788__________400 215 1365 1015 62 31 1 6
Office Set
Reperforator TC-16 4TTC16 Teletypewriter TG-7-Bc 370 225 587 331 33 15 0.8
Teletypewriter Set when page copies are
required.
Power Unit PE-77-
(A through E)d Reperforator TC-17 4TTC17 Teletypewriter TG-37-B 370 225 587 331 33 15 0.8
Teletypewriter Set (weather keyboard) when
page copies are required.
Power Unit PE-77- (A
through E)d Repeater Set TC-18 4A2118 Teletypewriter TG-7-Bc 170 130 195 146 6.5 3.4 0.2
(Terminal) or TG-37-B (weather key-
board) .
Power Unit PE-77- (A
through E)d Repeater Set TC-19 4A2119 Teletypewriter TG-7-Bc 160 120 185 136 6.5 3.4 0.2
(Intermediate) or TG-37-B (weather key-
board)
Power Unit PE-77- (A
through E)d or three
Battery BA-26 or two
Battery BB-55 or one
Battery BB-46e heights and displacements do not include additional d When suitable a-c or d-c power source not avail ship,
equipment required, b e Batteries may be used for unattended service
b A "ship-ton- is equal to 40 cu. ft. (no teletypeLlter).
c Teletypewriter TG-7-A may be issued in place of
Teletypewriter TG-7-B.
Par.
1011
229
Weight (pounds) Total Weight Total
of Heaviest (pounds) Displacement
Package in Set of Set (cu.ft.) of Set_
„ , x Packed Packed Packed
------—Nunciature __ Additional Equipment for In Cases for In Cases for In Cases ------LSSe--------- Type No. Stock No^ Required5_______ Export or Chests Export or Chests Export or Chests Ship Tonsb Telegraph Terminal-TC-22-( )4A2822AC Power Supply*_____730 530 1540 1130 85 45 2 2
Set (Carrier)
Telegraph Terminal TC-22-( ) 4A2822B Power Supply* 760 560 840 640 43 25 1 1
Set (Carrier)
Teletypewriter Set EE-97 4TEE97 400 225 685 440 38 16-1/2 1
Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A 4TEE97A 400 225 700 455 38 16-3/4 1
Teletypewriter Set EE—98 4TEE98 Power Unit PE-77-( ) 4qq 226 547 313 32 12 0 8
Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A 4TEE98A Power Unit PE-77-( )® 400 225 562 328 32 12-1/4 0.8
Teletypewriter Set EE-102 4TEE102 Power Unit PE-77- ( )e 400 225 562 328 32 12-1/4 0.8
a
Weights and displacements do not include additional equipment required, b
A "ship-ton" is equal to 40 cu. ft. c
Suffix letters A and B indicate Telegraph Teminals CF-2-A and CF-2-B respectively, d
Suitable 115/230 volt 50/60 cycle power supply.
0 When suitable a-c or d-c power source not available.
Par. 1012-1014
1012. POINT-TO-POINT TELETYPEWRITER CIRCUIT (NEUTRAL LINE TRANSMISSION) -TACTICAL~EQUIPMENT. paragraph 1015 Illustrates a typical teletypewriter circuit between Station A and Station B using the neutral method of line transmission. Since a neutral line is employed a line unit is interposed between the line and the teletypewriter. Both stations are shown using Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A which is complete with line unit, teletypewriter, rectifier, gas engine power unit, ground rods, running spare parts and sufficient supplies for the teletypewriter for initial service.
Power for operating the equipment may be obtained either from the power unit or from the rectifier and a suitable a-c supply. From a transmission standpoint, Teletypewriter Sets EE-97, EE-9S, EE-98-A, or EE-102 (weather) might be substituted. The EE-98, EE-98-A and EE-102 are not issued with a power unit, and Power Unit PE-77-(A thru E) must be ordered unless a source of power is available. The component parts of these teletypewriter sets will be found in ’paragraph 1009. The line circuit may be simplexed for simultaneous telephone and telegraph service.
1013. DIAGRAM OF A POINT TO POINT TACTICAL TELETYPEWRITER CIRCUIT (NEUTRAL LINE TRANSMISSION)"
1014. POINT-TO-POINT TELETYPEWRITER CIRCUIT (POLARENTIAL AND 2 PATH POLAR LINE TRANSMISSION) - TACTICAL EQUIPMENT." Paragraph 1015 illustrates a typical teletypewriter circuit using the polarential or two-path polar methods of line transmission between two terminals, Station A and Station C with an intermediate Station B (polarential only). A repeater is required to connect a polarential or two-path polar line to a teletypewriter. Both terminal points are shown using Repeater Set TC-ia with which the teletypewriter must be
ordered separately. An a-c supply of power for operating the repeaters and teletypewriter may be used directly as Repeater TG-30 and Repeater TG-31 include a rectifier. Power Unit PE-77-( ) which must be ordered separately may be used when a-c is not available. The intermediate point, Station B is shown using Repeater Set TC-19 with optional power supply obtained from a source of a-c, a power unit or batteries. The line facilities may be simplexed for simultaneous telephone and telegraph service.
230
I----------------------
। ft -< I
° m 1
I X rhJ_ i'
1 ri " ri *1
1 ?* a” Si ’'J!
I "" T? 4" S'z!
■ ci ; "s >5 si2
I M 3 M "i* i £„ ? I
?A ?' .
I X >1
I-----------------------1
I I
I z m c -t > r r Z r>
I I
I
I ;--------I"”>
S> m 1
1 ’A m 1
1 " m F
1 Fl r Fl " !
l 2° o ” , m m r s “1
I 'm JO F Z - I J
1 -j 2 i i I m . I -1
1 F ® 5 T " ■? Z ’ I °
I^Z ni CP * I Z 2
1 L_^_ " cd
1 5 Hf -1
I ^tT I -------- > I
I----------------------J
Par. 1015-1016
1015. DIAGRAM OF A POINT-TO-POINT TACTICAL TELETYPEWRITER CIRCUIT (POLARENTIAL AND 2-PATH POLAR LINE TRANSMISSION) - TACTICAL EQUIPMENT.
STATION A
STATION B
STATION C
OMIT FOR A
ONE-SECTION CIRCUIT
I REPE(ypo 18 I [-REPEATER SET TC-19 ~[ FrEPEATER SET TC-18?
I (TERMINAL) [ , j (INTERMEDIATE) , i (TERMINAL)
r* 1 RErTFARTMlMATM'30| --P°Lf .MpNa 1A -' [-REPEATER TG-31 ' POLARENTIAL j I REPEAT F R TG-3Q I
I (TERMINAL) I LINE & , (INTERMEDIATE) । LINE& | (TERMINAL) -------------H
I--------------------J i_ _ L _----------- J L _ _ ____________L J
\ 3 BATTERY BA-28 OR
F________________ ___________________________ 2BATTERY BB-55 ___________ .
' ►- TELETYPEWRITER TELETYPEWRITER ________OR TELETYPEWRITER
TG-7-B I BATTERY BB-46 TG-7-B ——"
* __________ A
t---- P°WE* °N,T POWER UNIT I_____( POWER UNIT t
PE-77-( ) PE-77-Q pE_77_() ----1
--------A-C SUPPLY A-C SUPPLY-------- A-C SUPPLY----------------------------------------
5 MAYBE TWO-PATH POLAR LINE FROM A REPEATER TG-30 TO A BRITISH TERMINAL UNIT AND TELEPRINTER IN WHICH CASE TELETYPEWRITER TG-7-B IS ADJUSTED FOR 404 O. P. M.
1016. TELETYPEWRITER SWITCHING NETWORK -TACTICAL EQUIPMENT. Paragraph 1017 illustrates the different forms of operation and equipment which might be found in a tactical teletypewriter switching network. A central office designated Office A would be equipped with Switchboard BD-100 (part of Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3). The operator would use a Teletypewriter TG-7-A or B. All lines in the switchboard employ neutral transmission. Repeater Set TC-18 is shown connected locally to the switchboard to provide polarential or 2-path polar transmission to Station A, which is also equipped with Repeater Set TC-18, a teletypewriter and power Unit. Station B is shown as using Teletype
writer Set EE-97-A which employs neutral transmission and therefore the line to tnis station is connected directly to the switchboard. Teletypewriter Set EE-97-A is complete with line unit, teletypewriter, rectifier and power unit. Station C using Teletypewriter Set EE-98-A is shown in the same office as the switchboard and would use the office a-c supply obtained from Power Unit PE-75-D. Station D is shown as using Reperforator Teletypewriter Set TC-16 which provides for reception on a typing reperforator and transmission from tape in a transmitter-distributor. All station lines may be simplexed for simultaneous telephone and telegraph service.
231
Par. 1017-1018
1017. DIAGRAM OF A TELETYPEWRITER SWITCHING NETWORK - TACTICAL EQUIPMENT.
1018. D-C LOOP CONNECTIONS FOR TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CF-g-B (CARRIER)-TACTICAL EQUIPMENT. Paragraph 1019 illustrates typical connections for the d-c loop circuits of Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B. The carrier side of the telegraph terminal is connected generally to channel 3 of Telephone Terminal CF-l-A. All channel terminals in Telegraph Terminal CF-2-A are identical to those in the CF-2-B equipment and each might be connected to any of the equipment illustrated. Channel 1 is shown connected to Switchboard BD-100 and this channel might provide a trunk to another switchboard or a line to a distant station. In order to provide a long range polarential circuit Repeater TG-30 is connected locally to channel 2 and the line side of the re
peater extended to a distant station also equipped with a Repeater TG-30. Channel 3 is connected directly to Line Unit BE-77-A for operation with a teletypewriter. Rectifier RA-87 would be used to supply d-c for operating the teletypewriter selector magnet. If channel 4 is arranged for neutral line transmission Line Unit BE-77-A would be employed in combination with a teletypewriter. If channel 4 is arranged for polarential or two-path polar line transmission Repeater TG-30 will be used in combination with a teletypewriter. A-c power for the carrier telegraph terminal, the repeater and the teletypewriter motors, might be obtained from the office supply used to operate the telephone terminal e qu i pmen t.
/ OFFICE A ----------------STATION A
TELETYPEWRITER
TG-7-B
TRUNK TO ----------------— |
ANOTHER REPEATER SET POLARENTIAL LINE I- DrDlr.T1-o _ ~
S7D' LI,NE TC-'8 (TERMINAL) TC-18 (TERMINAL) ~ P^-"-(T
2 I LOCAL
3 STATION B
SWITCHBOARD ... . — - NEUTRAL LINE — — —' TELETYPEWRITER
BD-100 __2_ SET EE-97-A
6 --------------
7
S STATION C _2_____pTELETYPEWRITER EQUIPMENT 10 I SET EE-98-A OFFICE A (AS SHOWN)
♦ I STATION D 1 TELEGRAPH CENTRAL OFFICE SET TC-3
I Qiniivn u ! REPEATER SET Tc_(e
--------------- REPERFORATOR 1 TELETYPEWRITER SET EE-98-A TELETYPEWRITER TELETYPEWRITER 1 REPERFORATOR TELETYPEWRITER SET TC-16
-------~~---- L SET TC~lfc OTHER EQUIPMENT ------- I TEST SET I-193-A RECTIFIER I TEST SET TS-2/TG
RA-43-B
r ' --- a USE REPEATER SET TC-18 AS SHOWN FOR LINE 2
--- P9*ER UN,T IE POLARENTIAL OR 2 - PAT H POLAR TRANSMISSION PE-75-D IS REQUIRED. CONNECT TO D-C LOOP OF TELEGRAPH
\ TE1 FCRAPH CFNTRAI / TERMINAL CF-2-A OR CF-2-B IF CARRIER TRUNK
\ TELEGRAPH CENTRAL / IS REQUIRED.
--- OFFICE SET TC-3 --
Par. 1019-1023
1P19. DIAGRAM OF CONNECTIONS FOR D-C LOOPS OF TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CF-2-B (CARRIER) -
TACTICAL EQUIPMENT"!———————- -------------------------
STATION LINES (TOTAL 10)
r_________< I I I I la
' !>__ CH-I SWITCHBOARD
I TELEPHONE f”” --. IK1- no i nr Al- BD-IOO
I TERMINAL L^_. 5._______________——______
| CF-I-A | 3 NEUTRAL
। (CARRIER) | , 4 ------------------
' !— CH-2 REPEATER TG-30
I I "" (TERMINAL!----------POLARENTIAL LINE
I---------1 TELEGRAPH LOCAL (TERMINAL)
TERMINAL NEUTRAL CF-2-B C C
(CARRIER) ---------- ---------------------
CH~3 LINE UNIT ______ TELETYPEWRITER
LINE OR LOCAL BE “77-A TG-7-B
NEUTRAL ----------------- ---------------------
CH-4 ------------------------------------ — — NEUTRAL LINE TO LINE ------------------------------------UNIT BE-77-A. POLAR
OR POLARENTIAL LINE TO REPEATER TG-30
3- PART OF TELEGRAPH CENTRAL OFFICE SET TC-3.
■h PART OF REPEATER SET TC-18 (TERMINAL).
C PART OF TELETYPEWRITER SET EE-97-A AND EE-98-A.
PART OF TELEGRAPH TERMINAL TC - 2 2 ( C A R RIE R.)
Section III Telegraph and Teletypewriter Fixed Plant Equipment
1020. GENERAL.
a. Fixed plant telegraph line circuits (carrier and d-c) employ telegraph equipment packaged in the same manner as telephone line transmission equipment. Fixed plant teletypewriter equipments are essentially of a commercial nature. This equipment will provide service comparable to that furnished by equivalent commercial equipments.
b. None of this equipment is suitable for outdoor use however, it is capable of operation over temperature ranges normally encountered within a frigid (fully enclosed wooden) type of building.
£. In addition to the instruction books covering individual packaged equipments reference should also be made to TM 11-2022 "Application of packaged Equipment to Open Wire Lines".
1021. DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION.
a. Paragraphs 1024 to 1027 inclusive give descriptive matter pertaining to fixed plant telegraph and teletypewriter equipments.
b. Fixed plant d-c telegraph equipment consists of a packaged d-c telegraph repeater and a packaged d-c regenerative telegraph repeater.
£. Fixed plant carrier telegraph equipment consists of a packaged 12-channel
voice frequency system for use ordinarily over a type C carrier telephone channel.
d. Teletypewriter equipments used in fixed plant consist of sending and receiving page teletypewriters, perforators, typing reperforators and transmitter distributors.
e. Automatic Morse code equipment is Boehme automatic keying and recording equipment used generally on radio telegraph circuits where high speed and automatic transmission is a requirement .
f. A radioteletype terminal may use single channel two-tone radioteletype equipment in combination with signal center teletypewriter equipment. The radio sets associated with these radioteletype equipments are described in chapter 14. Radioteletype systems are available only on specially engineered projects. In addition to the individual instruction books reference should be made to TM 11-2207 "The Radioteletype Code Room and Signal Center".
1022. STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. Paragraph 1028 gives stock numbers, weights and volumes of fixed plant telegraph and teletypewriter equipments.
1023. ILLUSTRATIONS. Examples of the use of fixed plant telegraph equipments on wire and radio circuits are given in paragraphs 1029 to 1032 inclusive.
233
Par. 1024
234
1024. D-C WIRE TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION
Total Hit. Size in Tech. Man.,
----Nomenclature____________ in Service Oper. Approx. Power Instr.Book,b ----Name_ Type No, Fig, No, lbs. (In.)a Input Req, Instr .Man, ______________________ Remarks__________________________________ Repeater Package: X-61824Ab_1013 365 22x 475 V.A. on TU 11-2034 Cabinet containing two X-61824 D-c Telegraph Repeaters for use on com-
Telegraph; D.C. 17x 115 y, 50/60 or posited or simplexed open wire circuits or field wire circuits. Line
42c eye. a-c. (In- x-66O38b side arranged under control of a switch for two-path polar or polaren-cludes d-c tial operation. Local side under control of a switch arranged for neu-
power for tral (half and full duplex) operation and two-path polar operation.
X—66031A D-C Cabinet is supplied with a common teletypewriter monitoring circuit,
Regen. Teleg. patching jack field and meter panel. Supplied with one positive and
Rep. Pkg.) one negative regulated tube rectifier. Running spares and patch cords
supplied in cabinet. Polar relays are tested and adjusted in Test Set
I-193-A.
Repeater Package: X-66031Ab 1014 315 22x 180 V.A. on TM 11-2032 Cabinet containing two d-c regenerative telegraph repeaters for use on
Telegraph; Re- 17x 115 V. 50/60 or teletypewriter circuits operating 368 o.p.m. or 404 o.p.m. Each regenerative 42c eye. a-c for X-66039b peater consists of relay repeating circuit and two IB regenerator units,
motor which Extension circuits arranged for neutral operation (half and full duplex)
drives regen. and for neutral three-way service. A-c series governed motor. Cabinet
units. D-C contains common meter panel and a patching jack circuit. Running spares
power supplied and patch cords supplied in cabinet. Polar relays are tested and ad-
by X-61824A justed in Test Set I-193-A. Regenerator units lined up by using Test
D-C Teleg.Rep. Set TS-2/TG. Maintenance tools (not a part of Tool Equipment TE-50-A)
Pkg. and Test Set TS-2/TG furnished in X-66031B Test Package.
Telegraph Switch- oB-6-( )/GG 1015 4 7-5/16x None TM 11-2035 Patching board containing termination for four lines, each with four
board 4-5/8x or jacks (2 looping jacks, one set jack and one miscellaneous jack). Patch
4“3/4 X-66520b cords used to interchange lines and loops. In normal service no patch
(wall cords are used. No current is supplied at the board and no supervisory
rabcl») features are incorporated. Six boards may be mounted as a unit to pro-
vide 24 lines. Manufacturer's code number is 63-C-2 per X-66068. Supplied with 2 W.E.Co. cords P-2AW/347 and 2 W.E.Co. dummy plugs NO.165C.
a The first two dimensions represent minimum floor space requirements exclusive of clearance for operation and maintenance. Packaged equipments should be installed in an office in accordance with TM 11-2037.
b Western Electric Code numbers.
c Two cabinets each 42-inches high may be stacked to utilize the floor space of
one cabinet.
Par. 1024
METER SWITCH ORIENTATION
FUSE ALARM LAMP T INDICATOR LAMP
i—______ ________
FUSESAND -------ALARM LAMP ■MWJWnWW.
SPARES W II H FUSE PANEL
MONITORING RELAY--«■ MW**—JL - - * CaJ|—H-METER AND SPARE SPOLAR Wft..;.;.., p /F I
SPARE 10 AMP FUSE -3 Z* I S.l |H MONITORING RELAY AND N| ’ ♦ X ° 1 I'- METER
mrc ivMiwr ruoc. ,*. L- , , _ ju.r-f ■ KEY PANEL INDICATOR LAMP -11 _ i .■' I PANEL
SPARE RECTIFIER --L> j1|»TaSr-"W1Wr-^ « 11 Q| J 1) L
TUBE --«- JACK FIELD ? >.
SPARF PDI AR ___ gfc / f? MH- __ fb -J JACK FIELD
RELAy fl_____________________________.....I) [ wZtU'_Iff ^7 - • L• ,7 rerea™»
IS 1 HI SEND EXT > . ■ I
w—--------- * k RESISTANCES------S—w
.4 east EXTENSION 8?
PATCHCORD ------41 _ M SWITCH ----------// ....... < REPEATER
H * 4 * k > U REP 2 DUPLEX KEYS L~'
W|- ______ ** . iH ORIENT JACK S- >r ~
REGENERATOR Q'f 4^
■ . .. ’ -W- + I30V0LT UNtTS ------------------fc ' * ' ■ ' > 1
I o 1 rectifier IL ■ . . -3 ' V
1 PATCH C0RDS ---iH ' ' ' X --- REGENERATOR
arm. PANEL COVER ■
MOTOR FUSFS -----» ' - REMOVED. COMMON
MOTOR FUSES |g~- • M0T0R DRIVE -^»Wi
• -130 VOLT POWER LEADS___________J|| X X f ON REAR
FUSES --------—a RECTIFIER FILTERS ‘ -------—---------i-J \
AC DISTRIBUTION -----B F
OUTLET BOX "V----IF CONVENIENCE ' | 0^?^'BUT,ON
OUTLET ..■■■'.">1^ 1’!?^-'
naUBZ 1013. Remter Fbbkag.: ricvnz 1014. Repeater reokage: Telegraph; HOURS 1015
Teiegrapn, DC X-61824A Regenerative X-6603U Telegraph
Switchboard SB-6-( )/GG
235
Par. 1025
1025. CARRIER TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION.
total wt. Size in
_________Nomenclature__________ in Service Oper. Approx. Power Tech. Man.
___ . Karae_________ type No. Fig. No. lbs. (In,)a Input Req. Instr.Bookb _________________________________________________Remarks_________________ ralegraph Carrier X-61822A 1016 1175 46x 825 V.A. on IM 11-2024 or Telegraph terminals employed at each end of a carrier telegraph
Package. Voj.ce Fre- (2 cabinets, 17x 115 V. 50/60 X-66147,& system and connected to one channel of C Carrier Telephone Terminal,
quency; 6 Channel channels 1 84 eye. (2 cab- IM 11-2029 or Provide six 2-way telegraph circuits (channels 1 to 6) over a
to 6) ' inets) X-63653 4-wire facility. Mid-band channel frequencies 425 to 1275 cycles
spaced 170 cycles. D-c extensions are neutral half and full duplex, two-path polar or polarential. Spare parts and running spares supplied in a separate box. Requires X-61822C Test Package which includes Test Set I-193-A.
.ele,srat>h Carrier X-61B2^B 1016 1175 Same Same Same Same as X-61822A V.F. Carrier Telegraph Repeater Package except
Package: Joice Fre- (2 cabinets, different channels (7 to 12). Same carrier telephone channel,
queuej , ur.anne channels 7 Mid-band channel frequencies 1445 to 2295 cycles spaced 170 cycles.
t0 May be operated with X-61822A on same telephone channel to provide
12 telegraph circuits.
carrier Telegrap.. 42B1 - 1760 92x 800 V.A. on X-61757 Six channel voice frequency carrier telegraph system. Two cabinets
■quipmen (2 send. 17x 115/230 V. required at sending terminal for 6 channels and two cabinets at reterm. cab- 84 50/60 cyc.a-c. ceiving terminal for 6 channels. Boehme’ automatic Morse code and
inets and 2 (Two (Two send. teletypewriter equipments used at stations. Two-way transmission
rec. term. send.and term.cabinets is employed over separate paths. Mid-band channel frequencies are
cabinets) two rec. and two rec. 425 to 2125 cycles spaced 340 cycles. Running spares supplied in
cabinets) term.cabinets) separate boxes.
lelegraph terminal IH-l/TCC-1 1017 167 22-1/4X 176 ,V.A. on IM 11-2206 "Speech-Plus-Duplex" (S + DX) equipment. Derives one carrier tele-
17-l/2x 115/230 V. graph circuit from a telephone circuit while retaining the voice
21-1/4 50/ 60 cyc.a-c. circuit. Separation of speech and telegraph by band elimination
12.5 amp.drain filters which block out about 1500 to 2000 cycles for telegraph use.
on 12 V. stor. Frequency band passed by filters centered at 1680 cycles for one
bat> direction of transmission and 1860 cycles for the other direction.
D-c loops are neutral, half and full-duplex, polarential or two-path polar. Ringing may be voice frequency, 20 cycle or d-c. Filter F-2/gg is used at an intermediate point to by-pass telephone equipment. Carrier is on for "mark" and off for "space". Terminal may be stacked with "packaged" equipments. Running spares are included.
VF Cuirier W.E.Co. - 4405 186x 4000 V.A., X-61759 Provides 2-way teletypewriter circuits. 8 caimnets provide 3 fre-
i 8 °aX 17x V‘ X-66578 quency diversity circuits or 6 circuits without frequency diversity,
i moai is inets) 84 50/60 eye. Two more cabinets (double modulation equipment) increase capacity
cidphnr'rfe- 5260 (8 cab.) to 5 frequency diversity circuits. One single tone interrupted
‘ a 1 lons (10 c®b“ 231x C.W. telegraph order wire included. Stock nos. and logistical data
inets) 17x for complete radio telegraph system given in par. 1424.
84 (10 cab.)
a
The first two dimensions represent minimum floor space requirements exclusive of clearance for operation and maintenance. Packaged equipments should be installed
in an office in accordance with IM 11-2037. b
Western Electric code numbers. c For equipment supplied after Jan. 1, 1944.
236
FUSE ALM LAMP |g| "fc"gcQ fW~F^ g/ iamL^ **» ITt B»tei y^E^St fuse alm. lamp
LINE COILS I 1
|||g “■< '-WL I J ti
|g iuiiFiL "VLJ. *- * “'
CHANNEL TERM. PANEL ’F’ W XfV'f ‘
E J Pl ^■TTTC*'''-'’1. t CHANNEL TERM
fig iKB U a a ' P i BSr® • • i panel I Jb<>* I ~Trt'1___________________
OSCILLATOR PANEL "5* F WLpr7; B —— OSCILLATOR PANEL
JL *** \ if '■•» 8 I ;E- JL... *•• “i MON. TTY. PANEL
MON TTY PANEL Sj. * L. Ji., 1 ■ <*..
E - I METER CONN PANEL
METER PANEL g|*’| «uA9 * |tF2TJ MFI JACK FlELD JACK FIELD I J
jprFL
K 1 XJ1FE. £—Jf ‘RMt. 1 ' 1 CHANNEL TERM.
M t iBi fr’x F~< “I Rll; 9 • • I PANEL
CHANNEL TERM. PANEL "jg —[ '—. t| ffir, g, & I
B j » ’ ~ . ' I "ft -Xg- 1 OSCILLATOR PANEL
» I * * * FT _____4
J ly | , । ?f
OSCILLATOR PANEL 'fipSL-l-- >, T —r^HI
|||| I | r ■ X__
■ I -’M’fi' *»' k il : SSLyF A A f CHANNEL TERM.
■ I L.--UF * I PANEL
I Ls fe • * -I____________________
CHANNEL TERM. PANEL TaWKcTff >< • • ,» fW1 V' ______ OSCILLATOR PANEL
g F W‘. a® 1 ’ ' . -’--^ . ALM. REL.&SPARE FUSES
& ■ IWL-—- I res shield
OSCILLATOR PANEL “Bp X X j FUSE PANEL
SPARE VAC. TUBES & RELS J, RFr ruRF RrrT
ALM. REL & SPARE FUSES > I
RES SHIELD ' ‘‘ f
FUSE PANEL g TuBE RECT
■ | I >
B I I j >• r_—
REG. TUBE RECT , J> iX< y * —A-C. POWER
I > A® F ' DISTRIBUTION
fi OUTLET BOX
Arc. power
DISTRIBUTION ■ I
OUTLET BOX B —"
237
700898 O—46----17
FIGURE 1016. Telegraph Carrier Package X-61822A or B FIGURE 1017. Telegraph Terminal
TH-l/TCC-1
SEND BIAS ADJUSTMENT
RELAY TEST FmETER
..5£JTACK [send loop current
/-' / • —mi.- 1 -I- iAPQus-WfcNr
/ rec loopcurren
LINE, SWBD. / ■<; S TT^ADJUSTMENT
AND LOOP _Z______i » 'J v
BINDING POSTS/ ; j BH ’ « 'JT MON TTY S
POWER —/ ,Ji AM R JACKS
CORD / ■■ TeP telephone jacks
/ iR • *3 Rm TELEGRAPH JACKS
/ MON TTY SW,1CH
METER -L— - ---JBHfrjj----
SWITCH I LOOP OPTIONS
/ JlIJRMMajWRB switch
REC LEVEL/ . PMB SEND LEVEL
REC RELAY/ ' \ ’.
i '-----—lllL
/ ■ v-'<%P?sh ^ue& SEND FREQ.
I • ,, ,XJMM> SUMMARY OF
INSTRUCTIONS
Par. 1025
Par. 1026
1026. TELETYPEWRITER AND AUTOMATIC MORSE CODE EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION.
Total Weight - lbs. Dimensions in Technical Manual,
------Nomenclature---------- Shown in Unpacked and____Operation Approximate Power Instruction Book, ------Name- —Type No.— Fig. No. __________in Service__ (Inches)5 Input Requirements Instruction Manual Remarks “O1,ell5b 1018____________________________215_________21-1/2x18-1/2 240V.A or.113 TO 11-333 r.g.-r.oelvlng and k.yboard-s.ndlng t.l.typ.-
and Receiving. x42 volts 50/60 cycles Instruction writer. "Standard" communications keyboard
Standard Keyboard a-c(Motor power Manual Nos. and type bar arrangement. Pulling magnet
y and input to recti- 7 or 22 selector and line relay. Motor controlled by
fier to furnish 30 switch and automatic built-in control. A-c
mil line relay bias series governed motor operating on 115 volts,
current) 50-60 cycles, a-c. Motor speed adjusted for
368 or 404 o.p.m. Teletypewriter mounted on metal table which also mounts rectifier supplying d-c for local circuits. Rectifiers available for operation on 115 volts, 50-60 cycles or for operation on 115 volts or 230 volts, 25, 40, 50 or 60 cycles. Rectifiers operating on 230 volts have 115 volt tap on transformer for supplying teletypewriter motors.
“°del 15Wb ' S“ S“ S““ Same as Model IS Teletypewriter accept with
and Receiving- "weather"0 communication keyboard and with
Weather Keyboard automatic motor control omitted.
mSES?1 “°d'119b 1019 405 37x24x42 52?.’-t;,“ 113 “U-3S3 Page-receivlng, keyboard-sending and tape per-
and Receiving = volts ^°/b° cycles Instruction forating teletypewriter mounted on metal table
Standard Keyboard a7fj Manuals Nos. with a transmitter-distributor for tape send-
mitter-distributor 1° or 26 ing. "Standard" communications keyboard and
motor, teletype- type bar arrangement. Motors in teletypewriter motor, writers and transmitter-distributors are a-c
perforator magnet series governed motors adjustable for 368 or
and line relay 404 o.p.m. Teletypewriter motors have switch
bias current) and automatic motor control. Table for mount-
ing teletypewriter and transmitter-distributor also mounts rectifier to supply d-c for local circuits. Rectifiers available for operation on 115 volts, 50-60 cycles or 115 volts or 230 volts, 25, 40, 50 or 60 cycles. Rectifiers operating on 230 volts have 115 volt tap on x transformer for supplying teletypewriter and
transmitter-distributor motors.
“°dell9l",b - Same Sac» as Model 18 Teletypewriter Set except
and ftlceivi^ that the teletypewriter is supplied with
Weather Keycard "weather"0 keyboard and type-bar arrangement.
* Sd”Lis^^ c ~ —2
b Teletypewriters include line relay (Western Electric Co. 25SA which is Teletype Corp RY-30). 60-speed tuning fork, radio Seletvne CnT-nni-at<
filter, copy holder, metal table, universal 115 volt a-c series yp Corporation,
governed motor and rectifier are furnished with sets.
238
Par. 1026
239
Total Weight -lbs. Dimensions in Technical Manual,
____Nomenclature_____________ Shown in Unpacked and___Operation Approximate Power Instruction Book, ____Name_ Type No, Fig. No, in Service________________ (Inches)a Input Requirements Instruction Manual _________________Remarks_________________ Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1_1020 475_______24x24x65 570 V.A. on 115 TM 11-2203 Sending and receiving tape relaying package
volts 50/60 cycles unit. In console. Includes multiple trans-
a-c 425 watts on mitter-distributor (2 message transmitters and
115 volts d-c 1 number transmitter driven by common motor),
2 typing reperforators, 1 motor driven tape winder, rectifier, and tape feed-out feature and necessary controls and alarms. Units may be combined in a single installation, messages received on perforated tape with typing, may be torn and inserted manually in a transmitter.
Operation single or duplex at 368 o.p.m. Duplex operation either neutral or polar. May be used for "normal" or split operation on'ore or two circuits respectively.
Boehme Automatic 1021 TM 11-377 Equipment for automatically transmitting and
Keying and Record- for receiving at high-speed International
ing Equipment Morse Code telegraph signals on radio. At
Keying Head 4-E 8 Mounts on Key- Keying Head Drive transmitting point, the equivalent of dots
ing Head Drive Motor 130 watts and dashes is perforated in tape (15/32 inch
Keying Head Drive 4-D 50 11x18x13 on 110 volts d-c wide) by the use of a Wheatstone perforator
Ink Recorder 4-G 29 10x9x10 (Base Ink Recorder, 35 which has a typewriter keyboard. Tape is run
. . 7 inch dia.) watts on 110 through keying head mounted on keying head
Recorder Driving 4-C 105 19x12x10-1/2 volt d-c drive. Keying head controls radio trans-
„Unlto.,, . r. r. . ~ , mitter. Principle equipments with transTape Puller 4-F ->enes E 20a, 20 9xl3-l/2x Recorder Driving mitting table are Boehme keyer, two Wheat-
i67yop» Uni$,i75 ”atts stone perforators, time stamp and rectifier
. 7x13x86 on 110 volts such as General Electric Co. 6RB10E11 (115
Rewinder Reel 4-FA 60 cycles a-c volt 50/60 cycle) or 6RB10E12 (230 volt 50/60
Attachment (210 V.A. cycle), when d-c power is not available. At
Magnetic Release 7-FA estimated) receiving point, equipment is mounted on a
Attacliment receiving table the principle equipments '
Tape Reel 7-H 5 10-1/2x3-1/2 thereon being a Boehme ink recorder and re-
x23 (Base corder driving unit, tape puller with mag-
3-3/4x3-l/4) netic release attachment, tape puller with
Taoe Bridge 4-K 5 Over-all 23 Tape Pullers. rewind reel attachment and tape bridge. Relong, 8-1/4 each about 75 corder receives keyed tone dot
high on two watts on 110V Sig^1S receiver or simi-
5 . lar source and converts the signals to d-c to
Pea®s a-J-3 d-c operate ink recorder. Coil in recorder
inch dia/hase actuates fountain-type pen which makes a
TaPe 7erforator’ (Teletype) 41 20x16x16 150 watts on Instruction f nals^ Tape is pulled'over tape bridge^ust
Receiving^Tabie 125 95 long x 19 110 V°ltS d“C ^nUal N°- 15 above k^board of a typewriter and operator
t u transcribes message,
wide x 27 high
Transmitting Table 125 95 long x 19
wide x 27 high
a The first two dimensions represent minimum floor space c Mounts on small relay rack mounted on receiving table,
requirements exclusive of clearance for operation and maintenance. Boehme equipment mounts on With Rewinder Reel Attachment.
tables.
e With Magnetic Release Attachment.
Boehme bode Numbers. f Teletype Corporation.
Par.
1026
240
"*1“ SPRING TAPE HOLDER
SIGNAL INDICATOR .. » <» > *g, '-**Wf
■
UPPER TYPING DUMBER SHEET
REPERFORATOR
T MODEL 15 TELETYPEWRITER ’ .............
j- SENDING AND
/ Receiving
. • / teletypewriter
Lj F*W“-..■;..procAOATAo 1 ■ LOWER TYPING _.WEWfe-' CONSOLE
’ I ' y> JR 91 REPERFORATOR
It KEY TRANSMITTER jK&t*.."'1J' " —»»■. ig n.AAQCD hr** - *** WWeF*
0&Distributor 3 NUMBER . * W FMWNl
•s f I TRANSMITTER
im3H riiOiik I
BWWs l.l.iS,',-.5'r«T'sl3l=''-3l power SSggS&JKrTS 1 --- • s —i -U
';■•■ switch ** * • •*•-.,< g~~—
KEYBOARD ' ’"2^4’ fi | ’A-TRANSMITTER gg ■ "B" TRANSMITTER
MmBRWmWf;- ■' TAPE TR0UGH 1 *
. J| I IP
Mjk iMh ~Wa,^Mw^>.-. - * I
RECTIFIER IMHWto5>< ;
in I
*ls!r ^HB J
111111^4;'?, ; table —► wMs"’ ■/"
STEEL TABLE ^£:
W'- W' W ■!? 1 Shs* .jfcHhJb5
FIGURE 1018. Model 15 FIGURE 1019. Model 19 FIGURE 1020. Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC~1
Teletypewriter Set Teletypewriter Set
Par. 1026
p.,OT . ^transmitting speed faucet cone
PILOT LAMP^ ' INDICATOR AND HANDLE
Mink pot—■
V~PEN ARM OUST \
KE¥'N0HtADV t /AWHEEL D.CM0T0R V^ENAoJn
— iHrf j \ .. S
*-«JL v l-* Mi ** *** i
V-T F il.
* I .i J 1.. - JU * 1 ‘
F,| 'JjjJMK 1 ’■ ■
, ^"'HK HOSE
■•.•;••••-•’ .. .. WSMkK :^—field COIL
j?' • unHK W|g pot
JBf ■
,» . W '-^^sLwajaMw^
•„■; ^OVERFLOW
INK receptacle
„ X t external telegraph
SIGNAL LINE CONNECTIONS x KEY CONNECTION
Keying Head with Keying Head Ink RecOrder
Drive
CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE
FOR TAPE PERFORATOR
, / —TELEGRAPH KEY
~ MFC HANI 4mR RECEPTACLE / f rfcePTAT?’! T C0NN ECTOR
/ MECHANISM for AUTOMATIC / ?npE^Z^-CLE RECEPTACLE
x / keyer-------1 / s?Lp for 7ApE
-. - / STAMP PERFORATOR
’ ' '■; 1.....t.
,,.t>.„ t g ,.. ..,.;jyPilot lamps IQ- II T B ~J ■■■ .--■■ ■■■>.■■■- fl AND POWER
i I j .■•■;. " I SWITCHES
c°pY : I I gi
HOLDER —^O^:.t-.:^^^&»111 /,_, ,Q V | 1 ' ■■ | ,
IM I JJU-———-------------rill ■, In g -'V'B 3 ■*--------table
I 1 ।
MONITOR _ TAPE L CABINET FOR
JACK BOX RECEPTACLE TERMINALS FUSES
AND RESISTORS
Wheatstone Perforator (Teletype) Transmitting Table
FIGURE 1021. Boehme Automatic Keying and Recording Equipment
241
-Par. 1027
1O27. RADIOTELETYPE TERMINAL AND ASSOCIATED SIGNAL CTO TELETYPEWRITER EQUIPMENT - FIXED PUN? - PESCRIPM-
Total Wt. Size in
Nomenclature in Service Oper. Approx. Power Tech. Man.
_______Name________type No. Fig. No. Ibe. (In.)a Input Req, Instr.Book_____________________________Remarks-------------;--------------- Rad iote letype____AN/lUC-l 1022 425 23x 160 V.A. on IM 11-356 Voice frequency carrier telegraph equipment for use as single channel
Terminal Vlx 115 V. two-tone space diversity radioteletype receiving terminal. Associ-
Eouinment 84 50/60 eye. ated radio receivers invert the incoming signals to a frequency of
1 v 2125 cycles for the "closed" condition and 297 5 cycles for the "open"
condition of the sending contacts. The AN/FGC-1 equipment rectifies these signals to d-c telegraph signals for operation of teletypewriter equipment at a signal center.
_ , . .. xnn 26x 360 V.A. on IM 11-2210 or Cabinet-type table with a receiving-only typing reperforator with a
Teletypewriter 132A2 1023 U£. X-66154b synchronizing circuit for receiving from a radio channel and a transSubscriber Operates on mitter-distributor for sending to a radio transmitter or other oir-
Set 115/230 V. cuit. typing reperforator has holding-magnet selector. Transmit ter-
25/60 eye. distributor and typing reperforator supplied with series a-c governed
motor.
_ . . - 18 In 36 V.A. from X-66330b Used with and located inside the table of the 132A2 set. Arranges set
Repeater and X-66106A 18 connections for simplex service, sending polar signals to radio transControl Unit get mitter and controlling radio receiver and transmitter.
m , . .. 1-i-xAib 375 26X 265 VJl. on TM 11-2211 or Cabinet-type table with a receiving-only typing reperforator and
Teletypewriter lo3Al X-66152b transmitter-distributor for code room circuits or for sending or re-
Subscriber 50/60*cyc. ceiving on land lines. Table supplied with polar relay for converting
Set a_0 from"neutral to polar transmission or vice versa, typing reperforator
supplied with bolding magnet selector.
Teletypewriter 133A2b - 390 26x 360 V.A. on M 11-2214 Similar to 132A2 set except that synchronizing circuit omitted. Also
Subscriber 22x 115 v* a-<:* used in plaCe °f 133A1 '
44 Operates on
S6t 115/230 V.
25/60 eye.
YT>qi° 1024 42 Fart of Part of X-66355b TWo-cliannel transmit ter -distri butor furnished in place of the singleTransmitter- XD91 1024 channel transmitter-distributor on a 132A2 set when two-channel opor-
Distributor ation is desired. Two tapes sent simultaneously from transmitter and
either may be started and stopped independently of other. Transmittendistributor may be switched to single channel operation, if required.
Motor is series a-c governed.
_ . n s/iro 1025 al i3x 150 V.A. TM 11-2205 Provides a means for keying an HF radio transmitter by the frequency
Oscillator 110/220 V shift method to obtain "mark" and "space" conditions for transmitting
Exoiter if”?8 13 50/60 cyc^ signals over radio circuits. The "space" frequency is 425 cycles
ll,!, 8 a-c lower than the carrier frequency and the "mark" frequency is 425
Is1 , cycles higher than the carrier frequency. Thus the frequency shift is
Key0r' 850 cycles and is suitable for reception by Radioteletype Terminal
AN/FGC-1. Exciter receives d-c telegraph signals from teletypewriter or other sending source and its output side is connected to the radio transmitter using a coaxial line. Exciter replaces the regular radio frequency oscillator of the radio transmitter to which it is connected. Equipment is panel mounted and arranged for use on 19-inch relay rack.
Running spares are provided.
aUie first two dimensions represent minimum floor space requirements exclusive of clearance for operation and maintenance.
bWestern Electric Code numbers,
° Teletype Corporation number.
242
Par. 1027
SPARE FUSE f ■
MOUN T IN G ANO__|
TERMINAL STRIPS 1 ' |ffe
<* -S^WaBE
AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY ’ tKf '■■■'■ }
CONTROL UN IT MOUNTS ’ HK ‘
IN THIS POSITION SK' '-tt>S^BK
FREQUENCY INDICATOR 7 ■’l'*M‘"c
panel “E h*j MX.JX aSSg
3P; ' ■! s
aj X Till n M i 11 ? Ip!
i TT3*^ 11 TAPE SPLICER ”\
iatl/c B \ r TYPING
----------—---■HFSwmMmiTiF—-'' 11 transmitter \ | reperforator ' ' '' ’ DISTRIBUTOR . \jfe
RECEIVE RELAY — F RR ■^OwE^W,?’ "1 , \
PANEL » u u n . h I t \
Lpq ?rr pHa j| m.
0£,£CT08A----------|Sli>3 .-/sS- -wlM
FAd ' * ®t t »1 «&
CURRENT LIMITER B __I JQjlaAjI 'V-A -'■ t- &> V'J .
i .mTL. 1| ‘ ■* ■ I E& DISTRIBUTOR_• .£
CURRENT LIMITER a__f /„ jTa' ~B fi’ L<*^Y *BC&%|gS Ij&S “‘ M*
ixafex Iffll k ^Kv.
FUSES ----- --------■Bmtitt. ii.m„se •~T- s.- ■'-^ i&’J*- t Stile, transmitter a
SHKX..X.J TT...M ,t»: ®?:tJs.sS5t J 'J* ; -. • ;-TS*v Sc ,.■: -,f 'I'sgSgSg send - stop levtr \ t' . ar,---.. .
rectifier._________I 7 y\
fisl ay AjaKwt^gMMaHr^ x
transmitter B IW^y^' d1
SEND-STOP LEvtfS-
KA-SR42I I isr'oi ' ' ” f. ';!' TRANSFER RELAY ■ ‘■'•'kt'^''‘‘
Kb 3844, L151 01 MMMtt H behind COVER -’ M2
■MMBB | A”
ALARM ANO MISC______■ »-»»• „ W1 W. , '
EQUIPMENT -g W—F'^W W« ’ a ■'£}&*!. □!» ’ L CONTROL KEYS »!SM SINGLE - DOUBLE
■"‘■t^**F J
MIXER TUNING ~ ““SHIFT VOLTAGE
• ADJUSTOR
RESONANCE INDICATOR “ '
y> * ■ {? ' v 4^8&fc- <_______ -
AMPLIFIER TUNING ' j.......CRYSTAL SELECTOR
•' ' ■' ' y/iS' ;
~_c- i AM " wr
( f* -x? w 4« :>j
■' * ' ...-K.-f T. L.
« x' ' J A-c POWER
; '_________________ S J ON-OFF SWITCH
FILAMENT SWITCH ” . « PLATE SWITCH
MARK-SPACE LINE ______^lil.
SW.TCH--------------------------------------------fr
I k * AV OsSS /-'* 5f-»z7«^
FIGURE 1025. Oscillator Exciter 0-5/FR
(Press Wireless FS12A Keyer)
Par. 1028
1028* TELEGRAPH, TELETYPEWRITER AND AUTOMATIC MORSE CODE EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.-------------------------------- -----------------A
Weight (lbs.} of Total Total Dis-
Heaviest Weight placement
Nomenclature Box (Xbs.) (cu.ft.)
Type No. Packed for Packed for Packed for Ship
Stock No. Tonsa 1.7
Telegraph Carrier; Package; Voice Frequency; 6 Channel X-61822A 4A2794 775 1520 66
(3 boxes)
Telegraph Carrier; Package; Voice Frequency; 6 Channel X-61822B 4A2794.1 775 1580 66 (3 boxes) 1.7
Repeater Package; Telegraph; D.C. X-61824A 4A2798 500 500 23 0.6
(1 box)
Repeater Package; Telegraph; Regenerative Repeater and Control Unit X-66031A None assigned 450 , 500 23 (1 box) 0.6
X-66106A 4T61859—18
Teletypewriter Set; Printer; Sending Model 15 4T2.18A-lb 235 . 450
and Receiving; Std. Keyboard (2 boxes)
Teletypewriter Set; Printer; Sending Model 15 (W) 4T2.9A-1 orc 235 450 35 (2 boxes)
ing and Receiving; Weather Keyboard 4T2.16A-1
Teletypewriter Set; Printer; Sending and Receiving; Std. Keyboard Model 19 4T4.15A-ld 210 775 59 (4 boxes) 1.5
Teletypewriter Set; Printer; Sending Model 19 (W) 4T4.8A-1 ore 210 775 59 (4 boxes)
and Receiving; Weather Keyboard 4T4.13A-1 or 4T4.18A-1
Radioteletype Terminal Equipment AN/FGC-1 4TW61789 635 635 30 0.8
Teletypewriter Subscriber Set 132A2 FTNT-4T14RTXDS-S.lf 300 650 34 0.9
(3 boxes)
Teletypewriter Subscriber Set 133A1 FTNT-4TSRTXDS-S 280 490 30 0.8
(2 boxes)
Teletypewriter Subscriber Set 133A2 4TW133A2f 290 642 34 0.9
(3 boxes)
Transmitter Distributor XD91 None assigned 70 5 0.1
Switchboard SB-6-( )/GG None assigned 10(1 board) 0.57(1 board)
45(6 boards) 1.85(6 boards)
Carrier Telegraph Equipment 42B1 4A2593-6 625 2870 140 3.5
(8 boxes) (8 boxes)
Teletypewriter Set AN/TGC-1 4T1000-1 680 1160 85 2.1
(4 boxes)
Telegraph Terminal Boehme Automatic Keying and Recording Equipment TH-l/TCC-1 4A2895 225 225 13 0.35
Keying Head Keying Head Drive 4-E 4-D 4A1245 4A564 24 0.7
Ink Recorder 4-G 4A1954
Recorder Driving Unit 4-C 4A1213 165 . 66c, 60d 3.0 8.5 a 3.I5, 2.4d
Tape Puller Rewinder Reel Attachment 4-F,Series E 4-FA 4A2764.2S, 4A2764.1h
Magnetic Release Attachment 7-FA
Tape Reel Tape Bridge 7-H 4-K 4A2787H 4A2744K 20 1.0
Tape Perforator, Wheatstone i Transmitting Table (Teletype) 4A1720 4A3025J 300 320 320 30 0.75
Receiving Table — 4A3024J oxJ 50 1.25 1.25
Oscillator Exciter 0-5/FR 2C2710-5 138 138 6.35 0.2
cubic feet
a A "Ship Ton" equals 40 cu. ft.
b Stock No. 4T2.18A-1. Conmunications keyboard, figures "H" motor stop. Rectifier REC29 for 95-125 and 190-250 volts and 25,40,50 or 60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-115.
c Stock No. 4T2.9A-1. Weather keyboard, motor switch control, Rectifier REC10 for 115 volt, 50—60 cycle a—c input. Table is XRT-106.
Stock No. 4T2.16A-1. Weathei- keyboard, motor switch control, Rectifier REC29 for 95-125 and 190-250 volts and 25,40,50 or 60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-106.
Stock No. 4T4.15A-1. Communications keyboard, character counter pointer and dial, figures "H" motor stop, Rectifier REC30 for 95-125 and 190-250 volts and 25,40,50 and 60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-116.
e Stock No. 4T4.8A-1. Weather keyboard, motor switch control, Rectifier REC13 for 115 volt, 50-60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-107.
Stock No. 4T4.13A-1. Weather keyboard character counter pointer and dial, Rectifier REC30 for 95-125 and 190-250
Stock No. 4T4.18A-1. Weather keyboard, character counter pointer and dial, carriage return and line feed automatically at end of each line and on carriage return signal, figures "H" motor stop, Rectifier REC30 for 95-125 and .190-250 volts and 25,40,50 or 60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-116.
Stock number is for table supplied with single-channel transmitter-distributor. When table is supplied with two-channel transmitter-distributor (XD91) the total weight pack for export is 725 pounds and total displacement is 39 cu. ft.
8 Includes Rewinder Reel Attachment Assembly.
b Includes Magnetic Release Attachment Assembly.
Includes hand telegraph key, monitor Jack box, conduit and wiring, receptacle connectors, terminal and fuse cabinet, power toggle switches and pilot Lamps.
volts and 25,40,50 and 60 cycle a-c input. Table is XRT-116.
245
Par. 1029
1029. PACKAGED TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT ON OPEN WIRE LINES - FIXED PLANT.
paragraph 1030 Illustrates a use for packaged telegraph equipment on two open wire pairs operating with Type C Carrier. This diagram shows the telegraph equipment and only that part of the telephone equipment (shown by dotted lines) which is directly involved in the telegraph connections. Similar illustrations of the use of packaged telephone equipment are given in Chapter 9, Terminal office A is shown as being equipped with X-61822 A and B carrier telegraph terminal packages, X-61824A d-c telegraph repeater packages, and X-66031A d-c regenerative telegraph repeater package. Office B is shown as an intermediate office with X-61824A d-c telegraph repeater packages, and X-66031A d-c regenerative telegraph re
peater package. Terminal Office C is shown equipped the same as Office A except that the regenerative repeater is omitted. Each office should be sup plied with a monitoring teletypewriter for supervising service as it is not included in packaged equipments. A Test Set I-193-A should be made available for Office B since no carrier telegraph equipment is located at that office and therefore the X-61822C test package containing Test Set I-193-A is not available. A Test Set TS-2/TG should be available in Office C for lining up teletypewriter circuits. In Office A and Office B this set will be available because the X-66031B regenerative repeater test package containing Test Set TS-2/TG will be available for use with the X-66031A d-c regenerative repeater package.
246
12^0• DIAGRAM OF PACKAGED TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT ON OPEN WIRE LINES.
247
Par. 1030
Z~ —OFFICE A- \ /-----------------OFFICE B---------------------x ________________OFFICE O-
X-6I824A X-6603IA X-6I822B X-6IB22B 7 'Jri'ICt C— \
D~C TELEG D*c REGEN. V.E CARRIER VF CARRIER X sikjj. v .
RER PACKAGE TELE^ TELEGgEPM.AL TELEG. TERMINAL t V. F. CARRIER V. Tc^rYe R D^'tWVg
--------------- HERPACKAGE PACKAGE^ ____________PACKAGEb TE LEG. TE RMIN AL TELEG. TERMINAL REP LINE----R_Ef _'_— REP -CHAN io CHAN 7 CHAN 4 CHAN. I PACKAGEb ------------PACKAGEb PACKAGE
LINE- — RER 2 RER 2 --------------------------------- CHAN. I CHAN.4 CHAN. 7 CHAN 10 ______________________________________________________________________________ REP I __
------- I lSPAREl CHAN. II CHAN. 8 - CHAN.5 CHAN. 2 >> --------------------------------- ----------___ .L'_ --------------------------------------------------- p CHAN. 2 CHAN. 5 - CHAN. 8 CHAN. I I ----------------------------------------------------------------------- REP 2 -LINE " CHAN 12 CHAN. 9 CHAN. 6 CHAN. 3-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----1---[II— —« i > ‘—r I I— CHAN. 3 CHAN 6 CHAN 9 CHAN. 12 \---»"--I9»8|7 IPI5I4 |3|2|IZ L I I | ‘ill1 L| । । ।-------,---
X-6I824A D-C EXTENSIONS TO \_H I2|3 »4|5|b |7 |8|9 |I2/
D-C TELEG. D-C TELEGRAPH REPEATERS OR D~C EXTENSIONS TO „ cia_.4
REP PACKAGE TELETYPEWRITER STATIONS X-6IS24A X-6I824A 0-C TELEGRAPH REPEATERS OR n-r tfi rr
(____oco, „D;CdTELEG D-C TELEG. TO TELETYPEWRITER STATIONS REP pIcKAGF
LOCAL!------_REPJ RER PACKAGE RER PACKAGE REP PACKAGE
EXT 1______REp £ REp ______LOCAL LOCAL REP. I —■- . nr
V _____ EXT EXT. RER I ------ I LOCAL
r----------____I ’rep. a'---------<—>______________----- RER2------\ EXT
- -----CARRIER f—“ , _ ' REP 2 | -----------, I— /
-_____-|TELEPH0NE'----1----------------J Fl t t l'l 7---1 CARRIER 1_.
F TERMINAL L I I I 1 | I I I" 2 iTELEPHONEI " “ ~ ~|
k J R x / L ~ticR_M2NALj---------------ii
To k ------------------------[—-Tcx-'r-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Jl-U H\
TELE- | -L_SEJ_j---- TO TO -------(.SET ]------------------------♦_______________ I ££
PHONE’ . OPEN WIRELINES TELE- TELE- " | —”1--------F*-~ TO
EQPT ,----------I 0, PHONE PHONE’ _ OPEN WIRE LINES TELE-
---1 CX r-------------— EQPT EQPT -------------------------------------------------------------------~ I CL PHONE
I----1 SET I------------------------£__________ J GX £ --H CX I--------------------------J--------------------I CX"3___________EQPT-
\ lti ------------iSET r— set L________ ▼ i ex r ---—
L-j--i--r / l_?et_i ---------— set j-_ —— _
I I I T*”* I I I X-6I824A
/ 1 '— | I T T I I D-C TELEG.
I — — REP I ’ ♦ ------ —*—*— REP PACKAGE
LGGAL ------------ RER ' -<♦*>- RER 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------ REP I
EXT- I—__ RER 2 ------ ---------------------------------- REP. I —i
\ I RER 2 —' REP 2 __ REP 2 ~~~~ I
X-6I824A ------ --------------—J I r— RER 2 -J
D-C TELEG. X-6I824A X-6603IA X-6I824A I -------
RER PACKAGE D?^C„TELEG' D-C REGEN. D-C TELEG. L___________ IN1F
R£P PACKAGE TELEG. RER PACKAGE „ NE
RER PACKAGE X-6I824A
. ------ D-C TELEG.
•—REP. I —-| REP. PACKAGE
f REP- 2 I REP I
LOCAL EXT.-»| | SPARE, --—1^1
I X-6I824A r>----BRANCH LINE I
D-C TELEG. LSPAREJ ■
REP PACKAGE LOCAL
EXT
OTHER EQUIPMENT ----^1822C I x-6803.8-------------- 0THER EQU|pMENT__________________________________ OTHEP EOU.PMENT V.E CARRIER D-C REGEN.---MONITORING---------D-c’reGEN_________________Tr„ „T]_______________________________ -----------------------------
TEST PACKAGE TeTF "pACK^GE TEEE T VPE WRIT ER TELEG.^ 7^3-7 TE^ETY PESTER TE5T $ET MON.TORING
----------LL-EST PACKAGE ____________________________TEST PACKAGE I LL E T YPE WR.T ER TS-2/TG TELETYPEWRITER ^-COMPOSITE SETS ARE FURNISHED WITH THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT.
INCLUDES A BOX OF RUNNING SPARE PARTS.
Par. 1031-1033
1031. RADIOTELETYPE TERMINAL AND SIGNAL
CENTER. Paragraph 1032 illustrates a single-channel (two-tone) radioteletype system composed of a receiving station, a transmitting station and a signal center. Signals are sent initially from the transmitter-distributor on the 132A2 set to the radio transmitting station. The transmitter sends its normal frequency for the marking (closed) condition and a frequency 850 cycles lower for the spac-
in (open) condition. At the receiving station the diversity receivers invert and then convert the radio signals to frequencies in the voice range (mark, 2125 and space, 2975 cycles) which are rectified in Radioteletype Terminal AN/FGC-1 to d-c telegraph signals. These d-c signals are finally received by the typing reperforator in the 132A2 set. The 133A1 set is shown as being used in connection with room circuits.
1032. DIAGRAM OF A RADIOTELETYPE TERMINAL AND SIGNAL CENTER.
RECEIVING ' STATION 1
I
Fl 1 SIGNAL CENTER
REC REC. DIVERSITY !
CHAN CHAN RECEIVER I32A2 SET I33AI SET
A B I _____________
I TTp 1 I--------------1 ।------------1 MODEL 15
I ' lVF, I I TYPING ---- ^TRANSMITTER,------------_----- TELETYPEWRITER
REPERFORATOR 7 DISTRIBUTOR 7 eFT
„ „ > l______________I TAPE l_— ______________I st 1
CHAN CHAN ________D_____CARRIED
AB | a BY
------------------- [ Transmitter/ — hanp r typing ) '5 °r 'q RADIOTELETYPE TERMINAL I (“I DISTRIBUTOR , REPERFORATOR r_TELETYPEWRITER
an/fgc-i I 1--------------1 '------------1 ______SET______
_____________________________I v
X-66I06A REP D-C AND CONTROL UNIT y/K TRANSMITTING |
< 7 STATION I
।---*—*---- ----------- I aMAY BE SINGLE-CHANNEL OR TWO-CHANNEL
OSCILLATOR । TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTOR (XD9I). IN LATTER
TRANSMITTER— EXCITER -----f— CASE SECOND TYPING REPERFORATOR MOUNTED
°~5/FR | ON SEPARATE TABLE IS CONNECTED IN SERIES
1----------। WITH TYPING REPERFORATOR OF I32A2 SET.
Section IV
Telegraph and Teletypewriter Testing Equipment, Tool Equipment and Teletypewriter Supplies
1033. GENERAL
a. This section contains information covering teletypewriter expendable supplies. These items are applicable to both tactical and fixed plant equipments .
b. Information concerning teletypewriter test sets, tool equipment and maintenance equipment will be found in chapter 13.
c. The teletypewriter supplies listed are those which are essential in all cases for the operation of teletypewriter equipment and include supplies required for producing page copies and perforated tape with or without typing. The lubricating oils and greases are for general lubrication of teletypewriter equipments.
248
Par. 1034
1034. TELETYPEWRITER SUPPLIES - TACTICAL AND FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION AND STOCK NUMBERS.—————————————————- ;
Name Description Stock No. Suppliers No.
Paper, single copy Teletype, roll form for page teletypewriters, 8-1/2” wide, 350 foot roll, canary yellow 4Tla (formerly 4A1650)
Paper, duplicate copy Teletype, roll form for page teletypewriters, one carbon insert, 2-ply, 8-1/2” wide, canary yellow 4T2 (formerly 4A1650.1)
Paper, triplicate copy Teletype, roll form for page teletypewriters, canary yellow, two carbon inserts, 8-1/2” wide, 5” diam., 3-ply 4T11 (formerly 4A1650.3)
Ribbon Teletype, black record, medium inking, 1/2” wide, 12 yards long 6M1175a
Tape Teletype, paper for perforators and reperforators, 11/16” wide, 1000 feet long 4A2702
Oil One quart, lubricating oil 6G1325 (formerly 4T88770) W.E.Co., KS-7470 Teletype, No. 88970
Oil One gallon, lubricating oil 6G1326 (formerly 4T88971) W.E.CO., ICS-7470 Teletype, No. 88971
Grease One 4 oz. tube, lubricating grease 4T97116 W.E.Co., KS-7471 Teletype, No. 97116
Grease One pound, lubricating grease 4T88973 W.E.Co., KS-7471 Teletype, No. 88973
Part of Chest CH-53, 4TCH53, formerly 4A353 and Chest CH-53-A, 4TCH53A, formerly 4A353A.
Chest CH-53 is part of EE-97.
Chest CH-53-Ais part of EE-97-A.
249
Par. 1101-1104
CHAPTER 11 FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT
1101. GENERAL. Facsimile comprises the transmission of fixed graphic material including pictures, sketches, text or handwriting from one point to another by electrical means. Three different facsimile equipments are available for general use as covered in accompanying photographs and tabulations and described briefly below.
1102. TAPE FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT RC-58-B.
This is a machine for transmitting copy generally in the form of hand printing on a tape. Standard typewriter characters are too small. At the sending end the text is hand printed with pencil in a 3/8" high band on a 3/4” wide tape, using a writing stand provided with guides and means for holding a roll of blank tape. Hand printing can be done at speeds up to about 15 words per minute or 18" of tape per minute. The machine sends tape at the rate of 50" per minute, or about 42 words per minute. The scanning is at 72 lines per lineal inch of tape. The output of the machine is a frequency modulated signal, picture white being set at 1150 cycles and picture black at 1650 cycles. The sending and receiving machines are mounted in a single housing, and the receiver can be used to monitor outgoing signals if desired. The receiver uses direct electromechanical recording, in which the tape is pressed against an inked printing element to make the marks. The received record is in the form of two duplicate lines of letters, one above the other, on a tape 3/4” wide. Tape facsimile signals may be transmitted over any voice channel, wire or radio, and carrier telephone channels may be used.
1103. FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT RC-120.
a. This is a general purpose page machine providing for the transmission and reception of printed, written, drawn or photographic copy over regular voice communication channels. Original copy for transmission may be up to 7" x8-5/8" in dimensions but the actual message or picture for transmission should not exceed 7” x 7-3/8” for photographic recording of 6-1/4” x 7-3/8” for direct
recording. Transmission may be arranged for reception as a negative on film, or a positive on bromide photographic paper, or as a positive on direct recording paper (Teledeltos). The so-called "transceiver" unit includes a driving motor and rotating drum for carrying the record sheet or film, and may be used for either sending or receiving purposes.
_b. The output of the sending machine gives amplitude modulation of an 1800 cycle carrier current. The double sideband width is somewhat over 1250 cycles, in the range from about 1175 to 2425 cycles. For radio operation a Converter CV-2/TX is available to transform the amplitude modulated (AM) signal into a frequency modulated (FM) signal shifting from 1800 cycles for maximum signal to 3000 cycles for minimum signal. Alternatively this converter can be used for translating the FM signals back to AM signals at the receiver. Scanning is at the rate of 96 lines per inch at 90 rpm and a 7" x 7-3/8" picture may be sent in about 7 minutes. Facsimile Equipments RC-120-A and RC-120-B include minor improvements in design but can be used interchangeably on the same circuit with the RC-120 equipment.
1104. FACSIMILE SET AN/TXC-1. This is a page machine for transmi11ing weather maps and other copy as large as 12” x 17-1/2" in about 20 minutes. It uses Facsimile Transceiver TT-l/TXC-1, and either direct or photographic recording, other technical features of the equipment are similar to those of the RC-120 equipment, but in view of the difference in picture sizes this equipment cannot be used interchangeably with RC-120 type equipments. In the AN/TXC-1 set, scanning is at the rate of 96 lines per inch at 60 rpm of the drum. The equipment is intended for fixed station use only. Unlike the RC-120 equipment, it includes no provision for operation from a 6-volt battery, no portable dark tent, and the photographic equipment is different. Converter CV-2/TX can be used with the AN/TXC-1 set, if desired.
251
252
Par. 1105
1105. FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION.
_______In Operation_____
Shown Dimens i ons
Nomenclature in Weight in Inches KVA
Name Type No. Figjfo. Component Parts Lbs. L D H or Watts T.M. _______________________________________Remarks_____________________
Tape RC-58-B 1101 10 amps. 11-374 Equipment for transmitting copy generally in the
Facsimile at 12 form of hand printing on a tape 3/4" wide, either
Equipment volts de over wire circuits or radio circuits. For use in
vehicles or at fixed stations. In vehicles equipment is powered from 12 volt vehicle battery, at fixed stations from Battery BB-50 and Rectifier
RA-54-A.
Amplifier BC-908B 39 14-1/2 8-1/2 9-7/8 Includes scanner and recorder amplifiers and dyna-
motor.
Amplifier Cover 0.8 15 8-5/8 9-1/2 Waterproof canvas cover. Permanently installed on
BG-128-B portable unit for use in service. A
Amplifier Mounting 4 14-3/8 7-1/s 9-5/8 Base and rear wall support with rubber shock mount-
FT-318-B ings.
Cord CD-606-B 2.6 96 18 conductor shielded cable to interconnect ampli-
fier and recorder-scanner.
Cord CD-608-B 1.7 102 2 conductor shielded DC power cord.
Cord CD-1018 0.5 120 2 conductor shielded receiver cord. Has Plug PL-55.
Cord CD-1019 0.6 120 2 conductor shielded transmitter cord. Shield used
as a 3rd conductor. Has Plug PL-66.
Recorder-Scanner 35 11-5/8 ll-s/a 10 Combination recorder unit for receiving and tape
BC-918-B scanning unit for sending. Includes tape reel.
Recorder-Scanner 0.8 11-3/4 11 9-1/2 Waterproof canvas cover. Permanently installed on
Cover BG-118-B portable unit for use in service.
Recorder-Scanner 3.7 11-1/4 8 9-b/8 Base and rear wall support with rubber shock
Mounting FT-328-B mountings.
Recorder Tape M-298 0.9 3/4 7 diam. Tape for either sending or receiving purposes.
(48 rolls) per roll
Spare Parts Chest 9 14-3/4 9 8-3/4 Contains 4 rolls extra tape, fuses, vacuum tubes,
CH-108-B vibrator and other replaceable parts. Weight is
for chest alone, not including spare parts.
Writing Stand 2 9-1/4 8-1/2 1-1/4 Flat metal box holding 1 roll of tape and having
MC-308-B writing guides.
2 Copies of TM 11-374
Rectifier RA-54-A 1101 68 18 16-1/2 9 450 11-374 Selenium type for charging 12-volt Battery BB-50
watts from 115 volt 60 cycle ac.
Battery BB-50 1101 64 12-7/8 7-1/8 9-7/8 11-374 12 volt storage battery for supplying equipment
RC-58-B in fixed installations.
Par. 1105
_____________________________________________In Operation_____ w___ , . Shown___________________Dimensions
Nomenclature- in Weight in Inches KVA
—------ ^peNo. Fig.No. Component Parts _Lbs. L~ D H- or Watts T.M. ______________________ Remarks
Facsimile RC-120 1102
Equipment 11-375B Page 7" x 7-3/8" can be transmitted in 7 min. For
use on wire or short radio circuits on AM basis
or in combination with Converter CV-2/tx on longer radio circuits on JM basis. Either direct or photographic recording process may be used. Facsimile Trans- 60 22 12 in Connects to line thru telephone, not included,
ceiver FX-1 Includes drive motor, scanning drum, amplifiers,
connecting cords and line connecting coils.
o.._ i. . Scans at 96 lines per inch at 90 rnm.
PE-140 PP 7 50 12 12 10 250 watts For use on 100 t0 130 volt, 50 to 65 cycle ac.
PfE-150UPPly 60 K 8~3/4 H-l/2 6 volt storage battery, battery case and a
charger. For emergency operation of trans-
ceiver on battery. Battery drain 28 amps.
Chest CH-117 112 27-1/4 19 13 JNot provided with RC-120-Aor RC-120-B).
'4 d I3 Carrying case for Facsimile Transceiver FX-1.
nr. tic , (Weight includes unit).
Chest CH-116 105 27 16-1/4 16-3/4 Carrying case for Power Supply PE-140. Also
carries 1000 sheets of Teledeltos paper, running spare tubes for FX-1 and PE-140, 2 developing Photographic 85 28 13 u tanks PH-409 and 3 pads of message paper.
Equipment PH-411 14 Includes Bag BG-140 (portable dark tent) in
equipment PH-411 Bag BG_122 and Frame in Bag BG_125>
Also Bag BG-124 (Duffle bag to contain all
other bags). Also includes photographic chemicals, films, paper and supplies in Case TM 11-375B PH-410 and tanks in Chest CH-116.
Facsimile RC-120-A 1102
Equipment 11-375B Similar to equipment RC-120 and will work with
60 “ 12 10 rrom r&1 of B°-120 n- *««•*•• POT9TjUAPly 50 12 12 10 250 *att‘ Differs from FE-140 of BC-120 Is apparatus
rjs-±»u-A data 11 n
Ji* 2’-V4 19 , 13 , Same as for DC-120,
heat CH-l.a6 105 27 16-1/4 16-3/4 Same as for RC-120.
Photographic 85 28 13 14 Same as for RC-120.
Equipment PH-411
TM 11-375B
Table continued on next page
700898 0—46-----18
253
Par. 1105
254
1105. FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT - DESCftlPTJOfr’, (CONTINUED) ____________________________________________In Operation____
Shown< Dimensions
, Nomenclature in Weight in Inches______ KVA
[Name Type No. Fig.No. Component Parts Lbs. L D H or Watts T.M. ______________________________Remarks_____________________
Facsimile RC-120-B 1102 11-375B Similar to equipments RC-120 and RC-120-Aand will
Equipment and work with same.
1103 Facsimile Trans- 60 22 12 10 Differs from FX-1A of RC-120^Ain apparatus details.
ceiver FX-l-B
Power Supply 50 12 12 10 250 watts Differs from PE-140-A of RC-120-A in apparatus
PE-140-B details.
Chest CH-117 112 27-1/4 19 13 Same as for RC-120.
Chest CH-116 105 27 16-1/4 16-3/4 Same as for RC-120.
Photographic 85 28 13 14 Same as for RC-120.
Equipment PH-411
TM 11-375B
Facsimile AN/TXD-1 11-375B Page Facsimile Equipment for fixed station use only.
Set Copy up to 12” x 17-1/2" can be transmitted in 20
minutes. For use on wire or short radio circuits on AM basis or in combination with Converter
CV-2/TX on longer radio circuits on FM basis.
Either direct or photographic recording may be used. Not usable with RC-120-( ) equipments.
Facsimile Trans- Scanning at 96 lines per inch at 60 rpm. Includes
ceiver TT-l/TXC-1 connecting cords, line coupling units and dust
cover.
Power Pack For use on 100 to 130 volt 50 to 65 cycle ac.
PP-86/TXD-1 (No provision for 6 volt operation).
Table MT-252/TXC-1 Table for mounting transceiver and power pack.
Photograph Equip- Includes chemicals, films, paper, trays and 4 pack-
ment ages of Teledeltos (250 sheets each) 12" x 18-3/4".
No portable dark tent or developing tanks are included.
Converter CV-2/TX 1104 30 12-1/2 9-1/2 9-1/2 50 watts 11-2252 For AM to FM or FM to AM conversions for use with
RC-120-( ) or AN/TXC-1 Equipments on radio circuits. Includes connecting cords. Operates on 100 to 130 volt 50 to 70 cycle ac. (Alternative 6 volts dc with 6.5 amp. drain).
Case CY-56/TX 18 20 13-3/8 12-5/8 Carrying case for Converter CV-2/TX. Contains
running spare tubes, vibrator and 2 copies of
TM 11-2252.
Par. 1105
255
JL
AMPLIFIER—। RECORDER __
SCANNER—। |
""! /—writing stand £ 11 4 »i®1* ^r* AKSStas^A
fi3 Moral «&£^^
Il « ri&r ♦ .. ....,> » ...
— L. -r^A, taWf . "~~ —"TBrsxSSrr- Irt*
I ' If TO RADIO
facsimile \ .AaaMalfc^v^WMMMBawwp*
L '*WmIWBIm W I TRANSCEIVER 1 J
t HRMaKL J r power J
EMheSb*** I supply 9f9< Tfl Frv\ ^*irTi ■
/J il V■ BBT
/ 4f WffjW: *-8:^Ai.■>*4*S V^miKL /
“‘‘ ■• If'' ' , '■'T~r "I" \
। a WHHI- ENGACINGknot
developing "**••«» T FW phasing r।nc-/
TANK -----L PACK OF BM
BROMIDE 4mHI 7Z DRUM—' ----ttHWT'JONES PLUG
PAPER »>K SOCKET
| CONTRAST CONTROL—' jBM'
CONNECTING TELEPHONE LEAD SCREW—* IN PUT-OUTPUT
COILS— POWER SWITCH—' RECEPTACLE
FIGURE 1102. Facsimile Equipment RC-120 FIGURE 1103. Facsimile Transceiver FX-l-B
256
Par. 1106-1107
1106. FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Nomenclature Stock No. Heaviest Pkg. Total Weight Lbs. Total Cu. Ft.
Pa cited for Export In Carrying Case packed for Export In Carrying Case Packed for Export In Carrying Case
Name Type No.
Tape Facsimile Equipment RC-58-Ba 6C25-58B 350° 255 350° 255 30° 20
Rectifier RA-54-A 3H4684 99 99 3.2
Battery BB-50 3B50 64 64 1
Facsimile Equipment RC-120b 6C25-120 146 113 500 390 22 13
Facsimile Equipment RC-120-Ab 6C25-120-A 146 113 417 322 20 11.5
Facsimile Equipment RC-120-Bb 6C25-120-B 146 113 417 322 20 11.5
Facsimile Set AN/TXC-lb
Converter Case CV-2/TX CY-56/TK 2C720-2 ) ) 2Z1891-56) 113 53 113 53 3.5 2.3
aFor fixed installations also requires bFor long radio circuits also requires Estimated.
Rectifier RA-54-A and Battery BB-50.
Converter CV-2/TX with Case CY-56/TX
chemicals
1107. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES.
Nomenclature Expendable Supplies Stock No.
Name Type No.
Tape Facsimile Equipment RC-58-B Recorder Tape
Facsimile Equipment RC-120-( ) Teledeltos Paper Film Type A De ve 1 o pe r-Powde r Developer-Powder (1000 sheets) D-72 (quart size) DK-60A (gallon size) 6M877 8D50-1 8C14-1 8C48-1
Facsimile AN/TXC-1 Teledeltos Paper Film Photographic • -
257
Par. 1201-1206
CHAPTER 12
POWER EQUIPMENT
Section I
General
1201. SCOPE AND USE.
g,. This chapter gives descriptive information on power equipment which can be used to supply power to any tactical or fixed plant equipment communication system.
Although very often the power equipment is a part of a particular communication system, in many cases, however, its design is not necessarily confined to such a system. For the most part its design is such that it can be used universally to supply power for various types and kinds of load within its particular capacity, which insures that its field of use is not limited to any particular communication system.
c. The information on the power equipment is divided into five parts as follows:- section II Engine Driven Generator Sets, section III Rectifiers, section IV Power Ringing Units, section V Batteries.
d. A summary of the prevailing electrical frequencies, voltages and other characteristics of commercial power supplies throughout the world is given in section VI.
Section II
Engine Driven Generator Sets
1202. GENERAL.
a. The engine driven generator sets for tactical use are designed to deliver either direct current or alternating current of the proper voltage and capacity as required for the operation of the associated communication systems. The direct current sets vary in capacity from 0.25 KW to 0.75 KW while the capacity of the alternating current sets vary from 0.3 KW to 10 KW
J). The engine driven generator sets for use in the fixed plant range in capacity from 0.75 KW to 100 KW Except for PE-167-A they generate single phase or three phase alternating current of the required voltage
1203. DESCRIPTION OF TACTICAL ENGINE GENERATOR"
a. The engine driven generator sets when used with tactical communication systems are necessarily designed to be readily portable. The assembly consists of the engine, generator, base, control panel and fuel tank so as to form a complete self contained power unit. In general the larger capacity sets are mounted
on skid type metal bases and are enclosed in sheet metal housing with removable sides, while the smaller capacity sets are mounted on a wooden base to which a wooden crate can be fastened by snap latches when the set is not in use. All engines use gasoline for fuel and a number of the light weight sets use a two cycle engine. Descriptions of these sets are given in paragraph 1207.
b. This same list of engine driven generator sets has been arranged in accordance with the magnitudes of their power output in paragraph 1203.
1204. STOCK NUMBER & LOGISTICAL DATA FOR TACTICAL ENGINE GENERATOR SETS Paragraph 1209 gives stock number and logistical data for the engine driven generator sets listed in paragraph 1207.
1205. DESCRIPTION OF FIXED PLANT ENGINE GENERATOR SETS.
a. The engine driven generator sets for this type of installation are, in general, designed to mount on concrete or heavy wooden bases located inside a building or shelter to protect them from the weather. All sets are equipped with fuel pumps permitting the use of a separate fuel tank, which may be a small tank located adjacent to the engine or a buried tank for supplying one or more of the larger capacity sets. The fuel tanks, except for a few of the smaller capacity units, are not furnished as part of the sets. For the sets of 10 KW capacity and above a separate control panel is furnished as part of the power unit. The sets of 15 KW output and more, with the exception of the 35 KW set, are driven by Diesel engines, all the other sets use gasoline for fuel.
b. The exceptions to the above general descriptions are the PE-95-F and the PE-235-A, which are mounted on skid type metal bases and enclosed by a sheet metal housing with removable sides. The control panel, fuel tank and starting storage battery are mounted inside the housing. The assembly thus forms a self contained power unit, which can be used in the open, if found desirable to do so. The descriptions of these sets are listed in paragraph 1210.
c. Paragraph 1211 shows the fixed plant engine generator sets arranged by capacities.
1206. STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA FOR FIXED PLANT ENGINE GENERATOR SETS. Paragraph 1S12 gives the stock numbers and logistical data for the engine driven generator sets listed in paragraph 1210.
259
Par. 1207
1207. ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION
Generator5
Type No. Fig. No. Net Wt. lbs. Approx. Size in Oper. - In. L H W Gen. Mfr. Code KVA PF KW Rated Volts AC RPM Rated Volts DC Volt No. Control Panel
PE-43-HH PE-43-HJ PE-43-HK - 137 130 100 23 23 23 22 25 15 20 20 24 PIO PIO PIO 0.55 0.55 0.55 32 32 32 INH INH INH 2 2 No No No
PE-49-D,-F, -G & -H - 257 36 22 17 CON (0.35 (0.36 2750 1000) 14.6) RHEO 8 Cond. Plug Yes
PE-75-D.-G, -H,-J,-K, -P,-S,-T, -U,-AA,-AB & -AC 1201 330 36 26 19 LET. 2.5 1.0 2.5 120 1800 1 INH ( Two- ) (2 Wire) (Reeps ) No
PE-77-A to -C PE-77-D & -E 1202 72 86 20 22 22 22 16 12 PIO PIO 0.25 0.25 115 115 Comp. Wound ( Two- ) (2 Wire) (Reeps ) No
PE-95-A.-B & -c PE-95-G & -H 1203 1203 1360 1556 73 68 39 39 27 28 ONA ONA (12.5 (12.5 1.0 0.8 5.0 10 5 115 120/240) 120/240) 1 1 INH INH 2 2 or 3 Yes Yes
FE-99-A.-B, -D,-E & -F 1204 1150 60 42 28 (GEC (ACB (FSE (CON 7.5 1.0 7.5 120 1800 3 Yes 3 Yes
PE-108-A.-B & -c PE-108-D & -E 1205 250 250 30 30 27 27 28 28 PIO PIO 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 0.6 0.6 110 110 1 1 12.5 12.5 ( 7% (INH ( 7% (INH 7 Cond. Plug Yes
PE-162-A 1208 40 19 11 14 EMS 0.25 (.4A-500V) (7.5A-7V )
PE-197-A 1206 790 44 31 22 HOB 6.2 0.8 5 120 1 Yes 2 Yes
PE-2O1-A, -B & -C 1207 341 36 24 19 LET. (0.7 (0.3 1.0 0.7 0.3 115 1800 14.5 INH ( Two- ) (2-Wire) (Reeps ) Yes
PE-210-B 60 18 11 14 EMS 0.45 7 to 22 INH Yes
PE-214-A 1208 40 18 11 14 EMS 0.3 1.0 0.3 120/240 1 ( One- ) (2 Wire)
PE-214-B 1209 56 18 11 14 EMS 0.3 1.0 0.3 120/240 1
(Reep )
PU-8/TTQ-1 383 44 40 22 ONO 3 1.0 3 115 1800 1 INH 2 Yes
GENERATOR MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCES
Manufacturer Address Reference
American Custom Rui1t Motor Chicago, Ill. ABC
Continental Electric Company Newark, N. J. CON
Electric Motor & Specialities Company Ft. Wayne, Ind. EMS
F. S. Electric Company Memphis, Tenn. FSE
General Electric Company Ft. Wayne, Ind. GEC
Hobart Bros. Troy, Ohio HOB
Leland Electric Company Dayton, Ohio LEL
D. W. Onan & Sons Minneapolis, Minn. ONO
Pioneer G.n-E-Motor Corp. Chicago, Ill. PIO
aAll a-c generators operate at 60 cycles.
260
Par. 1207
Engineb
Eng
Mfr. Code No. No. RFM
Mod, Cyl Cyc HP
B&S AP 1 4 1.95 2350
WIS AB 1 4 2.85 2350
JAC J-150 • 1 2 1.35 2350
WIS ABS 1 4 3.6 2750
Gal.
Hrly How TM or
Cu.ln. Cool- Start- Fuel Con- Instr.
Disp. ing ing Cons. nected Book
9.0 A Man. 0.25 Dir. TM H-302H~l
13.5 A Man. 0.25 Dir.
7.0 A Man. 0.25 Dir. TM 11-302K
13.5 A Elect. 0.25 Dir. TM 11-920
(F only
covered)
Remarks
PE-43 is part of Bat. Chg. Set SCR-169 Consists of PE-43 Cord form by 4
Panel BD-LT-61 and CD-107. PE-43 mtd. on crate plat-base & equipped with cover attached snap latches.
on skid type base. Has wooden hood & hood with 4 drawbolts latches & 4 Control panel equipped with field rheostat,
Mtd. base handles ammeter, field switch starter button and terminals for charging batteries from 14.6 volt winding.
B&S ZZ 1 4 6.5 2400 22.9 A Man. 0.65 Belt TM 11-900 Mtd. on skid type base. Tools & spare part box mtd. on top of gen.
B&S IL 1 4 1 2700 4.7 A Man. 0.12 Dir. TM 11-903 Mtd. on wood base, equipped with crate
B&S N 1 4 1.5 2700 6.2 A Man. 0.12 Dir._ cover.
Ford WIL ONI JP441 4 4 4 4 19 31 1200 1800 119.7 134.2 W W Elect. Elect. 1.2 1.2 Dir. Dir. TM TM 11-904 ' 11-904H, Mtd. on skid type base. Enclosed in - sheet metal housing with removable sides. Control panel, fuel tank & bats. mtd. inside the housing. Generator output depends upon power factor of load.
WIS VE-4 4 4 20 2200 91.5 A Elect. 1.7 Belt TM 11-923 Mtd. on skid type base. Bats & control
panel mtd. on base. Cont. panel equipped with 3 ammeter, voltmeter & voltmeter switch, circuit breaker, freq, meter, voltage reg. bat. chg. ammeter, time meter, two 2-wire recps, 1 3-wire recp. & 3 power term, studs. Replaced by PE-19'7.
WIS WIS AA AB 1 1 4 4 1.4 2.3 1800 1800 10.9 13.5 A A Elect. Elect. 0.3 0.4 Dir. Dir.
JAC J-100 1 2 1 3600 4.7 A Man. 0.1 Dir.
HER ZXB 4 4 13.5 1800 65 W Elect. 1.1 Dir.
B&S B 1 4 3.3 2400 14.2 A Man. 0.5 Belt
JAC J-100 1 2 1 3000 4.7 A Elect. 0.1 Dir.
JAC J-100 1 2 1 3600 4.7 A Man. 0.1 Dir.
JAC J-100 1 2 1 3600 4.7 A Man. 0.1 Dir.
ONO W-3M 2 4 7 1800 38.8 W Man. 0.8 Dir.
TM 11-927
TM 11-940
TM 11-941
TM 11-913
TM 11-932
ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCES
Mtd. on crate base with crate cover fastened by 4 clamp latches. Cover has 4 handles. Control panels for all sets have a-c voltmeter, 2 recps., magnetic starting switch, bat. cutout rel. & filter coils.
Mtd. on skid type base. Enclosed in sheet metal housing with removable sides. Control panel, fuel tank & bats mtd. inside the housing. Incl. cable, tools and spare bat. Replaces PE-99.
Mtd. in pipe framework. Output 1imited to 1 KW; for example, 700 watts AC and 300 watts DC or 1000 watts AC and no DC or combination thereof. No longer procured. Replaced by PE-( ).
Tubular loop frame 'and canvas cover. Continuously variable from 7 to 22V. Includes meters (V. and Amps.)
Replaced by PE-214-B.
Tubular loop frame. Includes tool and spare parts box and 1 gal. gas tank.
Replaces PE-214-A.
Part of Operations Center AN/TTQ-1.
Manufacturer
Briggs & Stratton Corp.
Ford Motor Company Jacobsen Manufacturing Co. Hercules Motors Corp. Willy-Overland Motors Wisconsin Motor Corp.
Address Reference
Milwaukee, Wis. B&S
Detroit, Mich. Ford
Racine, Wis. JAC
Canton, Ohio HER
Toledo, Ohio WIL
Milwaukee, Wis. WIS
bGasoline used in all types. Magneto ignition is employed in all sets except PE-95-G & H which employ battery ignition.
261
Par. 1207
FIGURE 1201. Power Unit PE-75-D
FIGURE 1202. Power Unit PE-77-B
FIGURE 1203. Power Unit PE-95-( ) Part of Trailer K-52- ( )
262
Par. 1207
FIGURE 1204. Power Unit PE-99-E
FIGURE 1205. Power Unit PE-108-A
FIGURE 1206. Power Unit PE-197 FIGURE 1207. Power Unit PE-201-B
263
Par. 1207-1208
FIGURE 1208. Power Unit PE-214-A
FIGURE 1209. Power Unit PE-214-B
1208. ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - TACTICAL - ARRANGED BY CAPACITIES.
KW Nomenclature Type No. Volts PH Wires
D-C A-C
0.25 PE-77-( ) 115 2
0.25 PE-162-A 500/7 4
0.3 PE-214-( ) 120/240 1 2
0.45 PE-210-B 7 to 22 2
0.55 PE-43-( ) 32 2
0.6 PE-108-( ) 14.6/1000 115 1 7 Cond. Plug
0.71 PE-49-( ) 1 &. 8 Cond. Plugs
1.0 PE-201-( ) 14.5 115 1 4
2.5 PE-75-( ) 120 1 2
3.0 PU-8/TTQ-1 115 1 2
5.0 PE-95-A.-B, & -C 115 1 2
5.0 PE-95-G & H 120/240 1 2 or 3
5.0 PE-197-A 120 1 2
7.5 PE-99-( ) 120 3 3
10.0 PE-95-G & -Hb 120/240 1 2
aAll a-c generators operate at 60 cycles.
bpE-95-G & -H is 10 KW at unity power factor or 5 KW when power factor is 0.8.
264
Par. 1209
1209. ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - TACTICAL - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Nomenclature Type No. Stock No. Weight (lbs.) Heaviest Package Total Weight (lbs.) Total Volume Cubic Feed Ship Tonsa
Packed, for Export In Carry-ing Case Packed for Export In Carry-ing Case Packed for Export In Carry-ing Case
PE-4J-HH 5H454J.7 270 180 270 180 10 7.4 0.3
PE-4J-HJ 3H454J (HJ) 260 170 260 170 10 7.4 0.3
PE-4J-HK 3H454J (HK) 220 140 220 140 7 5 0.2
PE-49-L,F, G or H 3H4549D,F,G, or H 495 300 495 500 20.2 13 0.5
PE-75-B,G,H, J,K,P,S,T, U,AA,AB, or AC. JH-4575D,G,H, J,K,P,S,T,U, AA,AB, or AC 445 No Case 445 No Case 16 No Case 0.4
PE-77-A,B,C, D, & E 5H4577A,B,C, D, or E 225 110 225 110 7.5 5 0.2
PE-95-A,B,& C 5H4595a,B orc 1700 No Case 1700 No Case 84 No Case 2.1
PE-95-G & H 5B4595G or H 1800 No Case 1800 No Case 84 No Case 2.1
PE-99-A,B,C, E, & F 3H4599A,B,C, E, or F 1592 No Case 1592 No Case 76 No Case 1.9
PE-108-A,B,C, D, & E 5HU6OO-1O8 A,B,C,D,or E 429 277 429 277 18.1 13 0.5
PE-162-A*5 3H46OO-162A 132 87 132 87 7.2 4.1 0.2
PE-197-A 5E46OO-197A 1240 No Case 1261 No Case 56 No Case 1.4
PE-201-A,B, & C 3H46OO-2O1A, B, or C 450 No Case 450 No Case 17 No Case 4 '1 .1
PE-210-Ab 3H4600-210A 140 95 140 95 7-2 4.1 0.2
PE-214-Ab 3H46OO-214A 132 87 132 87 7.2 4.1 0.2
PE-214-Bb 3H4600-214b 140 95 140 95 7.2 4.1 0.2
PU-8/TTQ-1 5H4551-8 1000 No Case 1100 No Case 56 No Case 1.4
aA ship ton = 40 cu. ft.
^For two PE-162-A, two PE-210-A or two PE-214-A or B in Export Box (without Carrying Case) weight is 160 lbs., cubic feet is 7.0.
265
Per. 1210
1210. ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - FIXED PLANT - DESCRIPTION
generator3.
Type No.b Fig. No. •Net lbs. Approx.Dimen. in Oper. - In. Mfr. Code FID COL COL KVA PF 0.8 0.8 0.8 KW Rated Volts Phase Volt Reg. Yes Yes Yes No Wires 3 3 3 Control Panel on Set No No No
L 80 84 84 H 39 43 43 X 28 28 28
PE-78-A,-B,-C PE-78-F PE-78-H 1210 1210 1850 2050 2050 12.5 12.5 12.5 10 10 10 120/240 120/240 120/240 1 1 1
PE-79-D & -E - 1870 81 43 28 ACB 12.5 0.8 10 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-79-F 1211 1680 81 43 28 WES 12.5 0.8 10 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-81-E 1212 3705 100 51 32 COL 43.7 0.8 35 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-81-F - 3705 100 5 32 COL 43.7 0.8 35 > 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-85-F 1213 5100 95 63 38 CON 31.2 0.8 25 120/203 3 Yes 4 No
PE-85-L 1214 3690 95 52 34 RDA 31.2 0.8 25 230 3 Yes 3 No
PE-85-M 1215 3950 89 61 35 CCN 31.2 0.8 25 230 3 Yes 3 No
PE-9S-F 1216 1545 73 39 31 ONA 6.2 0.8 5 120/240 1 Yes 2/3 Yes
PE-142-B — 5700 no 67 41 EM 62.5 0.8 50 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-142-C 1217 6300 114 75 39 EM 62.5 0.8 50 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-142-D 1218 5700 no 67 41 EM 62.5 0.8 50 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-142-E 1219 5700 no 67 41 EM 62.5 0.8 50 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-148-A 1220 900 37 37 24 KAT 3 0.8 2.4 110/220 1 RHEO 2/3 No
PE-167-A 1221 75 19 16 13 AAP (0.175 6 RHEO Yes
(0.350 12
PE-205-A 1222 3000 92 51 30 GEC 18.7 0.8 15 120/240 1 Yes 3 No
PE-205-B 1223 3770 85 58 ■ 28 GEC 18.7 0.8 15 120/240 1 Yes 3 Wo
PE-207-A 1222 3000 92 51 30 GEC 18.7 0.8 15 120/208 3 Yes 4 No
PE-2O7-B 1223 3770 85 58 28 GEC 18.7 0.8 15 120/208 3 Yes 4 No
PE-215-A 1224 5600 119 60 41 GEC 62.5 0.8 50 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-220-A & -B 1225 18670 194 108 63 WES 125 0.8 100 240 3 Yes 3 No
PE-235-A 1226 890 50 36 23 ONA 5 1.0 5 110/220 1 INH 3 Yes
PE-236-A 1227 141 20 22 15 AAP 0.7 1.0 0.7 ns 1 RHEO 2 Yes
PU-19/FRC 1228 4200 96 59 32 IDE 25 0.8 20 120/240 1 Yes 3 No
0NAN-W3M-13 1229 450 35 31 16 ONA 3 1.0 3 ns 1 INH 2 No
Kohler 1M2LA 1230 496 45 37 16 KOH 1.5 1.0 1.5 no 1 INH 2 Yes
GENERATOR MANUFACTURER'S F IEFERENCES
Manufacturer Address Reference
Atlas Aircraft Products Co. New York, N.Y, AAP
• American Custom Built Motors Chicago, , 111. ACB
Columbia Electric Company Cleveland, Ohio COL
Continental Electric Co. Newark, N.J. CON
Electrical Machinery Co. Minneapolis, Minn. EM
Fidelity Electric Company Lancaster, Pa, FID
General Electric Company Ft. Wayne, Ind. GEC
The Ideal Electric & Mfg. Co. Mansfield, Ohio IDE
Kato Electric 1 Company Mankato, , Minn, KAT
Kohler Company Kohler, Wis. KOH
D. W. Onan and Sons Minneapolis, Minn. ONA
Rogers Diesel & Aircraft Corp, , New York, N. Y. RDA
Westinghouse Elec. & Mfg. Co. E. Pittsburgh, , Pa. WES
aAU generators are 60 cycles a-c except PE-L67-A which provides 6 or 12 volts d-c.
^Designations other than PE and PU are manufacturer's codes.
instruction books are issued by the manufacturer. See paragraph 1212 for stock numbers of Instruction Books.
266
Par. 1210
Engine** Tech. Man. or Instr.Bookc Remarks
Code Model Type No Cyl HP RPM i Cu.In. Disp. Ignition Fuel Tank on Set Gal Hrly Fuel Cons.
HER QXB-5 Gas 6 47 1800 205 Bat. No 2.00 Instr.Book) Separate Control Panel is furnished.
HER JXB-5 Gas 6 34.8 1200 263 Bat. No 2.00 Instr.Book) Fuel Tank is not included with set.
HER JXB-5 Gas 6 34.8 1200 263 Bat. No 2.00 TM 11-911 j
HER JXB-5 Gas 6 34.8 1200 263 Bat. No 2.00 Instr.Book) Same as for PE-78
CON F-226 Gas 6 32.7 1200 226 Bat. No 2.00 TM 11-912F)
HER HER RXLC RXLD Gas Gas 6 6 83.4 90 1200 1200 529 558 Bat. Bat. No Nc 5.00 5.00 Instr.Book) Instr.Book) Same as for PE-78
CUM MI-400 Diesel 4 60 1200 448 Nc 3.00 Instr.Book)
HIL G-R Diesel 6 54.7 1200 318 No 3.00 TM 11-916 ) Same as for PE-78
I NT UD-9 Gas/ Diesel 4 46 1200 334 Mag. No 3.00 TM 11-916M)
WIL JP-441 Gas 4 24 1200 134 Bat. Yes 1.1 TM 11-904 Mtd. on base and enclosed in metal casing with removable sides. Control panel fuel
tank and bat. are mtd. inside of casing.
CUM HI-600 Diesel 6 90 1200 672 No 5.0 Instr.Book)
CUM HIS-600 Diesel 6 108 1200 672 No 5.0 Instr.Book) Same as for PE-78, PE-142C has super
CUM HI-600 Diesel 6 90 1200 672 No 5.0 TM 11-942D) charger for high altitude location.
CUM HI-600 Diesel 6 90 1200 672 No 5.0 TM 11-942E)
WIT VD-11 Diesel 1 4 1200 37 No 0.5 Instr.Book Concrete base is recommended.
BXS NP Gas 1 1.4 2350 6 Mag. Yes 0.2 TM 11-946 Bat. charging set. Wooden base for mtg. must be obtained locally. Separate fuel tank and line are furnished. 6 or 12 volts d-c.
HIL 4R Diesel 4 27 1200 212 No 1.6 Instr.Book) Same as for PE-78
INT UD-9 Gas/ 4 46 1200 334 Mag. No 1.6 Instr.Book) PE-205-B is for use in high altitude
Diesel location.
HIL 4R Diesel 4 27 1200 212 No 1.6 Instr.Book) Same as for PE-205-A & -B
INT UD-9 Gas/ Diesel 4 46 1200 334 Mag. No 1.6 Instr.Book)
INT UD-18 Diesel 6 92 1200 691 No 5.0 TM 11-941 Same as for PE-78
WAU 1-LRH6 Semi- 6 282 900 2894 Mag. No 12.2 Instr.Book Same as for PE-78
Diesel PE-220-B for high altitude locations.
CON Y-91 Gas 4 17.1 1800 90 Bat. Yes 1.2 Instr.Book Mtd. on skid base & enclosed in metal casing with removable sides. Control panel, fuel tank & bats. mtd. inside casing.
B&S BP Gas 1 2 1800 14 Mag. No 0.3 Instr.Book Separate fuel tank & fuel line are furnished. Wooden base for mtg. must be obtained locally.
INT UD-9 Gas/ 4 46 1200 334 Mag. No 2.5 Instr.Book Fuel tank is not included. Separate
Diesel control panel furnished with set.
ONA W3M Gas ■ 2 7 1800 39 Mag. No 1.0 Instr.Book Base for mtg. must be furnished locally. Separate fuel tank & fuel line are
furnished.
KOH IM-21 Gas 4 3.2 1800 38 Mag. No 0.4 TM 11-935 Eng. base has 4 holes for mtg. on concrete or heavy wooden base furnished locally.
ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCES
Manufacturer Address Reference
Briggs & Stratton Corp. Milwaukee, Wis. B&S
Continental Motors Corp Muskegon , Mich. CON
Cummins Engine Company Columbus , Ind. CUM
Hercules Motors i Corp. Canton, < Ohio HER
Hill Diesel Engine Company Lansing, Mich. HIL
International Harvester Co. Chicago, Ill. INT
Kohler Company Kohler, Wis. KOH
D. W. Onan & Sons Minneapolis, Minn. ONA
Waukesha Motor Company Waukesha , Wis. WAU
Willy-Overland Motors Toledo, I Ohio WIL
Witte Engine Works Kansas City, Mo WIT
All are 4 cycle engines.. All are water cooled except PE-167-A, PE-236-A which are air cooled. All are directly connected to generator except PE-148-A which is belt connected. Starting is electrical for all except PE-220-A & -B which are started by gas engine and PE-236-A, 0nan-W3M-13 and Kohler 1M21A which are started manually.
267
Par. 1210
FIGURE 1210. Power Unit PE-78-F
FIGURE 1213. power Unit PE-85-F
FIGURE 1211. Power Unit PE-79-F
FIGURE 1214. Power Unit PE-85-L
FIGURE 1212. Power Unit PE-81-E
FIGURE 1215. power Unit PE-85-M
268
Par. 1210
FIGURE 1216. Power Unit PE-95-F
FIGURE 1219. power Unit PE-142-E
FIGURE 1217. Power Unit PE-142-C
FIGURE 1220. Power Unit PE-148-A
FIGURE 1218. Power Unit PE-142-D
FIGURE 1221. Power Unit PE-167-A
700898 0—40-----19
269
Par. 1210
FIGURE 1222. Power Unit PE-205-A or PE-20 7-A
FIGURE 1223. Power Unit PE-205-B
FIGURE 1224. Power Unit PE-215-A
270
Par. 1210
FIGURE 1225. Power Unit PE-220-A or B
271
FIGURE 1226. Power Unit PE-235-A
Par. 1210
FIGURE 1227. Power Unit PE-236-A
FIGURE 1229. Engine Generator (Onan W3M-13)
FIGURE 1228. Power Unit PU-19/FRC
FIGURE 1230. Engine Generator (Kohler 1M21A)
272
Par. 1211-1212
1211, ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - FIXED PLANT - ARRANGED BY CAPACITIES.
KW Nomenclaturea Type No. Volts PH Wires
0.35 PE-167-A 6/12b
0.75 EK-236-A 115 1 2
1.5 Kohler 1M21A 115 1 2
2.4 PE-148-A 110/220 1 2
3.0 Qnan W3M-13 115 1 2
5.0 PE-95-F 120/240 1 3
5.0 PE-235-A 120/240 1 3
10 PE-78-( ) 120/240 1 3
10 PE-79-( ) 240 3 3
15 PE-205-( ) 120/240 1 3
15 PE-207-( ) 120/208 3 4
20 PU-19/JBC 120/240 1 3
25 PE-85-F 120/208 3 4
25 PE-85-L & -M 230 3 3
35 PE-81-( ) 240 3 3
50 EE-142-( ) 240 3 3
50 PE-215-A 240 3 3
100 PE-220-( ) 240 3 3
designations other than ; PE and PU are manufacturers codes.
°D-c generator; all others 60 cycles a-c.
1212. ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - FIXEE PLANT - STOCK NUMBERS AID LOGISTICAL DATA.
Weight (lbs.) Total Total
Heaviest Weight (lbs.) Displacement
Package Packed Packed
Nomenclature3 Stock Numbers Packed for for Export for Export
Type No. Units Instr. Book Export Pounds Cu.Ft. Ship Tonsb
PE-78-A 3H4578A) 3H4578A/1/1 3340 3600 92 2.3
PE-78-B 3H4578B) ' ' 3340 3600 92 2.3
PE-78-C 3H4578C 3H4578G/1 3340 3600 92 2.3
PE-78-F 3H4578F 3H4578F/1 3340 3600 92 2.3
PE-78-H 3H4578H.1 3340 3600 92 2.3
PE-79-D 3H4579D 3H4579D/1 3030 3390 93 2.3
PE-79-E 3i4579E 6D7800B9E 3030 3390 93 2.3
PE-79-F 3H4579F 3030 3390 93 2.3
PE-81-E 3H4581-E 3H4581E/1 4600 5000 161 4.3
PE-81-F 3H4581-F 4600 5000 161 4.3
PE-85-F 3H4585F 3H4585F/B1 6300 6800 378 9.5
PE-85-L 3H4585L 5050 5600 211 5.2
PE-85-M 3H4585M 5310 5860 225 5.6
PE-95-F 3H4595F 2050 2050 80 2
PE-142-B 3H4600-L42B 6D7800B22B 6700 8800 400 10
PE-142-C 3H4600-142C 6D7800B22C 7300 9215 494 12.3
PE-142-D 3H4600-1420 6700 8800 400 10
PE-142-E 3H4600-142E 6700 8800 400 10
PE-148-A 3H4512.3-1 3H4512.3-1/1 1196 1196 61 15
PE-167-A 3H4600-167 108 108 3.6 0.9
PE-205-A 3H4600-205A 3H4600-205A/B1 3726 4894 191 4.8
PE-205-B 3H4600-205B ®7800B15B 5100 6710 246.5
HS-207-A 3H4600-207A 3H4600-207A/B1 3800 4917 194 4.9.
PE-207-B 3H4600-207B 5100 6710
PE-215-A 3H4600-215A.1 8925 8925 308 7.7
Table continued on next page
273
par. 1213
ENGINE GENERATOR SETS - FIXED PLANT - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA . (CONTINUED)
Nomenclature® Stock Numbers Weight (lbs.) Heaviest Package Packed for Total Weight (lbs.) Packed far Export Total Displacement Packed for Export Cu.Ft.
Type No. Units Instr. Book Export Pounds Ship Tonsb 27.8 27.8
PE-220-A PE-220-B 3H4600-22QA 3EI4600-220B 3H4600-22QA/B1 3H4600-220A/B1 19300 19300 21359 21359 1113 1113
PE-235-A 3H4600-235A 6D7800B22A 1390 1390 70 1.8
PE-236-A 3H4511-1 3H4511-1/1 225 225 10 0.3
PU-19/FRC 3H4531-19F 3H4531F/B1 4750 5900 167 4.2
Onan W3M-13 3H4512.6 3H4512.6/B10 662 662 34 0.9
Kohler 1M21A 3H4524-1M21A 880 880 28 0.7
a Designations other than BE and codes. PU are manufacturer’s
b A ship ton » 40 cu. ft.
Section III Rectifiers
3,213. GENERAL,
a. Rectifiers are of the tube and disc types and are intended primarily for charging lead storage batteries. In case such storage batteries are connected to a telephone load while being charged a filtering device in the rectifier output is required in order to insure quiet telephone circuit operation. This filter is sometimes furnished separate from the rectifier and as such is usually referred to as a reactor.
b. Some of these rectifiers have their output regulated which insures the maintenance of close voltage limits on switchboards or other equipment being supplied. Others are of the nonregulated type and have rather wide voltage variations with a-c input and load changes.
c. Paragraph 1214 gives descriptive information on rectifier equipments. They operate on a-c power of 115 or 230 volts, and frequencies of 25, 40, 50 or 60 cycles. They range in capacities from a few milliamperes to 30 amperes.
d. Paragraph 1215 gives stock numbers and logistical data for rectifiers.
274
275
Far. 1214
1214. RECTIFIERS - DESCRIPTION
Shown ________In Operation______ IM or
_______Nomenclature____ In ________Rating____ Pimens ions___ Input Instruction Name___Type No. Mfr. Mfr's. No. Fig.No. Amps. Volts Weight Height Width Depth Volts Cycles Book ____________________Remarks_________
a. Tungar Type Rectifier - Gen.Elec.Co. 3049455 1231 3 19-52 48 17-1/2 12-1/8 15 115 60 GECo's Inst. For general use in charging 6
GEI-2839A to 24 cells of storage battery or for charging telephone batteries while in use.
Rectifier — Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB4B7 1232 6 7-1/2-75 57 19—3/8 8—1/4 9 115 25—40 GECo's Inst. For general use - will charge
GEH-870C up to 12, 6 volt lead storage cells.
Rectifier - Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB33B2® 1233 6 7-1/2-75 32 10-1/2 18-1/2 7-5/8 115 60 GECo's Inst. For general use - will charge
GEJ-319C up to 12, 6 volt lead storage cells.
Rectifier — Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17 1234 2-12 6-65 66 19-3/8 8-1/4 9 115 60 GECo's Inst. For general use - may be used
GEJ-680A for charging telephone batteries
• IN 11-951Q while in use by using an external
filter reactor GECo's Cat. #3126680, weighing 63-1/2 lbs., height 10-1/2", width 6-1/2", and depth 7-3/4".
Rectifier — Gen.Elec.Co. 9X649 1235 12 6—90 98 17—1/2 12—1/8 14-7/8 230 50—60 None For general use - charging up
to 15, 6 volt storage batteries at 12 amps., or 30, 6 volt storage batteries at 6 amps. -may also be used for charging telephone batteries while in use by using an external filter reactor GECo's Cat. #3049480, weighing 65 lbs., height 10-1/2" width 6-1/2", and depth 7-7/8".
Rectifier - Power Equipt. PEC-161 - 30 30 268 28-1/2 18 14 110- 40-60 None For charging 10-12 cells of
* 250 storage battery.
Rectifier and RA-36-1 ) Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17(Modified) 1236 12 0-65 125 19-3/8 11-1/2 11-5/8 115 60 04 11-338, The RA-36-( ) rectifier includes
Filter Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3126769 or 65 10-1/2 6-1/2 8-7/8 04 11-951 an external reactor filter coil
3126680 63-1/2 10-1/2 6-1/2 7-3/4 and and may be used for charging
TM 11-951Q telephone batteries while in use. This rectifier is suitable for general use in charging any lead storage cells.
b. Electron Tube Type
Rectifier - Trojan Recti- 27820 - 10-30 30 34 16-3/8 17 100- 40-60 Trojan Inst. For general use - charging 10-
fier and 250 Sheet on 12 cells of storage batteries
Equipt. Co. Catalogue and for charging telephone
Rectifier batteries whileJn use.
c. Grid Controlled 'type
Rectifier RA-43-( ) - - 1237 0.5-4.5 120 140 22 17-1/2 10-3/4 95- 60 D4 11-358 For use where regulated 120
250 Di 11-954 volts d-c is required, such as
a telegraph central office.
a All are full wave rectifiers except the Tungar Type Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB4B7 and 6RB33B2 which are half wave rectifiers.
Thble continued on next page
276
Par. 1214
RECTIFIERS - DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Shown __________In Operation_______ IM or
_______Nomenclature______ in _____________________________________Rating______ Dimensions ____Input Instruction Name___type No-,_________Mfr. Mfr’s. No. Fig.No. Amps. Volts Weight Height Width Depth Volts Cycles Book ______________________________Remarks____________
d. Copper Oxide type Rectifier - Raytheon Mfg. W-3155 1238 3 23.65 ± 170 21-1/8 19-1/8 11-1/2 95- 60 For charging 11 cells of storage
Co* 2% 130 battery and for constant float -
automatic charge of telephone batteries while in use.
Rectifier - Raytheon Mfg. W-3826 - 3 49.45 ± 240 27-7/8 19-1/8 15-1/4 95- 60 For charging 23 cells of stor-
Co» 2% 130 age battery and for constant
float - automatic charge of telephone batteries while in use.
Rectifier - Raytheon Mfg. W-1067 1230 6 23.65 240 2'l-rl/Q 19-1/8 15-1/4 95- 60 For charging 11 cells of stor-
C°» 130 age battery and for constant
float - automatic charge of telephone batteries while in use.
Rectifier - Raytheon Mfg. W-2168A 1230 6 23.65 ± 240 27-7/0 .19-1/8 15-1/4 95- 60 For charging 11 cells of stor-
Co. 2% 130 age battery and for constant
float - automatic charge of telephone batteries while in use.
Rectifier - Raytheon Mfg. W-3483 - 6 23.7 161 21-3/4 19-1/8 11-1/4 95- 60 For charging 11 cells of stor-
Co» 130 age battery and for constant
float - automatic charge of telephone batteries while in use.
e. Selenium type
Rectifier RA-37 - _ 1239 0.4 115 25-1/2 6-1/2 8-1/2 12-1/4 110 50-60 TM 11-955 For small 115V D-C applications.
3 115 AC
Rectifier RA-87 - - 1240 0.4 115 40 7-1/2 8-3/8 7-1/2 115/ 50-60 IM 11-957 For small 115V D-C applications
4.35 115 AC 230 up to 46 watts and for 115V
A-C up to 500 watts.
Rectifier RA—83—( ) — — 1241 6—12 20—10 51 16 14 10 115/ 50-60 IM 11-963 Portable Battery Charger.
230
Rectifier RA—91 — — — 2—12 6—48 150 25—1/4 21—1/4 15—1/4 115/ 50—60 For general use in charging 3
230 to 24 cells of storage battery.
a All are full wave rectifiers except the Tungar type Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB4B7 and 6RB33B2 which are half wave rectifiers.
Par. 1214
277
FIGURE 1231. Tungar Rectifier FIGURE 1232. Tungar FIGURE 1233. Tungar Rectifier
(General Electric Co. 3049455) Rectifier (General (General Electric Co. 6RB33B2)
Electric Co. 6RB4B7)
Par. 1214
FIGURE 1234. Tungar FIGURE 1235. Tungar Rectifier FIGURE 1236. Rectifier RA-36-
Rectifier (General (General Electric Co. 9X649)
Electric Co. 6RB6B17)
278
par. 1214
FIGURE 1237. Grid Controlled Rectifier FIGURE 1238. Copper oxide Rectifier (Raytheon Mfg. Co.
) W-3155, W-1067 and W-2168A)
279
Par. 1214
FIGURE 1240. Rectifier RA-87 FIGURE 1241. Rectifier RA-83-
FIGURE 1239. Rectifier RA-37
280
Par.1215
281
1215- RECTIFIERS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA
Total Displacemenfr-Total Weight lbs. __Cu. Ft.___
In In
Packed Carrying Packed Carrying ________ Nomenclature Type of_______________________________________for Case or for Case or ^tem ___Name Type No. Stock No. Equipment Mfr.______________ Mfr*s. No. Export Container Export Container
a. Rectifier - 3H4703 Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 3049455 88 53 7 2.1
b. Rectifier - 3H4706.2 Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB4B7 98 64 5.5 1.1
c. Rectifier - 3H4706B Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB33B2 36 33 1.2 1.0
d. Rectifier - 3H4712.1A Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17 114 74 5.5 1.1
Reactor for use with - 3H4604-1 Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3126680 73 66 2 0.4
above rectifier e. Rectifier - 314712.3 Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 9X649 140 106 7 2.0
Reactor for use with - - Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3049480 75 69 2 0.4
above rectifier f. Rectifier - 3H4701 Tungar Power Equipt. PEC-161 324 275 9.1 4.2
Co.
g. Rectifier & Reactor RA-36-( ) 3i4676( ) Tungar & -
Reactor (1) Rectifier &. Reactor RA-36-A,B or C 3H4676A,B or C Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17(Modified) 213 146 7 2.1
Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3126680
(2) Rectifier & Reactor RA-36-J.K or L 3H4676J,K or L Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17(Modified) 223 156 7 2.1
Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3126680
(3) Rectifier & Reactor RA-36-E or Q 3H4676E or Q Tungar Gen.Elec.Co. 6RB6B17(Modified) 230 159 7 2.1
Reactor Gen.Elec.Co. 3126769
Additional Equipment
Required for (1)^2), or (3) above (A) Frame for Rectifier TM-30 4E6530 Frame 75 50 16 9
RA-36—( ) and its reactor (B) Case for FM-30 frame CS-73 3Z973 Case ' 80 65 18 10.8
and RA-36~( ) rectifier and reactor (C) Total for item g 395 274 18 10.8
Table continued on next page
282
par. 1215
RECTIFIERS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA (Continued)
Total Displacement-
Total Weight lbs. Cu. Ft, In In
Packed Carrying Packed Carrying Nomenclature type of___________________________________for Case or for Case or Item Name type No. Stock No, Equipment Mfr,__________ Mfr*s. No. Export Container Export Container
h. Rectifier - 3H4701-3 Electron Trojan Recti- 27820 12 6.2
Tube fler & Equipt.
Co.
1. Rectifier RA-43-C ) 3H4683( ) Grid Con-
trolled
(1) Rectifier RA-43-A 3H4683A Grid Con- 182 140 7 3
trolled
Additional Equipment
Required
Case for RA-43-A CS-82-A 2Z1882A Case 70 50 9 5.3
Rectifier
(2) Rectifier RA-43-B 3H4683B Grid Con- 182 140 7 3
trolled
(3) Rectifier and Case RA-43-B 3H4683B.1 Grid Con- 252 190 9 5.3
Includes case trolled
CS-82-B in case
j. Rectifier - 3H4703.1 Copper Raytheon W-3155 231 185 9 3.1
Oxide Mfg. Co.
k. Rectifier - 2H4703.2 Copper Raytheon W-3826 319 255 12.5 5.2
Oxide Mfg. Co.
Q Q.5
q. Rectifier and Chest RA-87 3H4699-S7.1 Selenium nl ho , , . K
Includes Chest CH-158 in Cheat 1 09 3*3 1‘5
r. Rectifier RA-83 3H4699-83 Selenium 64 51 1>5 ia
a. Rectifier in carrying RA-83-A 3H4699-83A Selenium R ,
case
t. Rectifier RA-91 3H4699-91 Selenium 195 J55 5 0.5
Par. 1216-1217
Section IV
Power Ringing Units
1216. GENERAL
a_. Ringing equipments provide 20 cycle ringing current as required for signaling purposes.
b. Two types of ringing equipment are available; namely the vibrating type, which is normally used in the tactical plant, and the static type, which is normally used in the fixed plant.
£. Descriptions of these equipments are covered in paragraph 1217 and stock numbers and logisrical data are given in paragraph 1218.
1217. RINGING EQUIPMENT-DESCRIPTION
Nomenclature Shown in In Operation TM or
Type Name No. Fig. Output Rating No. Cycles Volts Watts Wt. Dimensions Height Width Depth Inst. Book Remarks
a. Tactical Interrupter W.E. 1242 18-1/2 115 20 16 7-15/16 9-1/4 5-17/32 Vibrating type; re-
Co's 84Fa Interrupter W.E. 1242 18-1/2 115 20 16 7-15/16 9-1/4 5-17/32 quires power source of 24V, 1 amp. d-c Vibrating type; re-
Co's 84Ga Telering Tel- 124 3 20 90 - 11 11-7/8 8-1/2 5-1/8 quires power source of 37V, .75 amp. d-c Vibrating type; re-
kor Mod. quires power source of 110V, 60 cycles a-c
Ha
Converter m-222 1244 20 120 - 11 6-3/4 6-5/8 8-1/4 TM11-344 Vibrating type; re-
quires power source of 2 Batteries BA-23. Part of Telephone Central Office Set TC-4.
b. Fixed Plant
Subcycle Lorain 1245 20 75-90 15 30 5 8 11-1/2 Lorain Static type, requires
Products Corp. Model Sa or 16-2/3 Products power source 105-125 Corp. volts. For 60 cycle Instrue- input output will be tion 20 cycles. For 50 Form 130 cycle input output will be 16-2/3 cycles. Non-moistureproof.
a Manufacturer's code numbers.
284
Par. 1217
FIGURE 1242. Interrupter (Western Electric Co. Types 84F or G)
FIGURE 1243. Telering (Telkor Model H)
700898 0—46——20
285
Par. 1217
FIGURE 1244. Converter M-222
FIGURE 1245. Subcycle Static Frequency Converter
286
Par. 1218-1220
1218. RINGING EQUIPMENT - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Name Type No. Stock No. Weight Lbs.-Heaviest Package Total Weight - Lbs. Packed In Carrying Total Volume - cu. ft.
Packed for Export In Carrying Case or Container Packed for Expor t In Carrying Case or Container
for Export Case or Container
a. Tactical
Interrupter W.E.Co. 841* 4F1084F 35 17 35 17 0.5 0.3
Interrupter W.E.Co. 84Ga 4F1084G 35 17 35 17 0.5 0.3
Telering Telkor Model Ha 4F2425 35 12 35 12 0.8 0.4
Converter15 M-222 b_. Fixed. Plant 4F222 25 11 25 11 0.5 0.2
Subcycle Lorain Products Corp -Model Sa 4F2315 54 34 54 34 0.5 0.3
Manufacturer’s code numbers.
Furnished with a carrying case built as an integral part of the converter.
Section V Batteries
1219. LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES.
a. The batteries described in this section include those for use with radio sets’ aircraft, automotive equipment, communication sets, etc. The smaller types of batteries for portable equipment are provided in most instances with plastic cases which are lighter in weight and stronger than moulded cases. Other cells are provided with molded hard rubber cases and covers. All batteries are of the sealed type with vents, or vent plugs.
b. Most of the batteries used with radio or other communication sets are provided with bolt, or wing nut terminals and the equipment leads are supplied with terminals to fit. If it is necessary to use, with such equipment, batteries having post terminals, an adapter for the battery posts can be obtained. Information on this adapter is given in paragraph 1224.
c, . All storage batteries for export are shipped dry charged. The electrolyte is shipped separately in quantity to depots, but as far as possible should be obtained locally from appropriate
theater, base, command or department funds for this purpose. Sulphuric acid electrolyte of 1.280 sp.gr. and 1.400 sp.gr. in one gallon containers and 10 gallon carboys is listed in paragraph 1223.
d. Paragraph 1222 gives the stock numbers and logistical data for dry charged batteries listed in paragraph 1221.
e. Storage batteries after filling with electrolyte must be kept charged to avoid deterioration. Reference should be made toTM 11-430 for the proper maintenance procedure to be followed and to sections II and III of this chapter for charging equipment which may be used.
1220. DRY BATTERIES.
a. Dry batteries are made in a variety of shapes and sizes to fit different types of equipment. In general the ampere hour capacity of a dry battery is a function of its weight. This is exemplified by the BA-70 and BA-80 batteries which are Identical in voltage, but different in size. The BA-70 has twice the capacity of, and approximately twice the weight of the BA-80.
b. Information concerning the quantities of dry batteries required for the operation of equipment maintained by the Signal Corps is given in SB 11-6, "Dry Battery Supply Data".
287
Par. 1220
c_. Paragraphs 1225 to 1226 give information concerning the various types of dry batteries which are available. The data are arranged by voltage as well as by code numbers. Reference is made to a drawing which shows the terminal arrangements of the various batteries.
d. Dry batteries are usually supplied in quantities to depots as general stock. These batteries are stocked in sealed unit packages to protect them against moisture until ready for use. Stock numbers for dry batteries and the number of batteries per unit package are listed in paragraph 1227. The data are arranged in accordance with the code numbers of the batteries. Wherever possible, supplies of batteries should be drawn from stock in these unit packages and only opened as needed.
_e. In some instances the depots may be supplied with commercial dry batter
ies instead of the regular BA types. They will be equivalent in electrical characteristics out may vary slightly in physical size from the dimensions shown for the equivalent BA type. Data on commercial type dry batteries which are equivalent to the BA types are also given in paragraph 1227.
f. Dry batteries in use should be checked for corrosion of contacts and this condition corrected according to TB SIG 6. Dry batteries are not rechargeable and should be replaced when their voltage in use falls below that needed to operate the equipment with which they are associated. This is usually .90 to 1.1 volts per cell. When dry batteries have been stored under adverse conditions, or for a period extending beyond the data for placing them in service, they should be tested according to TB SIG 14.
288
Par. 1221
289
1221. LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION.
Weight Quantity
Capacity in of
at 80°F Charge Rate____________Opera- ElectroFig. Amp. Rate Amps.__________ Terminal tions Overall Dimensions Inches lyte
Type No. Mfg. Type No, Hrs. Hrs. Initial Final Type Lbs, Length Width Height Gals. _______________________________________Remarks___________________
2 - VOLT
BATTERIES (SINGLE CELL)
BB-54 Willard ER-27-2 1246 30 20 3 1.2 Bolt 4.25 3-31/32 3 5-1/2 0.1 Plastic container; nonspilling; fibrite separa-
tors. Has charge indicator and separate filling hole.
BB-205/U Willard BR-l-B - 2.3 20 0.3 0.12 Pin 0.36 1-13/32 31/32 4-3/16 Plastic container; nonspilling; fibrite separa-
tors. Has pin terminals. Used with meteorologi-
cal equipment. Similar in appearance to BB-51.
BB-210/U Willard. ERH-25-2 - 24 20 2.7 1.08 Bolt 2.95 2-9/16 2-9/16 6-7/16 Plastic container; nonspilling; fibrite separa-
BB-212/U Willard ER-40-2 - 40 20 4.5 1.8 Bolt 5.50 6-7/8 2-3/8 4-1/2 tors. Has charge indicator and separate filling
BB-215/U Willard ER-6-2 - 6 20 0.8 0.4 Bolt 1 2-1/8 1-11/16 4 hole.
BB-216/U Willard ER-60-2 - 60 20 6 2.5 Bolt 7.2 4-15/16 3-13/16 6-9/16
4 - VOLT
BB-29 Exide 2-XC1JR-15 1247 100 20 11 5.5 Wing Nut 37.3 8-11/16 7-5/16 10-9/32 0.7 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
plug; microporous rubber separator.
BB-213/U Willard ER-40-4 - 42 20 4.5 1.8 Socket3 10.9 6-1/4 5-3/4 4-3/16 0.3 Plastic container; nonspilling; fibrite separa-
tors. Has charge indicator and separate filling hole.
6 - VOLT
BB-49 Firestone 151 - 90 20 10 4 Tapered 39 9-1/8 7-1/8 9-1/8 1.4 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
Willard SW-1-92 - Stud plug; microporous rubber separator. Has wing
Exide 151 - nut terminals.
National 515-1
Goodrich HD-145
Globe 63 —
Delco 15AJ
Autolite PR15 BB-51 Willard BR-3 1248 0.50 100 0.1 .04 Pin 0.34 3-7/16b 1-5/16 31/32 Plastic container; open vent and filling hole;
fibrite separators. Fibrite fills all free space of cells and absorbs free electrolyte.
Used with meteorological and direction finder equipments.
BB-55 Exide XHM-194 1249 150 20 17 6.8 Tapered 65 13-1/16 7-1/8 9-3/8 1.9 Hard-rubber container, moulded-rubber screw
Willard SR-5-153 Stud plug; microporous rubber separator.
National N-19-44
Autolite TSR-4-19
Firestone L-164 BB-57 Exide XH-25 - 200 20 22 8.8 Tapered 80 16-1/4 7-1/8 9-3/8 2.3 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
Willard SW-12-200 - Stud plug; microporous rubber separator.
Delco 25AT
Autolite RR-25
Firestone P-258 - v
BB-207/U Willard ER-15-6 - 20.2 20 2 0.8 Bolt 9.75 8-11/32 3-31/32 4-3/8 0.25 Plastic container; nonspilling, microporous
separators. Has charge indicator and separate filling hole.
a One socket hole in center of vertical front side of each cell.
b Length over pin terminal, 4-3/16". Table continued on next page
Par. 1221
LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Weight Quantity
Capacity in of
at 80°F Charge Rate__________Opera- ElectroFig. ■ Amp. Rate Amps,_______ Terminal tions Overall Dimensions Inches lyte
Type No. Mfg. Type No, Hrs. Hrs. Initial Final Type Lbs. Length Width Height Gals, _______________________________Remarks___________________
6 - VOLT (Cont'd) BB-214/U Willard N-T-6 - 3.5 20 0.4 0.16 Flat Cap 1.6 3-19/32 1-13/16 2-3/8 Plastic container; nonspilling; fibrite sepa-
rators .
12 - VOLT
BB-46 Exide PVA-7-1 1250 90 20 9 4.5 Wing Nut 120 15-7/8 6-1/2 14-9/16 2.4 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
plug; wood and rubber separators. Used with radio sets and telephone centrals.
BB-50 1251 55 20 6.5 3.2 Wing Nut 64 12-7/8 7-1/8 9-7/8 1.2 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
plug; wood and rubber separators. Used in tanks and armored cars.
BB-53 Exide 6-TS-13-1 1252 38 552 Wing Nut 38 10-5/16 5-3/16 11-9/32 1 Hard-rubber container; nonspilling; wood and
rubber separators. Used with photographic sets.
OVER 12 - VOLT
BB-52 Willard BR-18 - .08 20 .02 .008 Pin 0.39 3-7/16a 1-7/16 1-1/16 Plastic container; open vent and filling hole;
(36 volts) fibrite separators. Fibrite fills all free
space of cells and absorbs free electrolyte.
Used with meteorological and direction finder equipment. Similar in appearance to BB-51.
BB-201/U -- - 15 1/2 4.5 1.8 Wing Nut 40 10-7/8 4-7/8 8 Hard-rubber container; moulded-rubber screw
(14 volts) , plug; microporous rubber separator.
Philco HKRT5)n - 120 8 16 5 Bolt 275 22 7-9/16 11-3/4 5 Hard-rubber container. Cells are mounted in
Philco 11KRT6)22v* 26-7/8 7-9/16 11-3/4 wooden trays. 2 hydrometers, 2 thermometers,
2 lugs and one jumper are included.
Philco 19XL3)b - 526 8 72 24 Post 1210 20-7/8 10-3/4 25 29 Hard-rubber container. Cells are mounted in
Philco 19XL4) 22v" 27-1/8 10-3/4 25 wooden trays with lids. 22 v. battery in-
cludes 2 hydrometers, 2 thermometers, 2 lugs and two jumpers.
COMBINATION UNITS
BB-208 AMT W~> 11 a yd Pin For Information on Capacity, Dimensions, Meteorological Sets Battery units are packed
One 6 Volt etc. see Data for BB-51, BB-52 and in vacuum can. Device
BB-51 & BB-205/U is provided for vacuum
Three 36 filling
Volt BB-52
BB-209 AMT Willard
One 2 Volt
BB-205/U
Three 36
Volt BB-52
a Length over pin terminals, 4-3/16".
Furnished in units of one 19XL3 and two 19XL4 to provide 22 volts.
290
FIGURE 1246. Battery BB-54 FIGURE 1247. Battery BB-29 FIGURE 1248. Battery BB-51
Par. 122
291
Par. 1221
FIGURE 1249. Battery BB-55 FIGURE 1250. Battery BB-46
292
Par. 1221
293
FIGURE 1251. Battery BB-50 FIGURE 1252. Battery BB-53
Par.1222-1224
1222. LEAD STORAGE BATTERIKS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Type No. Stock Terminal Volts Batteries Per Export Package Export Package Weight-Lbs.“ Export Package Volume Cu. Ft.
BB-29 3B29 4 2 70 1.2
BB-46 3B46 12 1 122 2
BB-49 3B49 6 4 154 3
BB-50 3B50 12 1 80 1.2
BB-51 3B51 6 120 47 1
BB-52 3B52 36 120 48 1
BB-53 3B53 12 4 155 3
BB-54 3B54 2 6 33 1
BB-55 3B55 6 1 70 1.1
BB-57 3B57 6 1 85 1.3
BB-201/U 3B275-201 14 1 60 .5
BB-205/U 3B275-205 2 120 49 1
BB-208 AMT 3B280-208 6 "A" 108 "B* 50 103 2.3
BB-209 AMT 3B280-209 2 "A" 188 *B" 50 103 2.3
BB-210/U 3B275-210 2 18 56 1.3
BB-212/U 3B275-212 2 24 122 1.3
BB-213/U 3B275-213 4 12 118 1.4
BB-214/U 3B275-214 • 6 20 86 3.1
BB-215/U 3B275-215 2 •» • •
BB-216/U 3B275-216 2 310b —
Hiilco 11KRT 3B238.1 22 2 lie
Hiilco 19XL Two FEN5075 One FTN5076 22 1 1250* 60®
“Export weights are for batteries dry charged less electrolyte.
bWt. of electrolyte is approximately 175 lbs.
cIncludes electrolyte (6 of 3B1514 in one package).
dWt. of electrolyte is approximately 600 lbs.
“includes electrolyte (3 of FTN134001, each in separate package).
ELECTROLYTE (SULPHURIC ACID).
Stock No. Quantity Gals.“ Sp.Gr. Container
3B1500.1-1 1 1.400 Bottle
3B1500.1-10 10 1.400 Carboy
3B1514 1 1.280 Bottle
3B1514-10 10 1.280 Carboy
FTN134001 10 1.275 Carboy
“Electrolyte for batteries is obtained locally wherever possible; otherwise it can be obtained from depots if ordered by stock numbers listed, such as ”1 Each* of stock No. 3B1514. Fractional amounts should not be ordered.
1224. BATTERY TERMINAL ADAPTER.
Stock No.
3B4294
3B4294.1
Polarity
Pos.
Neg.
Shown in Fig. No. 1253
FIGURE 1253.
Battery Terminal Adapter
294
Par. 1225
295
1225 » PRY BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION - SINGLE UNIT TYPES.
--------g0™1.11818*_________ Weight In _______Dimensions (Inches)______
_ v Kig* 1254 Operation Overall
■W?8 fr°* ----------------- SketchNo. (Lbs) Length _______Width Height Height Application*
1.5 - VOLT --------“----------------
SZ i Si i 2-11/16 4-1/16 4-7/16 *“• 3et>- “•* *.
3 2*4 2-5/8 Diam. 6-1/8 6-11/16 Switchboards, Test Sets, Radio
BA-30/BA-130c FlatCap 1 0.25 1-11/32 Diam. 2-11/32 2-13/32 Radio’sets, Test Sets.Telephone
^7 2-11/16 2-11/16 4 4-5/16 tedi0 Set8’ Test Sets
^2 r 1 0,63 1-11/32 Diam. 6-1/8 6-7/32 Radio Seta
R, 5n ap 1 0.13 1-1/32 Diam. 1-27/32 1-29/32 Test Equipments
w T 1 1 -031 , 37/64 DiaM- 1-29/32 1-31/32 Test Seta
BA^oa/m4 2 H°le) 9 1,5 2“5/8 2-5/8 4-1/16 4-1/16 Itedio Sets
BA /UF Flat Cap 1 0.25 1-11/32 Diam. 2-3/8 2-7/16 Photo Flash, Only
3 - VOLT
^at °aP o „ A 1 °*63 1-11/32 Diam. 6-1/16 6-1/8 Test Seta, Telegraph Seta
J ™ ?Oil SoCket 16 °*10 1-1/8 9/16 2 2-3/8 Meteorological
!° . xk. 0,88 2-UA6 1-11/16 4-5/16 4-3/8 Blasting
??Te 5 0,88 2-11/16 1-5/16 4-1/16 4-9/16 Itadio Sets, Test Set
Ar Spring 2 °*13 1-5/16 11/16 2-1/4 2-5/8 Meteorological
BA-209/U Flat Cap 1 0.25 1-1/32 Diam. 3-7/8 3-15/16 Meteorological
4.5 - VOLT
BA~9 nat Spring 2 0.38 2-17/32 27/32 2-5/8 3-1/16 itedio Sets
^-28 Flat sPrin« 2 0.25 2-1/16 11/16 2-5/16 2-11/16 Sound Ranging Set
3/1-31 . Screw & 5 0.38 2-13/32 27/32 2-23/32 3-3/16 Test Sets
BA-216/U Spring Clip 3 4.5 3-15/16 3-15/16 5-7/16 5-15/16 Radio Sets, Telephone
6 - VOLT
J*-44 . Screw & Nut 5 9 10-1/2 2-3/4 6-3/4 7-1/2® Trailer Brakes
BA-200/U Spring Type 19 1,5 2-11/16 2-11/16 3-15/16 4-3/8 Lanterns
SoCket 9 3*25 3-15/16 2-25/32 5-9/16 5-9/16 Radio, Test and Detector Sets
?A-?12 / Socket 1,5 2-5/8 2-5/8 4 4 Radio Receiving Sets
BA-222/U insulated Nut &. Screw 6 5.38 8-1/4 2-3/4 5-13/16 5-3/8 Signal Light
a Figures are typical and not actual arrangements of contacts in all instances.
c For further details see Dry Battery Supply Data SB 11-6,
This battery is a low temperature type corresponding to the conventional type bearing a nomenclature number which is 100 smaller, e.g», Battery BA-102 corresponds to BA—2. The two batteries are physically identical and electrically interchangeable, except that the low d temperature type has a better service life at low temperature.
eBA-202/UF is similar to BA-30 except for a higi flash current characteristic.
Web strap does not project beyond terminals except when used as a handle. Dimension includes space occupied by terminals.
TMble continued on next page
par. 1225
DRY BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION - SINGLE UNIT TYPES (Continued) _______________________________Terminalsa_______ Weight In __________Dimensions (Inches) _____
Fig. 125^ Operation Overall
Type No. _______Type_______ Sketch No. (Lbs) Length Width Height Height ____________________Application^_____
9 - VOLT
BA-206/U Insulated Nut &. Screw 6 15.5 7-7/8 &-5/16 6-13/16 7-5/16 Tool Equipment
BA-207/U Insulated Nut & Screw 6 9,5 8-9/16 4-1/16 5-15/16 6-7/16 Searchlight
22.5 - VOLT
BA-2/BA-102C Flexible Lead 4 1.0 3-1/2 2-3/32 2-21/32 3-1/32d Radio Sets, Test Seta
BA-8 Flexible Leads 4 4.5 6-5/8 4-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/2d Radio Sets
BA-211/U Socket 12 1.5 4-1/8 2-19/32 3 3 Radio Sets
BA-219/U Spring Clip 3 1.25 4-1/4 2-5/8 2-13/16 3-7/16 Radio Sets
45 - VOLT
BA-56 Snap Fasteners 13 0.63 2-9/16 31/32 3-41/64 3-11/16 Monitor, Radio Receivers
Ba-59 Socket (5 holes) 15 2 3-17/32 1-3/4 5-1/2 5-1/2 Test Equipment
OVER 45 VOLT
Term.
Volts
BA-SS/BA-ISS*5 103.5 Flat Cap 1 1.25 1-11/32 1-11/32 11-21/32 11-23/32 Radio Sets, Detector Sets
BA-51 67.5 Snap Fastener 13 .88 2-11/16 1-3/8 3-11/16 3-3/4 Radio Sets
BA-215/U 63 Socket e 4.75 6-1/8 5-5/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 British Wireless Set #48
aFigures are typical and not actual arrangements of contacts in all instaices.
bpor further details see Dry Battery Supply Data SB 11-6.
cThis battery is a low temperature type corresponding to the conventional type bearing a nomenclature number which is 100 smaller, e.g., Battery BA-102 corresponds to BA-2. The two batteries are physically identical and electrically interchangeable, except that the low temperature type has a better service life at low temperature.
d3/8" allowance has been made for space occupied by flexible lead.
eTwo separate sockets each having single hole at same end of battery.
296
Par. 1226
297
Ag£6. PHY BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION - MULTIPLE UNIT TYPES. T . , —----------Terminals----------- Weight in Dimensions (Inches)
kt Terminal Fig. operation --------------------------1-------Overall.
------------------------------------------------- Sketch No. (Lbs) Length Width Height Height Application11 £“/m.127a /‘s’4,6 Spring Clip--------3 12., g.1/4 4.1/2 7.3/e ?.w/16
BA 27/bA 127 -1.5,-3, Screw t Nut 5 1 4-1/16 1-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 Hedlo set.
ui^Xt ‘5 h01e) 1’ 14 8 5 6-13/16 7-7/32 Radio sets
-13.5 "0* Unit
4.5 "M" Unit BA"33 *:L Insulated Nut & Screw 7 6 6-1/4 3-9/16 5-3/16 5-3/4 Test sets
XOD 64-34 ^.^i. 445 °-6 4-1/8 7/8 ™/a
Lead
BA-36 22.5,45 , Sera, & Hut 5 3.4 4-1/4 2-9/16 5-7/8 6-3/8 Radlc sets, test sets
BA-39/BA-139c -A- Unit Socket (5 bole) 20 8.8 6-l/2 3-13/16 7-1/8 7-9/16 Ra^
BA-40/BA-140C 18 -A-Unit Socket (4 hole) 21 7.8 5-5/16 4-1/8 , 7-7/16 Radio sets
•7 V D UXlXu R^X^t 15 h°le) 12 1 >1/8 3-1/2 3-1/2 Radlc sets
4/V D Uulu
60 "B2" Unit BA"43 905"B""unitt S°Cket (8 h°le) 10 5,1 3-7/8 3-31/32 7-1/16 7-l/4d Radio sets
D uniu
-45 "C" Unit
BA”48 905"R»,,nn?it SOCket (4 h01e) 21 5,5 10 2-7/32 4“7/8 4”7/8 Radi0 sets
•7V d unXv figures are typical and not actual arrangements of contacts in all instances. bFor further details see Dry Battery Supply Data SB 11-6. c ZDils batte^r is a low tanperature type corresponding to the conventional type bearing a nomenclature number 5ch is 100 seller, e.g., Battery BA-102 corresponds to BA-2. The two batteries are physically identical and electrically interchangeable, except that the low temperature type has a better service life at low temperature* Allowance has been made for space occupied by the web strap.
Table continued on next page
Par. 1226
DRY BATTERIES - DESCRIPTION - MULTIPLE UNIT TYPES. (CONTINUED) Terminal sA____________________________________________ Weight in ___________Dimensions (Inches)___
Terminal Fig. 1254 Operation Overall
Type No. Volts_____________Type________ Sketch No. (Lbs) Length Width Height Height Application**_____
BA-49 1.5 "A" Unit Socket (5 hole) 11 2.5 5-9/16 1-1/2 6-9/16 6-9/16c Radio sets
67.5 *B* Unit
67.5 "B,," Unit Plus 2 Guide Holes in
2 Top
BA-53 22.5,45 Screw & Nut 5 1.63 3-1/16 1-15/16 4-9/16 5-1/8 Teat sets
BA-63 22.5,45 Socket (5 hole) 8 1.5 3 2-5/16 4-1/8 4-1/8 Radio sets
BA-67 3 "A” Unit Socket (3 hole) 14 1.6 4-1/16 1-15/16 4-9/16 4-9/16 Meteorological
90 "B" Unit
BA-70 4.5 "A" Unit Socket (8 hole) 18 16 10-3/8 4-9/16 7-7/8 >-7/32 Radio sets
90 "B," Unit
60 "B2" Unit RA-80 4.5 "A” Unit Socket (8 hole) 18 9 10-3/8 4-9/16 4-3/4 5-1/8 Radio sets
90 "B," Unit
60 "Bg" Unit BA-201/CRN-1 9 "A" Unit Socket 21 13.5 5-11/16 Diam. 15-1/2 l&«l/2 Radio transmitting equip.
675 "B" Unit
BA-212/U 1.5 "A" Unit Socket 21 25 15-7/8 4*9/16 7 7 Form radio
90 "B" Unit
BA-213/U 3 "A" Unit Socket 12 8.5 8-1/2 4-11/16 4-1/8 4-1/8 Radio sets
162 "B" Unit
-12 "C" Unit BA-214/U 6, 12 Screw A Nut A 4 A 5 0.8 3-23/32 1-25/32 2-15/32 2-25/32 Radio sets
Flexible Lead
BA-217/U 12, 22.5 Flexible Lead 4 1.3 4-1/4 2-5/8 2-13/16 3-3/16d Radio sets
BA-218/U 3 "A » Unit Socket 12 15 9-3/8 6-9/16 4-3/8 4-3/8 Radio sets
1.5 lnA2" Unit
156 "B" Unit
-7.5 "0" Unit
BA-220/U 1.5 "A" Unit Socket 21 5 8-1/8 2-11/32 4-25/32 4-25/32 Radio sets
90 "B" Unit BA-221/U 1.5 "A" Unit Socket 15 2.3 3-21/32 1-27/32 6-9/16 6-9/16 Radio sets
67.5 "B1" Unit
13.5 "Bp" Unit
-6 "C" Unit figures are typical and not actual arrangements of contacts in all instances.
bFor further details see Dry Battery Supply Data SB 11-6. c Ring does not project beyond flange on bottom of the battery, except when used as handle. Dimension includes space occupied by flange. d3/8" allowance has been made for spece occupied by flexible lead.
298
Par. 1226
0 7—j 0 771 J (n) © q i ^7? p Q1 1 - —[- 2 * s 7 '-J ' •*£ ~ ~,t^ f-r—\ —-- r- *HF~\
o° 0 1771 /A -A^’o2 [( A O©
1___I9 -.^ .2 --7 ,S-|SV
prw feya y=g O) ef ^1 672V g72V J Xx<—WEB STRAP X^O 0^ )
—-------—------11_I——_—___H___
OOSSwII
—------2®____19__2C) -—- ' 21_
FIGURE 1254. Dry Battery Terminal Arrangements
299
Par. 1227
1227. DRY BATTERIES - STOCK NUMBERS AND COMMERCIAL EQUIVALENTS
Commercial Equivalents5 No.of Batteries Terminal National___________________U.S. Bright General per Sealed
Type No.a Stock No. Voltage Carbon Ray-0-Vac Burgess Marathon Electric Star Bond Dry Unit Packageb
BA-1 3A1 3 12
BA-2/BA-102 3A2 22.5 763 4156 H15A 6
BA-8 3A8 22.5 1
BA-9 3A9 4.5 703 532 350 H3BF 5
BA-15-A 3A15A 1.5 2FBP • 8
BA-23 3A23 1.5 7111 ' 6 6 6A 6 5
BA-26 3A26 22.5, 45 1
BA-27/BA-127 3A27 -1/5, -3, -4.5 761-T 8
BA-28 3A28 4.5 751 432 9
BA-30/ba-130 3A30 1.5 ,950 2LP 2 995 D 25
1050
BA-31 3A31 4.5 781 ^360 H3B 5
Dddr Cr
BA-32 3A32 3 "A" Unit
144 "B" Unit .
-13.5 "C" Unit 1
4.5 "M" Unit BA-33 3A33 45, 135 1
BA-34 3A34 -1.5, -3, -4.5 773 551 5540 4
-6, -7.5
BA-35 3A35 1.5 94-1S 4FH 462 4F1S 4
BA-36 3A36 22.5, 45 762-S 5308 3
BA-37 3A37 1.5 !2
BA-38/BA-138 3A38 103.5 XX69 12
BA-39/BA-139 3A39 7.5 "A" Unit F5A100 1
150 nB” Unit BA-40/bA-140 3A40 1.5 "A" Unit 4GB60 1
90 "B" Unit
aThe type shown in extreme left hand column may be used to replace any of the other types in the same horizontal line. The data are not to be used in a reverse direction.
Dry Batteries should be ordered in sealed unit packages whenever possible.
300
Par. 1227
700898 0—46——21
301
. MUI ®aSKX-----------------------------C°g<>r°l.l SyUval.nt. *-- ------------------ No. of
Type No. Stock No. vnitn™ « U.S. Bright General Per Sealed
------- —------ Voltage---- _Carbon Ray-p-yac Burgess Marathon Electric star Bond Dry Unit Package* BA-41--3A41-----4.5 "A" Unit
25.5 "Bi*Unit 1
60 "fig" Unit
BA—42 3A42 1.5 936 i nn
935 1 110 11-M 101 c 25
BA-43 3A43 1.5 Unit
90 "B* unit 1
-45 "0" unit
3A44 6 Ul
BA-48 3A48 1.5 "A" Unit 6ta6O
90 "B* Unit 1
BA-49 3A49 1,5 "A" Unit
67.5 "Bi"Unlt 1
67.5 "B2*Unit
BA-50 3A50 3 vqi
18
BA-51 3A51 67.5 467 P4367 XX45 5
BA—53 3A53 22.5, 45 Z3QN j
BA-56 3A56 45 455 XX30
5
BA-58 3A58 1.5 915 tr z i70 908 59 AA 12
BA-59 3A59 45 482 P7830 M30 x
BA-63 3A63 22.5, 45 738 P7R30 Z30 3
BA-65 3A65 1,5 742 P94A 4F
5
BA-67 3A67 3 "A" Unit X442-A 4X2W60
90 *B" Unit 4
BA-70 3A70 4.5 "A" Unit
90 "Bjh" Unit X
60 »B " Unit
^The type shown in extreme left hand column may be used to replace any of the other types
in the same horizontal line. The data are not to be used in a reverse direction.
Dry Batteries should be ordered in sealed unit packages whenever possible.
Table continued on next page
Par. 1227
!>|!«!
302
DRY BATTERIES - STOCK NWERS AND COMMERCIAL EQUIVALENTS. (CONTINUED)
_________________________________Commercial Equivalents5 No. of Batteries Terminal National________________U.S. Bright General Per Sealed
Type Nota Stock No, Voltage Carbon Ray-Q-Vac Burgess Marathon Electric Star Bond Dry Unit Packageb
BA-80 3A80 4.5 "A" Unit 1
90 "Bi" Unit
60 "B2» Unit
BA-200/U 3A275-200 6 409 941 F4H 490 460 123 V4F 5
509 HD460
BA-201/CRN-1 3A275-201 9 "A" 1
675 "B*
BA-202/UF 3A275-202 1.5 10P 25
BA-203/U 3A275-203 6 718 P698A 2F4 896 4829 8F4 1
BA-204/U 3A275-204 3 704 F2RT 8
BA-205/U 3A275-205 3 F2BP 5
BA-206/U 3A275-206 9 1662 661B 1
BA-207/U 3A275-207 9 4F6H 1
BA-208/U 3A275-208 3 750 422 50-17 6
BA-209/U 3A275-209 3 C791A 122 991 91-17M 25
BA-210/U 3A275-210 6 F4P1 5
BA-211/U 3A275-211 3,4.5,16.5,22.5 768 1
BA-212/U 3A275-212 1.5 "A" Unit 748 1
90 "B" Unit
BA-213/U 3A275-213 3 "A* Unit
162 "B" Unit
12 Tap
BA—214/U 3A275-214 6, 12
BA-215/U 3A275-215 63
EA-216/U 3A275-216 4.5 4F3H
BA-217/U 3A275-217 12, 22.5 5151 5156 1503 H15B(S)
Par. 1227
303
'?8rIn
BA-218/U 3A275-218 3 "A]_" Unit 2F2B108 105B-9G
1.5 "Ag" Unit
156 "B* Unit
-7.5 "C" Unit
BA-219/U 3A275-219 22.5 778-1
BA-220/U 3A275-220 1.5 "A* Unit 4TA60
90 *B* Unit
BA-221/U 3A275-221 1.5 "A* Unit X444 8MXX9CM4
67.5 "Bl* Unit
135 *B2* Unit
-6 -C" Unit
BA-222/U 3A275-222 6 4F4H
type shown in extreme left hand column may be used to replace any of the other types in the same horizontal line. The data are not to be used in a reverse direction. bDiy Batteries should be ordered in sealed unit packages whenever possible.
Par. 1228-1230
Section VI Commercial Power Services
1228. GENERAL. The purpose of this section is to summarize and list the prevailing electrical frequencies, voltage, etc. of the commercial power supplies of the world. The power distribution frequencies and voltages for foreign countries are listed in paragraphs 1230, 1231 and 1232 respectively.
1229. DISTRIBUTION.
a. Frequencies.
(1) 50 Cycles: This is the preferred or most prevalent frequency in all of Europe, all of Asia except Manchuria and North Borneo, which have 60 cycles, all of Africa except Belgian Congo, which has 60 cycles, all of Australia except a few towns in west, where 40 cycles prevails, all of Oceania except Society Island British which has 60 cycles, and all of South America except Columbia, Ecuador, British Guiana, and Venezuela, all of which have 60 cycles. In North America some of the British, French, and Netherland West Indies have 50 cycles; also, in the United States a section in southern California operates on 50 cycles.
(2) 60 Cycles: This is practically universal in the United States and all of its World Possessions except Canal Zone where 25 cycles prevails; in Canada except an area adjoining Niagara Falls in Ontario where 25 cycles is provided. It is also standard in Mexico and all of
Central America and in some of the British West Indies.
(3) Many of the countries where a frequency of 50 cycles prevails, have 60 and other frequencies to a lesser degree; also many of the countries where a frequency of 60 cycles prevails, have some 50 cycle areas. In the United States 25 cycles was formerly used to some extent and some large plants have not changed over. It is, however, practically extinct in the U. S. as a distribution system.
b. Voltages.
(1) Great Britain: The electrical authorities of Great Britain have adopted a scheme of unifying the electrical distribution systems of the entire country. Under this plan 230 volts has been selected as the standard pressure both for a-c and d-c supply. Other voltages now used will be changed over gradually. The frequency of the a-c supply will be 50 cycles. Attachment plugs are commonly of the round pin rather than the flat blade type.
(2) United States: Voltages in the United States are predominantly 110-120/200-240, 60 cycles, with a trend toward 120/208, 1 and 3 phase. A few cities also have 2 phase. Eleven large cities in the United States still have d-c loads from 5000 to 350,000 kw, in the business areas, but in most cases a-c is also available and is being used in new buildings and on major reconstruction.
1230. POWER DISTRIBUTION DATA. - FOREIGN COUNTRIES AND CITIES
Countries & Cities of 200,000 Population & Over D-C Voltage A-C
Pref. Other Phasea Freq. in Cyc. Voltage0
Pref. Other Pref. Other Pref. Other
ALASKA (par. 1232)
ALBANIA 220 — - — 50 - 220 125,150
ALGERIA 220 — — 50 - ♦115 110,127
.Algiers - - 3 - 50 - 115/200 -
ANGOLA — — — a. 50 — 110 —
ARABIA — — — 50 - 230 -
ARGENTINA *220 - - - 50 60,43 *220 225
Avellaneda - — 3 - 50 - 220/380 -
Buenos Aires 220/440 — 3 - 50 - 220/380 —
Cordoba - • 3 - 50 - 220/380 -
Rosario 220/440 — 3 — 50 — 220/380 —
AUSTRALIA
Nev/ South Wales ♦240 — * 50 - ♦240 —
Sydney 240/480 — 3 - 50 - 240/415 -
Queensland 220 240 — - 50 — *240 —
Brisbane - - 3 - 50 - 240/415
So. Australia 200 230,220 3 - 50 - *200 230,240
Adelaide - - 7 - 50 - 210/420 -
Tasmania 230 — — — 50 — *240 a.
Victoria 230 — — — 50 a. *230 —
Melbourne 230/460 - 3 - 50 230/400 -
West Australia *220 110,230 — — 40 — 250 —
Perth - - 3 - 40 - 240/440 -
304
Par. 1230
Countries & D-C Voltage A-C
Cities of 200,000 Phasea Freq, in Cyc. Voltage0
Population & Over Pref. Other Pref Other Pref. Other Pref. Other
AUSTRIA 220 no «. 50 *220 120,127,
150 no, &
Other
Vienna — — 3 — 50 220/380 -
AZORES 220 — — 50 220 —
BELGIAN CONGO — — — — 60 220
BELGIUM 220 no,120 - - 50 40 *220 127,110, 115,135, & Other
Antwerp - - 3 — 50 115/200 -
Brussels -e — 3 — 50 110/190 —
BOLIVIA 110 — — — 50 60 *110 220
BRAZIL •• — - - 50 60 127 120,220
Para — 3 - 50 120/240 -
Pernambucoo 220/440 to 3 — 50 220 to
Rio de Janeiro - — 3 — 50 125/216 -
Sao Paulo ERITISH EAST AFRICA — - 3 - 60 120/208 *
Kenya - - - - 50 240 -
Mauritius - • — 50 60,100 230 110,100
Nyasaland 220 * to — «. — — •
Tanganyika 220 — — — — - —
Zanzibar 220 — ■» — — — • —
BRITISH GUIANA — — - — 60 50 no
HRITISi HONDURAS BRITISH MALAYA no - - - — - - -
Fed. Malay States • — • — 50 60,40 230 —
Non-Fed. Malay States 230 — •» — — —
North Borneo * — 60 no L.
Straits Settlements *230 — — — 50 230
Singapore BRITISH WEST AFRICA 230/460 - 3 - 50 230/400 -
Gambia — * — 50 230 —
Gold Coast *220 — — — 50 230 —
Nigeria — — - • 50 230 •
Sierra Leone BRITISH WEST INDIES * > - • - 50 230 -
Antique 220 - - - - - — to
Bahamas — — — — 60 115 —
Barbados — — — 50 no —
Bermuda - — — to 60 no
Dominica 220 - - — - — —
Grenada — — — — 50 115
Jamaica — — • 40 60 no -
St. Kitts 240 — * — — — — —
Trinidad - - — - 60 no 220
BULGARIA 220 120 — — 50 *220 120,150
Sofia - - 3 - 50 220/380 to
CANADA no — — — 60 25 *110 150,115,
230
Montreal - — 3 — 60 115/230 —
Toronto - — 3 — 25 115/230
Vancouver — — 3 — 60 110/220 to
Winnipeg — — 3 - 60 120/220 —
CANARY ISLANDS no — — — 50 *127 no
CEYLON 220 — — * 50 60 230 —
Colombo 220/440 - 3 - 50 230/400 -
CHILE 220 no • — 50 60 *220
Santiago 220/440 - 3 - 50 220/380 -
Valparaiso 220/440 - 3 - 50 220/380 , -
a. In general, any 3-phase service can b. *Where both a-c and d-c are i available
be used for single phase. For 110-120 an asterisk (*) indicates the type of
volt equipment, it will be necessary to current and voltage which predominates.
provide 2:1 transformers in many foreign When approximately equal quantities of
countries where lighting service is in a-c and d-c are used an asterisk precedes
the 220-volt class. each of the principal voltages.
Table continued on next page
305
par. 1230
POWER DISTRIBUTION DATA - FOREIGN COUNTRIES AND CITIES (Continued)
Countries &. Cities of 200,000 Population & Over D-C Voltage A-C
Pref. Other Phase5 Freq, in Cyc. Voltageb
Pref. Other Pref. Other Pref. Other
CHINA 220 no - - 50 60,25 *110 *200 220
Amoy * — 3 - 60 110/220 -
Canton - - 3 - 60 220/380 110/190 -
Chungking — — 3 * 50 220/380 *
Foochow — * 3 * 50 220/380 *
Hankow 220/440 3 — 60 220/380 —
Hong Kong -» — 3 — 50 200/350 •B
Nanking — — 3 •B 50 220/380 —
Ningpo — •B 3 • 50 220/380
Peiping — — 3 BB 50 220/380 «•
Shanghai — 3 • 50 200/350 no/i9o
Int. Settlement — 3 * 50 220/380 *
Tientsin — — 3 — 50 220/380 «a
Tsinan • • 3 •» 50 220/380 no/i9o -
Tsingtao • * 3 •» 50 120/200 *
COLOMBIA — * 50 60 *no 220/150
Bogota — • 3 — 60 150/260 *
COSTA RICA no • * * — ♦no *
CUBA no 220 MB 60 ♦no 220
Havana • * 3 60 no/220 *
CYPRUS *220 — «• * 50 no *
CZECHO SLOVAKIA 220 150 no 120,150 Various • — 50 42 *220 110,115 127 Various
Brno — — 3 «B '50 - 110/220/380 *
Praha — — 3 — 50 - 120/220/380
DENMARK 220 no — •» 50 *220 120,127
Copenhagen 220/440 3 - 50 - 220/380 127/220 -
DOMINICAN REP. no • — * 60 *110 120
ECUADOR — — — — 60 ♦no a.
EGYPT 220 • - - 50 40 200 110,220, no
Alexandria — — 1 — 50 - 115/230
Cairo no — 1 40 - 100/200 —
Eire *220 — a 50 *220 200
Belfast • — 3 — 50 - 220/380 a*
Dublin — — 3 — 50 - 220/380 *
ESTONIA *220 no «B •B 50 220 127
ETHIOPA — — ■B • 50 220 250
FIJI ISLANDS 240 no, 250 — a. a. ■a
FINLAND *120 220,110 - - 50 220 120, n5, no
Helsingfors 225/450 — 3 * 50 - 127/220 —
FRANCE no 220,120, 125 - • 50 25 *110 120,125 ♦115 115,220,230
Bordeaux no • 3 — 50 - 115/200 ■a
Lille 120 • 3 — 50 - 120/208 —
Nice no — 3 — 25 - 110/190 a.
Paris — — 3 * 50 - 110/190 •
FRENCH INDO-CHINA* FRENCH WEST INDIES no 120,220, 240 • • 50 ♦120 *220,110, 115,240
Guadeloupe -B - - — * 120 *
Martinique no - — - 50 ♦no
a. In general, any 3-phase service can
be used for single phase. For 110-120 volt equipment, it will be necessary to provide 2:1 transformers In many foreign countries where lighting service is in the 220-volt class.
b. * Where both, a-c and d-c are available an asterisk (♦) indicates the type of current and voltage which predominates. When approximately equal quantities of a-c and d-c are used an asterisk precedes each of the principal voltages.
306
Par. 1230
Countries & Cities of 200,000 Population & Over D-C Voltage A-C
Pref. Other Phase® Freq, in Cyc. Voltage0
Pref. Other Pref. Other Pref. Other
GERMANY 220 110,120 50 - 220/380
GIBRALTAR no 440 — AM 76 127/220 - *110
GOZO, ISLAND OF — * — 50 no
GREAT BRITAIN (See United Kingdom) GREECE *220 110,150 50 - *127 110,220
Athens A. 3 «* 50 - 220/380
Piraeus 230/460 AM 3 M. 50 - 220/380
Saloniki 220/440 — A» — 200/346
GUAM A. * * «» 60 - no
GUATEMALA 220 125 — * 60 50 *110 220
HAITI * * A. — 60 50 *110 220
HAWAII «» * 1 fc 3 * 60 - no-n5/
HONDURAS no 220 A. — 60 220-230 - *no 220
HUNGARY 220 110,120 — — 42 50 *100 220,120
Budapest no 3 50 *105 Various *110 - 220/380
ICELAND w — — * 50 220
a. In general, any 3-phase service can be used for single phase. For 110-120 volt equipment, it will be necessary to provide 2:1 transformers in many foreign countries where lighting service is in the 220-volt class.
b. *Where both, a-c and d-c are available an asterisk (♦) indicates the type of current and voltage which predominates. When approximately equal quantities of a-c and d-c are used an asterisk precedes each of the principal voltages.
Table continued on next page
307
Par. 1230
POWER DISTRIBUTION DATA - FOREIGN COUNTRIES AND CITIES (Continued)
Countries & Cities of 200,000 Population. & Over D-C Voltage A-C
Pref. Other Phase** Freq, in Cyc. Voltage0
Pref. Other Prof. Other Pref. Other
INDIA 220 110,225 50 25 230 220,110
230,250 Various
Agra - - 3 50 - 230/400 -
Ahmedabad — a. 3 50 — 230/400 a.
Amritsar 220/440 * 3 50 230/400 -
Bangalore - • 1 60 — 220 —
Benares — - 3 50 -a 230/400 -a
Bombay 230/460 — 3 50 — 230/400 —
Calcutta 225/450 - 3 50 230/400 -
Cawnpore 225/450 — 3 50 — 230/400 -a
Delhi 220/440 - 3 50 200/400 -
Hyderabad - — 3 50 — 220/380 -
Karachi 220/440 — 3 50 — 220/380 a.
Lahore 220/440 — 3 50 - 220/380
Luchnow 230/460 — 3 50 — 230/400 -
Madras 225/450 - 3 50 - 250/400 -a
Nagpur 220/440 - 3 50 — 230/400 —
Poona 220/440 - 3 50 - 230/400 -a
IRAN 220 110 —- * 50 — 220 a.
Tabriz - - 3 50 - 220/380 -a
Teheran - - 3 50 * 220/380 -
IRAQ *220 200 — — 50 — 220 230
Bagdad 220/440 - 3 50 a. 220/380 «•
ITALIAN AFRICA
Cyrenaica 150 -a a. - 50 — *110 150
Eritrea - - aa aa 50 — 127 —
Libya (Tripoli) - — — aa *50 42,45 *125 110,270
Somaliland 120 — ■a * 50 — ’230
ITALY 110 125,150 *42 45 *150 125,120,
220,250 110,115,
160 120,260
220,135
Bologna — - 3 42 -a 127/220 a.
Catania — - 3 50 — 150/260 —
Florenc e 150/300 - 3 50 - 150/260 -
Genoa - - 3 50 - 150/260 •a
- — 3 50 — 127/220 —
Messina — - 3 50 - 150/260 -
Milan — - 3 50 -a 150/260 -
3 42 — 144/250 —
Naples 220/440 — 3 50 — 150/260 -
Palermo - - 3 50 -a 150/260 -a
Rome — - 3 45 — 127/220
Trieste — - 3 42 - 127/220 -
Turin - 3 50 -a 127/220 —
Venice - - 3 42 127/220 —
JAPAN LOO — aa * 50 60 *100 110
Dairen. - - 3 50 - 110/220 —
Hiroshima - - 3 60 — 100/200 a.
Kyoto — — 3 60 — 100/200 —
Tokio, Greater - - 3 50 - 100/200 -
3 60 -a 100/200 —
LATVIA 220 110 • aa 50 — *220 120
Riga - - 3 50 - 120/220/380
LITHUANIA 220 110
Montevideo — — 3 — 50 — 220
VATICAN CITY • * — — 45 — 125 —
VENEZUELA no 220 — — 60 ♦no —
VIRGIN ISLANDS no 220 «• «• — -
YUGO-SLAVIA no 120 — — 50 42 *120 220,150
Belgrade - - 3 - 50 59 220/380 120/206 •
a. In general, any 3-phase service can be used for single phase. For 110-120 volt equipment, it will be necessary to provide 2:1 transformers in many foreign countries where lighting service is in the 220-volt class.
b. *Where both a-c and d-c are available an asterisk (*) indicates the type of current and voltage which predominates. When approximately equal quantities of a-c and d-c are used an asta? isk precedes each of the principal voltages.
310
Par. 1231-1232
1231. POWER, DISTRIBUTION DATA FOR CANADA - BREAKDOWN BY PROVINCES (McGRAW CENTRAL STATION DIRECTORY - 1938?
Province No .Listed Cities & Towns Freq, in Cycles Phase
Alberta 43 60 1 & 3
British Columbia 53 60 1 & 3
5 25 1 A 3
1 d-c -
Vancouver 60 1 & 3
Manitoba 34 60 1 & 3
New Brunswick 38 60 1 & 3
St. John 60 1 & 3
Newfoundland 16 60 1 & 2
Nova Scotia 51 60 1 & 3
New Waterford — 60 1 & 3
Ontario
Various Utilities 100 60 1 & 3
no 25 1 & 3
Hydro Elect. Pwr. 277 60 1 & 3
Com. of Ontario 308 25 1 & 3
Toronto - 25 1 & 3
Prince Edward Is. 5 60 1 & 3
Quebec Many 60 1 & 3
Hundred
Montreal — 60 1 & 3
Saskatchewan 53 60 1 & 3
Yokon Territory 2 60 1 & 3
Principal Voltages Other Systems
Voltage Cycles Remarks
110/220 230,440 60 1
110/220 —
110/220/440 — a
no • • City Lighting 250 Pop.
110/230 — —
110-120/220-240 — *
110-115/220-230 * •
110-115/220-230 440,550 — 60,300 Pop.
no/220 —
110-115/220-230 *
110/220 - 25 5,615 Pop.
110-120/220-230 550 60 110/220 mostly
n0-120/220-230 550 25 b
n0-120/220-240 550 60
110-120/220-240 550 25
120/240/550 120/240 d-c Buys from Hydro E.P.C.
115/230 * —
110-120/220-230 - -
110/220/550 25 c
110-120/220-230 * *
110/220 -
a. This 25-cycle supply is all supplied from Canadian Collieries of Nanaimo, which serve 5 small cities and towns with a total population of 14,280.
b. It is estimated that 80 per cent of the Ontario supply, within 150 miles
of Niagara Falls, has a frequency of 25
cycles and about 20 per cent more than 150 miles from Niagara Falls, has a frequency of 60 cycles.
c. One company in Montreal (Beauharnois Light, Heat, & Power) is listed as generating both 60 and 25 cycle, but it is believed all the 25 cycle goes to two or three plants. Nothing but 60 cycle general distribution.
X232. POWER DISTRIBUTION DATA FOR ALASKA - BREAKDOWN BY CITIES
Town Phasea No. of Wires Voltage Population Town Phasea No. of Wires Voltage Population
Anchorage 1 & 3 3 115/230 2277 • Sitka 1 & 3 3 110/220 1056
Chichagoff 1 & 3 3 no 67 Skagway 1 & 2 4 120/240 492
Cordova 1 & 3 110/220 980 Valdez 1 & 2 4 110/220 442
Douglas 1 & 3 3 110/220 593 Wrangell 1 & 3 3 110/220 948
Eklutna 1 & 3 3 115/230 158
Fairbanks 1 & 3 3 110/220/440 2101
Hyder 1 & 3 4 110/220 254
Juneau 1 & 3 3 110/220 4043
Ketchikan 1 & 2 4 115/230 3796 a. All distributions 60 cycles a-c,
Nome 1 & 3 3 115 1213 principany 1 and 3 phase . 3 or 4 wire.
Petersburg 1 & 3 3 no/220 1252 110/220 or 115/230 volts.
Seward 1 & 2 4 120/240 835
311
par. 1301-1302
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE SUPPLIES
Section I General
1301. SCOPE.
a. This chapter includes a description of the supply plan for maintenance parts for Ground Signal Communications Equipments, and outlines the relationship of the Signal Supply Catalog to this plan. It also tabulates Maintenance, Tool, and Test Equipments and Test Sets which are applicable to Ground Signal Communications Equipments, with information as to nature and use of each. The succeeding part of the chapter is divided as follows :
Section II - Maintenance
Section III - Maintenance Equip-
ments
Section IV - Tool Equipments
Section V - Test Equipments Section VI - Test Sets
Section VTI - Cross Reference Data
b,. The tabulations of this chapter consist mainly of items having an assigned Signal Corps Nomenclature, i.e.; TE-, ME-, etc.; however certain other maintenance sets, apparatus or accessories which are applicable within the categories of each section, and which have not been assigned nomenclature, also are included.
Section II
Maintenance
1302. SYSTEM OF MAINTENANCE
a. Signal Corps maintenance follows the basic Army FIVE-ECHELON SYSTEM, which is illustrated in Figure 1301.
THIRD ECHELON
SECOND ECHELON
FIFTH ECHELON
FOURTH
ECHELON
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
Use, care, operation, adjustment, minor repairs and "plug-in” parts replacement of running spares.
USING UNIT MAINTENANCE
Unit mechanic of the using unit, such as radio repairmen, etc. Preventive maintenance, technical advice and inspection. Repair within limits of skill and replacements within stock of Organizational spare parts.
MOBILE REPAIR SHOP MAINTENANCE
Mobile Repair Units of Signal Repair Companies, Service groups, etc. Overhaul and repair, and carry limited stock of emergency repair parts.
SEMI-FIXED REPAIR SHOP MAINTENANCE
Repair Platoon of signal depot company and signal depot company aviation, at Army repair shops. Stock of repair parts and assemblies to serve all forward echelons.
FIXED REPAIR SHOP MAINTENANCE
Base Depot repair shop. Recondition material by reclamation and limited manufacture, mainly for return to Supply Depot stock.
FIRST ECHELON
FIGURE 1301. Echelons of Signal Repair Theater of Operations
313
Par. 1302
b. The first and second echelons of repair, both being within the using organization, are known as ’’Organizational Maintenance".
£. The third, fourth and fifth echelons of maintenance are furnished by ’’Service Units":
Third Echelon - by Division, Corps, or Army
Fourth Echelon - by Army
Fifth Echelon - by Communications Zone
d. Variations in the responsibilities of the echelons from those shown in the illustration may occur to a minor extent for specific equipments, due to the
nature of the equipment, or to peculiarities in its field of use. For example, a second echelon may for certain equipments perform third echelon repair, and be provided with corresponding repair part stocks, if the equipment is highly specialized and the second echelon repairman is of a specially trained type. In such cases, there will be no third echelon of repair as such.
e. The supporting depot supply of repair parts required for the initial and continued functioning of the five echelons of maintenance, is illustrated diagramma-tically by figure 1302, insofar as the "Flow" of such supplies is concerned.
LEGEND:
NEW OR RECLAIMED MATERIEL--------------►
REPAIRABLE MATERIEL — O-O-O—O-O-O-O—0-0——
REPAIRED MATERIEL—x—x—x—x-x—<—»---x—/-f
FIGURE 1302. Flow of Supplies - Thru Depot Supply Channels and Thru Maintenance Repair
314
ZONE OF THE INTERIOR ARSENALS COMMERCIAL DEPOTS FACILITIES PLANTS PORTS SERVICE COMMANDS
s' X r____
/ Overseas SsTkr \
/ Th“tre h® \
5TH ECHELON 5TH ECHELON
BASE, INTERMEDIATE *-*—■ <—•*-*- — '-x——BASE, INTERMEDIATE
ANO ADVANCE AND ADVANCE
REPAIR DEPOTS *•--------------------------SUPPLY DEPOTS
____________________ ANO SALVAGE DEPOTS
I I II
4TH ECHELON _M_X—x—x—x—x—x-x—x—x^x—x-te- ’ 4TH ECHELON
**MV AND AAF MAINTENANCE --------------------- ARMY AND AAf SUOMY DEPOTS
UNITS, DEPOTS ANO SHOPS
\ \ \ /
X°\ ~ ~~I /
3RD ECHELON
X LIGHT ANO MEDIUM /
■MMMWMGBMSWK MAINTENANCE UNITS X
■ * ANO SERVICE CENTERS
I t
♦ 9
2ND ECHELON UNITS
1ST ECHELON USER
Par. 1303-1304
1303. MAINTENANCE PARTS - SUPPLY PLAN.
a. General --------
(1) The supply of maintenance parts to the field is based primarily on Supply Catalog sections SIG 7 and SIG 8 for tactical equipments and SIG 10 for fixed plant equipments.
(2) Two main categories of maintenance parts are available for the servicing and repair of communications equipment: those at the Front, consisting of running spares, organizational spares and 3rd Echelon spare parts; and the spare equipments and parts available at dumps and depots and their associated repair shops.
b. Expendable Supplies. Expendable supplies required by each organization but which are not included in SIG 7 or in Tables of Equipment are, in general, initially issued to newly activated organizations in accordance with section SIG 4-1 of the Supply Catalog. They are obtained by requisition on the basis of SIG 4-1.
£. Maintenance Parts. (1) Maintenance parts for theatres of operation are supplied generally in accordance with War Department Circular No. 227 1944, "Spare Parts Requirements, Procurement, and Issues’*.
(2) First and second echelon spares, as shown in SIG 7, are issued initially automatically, and thereafter by requisition.
(3) Third and fourth echelon spares are furnished from overseas depot stocks, however, when specific types of equipment for which an organization will provide maintenance can be determined in advance, issue may be made to the organization prior to its departure from the United States.
(4) Army depot spare parts stocks shown in SIG 8 are normally not issued to an organization departing for overseas, but such stock is drawn from the overseas base depot stock after arrival. Under special circumstances the initial issue of these parts may be made to army depot organizations, provided that the specific types and quantities of equipment which such organizations will support are known, and when the equipment is of such type that repair parts could not normally be expected to be already available within the theatre.
(5) Base depot spare parts stocks are furnished automatically to overseas base depots as a supply for all equipment being furnished to the theatre for the first time. Thereafter, automatic supply takes place only for substantial increases in like items previously furnished
to the theatre. In all other cases, maintenance parts are requisitioned by the overseas depot in accordance with theatre local stock control procedures, using SIG 8 as a guide. The supplies for base depot stock include stocks for the third and fourth echelon maintenance organizations and for the army depot, in quantities computed from SIG 8.
(6) Within the theatres, the distribution of maintenance parts for service and repair is usually in accordance with the maintenance parts lists of SIG 7 and SIG 8 for each equipment. Running spares of certain items, such as vacuum tubes, fuses, etc., are provided as a part of the issue equipment, and are carried either in the equipment or in accompanying chests. As these parts are expended replacements are requisitioned by item at convenient periods. The quantities of running spares which are provided with each equipment are shown in SIG 7. SIG 8 furnishes a list of maintenance parts, and quantities of parts to be used as a guide for issuance to higher echelons (third and fourth echelon and army and base depots). The quantities shown in SIG 8 are the allowable stocks which may be issued or maintained, but they do not constitute requirements for minimum mandatory issue.
1304. SIGNAL SUPPLY CATALOGS.
a. The Army Service Forces Catalogs include the Signal Supply Catalog (as authorized by ASF Circular No. 121; 1943). The Signal Supply Catalog will ultimately include all standard nomenclature lists, equipment lists, spare parts lists, allowances of expendable supplies, maintenance lists, and similar lists for requisition and issue, heretofore published by Circular or other medium.
b. The catalog sections do not supplant Tables of Allowances, Tables of Basic Allowances, Tables of Equipment, or Tables of Organization and Equipment; however, all items covered by these Tables are listed and detailed within the structure of the Signal Supply Catalog Sections.
£. All Sections of the Signal Supply Catalog and amendments thereto are distributed by the Adjutant General.
d. Paragraph 1305 indicates briefly the scope of each section of the Signal Supply Catalog.
315
Par. 1305
1305. RELATIONSHIP OF SIGNAL SUPPLY CATALOG TO SUPPLY PLAN.
Signal Supply Catalog
SIG 1
Title
INTRODUCTION
Scope and Use
Thia section will include:
(1) A guide to all sections of the Signal Supply Catalog, with explanations of their use.
(2) Explanation of symbols and abbreviations used.
(3) List of stock classes.
(4) Sample requisition form, with explanation of its use.
(5) Necessary cross references.
SIG 2
SIG 3
INDEX
LIST OF ITEMS FOR TROOP
ISSUE
Includes descriptive data and nomenclature for all items which appear in Tables of Equipment. Also includes certain assemblages, and nomenclature items which are subordinate to or dependent on items listed in the Tables of Equipment, and which may also appear in Catalog SIG 4-1; and some items which do not appear in Tables of Equipment but are considered of proper interest. Stock numbers, nomenclatures, net and packed weights and cubages are included.
Purpose: To facilitate preparation of requisitions by unit commanders.
SIG 4-1
ALLOWANCES OF EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES FOR TROOP ISSUE
Lists expendable supply allowances according to using organizations, and also lists allowances of certain articles per unit of equipment. The quantities shown per organization or per unit of equipment are not periodic allowances, but are the maximum quantities authorized to be on hand. Formerly Signal Corps Circular No. 10^1, ’’Allowances of Spare Parts, Accessories, and Expendable Supplies’’, which it supersedes.
SIG 4-2
SIG 5
ALLOWANCES OF EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES FOR POSTS, CAMPS & STATIONS
STOCK LIST OF ALL ITEMS
Same as for Catalog SIG 4-1. Will supersede Signal Corps Circular No. 10-2.
A catalog of all items which have been assigned Signal Corps stock numbers. For the use of depots, procurement agencies and higher echelons in procurement, in keeping of property records, and the preparation of requisitions. Contains the stock number, nomenclature, identifying description, and units of measure for each listed item. Eventually will include unit price and indication of expendability of the items (Expendability is now indicated in Supply Bulletins 11-1 and 11-2). Listing is according to stock number.
316
Per. 1305
Signal Supply Catalog
SIG 6
Title
SETS
°SIG 7
ORGANIZATIONAL SPARE
PARTS LISTS
SIG 8
HIGHER ECHELON SPARE PARTS LISTS
SIG 9
SIG 10-1
JIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE
■LISTS - INSTRUCTIONS AND INDEX
SIG 10-2
FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS - FACTOR TABLE, MFR. CODE NO. LIST, ABBREVIATIONS
SIG 10-3
FIX]® PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS - EQUIPMENT FOR WHICH MAINTENANCE PARTS WILL NOT BE FURNISHED
Scope and Use
A set of sections, normally one pamphlet for each set of tool, test or maintenance equipment. Will list component items of these equipments.
One or more separate pamphlets for each important item of equipment, each containing the current issue lists of authorized equipment, including spare parts, for issue to the first and second echelons. The quantities shown are the authorized automatic initial issue, and the subsequent levels to which the organizational parts listed may be maintained by requisition. For the use of: All organizations using the equipment; all signal organizations charged with maintaining the equipment; all organizations or establishments charged with storing or issuing the equipment.
One or more separate pamphlets for each equipment, containing a list of all parts for supply and maintenance, showing the quantity allowance for each part for the third and fourth echelons, the Army Depot Stocks, and the Base Depot Stocks. The quantities shown are not initial issue requirements; they are a guide for the determination of initial issue and subsequent stock levels.
For use by all signal repair echelons higher than the second echelon charged with maintaining the equipment; all organizations or establishments charged with storing or issuing the equipment.
Not at present planned for issue.
A complete list of Fixed Plant Equipment arranged numerically and alphabetically by types of Equipment -Radio, Power, Wire, Teletype and Meteorological. Contains an index of maintenance lists arranged numerically by SIG 10 numbers; also a description of the SIG 10 Catalog.
Contains a factor table to be used to determine the quantities of parts to be stocked at stations, and for use as a guide for making initial issues to supply depots. Also contains a complete list of names of manufacturers of parts, and codes of manufacturers, and a list of abbreviations used in the SIG 10 catalog.
Indicates equipment for which maintenance parts have not been procured.
Table continued on next page
700898 0—46-
22
317
Par. 1305-1307
RELATIONSHIP OF SIGNAL SUPPLY CATALOG TO SUPPLY PLAN. (Continued)
Signal Supply Catalog
Title
Scope and Use
SIG 10-4 to SIG 10-9 SIG 10-10 to SIG 10-299 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Not at present assigned. Radio Transmitting Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists.
SIG 10-300 to SIG 10-399 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Radio Receiving Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists
SIG 10-400 to SIG 10-499 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Miscellaneous Radio Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists
SIG 10-500 to SIG 10-699 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Power Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists
SIG 10-700 to SIG 10-849 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Wire Equipment Maintenance parts Lists
SIG 10-850 to SIG 10-899 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Teletype Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists
SIG 10-900 to SIG 10-925 FIXED PLANT MAINTENANCE LISTS Metereological Equipment Maintenance Parts Lists
Section III
Maintenance Equipments
1306. GENERAL.
a. Maintenance Equipments (ME* s) as they currently exist, include a wide variety of types which may be generally defined as kits consisting of either maintenance parts, maintenance supplies, tools, test equipment, or any combination thereof issued initially as a unit to meet the needs of a particular type of organization which has repair and maintenance to perform on one or more signal equipments,
b. These equipments are of two principal classes, namely General Use parts, and Special parts grouped for the maintenance of specific equipments. Under current War Department policy, no new Maintenance Equipments (ME’s) will be developed which contain special parts groups for maintenance of specific equipments. Provision for issue of such parts will be made in the spare parts lists in the appropriate SIG 7 and SIG 8 Catalog Sections.
c_. Except for those cases where completely satisfactory Maintenance Equipments exist, Maintenance Equipments containing essentially spare parts for specific types of equipment will not be continued in use. The two types of Maintenance Equipments which will be continued in use, are as follows:
(1) Those containing parts commonly used in the maintenance and repair of
many types of communications equipment. Examples of this type are ME-9 and ME-10 which contain large assortments of general use screws, nuts, washers, wire and miscellaneous supplies.
(2) Those used as a means for the grouping of certain running spares, in order to facilitate initial issue and transportation.
d. In those cases where spare parts groups are retained as "Maintenance Equipments", the spare parts included in such an ME will appear as a maintenance list in the appropriate SIG 7 or SIG 8 catalog section, as a spare parts, that is, a maintenance parts list for the equipment to which they apply. A note on such lists indicates those parts which are carried by a certain Maintenance Equipment.
e. Such Maintenance Equipments ((1) and (2) above) will be authorized on Tables of Equipment or SIG 4-1 and described, in detail, by a publication of the parts lists in SIG 6 section of the Supply catalog.
1307. DESCRIPTION AND,STOCK NUMBERS.
a. Paragraph 1308 gives a description of the maintenance equipments used in connection with signal equipment including some ME’s which are cancelled or replaced by other ME’s. These are listed for reference purposes. Replacement information is given when available.
b. Paragraph 1309 gives stock numbers, weights and volumes of the maintenance equipments listed in paragraph 1308.
318
Par. 1308
1308. MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENTS - DESCRIPTION
Principal Users
.. ! (See also Sig 4-1
~ .1^,. tUrL „ «”<* Tables of
——-------- ----2221^----------- --------Equl^t) ________________________Description and Remarks_______________
Equipment Switchboard Bd'iioItc^ioI sl8*°Pb*Cos. Consists principally or miscellaneous small general use bard-
owitcnaoard BD-llO(TC-lO) ware wlth switchboard wire and power wiring accessories. Space
provided for items in Chest CH-64. Part of Telephone Central
Office Sets TC-1 and TC-10.
“iT “'6 ^‘Obboard BD-89.*(TC-2) SIg.Opn.Cos. Consist, principally or miscellaneous »all general use herd-
ware with cross-connecting wire and power wiring accessories.
Space provided for items in Cheat CH-59. Part of Telephone
Central Office Set TC-2.
Equipment ? Lin^Uni^BEZ??'1'^! See ME-8° Chest CH-69 containing a large assortment of maintenance parts
typewriter Modal 15* for 15 te±et;yPewriter sets; includes magnet coil, contact
commercial* * springs, motor brushes, special springs, screws, washers, fuses,
oil, grease, ribbon etc; one-third of parts made up into 5 complete service kits; for 2nd and 3rd Echelon maintenance.
Replaced by ME-80.
Equipment 9 maintenance6^11" Sig.Dep.Co. Large assortment of general use screws, nuts, bolts, and plugs,
Sig.Rep.Co. terminals, insulating tubing, shielding, bakelite plates and
Sig,Bn’ small wire for radio set repair. Used with radio repair truck.
Sig.Co.Inf.Div. Available on requisition in accordance with Cat. SIG 4-1.
Sig.Co.Armd.Div.
Sig.Tr.Cav.Div.
Sig.Serv.Org.
Sig.Port.Serv.Co.
Equipment Rran^eauinm^nt^Z” • Sig.Dep.Co. Large assortment principally of general use screws, nuts, and
and maintansnpa pair Sig.Rep.Co. washers, wire, miscellaneous supplies, such as cloth, sandpaper,
Sig.Instl.Co, carbon tetrachloride. Available on requisition in accordance
Sig.Serv.Org. with Cat. SIG 4-1.
Sig.Co.Inf.Div.
Sig.Co.Armd.Div.
Maintenance ME-11 Switchboard BD-96(TC-4). Sig.Opn.Co. .
Equipment Panel BD-97 Tn/ru Chest CH*65 containing tools for 1st and 2nd Echelon
si e a h n ’ maintenance of Switchboard BD-96 and Panel BD-97 (pliers,
SiI*DeZ c\T’DiT* screwdrivers, soldering iron, drop light, wrench, etc.) and Siff*Tr r *ri some maintenance parts (fuses, binding posts, cordage, ground
Sig*Co*Amph 7* rod» 8tc,)‘ Part of Telephone Central Office Set TC-4.
Sig.Co.Serv.Gp.
Table continued on next page
319
MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENTS - DESCRIPTION (Continued) Principal Users (See also Sig 4-1
_____Nomenclature_____ and Tables of Name__ Type No.________Used for__________________ Equipment) ________________Description and Remarks_______________
Maintenance ME-13-( ) Radio Set SCR-509 Div.Arty.Inf.Div. Chest CH-71-( ) containing Oscillator V0-4-( ), Voltohm-
Equipment " " SCR-510 Hq.Sec.Co.Rad.Armd. meter 1-107, alignment tools and miscellaneous items with
n n scR-609 spare tubes and batteries for the included test instruments.
n n qrD_Ain For alignment of radio sets. Replaced by ME-73.
. . SCR-619 a- 11-306C end D.
Maintenance ME-14-( ) Model HD Earth Boring Sig.Const.Co. Large assortment of heavy spare parts for maintenance of
Equipment Machine (Earth borer Hq.Co.Sig.Bn. earth borer and pole setting trucks; consists of parts for
and pole setter) on boring head, leveling worm, supporting case, clutch & brake,
Twink- K-44-1 ) derrick & sheave, strap sheave and auger assembly. Used with
but not part of Truck K-44-( ).
Maintenance ME-15 LM Pole Derrick on Sig.Const.Co. Spare parts for maintenance of pole derrick; includes foot,
Equipment Truck K-43-( ) Hq.Co.Sig.Bn. legs, sections, sheave, etc. Used with but not part of
Truck K-43-( ).
Maintenance ME-16-( ) Winch L-18 on Trucks Sig.Const.Co. Spare parts for maintenance of Winch L-18 assembly with
Equipment K-43-( ) and K-44-( ) Hq.Co.Sig.Bn. clutch; complete set of parts. Used with but not part of
Trucks K-43-( ) and K-44-( ).
Maintenance ME-18 Teletypewriter TG-7 Sig.Dep.Co. Spare parts for 4th and Sth Echelon maintenance of 50 Tele-
Eauipcient typewriters TG-7. Includes large assortment of teletype-
writer but not motor parts. Replaced by ME-90.
Maintenance ME-22a Telephone EE-8-( ) Sig. Repair Co. Case CS-112 containing spare parts for maintenance of Tele-
Equipment Sig.Co.Inf.Div. phone EE-8-( ); screws, binding posts, cord, case and strap,
Sig.Dep.Co. etc.; parts for 10 Telephone EE-8-( ) for 4 months.
Sig.Opn.Co. IM 11-349.
Sig.Bn.Hq.Co.
Maintenance ME-23a Infomation Center SCS-5 AW Regt. Spare parts for repair of operations center; relays, cords,
Equipment AW Bn. telephone sets, etc.
Maintenance ME-24a Information Center SCS-5 AW Regt. Spare parts for maintenance of filter center; relays, cords,
Equipment Filter Center TC-15 AW Bn. fuses, telephone sets, plotting materials, etc.
Maintenance ME-25a Information Center SCS-5 AW Regt. Spare parts for maintenance of intercept frame; cords, fuses,
Equipment Filter Center TC-15 AW Bn. resistors, lamps, telephone set parts, and small assortment
of maintenance tools, etc.
Maintenance ME-26a Information Center SCS-5 AW Regt. Spare parts for maintenance of terminal radio channel control
Equipnant Filter Center TC-15 AW Bn. equipment; vacuum tubes, fuses, dry cells, telephone sets,
protector blocks, and several small tools such as pliers, screwdrivers, etc.
320
Par. 1308
321
Principal Users
(See also Sig 4-1
____Nomenclature________________and Tables of Name_Type No. __________________Used for_______ Equipment) _______________Description and Remarks_______________
Maintenance ME-30 Switchboard BD-91(TC-12) Sig.Rad.Int.Co. Consists of pliers, screwdriver, soldering iron, twine, torch,
Equipment Sig.Opn.Co. wrench, cordage and miscellaneous items; contained in
Sig.Opn.Bn. Case CS-78. 1st and 2nd Echelon maintenance of Switchboard
BD-91.Used with but not part of TC-12.
Maintenance LIE-31-A Reel Unit RL-26-A equipped Sig.Opn.Co. Chest of spare parts. Cancelled and replaced by ME-65
Equipment with Briggs & Stratton Sig.Rad.Int.Co. and ME-66.
engine
Maintenance ME-31-B Reel Unit RL-26-A equipped Sig.Opn.Co. Chest BC-5 containing large number of gasoline engine spare
Equipment and C with Lauson Engine Ray-843 Sig.Rad.Int.Co. parts for maintenance of Reel Unit RL-26-A with Lauson
[ME-31-(b)], or Lauson engine; parts such as spark plugs, magneto pistons & piston
Engine Ray-885 [ME-31-(C)] rings, gears, and miscellaneous small parts, for 3rd
j Echelon use in continental U.S. only.
Maintenance ME-34( ) Radio Set SCR-509 Div.Arty.Inf.Div. Chest CH-96 containing spare accessories consisting of
Equipment " " SCR-510 Div.Arty.Armd.Div. antenna, headset with cords, microphone, tubes, etc. Classed
" " SCR-609 Corps Art.Brig. as non-expendable items; expendable items included in
* * SCR-610 ME-59.
Maintenance ME-35 Radio Sets - General Radio Repairmen in Expendable items packed with Tool Equipment TE-113; con-
Equipment Sig.Dep.Co., Sig. sists of flashlight batteries, hack-saw blades, cloth, sand-
Repair Co., Sig.Co. paper, solder, terminals, wire, etc. Formerly issued to Inf.Div., Sig.Co. each radio repairman of Radio Repair Sections. Cancelled
Armd.Div., Sig.Rad. and components included in TE-113.
Int.Co., etc.
Maintenance EE-36 Radio Set SCR-536-( ) Sig.Co.Inf.Div. Box BX-66 containing ball antenna, microphone, grease,
Equipment Inf.Regt. cement, switches, vacuum tubes, small parts, some hardware
Lt.Inf.Regt. and moisture-proofing materials and instructions; for 2nd
Echelon repair and maintenance of 20 radio sets SQR-536-( ).
Maintenance ME-37 Teletypewriter repair. Sig.Depot Co. Expendable items packed with Tool Equipments TE-50-A and
Equipment Sig.Repair Co. TE-124; consists of flashlight batteries, carbon tetraSig.Co.Inf .Div. chloride, solder, friction and rubber tape, etc. Cancelled
Sig.Bn., Hq.Co., and components included in TE-50-A.
etc.
Maintenance ME-38 Telephone and telegraph Sig.Rep.Co. Expendable items packed with Tool Equipment TE-49-A; con-
Equipment repair. Sig.Dep.Co. sists of flashlight batteries, cloth, sandpaper, tape, etc.
Sig.Opn.Co. Formerly issued to each telephone repairman. Cancelled and
Sig.Port.Serv.Co. components included in TE-49-A.
1308
Par
322
MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENTS - DESCHIPTION (Continued)
——-------- Principal Users
(See also Sig 4-1
____Nomenclature_____ and Tables of
Name_____ Type No. ____________Used for________ Equipment) ______________Description and Remarks _______________
Maintenance ME-39a Switchboard BD-71 Sig.Serv.Gp. Crate or box containing replacement parts for 3rd Echelon
Equipment " BD-72 Sig.Rad.Int.Co. maintenance and repair of Switchboards BD-71, BD-72, BD-91
" BD-91(TC-12) Sig.Co.Mtz.Div. and BD-96. Consists of binding posts, capacitors, coils,
” BD-96(TC-4) Sig.Co.Amph. cords, fuses, generators, switches, lamps, plugs, receivers,
Sig.Co.Armd.Div. Switchboard Units EE-2-B and similar items.
Maintenance ME-40-( ) Radio Set SCR-300 Sig.Bn. Chest CH-165-( ) containing oscillator, alignment indicator,
Equipment Sig.Co.Inf.Div. alignment tools, headset, antennas, cords, screwdriver
Inf.Regt. and wrench for maintenance of 6 radio sets SCR-300-( ).
Lt.Inf.Regt. Expendable items for use with ME-40 are contained in
ME-53. IM 11-315.
Maintenance ME-53 Radio Set SCR-300 Sig.Bn. Spare batteries, tubes and lamp for Radio Set SCR-300-( ) and
Kit Sig.Co.Inf.Div. for oscillator and indicator of ME-40-( ); contained in
Inf.Regt. Chest CH-165-( ) with ME-40-( ). Used with ME-40-( ).
Lt.Inf.Regt. TM 11-315.
Installation ME-58 200 Line Switchboards Plant Engineering Equipnent packed in kits for installation of a 200 line
Equipment Agency switchboard. Packed by Phila. depot for export shipment.
Maintenance ME-59 Radio Set SCR-509 Same issuance as Expendable items associated with ME-34-( ); consists of bat-
Kit " •• SCR-510 ME-34-( ). teries, fuses, tubes, vibrators etc.; packed in an expendable
" » container. Used with ME-34-( ).
SCR-olU
Installation ME-60 1000 Line Switchboards Plant Engineering Equipment packed in kits for installation of a 1000 line
Equipn OseUlator per U a p<>rtabl. mit aai.bla 0T port *
NO. 51A(Spl.) ZX’uWS
X-66227 quencies to be continuously varied from 0 to -1 kilocycle from the X-61819T indicated value. A minimum frequency of approximately one kilocycle may be obtained. Output range from +16 to -75 dbm. Output impedance 135 ohms; requires use of 135:600-ohm repeating coil when employed far supplying testing power to 600-ohm circuits. The repeating coil Included in the 32A (Spl.) Transmission Measuring Set may be used for this purpose. Requires 60 watts; operates on 105-125 volts, 50—60 cycles, e^c.
Table continued on next page.
347
TEST SETS AND TEST INSTRUMENTS - DESCRIPTION. (Continued)
Shown Net TM or
______Nomenclature_____ in Weight Instruction
Name Type No. Fig. No. (lbs.) Book ______________________________Description and Remarks______________ Issuance
Test Set Western 1316 18 - Cable splicer’s portable tone test set consisting of a tone supply from Part of TE-56-A
Electric Co. a battery operated vacuum tube oscillator. Used with W.E.Co. 108A
No. 76A Amplif1 er, 1019C or 1119C Test Set and W2HK cord equipped with 47B and
186 plugs for locating shorts, gro-nds, crosses, split pairs and wet spots in cables. Has a lower output than the Test Set 1-51. Cable splicer can signal and talk to wire chief or maintenance man having a 76A Test Set. Vacuum tubes (VT147 and VT221) are furnished with the
set. Requires 2 Batt. BA2, 2 Batt. BA27.
Amplifier Western 1316 11 For use with W.E.Co. 76A Test Set,1019C or 1119C Test Set and. W2BK Part of TE-56-A
Electric Co. cord equipped with 47B and 186 plugs in cable testing, fault locating
No. 108A for identifying wires in cables. Consists of 107A Amplifier, W2BJ
cord equipped with 513A tool and No. 47B plug and R2CF cord equipped with 528 Receiver and No. 110 plug. Requires 1 Batt. BA27, 2 Batt.
BA2, 3 Tubes VT44.
Test Set Western 1320 7 Line repairman’s telephone. Talking and listening. Also signaling
Electric Co. to all switchboards and telephones. 20-cycle hand generator and
No. 1017E buzzer. Will operate a 56A drop through 11,500 ohms. Consists of
W.E.Co. 17E Test Set with transmitter and receiver. Requires 1
Batt. BA-27.
Test Set Western 1304 Exploring coil (W.E.Co. No. 19C Test Set) and 1 No. 528 or No. 716B Part of Test
Electric Co. Receiver equipped with RC2D cord and No. 186 plug; for use in Set 1-51. Part
No. 1019C locating various low resistance conductor faults in cable. If of TE-56-A
difficulty is experienced in hearing tone pickup, W.E.Co. No. 108A
Amplifier may be used with No. 1019C Test Set, requiring the use of
W2BK cord equipped with No. 47B and No. 186 plugs (not furnished with
test set). Used with W.E.Co. No. 76A Test Set.
Test Set Western Same as W.E.Co. No. 1019C Test Set, except includes 2 No. 528 or
Electric Co. No. 716B receivers equipped with a No. IB headband and R2CC cord with
No. 1119C No. 186 plug, instead of single receiver.
Volt-Ohm- Western 1321 3 TM 11-2042 Portable meter. Ranges; voltage a-c or d-c, 0-3, 0-15, 0-30, 0-150, Part of Testing
Milliammeter Electric Co. or W.E.Co. 0-300 volts; current d-c, 0-150 milliamperes. 0-3, 0-15 amp; resist- Packages: TeleNo. D-166852 Instr.Book ance, 0-1000, 0-10,000, 0-100,000, 0-1,000,000 ohms. Is equipped phone; C Carrier
X-66260 with 4-1/2 volt battery. Includes two pairs of test leads, one pair X-61819T and
equipped with test picks (W.E.Co. KS-9290), the other with test Telephone; V.F.
clips (W.E.Co. KS-9291). Carrying case (W.E.Co. KS-9307) and Carrying X-61821L
Strap (W.E.Co. KS-9308) are not included as part of meter. Carrying Part of Opera-
strap attaches either to meter or carrying case. tions Center
AN/TTQ-1 Alternate for ' 1-166 in
IE-53-( ).
348
Par. 1317
Par. 1317
Shown Net TM or _____Nomenclature___ in Weight Instruction _NS£e-------_______________________________ ___________________Description and Remarks ________ Issumoe
Milliameter Electric Co. let^T^Jr^Ti (maltilneter) similar to w-E*Co- ^166852 May be supplied in
(Multimeter) No. I>169370 tion of extZ^al 45 vlaad reVCTS^ne provision for connec- place of 1-166 in
tion of external 45 V battery and 0-10 megohm scale. Will perform IE-53-( ) same functions as Test Set TS-26/TSM by connection of external
45 V Battery BA-59. Includes pair of test pick leads (W.E.Co.
KS-9290) and pair of test clip leads (W.E.Co. KS-9291). W.E.Co
Carrying Case IS-9307 (Stock No. 3S2573-2) may be used to contain meter and external battery, and Strap W.E.Co. KS-9308 (2Z9049.il) for carrying meter or carrying case, but are not included as part of meter.
and°Power ES^800092°* " " ' Portable test set for testing power and patching cables terminated Part of IE-23,
Cable in 4- or 24r«ccnductar Jones type plugs, for continuity, shorts and Filter Center
Test set crosses. Required cords supplied with test set and with Filter TC-15 and Informa-
Center and Information Center equipment. tion Center SCS-5
Test Set teletype 1323 63 Teletype Signal distortion test set for use largely in maintenance depots and
nvn.1 Corp. repair shops. Test signals transmitted from set may be distorted
* DXD" Instr.Man. from 0 to 100%. Signals measured by means of a stroboscope contain-
No. 43 ing a small neon lamp. Transmitted signals are test message, R. and
Y. A motor power cord is supplied. Additional equipment required:
Motor Unit Assembly MU26 (115 V, 50/60 eye, a-c series governed
motor)
Set of Gears, #96572
Signal Line Cord, #103230
Stroboscope Cord, #103231
+110V D-c Cord, #103232
-110V D-c Card, #103233
Motor requires power input of 125 VA at 115 volt, 50/60 cycle, a-c.
Test Set Teletype - 63 Teletype Same as Test Set DXD-1 except arranged to send "blank" T, 0, M, V or
Corp. "letters" signals in addition to the test message, R and Y signals.
No. DXD-4 Instr.Man. Supplied with all required cords. Motor unit and gears are ordered
No. 23 separately.
Tuning Fork Teletype - - - 87.6 VPS tuning fork for use in adjusting speed of teletypewriter Part of TE-50-A
motor to American Standard of 368 0PM.
103628
Tuning Fork Teletype - 96.19 VPS tuning fork for use in adjusting speed of teletypewriter Pert of TE-50-A
uorP« motor to British Standard of 404 0PM.
104984
70080.8 ()—4(>--- 24
349
Par. 1317
—.. -.... .
'Tl""n. ...........—..."".."‘"■■--yr
j I" -
I "
,L . - _ -J Jv
.' ■■ ' I
CLIPS > Wr±z^f...................
FOR
LINES1 H ■ 4W
B S ‘7TLa1I selector 7 I
■ __ ■• < -^^gwlRiw *EY HMIh
o SBl ■
ratio dial 7?
.iT/Rol
Bi nd i ng | sqRSL/ -q--W^'s fefeoy?^.$> A#?-Av^-._ *%*
posts for ? g "ff&aa&a a * v
lines---i—l^RSQ^yW^rnTKWm-r^CTrTSB^^M^
W -V- ..
&'-u^yWhiw^^Ku^^^™wM"lllBWk &T/JSI1? «>5Swl«
• >tj~ s. *'F?& ■* " '
galvano - '.-BBS IS gSiW^ Ols --
METER 'V^M|rM»lF» .‘WgaBi8**^ _
■W^7g^^^w'
WhSHK luv^USrBr *^SfllSK3fc-~
■#ftv .. ^1- s ■■ ■» - •
iWtf^WWk^W--'- tone—: W0®8»Mr
RECEIVER W^SmE^W EXPLORING -1
«S^rW*«s
~.«.<
351
FIGURE 1307. Tube Tester 1-177
FIGURE 1305. Test Set I-61-A
Par. 1317
---TOOL POCKET OPEN
SHOWING MAINTENANCE TOOLS --------------------------------------------------------------- COMPARTMENT OPEN SHOWING SPARE LAMPS AND FUSES ------------------------------------------------------------------+ BAT, -BAT AND GND cord cd- _______binding posts
PG’' PLUG biS ---signal lamps to indicate
METER M1 ' 2l s '1 ■■ i '
TEST SELECTOR
TEST BINDING POSTS
FIGURE 1308. Test Set 1-181 FIGURE 1309. Test Set I-193-A.
352
Par.
1317
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS —Sr
)r p VOLTMETER
■' V-^eT’J'' bias-end ® . r|®S
X ••• • jjfca-rw.,.-^k DISTORTION jgWWSiBK^fer.:■ I OgJ
~,,. ______ ^.."....^jife knob —-•' ®S||
'* •■ __ - - - -MW*—mm—H _ _ ..^ instruction ”
f iMffifflHMMK ■MMPBf IMbb^.- r maNUa1 sb
< : ^^”***’*•’•••^1 mBk i^-----------------------MM|- MOTOR
. !:'« —■—■ | n| « switch
/' W A iSS? ----S®--signal
/ ill! Mr z^S^i- ^HMii # IflR dr£& character
| ImN ilBB' 4u f r — local test
\ i» / / | W'-vO^^^O' / JACKS
sjii IEb k s »- •-wK^«8EsE^Ewt ■ iS5®r /
RINGING, TALKING | '• • TfffWW jjMWtiy Il -'
& VOLTMETER W > /^^BgwKS^WW^Ww ' M feO 11 1 ''
TESTKEYS-----VL\
TEST CORDS |../{B WOOD
8. CLIPS ML yCASE
=^^&,, ^jy IBMMiF^^Sl^gWHrwWMK^P'7 W Sr' ^SniMau, motor coro
^wwg^~~ TmL -‘v « ■« ~*\'- ^SjsSk an0 plug
f* “ ——— - --I Bw'' / ^k MB^-JKww---- L|NE SIGNAL
■^' • -> Ji HAND I ^hk. W '^JS 1 CORD AND PLUG
ccXatop x/^w%. X. y/-L„„L,IS, jS*4'-- ~~- wMBr DC COBD
HANDSET, CORD & PLUG AND PLUG
FIGURE 1310. Test Set EE-65-C, D, E, F or G FIGURE 1311. Test Set TS-2/TG
353
Par. 1317
GALVANOMETER—। TEST SELECTOR SWITCH
BINDING-1 L BINDING Nt POSTS POSTS FOR - —---TEST SELECTOR
FOR LINE TELEPHONE KEYS
*—TALKING & TEST KEYS
VOLTAGE ."MMBMKHHEESSaB-JL
ra nge
JACKS — VOLT-OHMMETER
TEST MB
SELECTOR HUflAlMI
switch____\|
RESISTANCE
range ^mL A~
jacks -----tIHEEBSSSSt w -
TEST - I 1 F —•
CORDS ' :■'
& CLIPS
lline
reversing
tfL SWITCH
354
355
Par. 1317
p DB METER
INPUT ____— __ • ' ''
DIAL SWITCH __t,________________—^PSr^ ”
*’ * • * a wk.
CALIBRATING_____________4 K.11 V f X
RHEOSTAT *-------*0 W jH| V /-»,« 'HSjLt 1- w-- POWER SWITCH
_ ** ** — ^SSfel X\
® \
• I 1 — 1 I
< #■ < .W Jr
I ’W D’c POWER —
SUPPLY CORD "wMWBWfc^7.,.:-,
FIGURE 1314. Attenuator _,TP _ .., _ .
(Western Electric Co. 5A) FIGURE 1315. Transmission Measuring Set
1 (Western Electric Co. 13A)
> -
356
Par. 1317
...... ..
?iaS ___J3Lr»T
. -.—H , x >
B^£.. " ;
IV -j^OpK 7 ..- *—l07A amplifier
I *“76A TES7SET k .■■<*. //%
■ Hr “~rfs w nM*
W HK &R S2 I J *** k,t- r-ASSEMBLY
i®' ■ *“* W '%Vv V R2CF C0RD
^®hi||8; c2=» 528 RECEIVER
w* -* jilk ' ' 110 PLUG
^^■■’: |86 PLUG 1 MWK A
'X j^r iftk 1))B z
/--O r^^-O-T=?^
v—!**-IJ" —-•-W2BJ CORD
^******i*^O 5I3A T°0L
47B PLUG
FIGURE 1316. Cable Fault Locating Equipment
(Part of Tool Equipment TE-56-A)
Par. 1317
357
r' "l" !iL>lWMliiMw I
H4 fejy^pa ----— OUTPUT BINDING „
Q qs T < P0STS ™ \:g|
-==- ===== 2 6 ' jB ■
— SWITCH FOR C |_ OUTPUT CONTROL WwE ^BF SH
AC OR DC _ OR KC RANGE POTENTIOMETER
POWER CORD AND INDEX --_.._ ... ,
INDEX FOR J _______ POWER SWITCH ------ ---------------------
CYCLES SCALE ^gggggl^ |r
FIGURE 1317. Oscillator FIGURE 1318. Transmission Measuring Set
(Western Electric Co. 19C) (Western Electric Co. 32A)
Par. 1317
TEST SELECTOR ml—<1. I — --------r LINE
SWITCH l^***’1^ TERMINALS
-u-■ • 11 7''
■
RECEIVER-i lIBf ~ ‘
>*-T S§iK. ':;L::h:-::
j^jT SH Ke^m|W
MICROPHONE GENERATOR
FIGURE 1319. Oscillator FIGURE 1320. Test Set
(Western Electric Co. 51A) (Western Electric Co. 1017E)
358
Par. 1317
jsil
'uHK JHH
OwBWMfefr- iSi"” g^^rzxzXZZs^^
'--A G' ' . . ■ v ■'hV'.^V—
. ' ^-^^•««***-*****,,,*w' FIGURE 1321. Volt-Ohm-Milliammeter FIGURE 1322. Volt-Ohm-Milliammeter
(Western Electric Co. D-166852) (Western Electric Co. D-169370)
(Test leads not shown)
359
Par. 1317
----- XNCAALTODPSTO"TION
S’ /
■>
CONTROL
.A
•: '■-••• S -lO—____________DISTORTION
CONTROL KNOB
' ; ' :c ■ ■ ■ ■■ . I : '
I ’ .'A ’
S .ZYjj-.S -____ run - stop
CONTROL K
s^r°cRH----
------test
:9EmmHk^S SELECTING knob
FIGURE 1323. Test Set (Teletype Corp. No. DXD-1)
360
Par. 1318
1318. TEST SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Nomenclature Stock No. Packed for Export
Weight (lbs.) Volume (Cu. Ft.
Name Type No.
Voltammeter 1-23 3F6023 3 0.2
Test Set 1-48—B 3F4048B 37 1.4
Test Set 1-49 3F4020 (formerly 3F4049) 22 0.7
Voltammeter 1—50 3F6050 3 0.2
Test Set 1-51 3F4051 40 1.2
Test Set Test Set 1-56-( ) I-61-A 3F4056( ) 3F4061A 50 2.5
Test Set Test Set I-61-B I-61-C 3F4061B 3F4061C 60 1.5
Signal Generator 1-72-( ) 60 eye. 3F3852( ).l 42 2.
Signal Generator 1-72-( ) 25 eye. 3F3852( ).2 42 2.
Test Set 1-76 3F4076 36 1.4
Test Set I-83-A 3F4083A 44 2.
Test Meter 1-87-( ) 3F4087( ) 17 1.
Field Strength Meter Signal Generator I—95—( ) 1-96-( ) 3F2725( ) 3F3896( ) 18 1.1
Bias Meter I-9 7-A 3F3397 5 0.3
Voltohmmeter 1-107 3F7107 8 0.3
Frequency Meter Set 1-129-( ) 3F2729( ) 46 1.7
Signal Generator I-130-A 3F3900-130A 40 1.6
Test Unit 1-135-( ) 3F4470-135( ) 36 1.5
Test Set I-139-A 3F4139A 2 0.2
Analyzer I-153-B 3F1715-153B 15 0.8
Voltohmmeter 1-166 3F7166 14. 0.5
Analyzer 1-167-( ) 3F1716( ) 17 1.
Tube Tester Test Unit 1-171 1-176 3F4171 3F4470-176 15 0.8
Tube Tester 1-177 3F5700-177 7 0.3
Test Set 1-181 3F4181 20 1.4
Test Set I-193-A 3F4193A 95 4.5
Test Set 1-199 3F4190-199 48 2.2
Signal Generator 1-208 3F3900-208 124 5.5
Alignment Indicator 1-210 3F9-210 3 0.2
Test Unit I-236-( ) 3F4470-236( ) 3 0.1
Analyzer BC-1052-( ) 3F1710( ) 7 0.4
Test Set EE-65 3F4065 40 1.5
Frequency Meter Set SCR-211-( ) 2C1411.5 70 4.
Test Set TS-2/TG 4TED57GG 160 12.
Test Set TS-26/TSM 3F4325-26 22 0.7
Test Set TS-27/TSM 3F4325-27 58 1.9
Test Oscillator TS-32/TRC-1 3F4325-32 30 1.
Test Set TS-190/U (W.E.Co. 67B) 3F4316.1 3 0.2
Test Set Teletype DXD-1 4TDXD4/DTS 180 16.
Test Set Teletype D2O4 4TDXD4/DTS 180 16.
Tuning Fork Teletype 103628 4FT103628 — —
Tuning Fork Teletype 104984 4FT104984 — —
Attenuator WECO 5A(SPL) 3F1775 10 0.3
Transmission Measuring Set WECO 13A(SPL) 3F4270-2 25 1.2
Test Set WECO 19C 3F4051/C1 7 0.2
Oscillator WECO 19C(SPL) 3F3570-1 55 1.4
Transmission Measuring Set WECO 32A(SPL) 3F4270-3 60 1.2
Oscillator WECO 51A(SPL) 3F3570-2 60 1.2
Test Set WECO 76A 3F4051C 35 0.8
Amplifier WECO 108A 2C398 23 0.7
Test Set WECO 1017E 3F4017E 18 0.6
Vol tohmrai Hi ammeter WECO D-166852 3F7127 6 1.5
Voltohmmilliammeter WECO D-169370 3F407 2-13 6 1.5
361
Par. 1319-1320
Section VII
Cross Reference Data
1319. GENERAL.
a. This section is a cross reference of the ME’s, TE’s, IE’s and Test Sets of sections III, IV, V and VI, tabulated according to the equipments to which they apply.
_b. Equipments for which ME’s, TE’s, etc., are provided are listed in alphabetical order in par. 1320; opposite each equipment in the listing are tabulated the Maintenance Equipments, Tool Equipments, Test Equipments, and Test Sets, which specifically apply to that equipment. In addition par. 1320 lists general classes of equipment, such as ’’Teletypewriter Equipment - General”, ”Radio Sets - General”, etc.; opposite
each general class are tabulated the ME’s, TE’s, etc., which are intended for maintenance of equipments in that general class and are not again indicated where the specific equipment is listed.
£. Par. 1320 is intended to serve as a key to indicate which ME’s, TE’s, etc. should be considered for use with any specific equiwnent, and as an aid in locating more detailed information in sections III, IV, V and VI. Several maintenance equipments or tool equipments, etc. may be listed as applicable to one type of equipment; not all may be required for a specific use of an equipment. The detailed information sections III, IV, V and VI must be referred to in order to determine the differences between items, such as the echelon of use, status (i.e. limited standard, replaced by, etc.) or the kinds of components.
1320. CROSS REFERENCE TABLE OF MAINTENANCE. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENTS. AND TEST SETS.
Equipment Type or Kind of Equipment Reference tc > Detailed Information
Maintenance Equipments Par. 1308 Tool Equipments Par. 1311 Test Equipments Par. 1314 Test Sets Par. 1317
Amplifier Equipment AN/TRA-1 MK-ll/TRA-1
Cable - General TE-16 and TE-55 and TE-56, or TE-73 (Fixed Plant) IE-10 or IE-29 1-48 and 1-49, and EE-65 or IS-2 6/ISM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter and IS-27/ISM, and BE-70 and 1-51, or W.E.Co. 76A Test Set and W.E.Co. 108A Amplifier and W.E.Co. 1019C or 1119C Test Set
Conduit (Inside Wiring) TE-70
Converter CF-4-( ) (Carrier 2 Wire - 4 Wire) Converter Set TC-33-( ) (Carrier 2 Wire - 4 Wire) TE-123 IE-53 IS—190Al, and. 1—166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and IS-26/ISM or W.E.Co. D-169370 and IS-27/ISM
Earth Borer & Pole Setter (Model HD Earth Boring Machine) on Truck K-44-( ) ME-14
Filter Center TC-15 ME-24 and ME-25 and ME-26 IE-22 and IE-23 1-181 and W.E.Co. Patching and Power Cable Test Set ES-800092
Information Center SCS-5 ME-23 and ME-24 and ME-25 and ME-26 IE-22 and IE-23 1-181 and W.E.Co. Patching and Power Cable Test Set ES-800092
Line Unit BE-77 ME-7 I-97-A
Line Unit BE-77A & B KE-7
Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 IS-190/U and W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter
362
Par. 1320
_________________Heferance to Detailed Information_____________
Equipment type Maintenance Tool Test
or Equipments Equipments Equipments Test Sets
_______Kind of Equipment_________ Par. 1308 Par. 1311 Par. 1314 Par. 1317
Operations Centers
See also:
Filter Center TC-15
Information Center SCS-5
Packaged Equipment — General W.E.CO. See individual packaged equipments.
X-66086 or W.E.Co. X-66087 or W.E.CO. X-66088
Packaged Equipment See also:
Repeater Package; Telegraph;
Regenerative
Repeater Package: Telephone; C Carrier
Repeater Package: Telephone;
VF
Ringer Package: Voice Fre-
quency; 2 Circuit and
4 Circuit
Telegraph Carrier Package:
Voice Frequency; 6 Channel
Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier
Terminal Package: Telephone;
H Carrier
Perforator, Model 14 (Commercial) ME-83
Perforator Set TO-11 Perforator portion ME-83 or
ME-9 3
Perforator Set TG-13 ME-81
Perforator Transmitter, ME-94
Model 15 (Commercial)
Perforator Transmitter Set TG-23 Perforator portion Transmitter-Distributor portion ME-83 or ME-93 ME-82 or ME-92
Pole Derrick (IM) on Truck K-43-( ) Radio Set SCR-293 Radio Set SCR-294 Radio Set SCR-299 ME—15
Radio Set SCR-300 ME-40 and ME—53 and ME-67
Radio Set SCR-399
Radio set SCR-499
Radio Set SCR-508 ME-64
Radio Set SCR-509 ME-13 or
ME-73 and
ME-34 and
ME-59
1-87
1-87
BC-1052
EE-65
BC-1052
BC-1052
1-107 or
1-210
Table continued on next page
363
Par. 1320
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE OF MAINTENANCE, TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENTS, AND TEST SETS. (CONTINUED) --------------------------------------
Reference to Detailed Information
Equipment Type Maintenance Tool Test
or Equipments Equipments Equipments Test Sets
Kind of Equipment Par. 1308 Par. 1311 Par. 1314 Par. 1317
Radio Set SCR-510 ME-13 or 1-107 or
ME-73, and 1-210
ME-34 and
ME-59
Radio Set SGR-528 ME-64
Radio Set SCR-536 ME-36 IE-17 or 1-135
IE-75
Radio Set SCR-538 ME-64
Radio Set SCR-608 ME-64
Radio Set SCR-609 ME-13 or 1-107 or 1-210
ME-73, and
ME-34 and
ME-59
Radio Set SCR-610 ME-13 or 1-107 or 1-210
ME-73, and
ME-34 and
ME-59
Radio Set SCR-619 ME-13 or 1-107 or 1-210
ME-73
Radio Set SCR-624 IE-12 or 1-56 and 1-95 and 1-96
IE-19 or and 1-130 and 1-139
IE-36
Radio Set SCR-628 ME—64
Radio Set AN/TRC-1 MK-4/TRC-1 IS-32/TRC-1
Radio Set AN/TRC-3 MK—5/TRG-3 IS-32/TRC-1
Radio Set AN/lRC-4 MK-6/TRC-4 TS-32/TRC-1
Radio Set AN/TRC-7 IE-12 1-95
Radio Set AN/VRC-1 IE-12 or 1-56 and 1-95 and
IE-19 or 1-130 and 1-139
IE-36
Radio Sets - General ME—9 and TE-41 and IE-9 or 1-56 and 1-72 and
ME-35 IE-48 or IE-26 1-76 and 1-83 or 1-199
TE-113, and and 1-129 and 1-158 or
IE-46 or 1-166 or 1-167 and
TE—114 and 1-176 and 1-177 and
TE—45 1-208 and SCR-211-( )
Radio Stations - Fixed Plant TE-87
Reel Unit RL-26-A
With Lauson Engine Ray-843 ME—31—B
With Lauson Engine Ray-885 ME—31—C
With Briggs & Stratton Engine ME-31-A or
ME-65 or
ME-66
364
Par. 1320
Equipment Type or Kind of Equipment Reference to Detailed Information
Maintenance Equipments Par. 1308 Tool Equipments Par. 1311 Test Equipments Par. 1314 Test Sets Par. 1317
Relays - General (Adjusting) TE-71 and TE-72 or TE—112 IE-22 1-181
Repeater TG-30 (terminal) ME—111 or ME-112
Repeater TG-31 (intermediate) ME-113 or ME—114
Repeater CF-3-( ) (Carrier) ) Repeater Set TC-23-( ) (Carrier)) ME-76 TE-123 or TE-124 IE-53 T5-190/U and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and TS-EO/lSM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter and IS-27/TSM
Repeater CF-5-( ) (Carrier - ) 2 Wire) ) Repeater Set TC-37-( ) ) (Carrier - 2 Wire) ) TE-123 IE-53 IS-190/U and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and IS-26/TSM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter and T3-27/TSM
Repeater Package: Telegraph; Regenerative See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-66031B TS-2/TG
Repeater Package: Telephone; C Carrier See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-61819T 1-171 or 1-177 and 1-181 and W.E.Co. 32A Trans. Meas. Set and W.E.Co. 51A Oscillator and W.E.Co. 5a Attenuator and W.E.Co. 13A Trans. Meas. Set and W.E.Co. 19C Oscillator and TS-190/U and W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter
Repeater Package: Telephone; VF See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-61821L 1-171 or 1-177 and 1-181 and W.E.Co. 5A Attenuator and W.E.Co. 13A Trans. Meas. Set •and W.E.Co. 190 Oscillator and TS-190/U and W.E.CO. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter
Reperforator, Model 14 (Commercial) Perforator portion Reperforator portion ME-83 or ME-93 ME-69 or ME-89
Reperforator, Model 14X (Commercial) ME-81 or l.IE-91
Reperforator Transmitter Set TG-25 Reperforator portion Transmitter - Distributor portion ME-81 or ME-91 ME-82 or ME-92
Hable continued on next page
700898 0—46-----25
365
Par. 1320
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE OF MAINTENANCE, TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENTS, AND TEST SETS (CONTINUED) -----------------------
________________Reference to Detailed Information
Equipment Type Maintenance Tool Test
or Kind of Equipment Equipments Par. 1308 Equipments Par. 1311 Equipments Par. 1314 Test Sets Par. 1317
Reperforator Transmitter Set TG-26-( ) Reperforator portion Transmitter - Distribution portion ME-69 or ME-89 ME-82 or ME—92 -
Reperforator Transmitter Set TG-27-( ) Reperforator portion ME-89
Ringer Package: Voice Frequency; 2 Circuit and 4 Circuit See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-61821L 1-181 and W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter
Ringing Equipment EE-100-( ) ) (Voice Frequency) ) Ringing Equipment EE-101-( ) ) (Voice Frequency) ) Ringer Set TC-24-( ) (Double ) Circuit) ) ME-77 TE-123 or TE-124 IE-53 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter or W.E. Co. D-166852 Meter and TS-190/U
Spiral Four - 100 mile Carrier System ME-87 and ME -88 TE-123 or TE-124 IE-53 TS-190/U and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and TS-26/lSM or W.E.Co. D-169370 and TS-27/1SM
Spiral Four Equipment -See also: Telephone Terminal CF-l-( ) Telephone Terminal Set TC-21 Telegraph Terminal CF-2-( ) Telegraph Terminal Set TU-22 Repeater CF-3-( ) Repeater Set TC-23 Repeater CF-5-( ) Repeater Set TC-37 Converter CF-4-( ) Converter Set TC-33 •
Switchboard BD-71 ME-39
Switchboard BD-72 ME-39
Switchboard BD-80 (TC-1) ME-4 or ME-71 TE-44 IB-26/ISM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter
Switchboard BD-89-A (TO-2) ME-6 or ME-72 TV—44 TS-26/ISM or W.E.CO. D-169370 Meter
Switchboard BD-91 (TC-12) ME-30 or ME-39
Switchboard BD-96 (TC-4) ME-11 or ME-39
Switchboard BD-110 (TC-10) ME-4 or ME-71 TE-44 ■E-26/TSM or W.E.Co, D-169370 Meter
Switchboard HD-120 (TO-20) ME-63 TE-44 m-26/iSM or w.e.co. D-169370 Meter
366
Par. 1320
Equipment type or Kind of Equipment Reference to Detailed Information
Maintenance Equipments Par. 1308 Tool Equipments Par. 1311 Test Equipments Par. 1314 Test Sets Par. 1317
Switchboard - 200 line (W.E.Co. #550-C PBX) ME—58
Switchboard - 1000 line (W.E.Co. #701 PBX) ME—60
Telegraph Carrier Package: VF; 6 Channel See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-61822C I-193-A
Telegraph Equipment - General See also: (Teletypewriter Equipment -General Wire Equipment - General) ME-10 ME -33 and TE-47 or TE-111 and TE-112, and TE-49 or TE-73 (Fixed Pit.) and TE-69 (Fixed Pit.) or TE-79 IE-10 or IE-29 1-23 and 1-50 or 1-166 or W.E.Co. D—166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and 1-181, and I-193-A, and IS-2/TG, and Teletype DXD-1 Test Set or Teletype DXD-4 Test Set
Telegraph Terminal CF-2-( ) ) (Carrier) ) Telegraph Terminal Set TC-22-( )) (Carrier) ) ME—75 TE-123 or TE-124 IE-53 TS-190/U and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and TS-26/ISM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and TS-27/TSM
Telephone EE-8-( ) ME—22
Telephone Central Office Set (Aux.) TC-5 TE-44 IS-26/TSM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter
Telephone Central Office Set TC-1 - See Switchboard BD-80
Telephone Central Office Set TC-2 - See Switchboard BD-89-A
Telephone Central Office Set TC-4 - See Switchboard BD-96
(Telephone Central Office Set TC-10 - See Switchboard BD-110
Telephone Central Office Set TC-12 - See Switchboard BD-91
Telephone Central Office Set TC-20 - See Switchboard BD-120
Telephone Equipment - General See also: Wire Equipment - General ME-10 i ME-38 and TE-47 or TE-111 and TE-112, and TE-49 or TE-73 (Fixed Pit.) and TE-69 (Fixed Pit.) or TE-79 (Fixed Pit.) IE—10 or IE-29 1-23 and 1-50 and 1-61 and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter and 1-177
Telephone Terminal CF-l-( ) ) (Carrier) ) Telephone Terminal Set TC-21-( )) (Carrier) ) ME—74 TE-123 or TE-124 IE-53 T5-190/U and 1-166 or W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter, and IS-26/TSM or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter and TS-27/TSM
Table continued on next page
367
Par. 1320
GROSS REFERENCE TABLE OF MAINTENANCE, TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENTS, AND TEST SETS. (CONTINUED) ---------------
Reference to Detailed Information
Equipment Type or Kind of Equipment Maintenance Equipments Par. 1308 Tool Equipments Par. 1311 Test Equipments Par. 1314 Test Sets Par. 1317
Teletypewriter Equipment - General See also: Telegraph Equipment - General Wire Equipment - General ME-10 and ME-37 and ME -86 TE-50 1-97 and 1-193 and 1-236 or IS-2/TG and Teletype DXD-1 Test Set or Teletype DXD-4 Test Set, and Teletype 103628 and 104984 Tuning Forks
Teletypewriter, Model 15 (Commercial) ME—7 or ME-80 and ME-18 or ME-90
Teletypewriter, Model 19 (Commercial)or TG-19 Perforator portion ME-84 or ME-90 and ME-9 4
Teletypewriter portion Model 15 or TG-7 ME-80
Transmitter - Distributor portion ME-82 or ME-92
Teletypewriter TG-7 ME-7 or ME-80 and ME-18 or ME-90
Terminal Package: Telephone; C Carrier See Pkg. Eqpt. Gen. W.E.Co. X-61819T and W.E.Co. X-6182LL 1-171 and 1-181 and W.E.Co. 32A Trans. Meas. Set and W.E.CO. 5LA Oscillator and W.E.Co. 5A Attenuator and W.E.Co. 13A Trans. Meas. Set and W.E.Co. 19C Oscillator and TS-190/U and W.E.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.CO. D-169370 Meter
Terminal Package; Telephone; H Carrier See Pkg. Eqpt.Gen. W.E.Co. X-61821L W.E.Co. 19C Oscillator and W.E.Co. 13A Trans. Meas. Set and W.E.Co. 5A Attenuator and W.E. Co. D-166852 Meter and 1-181 and TS-190/U and 1-171 or 1-177.
Transmitter - Distributor Model 14 (Commercial) ME-82 or ME-92
Winch L-18 on Trucks K-43-( ) and K-44-( ) ME-16
Wire Equipment (Signal ground wire equipment) - General See also: Cable - General Telegraph Equipment - General Telephone Equipment - General Teletypewriter Equipment -General ME-10 and ME-38 TE-5 or TE-29, and TE-26, and TE-33, and TE-36, and TE-47 or TE-111 and TE-112 and TE-49 and TE-51 IE-10 or IE-29 1-23 and 1-50 or 1-166 or WoE.Co. D-166852 Meter or W.E.Co. D-169370 Meter or TS-26/TSM and 1-61 and 1-177 and 1-181 and TS-27/TSM
368
Par. 1401-1404
CHAPTER 14
RADIO EQUIPMENT
Section I General
Section II
Tactical Radio Sets for Ground Use
1401. INTRODUCTION.
£. This chapterprovides descriptive, technical and logistical information pertaining to radio equipment for ground communication use. The information is given in the form of tables supplemented by photographs and sketches of radio sets and equipment. x
b. This chapter covers only equipment which is used for ground to ground communication. It does not include such apparatus as direction finding, range, marker and radar equipment.
£. Section II covers the radio sets for ground use which are classified as tactical radio sets. These sets operate mainly in the HF (3.0 to 30 Me) and VHF (30 to 300 Me) ranges. However, some of them are capable of operating in the MF (.3 to 3.0 Me) range. Information concerning remote control equipment which may be employed with these radio sets is included.
d. Section III gives information on fixed plant transmitting-and receiving radio equipment used by the Army Communications Service. This includes Command communications and Airways communications facilities. This radio equipment is usually employed in long haul administrative and special service traffic. It is used mostly for telegraph or teletypewriter service and operates in the LF (.03 to .3 Me), MF (.3 to 3.0 Me), HF (3.0 to 30 Me) and VHF (30 to 300 Me) ranges.
e. Section IV gives Information on antennas and associated equipment for both tactical and fixed plant radio sets.
f. An example of the use of information given in this chapter in planning a communication system involving radio links is given in chapter 2.
1402. PHOTOGRAPHS.
a. This chapter includes photographs of practically all of the radio sets, radio transmitters and radio receivers which are listed in the tables. It also includes photographs of remote control and other miscellaneous equipment as well as sketches which illustrate the antenna types referred to in the descriptive tables.
b. In many cases, the photographs of racTio sets or equipment show the radio components only, i.e. a radio transmitter, a radio receiver, or both. Rarely do they show all of the accessory components .
1403. GENERAL.
a. Information given in this section is confined to tactical radio sets for ground use. No airborne sets are included, although a number of the sets listed are capable of communicating with aircraft radios. A few sets classified as "obsolete" are included, since they are encountered occasionally in the field.
t). Data are also given on remote control equipment which provides talking and listening facilities as well as send-receive control at a point remote from the radio set.
1404. RADIO SETS - DESCRIPTION.
a- Paragraph 1408 lists tactical radio sets for ground use in numerical sequence and gives descriptive information and technical data for each set. The information includes such items as frequency range, type of modulation, type of antenna, rated transmitter output power, power supply requirements, etc.
b. A list is given of the sets with which each radio set can communicate, excluding obsolete sets. Similar information including obsolete sets may be obtained from the chart in paragraph 1409.
£. Data are also given covering the types of emission and the corresponding military characteristic distance ranges of the sets. These are the distance ranges which were specified when the military characteristics of the sets were established and are ground wave ranges. The ground wave ranges obtained in field use may depart considerably from those shown, being greater or less depending on such factors as type and siting of the antenna, nature of the terrain, prevalence of noise, condition of set, etc. Under jungle conditions the ground wave range will usually be considerably reduced and it may be necessary to resort to sky wave transmission. Under suitable conditions sky wave transmission may provide communication over considerably greater distances.
d. In the column which indicates the type of antenna furnished with the radio set, reference is made to figures of representative antenna types. These sketches are merely illustrative and do not necessarily represent a particular Signal Corps antenna.
e. Maintenance equipment for electrical servicing is not furnished as a part of the radio set unless so indicated. For
369
Par. 1404-1407
many of these sets, the listed electrical instruments are those referred to in the respective technical manuals. They are listed as a guide to the type of equipment which should be available to any organization responsible for the maintenance of these sets. Some, but not all, of the larger radio sets include the listed electrical testing equipment for use in line-up and maintenance by the using organization. Information on maintenance equipment and test sets will be found in chapter 13.
1405. FREQUENCY RANGE CHARTS. The charts m paragraph 1409 illustrate graphically the frequency coverage of the transmitter and receiver of the tactical radio sets and are useful in rapidly identifying the various sets which operate in a given frequency range. One chart covers amplitude modulated sets and the other covers frequency modulated sets.
1406. RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA. Paragraphs 1410 to 1414^ inclusive, give data such as stock number, weights and volume, etc., for the tactical radio sets for ground use. For this purpose the sets are divided into the following five categories: ground, transportable; vehicular; pack; air transportable; and ground, mobile.
1407. REWTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
a. Remote control equipment for use with certain tactical radio sets is described in paragraph 1415. Information on major components, range of operation, power input requirements, etc., is given.
_b. Many of the radio sets are furnished with remote control equipment. For others, universal remote control equipment which will operate with a number of different types of radio sets is available but must be ordered separately. Some arrangements require a remote control unit at both ends of the associated wire line while others require only a telephone set at the remote point and a control unit at the radio set.
c_. Various types of remote control equipment differ in the number of features provided. All use either dry cell batteries or power obtained from the a-c source which supplies the radio set, and in some cases, both.
d. Some kinds of remote control equipment provide only intercommunication between attendants, with the attendant at the radio set doing the necessary switching from receiving to transmitting and vice versa, while others, in addition, provide voice, CW and tone operation of the radio set from the remote point. Some units also control the power equipment associated with the radio set.
_e. For most remote control equipment only one pair of wires is required. However, some equipment requires two pairs and some use the phantom circuit derived from two pairs to provide a third communication channel. Some types of remote control equipment must be located within a few feet of the radio set, while others can be located from a short distance to several miles away.
f. Paragraph 1416 gives stock numbers, weTghts and volumes for remote control equipment.
370
Par. 1408
See following page for paragraph 1408
371
Par. 1408
■■L408. RADIO SETS FOR GROUND USE - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTIVE AND TECHNICAL DATA. Rated
Ihiission Trans
& Military Power
. Type Major Radio Components Frequency Range-Me Type Mod. Char.Range in Milesa Output-Watts Freq. Control^ Preset Channels Communicates Withc Type Antenna*1
SCR-151 Fig. No. 1401 Receiver and Transmitter BC-148 5-96-4.56 AM CT-5 mi. 5 M.O. None SCR-151 (See Par. 1409) Loop LP-?
SCR-161 Receiver and 4.57-5-1 AM CW-5 mi. 5 M.O. None SCR-161 Loop LP-7
Fig.No. Transmitter (See Par. 1409)
1401 BC-151
SCR-171 Receiver and 2.64-5-04 AM CW-15 mi. 5 M.O. None SCR-171 60-Ft. Inv. L with
Fig.No. Transmitter (See Par. 1409) Ctpse. CP-11 (Fig.
1402 BC-I56 1458)
SCR-177-A Transmitter AM CW-100 ml. 75
Fig.No. 1405 BC-191-A Tuning Unit TU-5-A 0.4-0.8 TU-5-A 1.5-5.O TU-6-A 5-0-4.5 Ant.Tun.Unit BC-5O6-A 0.4-0.8 Receiver BC-189-A Coil Set C-144-A 0.4-0.65 C-145-A O.65-I.O C-147-A 1.5-2.6 C-148-A 2.6-4.5 Tone-70 Voice-50
SCR-177-B Fig.No. 1404 Transmitter BC-191-C Tuning Unit TU-5-A 0.4-0.8 TU-5-A 1.5-5.0 TU-6-A 5.0-4.5 Ant. Tun.Unit BC-5O6-A 0.4-0.8 Receiver BC-514-C O.I5-I.5 BC-512-C 1.5-18.0 AM CW-100 ml. Tone-70 Voice-50 75
SCR-1?8 Fig.No. 1405 Transmitter 2.4-5.7 BC-18? Modulator BC-188 Receiver BC-186 AM Pt.-to-Pt. CT-25 mi. Tone-20 Voice-10 Grd.-to-Plane CW-100 mi. Tone-?5 Voice-50 5 cw 2 Voice 5 Tone
SCR-179 Fig.No. 1405 Transmitter 2.4-5.? BC-18? Modulator BC-188 Receiver BC-186 AM Pt.-to-Pt. CT-25 mi. Tone-20 Voice-10 Grd.-to-Plane CW-100 mi. Tone-75 Voice-50 5 cw 2 Voice 5 Tone
aThis ia the military characteristic distance rwnga f see paragraph 1404.
“M.O. ie used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
cSets with which it is possible to establish conmunlcatlon by virtue of overlap in operating frequency ranges. Communication may also be established with airborne radio sets which operate in the same frequency range. Obsolete sets not covered, see paragraph 1409 for their frequency overlap.
M.O. None SCR-177,188,195, 197,205,209,210, 245,284,288,299, 599,499,506,511, 556,545,595,694, AN/TRC-2, AN/VRC-1 Crowfoot (0.4-0.8 me); 1/4 Wave Inv. L with Ctpse. (I.5-4.5 Me.) Figs. 1459 & 1458)
M.O. None SCR-177,188,195, 197,205,209,210, 245,284,288,299, 599,499,506,511, 556,545,595,694, AN/TRC-2, an/vrc-i Crowfoot (0.4-0.8 Me); 1/4 Wave Inv. L with Ctpse. (1.5-4.5Mc.) (Figs. 1459 & 1458)
M.O. None SCR-1?8, 1?9 (See Par.1409) 25-Ft. Whip (1C-49 to 56 incl.) and Ctpee. CP-12 & CP-15 (Fig. 1460)
M.O. None SCR-178, 179 (See Par.1409) 25-Ft. Whip (M5-49 to 56 incl.) and Ctpee. (CP-12 & CP-15) (Fig. 1460)
^Antenna ie part of set. Figure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennae.
°Power supply units are normally furnished as a part of the radio set unless stated otherwiee. The recently adopted policy of shipping equipment "less batteries” requires that dry batteries, in general, be requisitioned separately. Storage batteries, except vehicular, are supplied with the set.
372
Par. 1408
Power Power Input Requiremente Maintenance Equipments Weight In Use (Lbs.) TM or Inst. Book11 Remarks
Xmtr -Hand Gen. GN-55 Rec. -5 Bat. BA-25 2 Bat. BA-2 Xmtr - 12.5W. 10V.DC 10W. 400V.DC Rec. - O.75A at 4.5V.DC 10 Ma. at 90V. DC AC Vacuum Tube Voltmeter 76.5 IM 11-257 OBSOLETE - Pack; loop, telegraph set using a regenerative receiver and Hartley oscillator transmitter. Can be carried by two men Replaced by SCR-284. Used by Sig.C, INF, AF.
Xmtr -Hand Gen. GN-55 Rec. -5 Bat. BA-25 2 Bat. BA-2 Xmtr -12.5W. 10V.DC 10W. 400V.DC Rec. - O.75A at 4.5V.DC 10 Ma. at 90V.DC AC Vacuum Tube Voltmeter 76.5 TM 11-257 OBSOLETE - Pack; loop telegraph set using a regenerative receiver and Hartley oscillator transmitter. Can be carried by two men. Re placed by SCR-284. Used by FA.
Xmtr - Hand Gen. GN-55 Rec. - 5 Bat. BA-25 2 Bat. BA-2 Xmtr - 12.5W. 10V.DC low. 400V.DC Rec. - O.75A at 4.5V.DC 10 Ma. at 90V.DC AC Vacuum Tube Volt- meter 179 TR-1210-51 OBSOLETE - Ground, transportable; intended for command communication use between Division Headquarters and Brigades and Regiments. Transported by vehicle. Replaced by SCR-284. Used by Sig.C, INF, FA, AAF
Power Unit PE-49 Dyn. Unit BD-69 2 Stor. Bat. BB-50 (Incl. 1 spare) Xmtr - Tftoth PE-49) 565W. at 14.4V.DC 55OW. at 1000V.DC Rec. - 5A. at 14V. DC Freq. Meter SCR-211, Sig.Gen.1-72, Test Set I-56, Output Meter, Dummy Antenna, 0-1A 850 TM 11-252 TM 11-800 (Xmtr) Ground, transportable; used, between tactical field units. Carried, in vehicle or cargo aircraft. Limited Standard. Replaced by SCR-177-B. Used by Sig.C, CAC, TD.
RF Ammeter
Power Unit Xmtr - Freq. Meter
PE-49-C (From PE-49) SCR-211,
2 Stor. Bat. 565W. at 14.4V.DC Sig.Gen.1-72,
BB-46 55OW. at 1OOOV.DC Test Set
(Incl. 1 spare) Rec. - (Ea.) I-56, Output
k.2A. at 12V. DC Meter, Dummy
Antenna, 0-1A
RF Ammeter
1000 TM 11-252 Ground, transportable ; used between tactical
TM 11-800 field units and as ground set in ground-to-
(Xmtr) plane communication. Two receivers . Trans-
TM 11-850 ported by vehicle or cargo aircraft. Used by
(Rec.) Sig.C, AAF, CAC, TD.
Xmtr -Hand. Gen. GN-57 Mod,. -
2 Bat. BA-25
1 Bat. BA-27 Rec. -
4 Bat. BA-2
2 Bat. BA-25
1 Bat. BA-27
Xmtr -
Hand Gen. (21-57 Mod. -
2 Bat. BA-25
1 Bat. BA-27 Rec. -FBat. BA-2
2 Bat. BA-25
1 Bat. BA-27
Xmtr -
25W. 8V. DC
50W. 500V.DC
5V.i 4.5V.DC
Rec. -
0.25A. at 5V.DC
7 Ma. at 90V.DC
Xmtr -
25W. 8V.DC
50W. 500V.DC
5V. & U.5V.DC Rec. -
0.25A. at 5V.DC 7 Ma. at 90V.DC
225 TM 11-251
(Packed for Transportation)
225 IM 11-251
(Packed for Transportation)
OBSOLETE - Ground, transportable; intended for point-to-point and ground-to-plane communication between artillery units and aircraft for observation purposes. Replaced by SCR-608, SCR-609, SCR-610 and SCR-628. Used by Sig.C, AAF, FA.
OBSOLETE - Pack; same as SCR-178 except carrying cases have pack saddle hangers for transportation by pack animal. Replaced by SCR-608, SCR-609, SCR-610 and SCR-628. Used by FA.
^Maintenance equipment is not furnished as a part of the radio set unless so Indicated. Listed here are electrical instruments which may be required to provide normal servicing of the sets.
Lphe first TM listed for each radio set covers the complete set; subsequent TM'e cover components of that set. All are normally supplied with the radio set.
Table continued on next page
373
Par. 1408
RADIO SETS. FOR GROUND USE - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTIVE AND TECHNICAL DATA, (Continued)
Type Major Radio Components Frequency Type Bnission & Military । Char.Range In Miles* Rated Trans. Power Output- Freq. Preset Channels Communicatee Type With0 Antenna 6.
Range-Mc Mod.. Watts Control0
SCR-188 Fig.No. 1UO6 Transmitter BC-AA-191 Tuning Unit TU-AA-5 TU-AA-6 TU-AA-7 TU-AA-8 TU-AA-9 TU-AA-10 Ant.Tun.Unit BC-AA-19U Receiver BC-I89-A Coil Set C-1UU-A C-IU5-A C-1U6-A C-1U7-A C-1U8-A C-1U9-A C-15O-A C-151-A C-152-A 1.5-5.0 5.O-U.5 U.5-6.2 6.2-7.7 7.7-10.0 10.0-12.5 0.8-12.5 O.U-O.65 O.65-I.O 1.0-1.5 1.5-2.6 2.6-U.5 U.5-6.2 6.2-8.0 8.0-10.5 IO.5-15.O AM CW-100 mi. Tone-70 Voice-50 75 M.0. None SCR-177,188,195, 1/U or 5/U Wave Inv. L 197,205,209,210, Ant. with Ctpse. 2U5,28U,288,299, (Fig. IU58) 599,^99,506,511, 556,5U5,595,69U, AN/TRC-2, AN/VRC-1
SCR-188-A Fig.No. 1UO7 Transmitter BC-191-C Tuning Unit TU-5-A TU-6-A TU-7-A TU-8-A TU-9-A TU-10-A Receiver BC-5U2-C Control Unit RM-12 RM-15 1.5-3.0 5.O-U.5 U.5-6.2 6.2-7-7 7.7-10.0 10.0-12.5 1.5-18.0 AM CW-100 ml. Tone-70 Voice-50 75 (Less at freq, above 8 Me.) M.O. None SCR-177,188,195, 1/U- or 5/U-Wave Inv. 197,205,209,210, L Ant. with Ctpse. 2b5,28U,288,299, (Fig. IU58) 599,U99,506,511, 556,5U5,595,69U, AN/TRC-2, AN/VRC-1
SCR-195-( ) Fig.No. 1U08 Transmitter BC-191 Tuning Unit TU-5-A TU-6-A Receiver BC-512 1.5-5.0 5.O-U.5 1.5-18.0 AM Stationary-CW-60 mi. Tone-UO Volce-20 Moving - CW-50 mi. Tone-20 Voice-15 75 M.0. None SCR-177,188,195, 15-Ft. Whip (MS-U9 to 197,205,209,210, 55 incl.), or 22-1/2 2U5,?8U,288,299, Ft. Wire AN-2U in 599,U99,506,511, semi-fixed loc. 556,5^5,595,69U, (Fig. lU61b) AN/TRC-2, AN/VRC-1
SCR-19U Fig.No. 1UO9 Receiver and Transmitter BC-222 27.7-52.2 AM Voice -5 mi. 0.5 M.O. (Xtal Calibrated) None SCR-19U 15-Ft.Telescoping Whip AN-29-B (Fig. lU61a) and Vert. Half-Rhombic RC-65 (Ordered separately) (Fig. 1U69)
SCR-195 Receiver and 52.8-65.8 AM Voice - 0.5 M.O. None SCR-195
Fig.No. Transmitter 5 mi. (Xtal Cal-
1U10 BC-522 ibrated)
6-Ft.Whip (MS-5C& 51) or 9-Ft. Telescoping Whip AN-JC-B (Fig. lU61a) and. Vert. Half-Rhombic RC-65 (Ordered separately) (Fig.lU69)
aThis is the military characteristic distance range, see paragraph lbOU.
^M.O. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
cSets with which it is possible to establish conmunication by virtue of overlap in operating frequency ranges. Communication may also he established with airborne radio sets which operate in the same frequency range. Obsolete sets not covered., see paragraph 1UO9 for their frequency overlap.
^Antenna is part of set. Figure of representative antennae.
numbers refer to sketches
^Power supply units are normally furnished as a part of the radio set unless stated otherwise. The recently adopted, policy of shipping equipment "less batteries” requires that dry batteries, in general, be requisitioned separately. Storage batteries, except vehicular, are supplied with the set.
374
Par. 1408
Power Supplye Power Input Requirements*"
Power Unit PE-U9 Xmtr -
Dyn. Unit BD-69 /From PE-U9)
2 Stor. Bat. BB-5O 365W. at 1U.UV.DC
(Incl. 1 spare) 55OW. at 1OOOV.DC
Rec. -3A. at 1UV.DC
Maintenance Equipments Weight In Use (Lbs.) TM or Inst. Book*1
Freq. Meter SCR-211, Dummy Antenna, 0-1A. RF Ameter 1150 TM 11-233
Remarks
Ground, transportable; used for ground-to-ground or ground-to-air communication. Transported by vehicle or cargo plane. T.imited Standard. Replaced by SCR-188-A. Used by Sig.C, AAF.
Xmtr -115V. or 230V. Xmtr - 600W. 115V. 60 Freq. Meter SCR-211, 1585 TM 11-233 TM 11-800
60 cycle Com'l Power or Power Unit PE-75, and Rectifier RA-3U Rec. - 115V. 60 Cycle Com'l. Power if operated remote from transmitting site Control Units h Bat. BA-30 Cycle AC (200W. at 12V.DC, 35OW. at 1000V.DC From Rect. RA-3M Rec. - &5W. 115V. 60 Cycle AC (or thru O-25O ohm, 200W. Resistance to 230V.AC) Dummy Antenna, 0-1A. RF Ammeter (Xmtr) TM 11-850 (Rec.) TM 11-900 (Power Unit)
Dynamotor BD-77 Vehicle's 12V. Bat. Xmtr - 57A. (Max.) at 1L.2V. DC from Vehicle's Battery Generator Rec. - 4.2A. at 12V.DC Freq. Meter SCR-211, Dummy Antenna, 0-1A. RF Ammeter 23h TM 11-273 TM 11-800 (Xmtr) TM 11-850 (Rec.)
Bat. BA-32 -13.5V, +3V, +U.5V, +1UV.DC 30J TM 11-238
Ground, transportable; used for ground-to-ground, or ground-to-air cotmnunication. Intended for semi-fixed use inside of buildings where commercial AC power is available. Can be operated in an emergency from the gasoline engine driven generator supplied. Control Unit RM-12 and Control Unit RM-15 are components of Remote Control Equipment RC-U7. All components of RC-1»7 are supplied with this radio set. Can be remotely controlled over 5 Mi. of Wire W-11O-B. Transported by vehicle or cargo plane. Used by Sig.C, AAF.
Vehicular; for communication between stationary or moving vehicles. Normally installed in a vehicle equipped with a 12-volt, 180 ampere-hour storage battery and a 50-ampere generator. SCR-193 has different major components than SCR-193*( ) but operates in same frequency range. Used by Sig.C, AF, CAV, ENG.
Bat. BA-
-13.5V, +3V, +U.5V, +1UUV.DC
50J Portable
58J Vehicular
TM 11-238
Pack; walkie-talkie, provides conmunlcation over relatively short distances. Two tube transceiver consisting of modulated oecilla-tor/euper regenerative detector and module-tor/audio amplifier. Used for training purposes and special projects. Limited Standard. Replaced by SCR-6C9 and SCR-61O. Used by Sig.C, AF, ENG, FA.
OBSOLETE - Pack and vehicular; two tube transceiver consisting of modulated oscilla-tor/super regenerative detector and modula-tor/audio amplifier. Used for training purposes and special projects. Replaced by SCR-609 and SCR-61O. Used by Sig.C, INF.
f
AC power Input requirements are given in watts. To obtain volt-amperes divide watts by 0.8 to 0.9-
^Maintenance equipment is not furnished as a part of the radio set unless so indicated. Listed here are electrical instruments which may be required to provide normal servicing of the sets.
hThe first TM listed for each radio set covers the complete set; subsequent IM's cover components of that set. All are normally supplied with the radio set.
^The weights of the sets are for normal field operation, excluding accessories not required for tile type of operation indicated.
Table continued on next page
375
Par. 1408
RADIO SETS FOR GROUND USE - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTIVE AND TECHNICAL DATA, (Continued)
Type Major Radio Components Frequency Range-Mc Type Mod. anleslon & Military Char.Range In Miles* Rated Trans. Power Output-Watte Freq. Control1’ Preset Channels Communicates Withc Type Antennad
SCR-197 Fig.No. 1111 Transmitter BC-525 Control Unit RM-7 Mtd. in Prime Mover, Truck K-18 3 Receivers BC-312 1 Monitor Receiver Halllcrafter S-20-R Control Unit RM-7 Mtd. in Trailer K-19 1.5-18.0 1.5-18.0 O.5I-H.O AM CW-35 mi. Tone-35 Voice-35 0 100 CW 100 Voice or Tone M.0. or Xtal None (See Remarks) SCR-177,188,195, 197,205,209,210, 215,281,288,299, 599,199,506,511, 556,515,595,691, AN/TRC-2, AN/VRC-1 Xmtr-15-Ft. Vert. (MS-65 to 75 Incl.) Rec.-3 15-Ft. Whips T-338). 17-5. / / 'SUK7 GENERATOR
>■*■=■1 I\
TRANSMITTER- / I *'jji||l|
RECEIVER -----/ I -
BATTERIES
FIGURE 1401. Radio Set SCR-131 or 161
FIGURE 1402. Radio Set SCR-171
398
Par. 1408
TRANSMITTER IKKm^
'^MNC UNIT J •-... -a......
TUNING jlOO DYNAMOTOR —RECEIVER
unit n^Rn i 1 *
iSHBvfIIF FE
///hl f lygF
F l F/fisWffll rah—
। / \—-■ T 9j *
— .yy#r I I I
TUNING UNIT CHEST / ANTENNA *- POWER UNIT
/ MAST SECTIONS
ANTENNA CHEST —
FIGURE 1403.
Radio Set SCR-177-A
i-LT. RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER -j FtunFnG^
- H F RECEIVER TUNING UNIT n UNIT
(----- "■- -~£* "jgr~——i
y * - •' ;
A ......../lK3y^SSIKS‘.
' f A\ !j
. A VI , . . -r^j—wBbr /«/ . ,
f t B HF
'/TiT^''—T ~
*%rir ■g";--^Jii J W&.r
l TUN!NC UNIT CHEST I ANTENNA CHES1
FIGURE 1404. Radio Set SCR-177-B
399
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1405, Radio Set SCR-178 or 179
< c r iS x- ANTENNA
. .. „ . > H / TUN ING UN IT
b >*•'I* Pi 4 /
/ r DYNAMOTOR
/ r RECEIVER
TR A NSM ITTE R /
TUNING UNIT-----
POWER UNIT—i
,L- / ’ "¥ ‘1\'
/fl Jm \ iWWW 44jl V ' i\~
FIGURE 1406. Radio Set SCR-188
400
Par. 1408
UNIT
FIGURE 1407. Radio Set SCR-188-A
r ANTENNA
A <■" T" I
\ rMAST Ci—'- a n
J feSTZl" k to^b iWiiwiwm-
TRANSMITTER ~MKmH aE : --" q eI Wz
■B. zz -r “ -'•th K ?
tuning_JIHB . >Os
\ •». A
roufpMFMT im to transmitter in
EQUIPMENT IN TRAILER K- 19 TRUCK K-18
FIGURE 1411. Radio Set SCR-197
402
Par. 1408
ANTENNA
FIGURE 1412. Radio Set SCR-203
RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER
MOTOR GENERATOR AND BATTERY UNIT
FIGURE 1413. Radio Set SCR-209
FIGURE 1414. Radio Set SCR-210
403
Par. 1408
ANTENNA--A W. 'T' 'S
\ ' A f ir^rTfo ~ ■' MAST BASE ->"L Jfe, A..aK3BKW&fe '■'- —
4 RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER —t &? I
|k >:m-Ss^EfWt j
E*W otBksBP*''"• ■SKMwL'*—---zirS dynamotor
twMKPKiSHr , wB 'VAtafw mini |||y — ..................... ^1
jr .. 7-wHmi
TUNING UNIT
FIGURE 1415. Radio Set SCR-245
FIGURE 1416. Radio Set SCR-284
404
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1417. Radio Set SCR-288
RECEIVER RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER
"*< I ■- ■ '^%5SS-
% i ''
MOUNTING -----♦JfcWs jL*
*j
Rf ®
FIGURE 1418.
Radio Set SCR-293
i
x? fe' 1
" ........................
.RECEIVER ..
MOUNTING ..UiUJU. iJHMjllB JX
FIGURE 1419. Radio Set SCR-294
405
Par. 1408
CASH CONTROL UNIT
I ■
TRANSMITTER S, RECEIVER
VIBRATOR
POWER SUPPLY
FIGURE 1420.
Radio Set SCR-298-C
p- TRANSMITTER LOUD SPEAKER—i f p RECEIVERS p ANTENNA TUNING UNIT
■ IfMEM *
*wiiF®Rpl
IIOL-wm JR
Xm» -TC WviaTfl ■’
-aMF" ~ TTwI.
FIGURE 1421. Radio Set SCR-299
406
Par. 1408
SHORT ____*
ANTENNA w
t_ LONG ANTENNA (HALF WAVE)
flM&SSHMm------- COUPLING UNIT
(PART OF ANTENNA)
LJtB — yransmitter-
rke|ver
( - battery
I trjFl CASE
r~ transformer
—TYjMarn ... -r^===paa^gC^**~~^
FIGURE 1422. Radio Set SCR-300
[—TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER IN SHELTER H0-I7
2 1/2 TON 6X6 CARGO TRUCK (NOT A COMPONENT)
POWER UNIT IN TRAILER K-52 —
RECEIVING ANTENNAS
TRANSMITTING ANTENNA
FIGURE 1423. Radio Set SCR-399
407
receiver
SPEECH AMPLIFIER
receiver
antenna tuning unit
transmitter
Par. 1408
pcrnviNr I TRANSMITTING
RECEIVING ■ _fc- ANTENNA
ANTENNA -*■ -I-
ANTENNA TRANSMITTER
SPEECH i TUNING UNIT 1
AMPLIFIER!, I ; CHESTS FOR SPARE
I 1MB PARTS a ACCESSORIES
RECEIVERS-. KjB Bfe-r' -v
/Z^WnBPIm ISZ
AaRach
FIGURE 1424. Radio Set SCR-499
r RECEIVER
AND CRYSTAL
I CALIBRATOR DYNAJuiotod
|- TRANSMITTER urNAMO'OR q
[m— ANTENNA
--MAST BASE
Jf---MASr BASE BRACKET
CABINET
RECEIVERS—j TRANSMITTER /
Bi ^.. <- / * '’*—
_ g *r /
■ ill flsy
PRESET CHANNElX/
MOUNTING J SELECTORS-
FIGURE 1425. Radio Set SCR-506
FIGURE 1426. Radio Set SCR-508
408
Par. 1408
INDICATING
METER ___
^—ANTENNA
RADIO RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER
I
-------f
~wE JI z> , \ 7
tt JW W/. ¥
V rfe-'
BATTERY CASE -J P'.
FIGURE 1427. Radio Set SCR-509
|*--ANTENNA
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER-r . |
1 ..- (t
A HMMfe 3
J •' 7
VIBRATOR I^M--------------------'1-a*flr r _ ■■ '
PLATE SUPPLY b. SHOCK
HftllBw MOUNTING
H Hr JHp
- 4®***»» -f FIHbf
.ji w
S W^F’ JgS^^L ■_■-...
- DRY BATTERY BOX
FIGURE 1428. Radio Set SCR-510
409
Par. 1408
M CHEST UNIT --W T
-------^gjgL
'x- W .^■**:TM -'^ v -^SEiF
LTiW'^rlrBF*—* »”sg
TRANSMITTER —। PRESET RECEIVER “1
CHANNEL _ L>^..
SELECTOR
iiM J mbI^
Mr ii” s „ ?•
I, d®
&■ • IcSivjaSw^;
xBJ*rr i
51 MOUNTING J
FIGURE 1429. Radio Set SCB-511
FIGURE 1430. Radio Set SCR-528
ANTENNA I i ,'i
PROTECTOR CAP -* f | JA- TELESCOPED
I 1 “ ANTENNA
i Sjggsjk
r5 U I •
I I. '
push T0 __WtmmFw t
TALK SWITCH -fWrl W ’
41!
s
PRESET CHANNEL SELECTOR “
INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER RECEIVER ""
S - ■
■.' ’ ‘ "**
j •■-''•-• J
.a '
i'z^Mar ® H|W iy C fa
| ■ii«
1 1 ' ■ k •
1 ' I
i
4 ■♦—ANTENNA
' B
a IB*— MAST BASE
V I
ANTENNA------*4 (1 \ ' 4tJv
ft If « -^- MAST BASE BRACKET
Im i
CHANNEL SELECTOR “
PUSH BUTTONS------11 f
’S »WR*',Sia» f preset
BS^S^HK. CHANNEL
wMBKSELECTORS
RADIO RECEIVER----j- cabinet /! \
i j r~ tiiiSI
*- MOUNTING
Par. 1408
ANTENNA -► •
5
STRAPS AND BRACKETS
FOR CARRYING
ANTENNA I
RADIO RECEIVER
AND TRANSMITTER —। IT*---- . X. 1 _
1
INDICATING \
METER _______‘ ■K
(/ J 11187IX )
v X»z
h fJl;
>407 ^-internal
< 1Z SPEAKER AND
R®' PROTECTIVE
COVER
FIGURE 1436. Radio Set SGR-609
VEHICULAR
ANTENNA --►
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
BATTERY LEADS
WIRE
TELESCOPING ANTENNA (IN CARRYING POSITION)
RECEIVER AND
TRANSMITTER-------►
INDICATING METER
SPEAKER AND PROTECTIVE COVER
VEHICULAR MOUNTING
VIBRATOR PLATE SUPPLY
FIGURE 1437. Radio Set SCR-610
412
Par. 1408
RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER " BATTERY BOXES
hK/^:;’W fl®-' .W H
/ ■ t II
fe-Ww 4- I
XSSmi
BATTERY CHARGER
FIGURE 1438. Radio Set SCR-619
j iy-^nfn^' ;. ||Ti'iiWih,gfclMn / AND RECEIVER
.■..........031' ■
•^g ■......Ja»:. w
TELEPHONEJ
Lw‘?”e" Uectifier
«- ANTENNA
1
f
MAST BASE
4
<- MAST BASE BRACKET
yCABINET ______
RECEIVER "TRANSMITTER
-•irnirn'^^ '11 111
* ... ...... ........-—■-./
I
_ channel
"■ 91 .WIlJIj'Gi SELECTOR
ton,. —^.-irirT^rT^^ :glS^ii^iilW
FIGURE 1439. Radio Set SCR-624
t MOUNTING
FIGURE 1440. Radio Set SCR-628
700898 0-46-----28
413
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1441. Radio Set SCR-694-AW (Receiver removed from case)
FIGURE 1442. Radio Set SCR-694-C
FIGURE 1443. Radio Set SCR-808
FIGURE 1444. Radio Set SCR-828
414
channel SELECTOR—
_____ __________ TRANSMITTER-, receiver-^
r. |j|g PgSfidi
I if; ,7. - ■: ;y.O|
’ V/wHB 5?_
I I—TRANSMITTER • RECEIVERS *5 '»------“'
L MOUNTING ^v^aswra. -~ ■■»■<■-' ,
.lllIJMWm I— MOUNTING
Par. 1408
HEADSET
415
ca___________
2. J--SWITCHING PANEL
' -~---------..—J ____
# ... ] I
-J*--- FREQUENCY METER
1W‘ w
• p_RECT,r,ER J*$ESr~
j a 9 S ^Bk&HHKE|bH|
" " O . M^ULwAjaW
If e |i j*'-W
"g " • ',. .,' ' ' J® ♦-MODULATOR
E AD SET -----*|g^l|b J M
aHO CONTROL PANEL
i 8 51 fl
POWER SUPPLY gg /w ” \ gj
I B
B ' B
gAx j, ,r y z
M . M § . nF —
H^tSSS^Kl
— FUSE PANEL
mEmTMMm
BlIlB" * ..L;pW*~ POWER CONTROI
.;r^gg=s—» g|l||£j$MKW|B
FIGURE 1445. Receiving Equipment RC-256 FIGURE 1446. Radio Transmitter
JKv —I
' .
; ■ -•
loud a »fcr.zr’E^ k
SPEAKER - _ w .MMB_«*.
^»RM^.W«mWR.i<«w-«.i.Ri.M.MM^.ii.«M..»—|| J .... r,, ..M.M -
CONTROL B rRfrfga ’■ ■8mJ~ pamfiROL
PANEL -S----------'• I PANEL
RECE.VER J 1|P I _ TRANSMITTER
spare { y^~n ’ M
TUBES ‘;J -- SPARE
i tubes
iij- : >fr\ I ~ ’
II j! FvItest
,Vf --4J O METER 4>
ANTENNA TRANSMISSION LINE-1
FIGURE 1447. Radio Set AN/CRC-3
Par. 1408
r TRANSMITTER
(NOT A COMPONENT)
AMPLIFIER
POWER
PACK
FIGURE 1448. Amplifier Equipment AN/TRA-1
FIGURE 1449. Radio Set AN/TRC-1
416
.-RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
Par. 1408
Power Unit PE-162
Power Unit PE-162
Receiver and Transmitter RT-12/TRC-2
Receiver and Transmitter BC-1306
FIGURE 1450. Radio Set AN/TRC-2
POWER UNIT -1
I— CRYSTAL |— RECEIVER
i- ANTENNA BANK ..
CHESTS I &
srir I
Wai MTI I
-. . '.
>jl|S|SBL! .47^- ■
S t •• Itv^KsmI
u . ■' T“'" t
" L MAINTENANCE L TRANSMITTER
EQUIPMENT MBhamoMb
___w^y field
telephone —
FIGURE 1451. Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-3
417
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1453. Radio
Set AN/TRC-7
418
ANTENNA CHESTS FIELD TELEPHONE L TRANSMITTERS
FIGURE 1452. Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4
POWER UNIT -j r MAINTENANCE RECEIVERS
EQUIPMENT
Par. 1408
Transmitter
FIGURE 1454. Radio Set AN/TRC-8
419
Receiver
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1455.
Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-1!
FIGURE 1456. Radio Set AN/TRC-12
420
Par. 1408
VHF RADIO EQUIPMENT MOUNTED IN REAR OF H F EQUIPMENT
FIGURE 1457.
Radio Set AN/VRC-1
/CX c
THE TOTAL LENGTH IN FEET OF WIRE L IN USE IN THE
LraDIO SET ANTENNA AND LENGTH C IN THE COUNTERPOISE IS
0=0 INSULATOR
ADJUSTED BY MEANS OF THE CLIPS AT THE INSULATORS
TO BE APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO ■=—r FOR — 70_ FREQ (MC) 4
WAVE OPERATION AND TO_______—--r FOR A
FREQ(MC) 4
WAVE OPERATION. FOR j- WAVE OPERATION, L IN
FEET IS ADJUSTED TO BE APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO
-X6?,,.. AND THE COUNTERPOISE IS OMITTED.
FIGURE 1458. Inverted L Antenna
421
Par. 1408
INSULATOR—MAST
ANTENNA---\ \\
WIRES >>< /T ----MAST
J* J?, ^(V/— GUYS
INSULATOR--________________________/---------------------®"X?T--flf
/ / /'''^ X\ \\ /—MAST
// A \ \*^~GUYS
GUYS —*5/ / *—MAST / \ \
// / COUNTERPOISE \ \
/ J- TO RADIO SET
FIGURE 1459. Crowfoot Antenna
422
423
Par. 1408
MAST SECTIONS-r->-
—►
k A
MAST BASE----•v!BL
MAST BRACKET
0/ -
¥
a. Telescoping b. Sectionalized
1«-------MAST SECTIONS
FIGURE 1461. Whip Antennas
GUY -------------GUY
. Z(ADIO SET-X-,\ \ /
/ 1I
I K I FLEXIBLE SECTION
Jk / I (may BE bent to
/ \ A ANY DESIRED
/ \ i P0SITI0N)
I T' V»------------COUNTERPOISE JFj
"' ' ' — C°UPLING UN,T
FIGURE 1462. Short
FIGURE 1460. Whip Antenna and Counterpoise Whip Antenna
Par. 1408
424
468 _r-------------length FT. freqimc)--------
y _fX'INSUL-AT0R /'insulator insul atofp k
// /—70'"'TRANSMISSION \\
> c \
/ XJ-L-- OTHER w_LLz \
JZ____MAST OR CONVENIENT \
OTHER CONVENIENT SUPPORT
SUPPORT 25-75' HIGH 25-75 HIGH
FIGURE 1463. Center-fed Horizontal Dipole Antenna
<-------------------L-------------------->
<------------D----------------------d----►
-yo--------------------------------------------<™-
---INSULATOR-----------------/ INSULATOR--- TO RADIO SET ----------------
L- _±68_ (FREQ (MC)
d = 0.364 L D = L- d L,d & D ARE LENGTH f
IN FEET
FIGURE 1464. Single Wire Fed Half-wave Antenna DIM z-to^tch
IMPEDANCE OF TRANSMISSION 3
LINE OR 5
CASLE. a®g
O V &
6 »
i t
x
is z y
ROD OR TUBING ELEMENTS
? ---RADIATING ELEMENT
l\ ,, INSULATOR. s\ I I
_^7 COAXIAL TRANSMISSION LINE - INSULATOR ---। \ | ________ _______
| ROPE / _-^^^LENGTH FT. CONVENIENtXI .....
// / - 468 HEIGHT-IO-SoI.rqpe; / If ) ■ H< J
freq (mc) __ &L.,...............t-"""UOjJ
3 jl/ L-RADIO SET /
-- BAKELITE --1 CONNECTOR-------'
HOUSING (TO COAXIAL CABLE)
FIGURE 1466. Sloping Wire Antenna
•--RADIATING ELEMENT
FIGURE 1467. Balanced Half-wave Dipole Antenna
v-----------o
<•--ADJUSTABLE
PORTION OF WHIP
E H---ADJUSTING
CLAMP
<
S "* FIX OF WHIP°N STRAIN INSULATOR
.—WHIP IS SCREWED / / \ \
/ TO SKIRT ASSEM. / / \ \
/ AT THIS POINT ' / \ \
INSULATOR 7' / \Z\ W'RE
-•--------- ^BRACKET FOR /£/ . \ < ... -...
“ C^o 000 "o) HOISTING antenna /<>/ I u V \ \ 400 OHM
-------yy ON A HALYARD-------------------------------Zo/ rj \ \\TE=^™r 7 r----------------------------------------------------ANTENNA /$/ „ \ \ \ RESISTOR /
>•-FIXED PORTION \ COAXIAL /&/_______M.ot: unuurr.i i ,A \ /
OF SKIRT \TRANSMISSION /,<$/ WIRE NONMETALLIC\ \ /
\ LINE /// \ \ /
—ADJUSTING JL__-<====^ZV/
CLAMP -«±==-'STRAIN STRAIN----.
m INSULATOR XjLL INSULATOR B.-','ROPE
WIRE—*7 A \
5 <---ADJUSTABLE CROWFOOT CTPSE* CROWFOOT CTRSE*-^<\c
O J PORTION OF
SKIRT ------D------- ----- D--------H \
STAKE STAKE—
----> DIRECTION OF OPERATION WHEN TERMINATING RESISTOR IS USED-
---► DIRECTION OF OPERATION WHEN TERMINATING
u RESISTOR IS NOT USED.
I !◄--MOUNTING STAFF APPROX DIMENSIONS
BRACKETS—x L» TWO OR MORE WAVELENGTHS
FOR \XJ--To--- ol D- L MINUS HALF WAVELENGTH
STRAPPING \l-Lo--&J H= /l2-D2
ANTENNA L--nr — ol
TO MAST ] | o o] * A WIRE MAY BE LAID ON THE GROUND,
CONNECTING POINTS A AND B, INSTEAD TF* PROTECTING OF US,NG CROWFOOT COUNTERPOISES
SPRING SHOWN
PLUG__—coaxial cable FIGURE 1469. Vertical Half Rhombic
Antenna
A - r«ra6
FIGURE 1468. Adjustable Coaxial
Antenna
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1470. Three Element Directional Array
UPPER ________________._________________RADIATING | ।_I ELEMENTS
\l / METAL RADIATOR //
APJ
METAL ANTENNA--/Ur---J-------BAKELITE
BASE r&J ‘ "ife INSULATION
MOUNTING ff l|J SCREW----\\
//-------------I "'COAXIAL \
/ s | cable \
/ / \ 1/ LLOWER RADIATING ELEMENTS— V
FIGURE 1471. Vertical Conical Dipole Antenna
FIGURE 1472. Ground Plane Antenna
426
Par. 1408
FIGURE 1473. Half-wave Corner Reflector Antenna
427
Par. 1409
428
1409. FREQUENCY COVERAGE OF TACTICAL RADIO SETS FOR GROUND USE.
a. Amplitude Modulated Sets.
FREQUENCY IN MEGACYCLES
.15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7.8.91 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 607080100 200
i____I____।___I ■ 1 i I । I___Illi___________i____I____i__I___■ 1 .1.1______.III__________i____I____i___I__. I । I . I___.1.1 . I
SCR*13' j,6-lj436
3 9b M 4.3 6
■B——J----SCR- I bl
* 37| Z|5 ।
SCR-I7I---'
2 b 4 [\ | 3 04
2.b4 HH 3.04
, C-144 -A [ C-I45-A ( । C-I47-A |^C~I48-A ,
0 4 ----1 10 15 4 5
o.4 ■H^ggHHoe । .5 4
1 T U-3 -A ' 1 TU-5-A 1 TU-b-A '
0.15 I 1 1 I | ~i I 18.0
I------------------S C R -17 7-B^------------------------------------------------------------1
*^70^5 -A 1 TU-b-A '
2 4 I7
, C-I44-A jC-145-A) C-I46-A. C-I47-A C-I48-A ■ C-I49-A. C-I50 A C-15 I-A.C I52-A.
0 41 I I 1 -7^88 iJ______________________J____________________। 13 0
1 TU-AA-5 1 TU-AA-b । TU-AA-7 7U-AA81 TUAA91 TU-AAIO_
' 51 J— -- 1 180
_______
I . 51 1 ZZ I iso
-4 SCR - 19 3 --------------------------1
' 5 4 5
1 7U-5-A 1 TU-b-A '
2 7.7 I 1 - I 5 2.2
^—lACR-194■ 1—U
27.7 S2_2 SCR_ „5
52 8| X|b5 8
52 8 HH 55
0.54 [ SCR-197 ( MON ITOR RECEIVER 5-20-R) | 44.0
1 51 rr~-----i I180
118 0
2.1 I ■ 71 3.1
LUSCR-203hl
2.2 3.0b
S C R - 2 0 9 --y __________________________________
1 5| \ | 18 0
rTnHH'z’b
1 5 I SCR-210 I 180
' 51 _1180
2 o ^MHMBBBIBi^^HM 5 2 8
' ™-'7 ' TU!-,8TU-25 I
3 8 ^SCR-28 4 J 8 8
3 8 5
2 3 I r-I I b. 5
1—rr®jiagii2Mb.3
1 51 _ 2^1 _ , I 160
2 .o HHHHI^HhBBHBHHHIIM^H8 0
Par. 1409
700898 0—46-----29
429
FREQUENCY IN MEGACYCLES
15 f f .4 .5 .6 .7 .8.9 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 60 70 80 100 2 0 0
'-----1---'---[ ‘ 1 1 1 1 1 1 111------------L I I I.. I I I I I I I I I I | |____I__I I I t I I | | | | I ! I
1 5 1 , „ ^_^^^^^^SCR-3»U ft. 499 ' 6 °
2 0 I I" 1 I b 0
, n ■ndsCR - 5 0bL------1
2 o I । I b o
2 0 80
3 5 G SCR -53b^J * ° •
I . b 8 I ■ i I4 4 5
. L. . SCR-5 45
lb 8 4 4 5
2 0 | SCR-593 I b. 0
SCR - b 2 4, A N/T R C - 7-==^_
100 0 U~X I 5 b . 0
, _ r i „ 100 0 MMOPHhJI 1 5 b .O
, 8 USCR-b94-AWU b 0
8 b 0
8 8 Lj*C.R-b94 ^1^ 6 5
R C - 2 5 b-f=kT__
10 0.0 I X I | 5 b . 0
_ _ I--------1 I----------. 100.0 I 5 b . 0
2. o b 5 RC-2 57----'
1 5 *— -------116 0 100 0 UanArc-iU 1580
0 I^BBBiMBBB^B 62 i o o. o mmbmbB i 5 b o
1 TU-bI TU-7 1
b. Frequency Modulated Sets.
FREQUENCY IN MEGACYCLES
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
l--------------------------*---------------L..„ I --------------—J1_________1________1_______,_____1_____1____1____1____1___!___1___,1.1
2 0.0 | ■■ - , I 279
20 0 Wsc^p^sokso^i^^^J i
2 0.0 | SCR-294 8c 538 | 2 7.9
3 0.0 | I. , 14 0.0
3 0.0 4 Q. Q
4 0 01 l. . i~l 4 B 0
SCR - bOB , b09 ,blO, bl9, b28, 80 8 & 828-. , . MSCR-300,AN/VRC-3H
______ \_________4 0 o ^MMBBBBi^l 4B.o
27 0 I I \ 1 ld 8.9
FREQUENCY IN M E G A CYC LES iconvd.) 27 °IHkGMHI3s •’
100 200 300 7,2 •?UanArc-i,anArc-3.aNArc:7J 100 0
|__________________________,_______________|______________,_________। 7 °- 0 '00 0
2 30 h J 2 50
2 30 2 SO
NOTES. AN/TRC-8
» I--------1 AN/TRC-II
A RECEIVER AN/TRC-12 c WHEN COIL SETS OR TUNING UNITS ARE EMPLOYED THEIR RANGES ARE
l^BBH^H TRANSMITTER INDICATED ABOVE AND BELOW THE RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER BLOCKS
RESPECT IVELY.
B. THE NUMERALS SHOWN AT THE EXTREMES OF THE BLOCKS REPRESENT
THE FREQUENCY COVER AGE OF THE RESPECTIVE UNITS.
Par. 1410-1411
1410. GROUND TRANSPORTABLE RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA - TACTICAL .
Total Weight (lbs.) To tai Cu. Ft.
Type Packed Packed Ship
Stock No. for Export Net ‘ for Export Tonsa
SCR-171 2S171 259 179 12 Obsolete
SCR-177-A 2S177A 1,030 850 28 0.7
SCR-177-B 2S177B 1,250 1,000 40 1.0
SCR-178 2S178.3 292 225 16 Obsolete
SCR-188 2S188 2,133 1,150 101 2.5
SCR-188-A 2S188A 2,018 1,385 100 2.5
SCR-284-A 2S284A 408 275 17 0.4
SCR-288 2S288 131 71 7 0.2
SCR-543-( ) 2S543( ) 1,253 919 54 1.4
SCR-694-AW 2S694AW
SCR-694-C 2S694C
RC-256 2S55-256 7 25 600 44 1.1
RC- 25 7 2S55-257 5,075 4,050 300 7.5
AN/CRC-3 AN/CRC-3A
an/tra-i 2S5006-1 547 402 32 0.8
an/trc-i 2S5002-1 2,000 1,435 78 2.0
AN/TRC-2 2S5002-2 1,001 52.5 1.3
AN/TRC-3 2S5002-3 3,150 2,560 132 3.3
AN/TRC-4 2S5002-4 4,500 3,500 187 4.7
AN/TRC-8 AN/TRC-11
AN/TRC-12
1411. VEHICULAR RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA - TACTICAL.
Total Weight (lbs.) Total Cu. Ft.
Packed Packed Ship
Type Stock No. for Export Net for Export Tons8-
SCR-193-( ) 2S193( ) 375 234 18.5 0.5
SCR-195 23195 145 96 7.5 Obsolete
SCR-209 2S209 217 174 8 0.2
SCR-210-( ) 2S210( ) 160 71 7 0.2
SCR-245-( ) 23245( ) 220 185 11 0.3
SCR-284-A 2S284A 408 275 17 0.4
SCR-293-( ) 2S293( ) 268 149 18 0.5
SCR-294-( ) 2S294( ) 121 72 8 0.2
SCR-298-C 2S298C 187 75 15 0.4
SCR-506 2S506 535 357 25 0.6
SCR-508- ( ) 2S508( ) 265b 200b 14 0.3
SCR-510-( ) 2S510( ) 235 137 12 0.3
SCR-511-( ) 23511( ) 98, 65. 4 0.1
SCR-528-( ) 2S528( ) 215b 165b 12 0.3
SCR-538-( ) 2S538( ) 155b 115b 7 0.2
SCR-543- ( ) 23543( ) 1,253 919 57 1.4
SCR-593-( ) 2S593( ) 63. n 38 v 0.1
SCR-608-( ) 2S608( ) 265b’c 200b»c 14 0.3
SCR-610-( ) SCR-619 2S610( ) 280 215b,C 176 165b,c 12 0.3
SCR-628-( ) 2S628( ) 12 0.3
SCR-694-AW 2S694AW
SCR-694-C 2S694C 225b
SCR-808 2S808
SCR-828 2S828 190b
AN/VRC-3 2S4502-3
8 40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 shin ton. Obsolete sets are so
indicated in this column.
b Weight of basic unit without installation components.
c Weight of Remote Control RM-29 not included.
430
Par. 1412-1414
1412. PACK RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA - TACTICAL .
Type Stock No. Total Weight 1 Packed for Export (lbs.) Net Total Cu. Ft. Packed for Exporta
SCR-131 2S131 130 77 6 (Obsolete)
SCR-161 2S161 180 77 10 (Obsolete)
SCR-179 2S179 292 225 16 (Obsolete)
SCR-194 2S194 140 81 7
SCR-195 23195 145 96 7.5(0bsolete)
SCR-203 2S203 330b 162b 17b
SCR-284-A 2S284A 408 275 17
SCR-288 2S288 131 71 7
SCR-300 2S300 65 38 2.5
SCR-5 09-( ) 2S509( ) 210 130 9
SCR-510-( ) 2S510( ) 235 137 12
SCR-511-( ) 2S511( ) 98 65 4
SCR-5 36- ( ) 2S536( ) 13 10.5 0.6
SCR-593- ( ) 2S593( ) 63 38 3
SCR-609-( ) 2S609( ) 125 97 4
SCR-610-( ) SCR-619 SCR-694-AW SCR-694-C 2S610( ) 2S694AW 2S694C 280 176 12
AN/TRC-2 AN/TRC-7 235002-2 1001 a Obsolete sets are so indicated in the export volume column. b Exclusive of Phillips Pack Saddle. 52.5
1413. AIR TRANSPORTABLE RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA - TACTICAL
Tjpe Stock No Total Weight Packed . for Export (lbs.) Net. Total Cu. Ft. Packed for Export Ship Tons
SCR-499 23499 5,703 3,000 272 6.8
SCR-624 2S624 1.005 698 65 1.6
AN/CRC-3 AN/CRC- 3A a <0 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
1414. GROUND, MOBILE RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA - TACTICAL.
Type Stock No. Total Weight (lbs.) Total Cu. Ft. Packed for Export Ship Tonsa
Packed for Export Net
SCR-197-( ) 2S197( ) 25,000 15,700 5,000 125
SCR-299-( ) 2S299( ) 16,800 12,375 1,567 39.2
SCR-399-( ) 2S399( ) 10,025 6,595 895 22.4
AN/VRC-1 2S4502-1 475 334 22 0.6
a
40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
431
Par. 1415
1415. REMOTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR RADIO SETS - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION.
Range -
Shown Dimensions - Miles of Number
Nomenclature in Major Weight Inches Used with Wive of Power Input Technical
Name Type No. Fig .No, Components'* Pounds' H W D Radio Sets W-110-Bb Pairs Requirements0 Manual ________________Remarks
Remote AN/TRA-2e 1474 Control Unit 20 9 12 12 D-c talking Used with but not a part of Radio Set AN/TRC-1.and -8. Con-
Control C-112/TRA-2-0 and signaling sists of 2 units, a transmitter control unit C-113/TRA-2
Equipment (Remote battery sup- located at the radio transmitter and a remote station
Station) plied over the unit C-112/TRA-2 located at a remote point. Provides:
AN/TRC-1 2 1 or 2 line from trans* Press-to-talk control of the radio set on a 2 or 4-
AN/TRC-8 control unit wire basis; volume limiter for limiting the transmission
level input into the radio transmitter; listening at re-
Control Unit __ 20 9 12 12 105V-125V mote station with either phones or loudspeaker; inter-
C~113/TRA~2-() 5CT-6CT communication between attendants; manual volume control
(Transmitter) for the headphones at the remote station; automatic
radio repeater operation; facilities for 3 attendants at the remote station. Two-wire operation is normally provided when the radio receiver and transmitter are closely associated with each other or when automatic repeater operation is used in which case the radio receiver is located with the remote station unit. Four-wire operation is provided when the radio receiver and transmitter are not located together or when the radio system uses two frequencies to provide simultaneous two-way communication.
Remote RC-47-( )d 1475 Unit RM-13-( ) 34 15 11 9 110V-60^ or Part of Radio Set SCR-188-A. Designed to control
Control (Remote 220V-60~ Radio Transmitter BC-191-( ) from the radio receiver
Equipment Station) 2 Batteries location which may be at a remote point. Consists
SCR-188-A 6 wet 2 BA-30 (1.5V) TM 11-312 of two principal units, RM-12-( ) at the radio trans-
10 dry TM 11-233 mitter and RM-13-( ) at the radio receiver. Provides:
Control Unit 28 15 10 9 2 Batteries Press-to-talk remote control for switching from re-
RM-12-( ) BA-30 (1.5V) ceiving to transmitting; manual volume control;
(Transmitter) volume indicators at remote point and radio trans-
mitter input; one stage of speech input amplification at remote point; receiver disabling when transmitting with voice or telegraph. A microphone modulator channel and a local battery telephone channel are provided on two separate pairs, and a telegraph channel on the phantom derived from these two pairs. At the receiver point, any one of three microphones, three telegraph keys or three radio receivers may be selected through a rotary type three-position selection switch. 15113 equipment permits operating the transmitter on phone, CW, or Tone from either the transmitter location or from the remote point.
Running spares included.
Other wire lines may be used where they are equivalent to or better
than Wire W-L1D*B, for transmission and signaling, c AC power, where indicated, is supplied from radio set. dPart of radio set with which it is used, e Not available until late in 1944.
432
Par. 1415
433
Range -
Shown Dimensions - Miles of Number
' NA^enC1^UreM n MajOr a Weight ___Inches Used with Wire- of Power Input Technical
—N^----- TyPe No» Ug-No. ^Components_ Pounds _H_ _W_ D Radio Sets W-110-Bb Pairs Requirements0 Manual _____________Remarks_____________________
Control 261 1476 RM^sp01 Unlt 3684 4 Batteries Used with but not a part of the radio sets listed.
Equipment (nZmote St tinn) SCR-6O8 BA-30 (1.5V) Consists of two units, a Control Unit RM-52 located
Q P Ut (RemOte StatlQQ) SCH-609 at a remote point and a Control Unit RM-53 located
SCR-61O with the transmitter. By means of a three-position
TT„<* A c c SCR-619 2 1 selection switch in the RM-53 the following types of
w „ SCR-623 2 Batteries traffic are provided for, corresponding to the switch
< + + . SCR-300 BA-30 (1.5V) positions indicated:
ansm er SCR-509 Remote - Press-to-talk remote control from the
RM-52 for switching from receiving to transmitting and R /IRC- voice modulating the transmitter.
Bag bg—lob 2 11 17 9 Radio - When the Control Unit RM-53 is used in
this switch position, normal control at the radio set itself is relinquished and the operator at the control unit has press-to-talk control of the radio set. Interphone - Both control units function as a telephone and the operators can talk to each other. However, no means for ringing are provided. The radio set cannot be used by either operator on this switch position.
Remote RC-289 1477 Control Unit 14 7 10 6 1 Battery Used with but not a part of the radio sets listed.
Control RM-39-( ) SCR-178 BA-27 (4.5V) Consists of the Control Unit RM-39-( ) at the transEquipment (Transmitter) SCR-284 2 Batteries mitter location and a Telephone KK-fl-( ) and Key J-47
SCR-608 BA-34 (7.5V) at the remote station. Operates similar to RM-29-( )
SCR-609 5 1 providing the same features under control of a
SCR-610 manually operated locking type selection switch.
Telephone 10 10 8 4 SCR-628 2 Batteries TM 11—333 However, an additional feature is obtained which pro-
KE-8-( ) SCR-694 BA-30 (1.5V) vides means for CW keying the transmitter from either
Key 1-47 the remote station or the control unit.
(Remote
Station)
Remote RC-290 Control Unit 14 7 10 6 1 Battery , Used with but not a part of the radio sets listed
Control RM-29-( ) BA-27 (4.5V) TM 11-308 and other models of similar design. Consists of
Equipment (Transmitter) SCR-178 Current Drain the Control Unit RM-29-( ) at the transmitter loca-
SCR-284 50-95 MA tion and a Telephone EE-8-( ) at the remote station.
SCR-608 2 1 All operating features are the same as described for
Telephone 10 10 8 4 SCR-609 2 Batteries TM 11-333 the RM-29-( ).
EE-8»( ) SCR-610 BA-30 (1.5V)
(Remote SCR-628
Stati on)
Case CS-76-( ) 2 10 11 7
“Running spares included. °AC power supplied from radio set.
bOther wire lines may be used where they are equivalent to or better than Wire W-110-B, for transmission and signaling.
Table continued on next page
Par 1415
434
REMOTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR RADIO SETS - TACTICAL - DESCRIPTION (Continued) In Operation Range -
Shown Dimensions - Miles of Number
Nomenclature in Major Weight Inches Used with Wire a of Power Input Technical
Name Type flo7 Fig.No. Components Pounds H V/ D Radio Sets W-11O-B Pairs Requirements" Manual ___________________Remarks_____________________
Remote RM-7-( ) 1478 56 11 18 12 SCR-197 7.5 2 1L0V-60*" TM 11-241 Two Remote Control Units Rl.'-7-( ) are furnished as
Control c 220V-60'" TM 11-805 part of Radio Set SCR-197. Each unit provides two
Unit 60 watts operating positions, either of which can be used for
telegraph keying or voice modulating the Radio Transmitter BC-325-( ). The control unit can be used at either of two operating locations, in the truck for local operation with the transmitter or in the receiver trailer at a remote point. The control unit includes the chassis of Telephone EE-8-( ) making possible intercommunication between units over a pair of wires.
Another pair is used for voice modulating the transmitter. Telegraph keying car be obtained on one of three different channels; on the simplex of line 1, the simplex of line 2 or the phantom derived from Line 1 and Line 2. Provides: Audio gain control, audio level indicator; receiver disabling; one stage of speech input amplification at the remote point. Remote RM-14 1479 16 10 11 7 SCR-194 2 11 Battery Used with but not a part of radio sets listed. Pro-
Control SCR-195 BA-2 (22.5V) vides for operation of radio sets at the control unit,
Unit 2 Batteries which is always located at .the radio set, or from a
BA-30 (1.5V) remote Telephone EE-8-( ) and also functions as a
telephone for the operator to communicate with an EE-8-( ) telephone connected to the line. By means of a three-position locking type selection switch similar traffic to that obtained with the RM-29-( ) is obtained with this unit.
Remote RM-21 1480 10 9 13 6 SCR-543 18 ft. 7 con- None IM 11-625 Part of Radio Set SCR-543. Control panel for oper-
Control c cord ductor ating radio set. Provided with a short cord and
Unit cord plug for direct connection to Radio Receiver and
Transmitter BC-669-A for operation at the radio set. Using Cord CD-513-A as an extension, the unit may be placed up to 18 feet from the radio set. Provides means for: starting, choking, or stopping Power Uhit PE-108-A; listening on the receiver, volume control of signal received in the handset or headset by means of a variable resistor; switching from receiving to transmitting by means of the press-to-talk switch on handset or microphone; voice modulating transmitter.
aOther wire lines may be used where they are equivalent to or better than Wire W-110-B, for transmission and signaling.
b
AC power supplied from radio set. cPart of radio set with which it is used.
Par. 1415
435
In Operation___ Range -
Shown Dimensions - Miles of Number
Nomenclature in Major Weight Inches Used with Wire of Power Input Technical
_Name_ Type No. Fig. No. Components Pounds H W D Radio Sets W-11Q-Ba Pairs Requirements*1 Manual _____________________Remarks_________________________
Remote RM-29-( ) 1481 16 10 11 7 SCR-178 2 1 1 Battery TM 11-308 Part of RC-290. Used with but not a part of the radio
Control SCR-284 BA-27 (4.5V) sets listed. In earlier models was part of SCR-284,
Unit SCR-608 Current Drain 608, 609, 610 and 628. It is a complete and self con-
SCR-609 50-95 MA tained unit always located not further than the length
SCR-610 of the cord from the radio set and operates with a
SCR-628 Telephone EE-8-( ) or a Switchboard BD-71 or BD-72 at
the remote station. An operator is always required when this unit is being used. By means of a three-position locking type selection switch the following types of traffic are provided, corresponding to the switch positions indicated: Birou^i - The radio set is controlled by the operator at the control unit. However, he cannot transmit but can only monitor the signals passing over the line between the radio receiver and the remote Telephone EE-8-( ), or between that telephone and the radio transmitter. Since no press-to-talk control of the radio transmitter is provided from the remote station telephone,the operator at the control unit must switch manually from the transmitter to the receiver in accordance with instructions received while monitoring. The operator at the remote station can listen to the radio receiver or voice modulate the radio transmitter. Radio - When the control unit is used in this switch position, normal control at the radio set itself is relinquished and the operator at the control unit has press-to-talk control of the radio set. Telephone - Control unit functions as a telephone and the operator can communicate with the distant Telephone EE-8-( ). However, neither the operator at the remote telephone nor the operator at the control unit can transmit to or receive from the radio set in this switch position.
a0ther wire lines nay be used where they are equivalent to or better than Wire W-llO-B, for transmission and signaling.
bAC power supplied from radio set.
Par. 1415
436
1 g* * ■« -
ft I If ^sar*-*"** iw*".^,.
al B u f ■ JKBjRhfc z' JmKTZ
L . . ,L. i zSwS
’jHSb(7 ■ ...] 1-F __
ti I, r -. Imkx ■ ,“■** ! .jbkbhhmhhhBbbb3hhi
i iTi^B b^L I 2; ' i \ '* ■ i iHill
I WMrfHSsSHKfe «IHiftaBssIBbO w"^ \ 1 wfewsW W / wHRHIil
felt..* s^^ey’-aw |JBMR’S.'><■■’■ - I j ■•• rj-^£t'|,.^L1afewllP
Kir S IwW^ByT^ .> S 1 hand 1 WaHMMKw
j * -I GENERATOR -^!Mbr*^W. ■ ». >*23 HAND Wb« ”
'**--3^*1 I II ■B^BMMK^KiGENCRAT0R^WMMWRfKXJKB
k Uto?..ALa^a4
B -- ... L
11 "^Ss. CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT RM-I3-C )
//f RM-I2-C ) ------ Z
Control Unit C-112/TRA-2 Control Unit C-113/TRA-2
FIGURE 1474. Remote Control Equipment AN/TRA-2 FIGURE 1475. Remote Control Equipment RC-47-( )
Par. 1415
437
/— CONTROL UNIT
.y RM-53
--- RADIO SET
f ff ff / SCR-619 t /X
4 ff / * i • \
* Suf. ' lit! \ /— CONTROL _ hand generator
f m ~ Wt A UN IT R M -52
~ ।C "'C ■' <«?... ft
fP'''■'' ~ —"T: ■-. '~~k '
^-szsWOX^ hSWaw
C/z^- <
FIGURE 1476. Remote Control Equipment RC-261 with Radio Set SCR-619 FIGURE 1477. Remote Control Unit
RM-39-( )
Par. 1415
^D'QJRAN5MrrTER HAND GENERATOR REMOTE -------J
BC-325-C ) CONTROL UNIT
RM- 7-C
FIGURE 1478. Remote Control Unit RM-7-( ) with Radio Transmitter BC-325-( )
438
Par. 1415
439
FIGURE 1479. Remote Control Unit RM-14 FIGURE 1480. Remote Control Unit RM-21 FIGURE 1481. Remote Control Unit
RM-29-( )
-HAND GENERATOR
HAND GENERATOR —«
Par. 1416-1418
1416. REMOTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL-STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA
Nomenclature Stock Number Packed for Export
Total Weight Pounds Total Cubic Feet
Name Type No.
Remote AN/TRA-2 Control Equipment 2S5006-2 45 2.5
Remote RC-4?( ) Control a, b Equipment 2S47( ) 266 9.0
Remote RC-261 Control Equipment 2C7600-261 15 1.0
Remote RC-289 Control Equipment 2C7600-289 33 1.7
Remote „ RC-290 Control c & d Equipment 2C7600-290 35 1.8
Remote RM-7( ) Control Unit 2C677( ) 60 2.5
Remote RM-14 Control Unit 2C7614 14 0.5
Remote RM-21 Control Unit 2C7621 18 0.8
Remote RM-29( ) Control Unit 2C7629( ) 22 0.6
aPart of the radio sets.
^Includes RM-12-( ), stock number 2C678( ) and RM-13-( ), stock number 2C679( ).
Q
Requires 2 Batteries BA-30 for Telephone EE-8-( ).
Requires 1 Battery BA-27, 1 Headset P-19 and 1 Microphone T-17.
Section III
Fixed Plant Radio Equipment
1417. GENERAL.
a. This section covers radio transmitting and receiving equipment commonly used by the Army Communications Service. Navigational aid equipment has not been included unless it is also used for ground communications. Data concerning antennas, towers and other accessory equipment are given in section IV.
b. In general, fixed plant installations are engineered individually, based on proposals submitted by the theater regarding equipment requirements. The data tabulated in this section cover the major equipment components which are available through Army Communications Service and provide information useful in making the preliminary engineering estimates in the theater. Information on typical installations is available through the office of the Chief Signal Officer, SPSLP.
c. The equipment is divided into two categories, that used by Command Radio and that used by the Airways Section, respectively. In a few cases, the same equipment types are listed in both categories, but the associated stock numbers may differ, indicating that the assemblies differ in some respect.
d. The stock number listed for a major component, such as a transmitter, frequently does not cover such essential accessories as crystals, tuning coils, etc. Requirements for such accessories will depend on the specific installation, necessitating separate procurement.
e. Equipment supplied upon requisition by specific stock number may not always be identical with that designated in the descriptive tables, depending on the particular type available at the time. It will, however, have comparable operating characteristics.
f. The pictures of apparatus are representative of the designated equipment. The remote control equipment sometimes shown is not a component of the assembly unless so stated in the descriptive tables.
The descriptive tables refer to figures which give sketches of antenna types and, in some cases, associated ground systems normally used with a given equipment. These sketches are merely illustrative and do not necessarily represent any specific Signal Corps antenna assembly.
1418. COMMAND RADIO SETS - DESCRIPTION.
a. Paragraph 1422 lists transmitting equipment and paragraph 1423 lists receiving equipment commonly used by Command Radio. Descriptive information and technical data are given for each set. The information includes such items as frequency range, type of modulation and emission, type of antenna, transmitter output power, power supply requirements, etc.
b. In general, Command Radio installations are engineered individually, based on information supplied by the theater concerning the proposed circuit. This information includes; the anticipated traffic load and associated circuits, equipment already in operation, equipment and power available for this installation, location of and distances between sites for transmitter, receiver and message center installations. Army Communications
440
Par. 1418-1421
Service, Plant Engineering Agency, upon receipt of such information, together with War Department approval, initiates the supply action to provide all material necessary for the installation, operation and maintenance of the station, including specifications and drawings.
c. Materials issued for new stations which are not additions to existing installations will normally include, in addition to major radio items, all tools for installation of equipment and antennas; all materials for wiring of power, light and signal circuits in the building, based on typical layouts which permit considerable latitude in floor plans. In addition, materials will be provided to construct a complete power plant at each radio and message center building, including sufficient subterranean power cable to permit a 25-foot separation between the power plant and associated building. Approximately 3 miles of subterranean cable and adequate splicing materials will be provided for control and voice frequency transmission circuits between the transmitter and the message center buildings, and cable and splicing material will also be provided for control and voice frequency transmission circuits between the receiver and the message center buildings when a separate receiver building is required. Telephones for use over control circuits, test equipment and stationery will also be furnished.
d. Buildings, furniture, operators’ benches for manual positions, cement for concrete foundations, and short poles for R.F. transmission lines are not supplied.
e. Transmitters used by Command Radio, which are capable of remote keying, normally may be operated over distances up to 5 miles of 22 ga. cable.
1419. COMMAND RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
a. Paragraph 1424 gives data such as stock number, shipping weight and volume for transmitting equipment used by Command Radio.
b. Paragraph 1425 gives similar information for receiving equipment used by Command Radio.
1420. AIRWAYS SECTION RADIO SETS - DESCRIPTION.
a. Paragraph 1426 lists transmitting equipment, paragraph 1427 lists receiving equipment and paragraph 1428 lists combined transmitting and receiving equipment commonly used by the Airways Section. Descriptive information and technical data are given for each type of equipment. The information includes such items as frequency range, type of modulation and emission, type of antenna, transmitter output power, power supply requirements, etc.
b. Under the column in paragraph 1426 "Additional Equipment Required" are listed such key items as exciter units, rectifiers, modulators, antenna tuning units, etc. which normally will be required for the designated transmitting equipment installatiorf.
1421. AIRWAYS SECTION RADIO SETS - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
a. Paragraphs 1429, 1430 and 1431 give data such as stock number, shipping weigilts and volume for transmitting equipment, receiving equipment and for combined transmitting and receiving equipment, respectively, used by the Airways Section.
441
442
Par. 1422
1^22. TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USPD BY COMMAND RADIO - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - DESCRIPTION
Bated Size Weight instr.Book
Fig. Power Type of Freq. Freq. Normal in Oper. in Use or
Typea No, Output ami8sionb Range-Mc Control0 Antennad Power Req,e ft,f (Lbsjg TechJfan.h ___________________Remarks_______________________
BC-339-( ) 1482 1 KW Al & 4.0—26.5 M.O. or Rhombic 4.8 KVA 3.5x 1335 6D7339( ) One unit - transmitter. Telegraph or teletype opera-
Special Atal or 220 V. 3 0 3x7 ’ tion; local or remote start-stop and remote keying;
(Holder Doublet 60 eye. switch selection of master oscillator or one of six cry-
FT-164) (Fig. stals. Requires external exciter for teletype operation;
1536 & also used as exciter for Power Amplifier BC-340 (see
1537) paragraph 1426.)
BG-365-( ) 1483 350 W. Al 0.15-0.55 M.O. inter- 1.8 KVA 2.5x 629 IM 11-828 includes two units - transmitter and remote control unit
mediate 110/220 V. 2.5x RM-10. Telegraph operation only; local or remote con-
Freq. 1 0, 60 eye. 6.5 trol; manual adjustment of master oscillator; also used
Flat Top as exciter for Bunnell 6 KW Amplifier.
(Fig.
1538)
BC-447-( ) 1484 300 W. Al 2.0-8.0 & M.O. or Doublet 1.3 KVA 3x2.5 645 TM 13-827 Includes two units - transmitter and remote control unit
4.0-13.4 (Fig. 110/220 V. x6 RM-17. Telegraph operation; local or remote control;
(Holder 1537) 1 0, 50/60 local or remote selection of two pre-tuned channels
FT-164) eye. (one channel modified to operate 2 to 8 Me); can be
modified for teletype operation using external exciter.
0-5/FK Bee paragraph 1027
Oscilla-
tor,
Hxciter
(Press
Mireless
FS-12A0
BCR-281-( ) 1485 25 W. A3 1.7-2.75 Xtal dingle Transmitting- 2x2x 93 TM 11-244 One unit - receiver and transmitter BC-441-( ). For use
(Bliley Wire 230 W. at 2.5 on coastal and harbor vessels or at I nland stations for
Holder (85’ or 115 V, 1 0, communication with such vessels. Four preset channels,
longer) 60 eye. Operation of the equipment approximates that of an or-
llO^^^t " dinary hand telephone in simplicity of operation.
115 V* 1 0,
60 eye.
10-KW 1486 10 KW Al & 4.0-26.5 M.O. or Rhombic 33 KVA 15x 6456 2C2940( )/l Includes five units - Power amplifier BC-340, Trans-
Special Xtal (Fig. 220 V. 3 0 5x7 mitter BC-339 (exciter), Rectifier RA-22, Water Cooling
mitting (Holder 1536) 60 eye. Unit RU-2 and expansion tank. Telegraph or teletype op-
*4uipment FT-164) eration; local or remote start-stop and remote keying;
switch selection of master oscillator or one of six
t crystals.
BunnellJ 1487 10 KW Al 0.15-0.55 - Inter- 23 KVA, 10x3x6.5 6110 2C466/M Includes three units - power amplifier, rectifier and
. (6 KW med. 220 V. 5 0 Plus antenna tuning house. Used with transmitter BC-365.
(Ampli- out of Freq. 50/60 eye. Tuning
tor) Tuning Flat Top House
House) (FlgJ538 ) 6x5x7
Par. 1422
443
^ted nu Site Weight Instr.Book
a Fig. Power Type of Freq. Freq. Normal in Oper. in Use or
.Wsaionb fiange-Mp gpntro;0 Antennad Power Req,e ft J (Lba.)g Tech.Man? __________________ Hemark8 __________________________
EXsaJ 1488 15 ° Special 4’°“21 („X 2oT’3 0 6948 2C689°/BT unit -transmitter. Telegraph or teletype operation;
PW-15-( ) FT-164) irIr) m Z* 3 0 loc&1 start~st°P. remote keying; manual selection of one
1O4J 155b) bO eye. of gfx crystals; requires external exciter for teletype
operation.
5X..J 1489 " “ 4-<>21 aii“r LA1' g™.,, laxat7 U000 Includ.. five units - rectifier. .»iUr, po^r
”-10-< ’ »c,;. (“I; yX’i’Si
remote keying; manual selection of master oscillator, one of six crystals or external exciter; external exciter, for teletype operation required. May also be arranged to operate as a linear anplifier for single sideband operation requiring W.E.Co., D-156000 transmitter as an exciter.
EX..J 1490 2,6 “ AL 2-5"26 gft ” ^iC ™ . 3x3x7 2000 “ U-«34 0~ - transmitter, Telegraph or teletype operation,
PW-981-( ) fWr.-iHe. V local or remote start-stop and remote keying, manual
k ' ^4) 7 CyC’ frequency selection from master oscillator, one of five
' crystals or teletype exciter; requires remote control
unit.
Electric W91 2 M Special 4.5-22 Xtai Rhombic 5 KVA 5x2.5x7 2428 FTNP One unit-transmitter, mounted in 3 bays. Local start-
CoJ 5 6D9652 stop, remote signaling, fixed frequency operation. May
D-156000 Holder) 153b) 50/60 eye. also be used as exciter for PW-40 arranged for operation
as a linear amplifier. Part of entire terminal for single—side band, reduced carrier, radio telephone system for twin channel operation, giving 6 two-way telegraph circuits over one two-way radio telephone circuit. Entire terminal consists of radio transmitter; distortion measuring set; single side-band receiver (W.E.Co. D-99945, par.1423) including its associated testing and measuring equipment; and V.F. Carrier Telegraph Equipment (par. 1025). “Hie entire terminal is listed under one stock number (par. 1424),
a oXUSThe Sri5nn^XOundZferS t0 ,fadi°ttl?ns"i‘tin8 equipment f The first two dimensions are width and depth, respectively, and repre-
paragraph 1424 inriudXe addiUo^f^t^^t’J0CkHnu±rs ^ven 111 8ent the area required by the designated equipment plus the accessory
paragraph 1424 includes the additional items listed under "Remarks". equipment listed in the -Remarks" column and do notrepresent the floor
b ii u- x . space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not
Al indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A3 indicates voice transmission. made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and
c u n naoH „ . « .,, x x . operating and maintenance space for personnel. The last dimension is the
crystal wntrol id±t Uaster Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate height of the tallest unit,
d , x u g Includes weight of equipment listed in "Remarks" column.
Figure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428. h ^en other identification is not available for instruction books, the
e . stock number is shown.
includes power required for equipment shown in "Remarks" column, d Type number assigned by the manufacturer.
Par. 1422
FIGURE 1482. Radio Trans- FIGURE 1483. Radio Trans- FIGURE 1484. Radio Trans- FIGURE 1485. Radio Set
mitter BC-339-( ) mitter BC-365-( ) mitter BC-447-( ) and SCR-281
Remote Control Unit RM-17
444
Par. 1422
700898 0—46-----30
445
FIGURE 1486. 10KW Transmitting Equipment
POWER EXCITER— AMPLIFIER-^
RECTIFIER—r H
WATER COOLING UNIT
Par. 142g
446
FIGURE 1487. Radio Amplifying Equipment (Bunnell 6 KW)
RA-1A Rectifier - PA-1A Power Amplifier
AT-1A Antenna Tuning House
Par. 1422
447
OSCILLATOR EXCITER no
AND FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER-] 11 |
fwpi 4 HSili E n IS w
BffiUn * ISwR E BH -SB- power
B HW™
1 IB :!! Hfr H Bl “ ill fir
; _ _ i< ■■« ■ - !■ p
<•« W g<9 o “0 l!
8’ . _.r ”iAg|||
I If
CON TROL
■ APPARATUS
—_ .----------------- --
.. J *
FIGURE 1488. Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-15-( ) )
Par. 1422
-. . gg
|F 'Uio' CGQQCOeSGG ^GGCCGGG »''F ■Mil • IMHI BWB - « ______
■ hr rm rh nn ei ■
I BH r Hi ■ « ■ ■
’ (_.__ »»
—<.....—, r tti4af, *** <®« **» «* *• ** to- b’ -'to £ -1 /'■ *■ v ■.,*■
y. «r 8 . !V g gi
By■ A Bfte ®
. I
* ______________________
1 r>. •• - 1 : ____.--V----- J \-r--1
" .J______-A— ~ :.I " 1 POWER
-- • —---------- INTERME DI ATE AM PLI F I E R
OSCILL ATOR, EYCITER POWER
RECTIFIER FOR AND FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER
POWER AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER
FIGURE 1489. Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-40-( ) )
448
Par. 1422
FIGURE 1490. Radio Transmitter FIGURE 1491. Single Side Band Transmitter
(Press Wireless 981-( )) (Western Electric Co. D-156000)
449
Par. 1423
450
1423. RECEIVING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY COMMAND RADIO - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - DESCRIPTION
Type Size ’./eight Inst.Book
Fig. Emission Freq. Freq. Normal Type in Oper. in Use or
Type No, Received* Range-Mc Control Antenna0 Output Power Req, ft,c (Lbs,) Tech .Man, _________________________Remarks__________________
AN/FGC-1 - See paragraph 1027
Radio-
teletype
terminal
equipment
AN/FRR-3 1492 Special 2.4-23 Xtal 2 Rhcmbics Dual 400W., 2x 650 TM 11-872 One unit; local or remote control; requires one
Press (Holder (Fig.1539) Bal.600 110/220 V, 1.5x7 terminal unit AN/FGC-1; used as radioteletype
Wireless FT-249) ohm 1 0, 50/60 receiving station.
Diversity eye.
BC-779-( ) 1493 Al, A2 0.1-0.4 Manual Rhombic 8W. 180W, 2x2x1 100 'IM 11-866 Includes two units, receiver and power supply
& A3 & 2.5-20 or 600 or 115/230 V, RA-94. For 105/115/125 volts, 50/60 cycles, use
Double 8000 ohm, 1 0, 50/60 RA-84 and for 95-130/190-260 volt, 25/60 cycles,
Doublet grounded eye. use RA-74 which must be ordered separately. Three
(Figs.1539 of these receivers used with each Schuttig Diver-
& 1540) sity equipment. Also used as manual receiving
station. Similar to Hanmarlund Super-Pro receiver.
BC-794-( ) 1493 Al, A2 1,25-40 Manual Rhcmbic 8W. 180W. 2x2x1 100 TM 11-866 Same as BC-779 except for frequency range.
& A3 or 600 or 115/230 V,
Double 8000 ohm, 1 0, 50/60
Doublet grounded eye.
(Figs.1539
& 1540)
Schuttig 1494 Al - Manual - 6MW 40W., 4x 850 2C863.1/B2 One unit; local operation only; requires 2 racks,
Diversity6 A.F. Bal.600 110/220 V, 1.5x7 3 ea, BC-779-( ) or BC-794-( ) and power supplies;
(Mixing only ohm 1 0, 50/60 used as receiving station for high speed tape cir-
unit only) eye. cuit.
Western 1495 Special 4.5-22 Xtal Rhombic 60MW 6QCML, 115 V, 5.5x 1436 FTNP One unit; single-sideband triple detection receiver,
Electric (Spec. (Fig. Bal.600 1 0, 50/60 1.5x7 2C4522/B1 contained in three bays. Used with VF Carrier Tele-
Co,e Holder) 1539) ohm eye. graph Equipment (par.1025), single-sideband radio
D-99945 transmitting equipment (W.E.Co. D-156000 par.1422)
and associated testing and measuring equipment to form a single-sideband HF radio telegraph terminal.
a Al indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates tone d The stock number is given when no other identification is
modulated telegraphy; A3 indicates voice transmission. available for the instruction book.
0 Figure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas e numbers assigned by the manufacturer,
shown in paragraph 1428. J
c The first two dimensions are width and depth, respectively, and represent the area required by the designated equipment and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance space for personnel. The last di tnensi on is the height of the tallest unit.
Par. 1423
451
FIGURE 1492. Diversity Receiver FIGURE 1494. Diversity FIGURE 1495. Single Side Band Receiver (Western
AN/FRR-3 (Schuttig) Mixing Electric Co. D-99945)
Unit
FIGURE 1493. Radio Receiver BC-779-( ) (Hammarlund Super Pro)
Par. 1424-1425
1424. TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY COMMAND RADIO - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Type No. Stock No. Export Weight Lbs. Export Volume Cu. Ft. Ship Tonsa
BC-339-( ) 2C6339( ) 2173 153 3.8
BC-365-( ) 2C6905-3.5( ) 965 84 2.1
BC-447-( ) 206903-31-11 ) 1247 92 2.3
SCR-281-( ) 2S281( ) 150 6.5 0.2
10 KW Transmitting Equipment 2C6905-100( ) 8294 470 11.8
Bunnell 6 KWb 2C466 10092 672 16.8
Press Wireless*5 PW-15-( ) 2C6890 12000 850 21.3
Press Wireless*5 PW-40-( ) 206895.1 21715 1661 41.6
press Wireless*5 PW-981-( ) 2C6781A 3317 188 4.7
Western Electric Co.*5 D-156 0.00 None (Part of entire terminal 205110) 3724 315 7.9
(Entire singlesideband radio 2C5110 (without double modulation) 11550 758 19.0
telegraph terminal) 20862.1 (double 1190 60 1.5
modulation eqpt.)
1425. RECEIVING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY COMMAND RADIO - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Type No. Stock No. Export We ight Lbs. Export Volume Qu. Ft. Ship Tonsa
AN/FGC-1 Radioteletype Terminal Equipment See paragraph 1027
AN/FRR-3 Press Wireless Diversity 2S2001-3 1175 55 1.4
BC-779-( ) 2C4779( ) 210 11 0.3
BC-794-( ) 2C4794( ) 210 11 0.3
Schuttig Diversity*5 (Mixing unit only) 2C863.1 243 14 0.4
Western Electric Co.*5 D-99945 204522 (Also part of entire terminal 1906 161 4.0
2C5110)
a4O cu.ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton. bType numbers assigned by the manufacturer.
452
Par. 1426
453
11&. TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION ~ ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ~ DESCRIPTION,
Additional Dimensions Weight Instr.
Fig. Equipment Power Type of Frequency Freq. Preset Normal Power in Opera- in Use Book or
Type No. fto, ________Required_______, Output Emission®. Range-Mc . Control® Channels Antenna0 Required11 tion - ft.e (Lbs,)f Manualg ____Remarks_______
BC—315 1496 Rect. & Modulator RA-18 400W A1,A2,A3 2.0 - 18.1 Xtal 10 Double Cage 4.5 KVA 7x2.5x6.5 2000 6D9040 Point-to-point and ground-
Ant. Tuning Unit BC-316 (Holder (Figure 1541) 220V, 30 6D9040.1 to-air. Dial selection of
Remote Control Unit RM—5 FT-249) 60 cycles preset channel frequencies.
No longer procured.
BC—325-( ) 1497 Remote Control Unit 400W Al 1.5 - 18.0 M.0. or None Double Cage 2.2 KVA 3.5x2x6 900 6D7325D Point-to-point and ground-
RM-7-( ) 100W A2,A3 Xtal (See (Figure 1541; 110/220V to-air. Switch selection
(Holder Remarks) 10 60 cycles of master oscillator or any
FT-171) one of five crystal fre-
quencies. Also used as transmitter of SCR-197. No longer procured.
BC-339-( ) 1482 1 KW Al 4.0 - 26.5 M.0. or None Rhombic or 4.8 KVA 3.5x3x7 1335 6D7339( ) Point-to-point, Switch
Xtal (See Doublet 220V, 30 selection of master oscilla-
(Holder Remarks) (Figures 60 cycles tor or any one of six cry-
FT-164) 1536 & 1537) stal frequencies, liay also
be used as exciter for
Power Amplifier BC-340-( ).
BC—340-( ) 1498 Transmitter BC-339-( ) 10 M Al 4.0 - 26.5 - None Rhombic or 33 KVA 15x5x7 2038 2C2940 Point-to-point. Provides
(Amp!ifier) Rectifier RA-22-( ) Doublet 220V, 30 ( )/l approx. 10 db increase in
Water Cooling Unit (Figures 1536 60 cycles power output when used with
RU-2-( ) and 1537) Transmitter BC-539.
BC-365-( ) 1483 Remote Control Unit 350W Al 0.15-0.55 M.0. None Intermediate 1.8 KVA 2.5x2.5x6.5 629 Hl 11-828 Point-to-point.
RM-10-( ) Frequency 110/220V .
Flat Top 10,
(Figure 1538) 60 cycles
BC-401-( ) 1499 Rect. & Modulator 40CW A1,A2,A3 2.0 - 18.1 Xtal 10 Double Cage 3.7 KVA 5x1x6.5 600 6D9040-2 Point-to-point and ground-
RA-30-( ) (Holder (Figure 1541) 220V, 30 to-air. Dial selection of
Remote Control Unit FT-249, 60 cycles preset channel frequencies.
RM-11-( ) Collins No longer procured.
ID or
WE-5A)
BC-460-( ) 1600 Remote Control Unit 250W Al 2.0 - 18.0 M.0. or11 10 Double Cage 1.8 KVA 3x2x6.5 1050 6D9020-3 Point-to-point and ground-
RM-20-( ) 200W A2.A3 Xtal (Figure 1541) 220V, 10 6D9020-4 to-air. Dial selection of
(Holder 60 cycles preset channel frequencies.
FT-249)
aAl indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy; A3 indicates amplitude modulated telephony.
^M.0. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
cFigure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428 except where reference is made to paragraph 1408.
<1Includes power required for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column.
®The first two dimensions represent width and depth respectively, and indicate the area required by the designated equipment plus the equipment listed in the "Additional Equipment Required" column,and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance
space for personnel. The last rUmension is the height of the tallest unit.
^This weight does not include that for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column.
®When other identification is not available for instruction books, the stock number is shown.
^Late models are same as Navy TDO and are M.0. controlled only. Table continued on next page
TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION — ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE — DESCRIPTION. (Continued) Additional Dimensions Weight Instr.
Fig. Equipment Power Type of Frequency Freq. Preset Normal Power in Opera- in Usef Book or
Type No, No, _______Required____ Output M.ssiona Range-Lie Control® Channels Antennac___Required11 tion - ft,e (Lbs.)f Manna1° _Remarks _____
BC-610 1501 40017 Al 2.0 - 18.0 M.O. or None 1/4-or 3/4-Wave 2 KVA 2.5x2x3 446 Hi 11-813 Point-to-point and ground-
300W A3 Xtal Inverted L or 115V, 10 to-air. Similar to Halli-
(Holder Doublet 50/60 cycles crafters commercial type
FT-171) (Figures 1458 HT-4-B and transmitter of
par. 1408, SCR-299, SGR-399 and
and 1537) SCR-499. Includes Speech
Amplifier BC-614-E and Antenna Tuning Unit
BC-939-A.
BC-642 1502 Modulator BC-643 3 KW Al,A3 4.0 - 20.0 Xtal 10 Rhombic or 10 KVA 6.5x4x6.5 590 206905.30- Point-to-point. Dial
Rectifier RA-44 (Holder Doublet 220V, 30 1/1 selection of preset
Transformer and Collins ID) (Figures 1415 60 cycles channel frequencies. No
Contactor BC-644 & 1537) longer procured.
Remote Control
Unit RM-15
BC—1100— ( ) 1503 75W Al 1.5 - 10,0 Xtal 4 1/4—or 3/4-Wave 520W 3.5x2.5x1.5 483 Point-to-point and ground-
50W A3 (Holder Inverted L or 110/220V to-air. May be remotely
FT-249) Doublet 10, 25-60 controlled by addition of
(Figures 1458 cycles Remote Control Unit
par. 1408, and • RM-40-A. Part of Radio
1537) Transmitter Equipment
RC-263.
0-5/FR - See paragraph 1027 _ .
Oscillator,
Exciter
(Press
Wireless
FS-12A)
RC-52-( ) 1504 300W A1,A2,A3 1.5 - 7.0 Xtal 2 Rhombic or 2.5 KVA 3.5x2x6 1250 6D8052() Point-to-point and air
(Holder Doublet 115V/230V warning. Includes Radio Trane-
FT-164) (Figures 1536 10, 60 mitter BC-452-( ) and Re-
& 1537) cycles mote Control Unit RM-22-( ).
T-4/FRC 1505 Rectifier PP-l/FRC 4OO4V A1,A2,A3 2.0 - 18.0 M.O. or 1 Rhombic or 8 KVA 1x2x5 per TM 11-820 Point-to-point and ground-
Modulator MD-l/FRC Xtal Doublet (4 Channels) channel to-air. May be used in
Operator Control (Holder (Figures 1536 230V 10, (Transmitter conjunction with TransConsole CY-161/FRC FT-249) & 1537) 50/60 only) mitter T-5/FRC. Typical
(Formerly CS-212) cycles installation uses four
T-4/FRC, one T-5/FRC, one MD-l/FRC and one PP-l/FRC.
aAl indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy; A3 indicates amplitude modulated telephony.
M.O. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control. cFigure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428 except where reference is made to paragraph 1408. ^Includes power required for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column. ®The first two dimensions represent width and depth respectively, and indicate the area required by the designated equipment plus the equipment listed in the "Additional Equipment Required" column,and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance space for personnel. The last dimension is the height of the tallest unit. fThis weight does not include that for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column, gfflhen other identification is not available for instruction books, the stock number is shown.
454
Par. 1426
Par. 1426
455
p. Additional Dimensions Weight Inst.
Type No No ( °7er. °f a Fret5uenc? Fre4- b Preset Normal Power in Opera- in Usep Book or
-22---1 —t- ------inquired------ Output xfessiop .Range-Mc_ gpntrolb_ Ghaoislfi _Antennac Required11 tion - ft,e (Lbs,)f Manual6 ________Remarks________
T-S/FRC 1505 Rectifier PP-l/FRC 600W A1.A2.A3 0.15-0.55 M.O. or 1 Insulated Tower 8 KVA 2x2x5 IM 11-820 Point-to-point and homing,
nnomt।« i Xtal or Intermediate (4 Channels) per chan- May be used in conjunction
er (H01der Frequency Flat 230V, 10 nel with Transmitter T-4/FRC.
FT-249) Top 50/60 cycles (Transmitter Rectifier PP-l/FRC will
(Formerly Co-212) (Flgures 1542 only) 8uppiy pwer for fouj.
& 1538) transmitter units and one
dual modulator unit.
tweSJies 1506 100°* A1’A2’A3 275-0.4& Xtal 2 LF-90-ft. or 6.5 KVA 8x2x7 206609/81 Point-to-point and homing.
Corpg 1.6-10.0 (Holder 18O-ft. 195/245V, Includes Antenna Tuning
50QB FT-249) Insulated 10, 60 Unit 500 BAT and Remote
Tower or cycles Control 500 BLC. Provides
Intermediate two HF channels for simul—
Frequency taneous operation. Either
Flat Top channel may be modulated,
(Figures 1542 the other operating on CW.
& 1538) Simultaneous operation re-
quires two antennas.
HF-Rhombic or
Doublet
(Figures 1536
& 1537)
SB^Ra”8 1507 I™ 1.5-15.0 M.O. or 4 1/4-or 3/4-Wave 115V, 10 2x1.5x1 120 6DK9132- Point-to-point, ground-
3 Xtal Inverted L or 50/60 KA6P or to—air and airport control.
(Holder Doublet cycles 6DK9132— Includes RF unit, modulator
Collins 1C) (Figures 1458 RA7P and power supply in one
par. 1408, and case.
1537)
FT-3^1 1508 3 KW A1,A3 2.0-20.0 Xtal 1 Rhombic or 220V, 30 11x3x6 2C6700/B1 Point-to-point. Normally
(Holder (per kF Doublet 60 cycles 8 channels per rectifier
FT—249) unit) (Figures 1536 and modulator. Includes
& 1537) Power Supply 115-A, Audio
Amplifier 123-A, remote control unit, and 8 Radio Frequency Units 164-A. Dial selection of desired chanr-1.
IXican 1509 1200W A1,A3 1-6-24.0 Xtal 2 Rhombic or 3 KVA 2xl.5x5.5 Point-to-point. Push
Airwavqh (Holder Doublet 210/250V, button selection of either
12-ACX-2 FT-249) (Figures 1536 10, 60 preset channel frequency.
& 1537) cycles
Al indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy; A3 indicates amplitude modulated telephony.
bM.0. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
cFigure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428 except where reference is made to paragraph 1408.
^Includes power required for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column.
eThe first two dimensions represent width and depth respectively, and indicate the area required by the designated equipment plus the equipment listed in the "Additional Equipment Required" column,and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance space for personnel. The last dimension is the height of the tallest unit. ^This weight does not include that for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required".column.
^When other identification is not available for instruction books, the stock number is shown*
Type numbers assigned by the manufacturer.
liable continued on next page
Par. 1426
456
TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION — ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE — DESCRIPTION. (Continued)
Additional Dimensions Weight Inst.
Fig. Equipment Power Type of Frequency Freq. Preset Normal Power in Opera— g in Use^ Book or
Type Not No» ________Required____ Output Ernie8iona Range—Me Control Channels Antennac__ Required tion - ftt (Lbs«) Llanual Remarks_______
Pan American 1510 1200W Al 0.26-1.75 Xtal 2 T Cage 3.2 KVA 2.5xl.5x5.5 Point-to-point and homing.
Airways" 750W A2.A3 (Holder (Furnished) 210/250V, Includes Modulator Ql-8,
12-GLX-2 FT-249) (Figure 1543) 10, 60 cycles Antenna Tuning Unit
ATU-12, and Remote Control Unit TMC-R. Dial selection of either preset channel frequency.
Pan American 1511 Transmitter 5 KW A1,A2,A3 5.0-24.0 - None Rhombic or 200/240V, 30 5x2x6.5 Point-to-point. No longer
Airways" PAA 12-ACX-2 Doublet 50/60 cycles procured.
RFA-50 (Figures 1536
(Amplifier) & 1537)
Press Wire- 1512 10 KW Al 0.11-0.14 M.O. None Insulated 220V, 30 9x5x7 2C6888/B1 Point-to-point and Radio-
lessh Tower or 60 cycles (See teletype. Consists of two
PW-10LF Wave Antenna Remarks) units, transmitter and
(Figures 1542 rectifier, normally bolted
& 1544) together. Antenna coil
mounts on top of transmitter and adds 3-1/2 ft.
in height.
Temcoh 1513 200W A1,A2,A3 2.0-16.0 M.O. or None 1/4-or 3/4-Wave 1.2 KVA 2x2x6 530 P4-30390 Point-to-point and ground-
250-GSC Xtal Inverted L or 205/235V, 10 to-air. Switch selection
(Holder Doublet 50/60 cycles of master oscillator or
FT-249) (Figures 1458 ary one of four crystal
par. 1408, frequencies. Maybe con-
and 1537) ~ trolled over 1000 yds. of
#18 Ga. copper wire by use of remote control box furnished.
Temcoh 1514 1000W Al 2.0-16.0 Xtal 6 1/4-or 3/4-Wave 3.2 KVA 3x2.5x7 2200 6D9500 Point-to-point and ground-
1000-AG-GW (Holder Inverted L or 115V, 10 to-air. No longer procured.
Bliley Doublet 50/60 cycles
UC-7) (Figures 1458
par. 1408, and 1537) Western 1515 350,/ Al 1.6-13.2 Xtal 2 Doublet 220/250V, 10 2x2x6 571 6D9654 Point-to-point and ground-
Electric 100W A3 (Holder (Figure 1537) 50/60 cycles to-air. Consists of radio
Co>h WE-5A or frequency chassis, modula-
D-151249 FT-249) tor and power supply
(Pan Amer. mounted in one cabinet.
Airways Relay selection of either
4WT7A) the preset channel
frequencies. No longer procured.
aAl indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy; A3 indicates amplitude modulated telephony.
bk.0. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
“Figure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428 except where reference is made to paragraph 1408.
^Includes power required for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column.
eThe first two dimensions represent width and depth respectively, and indicate the area required by the designated equipment plus the equipment listed in the "Additional Equipment Required" column,and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance space for personnel. The last dimension is the height of the tallest unit. ^This weight does not include that for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required".column. ®When other identification is not available for instruction books, the stock number is shown.
"Type numbers assigned by the manufacturer.
457
Additional
Fig. Equipment Power Type of Frequency Freq. Preset Normal Power iT^era”
■N°- -------Re^^ed---- Output ^Mission* Range-Mc Control Channels Antenna0 Required tio^- ft.e (Lbs.)f Mamag. Remrks__
m.«.. l516 „ s.s kw ai,as 2.0-u.oxm i i/4-.r 3/«„. « 6M098A Pqlrt.to.polM „d
Dialing Unit 168AB Sublet or’ " " teletype/ Normally 8
y' °°ubb®t or (Transmit- channels per rectifier.
C uco ber Onb^ N° longer procured.
(Figures 1458 par. 1408,1536
and 1537)
Wilcox 1517 Rectifier 36A 3 KW A1,A2,A3 2.0 - 20.0 Xtal 1 1/4-or 3/4-Wave 20 KVA 1x2x6 Rnofiosr .
£« ‘tsT1’' ‘V- =9 s^po»»xr-
(Formerly CS 212) (Figures 1458 3x6
par. 1408, 1536
& 1537)
Wilcox11 1518 Rect. & Mod. 26A or 26B 2 KW A1.A2.A3 0.195-0.525 M.O. or 1 insulated Tower 10 KVA 3x2x6 »„<„♦ + < . h u
Sr°l » «•” 4-‘= “• » SIL-i h““e-
console CS-380 (Holder (Figures 1542 60 cycles (Transmit- b procured.
FT-249) & 1544) ter Only)
Wilcox11 1518 Rect. & Mod. 26A or 26B 2 KW A1,A2,A3 0.195-0.525 M.O. or 1 Insulated Tower 10 KVA 3x2x6 p i + + ■ + .
B sstrdl »“™ “‘=
Console CS-380 (Holder (Figures 1542 60 cycles (Transrait-
FT-249) & 1544) ter Only)
aAl indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy; A3 indicates amplitude mnrtulat.gd telephony.
hk.O. is used to indicate Master Oscillator control and Xtal to indicate crystal control.
cFigure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428 except where reference is made to paragraph 1408.
^Includes power required for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required" column.
eThe first two dimensions represent width and depth respectively, and indicate the area required by the designated equipment plus the equipment listed in the Additional Equipment Required" column, and do not represent the floor space required for the complete station installation. Allowance is not made for opening of apparatus doors or drawers, space between units, and operating and maintenance
space lor personnel. The last dimension is the height of the tallest unit.
fr
This weight does not include that for equipment shown in "Additional Equipment Required".column.
g’/Zhen other identification is not available for instruction books, the stock number is shown.
bType numbers assigned by the manufacturer.
458
FIGURE 1496. Radio Transmitter BC-315 FIGURE 1497. Radio Trans-
mitter BC-325-( )
Par. 1426
r TRANSMITTER RECTIFIER AND MODULATOR q ANTENNA TUNING UN IT -j
Par. 1426
459
FIGURE 1498. Power Amplifier FIGURE 1500. Radio
BC-340-( ) FIGURE 1499. Radio Transmitter BC-401 Transmitter BC-460
Par. 1426
460
FIGURE 1501. Radio Transmitter BC-610 FIGURE 1502. Radio Transmitter BC-642
modulator ■ R.R AMPLIFIER UNIT
RECTIFIER
Par. 1426
700898 0—46-----31
461
FIGURE 1503. Radio Transmitter BC-1100-( ) FIGURE 1504. Radio Transmitting Equipment RC-52-( )
RADIO TRANSMITTER BC-452-C 5-------*
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-22-C 1
Remote Control Unit RM-40
Radio Transmitter
Par. 1426
462
FIGURE 1505. Radio Transmitter T-4/FRC and T-5/FRC Installation
I RADIO I RADIO
3 RADIO TRANSMITTERS RECTIFIER MODULATOR TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
-T-4/FRC PP-I/FRC MD l/FRC T-4/FRC T-5/FRC
,________________A-------------------x ,-------------—C-----------------K/-------*------S/------A-------\/---------- v
• £ ______— L wu.i.i.h I
Par. 1426
FIGURE 1506. Radio Transmitter (Aircraft Accessories Corp. 500B) FIGURE 1507. Radio Transmitter
(Collins 32RA)
463
Par. 1426
464
FIGURE 1509. Radio Trans-
FIGURE 1508. Radio Transmitter (Federal FT-300) mitter (Pan American
Airways 12ACX-2)
r MODULATOR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT . 3 RADIO
UNIT FREQ. UNITS
____1______ ,—1—-x X,.
Par. 1426
465
Transmitter 12 GLX-2 Modulator GM-8 Antenna Tuning Unit ATU-12
FIGURE 1510. Radio Transmitter (Pan American Ai rwaya)
Transmitter Control TMC-R
TANK COIL
Par.
466
FIGURE 1511. Power Amplifier
(Pan American Airways FIGURE 1512. Radio Transmitter (Press Wireless PW-10LF)
RFA-50)
OSCILLATOR AND EXCITER CONTROL APPARATUS
— POWER AMPLIFIER
b
-4r- CONTROL APPARATUS
Par. 1426
467
REMOTE CONTROL BOX 4
FIGURE 1515. Radio
FIGURE 1513. Radio Transmitter WTnTTOT, , C1 „ Transmitter (Western
(Temco 250-GSC) FIGURE 1514. Radio Transmitter (Temco 1000-AG-CW) Electric Co. D-151249 or
Pan American Airways
4WTFA)
Par. 1426
468
FIGURE 1516. Radio Transmitter FIGURE 1517. Four Radio Transmitters (Wilcox 96C)
(Wilcox 96A) (With Modulator 50A and Rectifier 36A)
FOUR TRANSMITTERS ------------------------______ MODULATOR
I* PUT---------------------------------—L—___ RECTIFIER
f V ^1 fl .. I • v
Par. 1426
FIGURE 1518. Radio Transmitter (Wilcox 96-200-( ))
469
Par. 1427
1427. RECEIVING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION — ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE — DESCRIPTION
Type Weight
Emission Frequency Freq. Normal Type Power in Use Instr. Bk.
Type No.a Fig, No, Received® Range - Me Control Antenna0 Output Required (Lbs.) or Manuald ___________Remarks___________________
AiJ/FGC-1 - See paragraph 1027
Radioteletype
Terminal
Eqpt.
AN/FRR-3 1492 A1,A2,A3 2.4-26 Crystal Double Into 110/220V
Press Wireless Special (Holder Doublet Teletype 50/60 cy- Five preset channels. For point-to-point
Diversity FT-249) or Term.Eqpt. cles communication and radioteletype. Used with
Rhombic AN/FGC-1 Radioteletype Terminal Unit AN/FGC-1.
(Figures
1540 &
1539)
Federal • 1519 A1,A2,A3 0.015-0.65 Manual Single Speaker 115V, 60 28 6D1947 Marine or fixed station service. Table
128-aY wire or Headset cycle model. Built-in power supply unit.
AC or bat-
teries
Hallicrafters 1520 A1,A2,A3 0.11-1.S& Manual Single Built-in 115V, 60 25 6D9461 Marine or fixed station service. Table model.
S-22-R 1.7-18 wire or Speaker, cycle Built-in power supply.
Double or Headset AC or DC
Doublet
(Figure
1540) Hallicrafters 1521 A1,A2,A3 27-145 Manual Single Speaker or 115V, 50/60 75 6D9462 Airport control and air warning. Table model.
S27 & FM wire or Headset cycle AC Built-in power supply.
Double 500 or
D oublet 5000 ohms
(Figure
1540)
Hallicrafters 1522 A1,A2,A3 0.55-42 Manual Single Speaker or 110/125V 85 6D9471 Point-to-point and ground-to-air. Table
SX-28 wire or Headset 50/60 cycle model. Built-in power supply.
AN/GRR-3 Double 500 or AC
Doublet 5000 ohms
(Figure
1540
Hal 1inraftos 1523 A1,A2,A3 0.54-30.5 Manual 3 ft. Built-in 110/125V 18 6D9464 Highly portable for miscellaneous
S29 Built-in Speaker or AC or DC, or monitoring,
tele- Headset self-cont.
scopic batteries
whip
aExcept for AN/FGC-1, AN/FRR-3 and AN/GRR-3 the type numbers are those assigned by the manufacturer.
bAl indicates continuous wave telegraphy; A2 indicates amplitude modulated tone telegraphy;
A3 indicates amplitude modulated telephony; F!4 indicates frequency modulated telephony and tone telegraphy. cFigure numbers refer to sketches of representative antennas shown in paragraph 1428. dtfhen no other identification is available for the instruction book, the stock number is given.
470
Par. 1427
471
Type
“ »Sil is 21 s _____________________
Miie„rt.„ !*« 37.8-143 „ 2M557>56/B1 s.27recelwexcw
Double 500 or 7 A° treated for tropical use. Airport control
Doublet 5000 ohms and air warning. Built-in power supply.
(Figure Table raodel-
1540)
SSS-Sd *««• 8 "““1 £2 SZSX * JC 100 M-lra’5 “■■><>» e«t„l, pom-to-pornt „d g™»d-t.
Z / P0LE<# TRANSMISSION
z \ line
/ /''' \
FRONT END / \
POLE 'Tpk----- \
I DISSIPATION \ \
/ L,NE \ / \ \
480
Par. 1428
. l0'-*u------------------a--------------------- ,
• r~—i T 1
A= APPROX. .48 WAVELENGTH / \ /\ \
B= APPROX. .12 WAVELENGTH / \ / / \
O APPROX. .15 WAVELENGTH / \ / / V
H= SO TO 55 FT. / \ / / X
ADJUST A AND 0 UNTIL / \ / G \
STANDING WAVES ON / \ / / \
LINE ARE ELIMINATED X \ / / X
/ -"-—12" H
TO STATION
LI ELEVATION
FIGURE 1537. Transmitting Doublet Antenna
481
Par. 1428
FIGURE 1538. Intermediate Frequency Flat Top Antenna
482
।-1-INSULATORS INSULATORS-1—,
' 'F - - 1 *---------------->o PPP'"-- /
g u y s 4 °-----------1 *—---------------o G u YS
y o----------1 ,—---------------- x
•--------25O' TO 4 0O'--------•
PLAN
/\ /^T I"—l2'-o"-y COPPERWELD—^ \
/ / w™ \ \
I / I *-CABLE AND SEIZE \ \
/ I / I EVERY TWO FEET TO \ \
/ I / I LEAD-IN INSULATOR \
' GAP------> i \
L/ WINCH ----TRANSMITTER
~ S fl GRADE , -
’’ GROUND SYSTEMT^ "VMf V ----
ELEVATION
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY FLAT TOP ANTENNA
GROUND RODS -r------.--
-----------L —T—7*—
\ \ •—COPPERWELD WIRE
’o / _ \ / s' "" ___—— \
o / —— ________ \
cu / POLE ——22- /-POLE \
P ---------------------------------------------------------
’o k —' ZZ Z/TT\ ~~—---------- /
— \ / / I \ \ -------- /
/ / I ■—RADIO STATION
-30' TO S0’4
--------------250' TO 400'-----------
-----------------------35O' TO 50 0'-——-----------------
GROUND SYSTEM
1428
e - TILT ANGLE
TERMINATING RESISTORS.
V,-“FRONT END POLE
_ S»OL—/
SIDE POLE-^. --- J
z Z. ' 6 6 If \
/ 1 35' / B \
/ POLE—* HORN GAP \ \ // \
/ AND FEED THRU \ fl POLL y
f INSULATOR---------'
/ G J—- \ 0*—WEIGHT \
—F----------------------------ii rp | V-----------------f________________
N0TE: I—GROUND SYSTEM
APPROXIMATE BAND RANGE (SEE SEPARATE VIEW)
ANTENNA A = 2.5-7MC ANTENNA B = 7-12.5 MC
__ \ \ ' 1 n/ / \ RADIO,/ / —X ' station!.
POLE *0--------------------------------------------pole
X COPPERWELD WIRE
485
y GUY (BROKEN UP GUY (BROKEN UP ----y
\ WITH INSULATORS) WITH INSULATORS) /
7 \ ।—INSULATOR (Hl INSULATOR—! / V
CLEARANCE / X / \
S LIGHT / \--PULLEY ~ PULLEY—^ \
/ -------ROPE - ROPE-----• \
/!\ I \
•4 llail 1 / I TRANS. HOUSE---“k ''1 iQ \
/ ®T \ / F—--------: HORN GAP a. FEED \
/ > \ / L p— THRU INSULATOR 1 e
/ SB \ / T ¥-- /-GROUND ROD Q) \
/ I \ ‘S------------------------------------- 3---------------------------------------
/ X"--------\ RADIAT0B * (,'J 'Ll' t
? / \ L- INSULATOR
/ I H \ \ GUY FIGURE 1543. T Cage Antenna
/ / / / \ \ \ T0 ( r- RADIATOR y
/ / ' / ^ \ \ TRANSMITTER K R------------f---R"1 /TERMINATING
i \ \ IHANoMIIIEH \ INSULATOR /impedance
/ ,/ L BASE INSULATOR \ \ H I//
/ \ --WOODEN POLE 7 S
/ \ ? GROUND ROD
.4, \ _______LI_______________L________________U_______________L___________J/POR COUNTERPOISE)
' > < । 11 11 1 n
‘V u u U U I)
INSULATED TOWER
NOTE:
L = FROM -T TO SEVERAL WAVE LENGTHS H= ANY CONVENIENT HEIGHT (|0 TO 20 FT) FIGURE 1542. Insulated Tower Antenna FIGURE 1544. Wave Antenna
Par. 1428
Par. 1429
1429. TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - ANt) LOGISTICAL BATA---------------------------------
Type Np. Additional Equipment Required Export Weight Export Volume Ship
Stock No. Type No. Stock No. Lbs. Cu. Ft. Tonsb
BC-315 2C6315 Rect. Modulator RA—18 Ant o Tuning Unit BC—316 Rem. Control Unit RM-5 2Z7510 2C526 2C7605
BC-325-0 2C6325O Rem. Control Unit RM-7-O 2C677()
BC-339-() 2C6339() 2173 153 3.8
BO-340-() (Amplifier) 2C2940() Transmitter BC-339-() Rect. RA-22—() Water Cooling Unit RU-2-0 2C6339() 3H4662 2ZA1002 3080 143 3.6
BC-365-0 2C6355O Remote Control Unit RM-10-O 2C7610() 965 84 2.1
BC—401—() 2C6381( ) Rect. &- Modulator RA-30-O Rem. Control Unit RM-1l-() 2C7050() 2C7611
BC-460-O 2C6400( ) Rem. Control Unit RM-20-() 207620()
BC-610 2C6910 868 43.4 1.1
BC—642 2C242 Modulator BC-643 Rectifier RA-44 Transformer and Contactor BC-644 Rem. Control Unit RM-15 202500-643 3H4683-44 3H6500-644 2C7615
BC-H00-() 2C6596-1100() 700 40 1.0
RC-52—() 2C 6903-52 0 1750 50 1.3
T-4/FRC 2C6900-4 Rect. PP-l/FRC Mod . MD-l/FRC Opr’s. Control Console CY-161/FRC (Formerly CS-212 3H4698-1 2C2537-1 2C7604-212)
T-5/FRC 2C6900-5 Rect. PP-l/FRC Mod. MD-l/FRC Opr’s. Control Console CY-161/FRC (Formerly CS-212 3H4698-1 2C2537-1 2C7604-212)
Aircraft 2C6609
Accessories
Corp.®
50 OB
aType numbers assigned by the manufacturer. b40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
486
Par. 1429
Additional Equipment Export Export
Type No.a Stock No. Required Weight Lbs. Volume Cu.Ft. Ship Tons0
Type No. Stock No.
Collins 32-RA 2C6632RA-() 237 18 0.5
Federal FT-300 2C6700 4333 305 7.6
Pan American Airways 12-ACX-2 2C6885 987 80 2.0
Pan American Airways 12-GLX-2 2C6908-1 2217 221 5.5
Pan American Airways RFA-50 (Amplifier) Transmitter Pan American Airways 12-ACX-2 2C6885
Press Wireless PW-10LF 2C6888
Temco 250-GSC 2C6825 773 35 0.9
Temco 1000-AG-CW 2C6800AG.1 3780 152 3.8
Western Electric Co. D-l51249 (Pan American Airways 4WTFA) 2C6872 800 (Approx. 33 ) 0.8
Wilcox 96A 2C6840.1 Rest. & Modulator 26A or 26B Dialing Unit 168AB 2C7126() 2C7126B/P1 >
Wilcox 96C and 96C-3 2C6840C Rectifier 36A Modulator 50A Opr*s. Control Console CY-161/FRC (Formerly CS-212 3H4841 2C2510-50A 2C7604-212)
Wilcox 96-200A 2C6845A Rect. & Modulator 26A or 26B Opr’s. Control Console CS-380 2C7126() 2C7604-380
Wilcox 96-200B 2C6845B Rect. & Modulator 26A or 26B Opr’s. Control Console CS-380 2C7126() 2C7604-380
aType numbers assigned by the manufacturer.
b40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
487
Par. 1430
1430. RECEIVING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SECTION - ARMY COMMUNICATIONS
SERVICE - STOCK NUMBERS AND LOGISTICAL DATA.
Export Export
Weight Volume Ship
Type No.a Stock No. Lbs. Cu. Ft. Tons*5
AN/FRR-3
Press Wireless Diversity 2S2001-3 1200 57 1.4
Federal 128-AY 2C4498 74 6 0.2
Hallicrafter S-22-R 2C4534.1 55 2 0.1
Hallicrafter S-27 2C4537-27 110 4 0.1
Hallicrafter SX-28 AN/GRR-3 2C4534-1 150 7 0.2
Hallicrafter S-29 204537-29 48 2 0.1
Hallicrafter S-36 2C4537-36 110 3.5 0.1
Hammarlund SP-110-LX 2C4528.4-1 130 6 0.2
Hammarlund SP-210-LX 2C4528.6 130 6 0.2
National NC-100-ASC AN/GRR-2 2C4529 125 6 0.2
National HRO 2C4529-21 100 4 0.1
Wilcox 2C4547-2 40 2.5 0.1
CW3 2C5403C 350 17 0.4
Wilcox 4 CW3-D P4-31116 528 37 0.9
Wilcox F3 2C4547-1 40 2.5 I 0.1
Except for AN/FRR-3, AN/GRR-2, and AN/GRR-3 the type numbers are those assigned by the manufacturer.
b40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
cWilcox 113A Receiver Bay consisting of eight CW3 Receivers.
488
Par. 1431-1432
1431. COMBINED TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING EQUIPMENT COMMONLY USED BY AIRWAYS SEdTtoK - Am cOMMUNKaMoNS SErTOE - sMfcg mfetlRS AM) logIsMCaTTata
Type Np.a Stock No. Export Weight Lbs. Export Volume Cu. Ft. Ship Tons®
AN/CRC-3 See paragraph 1413
Collins 18-Q (Navy TCS) 435 24 0.6
Jefferson Travi s 350A 2C5516 425 13 0.3
Link 25-FMTR 165 14 0.4
Link 35-FMTR 2C5535 170 14 0.4
Link 50 UFS 2C5529 250 15 0.4
Link 1498 2C5520 250 15 0.4
Link 1505 2C5528 605 25 0.6
Motorola FMTR-25VM 2C5101 ' 167 14 0.4
Motorola FMTR-50BW 2C5104( ) 167 14 0.4
aExcept for AN/CRC-3 the type numbers are those assigned by the manufacturer.
40 cu. ft. assumed equivalent to 1 ship ton.
Section IV Antennas and Associated Equipment
1432. GENERAL.
a. This section supplies descriptive information and stock numbers for antennas, masts, towers and miscellaneous materials which may be required to construct radio antenna systems. As presented, the data are divided into tactical and fixed plant categories. This has been done for convenience and not with any idea of limiting the field of use of these antenna equipments, as some may be suitable for either tactical or fixed plant installations. Reference should be made to sketches of typical antennas in paragraphs 1408 and 1428.
b. Complete tactical antenna systems which are available in kit form are
listed and described in paragraph 1433. Materials such as wire, coaxial cable and supporting masts, which are used in the construction of antenna systems primarily for tactical use, are listed in paragraphs 1434 to 1437, inclusive. Some of the coaxial cables listed in paragraph 1435 are also used for purposes other than radio communication, but are included for completeness.
£. Metallic mast sections which are available for assembling vertical radiators (whips) for tactical ground use and for vehicular mounting are covered in paragraphs 1438 and' 1439, respectively.
d. Paragraph 1440 gives information on accessories which are required in the construction of tactical antenna systems. Items such as counterpoises, ground rods, insulators, etc. are covered.
489
Par. 1432-1433
Q. Fixed plant antenna systems which are available in kit form are listed in paragraph 1441. Paragraph 1442 describes two antenna coupling units, one being for use primarily with rhombic antennas and the other being a multicoupler for feeding up to ten receivers from a single antenna.
f. Base insulated radio towers which are employed in the fixed plant as vertical radiators are covered in paragraph 1443, and towers which are employed as antenna supports are covered in paragraph 1444.
£. Materials employed in the construction of ground systems for fixed plant vertical antennas are listed in paragraph 1445.
h. Equipment required for lighting fixed plant radio towers and antenna supports is listed in paragraph 1446.
1433. ANTENNA KITS - TACTICAL.
a. Antenna Assembly AS-110( )/TRC-7; Stock No, . This antenna as-
sembly consists of a broad band, lightweight. vertical conical dipole Antenna AS-112/TRC-7 (figure 1471) for use in the frequency range of 100 to 156 Me and includes two 37-1/2-foot lengths of standard 52-ohm solid dielectric radio frequency coaxial transmission cable equipped with standard coaxial fittings, and includes components for constructing and installing a 30-foot aluminum supporting mast consisting of ten 3-foot sections. The complete assembly weighs 26-1/2 pounds net and is normally furnished as a part of Radio Set AN/TRC-7.
13. Antenna Equipment RC-63; Stock No. 2A278-63. The antenna is a vertical half rhombic unidirectional antenna similar to that shown in figure 1469. The assembly is used with, but not part of, Radio Set SCR-194, covering a frequency range of 27.7 to 52.2 Me, Radio Set SCR-195, covering a frequency range of 52.8 to 65.8 Me and Radio Sets SCR-609 and SCR-610, covering a frequency range of 27.0 to 38,9 Me. The over-all antenna wire length is 100 feet, and is equipped with a counterpoise 85 feet long and a 500-ohm, 1-watt resistance termination. The assembly weighs 57 pounds net, including materials for constructing and installing a 32-foot supporting mast, consisting of four 8-foot sections. The equipment may be carried and erected by one man.
£. Antenna Equipment RO-291; Stock No. 2A289-291. The antenna is a ground plane antenna (figure 1472) for use in the frequency range of 40 to 48 Me. The assembly includes a 60-foot length of standard 52-ohm solid dielectric radio frequency coaxial cable terminated in standard coaxial cable fittings, a coupling network for matching the coaxial cable to the output of Radio Set SCR-300, and a universal mounting base for fastening the antenna to a tree or pole. No antenna supporting mast is provided in the kit at present. The equipment is
used with, but is not part of Radio Set SCR-300 and weighs 28 pounds net.
d. Antenna Equipment RC-293; Stock No. 2A289-293. This equipment contains material for constructing an end-fed three-quarter wave antenna and includes two telescoping aluminum masts (extended length 25 feet), two guy assemblies, each with its stakes and polystyrene insulator attached, 300 feet of Wire W-148 on spool one 100-foot steel measuring tape and one Bag BG—193.
It is supplied as a part of Installation Kit MC-549 for mounting Radio Set SCR-499 in a 1/4-ton, 4x4 truck and is for use when at fixed locations. In this application, use is made of radial Counterpoise CP-15 which is normally furnished with the radio set.
e. Antenna System AS-19( )/TRC-l; Stock~tad. 2A264-19, This antenna system contains all the equipment necessary to erect a three-element, horizontally polarized, directional array (figure 1470) for use in the 70-100 Me range. It Includes adjustable Antenna Array AS-20/TRC—1, eleven 5-foot steel sections and nylon guys for constructing, supporting and erecting a 40-foot 2-1/2 inch diameter, rotatable mast, four 50-foot lengths of 52-ohm solid dielectric coaxial cable RG—8/u terminated in standard coaxial cable fittings, and required installation equipment. The antenna array provides a forward gain of about 6 db and a front-to-back ratio of approximately 8 db. Two assemblies are normally furnished with Radio Set AN/TRC-1 and Radio Terminal Set AN/TRC-3, and four with Radio Relay Set AN/TRC-4. An Extension Kit MX-141/TRC-1 (Stock No. 2A1591-141) (consisting of five 60-foot guys and one guy plate) is available for raising the antenna from 40 to 50 feet when only one antenna of the two supplied with the AN/TRC-1 set is required. By lowering the antenna to the ground it may be readily readjusted to operate on any frequency between 70 and 100 Me. The assembly is normally packed in two carrying chests, one of which weighs approximately 90 pounds and the other approximately 300 pounds packed.
f. Doublet Antenna Kit; Stock No. 2AT652^ This is a half-wave doublet antenna kit per Specification 71-1683 for use with Radio Sets SCR-399 and SCR-499 for improving skywave transmission, thus increasing the range and reliability of operation of these radio sets.
Materials are provided for constructing a half-wave center-fed doublet antenna for use in the 2 to 18 Me frequency range, including 50 feet of 72-ohm solid dielectric flexible coaxial transmission line, 250 feet of Wire W-28, twenty-one 5-foot steel tubing mast sections for constructing three 35-foot supports (one at each end and one in the middle to support the weight of the transmission line), necessary guys and insulators, and coils for coupling to the output tank circuit of Radio Transmitter BC-610.
(Another Doublet Antenna Kit, similar to that above except including variable
490
Par. 1433-1434
link tank coils for insertion in Radio Transmitter BC-610 instead of the old tank coils and coupling coils mentioned above, is now furnished with Radio Sets SCR-299, SCR-399, and SCR-499. When cir
cumstances permit, Radio Sets SCR-399 and SCR-499 will be delivered equipped with these variable link tank colls and such coils will then no longer be included as a part of this Doublet Antenna Kit.)
1434. WIRE USED FOR ANTENNA EQUIPMENT - TACTICAL.
Type No, Stock No. Solid or Equiv. AWG (B&S) Gauge No,of Strands Breaking Wt. Per and Gauge of Load 1000 Ft Each Conductor Material Insulation Lbs. in Lbs. Remarks
W-28 1A28 12 7/20 Bronze Bare 550 23.5 Antenna
W-29 1B29 16 42/32 Bronze Black Weatherproof Cotton Braid 200 14.4 Antenna
W-30 1B30 16 42/32 Bronze Rubber 200 70 Counterpoise
W-120 1A120 16 42/32 Silicon Bronze Bare 8 Conductor composed of 6 groups of 7 strands each twisted around a 5 ply cotton cord so as to make a solid cylindrical conductor. Same as Wire W-29, except without insulation.
W-128 1B128 14 41/30 Tinned Copper Rubber Aircraft ignition cable with ozone-resisting rubber insulation. Used for antenna and ground connections for vehicular radio sets.
W-140 1B140 . 18 16/30 Tinned Copper Rubber and Black Cotton Braid Extra flexible. Belden Mfg. Co.
W-146 1B146 12 Tinned Copper Rubber and Black Cotton Braid Flexible lead-in wire. Similar to Wire W-128 except improved for high frequency transmission
W-148 1A148 0.035 16/35 Phosphor Bronze Bare 50 Antenna; 300 ft. length; used with, but not part of, Reel RL-48
491
Par. 1435
492
1435. COAXIAL CABLES FOR RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES.
Max.
Nominal Nominal Weight Nominal Nominal Maximum Oper- Average
Army Diameter of Number of Cvei—all Pounds Imped- Cap.mmf Attenuation ating Power Rating
Navy Stock Replaces Cid Inner Dielectrica Shielding Protective Dia. Per ance Per db/ft_________ Voltage (Watts)b
Type No, No,_____Cable Number Conductor___(In.)___Braids Covering (fn,) Foot Ohms Foot 100 MC 5000 MC RMS 200 MC 3000 MC _____Remarks________
RG-5/U RMA 16c 16 A.W.G. 0.185 2 Vinyl 0.332 0.087 51 30 0.04 0.28 3,000 310 65 Small microwave cable
Copper
RG-6/U KS-9168C 21 A.W.G. 0.185 2 Vinyl 0.332 0.082 75 20 0.037 0.26 2,700 - - Small size video and l.F.
KS-9226C Copperweld double shielded cable
RG-7/U 1F425-7 AS-48, WC547 19 A.W.G. 0.250 1 Vinyl 0.370 0.080 95 14 0.030 - - - - Low capacitance air spaced
62064, K31c»d Copper (max.) dielectric cable
21B-225-7/3O-XVc>d
RG-8/U 1F425-8 PT5, WC543 7/21 A.W.G. 0.285 1 Vinyl 0.405 0.106 52 29 0.027 0.25 4,000 480 90 General purpose, medium
WC549 Copper size, flexible cable
CASSF-50-1
RG-9/U B452 7/21 A.W.G. 0.280 2 Vinyl 0.420 0.150 52 29 0.027 0.25 4,000 480 90 Double shielded, medium
Copper size, low level circuit
cable
RG-10/U 1F425-10 CAS5F-50-1A 7/21 A.W.G. 0.285 1 Vinyl 0.445 0.146 52 29 0.027 0.25 4,000 480 90 Same as RG-8/U armored for
Copper and Armor Naval equipment
RG-ll/U 1F425-11 WC552 7/26 A.W.G. 0.285 1 Vinyl 0.405 0.096 75 20 0.027 0.25 3,500 - - Medium size, flexible video
WC562C Copper and communication cable
CASSF-70-lc
RG-12/U CASSF-70-lAc 7/26 A.W.G. 0.285 1 Vinyl 0.445 0.141 75 20 0.027 0.25 3,500 - - Same as RG-ll/U armored
Copper and Armor for Naval equipment
RG-13/U 1F425-13 21B-290-7/26-XXV 7/26 A.W.G. 0.280 2 Vinyl 0.420 0.126 75 20 0.027 0.25 3,500 - - Double shielded l.F. cable
B492 Copper
RG-14/U 1F425-14 RMA 10 10 A.W.G. 0.370 2 Vinyl 0.545 0.216 51 30 0.022 0.20 6,000 730 135 General purpose semi-
KS-9269C Copper flexible power transmission
cable
RG-15/U 1F425-15 KS-9220 15 A.W.G. 0.370 2 Vinyl 0.545 0.197 75 20 0.022 0.20 5,500 650 115 Medium power cable designed
Coppenveld for continuous flexing
RG-16/U KS-9286 0.125 Copper 0.460 1 Vinyl 0.630 0.254 52 30 0.018 0.16 7,500 940 165 Medium power cable with
Tube hollow inner conductor for
pressurization
RG-17/U CASSF-50-2 0.188 Copper 0.680 1 Vinyl 0.870 0.460 51 30 0.014 0.15 11,000 1,460 225 Large, high power trans-
KS-9256 mission cable
RG-18/U 1F425-18 CASSF-50-2A 0.188 Copper 0.680 1 Vinyl 0.910 0.585 51 30 0.014 0.15 11,000 1,460 225 Same as RG-17/U armored for
and Armor Naval Equipment
RG-19/U CASSF-50-3 0.25 Copper 0.910 1 Vinyl 1.12 0.740 51 30 0.012 0.125 14,000 2,050 285 Very large high power trans-
mission cable
RG-20/U 1F425-20 CASSF-50-3A 0.25 Copper 0.910 1 Vinyl 1.16 0.925 51 30 0.012 0.125 14,000 2,050 285 Same as RG-19/U armored for
and Armor Naval equipment.
Far. 1435
Max.
Nominal Nominal Weight Nominal Nominal Maxi mum Oper- Average
, Diameter of Number of Over-all Pounds Imped- Cap.mmf Attenuation ating Power Rating
Navy Stock Replaces Old Inner Dielectric® Shielding Protective Dia. Per ance Per db/ft Voltage (Watts)0
Tjpe No, --No.---gable Number_ Conductor--(In,)___Braids Covering (Jn.) Foot Ohms Foot 100 MC 5000 MC RMS 200 MC 5000 MC __________Remarks_______
RG-21/U 1F425-21 KS-9250 16 A.W.G. 0.185 2 Vinyl 0.552 0.087 51 50 0.16 0.95 - - - Special attenuating cable
Resistance with small temperature co-
,xre efficient of attenuation
RG-22/U 1F425-22 WC551 2 Cond. 0.285 1 Vinyl 0.405 0.107 95 17 0.04 - 1,000 - - Small size, twin conductor
7/26 A.W.G. cable
Copper
RG-25/U 1F425-25 B601 ^Cond.^ G 2 Vinyl 0,650 °’49° 13 °’°5 " 3’°°0 " " Balanced dual r™*™1
Copper 0.905 cable
RG-24/U 1F425-24 B601A 2 Cond. 0.400 2 Vinyl 0.715 0.670 125 15 0.05 - 5,000 - - Same as RG-25/U armored for
B602A 7/2.1 A.W.G. and Armor x - Naval equinment
Copper 1.010
RG-25/U 1F425-25 A2, 62101 19/0.0117 0.508? 2 Neoprene 0.565 0.205 50 60 1 MC - 8,000 - - Medium size, pulse cable
hS-8625c Tinned 0.007 (Peak)
KS-9511 Copper '
RG-26/U 1F425-26 AA1 19/0.0117 0.508? 1 Vinyl 0.475 0.280 50 60 1 MC - 8,000 - - Similar to RG-25/U armored
Ko-9547 Tinned and Armor 0.007 (Peak) for Naval equipment
Copper
RG-27/U Bl, 62102 19/0.0185 0.455? 1 Vinyl 0.650 0.275 50 60 1 UC - 17,000 - - Large size pulse cable
Ko-9056 Tinned and Armor 0.004 (Peak) armored for Naval equipment
Copper
RG-28/U B2 19/0.0185 0.455? 2 Neoprene 0.805 0.570 50 60 1 MC - 17,000 - - Large size pulse cable
62x05 Tinned 0.004 (Peak)
Copper
RG-59/U 1F425-59 KS-8086 22 A.W.G. 0.196e 2 Waxed 0.292 0.10 70 28 10 MC - 1,000 - - Rubber cable to be used
Copperweld Cotton Braid 0.018 where high flexibility is
required
RG-41/U 1F425-41 62039° 16/50 A.W.G. 0.250® 1 Neoprene 0.425 0.15 70 28 10 MC - 1,000 - - Rubber cable used for twist-
KS-8498° Tinned 0.014 ing applications
RG-S7/U 1F425-57 R>43/U 2 Cond. 0.472 1 Vinyl 0.617 0.225 95 17 0.04 - 5,000 - - Large size twin conductor
rCSSF-95-1 7/21 A.W.G. o
WC550 Copper
RG-58/U 1F425-58 RG~4/UC 20 A.W.G. 0.116 1 Vinyl 0.195 0.025 51 50 0.062 0.405 1,900 160 55 General purpose small size
Copper flexible cable
RG-59/U Uniradio 52c 22 A.W.G. 0.146 1 Vinyl 0.242 0.052 70 22 0.050 0.55 2,500 225 45 General purpose small size
EX-591C Copperweld video ca£le‘
All cables have dielectric material of stabilized polyethylene ^Replaces with minor electrical variations,
unless noted otherwise, b, . . -i x j .... , . , , eDielectric material is synthetic rubber compound.
Average power rating calculated on basis of inner conductor having 70«F rise in temperature above ambient. ?The dielectric material is a synthetic rubber compound with layers of con-
Cr, , ... . , . , . x. ducting rubber and the diameter is that over the second laver of conducting
Replaces with minor mechanical variations. rubber .
o co co 00 © cL co co
Par.1436-1438
1436. MAST ASSEMBLIES FOR SUPPORTING ANTENNAS - TACTICAL.
a. 50-Foot Plywood Mast AB-38/CR; Stock No. 2A2056. This Lightweight mast (Maryland Engineering Company #3050) is composed of eight 6-foot 3-inch long cylindrical plywood sections fastened together by metal couplings and supported by 8 guy ropes. It may be assembled and raised by two men in about one hour and it is shipped in a single bundle 7x1 x 1 feet, weighing about 120 pounds, including complete accessories and tools. It is used with, but is not part of, Radio Set AN/CRC-3.
b. 30-Foot Plywood Mast; Stock No.___
This lightweight mast (Maryland Engineer-ing Co. #2630) is composed of eight 45-inch long cylindrical plywood sections fastened together by metal couplings and supported by 8 guy ropes. It can be transported, assembled and erected in the field by one man. The entire mast, accessories and tools are packed into a canvas carrying bag 11 inches in diameter and 4 feet 9 inches long and weighs approximately 49 pounds.
1437. MAST SECTIONS FOR ANTENNA SUPPORTS, a. General. This paragraph gives information on mast sections which may be employed in constructing masts for supporting antennas. In addition to the material listed, other items such as guy ropes, ground stakes and other rigging are required. See paragraph 1440.
b. Mast Sections MS-18 to MS-22 Incl.
(1) DESCRIPTION. Mast Sections MS-18 to 22 inclusive are 8-1/2 foot long spruce sections which may be joined to form a supporting mast 42 feet or more in height. The two upper sections are 2-1/2 inches in diameter and the three other sections are 3-1/4 inches in diameter. The intermediate sections have a hole in one end and a coupling tube projecting 12 inches on the other end. The top section has a hole in each end, one to fit Mast Cap NT-6 and the other to fit over the coupling tube of the next lower section. The bottom section has a coupling tube at each end, one to fit Insulator IN-4 and the other to fit into the hole of the next higher section.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS
Mast Section Location Supported by Stock No.
MS-18 Top MS-19 2A2318
MS-19 Intermediate MS-19 or 20 2A2319
MS-20 Intermediate MS-20 or 21 2A2320
MS-21 Intermediate MS-21 or 22 2A2321
MS-22 Bottom IN-4 2A2322
mast 30 feet high. Normally used with Mast Base MP-19 (Stock No. 2A2079) and Guy Plate NT-20 (Stock No. 2A1350).
d. Mast Section MS-44-A; Stock No. 2A2344A. This is the same as MS-44 except that it is made of cold rolled electric welded steel tubing, SAE-1010 unannealed.
e. Mast Section MS-91 to MS-94 Incl.
(1) DESCRIPTION. Mast Sections MS-91 to MS-94 inclusive are straight grain fir sections 8 feet long x 1-19/32 inches in diameter which may be joined to form a 32-foot antenna support. Brass tubing and sleeves are fitted to the ends of the mast sections for making connections to other sections. They are a part of Antenna Equipment RC-63.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS.
Mast Section Location Supported by Stock No.
MS-91 Top MS-92 2A2391
MS-92 Intermediate MS-93 2A2392
MS-93 Intermediate MS-94 2A2393
MS-94 Bottom - 2A2394
1438. METALLIC MAST SECTIONS FOR VERTI-
CAL RADIATORS FOR GROUND USEL a. Mast Sections MS-49 to MS-56 Incl.
(1) DESCRIPTION. Mast Sections MS-49 to MS-56 inclusive may be joined to form an antenna 25 feet high. They are made of chrome molybdenum steel tubing 37 inches long. The ends of the mast sections are painted different colors to facilitate the lining up of mast sections during assembly. They are a part of Radio Sets SCR-178, 179, 203 and 284-A.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS.
Mast Section Location Outside
Diam. - Inches Supported by Stock No<
MS-49 Top 0.179 MS-50 2A2349
MS-50 Intermediate 0.265 MS-51 2A2350
MS-51a Intermediate 0.357 MS-52 2A2351
MS-52b’c Intermediate 0.438 MS-53 2A2352
MS-53 Intermediate 0.500 MS-54 2A2353
MS-54b Intermediate 0.562 MS-55 2A2354
MS-55 Intermediate 0.593 MS-56 2A2355
MS-56 Bottom 0.625 IN-85 or IN-91 2A2356
aAlso fits Mast bAlso fits Mast 37, 48 and 57.
Base MP—22.
Bases MP-14, 14-A,
cSeating plug and threads will also fit into upper end of MS-55.
£. Mast Section MS-44; Stock No. 2A2344.
This is a 5-foot long aluminum alloy tube equipped with an aluminum alloy sleeve which protrudes an additional 6 inches. The outside diameter of sleeve is 1.355 inches. Sections may be fitted end to end to form an antenna supporting
b. Mast Sections MS-65 to 73 Incl.
(1) DESCRIPTION. Mast Sections MS-65 to MS-73 may be joined to form a 45-foot vertical antenna. They are made up of aluminum sections 66 inches long. These mast sections are a part of Radio Set SCR-197.
494
Par.1439-1440
(2) STOCK NUMBERS.
Mast Section Location Outs ide Diam. -Inches Supported by Stock No
MS-65 Bottom 2-1/4 Insulator IN-102a 2A2365
MS-66 Intermediate 2-1/4 MS-65 2A2366
MS-67 Intermediate 2 MS-66 2A2367
MS-68 Intermediate 1-3/4 MS-6 7 2A2368
MS-69 Intermediate 1-1/2 IAS-68 2A2369
MS-70 Intermediate 1-1/4 MS-69 2A2370
MS-71 Intermediate 1 MS-70 2A2371
MS-72 Intermediate 3/4 MS-71 2A2372
MS-73 Top 3/8 MS-72 2A2373
aPart of MS-65.
1439. METALLIC MAST SECTIONS FOR VEHICULAR RADIATORS^
a. Mast Sections MS-49 to 53, Incl, These masts are commonly used with Mast Bases MP-37 or MP-57 on vehicular installations to form a 15-foot whip antenna. They are also used for ground installations as covered in paragraph 1438 a.
b. Mast Sections MS-116, 117 and 118.
(1) DESCRIPTION. These mast sections are copper plated seamless tubing 39-1/2 inches long. They are fastened together by female and male threads at the top and bottom respectively. A 6-foot whip antenna made up of two Mast Sections MS-117 and 118 with Mast Base AB-15/GR can be used to replace Mast Sections MS-52 and 53 with Mast Base MP-48. A 9-foot whip antenna made up of one each of Mast Sections MS-116, 117 and 118 with Mast Base AB-15/GR can be used to replace MS-51, 52 and 53 with Mast Base MP-48 or 48-A. A 15-foot whip made up of one each of Mast Sections MS-116, MS-117 and MS-118 with Mast Base MP-65 can be used to replace Mast Sections MS-49 to 53 Inclusive with Mast Base MP-37 or MP-57.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS
Mast Section Diameter -Inches Supported by Stock No
MS-116 3/8 MP-65 or AB-15/GR 2A2416
MS-117 3/8 tapering to 1/4 MS-116 2A2417
MS-118 1/4 tapering to 1/8 IAS-117 2A2418
1440. ACCESSORIES USED IN CONSTRUCTING TACTICAL ANTENNAS.
a. The following materials, listed alphabetically, are commonly used in constructing antennas for use with tactical radio sets.
Name and Description
Block FT-127: Single swivel eye; malleable iron, galvanized. Part of Radio Sets SCR-177-( ) and SCR-188-( ).
Counterpoise CP-12: Metal clamp bar with stud and wing nut and two 25-foot lengths of wire on each end. One end also has a 48-inch lead-in wire. Used with Counterpoise CP-13. Part of Radio Set SCR-284-A.
Counterpoise CP-13: Same as Counterpoise CP-12 except that it has no lead-in wire and clamp has a slot for slipping into place under the wing nut of Counterpoise CP-12. Part of Radio Set SCR-284-A.
Fastener FT-9: 5/8 x 3 inch
cast iron slide adjuster for test and antenna guy ropes.
Fitting FT-128: Cadmium-plated steel, rope wedge. Part of Radio Sets
SCR-177-( ) and SCR-188-( ).
Fitting FT-148: Guy rope fitting; same as fitting FT-128 except one end enlarged to take a larger thimble measuring approximately 1/4 inch square at end. Part of Guys GY-22, GY-23 and GY-24.
Stock No.
2A347
2A712
2A713
2Z4309
2A1128
2A1148
Ground Rod GP-16: A round 5B4416
galvanized iron rod, 1/2 inch diameter, 24 inches long, pointed at one end and equipped with a loose iron ring at the other end;
the rod is slightly flattened 3/4 inch below the ring and a machine screw for making line connections is threaded through the rod. Formerly called ’’Type E”. Net weight 1.5 pounds.
Ground Rod GP-24: Hexagonal 4G724 galvanized steel rod; 18 inches long; pointed on one end and bent in a goose-neck with 10 feet of insulated wire at the other end. Net weight 1 pound.
Ground Rod GP- 26; Round galvanized 5B4426 iron rod; 1/2-inch diameter, 6 foot long; one end pointed; other end has copper wire with free end 5 inches long for attaching to ground wires. Hubbard No. 9506 or equal. Net weight 4 pounds.
495
Par.1440-1441
Stock No.
3G555
Name and Description Ground Rod GP-28: Hubbard No. 9425 rod (modified); copperweld, with clamp and 8 foot lead of No. 8 stranded wire. 4 feet long x 1/2 inch diameter. Used to ground Truck K-18-( ). Part of Radio Set SCR-197-( ). Net weight 4 pounds.
Ground Rod GP-29: Steel pipe, 33 inches long, with pointed end, a driving head and means for attaching ground lead. Net weight 8 pounds.
Hook FT-93: S shape, cold-rolled steel; cadmium-plated; with open links; over-all dimensions, 2-1/4 x 1 x 1/4 inches thick. Part of Ring FT-74. Net weight 1-1/4 ounc e.
Hook FT-131: 3 shape, cold-
rolled steel; cadmium-plated; with open links; over-all dimensions, 2 x 7/8 x 3/16 inches thick. Similar to Hook FT-93 except different dimensions. Part of Guy GY-34 and Radio Sets SCR-177-( ) and SCR-188-( ). Net weight one ounce.
Insulator IN-55: Strain; hard-rubber; 3-1/2 inches long x 5/8 inch diameter; has a hole 7,/32 inch diameter through each end.
Insulator IN-86: Strain; Isolantite body 2 inches long x 3/4 inch diameter, with 9/16 inch eye bolt screwed intq»each end; Isolantite may be replaced if broken and eye bolts used again. Part of Radio Sets SCR-177-( ) and SCR-188-( ).
Insulator IN-87: Spreader; for transmission line to half-wave antenna; consists of Isolantite body 5/8 inch diameter x 2-3/4 inch long, with a catch at each end.
Insulator IN-88: Strain, 3G588
cylindrical; Grade G ceramic per spec. 71-229; 1/2 inch diameter x 2-3/4 inches long; an improvement over Insulators IN-78 and IN-78-A. For use in aircraft antennas where a small strain type may be required; test load 300 lbs.
Line Clamp: (Stanley Pull-Tite No. 7070) For use on 3/16 inch nylon rope in place of Fastener FT-9; causes less wear on the rope.
3Z3328
3Z3329
2A1493
2A1501
3G586
3G587
Stock No.
6Z7925
6Z7926
6Z7920
2A3212
2A3302
Name and Description
Rope RP-3: Sash cord; No. 5;
white braided cotton, No. 12 yarn; 5/32 inch diameter to 11/64 inch diameter.
Rope RP-5: Sash cord; No. 6; white; 3/16 inch diameter, minimum breaking strength 200 pounds.
Rope-Nylon: 1150 foot length, 3/16 inch diameter; olive drab, 3 .strands; 650 pounds test, very slightly affected by moisture.
Snap FT-126: Polo bit; steel; cadmium-plated. Part of Radio Sets SCR-177-( ) and SCR-188-( ).
Stake GP-2: Solid galvanized iron rod; 16 inches long x 3/4 inch diameter, head 1-1/8 inch diameter; used for fastening guy ropes and antennas.
Stake GP-8: Ground; 18 inches long; 3/8 inch steel gas pipe with a rivet on the upper end; the lower end is pointed; binding post attached on one side, 2-3/4 inches from head.
Twine RP-11: Braided; breaking strength, 70 to 80 pounds; treated with insulating compound.
1441. ANTENNA KITS - FIXED PLANT.
a. General. Drawings accompany
of the antenna kits described below, giving design dimensions for the antennas for all frequencies within their range of usefulness. The materials provided in the antenna kit are sufficient to construct the largest antenna shown in these designs.
b. Rhombic Transmitting Antenna; Stock No.
2A3308
6Z8811
each
Antenna, Horizontal Rhombic, Transmitting; per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-368-C (less poles, guys, transmission line and dissipation line).
Dissipation Line Kit, for Rhombic Transmitting Antenna, per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-368-C.
Pole Guy Kit, type 75PXX, Signal Corps drawing ES-B-32502-A. Extra heavy duty. Two required for antenna supported with poles. For long diagonal.
Pole Guy Kit, type 75PX, Signal Corps drawing ES-B-32500-A. Heavy duty. Two required, for antenna supported with poles. For short diagonal.
Transmission Line Kit, for Rhombic Transmitting Antenna, Signal Corps drawing ES-E-368-C.
496
Par. 1441-1443
c. Doublet Transmitting Antenna, Delta; Stock No.
Antenna System, Doublet Transmitting Delta match, Signal Corps drawing ES-D-252-E, less supports.
Pole Guy Kit, type 75P, per Signal Corps drawing ES-D-252-E. (Light duty type. 2 required with each Doublet Antenna when used with poles.)
d. Intermediate Frequency Antenna; Stock No. 2A299-GP7.
Antenna, Intermediate Frequency, Transmitting, 5-wire flat-top, Signal Corps drawing ES-E-335-B.
e. Double Vettical Cage; Stock No. 2A299-GP2.
Antenna System, dual vertical cage, Signal Corps drawing ES-E-299-B (less supports and ground system).
f. Rhombic Receiving Antenna; Stock No.
Antenna Kit, Rhombic Receiving per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-386-C (less transmission line).
Transmission Line Kit, for Rhombic Receiving Antenna, per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-386-C (500 ft.)
Pole Guy Kit, type 75P, per Signal Corps drawing ES-B-19424-B. (Light duty type. 4 required for each Rhombic Receiving Antenna, when used with poles.) £. Double-Doublet Receiving Antenna, Stock too.
Antenna Kit, Double-Doublet, Receiving per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-276 (less supports, but including 150 feet of transmission line).
Transmission Line Kit, per Signal Corps drawing ES-E-386-D. (1 required
for each Double-Doublet Antenna if over 150-foot line is required.)
Pole Guy Kit, type 75P, per Signal Corps drawing ES-B-19424-C. (Light duty type. 2 required for each Double-Doublet when used with poles.)
h. Resonated Vertical Whip, Receiving; Stock No. 2A298.
Antenna, receiving vertical whip, adjustable, with resonating circuit box, less coils and condensers (Signal Corps drawing ES-D-348-C).
1442. ANTENNA COUPLING UNITS.
a. Antenna coupling transformer, Western Electric Co. D-163678 (Stock No. 2C471) is intended to operate over the frequency range of 4 to 20 Me between a balanced horizontal rhombic receiving antenna and an unbalanced 72-ohm coaxial transmission line, or between a 200-ohm balanced line and an unbalanced 72-ohm coaxial transmission line. It is equipped with lightning protector gaps. The overall dimensions of the transformer are 12 x 11-3/8 x 14 inches.
b. Antenna Multicoupler. R.C.A. Model S-8853-1 (Stock No. 2A2698) for use in the frequency range of 4 to 24 Me, provides facilities for feeding up to ten receivers from a single antenna. By its use, excessive loss due to the paralleling of numerous receiver input circuits is avoided. Crosstalk interference from
the high-frequency oscillators in the receivers is effectively reduced and radiation by the antenna minimized. The Antenna Multicoupler is supplied with two input transformers. One, with unbalanced input, is designed to work from a 75-ohm coaxial line and the other, with balanced input, has windings which are connected in parallel for input impedances between 75 and 300 ohms and in series for impedances between 300 and 1000 ohms. The output of the multicoupler appears as ten separate circuits, each being terminated in a Western Electric 75-ohm coaxial jack (WE-464A) which may be connected to the receivers through either 50 or 75-ohm coaxial cable. This multicoupler utilizes thirteen 6AC7 vacuum tubes for isolation purposes. An AC or DC filament supply of 6.3 volts and 5.9 amperes and a DC plate supply of 125 to 135 volts and about 0.13 ampere is required for operation. The multicoupler weighs 9 pounds without tubes and is arranged to mount on a standard 19-inch rack, occupying 5-1/4 inch of vertical space and a depth, including tubes, of 5-1/4 inch.
1443. BASE INSULATED TOWERS USED AS VERTICAL RADIATORS - FIXED PLANT.
a. 180-Foot Windcharger, Type 101.
(11 DESCRIPTION. The 180-footWindcharger Type 101 tower is of the guyed vertical type with base insulation. It consists of nine 20-foot sections triangular in shape and lattice braced, with guys at 5 different levels, 3 to each level. Erection of the tower is accomplished by first setting up the bottom 20-foot section on the base insulator and then through use of a gin pole arrangement raising additional 20-foot sections, fitting each on top of the other until the tower is full height. The tower is supplied complete with all guys, plates, insulators, concrete for base, gin pole, and all tools and other accessories required for its erection. The base insulator supplied is Lapp Type 10027 or a Locke type 91439, which has a dry flash-over of 75 KV and a wet flashover of 35 KV. If the tower is to be used at low frequencies (150 to 450 KC) with a power exceeding 2 KW, guy insulators suitable for the high voltage developed should be ordered separately. This tower is suitable for use with such transmitters as the T-5/FRC, Wilcox 96-200, BC-365, etc.
(2) MATERIAL LIST.
Quantity Name Stock No.
1 Windcharger tower, complete with base insulator, guys, anchors, etc. 2A3451
50 Suspension type Insulators 3G155O-38
As Required Pole Lighting Material (par. 1446b)
As Required Material for Ground or Counterpoise (par. 1445b)
1 Transformer tower lighting unit, Type I (par. 1446a)
497
Par. 1443-1444
b. 125-Foot Self-Supporting (Blaw Knox) (1) DESCRIPTION. 125-foot self-supporting insulated towers were procured on CAA Specification 98. The towers are of two types. Blaw Knox Type 9A is a heavy duty tower and the Blaw Knox Type 10 is the standard tower. The 9A should be specified where extreme wind and iceing conditions prevail. Both are of the 5 point suspension type, having 4 compression type insulators supporting the corner members and 1 compression type for the center hold down. They are equipped with a ladder to the top and are furnished with standard CAA lighting which includes prismatic type fixtures. These towers are primarily intended for use with the CAA 400 watt SHA radio range. However, they are available for other uses such as homing or low frequency point-to-point communication installations. Base insulators have a dry flashover of 40 KV at 60 cycles and will withstand 12 KV unmodulated RF at 400 KC. The insulation is suitable for powers up to 1000 watts at low frequencies. The towers are supplied complete with lighting fixtures, a counterpoise system consisting of a steel mesh 50-foot square mounted on a steel frame, small tools and complete instructions for installation. No base material other than base steel members is furnished.
(2) MATERIAL LIST
Quantity Name Stock No.
1 or 1 Blaw Knox Type 10 (Standard) Blaw Knox Type 9 A (Heavy Duty) (Both towers are complete except for isolating lighting transformer) 2A3449
1 Transformer, tower lighting unit Type II (par. 1446a)
c. 90-Foot Insulated Tower.
(1) DESCRIPTION. This 90-foot guyed insulated tower is of triangular lattice construction. It is equipped with one set of guys located 30 feet from the top of the tower. The guys are attached to a special compression type insulator which simplifies greatly the guy insulation problem. The tower rests on a special compression type insulator. The subbase is steel of pyramid design and is buried in the ground over most of its height and therefore requires nb concrete. The tower is erected by fitting a section at a time on the bottom and jacking up the entire tower with a special jack arrangement. Complete erection details are furnished. The tower is normally used with a counterpoise system consisting of 36 radials extending out from the base of the tower for a distance of 65 feet and suspended 8 feet above ground for 50 feet of their length. When a radio range kit,is furnished, towers and counterpoise are included in the kit.
When towers are ordered as separate items and counterpoises are required, they must be ordered as separate items. These towers are intended for use with the Adcock Radio Range Assembly, but 500 extra towers were ordered for converting loop ranges and for other use. Erection equipment is not furnished, but is available to sectors for team use. Base insulator and primary guy insulators have a flashover rating of 40 KV and will withstand an RF unmodulated voltage of 12 KV at 400 KC. Insulation is suitable for power up to 1000 watts at low frequencies.
(2) MATERIAL LIST
^xantity
1
1
Ab Required 100 ft.
As Required
1
Name
Tower, complete with guys, anchors and hardware
Counterpoise
Pole Lighting Kit Wraplock 2-conductor underground cable (Parkway Cable No. 12 - 85-foot length)
Transformer, tower lighting unit, Type II
Stock No.
2A3447.1
2A736
(par. 1446 h) PA-5018?
1D662-1
(par. 1446 a)
d. Light Duty 90-Foot Insulated Tower.
(1) DESCRIPTION. This 90-foot guyed tower is of the base insulated type for use as a vertical radiator. The tower is extremely light and is of triangular lattice braced design. It is air transportable and is designed to be assembled on the ground and raised as a unit. Except for the addition of a base insulator, the tower is similar to the 75- and 90-foot noninsulated light duty antenna supporting towers described in paragraph 1444 a. Complete instructions for erection are furnished with the tower. Each tower is supplied complete with gin pole for erection; blocks and rope are not supplied. Insulation of the tower is limited by the guy insulators which have a dry flashover voltage of 16 KV at 60 cycles. The tower should not be used as a radiator at powers exceeding 1000 watts at low frequencies.
(2) MATERIAL LIST.
Quantity Name Stock No.
1 90-Foot Tower, including base insulator - FTN-37577
As Required Material for Ground System (par. 1445 b)
1 Pole Lighting Kit 6Z6934-90 (par. 1446 b)
1 Transformer, tower lighting unit Type II (par. 1446 a)
1444. TOWERS FOR SUPPORTING ANTENNAS -
FIXED PLANT.
a^. 75- and 90-Foot Light Duty Towers.
(11 DESCRIPTION. These 75 and 90-foot guyed towers are of the noninsulated
498
Par.1444-1445
type for use as antenna supports. They are extremely light, of triangular lattice braced design, and are suitable for supporting light receiving antennas; such as a single wire or doublet. They are designed for a 1000-pound head load and any load over this amount will greatly decrease their safety factor. They were originally procured as 90-foot towers. Some were shipped as 90-foot towers and were later furnished with a modification kit to reduce them to 75 feet. Except for the absence of base insulation, these towers are similar to the base-insulated 90-foot light duty tower described in paragraph 1443 d. They are air transportable and are designed to be assembled on the ground and raised as a unit. Complete instructions for erection are furnished with the towers. They are supplied complete, including a gin pole for erection; blocks and rope are not supplied.
(2) MATERIAL LIST.
Quantity Name Stock No.
1 90-Foot Tower, complete with erection system 2A3447
1 75-Foot Tower (same as 90-foot tower except shorter) FTN-37699
1 Pole Lighting Kit (par. 1446 b)
1 Transformer, tower lighting unit, Type U (par. 1446 _a)
Jb. 73-Foot 7—Inch Rhombic Tower.
(1T DESCRIPTION. The" 73-foot 7-inch heavy duty tower is designed for supporting heavy Rhombics and similar applications. It is a fabricated, triangular, lattice braced, galvanized steel tower which is shipped knocked down for assembly in the field. The tower will withstand a horizontal load of 11,000 pounds at the center antenna attachment plate, or horizontal loads of 1,450 pounds at each of the three antenna attachment plates. The tower is designed for complete assembly on the ground and erection in one piece with a gin pole arrangement. The tower is complete with all guys, instruction books and anchors, but less erection equipment.
(2) MATERIAL LIST.
Quantity Name Stock No.
1 Tower, complete 2A3448
1 Shackle, galv. steel,. 5/8” pin, 7/8” clevis opening 5B15414
2 Thimble PF-43, galv. iron, grooved for 3/8” guy wire 5B18043
As Pole Lighting Kit, 6Z6934-90
Required 90-foot (par. 1446 b
100 Ft. Wraplock P4-30383
The following items are to be supplied to each location for erection purposes only and are needed in addition to Tool Equipment TE-87-A.
1 Erection equipment kit consisting of:
5 Ancor, Screw Type, 6” FTNP-2826
2 Clip, wire tape, 1/2” 5B4108
2 Thimble PF-44, galv. iron, grooved for 1/2” guy wire 5B18044
1 Pulley, for gin pole 6Q8806.1
1 Pole, wood 35-foot, P4-30543
class 6
1445. GROUND SYSTEM TOR RADIO TOWERS -FIXED PLANT:
£. Description. (1) A ground system to be used with the 90 or 180-foot vertical radiator may consist of 36 radials spaced 10 degrees apart extending outward from a common terminal at the base of the tower for at least 350 feet with each radial buried in a trench to a depth of 6 to 8 inches. Each radial ground wire should consist of copper or copperweld conductor not smaller than #12 B & S gauge, soldered at its free end to a ground rod driven to a depth of six feet. When rhe 180-foot vertical radiator is used where extensive snow storms or poor conducting soils are found, the ground screen described below may be furnished in addition to the ground system just outlined. If snow drifts do not form on the antenna site, the ground screen may be placed on the earth. If drifting occurs on the installation site, the ground screen should be suspended so as to be above the snow drifts.
499
Par.1445-1446
(2) A ground screen support may be constructed as follows: The 4 x 4’s furnished should be erected on 12-foot centers, connected at their tops with 2 x 6’s to form a support frame for the screen mesh at the required height above the earth. The screen mesh should be stapled on top of this supporting frame and each adjacent sheet bonded together using No. 12 BWG wire (stock No. 1A812). Each joint should be soldered. The suspended ground screen should be connected to the buried ground system at the tower base and points on the outer edge of the screen should also be connected directly to the ground wire radial immediately beneath. A connection from the ground system to the antenna tuning house should be made at the tower base. This connection should be short and have a very low resistance. One hundred forty sheets of Econo mesh will cover an area of 96 feet x 96 feet with two sheets to spare.
b. Material List.
Quantity Name Stock No.
The following items are used to construct the ground system described in £ (1) of this paragraph.
12,000 ft. Copperweld wire, .080”, #12 gauge 1A153
2,640 ft. Wire, #12 BWG, GI (1/2 mile coil) 1A812
40 ea. Ground Rod GP-26 5B4426
5 gal. Paint, black, ready mixed 6G1419
3 gal. Preservative, wood 6G1624
1 keg Nails, 20 d, 100 lbs. 6L1420
10 can Paste, soldering 2 oz. can 6N4102
10 lbs. Solder M-30 6N7530
The following items are used to construct the ground screen described in _a (2) of this paragraph.
140 shts. Econo mesh, United 6Z6988
States Gypsum Co., style 3-9-175, mesh size 3x8, gauge 9, strand 5/32 x 9/64, width 6 ft., length 12 ft. galvanized or equal
100 pc. Lumber, 4” x 4” x 12’, #1 grade pine or equal
250 pc. Lumber, 2” z 6” x 12”, #1 grade pine, or equal
50 lbs. Staples, 1-1/2” galvanized
1446. TOWER LIGHTING EQUIPMENT - FIXED PLANT.
a. Transformers. (1) DESCRIPTION. Special transformers for lighting vertical radiator towers have been procured. These transformers are for the purpose of isolating the power source from the RF tower circuits. The transformers consist basically of one circular secondary winding connected to the tower circuit thus placing this winding assembly at the RF potential of the tower. The primary, circular in design, is completely isolated from the secondary and the entire assembly is immersed in oil. Two types are available; one is designed for a peak RF voltage of 45 KV and one for 90 KV, under wet conditions. The transformers are
designed for either 110 or 220-volt 60-cycle 1-phase input and have a tapped secondary for various loads. The transformers are intended for mounting on the tower base. Material for mounting transformers is available in set assembly 57A, drawing ES-D-32577. The transformer is equipped witn a lightning gap and rain shield.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS.
Name
Type I Transformer, Tower lighting unit, in accordance with Spec. 171-229, 90 KV RF insulation.
Type II Transformer, Tower lighting unit, in accordance with Spec. 171-229, 45 KV RF insulation
As required, Plant Set Assembly 57A, material for mounting transformer (Dwg. ES-D-32577)
Stock No.
3H5600A25
3H5600A25-1
b. Lighting Kits. (1) DESCRIPTION. Four types of lighting kits have been procured for poles and can be adapted for towers. All kits have conduit, con-dulets, fixtures, connector blocks, wire, lamps, clamps, etc. and are complete for mounting the fixtures on the pole or tower. Three of the kits are for 90-foot poles and the other one is for a 60-foot pole. Two of the 90-foot pole kits have red prismatic fixtures as recommended by CAA, and the others have red vapor proof obstruction lights. Miscellaneous fixtures, blocks, straps and other material for pole or tower lighting are also available.
(2) STOCK NUMBERS.
Name Stock No .
Pole Lighting Kit, complete 6Z6934-60 with 80 feet of conduit,
4 sets of lamps and equipment for lighting a 60-foot pole. Includes 200 feet of 2-conductor underground cable.
As above, but for 90-foot 6Z6934-90 pole.
Pole Lighting Kit, complete with 80 feet of conduit, fixtures, lamps and equipment for lighting a 90-foot pole. Includes 85 feet of 2-conductor underground cable (procured on order 1460-Ph-44) Lighting Kit, for lighting 90-foot pole or tower, complete with all fixtures, clamps, conduits, etc. Meets new AN Specifications.
Does not include underground cable. (Ordered on PR-44-3564, Drawing ES-C-32578)
500
A-B
Paragraph
INDEX
A
tion
AB-38/CR Mast, Antenna .................
Adapter Plug, U-4/GT . . . . *
ADW-BM-100, Observing Equipment Aerial Cable Lines - Materials for Construe AH-, Anchors and Anchor Rods
Aircraft Accessories Corp., Radio Transmitter 500B Air Warning Service Facilities .
Airways Radio, AACS .... Alignment Equipment, ME-73 . Alignment Indicator, 1-210 . Amertype Recordgraph Co., Amplifier, (W.E.Co. 108A) AN/CRC-3 -----AN/FGC-1 AN/FRR-3 AN/GRR-2 AN/GRR-3 AN/TGC-1 AN/TRA-1 AN/TRA-2 an/trc-i, AN/TRC-2 AN/TRC-7 AN/TRC-8, 11, 12 . . . . J
AN/lTQ-1 Operations Center . AN/TXC-1 Page Facsimile Set
AN/VRC-1 Radio Set .................
AN/VRC-3 Radio Set .................
Analyzer, 1-153, etc. . .
ANB-H-1 Receiver, Telephone . .
ANB-M-C1 Microphone .... Antennas and Associated Equipment . Accessories ........................
Coaxial Cables for Transmission
Model A, Commando
and 3A. Radio Sets .... Radioteletype Terminal Equipment Radio Receiver - Diversity . Radio Receiver (National) .
Radio Receiver (Hallicrafters) Teletypewriter Set Radio Set (Amplifier) .
Remote Control Equipment 3, 4...........................
. 1408 1027, 1028 1423, 1425
1436 406
432, 433 624
607-609, 624 . 1426, 1429 . 501-504
1420, 1426-1431
1308, 1317,
432 1317, 1410, 1031, 1427, 1427, 1427, 1026, 1408, 1415, 1408, 1410, 1408, 1408, 503,
1104-1106
1408, 1408, 1317,
307
1320
408
1309 1318
, 433 1318 1413 1032 1430 1430 1430 1028 1410 1416 1410 1412 1412 1410 1320
Coupling Units, Antenna Kits, Antenna, Fixed Plant Kits, Antenna, Tactical Masts and Mast Sections . Towers ..... Tuning Unit (BC-) .
Typical Antenna - Sketches Vehicular .................
Vertical Radiators
Wire.......................
Army Publications .... AS- Antenna Kits Attenuator (W.E.Co. 5A)
Automatic Electric Co. Switchboard Automatic Morse .... AWS Information Centers
Lines
B
1404
1414 1411 1318
308
304 1432 1440 1435 1442
1441 1433 1436-1439 1443-1445
1408 1428 1439
1443 1434
103 1433
1318
423-427
1026, 1028 501-504
1408
1408
1438
1317
BA- Dry Batteries......................................................... 1225, 1226
Batteries, Dry .............................................. - . 1220, 1225-1227
Commercial Equivalents ................................................... 1227
Types............................................................ 1225, 1226
Batteries, Lead Storage ............................................. 1219, 1221-1224
Electrolyte................................................................1223
Terminal Adapter ......................................................... 1224
Types .....................................................................1221
501
B (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
B-C
BB- Storage Batteries ...............................
BC-148 to BC-1335 Tactical Radio Set Components
BC-315 to BC-1100 Fixed Plant Transmitting Equipment
BC-779, 794 Fixed Plant Radio Receiving Equipment
BC-908-B, 918-B Facsimile Set Components
BC-1052 Analyzer ....................................
RD-9 to BD-120 Telephone Switchboards . . . .
BD-90, 98, 132 Power Panels ......
BD-100 Telegraph Switchboard ......
BE-70 to BE-72 Cabinets (Test).......................
BE-77-( ) Line Unit (Teletypewriter) . . . .
Bias Meter, 1-97 . . . ... . .
Blaw Knox Towers ....................................
Boehme Equipment ....................................
Bunnell 6 KW Radio Amplifying Equipment
................. 1221, 1222 ................. . 1408 . . 1422, 1424, 1426, 1429 ................. 1423, 1425 .................1105 ................. 1317, 1318 ................. 410-414 .................410 ................. 1006, 1010 • 410, 429, 430, 1317, 1318 ................. 1006, 1010 ................. 1317, 1318 .................1443 ................. 1026, 1028
................. 1422, 1424
c
C-114—A Loading Coil ....................
C-144-A, etc. Coil Set for SCR-177-A .
C-144-A to C-152-A Coil Set for SCR-188 C-161 Repeating Coil (Simplex) .
Cabinet, Apparatus, Telephone
Cable:............................... •
Aerial - Materials for Construction Assemblies and Stubs .... Equipment for European Field International Lead-covered Entrance
Loading, European Systems
Loading, United States Systems
Maintenance, Tool and Test Equipment Protectors .........................
Rubber-covered > .
Spiral-Four (CC-358) ....
Submarine ..........................
United States ......................
Placing and Removing
and Intermediate
Carrier Systems - Illustrative Equipment Problems:
Interconnection of Tactical and Fixed Plant Telegra
Open Wire Carrier System, Tactical Open Wire Fixed Plant System ..............
Carrier Telegraph Equipment: ...................
Fixed Plant ..............................
Maintenance, Tool and Test Equipment
Packaged Carrier Equipment ................
Single-Sideband ..................... ...
Tactical ..............................
Terminal, TH-l/TCC-1 (S + DX) ............
Terminal Set, TC-22 ......................
Terminals, CF-2-A & B and CF-6-A ....
Carrier Telephone Equipment: ...................
C Carrier and H Carrier ...................
Converter, CF-4-( ) ......................
Filter,Line ..............................
Fixed Plant (see ’’Packaged Telephone Equipment”)
Hybrid, CF-7 .........
Maintenance, Tool and Test Equipment
Packaged Equipment ........................
Repeater ..................................
Ringing Equipment . . . ................
Spiral-Four and Open Wire Systems ....
Terminal, CF-l-A ..........................
Ph
908
614 1408 1408 906, 910 920, 921
624
614, 615, 639 635
702-707
. 614
. 705
618-623
615 7 07 638 710
. . 702-708
. 621-623, 709
. 637-640, 1320
. . 808-810
. 614, 615, 639
. 612, 614-617
641-643, 712-717 . . 708-710
215-217
209-211
212-214
. 1025, 1028
. . . 1320
1025, 1028-1030
1025, 1422, 1425 . 1007, 1010
1025 . 1009, 1011 . 1007, 1010
910
909
917,
910,
919, 921
908, 910
919, 921
908, 910 . 1320
917-925
919, 921
918, 921
911-913
908,910
502
C-E
C (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
Catalog, Signal Supply .... CO-344 Cable Stub ..... CC-345 Cable Assembly ....
CC-355-A Cable Assembly
CC-356 Cable Stub ..................
CC-358 Cable Assembly ....
CC-368 Cable, Assembly .... CCIF Standard Loading Systems
CE-11-( ) Reel Equipment . . .
Central Office Sets, Telephone,Tactical
CF-l-A - - -
CF-2-A
CF-3-A
Telephone Terminal (Part of TC-21) and B Telegraph Terminal
Repeater (Part of TC-25-( ))
) Converter (Part of TC-33-( )) .
) Repeater (Part of TC-37-( ))
Telegraph Terminal ....
CF-5-( CF-6-A GF-7 Carrier Hybrid . . . J
Chest Sets .........................
Coaxial Cables for Antenna Transmission Coil, Repeating, C-161 ....
Coll, Loading, C-114-A .... Collins, 18-Q Radio Set (Navy TCS) .
Collins, 32-RA Transmitting Equipment Command Radio Sets, Fixed Plant Commercial Power Services Composite Equipment ....
Construction Materials for: Aerial Cable Lines Fixed Plant Open Wire Lines Spiral-Four Cable . Tactical Open Wire Lines
Construction Time, Outside Plant Converter, CF-4-( ) ....
Converter, Facsimile, CV-2/TX Converter, M-222 .................
Converter Set, TC-33-( ) . . .
Cook Protective Equipment Counterpoise, CP-12, 13 . . .
Cross Reference Table of Maintenance Too Test Equipments and Sets
CV-2/TX Converter, Facsimile
Lines
Is and
. 1304, 1305
. 614, 615, 639
. 614, 615, 639
. 614, 615, 639
. . 614, 63'9
614, 615, 639, 641
• • 614, 639
. . 706, 707
• • • 635
410-414
908, 910 . 1007', 1010
908, 910
. . 908, 910
. . 908, 910
. . 1007, 1010
908, 910
. . . 312
. . . 1435
. . 906, 910
. . . 614
. . 1428, 1431
. 1426, 1429
1418, 1422-1425
. 1228-1232
917, 921
. . . 624
. . . 609
. . . 616
. . 606-608
629
. 908, 910, 1320
. . 1103-1106
. 1217, 1218
909, 910
802, 803, 805, 808
. . . 1440
. . 1319, 1320
. 1103-1106
D
Diversity Telegraph Circuits: Frequency, Single-sideband Space ...............................
DR-4, 5, 7, 8 and 15 Reel (Drum) DXD-1 and 4 (Teletype Corp) Test Sets
1025, 1422-1425
1027, 1028, 1031, 1423, 1427, 1430 ..........................635 .........................1317, 1318
E
Earthborer and Pole Setter (Model HD) on K-44 .
EE-8-( ) Telephone .............................
EE-65 Test Set .......................... . .
EE-89-A Telephone Repeater .....................
EE-91 to EE-93 Telephone Boxes..................
EE-97, 98, 102 Teletypewriter Sets . . . .
EE-99-( ) Telephone Repeater (Part of TC-29-( ))
EE-100-( ) Ringing Equipment ...................
EE-101-( ) Ringing Equipment (Part of TC-24-( ))
. 636, 1320
. 315, 1320
. 1317, 1318
. . 906
315
. 1009, 1011
. 906, 910
907, 910
. 907, 910
503
E (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
EE-105 Telephone Unit.................................................. 908, 910, 921
Electrolyte ....................................................................1223
Engine Driven Generator Sets (see "Generator Sets") .......
Entrance and Intermediate Cable Loading ....................................... 710
European Cable Loading Systems ........................................... 702-707
European Cable Map ........ ......................... 718
Expendable Supplies ..................................................... 1303b, 1308
F
Facsimile Equipment: .... Page and Tape .... Supplies ..........................
Federal, 128AY Radio Receiver .
Federal, FT-300 Transmitter Equipment Field Cables ......
Transmission Data
Field Strength Meter, 1-95
Field Wires & Cables, General . Construction ......................
Rate of Construction .
Transmission Data
Filter Center, TC-15 ....
FM 11-5 Field Manual ....
FM 11-20 Field Manual .... FM-19 Mein Distributing Frame .
FM 21-6 Field Manual ....
FM 24-5 Field Manual ....
FM 24-18 Field Manual .... FM-64 Cross Connecting Frame
FM 101-10 Field Manual
42B1 (W.E.Co.) Carrier Telegraph Frequency Meter Set, 1-129, SCR-211 Frequency Range Chart, Tactical Ground Fuses, Telephone Line .... FX-1, -A and -B Facsimile Transceiver
1102 1106 . 1107 1427, 1430 1426, 1429 . 614
. 615
1317, 1318 611-615
630
630
. 615
502-505, 1320
. 103
. 103
Radio Sets
. 410, 411
. 104
. . 103
. 103
. 410, 411
. 103
1025, 1028 1317, 1318 1405, 1409
. 803
. 1105
G
Generator Sets, Engine Driven Arranged by Capacity Fixed Plant .
Tactical
Groundman’s Equipment, TE-23
Ground Rods: ....
Outside Plant
Radio
Telegraph
Ground System for Radio Towers
. 1202 1208, 1211 1205, 1210-1212 1203, 1207-1209 1311, 1312
* *. 609, 624
1440 1009, 1010 1445
504
H
H-I
Hallicrafters Radio Receivers . Hammarlund Radio Receivers (Super Pro) Handsets ..............................
Hardware, Pole . . . . *
Head and Chest Sets . . ’ * *
Headsets ............................ ’
Heat Coils........................’ *
HS— Headsets.........................*
HS-- Head and Chest Sets .
I
1-23 IE-9 Illustrative Problems: .".....................’ * ’
Interconnection of Tactical and Fixed Plant Telegraph Equipment .........................................
Open Wire Carrier System, Tactical . ’ *
Open Wire Communication System, Fixed Plant . Radio Relay Carrier Communication System Spiral-Four System ...............................
Switchboard, Multiple Fixed Plant - Ordering . IN- Insulators ........................
Information Centers, AWS ..................
Installation Equipments, ME-58 and ME-60 Instruction Books:.........................
Aircraft AN/CRC-3 AN/GRR-2 AN/GRR-3 AN-08-40 BC-339 Transmitting Equipment. Bunnell 6 KW Radio Amplifier . .
Federal 128-AY Radio Receiver General Electric Co. Rectifiers Hallicrafters Radio Receivers. Hammarlund Radio Receivers HO-17 Shelter ........................
Lorain Instruction Form No. 130 Motorola FMTR-25 VM & 50 BW . National Radio Receivers Onan-WSM-13...........................
PE-78 to PE-236 .....................
Press Wireless PW-15-( ) ...
PU-19/FRC Power Unit .................
Recordgraph Commando (Amertype Recordg: SCR-209 .............................
SCR-293, 294, 298 and 694AW .
Shuttig Diversity Mixing Unit 10 KW Transmitting Equipment . _ _ D-99945 Radio Receiver . .
D-156000 2 KW Transmitter .
Radio Receivers Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr. Instr.
to 1-236 to IE-75
Test Sets .
Test Equipment
Accessories Corp. 500B Transmitting and 3A ..........................
(National NC-100-ASC) (Hallicrafter SX-28) Control Set SCR-572-A
W.E.Co W.E.Co
Wilcox CW3 & F3
X-6165 2 X-61684 X-61757 X-61759 X-61778
X-61796 X-61806 X-63634 X-63641 X-63653
W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co W.E.Co
Book, Book, Book, Book, Book, Book, Book, Book, Book, Book,
Equipment
raph Co
Paragraph
. 1427, 1430
. 1427, 1430
• . . . 313
606-609, 616 ’ 624
. 311
. 310
. 804
. 310
. 311
1317, 1318
1314, 1315
. 215-217
. 209-211
. 212-214
. 206-208
. 203-205
. 218-221 06-609, 1440
. 501-504 1308, 1309
Portable Information Center . Portable Filter Center
42B1 Carrier Telegraph Equipment Single-sideband Carrier Telegraph Test Set Test Set 67B Test Test Set VF Ringer Package . .
VF Carrier Telegraph Package
1-181 1-49
Set I-193-A
. 1426
1408 . 1427
. 1427
503 1422 . 1422
. 1427
1214 1427, 1430 1427, 1430
1408 1217
. 1428
. 1427
1212 . 1212
1422 . 1212
432, 433 1408
. 1408
1423 1422
. 1423
. 1422
. 1427
. 503
503 . 1025
1025 . 1317
. 1317
917, 1317 . 1317
917, 918
1025
505
I-K
I (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
X-66038 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, DC Telegraph Repeater Package .... 1024
X-66039 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, DC Regenerative Repeater Package . . . 1024
X-66147 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Carrier Telegraph Package .... 1025
X-66150 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Line Terminating and Composite
Package...........................................................917, 919
X-66152 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 133A1 Teletypewriter Tables, etc. . . . 1027
X-66154 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 132A2 Teletypewriter Subscriber Set, etc. ............................................................. 1027
X—66157 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Vacuum Tube Tester, Hickok .... 1317
X-66208 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Toll Line Observing Equipment .... 432
X-66209 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Multi-Line Observing Equipment . . . 432
X-66226 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 32A Transmission Measuring Set . . . 1317
X-66227 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 51A Oscillator ............................... 1317
X-66228 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, ”C” Carrier Telephone Package .... 919
X-66229 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, "C” Carrier Telephone Package .... 919
X-66230 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Telephone Repeater Package .... 917
X-66231 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Telephone Repeater Package .... 917
X-66232 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 19C Oscillator ............................... 1317
X-66233 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 13A Transmission Measuring Set . . . 1317
X-66234 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 5A Attenuator ................................ 1317
X-66247 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Line Terminating and Simplex Package . . 917
X-66251 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Mobile Toll Test Unit, Packaged . . . 429
X-66259 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Test and Control Board Package . . . 429
X-66260 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Volt-Ohm-Milliammeter &, Volt-Ohmmeter . 917, 1317
X-66307 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Tools for Packaged Equipment .... 1311
X-66329 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 5 Line Observing Cabinet ..................... 432
X-66330 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Repeater and Control Unit for
132A2 Tty. Set............................................................1027
X-66355 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Two-Channel Start-Stop Transmitter-Distributor ................................................ 1027
X-66413 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Tool Equipment TE-123 ........................ 1311
X-66464 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Vacuum Tube Tester, Hickok (1-171) . . 1317
X-66520 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Telegraph Switchboard 3B-6/GG .... 1024
X-66578 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Single-sideband Carrier Telegraph . . . 1025
X-66616 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Telegraph Terminal CF-6-( ) (Carrier) . . 1007
Instruction Manuals (Teletype Corp.) ............................... 1008, 1026, 1317
Instruments, Test ...................................................... 1317, 1318
Insulators......................................................... 606-609, 1440
International Telephone Cable Loading Systems ............................... 702-707
Interrupters ........................................................... 1217, 1218
J
Jef f er son-Travis 350A Radio Set .................................... 1428, 1431
K
K-36, 37 Trailers .............................................................636
K-38 Trailer..............................................................636, 638
K-43 and 44-B Trucks...........................................................636
K-55 Trailer.................................................................
Kellogg Switchboards ... ........................ ... 418-427
Kohler 1M21A Engine Generator Set .......................... • 1210-1212
506
L-N
!
L
Paragraph
LC-1 to LC-65 Line Construction Tools and Equipment ...... 635, 637-640
LC—61 Plow . ................ 635
Lead-covered Cables............................* , * ’ ’ * 619
Construction Time.................................’ * ’ 629
Splicers Tool Equipment .................................... 638
Splicing Materials ......................................... 627
Transmission Data............................................623
VF Loading Equipment ....................................... 620
Lead Sleeves.................................................. 625, 626
Line Relays, Telegraph ......................................... 1026
Line Unit, BE-77 ...................................... 1006, 1010, 1320
Lineman’s Equipment, TE-21 ............................ 637, 1311, 1312
Link (Fred M.) Radio Sets................................... 1428, 1431
Loading Equipment, VF, for Lead-covered Cables .............. 620-622
Loading, Storm .................................................. 603
Loading Systems: ...................................................
COIF Standard........................................... 706, 707
European and International ............................. 702-707
United States .......................................... 708-710
Loop Lengths for Various Switchboard Limits ... ................. 409
Loudspeakers...................t..............................316. 317
LS-1 to LS-11.....................................................317
M
M409 ASF Manual - Logistical Planning and Reference Data ..... 103 M-222 Converter................................................1217, 1218 Maintenance Cross Reference Table ............................. 1320 Maintenance Equipments and Kits ............................... 1306, 1308, 1309 Maintenance Parts - Supply Plan ............................... 1303 Maintenance Supply ............................................ 1301 Maintenance System ............................................ 1302 Masts, Radio Antenna (Also see ’’Towers”)...................... 1436-1439 MC-549 ........................................................ 1433d ME-4 to ME-114 Maintenance Equipments and Kits ................ 1308, 1307 Messenger, Wire - Stock Numbers and Physical Data..............604 Meters, Test...................................................1317, 1318 Microphones (Telephone Transmitters) .......................... 302-305 Military Characteristic Range ................................. 1408 MK- Maintenance Equipments .................................... 1308, 1309 Mobile Operations Center, AWS .................................................................. 503, 504 Models 15 and 19 (Teletype Corp.) Teletypewriter Sets .... 1026, 1028 Monitoring Facilities, Telephone .............................. 405, 431-433 Motorola Radio Sets ........................................... 1428, 1431 MS-18 to MS-118 Mast Sections.................................. 1436-1439 Multimeter.....................................................1317, 1318 MX-141/TRC-1 .................................................. 1433e
N
National Radio Receivers ............................................... 1427, 1430
Neutral Line Transmission, Telegraph ........................................ 1012
North Electric Switchboard ............................................... 423-427
507
O
0-P
Paragraph
0-5/FR, Oscillator Exciter (Press Wireless FS12A) ....................... 1027, 1028
Observing Facilities, Telephone ....................................... 405, 431-433
Onan W3M-13 Engine Generator Set ........................................ 1210-1212
132A1, 133A1, 133A2 (W.E.Co.) Teletypewriter Sets ....................... 1027, 1028
Open Wire Lines: ...................................................................
Construction Time..........................................................629
Fixed Plant - Materials for Construction ................................. 609
Shipping Data..............................................................610
Tactical - Materials for Construction ................................ 606-608
Stock Nos. and Physical Data....................................604
Transmission Data...............................................605
Open Wire Line System Comparisons.......................................... 224-229
Operations Center, AWS.................................................... 503, 504
Oscillators, Test ....................................................... 1317, 1318
Oscillator Exciter, 0-5/FR ......................................... 1027, 1028
Outside Plant Construction Time ............................................... 629
P
P-11 to P-23 Headsets . 310
PA-8098 (Part of AN/CRC-3) Radio Receiver . . . . • . 1408
PA-8212 (Part of AN/CRC-3) Transmitter . . . . • 1408
PA-8244 (Part of AN/CRC-3A) Transmitter . . . . • . 1408
PA-8245 (Part of AN/CRC-3A) Radio Receiver 1408
Packaged Telegraph Equipment 1024 , 1025, 1028-1030
Packaged Telephone Equipment:
Cabinets, Apparatus • • . . 920
Carrier, C and H • • . . 919
Ringers • • • . 918
Selection of • . 922-925
Stock Nos. and Logistical Data . 921
Tool and Test Equipment 1311-1318
Voice Frequency - Description . 917
Pan American Airways:
4WTFA 1426, 1429
12-ACX-2 Transmitter 1426, 1429
12-GLX-2 Transmitter • 1426, 1429
RFA-50 Amplifier • • 1426, 1429
PE-43-( ) to PE-236 Engine Generator Set . . . . • • • 1207-1212
Perforators 1008, 1010, 1320
PF- , Pole Fixtures (Includes Hardware) . . . . Photographs • • 606-60S , 616, 624 . 102b
Plow, Cable, LU-61 • . . 635
Polarential Line Transmission (Telegraph) . . . . • 1014
Pole Derrick (LM) on Truck K-43 • 636, 1320
Poles, Telephone 631-633
Portable Filter Center, AWS • • 503, 504
Power Amplifier, BG-340 . • • 1426, 1429
Power Distribution Data • • 1230-1232
Power Equipment • • • . 1201
Power Equipment Co. PEC-161, Rectifier . . . . • • • 1214, 1215
Power Ringing Units • • 1216, 1218
Power Services, Commercial ....»••
Power Supply Units (PE—) 1424, ’1426, 1207-1212
Press Wireless Co. Radio Transmitting Equipment 1422, 1429, 1430
Problems (see:"Illustrative Problems") . . . . Protection: Cable . • » • • .* 806-810
Main Frame . . . Switchboard Telephone • • • • • • • • • .811, 812 806, 807 805- 3 07 802
Protector Blocks • • 1210,1212 1207-1209
PU-19/FRC Engine Generator Set PU-8/TTQ-1 Engine Generator Set • • • •
508
Q
Q-R
Paragraph
Quadded Cable Loading Units
709
R
R-2 to R-30 Receivers, Telephone............................................ 307, 308
RA-36 to RA-91 Rectifiers ................................................ 1214, 1215
Radiators (Antennas)............................................... 1438, 1439, 1443
Radio Equipment.................................................................1401
Combined Transmitting and Receiving ..................................... 1428
Fixed Plant ......................................................... 1417-1431
Aircraft Accessories Corp.................................... 1426, 1429
Army Airways Communication Service ........................ 1420, 1426-1431
Bunnell, J. H. Co............................................ 1422, 1424
Collins Radio Co.................................
Command
1426, 1428, 1429, 1431 . 1418, 1422-1425
Federal Telephone and Radio Corp................... 1426, 1427,
Hallicrafters, Inc. .........................................
Hammarlund Mfg. Co. Inc......................................
Jefferson-Travis Radio Electric Corp ........................
Link (Fred M.) Co............................................
Motorola (Galvin Mfg. Co.) ..................................
National Co., Inc............................................
Pan American Airways, Inc....................................
Press Wireless, Inc............................ 1422,1424, 1426,
Radio Teletype Terminal, AN/FGC-1 ...........................
Shuttig & Co.................................................
Single-sideband .............................................
Temco .......................................................
1429, 1427, 1427,
1428, 1428,
1428, 1427,
1426, 1429, 1027,
1423,
1422-1426,
1430
1430
1430
1431
1431
1431
1430
1429
1430
1028
1425
1425
1429
10 KW Transmitting Equipment ................................... 1022, 1024
Western Electric Co........................................ 1422-1426, 1429
Wilcox Electric Co. ................................ 1426, 1427, 1429, 1430
Maintenance Equipment ........................................ 1308, 1309, 1408
Maintenance, Tool and Test, Cross Reference Table ..................... . 1320
Photographs...............................................................1402
Receivers and Receiving Equipment . . 1408,1423,1425,1427,1428,1430,1431
Sets: ...............................................
Air Transportable.............................1413
Ground, Mobile .............................. 1414
Ground, Transportable ....................... 1410
Pack..........................................1412
Remote Control Equipment ................ 1415, 1416
Tactical ....•••••••• 1404, 1408—1416
Vehicular.....................................1411
Test Sets ...............................
Tool and Test Equipments . . . .
Transmitters and Transmitting Equipment Radio Frequency Range Chart . . . .
Radio Relay Carrier Communication System:
Comparison with Wire Systems Illustrative Equipment Problem . Radio Teletype Terminal - Diagram Range, Military Characteristic . . . .
RC-47, 261, 289, 290 Remote Control Equipment RC-52 Transmitting Equipment .
RG-58, 120 Facsimile Equipment . . . .
RC-63, 291, 293 Antenna Equipment
RC-256, 257 Radio Sets .......................
Receivers, Telephone .........................
Receiving Equipment, Radio ...................
Recording Facilities, Telephone . . . .
Rectifiers (RA-)..............................
Reel Units (RL--) .........................
Regenerative Repeater ........................
..................... 1317, 1318
1311, 1312, 1314, 1315
1408,1422,1424,1426,1428,1429,1431 ..................... 1405, 1409
’ ’ .’ ’. 223-226
........................... 206-208
..................... 1031, 1032 .....................1408
..................... 1415, 1416
..................... 1426, 1429
..................... 1102-1106 .....................1433 ..................... 1408, 1410
................. 302, 306-308, 310
1408,1423,1425,1427,1428,1430,1431 ..................... 405, 431-433 ..................... 1213-1215 ..................... 635, 1320 ..................... 1024, 1028
700898 0—46-----34
509
R (Cont’d.)
R-S
Paragraph
Reliable Electric Co. Protective Equipment ...................... 802, 803, 805, 808
Remote Control Equipment .......................................... 1407 1415 1416
Repair Parts Kits, ME-111 to ME-114 ................................... ’ 1308* 1309
Repeater: ......................................................................
Sets TC- 909, 910, 1009, 1011, 1320
Telegraph, DC . . 1006, 1009-1011, 1320
Telegraph, Regenerative .... . . . 1024,1028, 1320
Telephone, Carrier . 908-910, 919, 921, 1320
Telephone Packaged . . 917, 919, 921, 1320
Telephone, VF 906, 910, 921, 1320
Reperforators 1008-1010, 1320
RG-5/U to RG-59/U Coaxial Cable RF Transmission Lines ****** 1435
Ringer Set, TC-24 .909, 910, 1320
Ringing Equipment, Telephone, Package 918, 1320
Ringing Equipment, Telephone, VF . . . • • • . 907, 910, 918,'921, 1320
Ringing Units, Power . . . . 1216- •1218
RL-16 to RL-45 Reel Carts, Units, Axles, etc. 635
RM-7 to RM-29 Remote Control Units • • 1415, 1416
Rubber Insulated Cables: .....................................................
Construction Time..........................................................629
Transmission Data..........................................................615
Vulcanizing Equipment .................................................... 639
Rubber Insulated Wires ........................................................ 615
RY-30 (Teletype Corp) Line Relay...............................................1026
s
S + DX (TH-l/TCC-1) Telegraph Terminal ....
SB-5-( )/PT Telephone Switchboard ...................
SB-6-( )/GG Telegraph Switchboard....................
SB 11-6 Supply Bulletin, ASF ........................
SCR-131 to SCR-828 Tactical Radio Sets ....
SCR-211 Frequency Meter Set .........................
SCR-281 Radio Transmitter ...........................
SCR-572-A Control Set................................
SCS-3 Control Net System ............................
SCS-5 Information Center System .....................
Shuttig Diversity Radio Receiver Mixing Unit SIG 1 to SIG 10 ................................
Signal Generators, 1-72,etc. ........................
Signal Supply Catalog .......................... ...
Simplex Coil ........................................
Simplex Equipment ...................................
Single-Sideband, VF Carrier Telegraph ....
Sleeves . ... ........................
Soldering Equipment, TE-26 .......
Spare Parts Kit, MK-ll/TRA-1 ......
Speech Plus Duplex (TH-l/TCC-1) .....................
Spiral-Four Cable Lines: ................ • •
Construction Time .............................
Materials for Construction ....................
Messenger .....................................
Shipping Data .................................
Transmission Data . . • • • • • •
Spiral-Four Equipment ( see "Telephone Line Transmission and"Telegraph Equipment") ...........................
Spiral Four System: .................................
Comparison with Radio and Open Wire . .
Illustrative Problem .......
Splicers* Tool Equipment for Lead-covered Cable .
Splicing Materials for Lead-covered Cable
Station Line Lengths for Various Switchboard Limits .
Stromberg-Carlson Switchboards ......
Equi pment
1025, 1028 410-414
1024, 1028 1220, 1225, 1226
1408, 1410-1414 1317, 1318
. 1422, 1424
. . 503, 504
502 503, 504, 1320
. 1423, 1425
. 1305
. 1317, 1318
. 1304, 1305
. . 906, 910
. . 917, 921
1025, 1422-1425 . . 625, 626
. . 1311,1312
. 1308, 1309
. 1025, 1028
629
. . . 616
612
. 614, 617
. . . 615
223-228 203-205 . 638
625-627 . 409
418-427
510
S-T
S (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
Subcycle Ringer, Model S (Lorain Products Corp.) . Submarine Cables ...........................................
Baltic and North Seas .................................
British Isles .........................................
Pacific Ocean .........................................
Telegraph .............................................
Types.............................................. .
Super Pro Radio Receiver (Hammarlund) ......................
Supply Catalog,Signal ......................................
Supply Plan for Maintenance Parts ..........................
Survey Tools and Materials .................................
Switchboard, Multiple, Fixed Plant Illustrative Equipment .
Problem ...............................................
. 1217, 1218
641-643, 711-718 . . 712, 714
712, 713, 715, 716 . 715 . 717
. . 712, 715
. . 1427, 1430
. 1304, 1305
1303 . 640
’ 218-221
Switchboards, Telegraph ...............................
Fixed Plant................................ 1024, 1028
Tactical .................................. 1006, 1010
Switchboards, Telephone: ..............................
Common Battery and Magneto, Combined ....... 408, 410
Description..............................411, 419, 424
Equipment Data ................... 410, 418, 423
Fixed Plant .................................. 415-427
General ................................. . 401-405
Limits vs Station Line Lengths.....................409
Magneto ................................ 407, 410
Multiple Position ....................... 417, 423-427
Protection ............ 806, 807, 811, 812
Single Position ....................... 416, 418-422
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data........ 414, 422, 427
Tactical ................ 406-414
Tool, Test and Maintenance Equipment ......... 1320
Transmission Losses.............................................. 413, 421, 426
Working Limits . ........................ 403, 409, 412, 420, 425
System Comparisons, Radio and Wire ........................................ 222-229
3 Technical Bulletin, Wire W-143
6 Technical Bulletin, Dry Battery Life .
14 Technical Bulletin, Dry Battery Testing
SIG SIG
SIG X*± XCU1XXXXVCLX UUXXCU4.U, UX J 1JQ SIG 61 Technical Bulletin, U-4/GT SIG 11-360-1 Technical Bulletin, RL-26 11-362-2 Technical Bulletin, RL-31 Telephone Central Office Sets
67 Technical Bulletin, Field Cables Under Water
T-4/FRC, T-5/FRC ..................
T-17 to T-50 Microphones
TA-3/FT Ringer Package, Telephone, VF TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TC-
TC-3 Telegraph Central Office Set ..........................
TC-16, 17 Reperforator Teletypewriter Sets. • •
TC-18, 19 Repeater Sets, Telegraph. ......
TC-21 Telephone Terminal Set ........
TC-22 Telegraph Terminal Set, Carrier ......................
TC-23, 29, 37 Repeater Sets, Telephone. . » • • •
TC-24 Ringer Set .... .........................
TC-33 Converter Set..............................
TC-15 Filter Center ........................................
TD-1 to TD-5 Chest Sets ....................................
TE-5 to TE-124 Tool Equipment ..............................
Technical Manuals (see "TM”)
Engineering References ...............................
Requisitioning .... ....................
Telegraph Circuits, DC Loop Connections of CF-2-B - Diagrams Telegraph Circuits, Interconnection of Fixed Plant and
Tactical Equipment ......................................
1426, 1429
304, 305
918, 921 . 614
1220
. 1220
. . 406
. 641
. . 635
. 635
410, 414 1009, 1011 1009, 1011 1009, 1011
909, 910 1009, 1011
909, 910
909, 910
909, 910
503, 504
1311/1312
* .* 104
. 103 1018, 1019
. 215-217
511
T
T (Coat’d,)
Paragraph
Telegraph Equipment:..................
Carrier ........................
DC, Wire .......................
Fixed Plant ....................
Packaged .......................
Repeaters ......................
Single-Sideband . . . .
Switchboards ...................
Tactical .......................
Terminal, TH-l/TCC-1 (S + DX) .
1007,
. 1006,'1016,
*1006,
1010, 1025, 1028
1006, 1010, 1024 . 1024-1028
1024, 1025, 1028
1011, 1024, 1028
1025, 1422-1425
1010, 1024, 1028
1006, 1010 . 1025
Tool, Test and Maintenance Equipments . .......................... 1308-1320
Voice Frequency..................................................... 1025, 1028
Telegraph Sets ................................................... 1006, 1010, 1011
Telephone....................................................... 314, 315, 906, 910
Telephone Centrals ............................................................ 401
Telephone Central Office Sets .............................. 410-414, 909-913, 1320
Telephone Line Transmission Equipment: ..........................................
Carrier - Description................................................ 908, 919
Summary of Equipment for Carrier Systems ................... 911-913
Repeaters............................................................ 906, 910
Requirements per Circuit ................................................ 923
Requirements per Office ................................................. 924
Selection of Equipment ............................................... 922-925
Sets.................................................................. 909, 910
Stock Numbers..........................................................910, 921
Tool, Test and Maintenance Equipments ......................... 1308-1318, 1320
Use of Equipment...........................................................925
Voice Frequency - Description......................................... 906, 917
Telephone Sets ........................................................ 309-313, 909
Telephone Station Equipment ................................................... 301
Telephone Switchboards (see "Switchboards, Telephone") .......
Telephone System Comparisons, Radio vs Wire ........ 222-229
Telering ................................................................ 1217, 1218
Teletypewriter Circuits, Tactical, Typical Layouts ...................... 1012-1019
Teletypewriter Equipment: ........................................................
Fixed Plant......................................................... 1026-1028
Tactical ....................................................... 1008, 1010
Tool, Test and Maintenance Equipment ... ................. 1308-1320
Teletypewriter Sets ......................................... 1009, 1011, 1026-1028
Teletypewriter Supplies ...................................................... 1034
Teletypewriter Switching Network - Diagram ........................... 1016, 1017
Temco Radio Transmitting Equipment ................................... 1426, 1429
10 KW Transmitting Equipment.......................................... 1422, 1424
Terminal: Radioteletype .............................................. 1027, 1028
Telegraph .................................. 1007, 1009-1011. 1025, 1028
Terminal Protection ........................................................ 806-810
Test Cabinets and Boards, Telephone Central Office ......................... 428-430
Test Equipments & Packages ........................................... 1314, 1315
Test Equipment Cross Reference Table .......................................... 1320
Test Meter, 1-87 .................................................1317, 1318
Test Oscillators ..................................................... 1317, 1318
Test Sets......................................................... 430, 1316-1318
Test Unit, 1-135, etc.................................................1317, 1318
TG-5 Telegraph Set.................................................... 1006, 1010
TG-7 , 37 Teletypewriters............................................. 1008, 1010
TG-11, 23 Perforators ................................................ 1008, 1010
TG-25, 26, 27 Reperforators .......................................... 1008, 1010
TG-30, 31 Telegraph Repeaters ........................................ 1006, 1010
TH-l/TCC-1 Telegraph Terminal (S + DX) ........................... , 1025, 1028
Time, Construction, Outside Plant .............................................. 629
TM 9-2800 Standard Military Motor Vehicles ..................................... 636
TM 10-1202 Truck, 1-1/2 Ton Chevrolet, 4X4 (LC), Parts List .... 636
TM 10-1203 Truck, 1-1/2 Ton, 4X4, Maintenance Manual .......................... 636
TM 10-1414 Truck, Telephone Body or Earthborer, 1-1/2 Ton, 4X4 . . . 636
TM 11-230 Radio Set SCR-694 1408
TM 11-231 Radio Sets SCR-178 and SCR-179 1408
TM 11-232 Radio Set SCR-177-B ............................................... 1408
512
T
T (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
1415 1408 1408 1408 1408
1415 1408 1422 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408
1207 1207
1317 1317
1308 1317 1317
1415 1317
1415 1308 1317 1317 1308 1317
410 410
410 1415
410
410 1214
410 908
907 1217
429 1317
906 1308 1006 1008 1026 1006 1007 1007 1027 1008 1214 1006
635 1317
635 618
636 614
603, 606-608, 635, 636 612, 614, 616, 617, 635
635
TM 11-233 TM 11-235 TM 11-237 Radio Set SCR-188-A . —B j —C •••••• SCR— 161 • • • • • • . . 1408, • e • • • •
Radio Radio Sets SCR-536-A, Sets SCR-131 and
TM 11-238 Radio Sets SCR-194 and SCR—195 • ••••• • • •
TM 11-239 Radio Set SCR-203 • ••••••• • • •
TM 11-241 Radio Sets SCR-197-B, •C, — Dj — 2y — B • • • • . 1408,
TM 11-242 Radio Set SCR-300-A . • ••••••• • • •
TM 11-244 Radio Set SCR-281-D . • • •
TM 11-245 Radio Set SCR-511-A . • • •
TM 11-250 Radio Set SCR-288 • ••••••• • • •
TM 11-272 Radio Set SCR-210 and SCR—245 • • • • • • • • •
TM 11-273 Radio Set SCR-193 • ••••••• • • •
TM 11-275 Radio Set SCR-284-A . • ••••••• • • •
TM 11-277 Radio Set AN/VRC-1 . • ••••••♦ • • •
TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM
11-280 11-281 11-300
11-302H 11-302K 11-303 .11-304
11-306C 11-306D 11-307 11-308 11-311 11-312 11-315 11-316 11-317 11-318
SCR-299-A
Set
Sets SCR-399-A
-B, -C, -D . and SCR-499-A SCR-211-.A, -B, (PE-HH-43) . (PE-43-HK) .
-H, -J
Radio Radio Frequency Meter Sets Charging Set SCR-169 Charging Set SCR-169 Test Sets I-56-C, -D_
Frequency Meter Sets I-129-A, -B Maintenance Equipment ME-13-C Maintenance Equipment ME-13-D Signal Generator I-72-G, -H Remote Control Unit RM-29- ( ) Test Equipment IE-17-E .
Remote Control Equipment RC-47-( ), Maintenance Equipment ME-40 & ME-53 Alignment Indicator, 1-210 Signal Generator, 1-208 . .
Alignment Equipment ME-73
TM TM 11-321 11-330 Test Set I-56-E . Switchboards BD-71 -72, -72- A, and
TM 11-331 Switchboard BD-14 • • • •
TM 11-332 Telephone Central Office Set TC-4
TM 11-333 Telephones EE-8-A and EE- 8 . •
TM 11-335 Telephone Central Office Set TC-1
TM 11-336 Telephone Central Office Set TC-12
TM 11-338 Telephone Central Office Set TC-10
TM 11-340 Telephone Central Office Set TC-2
-72-B
TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM
11-341 11-342 11-344 11-345
11-346 11-348
11-349 11-351 11-352
11-353 11-354 11-355
11-356 11-357 11-358 11-359 11-360 11-361 11-362 11-363 11-364 11-366 11-368 11-369
11-370
C
1317
1408
1314
RM-1
& RM-1
314
1314,
1408
410
Terminal CF-l-A and Repeater CF-3-A EE-100-A & EE-101-A
Telephone
Ringing Equipments EE-101-T1 Converter M-222 .
Cabinet BE-70 (Wire Chiefs Testing) Test Sets I-61-A, -B, -C
Telephone Repeater Set TC-29-A Maintenance Equipment ME-22 . Telegraph Sets TG-5 and TG-5-A Printers TG-7-A, -B & TG-37-B Telegraph Printer Equipment, Install Telegraph Printer Sets EE-97, Telegraph Terminal CF-2-A (Carrier) Telegraph Terminal CF-2-B (Carrier) Radio Teletype Terminal Eqpt. AN/FGC-Reperforator Transmitter TG-26 Telegraph Central Office Set TC-3 Line Reel Test Reel Pole ____ _
Truck K-44-B & Earth Borer Equipment I® . Vulcanizing Equipments TE-54-A & TE-55-A Tactical Open-Wire Pole Line Construction Spiral-Four Cable.........................
Plow LC-61 (Cable) .......................
Unit BE-77
Units RL-26, -A
Sets EE-65-A through -F
Unit RL-31 .
Line Construction
-A
and Maint.
EE-98, -A, &- EE-102
1 &
an/fgc-ix
1008
1006
1314
513
T
T (Contfd.)
Paragraph
gggggggagggggaaaggggggggggagggggggggggggggggggagggggggggggggggggggg
11-371 Cable Assemblies CC-345 (5 pair) & CC-355-A (10 pair) . . . .
11-374 Tape Facsimile Equipment RC-58-B................................
11-375B Facsimile Equipment RC-120, -A, -B, & AN/TXC-1 . * ’ ’ ’
11-377 Boehme Automatic Keying and Recording Equipment .....................
11-379 Test Set 1-51........................................................
11-430 Storage Batteries ......................................... ........
11-438 Operations Center AN/TTQ-1 ..........................................
11-457 Local Battery Telephone Equipment ..............................
11-458 Common Battery Telephone Equipment ..................................
11-486 Electrical Communication Systems Engineering ........................
11-600 Radio Sets SCR-508, SCR-528 & SCR-538 ...............................
11-601 Radio Sets SCR-808 & SCR-828 .....................................
11-605 Radio Sets SCR-509-A & SCR-510-A ....................................
11-609 Radio Set SCR-298 ...................................................
11-615 Radio Sets SCR-609-A & SCR-610-A . . .........................
11-615A Radio Sets SCR-609-A & SCR-610-A ...................................
11-620 Radio Sets SCR-608-A & SCR-628-A.....................................
11-625 Radio Set SCR-543-A........................................... 1408,
11-630 Radio Set SCR-1506-A.................................................
11-800 Radio Transmitters BC-191-A to -E and AA ............................
11-805 Radio Set SCR-197-C, -D, -F, Transmitting Parts . . . 1408,
11-813 Radio Transmitter BC-61O-E ..........................................
11-820 Radio Transmitter T-4/FRC ...........................................
11-823 Radio Transmitter-Receiver Type 1505 .............................
11-825 Portable Radio Broadcast Transmitter TWT-PB50A ......................
11-827 Transmitting Equipment BC-447 .......................................
11-828 Transmitting Equipment BC-365 ................................ 1422,
11-834 Radio Transmitter PW-981-( ) .....................................
11-850 Radio Receiver BC-312-( ), BC-314-( ), BC-342-( ), BC-344-( ) .
11-859 Radio Set SCR-593-A .................................................
11-866 Radio Receivers BC-779-B, BC-794-B, BC-1004-C ......
11-872 Radio Teletype Receiving Equipment AN/FRR-3 .........................
11-900 Power Units PE-75-C through T ................................ 1207,
11-903 Power Unit PE-77-( ) .............................................
11-904 Power Units PE-95-A, -B, -C ............................ 1207, 1210,
11-904H Power Units PE-95-G and H ................................. .
11-911 Power Units PE-78-G and -H ..........................................
11-912F Power Unit PE-79-F....................................... . . .
11-913 Power Unit PE-214-A .................................................
11-916 Power Unit PE-85 .................................................
11-916M Power Unit PE-85-M..................................................
11-920 Power Unit PE-49-F . . . .................................
11-923 Power Unit PE-99-A through -G . . . . .....................
11-927 Power Unit PE-108-A through -E ......................................
11-932 Power Unit PU-8/TTQ-1 ......................................... 503,
11-935 1-1/2 KVA Kohler Power Unit Model 1M21-A ............................
11-940 Power Unit PE-197 ...................................................
11-941 Power Unit PE-215 ............................................ 1207,
11-942D Power Unit PE-142-D.................................................
11-942E Power Unit PE-142-E.................................................
11-946 Power Unit PE-167 ...................................................
614 1105 1105 1026 1317 1219
503 315
315
103 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1408 1415 1408 1408 1415 1426 1426 1428 1422 1422 1426 1422 1408 1408 1423 1423 1408 1207 1408 1207 1210 1210 1207 1210 1210 1207 1207 1207 1207 1210 1207 1210 1210 1210 1210
11-951 Rectifier RA-36-J, -K, -L.........................................1214
11-951Q Rectifier RA-36-K, -Q & 6RB6B17 1214
11-954 Rectifier RA-43 ............................................. 1214
11-955 Rectifier RA-37 .............................................. 1214
11-957 Rectifier RA-57 .............................................. 1214
11-963 Rectifier RA-83-A..................................................1214
11-1041 Test Set 1-76......................................................1317
11-2001 100-Mile Spiral-Four Carrier System ................................ 614
11-2003 Carrier Hybrid CF-7 ................................................ 908
11-2004 Repeater Set TC-18 1006
11-2005 Repeater Set TC-19 1006
11-2006 Telephone Repeater EE-89-A .................................... 006
11-2008 Converter Set TG-33 & Repeater Set TC-37 ......................... 908
11-2011 Ringer Equipment EE-101-B .................................... 918
11-2014 Telephone Unit EE-105 .............................................. 908
11-2016 Switchboard SB-5( )/PT ............................................. 410
514
T
T (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TT/ TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM
T.O T.O T.O
Test Set TS-26/TSM ....
Test Set 1-49 .................
Line Terminating and Simplex Package VF Ringer Package ....
Packaged Equipment on Open Wire Line C Carrier Telephone Package VF Carrier Telegraph Package H Carrier Telephone Package C Carrier Telephone Package VF Telephone Repeater Package VF Telephone Repeater Package VF Carrier Telegraph Package Test and Control Board Package . Line Terminating and Composite Packa DC Regenerative Repeater Package Mobile Toll Test Unit Package DC Telegraph Repeater Package Telegraph Switchboard SB-6( )/GG Test Set 1-181 .................
Fixed Plant Telephone and Telegraph H Carrier Telephone Package 19C Oscillator .................
51A Oscillator .................
VoIt-Ohm-Ammeter and Voltohmmeter Sound Powered Telephone TP-3 5A Attenuator ..................
13A Transmission Measuring Set . 67B Test Set (TS-190/U) Vacuum Tube Tester - Hickok 32A Transmission Measuring Set . Test Set TS-27/TSM .... Telephone TP-9 .................
Bias Meter I-97-A ..................
Reperforator Teletypewriter Sets TC-. Telegraph Terminal Set AN/TGC-1 Oscillator Exciter 0-5/FR
Telegraph Terminal TH-l/TCC-1 . .
Radio Teletype Code Room &• Signal Ce Test Set TS-2/TG ....
Teletypewriter Set 132A2 Teletypewriter Set 133A1 Teletypewriter Set 133A2 Reel Equipment CE-11 • .
Converter CV-2/TX .... Open-Wire Construction for Fixed Pl Test Sets I-83-A to -K . .
Test Set I-193-A ....
Radio Set AN/TRC-1, -3, -4 .
Amplifier AN/TRA-2 .... Test Set 1-199 ....
Voltohmmeter 1-166 .... Tube Tester 1-177 ....
11-2017 11-2019 11-2020 11-2021 11-2022 11-2023 11-2024 11-2025 11-2026 11-2027 11-2028 11-2029 11-2030 11-2031 11-2032 11-2033 11-2034 11-2035 11-2036 11-2037 11-2038 11-2039 11-2040 11-2042 11-2043 11-2044 11-2045 11-2046 11-2047 11-2048 11-2058 11-2059 11-2200 11-2201 11-2203 11- 2205 11-2206 11-2207 11-2208 11-2210 11-2211 11-2214 11-2250 11-2252 11-2253 11-2506 11-2513 11-2601 11-2603 11-2604 11-2613 11-2627 _
(Technical Order) Army Air Forces AN-08-10-185 Radio Set SCR-624-A AN-08-10-227 Radio Equip RC-256 & AN-08-40, Control Set SCR-572-2 and Test Equipment Package Equipment .....................
Equipment, Cable Splicers Equipment, Line Construction . Equipment, Vulcanizing Set Cross Reference Table
Sets...........................
RC-257
s
ge
16 & TC
nter
ant
17
103
. 1317
1317
. 917 .917, 918 914, 1001
. 919 1025
. . 919
. 919
. 917 . 917 .1025 . 429 917, 919
1024 . 429
1024
. 1024
. 1317
1024, 1025 . 919
1317 1317
917, 1317 . 315
1317 1317
. 917 1317 1317 1317
. 906 1317 1008 1026 1027 1025 1021 1317 1027 1027 1027
. 635 1105 609
1317 314, 1317
1408 1408 1317
1317 1317
Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool_______
Tools and Materials, Line Survey Tower, Antenna . . • •
Tower Lighting Equipment
1408
. 1408
. 503 1311-1318 1310-1312
. 638
. 637
. 639 1320 1311, 1312
. 640 1443-1445 1446
515
T (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
T-W
TP-3 and 6 Telephones .
TP-9 Telephone ••/•••••••a 906. 910
TR (Technical Regulation) 1210-31 Trailers Transmission Data: (SCR-171) 1408 636
Cables, Lead-covered .
Cables, Rubber-covered
Open Wire Lines •••••••••... 605
Wires, Rubber-covered
Transmission Lines, Coaxial Cable
Transmission Measuring Sets ••••••»... 1317, 1318
Transmitter-Distributor, XD-91 1027, 1028, 1032
Transmitters, Radio . • . . 1408,1422.1424.1426.1428.1429.1431
Transmitting Equipment, Radio, AACS 1426, 1428. 1429, 1431
Trucks •••••••••• 636, 1320
TS-2/TG Test Set .... •••••••••• 1317। 1318
TS-9 to TS-15 Handsets. . . 304, 307, 308, 313
TS-26/TSM, 27/TSM Test Sets • ••••••♦•* 1317 , 1318
TS-32/TRC-1 • ••••••••• 1317^ 1318
TS-190/U •••••••••• 1317f 1318
TU-6 to TU-25 Tuning Units ••••••••••a 140 8
TU-3-A to TU-10-A Tuning Units •••••••.... 1408
TU-AA-5 to TU-AA-10 Tuning Units •••••••••<• 1408
Tube Testers, 1-171 etc. •••••••••• 1317, 1318
Tuning Forks, TTY Motor Adjusting • ♦•••••••• 1317 j 1318
Two-Path Polar Line Transmission Telegraph) 1014
255A (W.E.Co.) Line Relay . .
u
U-4/GT Adapter Plug............................................................406
United States Loading Systems ............................................ 708-710
V
Voice Frequency Telegraph .............................................. 1025, 1028
Voice Frequency Telephone Equipment....................................917— 921
Repeaters.............................................................. 906, 917
Ringing Equipment ......................................... 907, 918
Stock Numbers and Logistical Data..................................910, 921
Voltammeters, 1-23, 1-50 ............................................. 1317 1318
Voltohmmeter, 1-107, 1-166 ......................................... 1317, 1318
Volt-ohm-milliammeter .................................................. 1317, 1318
Vulcanizing Equipment, TE-55 ....................................... 639, 1311, 1312
w
W-28, 29, 30, 120, 128, 140, 146, 148 Wire,Antenna Equipment .... 1434
W-50, 108, 110, 130, 143 Wire, covered..................................614 615
W-74, 75, 76, 90, 115, 116, 145, 153, 503 Wire, bare.................... 604^ 605
War Department Publications .............................................. .... 104
WO-321 to WC-339 Submarine Cable % । ..................................643
WC-548 Cable, Rubber-covered .... ................. .... 615
WD-3/TT Assault Wire .................................................... *614, 615
W.E.Co. D-99945 Radio Receiver ........................................ 1423, 1425
W.E.Co. D-151249 Transmitting Equipment ..................... 1422, 1424, 1426, 1429
W.E.Co. Interrupters .................................................... 1217, 1218
W.E.Co. Protective Equipment .............................................. 802-812
516
w-x
W (Cont’d.)
Paragraph
W.E.Co. Switchboards. Telephone .
W.E.Co. X-Specif!cation (see X-) ................
Wilcox Electric Co. Radio Equipment . . . .
Windcharger .......................................
Wire, Antenna .....................................
Wire, Assault, W-130 and WD-3/TT ..................
Wire, Bare (also see "Open Wire Lines”) , Wire, Field .......................................
Wire, Messenger ...................................
Wire, Messenger for Spiral-Four Cable . . . .
Wire, Open (see ’’Open Wire Lines") » »
Wire, Placing and Recovering Equipment
Wire, Rubber-covered: .............................
Construction Time ...........................
Transmission Data ...........................
Wire, Station Length for Various Switchboard Limits Wire Systems,Comparisons . . ................
Wire, Tactical, Long Range, W-143 .................
. 418-427 1426,*1427, 1429,*1430
. . . . 1443
. . . . 1434
.614, 615 601, 604, 605
. . . . 613-615
..................604
..................612
635
* * ’ *629j 630
..................615
..................409
. . . . 227-229
. . . 605, 613-615
X
X-61652 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Portable Information Center .
X-61684 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Portable Filter Center ....
X-61757 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 42B1 Carrier Telegraph Equipment .
X-61759 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Single-sideband Carrier Telegraph
X-61778 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Test Set 1-181 .....................
X-61796 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Test Set 1-49 .....................
X-61806 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 67B Test Set ..........................
X-61819P Terminal Package, Telephone, C Carrier, East ....
X-61819R Terminal Package, Telephone, C Carrier, West ....
X-61819S Repeater Package, Telephone, C Carrier ....................
X-61819T Testing Package, Telephone, C Carrier .....................
X-61820A Ringer Package, Voice Frequency, 4 Circuits ....
X-61820B Ringer Package, Voice Frequency, 2 Circuits ....
X-61821J Repeater Package, Telephone, VF, Single ...................
X-61821K Repeater Package, Telephone, VF, Triple ...................
X-61821L Testing Package, Telephone, VF ............................
X-61822A Telegraph Carrier Package, VF, 6 Channel ..................
X-61822B Telegraph Carrier Package, VF, 6 Channel . . . .
X-61822C Test Package, Telegraph, VF, Carrier ......................
X-61823B Panel, Transfer, C Carrier, Package ......
X-61823C Panel, Line Terminating and Composite,Telephone
X-61823D, E, F Cabinet, Telephone, Apparatus .......................
X-61823H Panel, Line Terminating and Simplex, Telephone
X-61824A Repeater Package, Telegraph, DC ...........................
X-63634 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Test Set I-193-A ......................
X-63641 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Ringer Package .....................
X-63653 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Carrier Telegraph Package .
X-63699A Mobile Test Unit...........................................
X-66031A Repeater Package, Telegraph, Regnerative ..................
X-66031B Test Package, Regenerative Repeater .......................
X-66034A or B Test and Control Board................................
X-66038 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, DC Telegraph Repeater Package
X-66039 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, DC Regenerative Repeater Package .
X-66086 Tool Set, Telephone and Telegraph Installation and Maintenance, Small Office ..........................................
X-66087 Tool Set, Telephone and Telegraph Installation and Maintenance, Medium Office .........................................
X-66088 Tool Set, Telephone and Telegraph Installation and Maintenance, Large Office ..........................................
X-66106A Repeater and Control Unit .................................
X-66147 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Carrier Telegraph Package .
X-66150 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Line Terminating and Composite Package
. 503 . 503
1025
. 1025
. 1317
1317
917, 1317
919, 921
919, 921
919, 921 1314, 1315
918, 921
918, 921
917, 921
917, 921 1314, 1315 1025, 1028 1025, 1028 1314, 1315
919, 921
917, 921
920, 921
917, 921 1024, 1028
1317
917, 918
. 1025
429, 430 1024, 1028 1314, 1315
429, 430 1024 1024
1311, 1312
1311, 1312
1311, 1312 1027, 1028
. 1025
917, 919
517
X (ConVd.)
Paragraph
X-66152 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 133A1 Teletypewriter Tables, etc. .... 1027
X-66154 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 132A2 Teletypewriter Subscriber
Set, etc.......................................................................
X-66157 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Vacuum Tube Tester, Hickok ..................... 1317
X-66208 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Toll Line Observing Equipment ..... 432
X-66209 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Multi-Line Observing Equipment .... 432
X-66217A Terminal Package, Telephone, H Carrier ...................... 919, 921
X-66217B Repeater Package, Telephone, H Carrier ...................... 919, 921
X-66217C Panel, Line Filter and Balancing, Telephone ...................... 919, 921
X-66226 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 32A Transmission Measuring Set .... 1317
X-66227 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, '5.1AX)scillator..................................1317
X-66228 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, ’*0” Carrier Telephone Package ..... 919
X-66229 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, ”0" CarTier Telephone Package ................... 919
X-66230 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF Telephone Repeater Package ................... 917
X-66231 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, VF TeLephone Repeater Package.....................917
X-66232 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 19C Oscillator .................................. 1317
X-66233 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 13A Transmission Measuring Set .... 1317
X-66234 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 5A Attenuator ................................... 1317
X—66247 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Line Terminating and Simplex Package . . . 917
X-66251 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Mobile Toll Test Unit, Package .... 429
X-66259 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Test and Control Board Package .... 429
X-66260 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Volt-Ohm-Milliammeter & Volt-Ohmmeter . . 917, 1317
X-66307 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Tools for Packaged Equipment ................... 1311
X-66329 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, 5 Line Observing Cabinet ........................ 432
X-66330 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Repeater and Control Unit for
132A2 Tty. Set...............................................................1027
X-66355 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Two-Channel Start-Stop Transmitter-Distributor ..................................................................1027
X-66413 W.ElCo. Instr. Book, Tool Equipment TE-123 .......................... 1311
X-66464 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Vacuum Tube Tester, Hickok (1-171). . . . 1317
X-66520 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Telegraph Switchboard SB-6/GG .................. 1024
X—66578 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Single-sideband Carrier Telegraph .... 1025
X-66616 W.E.Co. Instr. Book, Telegraph Terminal CF-6-( ) (Carrier) . . . 1007
XD-91 (Teletype Corp) Transmitter-Distributor ..................... 1027, 1028, 1032
518
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 0—1946
X
I
MTSU LIBRARY
UNT LIBRARIES DENTON TX 78203
■II Hill III
1001896180